۞ سَيَقُولُ ٱلسُّفَهَآءُ مِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ مَا وَلَّىٰهُمْ عَن قِبْلَتِهِمُ ٱلَّتِى كَانُوا۟ عَلَيْهَا ۚ قُل لِّلَّهِ ٱلْمَشْرِقُ وَٱلْمَغْرِبُ ۚ يَهْدِى مَن يَشَآءُ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ
2:116.
تحویل قبلہ کا واقعہ مدینہ منورہ میں ہوا۔ مکہ تک کوئی مشکل نہ تھی۔ آنحضرت صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم ایسی جگہ پر کھڑے ہوتے تھے کہ سامنے کعبہ بھی رہتا تھا اور بیت المقدس بھی۔ یہودی اس پر خوش ہوتے تھے کہ ہمارے قبلہ کی طرف بھی رُخ ہے۔ جب آنحضرت صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم مدینہ میں تشریف لائے تو چند ماہ بعد الہام ہوا کہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرو‘ خواہ بیت المقدس کی طرف سے رخ بدل جائے۔ سو آپ نے ایسا ہی کیا۔ اس پر بیوقوفوں نے اعتراض کیا جس کا جواب ان آیات میں دیا گیا ہے کہ کعبہ اپنی ذات میں کوئی چیز نہیں۔ اصل چیز خداتعالیٰ کی ذات ہے اور اس کے لئے مشرق و مغرب برابر ہیں۔
See 2:116.
In the foregoing several verses a pointed reference was made to the fact that in pursuance of a Divine plan the Patriarch Abraham had settled his wife Hagar and son Ishmael in the bleak and barren Valley of Mecca. When Ishmael grew up, Abraham rebuilt the Ka‘bah with his assistance and while rebuilding it prayed to God to raise among the Arabs a great Prophet, who should be humanity’s Guide and Leader for all time. When, however, in the fulness of time that great Prophet appeared, God’s eternal plan came into operation and the Ka‘bah was made the Qiblah for the whole of mankind. But while at Mecca, the Holy Prophet, in conformity with his old practice and also by Divine command, turned his face in Prayer to the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the Israelite Prophets. In Medina also he kept facing towards Jerusalem. But after a few months he was commanded by Divine revelation to turn his face towards the Ka‘bah. This was objected to by the Jews. The verse under comment fur
See 2:116.
Important Words:
قبلتھم (their Qiblah). The word قبلة is derived from قبل. They say قبل علی الشیء i.e. he began the thing and stuck to it. قبل المکانmeans, he came facing the house. اقبل علیه means, he advanced facing him. اقبل فلانا الشیء means, he put the thing before such a one or in front of him. قبلة means: (1) direction.; (2) direction to which a man turns while praying; (3) anything which one faces; (4) the Ka‘bah at Mecca to which Muslims turn their faces when praying (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In the preceding verses the Quran spoke of the people that have gone before, at the same time hinting at the difference between their deeds and those of the Muslims. In the present verse it introduces a subject in which the Muslims differ from other People of the Book, i.e. the subject of قبلة (Qiblah).
It is a usual practice with the Quran that it does not abruptly give any new commandment such as might appear hard to men. It generally begins by preparing the ground for the acceptance of such commandment by giving arguments in its favour and answering some objections that might possibly arise against it. See also 2:184, 185.
Similar is the case here. As the commandment regarding the change of Qiblah was likely to prove a stumbling block for some people, so the ground is prepared by making a general observation to the effect that the selection of a particular direction does not really matter. What matters is the spirit of obedience to God on the one hand and unity among the Faithful on the other. The clause, To Allah belong the East and the West, signifies that the selection of the East or the West is not of much importance, the real object being God only. The selection of a particular direction is primarily meant for the purpose of unity among the Faithful. But the direction must also be good, and God was now going to choose a good direction for the Muslims and the objections of the people would prove their own folly.
c
2:116.
1
تحویل قبلہ کا واقعہ مدینہ منورہ میں ہوا۔ مکہ تک کوئی مشکل نہ تھی۔ آنحضرت صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم ایسی جگہ پر کھڑے ہوتے تھے کہ سامنے کعبہ بھی رہتا تھا اور بیت المقدس بھی۔ یہودی اس پر خوش ہوتے تھے کہ ہمارے قبلہ کی طرف بھی رُخ ہے۔ جب آنحضرت صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم مدینہ میں تشریف لائے تو چند ماہ بعد الہام ہوا کہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرو‘ خواہ بیت المقدس کی طرف سے رخ بدل جائے۔ سو آپ نے ایسا ہی کیا۔ اس پر بیوقوفوں نے اعتراض کیا جس کا جواب ان آیات میں دیا گیا ہے کہ کعبہ اپنی ذات میں کوئی چیز نہیں۔ اصل چیز خداتعالیٰ کی ذات ہے اور اس کے لئے مشرق و مغرب برابر ہیں۔
a
See 2:116.
149
Important Words:
قبلتھم (their Qiblah). The word قبلة is derived from قبل. They say قبل علی الشیء i.e. he began the thing and stuck to it. قبل المکانmeans, he came facing the house. اقبل علیه means, he advanced facing him. اقبل فلانا الشیء means, he put the thing before such a one or in front of him. قبلة means: (1) direction.; (2) direction to which a man turns while praying; (3) anything which one faces; (4) the Ka‘bah at Mecca to which Muslims turn their faces when praying (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In the preceding verses the Quran spoke of the people that have gone before, at the same time hinting at the difference between their deeds and those of the Muslims. In the present verse it introduces a subject in which the Muslims differ from other People of the Book, i.e. the subject of قبلة (Qiblah).
It is a usual practice with the Quran that it does not abruptly give any new commandment such as might appear hard to men. It generally begins by preparing the ground for the acceptance of such commandment by giving arguments in its favour and answering some objections that might possibly arise against it. See also 2:184, 185.
Similar is the case here. As the commandment regarding the change of Qiblah was likely to prove a stumbling block for some people, so the ground is prepared by making a general observation to the effect that the selection of a particular direction does not really matter. What matters is the spirit of obedience to God on the one hand and unity among the Faithful on the other. The clause, To Allah belong the East and the West, signifies that the selection of the East or the West is not of much importance, the real object being God only. The selection of a particular direction is primarily meant for the purpose of unity among the Faithful. But the direction must also be good, and God was now going to choose a good direction for the Muslims and the objections of the people would prove their own folly.
a
See 2:116.
159
In the foregoing several verses a pointed reference was made to the fact that in pursuance of a Divine plan the Patriarch Abraham had settled his wife Hagar and son Ishmael in the bleak and barren Valley of Mecca. When Ishmael grew up, Abraham rebuilt the Ka‘bah with his assistance and while rebuilding it prayed to God to raise among the Arabs a great Prophet, who should be humanity’s Guide and Leader for all time. When, however, in the fulness of time that great Prophet appeared, God’s eternal plan came into operation and the Ka‘bah was made the Qiblah for the whole of mankind. But while at Mecca, the Holy Prophet, in conformity with his old practice and also by Divine command, turned his face in Prayer to the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the Israelite Prophets. In Medina also he kept facing towards Jerusalem. But after a few months he was commanded by Divine revelation to turn his face towards the Ka‘bah. This was objected to by the Jews. The verse under comment fur
وَكَذَٰلِكَ جَعَلْنَٰكُمْ أُمَّةً وَسَطًا لِّتَكُونُوا۟ شُهَدَآءَ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ وَيَكُونَ ٱلرَّسُولُ عَلَيْكُمْ شَهِيدًا ۗ وَمَا جَعَلْنَا ٱلْقِبْلَةَ ٱلَّتِى كُنتَ عَلَيْهَآ إِلَّا لِنَعْلَمَ مَن يَتَّبِعُ ٱلرَّسُولَ مِمَّن يَنقَلِبُ عَلَىٰ عَقِبَيْهِ ۚ وَإِن كَانَتْ لَكَبِيرَةً إِلَّا عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ هَدَى ٱللَّهُ ۗ وَمَا كَانَ ٱللَّهُ لِيُضِيعَ إِيمَٰنَكُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِٱلنَّاسِ لَرَءُوفٌ رَّحِيمٌ
3:111.
22:79.
اَلْوَسَط (Al-Wasat) 的意思是处于中间地位; 优越和高贵的地位 (اَقْرَبْ)。此词在这里作优越和高贵的意义解, 在3:111中穆斯林也被称为最优越的民族。
这里告诉穆斯林, 他们每一代都应保卫和注意下一代。作为最优越的民族, 他们就有责任始终防止降低他们所应有的很高的人生标准, 并留意每一代也都沿着享有穆圣的崇高同伴的荣誉的人们所追随的道路前进。因此穆圣应当是他的直接继承者的监护人, 而他们同时应依次成为自己的接班人的监护人, 如此等等。此话也可含意为, 根据天命, 穆斯林应成为人类的领袖, 并按他们的善行, 接受安拉特别恩惠, 因而其他人们势必得出结论, 穆斯林信奉一门真正的宗教。这样, 他们将为其他人证明伊斯兰教的真理, 就象穆圣对他们说来是这一宗教真理的见证人。
阿拉伯人非常热爱天房这麦加的古代礼拜寺。这是从伊布拉欣时代留传给他们的民族禁寺。因此要他们在伊斯兰教一开始就放弃天房而接受有经人朝向即耶路撒冷的圣寺时, 真是对他们的一个严峻的考验{布哈理和جَرِيْر (Jarir)}。之后在麦地那, 把耶路撒冷的圣寺的朝向改为天房, 这证明对犹太教徒和基督教徒都是一个极大的考验。因此, 这种更改证明对 “有经人” 和穆斯林以及对麦加的偶像崇拜者也都是一种考验。
从这些话中可以看出, 穆圣已按安拉的指令选定了耶路撒冷的圣寺作为他的朝向; 但由于安拉本来打算把它只作为临时的朝向而以后准备代之以供全人类永远朝向的天房, 因此关于临时性的朝向的命令在 «古兰经» 中是没有的。这表明所有临时性应用的指示不被包括在 «古兰经» 启示内; 只有那些属于永久性的指示才包括在内。«古兰经» 含有一些现在已经废弃的经文的这种见解是绝无事实根据的。
3:111.
22:79.
Al-Wasat means, occupying the middle position; good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). The word is used here in the sense of good and exalted. In 3:111 also Muslims have been called the best people.
Muslims are here told that each generation of theirs should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus, the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on. The words may also mean that, as decreed, Muslims are to become the leaders of men and by their good deeds are to become recipients of God’s special favours, and thus other people will be forced to the conclusion that they follow a true religion. In this way they (Muslims) will bear witness to the truth of Islam for other people, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
It appears from these words that the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Qiblah for all mankind for all times, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Qur’an. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quranic revelation; only those of a permanent nature were included in it. The theory that the Qur’an contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam to abandon it in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book (Bukhari & Jarir). And later on at Medina the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. Thus the change proved a trial for both the "People of the Book" and the Muslims and also for the Meccan idolaters.
3:111.
22:79.
Important Words:
وسطا (exalted) is derived from وسط meaning, he stood in between two things. وسط فی حسبه (wasata) or وسط (wasuta) means, he was or became good and noble. الوسط means: (1) occupying the middle position or taking the middle course; (2) good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). That the word وسط is used here in the sense of good and exalted, is clear from 3:111 where Muslims are called the best people.
لنعلم (that We might know) signifies that We may make known or distinguish. In fact, God being Omniscient knows all things; so He does not stand in need of knowing a thing because everything is already known to Him. The word has been used elsewhere also in this sense (33:51). The expression ممن (from him who) occurring after it also shows that the word is used here in the sense of distinguishing or making known to the people.
Commentary:
The clause, and thus have We made you an exalted nation, refers to, and is connected with, the concluding clause of the preceding verse, i.e. He guides whom He pleases to the right path. God means to say that whatever guidance He sends down to the Muslims is for their own good and it is through His guidance that they have been made an exalted nation. So in the matter of the Qiblah, too, they should be prepared to accept His guidance which is meant for their own good. This will make them "guardians over men" and the Messenger of God a "guardian over the Muslims".
Muslims are told that, as decreed by God, they are to become the leaders of men and win the pleasure of God by their good deeds and that on that account they will naturally become recipients of God’s special favours, with the result that other people will be forced to the conclusion that the religion which they follow is the true religion. In this way will Muslims bear witness to the truth of Islam, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
Another meaning of the clause, that you may be guardians over men, is that each generation of Muslims should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best of people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on.
Taking the particle علی (over) in the clause under discussion to mean "against" and the word شھید (guardian) to mean "witness", which it often does, the clause would mean "that you may be witnesses against men and the Holy Prophet may be a witness against you"; i.e., the Holy Prophet would serve as a mirror for the Muslims by looking into which they would be able to see their own shortcomings, while the lives of true Muslims would serve as a model for other people who, by comparing their lives with those of true Muslims, would see and realize their own defects and correct them accordingly. This state of affairs could be brought about only if Muslims faithfully followed all the behests of God including the one regarding Qiblah, which was important as a rallying-point for the new community.
It may be noted here that, as hinted in the words, and We did not appoint the Qiblah which thou didst follow, the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah, and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Islamic Qiblah for all time, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Quran. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quran; only those were included which were of a permanent nature. Hence the theory that the Quran contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam at Mecca to abandon the Ka‘bah in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book. And later on at Medina, the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. It was very hard for them to abandon their Qiblah for a rival temple which had been held sacred by the pagan Arabs. Thus God provided a trial for both the People of the Book and the idolaters of Mecca.
The Temple of Solomon at Jerusalem was not adopted as Qiblah by the Holy Prophet to conciliate the Jewish population of Medina, as is wrongly supposed by Sale and other Christian critics, because it was not at Medina that this Temple was adopted as the Qiblah. It had already been the Qiblah of the Muslims at Mecca where there was no Jewish or Christian population to placate (Bukhari & Jarir). If, by appointing a Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had intended to win over a people, the natural course would have been to appoint the Ka‘bah as a Qiblah while at Mecca and turn round to the Temple of Jerusalem while at Medina. But what actually happened was quite the reverse. Moreover, the Quran expressly says that the adoption of neither of the Qiblahs was meant to win over any people to Islam, but was intended only as a trial to distinguish the true believers from those not true.
The words it does not behove Allah to let your faith go in vain have a twofold meaning: (1) that this change of Qiblah is in no way calculated adversely to affect the faith of Muslims but would actually strengthen it; (2) that if Muslims were not directed to turn to the Ka‘bah, they would not inherit the blessings resulting from the prayers of Abraham offered at the time of its building (2:130). It was impossible that the Companions of the Holy Prophet who had displayed such steadfast loyalty and devotion to their noble ideals, should not have been made heirs to the blessings contained in Abraham’s prayers with which the Promised Prophet was to be so closely associated. The faith of Muslims would, as it were, go in vain if they remained detached from the Ka‘bah and did not inherit its blessings.
d
3:111.
e
22:79.
88
اَلْوَسَط (Al-Wasat) 的意思是处于中间地位; 优越和高贵的地位 (اَقْرَبْ)。此词在这里作优越和高贵的意义解, 在3:111中穆斯林也被称为最优越的民族。
89
这里告诉穆斯林, 他们每一代都应保卫和注意下一代。作为最优越的民族, 他们就有责任始终防止降低他们所应有的很高的人生标准, 并留意每一代也都沿着享有穆圣的崇高同伴的荣誉的人们所追随的道路前进。因此穆圣应当是他的直接继承者的监护人, 而他们同时应依次成为自己的接班人的监护人, 如此等等。此话也可含意为, 根据天命, 穆斯林应成为人类的领袖, 并按他们的善行, 接受安拉特别恩惠, 因而其他人们势必得出结论, 穆斯林信奉一门真正的宗教。这样, 他们将为其他人证明伊斯兰教的真理, 就象穆圣对他们说来是这一宗教真理的见证人。
90
阿拉伯人非常热爱天房这麦加的古代礼拜寺。这是从伊布拉欣时代留传给他们的民族禁寺。因此要他们在伊斯兰教一开始就放弃天房而接受有经人朝向即耶路撒冷的圣寺时, 真是对他们的一个严峻的考验{布哈理和جَرِيْر (Jarir)}。之后在麦地那, 把耶路撒冷的圣寺的朝向改为天房, 这证明对犹太教徒和基督教徒都是一个极大的考验。因此, 这种更改证明对 “有经人” 和穆斯林以及对麦加的偶像崇拜者也都是一种考验。
91
从这些话中可以看出, 穆圣已按安拉的指令选定了耶路撒冷的圣寺作为他的朝向; 但由于安拉本来打算把它只作为临时的朝向而以后准备代之以供全人类永远朝向的天房, 因此关于临时性的朝向的命令在 «古兰经» 中是没有的。这表明所有临时性应用的指示不被包括在 «古兰经» 启示内; 只有那些属于永久性的指示才包括在内。«古兰经» 含有一些现在已经废弃的经文的这种见解是绝无事实根据的。
a
3:111.
b
22:79.
150
Important Words:
وسطا (exalted) is derived from وسط meaning, he stood in between two things. وسط فی حسبه (wasata) or وسط (wasuta) means, he was or became good and noble. الوسط means: (1) occupying the middle position or taking the middle course; (2) good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). That the word وسط is used here in the sense of good and exalted, is clear from 3:111 where Muslims are called the best people.
لنعلم (that We might know) signifies that We may make known or distinguish. In fact, God being Omniscient knows all things; so He does not stand in need of knowing a thing because everything is already known to Him. The word has been used elsewhere also in this sense (33:51). The expression ممن (from him who) occurring after it also shows that the word is used here in the sense of distinguishing or making known to the people.
Commentary:
The clause, and thus have We made you an exalted nation, refers to, and is connected with, the concluding clause of the preceding verse, i.e. He guides whom He pleases to the right path. God means to say that whatever guidance He sends down to the Muslims is for their own good and it is through His guidance that they have been made an exalted nation. So in the matter of the Qiblah, too, they should be prepared to accept His guidance which is meant for their own good. This will make them "guardians over men" and the Messenger of God a "guardian over the Muslims".
Muslims are told that, as decreed by God, they are to become the leaders of men and win the pleasure of God by their good deeds and that on that account they will naturally become recipients of God’s special favours, with the result that other people will be forced to the conclusion that the religion which they follow is the true religion. In this way will Muslims bear witness to the truth of Islam, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
Another meaning of the clause, that you may be guardians over men, is that each generation of Muslims should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best of people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on.
Taking the particle علی (over) in the clause under discussion to mean "against" and the word شھید (guardian) to mean "witness", which it often does, the clause would mean "that you may be witnesses against men and the Holy Prophet may be a witness against you"; i.e., the Holy Prophet would serve as a mirror for the Muslims by looking into which they would be able to see their own shortcomings, while the lives of true Muslims would serve as a model for other people who, by comparing their lives with those of true Muslims, would see and realize their own defects and correct them accordingly. This state of affairs could be brought about only if Muslims faithfully followed all the behests of God including the one regarding Qiblah, which was important as a rallying-point for the new community.
It may be noted here that, as hinted in the words, and We did not appoint the Qiblah which thou didst follow, the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah, and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Islamic Qiblah for all time, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Quran. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quran; only those were included which were of a permanent nature. Hence the theory that the Quran contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam at Mecca to abandon the Ka‘bah in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book. And later on at Medina, the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. It was very hard for them to abandon their Qiblah for a rival temple which had been held sacred by the pagan Arabs. Thus God provided a trial for both the People of the Book and the idolaters of Mecca.
The Temple of Solomon at Jerusalem was not adopted as Qiblah by the Holy Prophet to conciliate the Jewish population of Medina, as is wrongly supposed by Sale and other Christian critics, because it was not at Medina that this Temple was adopted as the Qiblah. It had already been the Qiblah of the Muslims at Mecca where there was no Jewish or Christian population to placate (Bukhari & Jarir). If, by appointing a Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had intended to win over a people, the natural course would have been to appoint the Ka‘bah as a Qiblah while at Mecca and turn round to the Temple of Jerusalem while at Medina. But what actually happened was quite the reverse. Moreover, the Quran expressly says that the adoption of neither of the Qiblahs was meant to win over any people to Islam, but was intended only as a trial to distinguish the true believers from those not true.
The words it does not behove Allah to let your faith go in vain have a twofold meaning: (1) that this change of Qiblah is in no way calculated adversely to affect the faith of Muslims but would actually strengthen it; (2) that if Muslims were not directed to turn to the Ka‘bah, they would not inherit the blessings resulting from the prayers of Abraham offered at the time of its building (2:130). It was impossible that the Companions of the Holy Prophet who had displayed such steadfast loyalty and devotion to their noble ideals, should not have been made heirs to the blessings contained in Abraham’s prayers with which the Promised Prophet was to be so closely associated. The faith of Muslims would, as it were, go in vain if they remained detached from the Ka‘bah and did not inherit its blessings.
b
3:111.
c
22:79.
160
Al-Wasat means, occupying the middle position; good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). The word is used here in the sense of good and exalted. In 3:111 also Muslims have been called the best people.
161
Muslims are here told that each generation of theirs should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus, the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on. The words may also mean that, as decreed, Muslims are to become the leaders of men and by their good deeds are to become recipients of God’s special favours, and thus other people will be forced to the conclusion that they follow a true religion. In this way they (Muslims) will bear witness to the truth of Islam for other people, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
162
It appears from these words that the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Qiblah for all mankind for all times, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Qur’an. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quranic revelation; only those of a permanent nature were included in it. The theory that the Qur’an contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
163
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam to abandon it in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book (Bukhari & Jarir). And later on at Medina the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. Thus the change proved a trial for both the "People of the Book" and the Muslims and also for the Meccan idolaters.
قَدْ نَرَىٰ تَقَلُّبَ وَجْهِكَ فِى ٱلسَّمَآءِ ۖ فَلَنُوَلِّيَنَّكَ قِبْلَةً تَرْضَىٰهَا ۚ فَوَلِّ وَجْهَكَ شَطْرَ ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۚ وَحَيْثُ مَا كُنتُمْ فَوَلُّوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ شَطْرَهُۥ ۗ وَإِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ لَيَعْلَمُونَ أَنَّهُ ٱلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّهِمْ ۗ وَمَا ٱللَّهُ بِغَٰفِلٍ عَمَّا يَعْمَلُونَ
2:150, 151.
在麦加, 穆圣在安拉的指令下, 在祈祷中把脸转向耶路撒冷的圣寺, 可是心中最大的愿望是把天房作为他的朝向, 而他也直觉到他的愿望终将得到满足, 他通常选择他能既面向耶路撒冷的圣寺又面向天房的地方作礼拜。可是, 当他移居麦地那时, 由于这座城的位置, 他只能面向耶路撒冷的圣寺。由於朝向的更改, 他内心的愿望自然加剧了, 虽然出于对安拉指令的敬服, 他没有实际作要求更改的祈祷, 然而他却焦急渴求地向天仰视, 以期得到那样的指令。
نُوَلِّيَنَّكَ (Nuwalliyannaka) 也含意为 “我将使你为主人和监护人。” 这一句包含了双重预言, 即, 天房终将成为各民族的朝向, 它的所有权也将交给穆圣。
这话表示, 虽然在一般情况下穆斯林在祷告时应该把脸转向天房, 但方向是次要的。更改的意图是促使并维持穆斯林兄弟般的团结和统一。
قِبْلَۃً کا لفظی ترجمہ تو ’’ایسے قبلہ‘‘ ہے لیکن چونکہ اس سے قبلہ ٔمعروفہ کی طرف اشارہ نہیں ہوتا اس لئے ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’اس قبلہ‘‘ لکھا ہے۔
2:150, 151.
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet under Divine command turned his face in Prayers towards the Temple at Jerusalem. But, as in his heart of hearts, he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and he also had a sort of intuition that eventually his wish will be satisfied, he generally chose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Ka‘bah before him. When, however, he emigrated to Medina, in view of the position of the town, he could only face towards the Temple at Jerusalem. With the change of the Qiblah his inner desire naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for a command to that effect.
Nuwalliyannaka also means, "We will make thee master and guardian." The expression embodied a double prophecy, viz. that eventually the Ka‘bah will become the Qiblah of all peoples and that its possession will also pass over to the Holy Prophet.
The words signify that though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their Prayers, yet direction is of secondary importance. The change was intended to bring about and maintain unity and uniformity in the Muslim brotherhood.
See Gen. 21: 21; John 4: 21. Isa. 45: 13, 14, & Deut. 32: 2.
2:150, 151.
Important Words:
قد (verily) means, already; sometimes; often; verily, etc. (Lane).
تقلب (turning) is derived from قلب. They say قلب الشیء i.e. (1) he made the thing change direction; (2) he turned it about so that its face and back changed directions; (3) he turned it upside down; (4) he turned it inside out; (5) he changed its condition. The word قلب (qallaba) gives almost the same meaning but with greater intensification. تقلب الشیء means, the thing turned over and over, doing so much and repeatedly (Aqrab). The expression تقلب وجھك would therefore mean, turning thy face with eagerness and anxiety to receive an order.
فلنولینك (We will make thee turn) is derived from ولی (walla) which again is derived from ولی (waliya). The expression ولاهgives two distinct meanings: (1) he made him ruler or master or guardian of it; (2) he made it change direction or he made it turn towards a thing or away from it as the case may be (Aqrab).
الحرام (Sacred) is derived from حرم which means, it was or became forbidden, prohibited or unlawful whether from sanctity or owing to its being injurious. حرمه الشیء means, he denied or refused him the thing. Thus
حرام means: (1) forbidden and unlawful; (2) sacred and inviolable (Aqrab). المسجدالحرام signifies, the Sacred Mosque at Mecca, i.e. the Ka‘bah.
Commentary:
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet had orders to turn his face in Prayers towards the sacred Temple at Jerusalem. The Prophet, of course, obeyed the divine behest; but, as in his heart of hearts he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and had a sort of intuition that eventually he would be ordered to turn his face towards it, he generally tried to choose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Sacred Mosque of Mecca before him. When, however, the Holy Prophet migrated to Medina, it became impossible for him to turn his face to both the places at one and the same time, and in compliance with divine command he was forced to turn his face to the Temple at Jerusalem alone. With this change the inner desire of the Holy Prophet naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for an order to that effect. The clause, verily We see thee turning thy face often to heaven, is therefore highly eulogistic of the Prophet, inasmuch as it indicates (1) that the Holy Prophet had such great insight into spiritual matters that in spite of the interim command from God he knew that sooner or later the order for turning the face towards the Ka‘bah would come; (2) that despite his great desire that the Ka‘bah should be appointed as Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had such extraordinary respect for his Lord’s command that he refrained from even praying to that effect; (3) that God the Almighty had such great love for His Messenger that He most graciously refers to his turning his face towards heaven and expedites the command about the change of Qiblah, lovingly adding, We will make thee turn to the Qiblah which thou likest; and (4) that God had such great regard for the wish of the Prophet that He not only ordered him to turn his face towards the Qiblah of his liking but at the same time hinted that He would soon make him master and guardian of it; for, as explained under Important Words, the expression نولینك also means, "We will make thee master or guardian". Truly did ‘A’ishah say to her illustrious husband, "I see that God hastens to fulfil your wishes" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir).
After the above introduction follows the commandment about the change of Qiblah in the words, So turn thy face towards the Sacred Mosque; and wherever you be, turn your faces towards it. This commandment was given after the Holy Prophet had migrated to Medina and had stayed there for about sixteen months. The words "Sacred Mosque" do not merely stand for the Ka‘bah but also provide an argument in favour of the change ordered. The Mosque was sacred and full of blessings and would prove a sanctuary for the faithful. The words, wherever you be, turn your faces towards it, have been added with a threefold purpose: (1) to make it clear that the order was not meant for the people of Medinaonly but for all Muslims wherever they might be; (2) to point to the fact that one of the reasons underlying the order relating to the Qiblah was to bring about unity and uniformity among all Muslims, wherever they might be; and (3) to hint that the commandment did not apply to the Holy Prophet only but extended to all Muslims, for whereas, in the preceding clause the Quran says, turn thy face, in the clause under comment it says, turn your faces.
The words, They to whom the Book has been given know that this is the truth from their Lord, mean that Jews and Christians were convinced on the basis of prophecies found in their Scriptures having special reference to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet (Isa. 45:13, 14; John 4:21; Deut. 33:2; Gen. 21:21), that the commandment about the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah at Mecca was truly from God. Mecca lies in what is known as the Desert of Faran or Paran mentioned in some of the above-mentioned verses of the Bible, and therefore the Jews knew that the prophecies contained in them applied to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet.
It may be noted here that, though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their prayers, yet as direction is of secondary importance, Islam ordains that, if in special circumstances, it becomes difficult for a man to turn his face to the Ka‘bah or to keep it so turned, he can say his Prayers in any direction that may be convenient. For instance, when a man does not know in which direction the Ka‘bah lies, while travelling at night in a Railway train or on the back of an animal, etc., he can pray facing any direction. Similarly, a sick man lying in bed may pray in a lying posture facing any direction that he may find convenient.
a
2:150, 151.
92
在麦加, 穆圣在安拉的指令下, 在祈祷中把脸转向耶路撒冷的圣寺, 可是心中最大的愿望是把天房作为他的朝向, 而他也直觉到他的愿望终将得到满足, 他通常选择他能既面向耶路撒冷的圣寺又面向天房的地方作礼拜。可是, 当他移居麦地那时, 由于这座城的位置, 他只能面向耶路撒冷的圣寺。由於朝向的更改, 他内心的愿望自然加剧了, 虽然出于对安拉指令的敬服, 他没有实际作要求更改的祈祷, 然而他却焦急渴求地向天仰视, 以期得到那样的指令。
93
نُوَلِّيَنَّكَ (Nuwalliyannaka) 也含意为 “我将使你为主人和监护人。” 这一句包含了双重预言, 即, 天房终将成为各民族的朝向, 它的所有权也将交给穆圣。
94
这话表示, 虽然在一般情况下穆斯林在祷告时应该把脸转向天房, 但方向是次要的。更改的意图是促使并维持穆斯林兄弟般的团结和统一。
2
قِبْلَۃً کا لفظی ترجمہ تو ’’ایسے قبلہ‘‘ ہے لیکن چونکہ اس سے قبلہ ٔمعروفہ کی طرف اشارہ نہیں ہوتا اس لئے ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’اس قبلہ‘‘ لکھا ہے۔
a
2:150, 151.
151
Important Words:
قد (verily) means, already; sometimes; often; verily, etc. (Lane).
تقلب (turning) is derived from قلب. They say قلب الشیء i.e. (1) he made the thing change direction; (2) he turned it about so that its face and back changed directions; (3) he turned it upside down; (4) he turned it inside out; (5) he changed its condition. The word قلب (qallaba) gives almost the same meaning but with greater intensification. تقلب الشیء means, the thing turned over and over, doing so much and repeatedly (Aqrab). The expression تقلب وجھك would therefore mean, turning thy face with eagerness and anxiety to receive an order.
فلنولینك (We will make thee turn) is derived from ولی (walla) which again is derived from ولی (waliya). The expression ولاهgives two distinct meanings: (1) he made him ruler or master or guardian of it; (2) he made it change direction or he made it turn towards a thing or away from it as the case may be (Aqrab).
الحرام (Sacred) is derived from حرم which means, it was or became forbidden, prohibited or unlawful whether from sanctity or owing to its being injurious. حرمه الشیء means, he denied or refused him the thing. Thus
حرام means: (1) forbidden and unlawful; (2) sacred and inviolable (Aqrab). المسجدالحرام signifies, the Sacred Mosque at Mecca, i.e. the Ka‘bah.
Commentary:
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet had orders to turn his face in Prayers towards the sacred Temple at Jerusalem. The Prophet, of course, obeyed the divine behest; but, as in his heart of hearts he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and had a sort of intuition that eventually he would be ordered to turn his face towards it, he generally tried to choose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Sacred Mosque of Mecca before him. When, however, the Holy Prophet migrated to Medina, it became impossible for him to turn his face to both the places at one and the same time, and in compliance with divine command he was forced to turn his face to the Temple at Jerusalem alone. With this change the inner desire of the Holy Prophet naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for an order to that effect. The clause, verily We see thee turning thy face often to heaven, is therefore highly eulogistic of the Prophet, inasmuch as it indicates (1) that the Holy Prophet had such great insight into spiritual matters that in spite of the interim command from God he knew that sooner or later the order for turning the face towards the Ka‘bah would come; (2) that despite his great desire that the Ka‘bah should be appointed as Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had such extraordinary respect for his Lord’s command that he refrained from even praying to that effect; (3) that God the Almighty had such great love for His Messenger that He most graciously refers to his turning his face towards heaven and expedites the command about the change of Qiblah, lovingly adding, We will make thee turn to the Qiblah which thou likest; and (4) that God had such great regard for the wish of the Prophet that He not only ordered him to turn his face towards the Qiblah of his liking but at the same time hinted that He would soon make him master and guardian of it; for, as explained under Important Words, the expression نولینك also means, "We will make thee master or guardian". Truly did ‘A’ishah say to her illustrious husband, "I see that God hastens to fulfil your wishes" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir).
After the above introduction follows the commandment about the change of Qiblah in the words, So turn thy face towards the Sacred Mosque; and wherever you be, turn your faces towards it. This commandment was given after the Holy Prophet had migrated to Medina and had stayed there for about sixteen months. The words "Sacred Mosque" do not merely stand for the Ka‘bah but also provide an argument in favour of the change ordered. The Mosque was sacred and full of blessings and would prove a sanctuary for the faithful. The words, wherever you be, turn your faces towards it, have been added with a threefold purpose: (1) to make it clear that the order was not meant for the people of Medinaonly but for all Muslims wherever they might be; (2) to point to the fact that one of the reasons underlying the order relating to the Qiblah was to bring about unity and uniformity among all Muslims, wherever they might be; and (3) to hint that the commandment did not apply to the Holy Prophet only but extended to all Muslims, for whereas, in the preceding clause the Quran says, turn thy face, in the clause under comment it says, turn your faces.
The words, They to whom the Book has been given know that this is the truth from their Lord, mean that Jews and Christians were convinced on the basis of prophecies found in their Scriptures having special reference to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet (Isa. 45:13, 14; John 4:21; Deut. 33:2; Gen. 21:21), that the commandment about the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah at Mecca was truly from God. Mecca lies in what is known as the Desert of Faran or Paran mentioned in some of the above-mentioned verses of the Bible, and therefore the Jews knew that the prophecies contained in them applied to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet.
It may be noted here that, though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their prayers, yet as direction is of secondary importance, Islam ordains that, if in special circumstances, it becomes difficult for a man to turn his face to the Ka‘bah or to keep it so turned, he can say his Prayers in any direction that may be convenient. For instance, when a man does not know in which direction the Ka‘bah lies, while travelling at night in a Railway train or on the back of an animal, etc., he can pray facing any direction. Similarly, a sick man lying in bed may pray in a lying posture facing any direction that he may find convenient.
a
2:150, 151.
164
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet under Divine command turned his face in Prayers towards the Temple at Jerusalem. But, as in his heart of hearts, he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and he also had a sort of intuition that eventually his wish will be satisfied, he generally chose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Ka‘bah before him. When, however, he emigrated to Medina, in view of the position of the town, he could only face towards the Temple at Jerusalem. With the change of the Qiblah his inner desire naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for a command to that effect.
165
Nuwalliyannaka also means, "We will make thee master and guardian." The expression embodied a double prophecy, viz. that eventually the Ka‘bah will become the Qiblah of all peoples and that its possession will also pass over to the Holy Prophet.
166
The words signify that though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their Prayers, yet direction is of secondary importance. The change was intended to bring about and maintain unity and uniformity in the Muslim brotherhood.
167
See Gen. 21: 21; John 4: 21. Isa. 45: 13, 14, & Deut. 32: 2.
وَلَئِنْ أَتَيْتَ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ بِكُلِّ ءَايَةٍ مَّا تَبِعُوا۟ قِبْلَتَكَ ۚ وَمَآ أَنتَ بِتَابِعٍ قِبْلَتَهُمْ ۚ وَمَا بَعْضُهُم بِتَابِعٍ قِبْلَةَ بَعْضٍ ۚ وَلَئِنِ ٱتَّبَعْتَ أَهْوَآءَهُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَكَ مِنَ ٱلْعِلْمِ ۙ إِنَّكَ إِذًا لَّمِنَ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
عیسائی لوگ مشرق کی طرف منہ کرکے نماز پڑھا کرتے تھے۔ چنانچہ نجران کے عیسائی جب رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم کے پاس مذہبی گفتگو کرنے کے لئے آئے تو انہوں نے مشرق کی طرف ہی منہ کرکے نماز پڑھی تھی۔ عام طور پر اس کی وجہ وہ یہ بتاتے ہیں کہ مسیحؑ کی خبر دینے والا ستارہ مشرق کی طرف سے طلوع ہوا تھا۔
یہودیوں میں سامری قبیلہ کے لوگ جیسا کہ نئے عہدنامہ کی کتاب یوحنا باب ۴ آیت ۲۰ سے معلوم ہوتا ہے۔ یروشلم کے ایک پہاڑ کی طرف منہ کرکے عبادت کیا کرتے تھے اور باقی یہودی بیت المقدس کی طرف منہ کرکے نماز پڑھا کرتے تھے۔ پس ان سب میں اختلاف قبلہ تھا۔ اسی کی طرف اس آیت میں اشارہ کیا گیا ہے
109:3, 7.
6:57; 13:38.
This verse points to the hostility of Jews and Christians not only to Islam but also to one another. The Jews had Jerusalem as their Qiblah (Kings 8: 22-30; Dan. 6: 10; Ps. 5: 7 & Jonah, 2: 4), while the Samaritans, a disowned section of the Jews, who also followed the Mosaic Law, had adopted a certain mountain in Palestine, named Gerizim, as their Qiblah (Commentary on the New Testament by W. Walsham How, D.D.). The early Christians, followed the Qiblah of the Jews (Enc. Brit., 14th edition, v. 676 & Jew. Enc. vi. 53). The Christians of Najran worshipped in the Holy Prophet’s Mosque at Medina, with their faces turned to the East (Zurqani, iv. 41). Thus the Jews, the Samaritans, and the Christians followed different Qiblahs owing to their mutual jealousy and enmity. In these circumstances it was vain to expect them to follow the Qiblah of the Muslims.
109:3, 7.
6:57; 13:38.
Commentary:
This verse points to the hostility of Jews and Christians not only to Islam but also to one another. The Jews had Jerusalem as their Qiblah (See I. Kings 8:22-30; Dan. 6:10; Ps. 5:7; Jonah, 2:4) while the Samaritans, a disowned section of the Jews, who also followed the Mosaic Law, had adopted a certain mountain in Palestine, named Gerizim, as their Qiblah (John, 4:20 and Commentary on the New Testament by Right Rev. W. Walsham How, D.D., published by Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, London, under this verse). As regards the early Christians, they followed the Qiblah of the Jews (Acts 3:1; Enc. Brit., 14th edition, v. 676; Jew. Enc. vi. 53) but we learn from authentic sources that when a party of the Christians of Najran paid a visit to Medina to have a discussion with the Holy Prophet on some doctrinal point, they worshipped in the Holy Prophet’s mosque at Medina with their faces turned to the East (Zurqani, iv. 41). Thus the Jews, the Samaritans, and the Christians followed different Qiblahs owing to their mutual jealousy and enmity. In these circumstances it was vain to expect them to follow the Qiblah of the Muslims, and when obsolete faiths refused to follow the true Qiblah, how could a true believer follow a Qiblah that had become obsolete.
The concluding clause speaks of the practice of the People of the Book as vain "desires," not because they were not originally based on revelation but because they were opposed to the new revelation that had appointed the Ka‘bah as Qiblah. He who insists on sticking to an order that is no longer in force, really follows naught but his own desire.
The words, then thou shalt surely be of the transgressors, do not evidently refer to the Holy Prophet, because, (1) he could in no circumstances go against Allah’s commandment, and (2) the foregoing part of this very verse says about him, nor wouldst thou follow their Qiblah, and (3) it is clearly stated in the preceding verse that he loved to turn his face towards the Ka‘bah and eagerly awaited a divine commandment to that effect. It is, therefore, unthinkable that the Prophet could forsake the Qiblah of his own liking. The words obviously refer, as supported by the rules of the Arabic language as well as the usage of the Quran, either to the reader in general or to every individual Muslim who followed the Holy Prophet.
a
109:3, 7.
b
6:57; 13:38.
1
عیسائی لوگ مشرق کی طرف منہ کرکے نماز پڑھا کرتے تھے۔ چنانچہ نجران کے عیسائی جب رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم کے پاس مذہبی گفتگو کرنے کے لئے آئے تو انہوں نے مشرق کی طرف ہی منہ کرکے نماز پڑھی تھی۔ عام طور پر اس کی وجہ وہ یہ بتاتے ہیں کہ مسیحؑ کی خبر دینے والا ستارہ مشرق کی طرف سے طلوع ہوا تھا۔
یہودیوں میں سامری قبیلہ کے لوگ جیسا کہ نئے عہدنامہ کی کتاب یوحنا باب ۴ آیت ۲۰ سے معلوم ہوتا ہے۔ یروشلم کے ایک پہاڑ کی طرف منہ کرکے عبادت کیا کرتے تھے اور باقی یہودی بیت المقدس کی طرف منہ کرکے نماز پڑھا کرتے تھے۔ پس ان سب میں اختلاف قبلہ تھا۔ اسی کی طرف اس آیت میں اشارہ کیا گیا ہے
a
109:3, 7.
b
6:57; 13:38.
152
Commentary:
This verse points to the hostility of Jews and Christians not only to Islam but also to one another. The Jews had Jerusalem as their Qiblah (See I. Kings 8:22-30; Dan. 6:10; Ps. 5:7; Jonah, 2:4) while the Samaritans, a disowned section of the Jews, who also followed the Mosaic Law, had adopted a certain mountain in Palestine, named Gerizim, as their Qiblah (John, 4:20 and Commentary on the New Testament by Right Rev. W. Walsham How, D.D., published by Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, London, under this verse). As regards the early Christians, they followed the Qiblah of the Jews (Acts 3:1; Enc. Brit., 14th edition, v. 676; Jew. Enc. vi. 53) but we learn from authentic sources that when a party of the Christians of Najran paid a visit to Medina to have a discussion with the Holy Prophet on some doctrinal point, they worshipped in the Holy Prophet’s mosque at Medina with their faces turned to the East (Zurqani, iv. 41). Thus the Jews, the Samaritans, and the Christians followed different Qiblahs owing to their mutual jealousy and enmity. In these circumstances it was vain to expect them to follow the Qiblah of the Muslims, and when obsolete faiths refused to follow the true Qiblah, how could a true believer follow a Qiblah that had become obsolete.
The concluding clause speaks of the practice of the People of the Book as vain "desires," not because they were not originally based on revelation but because they were opposed to the new revelation that had appointed the Ka‘bah as Qiblah. He who insists on sticking to an order that is no longer in force, really follows naught but his own desire.
The words, then thou shalt surely be of the transgressors, do not evidently refer to the Holy Prophet, because, (1) he could in no circumstances go against Allah’s commandment, and (2) the foregoing part of this very verse says about him, nor wouldst thou follow their Qiblah, and (3) it is clearly stated in the preceding verse that he loved to turn his face towards the Ka‘bah and eagerly awaited a divine commandment to that effect. It is, therefore, unthinkable that the Prophet could forsake the Qiblah of his own liking. The words obviously refer, as supported by the rules of the Arabic language as well as the usage of the Quran, either to the reader in general or to every individual Muslim who followed the Holy Prophet.
a
109:3, 7.
b
6:57; 13:38.
168
This verse points to the hostility of Jews and Christians not only to Islam but also to one another. The Jews had Jerusalem as their Qiblah (Kings 8: 22-30; Dan. 6: 10; Ps. 5: 7 & Jonah, 2: 4), while the Samaritans, a disowned section of the Jews, who also followed the Mosaic Law, had adopted a certain mountain in Palestine, named Gerizim, as their Qiblah (Commentary on the New Testament by W. Walsham How, D.D.). The early Christians, followed the Qiblah of the Jews (Enc. Brit., 14th edition, v. 676 & Jew. Enc. vi. 53). The Christians of Najran worshipped in the Holy Prophet’s Mosque at Medina, with their faces turned to the East (Zurqani, iv. 41). Thus the Jews, the Samaritans, and the Christians followed different Qiblahs owing to their mutual jealousy and enmity. In these circumstances it was vain to expect them to follow the Qiblah of the Muslims.
ٱلَّذِينَ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُمُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ يَعْرِفُونَهُۥ كَمَا يَعْرِفُونَ أَبْنَآءَهُمْ ۖ وَإِنَّ فَرِيقًا مِّنْهُمْ لَيَكْتُمُونَ ٱلْحَقَّ وَهُمْ يَعْلَمُونَ
6:21.
2:175; 5:16, 6:92.
The pronoun it (or him) may be taken as referring either to the change of the Qiblah or to the Holy Prophet. The clause means that the People of the Book know on the basis of the prophecies found in their revealed Scriptures that a Prophet will appear among the Arabs who will have special relation with the Ka‘bah.
Ya‘rifuna-hu is derived from ‘Arafa which means, he knew or recognized or perceived a thing. Though the word is also used about such knowledge as is derived through the physical senses, it is particularly used of such knowledge as is obtained by pondering and meditating (Mufradat).
6:21.
2:175; 5:16; 6:92.
Important Words:
یعرفون (recognise) is derived from عرف which means, he knew or recognized or perceived a thing. Though the word is also used of such knowledge as is derived through the senses, it is particularly used of such knowledge as is obtained by thinking and meditating (Mufradat & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The pronoun hu (him or it) occurring in the clause "recognise him or it" may be taken as referring either to the change of Qiblah or to the Holy Prophet. The clause means that the People of the Book know, on the basis of the prophecies found in their Scriptures, that a Prophet would appear among the Arabs and that he would be connected with the Ka‘bah.
The sentence, some of them conceal the truth knowingly, refers to the learned men of the Jews who were well versed in their scriptures and knew the prophecies relating to the advent of the Holy Prophet of Islam but deliberately suppressed those prophecies in order to conceal them from the people.
b
2:175; 5:16, 6:92.
c
6:21.
a
6:21.
b
2:175; 5:16; 6:92.
153
Important Words:
یعرفون (recognise) is derived from عرف which means, he knew or recognized or perceived a thing. Though the word is also used of such knowledge as is derived through the senses, it is particularly used of such knowledge as is obtained by thinking and meditating (Mufradat & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The pronoun hu (him or it) occurring in the clause "recognise him or it" may be taken as referring either to the change of Qiblah or to the Holy Prophet. The clause means that the People of the Book know, on the basis of the prophecies found in their Scriptures, that a Prophet would appear among the Arabs and that he would be connected with the Ka‘bah.
The sentence, some of them conceal the truth knowingly, refers to the learned men of the Jews who were well versed in their scriptures and knew the prophecies relating to the advent of the Holy Prophet of Islam but deliberately suppressed those prophecies in order to conceal them from the people.
c
6:21.
d
2:175; 5:16, 6:92.
169
The pronoun it (or him) may be taken as referring either to the change of the Qiblah or to the Holy Prophet. The clause means that the People of the Book know on the basis of the prophecies found in their revealed Scriptures that a Prophet will appear among the Arabs who will have special relation with the Ka‘bah.
170
Ya‘rifuna-hu is derived from ‘Arafa which means, he knew or recognized or perceived a thing. Though the word is also used about such knowledge as is derived through the physical senses, it is particularly used of such knowledge as is obtained by pondering and meditating (Mufradat).
ٱلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّكَ ۖ فَلَا تَكُونَنَّ مِنَ ٱلْمُمْتَرِينَ
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
Important Words:
الحق (truth) means: (1) a truth; (2) a thing foreordained by God; (3) an established fact (4) a right; (5) certainty and conviction (Aqrab).
الممترین (those in doubt) is the plural of الممتر which is derived from امتری which again is derived from مری. They say مری حقهi.e. he contested or refused his right. امتری means: (1) he doubted; (2) he contested or raised objections. Thus ممترین means: (1) those who doubt; (2) those who contest and raise objections (Mufradat & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the great future of Islam. The revelation sent down to the Holy Prophet had come to stay and all obstacles that stood in its way were doomed to disappear. This is ordained by God, the Controller of man’s destiny, and is as good as an established fact. Therefore, O reader, do not waste your energies in doubting or disputing a thing that must prevail.
d
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
a
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
154
Important Words:
الحق (truth) means: (1) a truth; (2) a thing foreordained by God; (3) an established fact (4) a right; (5) certainty and conviction (Aqrab).
الممترین (those in doubt) is the plural of الممتر which is derived from امتری which again is derived from مری. They say مری حقهi.e. he contested or refused his right. امتری means: (1) he doubted; (2) he contested or raised objections. Thus ممترین means: (1) those who doubt; (2) those who contest and raise objections (Mufradat & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the great future of Islam. The revelation sent down to the Holy Prophet had come to stay and all obstacles that stood in its way were doomed to disappear. This is ordained by God, the Controller of man’s destiny, and is as good as an established fact. Therefore, O reader, do not waste your energies in doubting or disputing a thing that must prevail.
a
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
وَلِكُلٍّ وِجْهَةٌ هُوَ مُوَلِّيهَا ۖ فَٱسْتَبِقُوا۟ ٱلْخَيْرَٰتِ ۚ أَيْنَ مَا تَكُونُوا۟ يَأْتِ بِكُمُ ٱللَّهُ جَمِيعًا ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرٌ
3:134; 5:49; 35:33; 57:22.
本节经文在廖廖数语当中却包含了人生成功的一切要素:一个穆斯林应首先为自己确定一个明确的目标。他不仅应把他的全部注意力集中在它上面, 竭力达到它, 以有益心智的比赛精神与别的穆斯林相竞赛, 力图超过他们, 而且也应帮助他那些可能绊倒的同伴站起来, 继续比赛。مُوَلِّيْهَا (Muwalli-ha) 也含意为 “他使某东西作为支配自己的”, 就是说, 一个人首先确立一个目标, 然后把它作为自己一生中的支配因素。
وِجْھَۃٌ کے معنے ہیں وہ مقصد جس کی طرف انسان توجہ رکھتا ہے۔ (مفردات راغب)
فَاسْتَبِقُوا الْخَیْرَاتِ: اِسْتَبَـقَا الْبَابَ اَوْ اِلَیْہِ کے معنے ہیں اِبْتَدَرَا الْبَابَ: دروازہ تک پہنچنے میں ایک دوسرے سے آگے بڑھنے کی کوشش کی (اقرب الموارد) پس فَاسْتَبِقُوْا کے معنے ہونگے ایک دوسرے سے آگے بڑھنے کی کوشش کرو۔
3:134; 5:49; 35:33; 57:22.
The verse contains, in a few words, all the ingredients of a successful life: A Muslim should first fix for himself a definite goal. Then he should not only devote his whole attention to it and strain every nerve to attain it and vie with other Muslims in a spirit of healthy competition and try to excel them but should also help such of his comrades, as may happen to stumble, to rise up and continue the race. The word Muwalli-ha also means, "which he makes dominant over him," i.e. a man first sets up an objective and then makes it a dominating factor in his life.
3:134; 5:49; 35:33; 57:22.
Important Words:
وجھة (goal) is derived from وجه meaning, the face. وجھة therefore, means: (1) a direction to which one turns one’s face; (2) a goal or an object (Aqrab).
استبقوا (vie with one another) is formed from استبق which is derived from سبق which means, he went ahead of him and left him behind; he outstripped him; he excelled him in some quality. استبق means: (1) he tried to go ahead of others so as to reach the goal first; (2) he hastened and employed his full powers to attain or reach an object (Aqrab & Lane).
خیرات (good works) is the plural of خیرة which means (1) anything excessively good; (2) anything superior to other things (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This short verse contains, in a few words, a mighty lesson as to how the Muslims can achieve success in life. First, they should fix for themselves a goal and that goal should not be the attainment of a particular good but of every good. Nay, they should aspire for more than that. They should try to attain such things as are exceedingly good and superior to others. Again, they should not seek these things in a careless and haphazard manner but should hasten towards them, vying with one another in a spirit of healthy emulation to reach the goal before others.
The expression استبقوا (vie with one another) used here in the plural form also points to the fact that in this race for all that is good, Muslims should try to help those who are weak and assist them in the attainment of virtue. A true Muslim should not only himself strive after virtue but should also invite others to attain to the same stage of virtue which he himself has attained. The spiritual race referred to in the verse thus becomes a most peculiar race in which the competitors not only vie with one another but also look towards their comrades and help such of them as may stumble on their way or be lax in other respects.
The clause, Wherever you be, Allah will bring you all together, means that a Muslim should not think of vying with only those who immediately surround him and thus be satisfied by outstripping them, but should also remember the fact that in far-off places there may be those who are running very fast—faster than those who surround him—and as God will judge all together, a Muslim should not be unmindful of the unknown competitors but should try to spend his energies to the fullest possible extent so that he may truly top the list.
The clause is capable of yet another interpretation. It is human nature that when a man comes to know that the result of his works would be announced publicly, he strives all the harder to outdo others in the discharge of his duties. Hence, God calls upon Muslims to bear in mind that on a certain day they will be gathered together with the peoples of all ages and the results of their deeds will be announced before that huge assemblage; so they should exert themselves accordingly.
The clause, Surely, Allah has the power to do all that He wills, is intended to remind Muslims that there is no limit to man’s spiritual progress and development. A man can rise to any stage of progress and yet the All-Powerful God can help and guide him to the attainment of a still higher stage.
The words ھو مولیھا (which dominates him) literally mean, which he makes dominant over him, i.e. a man first sets up an objective and then makes it a dominating factor in his life. The expression ھومولیھا also means, to which he turns his face. In both these senses the underlying idea is that of engrossment and devotion.
e
3:134; 5:49; 35:33; 57:22.
95
本节经文在廖廖数语当中却包含了人生成功的一切要素:一个穆斯林应首先为自己确定一个明确的目标。他不仅应把他的全部注意力集中在它上面, 竭力达到它, 以有益心智的比赛精神与别的穆斯林相竞赛, 力图超过他们, 而且也应帮助他那些可能绊倒的同伴站起来, 继续比赛。مُوَلِّيْهَا (Muwalli-ha) 也含意为 “他使某东西作为支配自己的”, 就是说, 一个人首先确立一个目标, 然后把它作为自己一生中的支配因素。
2
وِجْھَۃٌ کے معنے ہیں وہ مقصد جس کی طرف انسان توجہ رکھتا ہے۔ (مفردات راغب)
3
فَاسْتَبِقُوا الْخَیْرَاتِ: اِسْتَبَـقَا الْبَابَ اَوْ اِلَیْہِ کے معنے ہیں اِبْتَدَرَا الْبَابَ: دروازہ تک پہنچنے میں ایک دوسرے سے آگے بڑھنے کی کوشش کی (اقرب الموارد) پس فَاسْتَبِقُوْا کے معنے ہونگے ایک دوسرے سے آگے بڑھنے کی کوشش کرو۔
b
3:134; 5:49; 35:33; 57:22.
155
Important Words:
وجھة (goal) is derived from وجه meaning, the face. وجھة therefore, means: (1) a direction to which one turns one’s face; (2) a goal or an object (Aqrab).
استبقوا (vie with one another) is formed from استبق which is derived from سبق which means, he went ahead of him and left him behind; he outstripped him; he excelled him in some quality. استبق means: (1) he tried to go ahead of others so as to reach the goal first; (2) he hastened and employed his full powers to attain or reach an object (Aqrab & Lane).
خیرات (good works) is the plural of خیرة which means (1) anything excessively good; (2) anything superior to other things (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This short verse contains, in a few words, a mighty lesson as to how the Muslims can achieve success in life. First, they should fix for themselves a goal and that goal should not be the attainment of a particular good but of every good. Nay, they should aspire for more than that. They should try to attain such things as are exceedingly good and superior to others. Again, they should not seek these things in a careless and haphazard manner but should hasten towards them, vying with one another in a spirit of healthy emulation to reach the goal before others.
The expression استبقوا (vie with one another) used here in the plural form also points to the fact that in this race for all that is good, Muslims should try to help those who are weak and assist them in the attainment of virtue. A true Muslim should not only himself strive after virtue but should also invite others to attain to the same stage of virtue which he himself has attained. The spiritual race referred to in the verse thus becomes a most peculiar race in which the competitors not only vie with one another but also look towards their comrades and help such of them as may stumble on their way or be lax in other respects.
The clause, Wherever you be, Allah will bring you all together, means that a Muslim should not think of vying with only those who immediately surround him and thus be satisfied by outstripping them, but should also remember the fact that in far-off places there may be those who are running very fast—faster than those who surround him—and as God will judge all together, a Muslim should not be unmindful of the unknown competitors but should try to spend his energies to the fullest possible extent so that he may truly top the list.
The clause is capable of yet another interpretation. It is human nature that when a man comes to know that the result of his works would be announced publicly, he strives all the harder to outdo others in the discharge of his duties. Hence, God calls upon Muslims to bear in mind that on a certain day they will be gathered together with the peoples of all ages and the results of their deeds will be announced before that huge assemblage; so they should exert themselves accordingly.
The clause, Surely, Allah has the power to do all that He wills, is intended to remind Muslims that there is no limit to man’s spiritual progress and development. A man can rise to any stage of progress and yet the All-Powerful God can help and guide him to the attainment of a still higher stage.
The words ھو مولیھا (which dominates him) literally mean, which he makes dominant over him, i.e. a man first sets up an objective and then makes it a dominating factor in his life. The expression ھومولیھا also means, to which he turns his face. In both these senses the underlying idea is that of engrossment and devotion.
b
3:134; 5:49; 35:33; 57:22.
171
The verse contains, in a few words, all the ingredients of a successful life: A Muslim should first fix for himself a definite goal. Then he should not only devote his whole attention to it and strain every nerve to attain it and vie with other Muslims in a spirit of healthy competition and try to excel them but should also help such of his comrades, as may happen to stumble, to rise up and continue the race. The word Muwalli-ha also means, "which he makes dominant over him," i.e. a man first sets up an objective and then makes it a dominating factor in his life.
وَمِنْ حَيْثُ خَرَجْتَ فَوَلِّ وَجْهَكَ شَطْرَ ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۖ وَإِنَّهُۥ لَلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّكَ ۗ وَمَا ٱللَّهُ بِغَٰفِلٍ عَمَّا تَعْمَلُونَ
2:145.
要把天房作为朝向, 对穆斯林来说应得到它的所在地麦加, 就成为必不可少。在本节经文中, 他们奉命竭尽全力去征服它, 而穆圣则奉命在他的一切战役中把他的注意力集中在此一目标, خَرَجْتَ (Kharajta) 这词也含义为 “你出去战斗” (Lane)。此词也表示征服麦加是穆圣自己的职责。而145节经文中指令涉及朝向的更改, 因此在150-151节中, 它指的是征服麦加, 不定式 خُرُوْج (Khuruj) 特别是指, 发出战斗命令。
此话暗示有朝一日麦加肯定要落入穆斯林手中。它被穆斯林征服, 在«古兰经» 17:81和28:86中也有过预言。当穆圣作为征服者带领一万穆斯林进入麦加时, «申命记» 33:2中的这预言也得到了实现。
خانہ کعبہ کی طرف نماز میں منہ کرنا تو کسی جگہ سے نکلنے سے تعلق نہیں رکھتا۔ بلکہ انسان خواہ کسی جگہ سے نکلے یا کسی جگہ داخل ہو رہا ہو بہر حال مسلمان کے لئے واجب ہے کہ نماز پڑھتے ہوئے خانہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرے۔ پس اس آیت کے الفاظ سے ظاہر ہے کہ اس جگہ لڑائیوں کا ذکر ہے کیونکہ یہاں خروج کا لفظ ہے اور خروج کا لفظ ہے لڑائی کی خاطر نکلنے کے معنے میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ پس مراد یہ ہے کہ اے مسلمانو! اب تمہیں جنگ پر مجبور کیا جائے گا اور تم جہاں کہیں بھی ہو گے تم پر دباؤ ڈالا جائے گا کہ تم اہل مکہ سے لڑو۔ ایسے موقعہ کے لئے حکم دیتا ہے کہ جب وہ مجبور کریں تو بے شک لڑائی کرو۔ لیکن لڑائی ک
See 2:145.
When the Ka‘bah was made the Qiblah it became essential for Muslims that they should have Mecca, in which it was situated, in their possession. They are enjoined in this verse to bend all their energies to its conquest and the Holy Prophet is commanded to keep his attention centred on this objective in all his campaigns, the word Kharajta also meaning "thou goest out for battle" (Lane). The word also signifies that the conquest of Mecca was the personal responsibility of the Holy Prophet. Moreover, whereas in v.145 the command pertains to the change of the Qiblah, in 150, 151 it refers to the conquest of Mecca, the infinitive Khuruj particularly meaning, to issue forth for battle.
The words imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Muslims. Its conquest by the Muslims had also been predicted in the Qur’an in 17:81, and 28:86. The prophecy contained in Deut. 33: 2 was also fulfilled when the Holy Prophet entered Mecca as a conqueror at the head of ten thousand Muslims.
See 2:145.
Important Words:
خرجت (thou comest forth) is from خرج which means: (1) he came forth; (2) he went forth; (3) he came forth or went forth for a battle (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Now when the Ka‘bah had been appointed the Qiblah of Muslims, it became necessary that Mecca should come under their control. The verse under comment suitably refers to that matter. Muslims are bidden henceforward to direct all their energies to the conquest of Mecca. In all his campaigns, the Holy Prophet was commanded to keep in view the taking of Mecca, which had now become the centre of Islam. This is borne out by the expression خرجت (thou comest forth) which also means "thou goest forth for a battle". The word خرجت "thou comest forth or goest forth" has thus nothing to do with the turning of the face to the Ka‘bah, at the time of Prayers; for Prayers are not performed walking. Obviously the commandment cannot mean that one should, while walking, pray with one’s face turned toward the Ka‘bah.
The words, for that is indeed the truth from thy Lord, evidently imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Holy Prophet. As considering the then helpless condition of the Muslims, such an achievement appeared to be almost impossible, so God gave His Messenger the assurance that the promise was a true one and its fulfilment was absolutely certain.
The expression, and Allah is not unmindful of what you do, provides a reason for the above promise. God was well aware of the deeds of the Muslims, knowing full well how they were striving to win His favour; so He could not let their labours go unrewarded. Just as He had established their connection with the Ka‘bah spiritually, so would He make them its masters physically.
a
2:145.
96
要把天房作为朝向, 对穆斯林来说应得到它的所在地麦加, 就成为必不可少。在本节经文中, 他们奉命竭尽全力去征服它, 而穆圣则奉命在他的一切战役中把他的注意力集中在此一目标, خَرَجْتَ (Kharajta) 这词也含义为 “你出去战斗” (Lane)。此词也表示征服麦加是穆圣自己的职责。而145节经文中指令涉及朝向的更改, 因此在150-151节中, 它指的是征服麦加, 不定式 خُرُوْج (Khuruj) 特别是指, 发出战斗命令。
97
此话暗示有朝一日麦加肯定要落入穆斯林手中。它被穆斯林征服, 在«古兰经» 17:81和28:86中也有过预言。当穆圣作为征服者带领一万穆斯林进入麦加时, «申命记» 33:2中的这预言也得到了实现。
1
خانہ کعبہ کی طرف نماز میں منہ کرنا تو کسی جگہ سے نکلنے سے تعلق نہیں رکھتا۔ بلکہ انسان خواہ کسی جگہ سے نکلے یا کسی جگہ داخل ہو رہا ہو بہر حال مسلمان کے لئے واجب ہے کہ نماز پڑھتے ہوئے خانہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرے۔ پس اس آیت کے الفاظ سے ظاہر ہے کہ اس جگہ لڑائیوں کا ذکر ہے کیونکہ یہاں خروج کا لفظ ہے اور خروج کا لفظ ہے لڑائی کی خاطر نکلنے کے معنے میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ پس مراد یہ ہے کہ اے مسلمانو! اب تمہیں جنگ پر مجبور کیا جائے گا اور تم جہاں کہیں بھی ہو گے تم پر دباؤ ڈالا جائے گا کہ تم اہل مکہ سے لڑو۔ ایسے موقعہ کے لئے حکم دیتا ہے کہ جب وہ مجبور کریں تو بے شک لڑائی کرو۔ لیکن لڑائی ک
a
See 2:145.
156
Important Words:
خرجت (thou comest forth) is from خرج which means: (1) he came forth; (2) he went forth; (3) he came forth or went forth for a battle (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Now when the Ka‘bah had been appointed the Qiblah of Muslims, it became necessary that Mecca should come under their control. The verse under comment suitably refers to that matter. Muslims are bidden henceforward to direct all their energies to the conquest of Mecca. In all his campaigns, the Holy Prophet was commanded to keep in view the taking of Mecca, which had now become the centre of Islam. This is borne out by the expression خرجت (thou comest forth) which also means "thou goest forth for a battle". The word خرجت "thou comest forth or goest forth" has thus nothing to do with the turning of the face to the Ka‘bah, at the time of Prayers; for Prayers are not performed walking. Obviously the commandment cannot mean that one should, while walking, pray with one’s face turned toward the Ka‘bah.
The words, for that is indeed the truth from thy Lord, evidently imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Holy Prophet. As considering the then helpless condition of the Muslims, such an achievement appeared to be almost impossible, so God gave His Messenger the assurance that the promise was a true one and its fulfilment was absolutely certain.
The expression, and Allah is not unmindful of what you do, provides a reason for the above promise. God was well aware of the deeds of the Muslims, knowing full well how they were striving to win His favour; so He could not let their labours go unrewarded. Just as He had established their connection with the Ka‘bah spiritually, so would He make them its masters physically.
c
See 2:145.
172
When the Ka‘bah was made the Qiblah it became essential for Muslims that they should have Mecca, in which it was situated, in their possession. They are enjoined in this verse to bend all their energies to its conquest and the Holy Prophet is commanded to keep his attention centred on this objective in all his campaigns, the word Kharajta also meaning "thou goest out for battle" (Lane). The word also signifies that the conquest of Mecca was the personal responsibility of the Holy Prophet. Moreover, whereas in v.145 the command pertains to the change of the Qiblah, in 150, 151 it refers to the conquest of Mecca, the infinitive Khuruj particularly meaning, to issue forth for battle.
173
The words imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Muslims. Its conquest by the Muslims had also been predicted in the Qur’an in 17:81, and 28:86. The prophecy contained in Deut. 33: 2 was also fulfilled when the Holy Prophet entered Mecca as a conqueror at the head of ten thousand Muslims.
وَمِنْ حَيْثُ خَرَجْتَ فَوَلِّ وَجْهَكَ شَطْرَ ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۚ وَحَيْثُ مَا كُنتُمْ فَوَلُّوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ شَطْرَهُۥ لِئَلَّا يَكُونَ لِلنَّاسِ عَلَيْكُمْ حُجَّةٌ إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوا۟ مِنْهُمْ فَلَا تَخْشَوْهُمْ وَٱخْشَوْنِى وَلِأُتِمَّ نِعْمَتِى عَلَيْكُمْ وَلَعَلَّكُمْ تَهْتَدُونَ
2:145, 150.
5:4.
5:4; 12:7.
这话的意思是, 夺下麦加, 安拉对穆斯林的恩惠就可完全了, 因为这意味着对全阿拉伯半岛的征服,从而使数千人成为伊斯兰教信者。这一结果充分地证明了上述预言; 因为征服麦加之后很快就有千万阿拉伯人皈依伊斯兰教。为什么征服麦加之后接着就有阿拉伯人普遍参加伊斯兰教, 另一原因是, 尽管阿拉伯人不信奉启示经书, 可是伊布拉欣的预言是他们 (阿拉伯人) 所知道的, 这个预言是:麦加不会被任何假先知的追随者征服, 而任何企图征服它的人会遭到毁灭。就在最近, 他们从阿比西尼亚侵略者阿布拉哈及其强大军队的不可思议地毁灭, 就看到了这预言实现的显著证明。
穆斯林还有责任不得忽视征服麦加的这一最高目标。
“以免人们再有反对你们的议论。” 这句话的意思是指, 如果穆斯林不能征服麦加, 伊斯兰教的敌人会很合理地提出异议, 说穆圣没有完成伊布拉欣的祈祷 (2:130), 因此他不能自称为主许的先知。而且, 穆斯林受命在祈祷时把脸转向的禁寺在异教的麦加人控制下是充满着偶像的。假如这些偶像依然留在天房内的话, 穆斯林会受到崇拜偶像的指责。如果在原来只拜一个安拉的禁寺内清除了偶像的话, 这种反对意见就会得到有效的答复了。因此在以天房取代耶路撒冷的圣寺作为朝向的指令之后, 接着而来的自然是征服麦加的命令。
اس جگہ عام مسلمانوں کا ذکر ہے جو لڑائی کے دائرہ سے باہر تھے اور انہیں کہا گیا ہے کہ جو مسلمان جہاد میں پھنس گئے ہیں ان کا کام یہ ہے کہ جہاں سے بھی لڑائی کے لئے نکلیں فتحِ بیت اللہ کو اپنا مطمحِ نظر بنائیں اور وہ مسلمان جو دائرۂِ جنگ سے باہر ہیں ان کا کام یہ ہے کہ وہ خانہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرکے نماز پڑھا کریں اور ہمیشہ اپنی توجہ اور دعائیں اس بارہ میں جاری رکھیں کہ خداتعالیٰ بیت اللہ کو پھر ہمارے سپرد کر دے۔
یعنی اگر تم مکہ فتح نہیں کرو گے تو دشمن کا تم پر الزام رہے گا۔ لیکن اگر محمد رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم اپنی جنگوں کا رخ فتح بیت اللہ کی طرف رکھیں گے اور دوسرے مسلمان بھی نمازوں اور دعاؤں میں اس کا خیال رکھیں گے تو بیت اللہ فتح ہو جائے گا اور کفار اور یہود کا مسلمانوں پر کوئی الزام نہیں رہے گا۔
2:145, 150.
5:4.
5:4; 12:7.
The Muslims were also enjoined never to lose sight of the supreme objective of conquering Mecca.
The words, that people may have no argument against you, mean that if the Muslims failed to conquer Mecca, the objection would quite legitimately be raised by the enemies of Islam that the Holy Prophet had not fulfilled the prayer of Abraham (2:130), and, therefore, he could not claim to be the Promised Prophet. Moreover, the House to which the Muslims were commanded to turn their faces in Prayers was, while under the control of the heathen Meccans, full of idols. If the idols had remained in the Ka‘bah, the Muslims would have been accused of worshipping them. This objection could only be effectively answered if the Holy House, which had been originally dedicated to the worship of One God, had been cleared of idols. Hence the commandment to substitute the Ka‘bah for the Temple of Jerusalem as the Qiblah was naturally followed by the injunction about the conquest of Mecca.
The words mean that with the taking of Mecca God’s favour on the Muslims would become complete, for it would mean the subjugation of all Arabia and the entering of thousands of men into the fold of Islam. The result amply justified the above prophecy; for the conquest of Mecca was rapidly followed by the conversion to Islam of thousands of Arabs. Another reason why the conquest of Mecca was followed by a general influx of Arabs into Islam was that although the Arabs followed no revealed Book, yet the prophecy of Abraham that Mecca would not be conquered by the followers of any false Prophet, and any people attempting it would meet with destruction, was known to them. They had only recently seen a remarkable illustration of the fulfilment of that prophecy in the miraculous destruction of the Abyssinian invader, Abraha, and his powerful army.
2:145, 150.
5:4.
5:4; 12:7.
Commentary:
The singular person in خرجت (thou comest forth) is used to emphasize the fact that the conquest of Mecca was the personal responsibility of the Holy Prophet. If he could persuade others to help him, well and good; if not, he alone stood responsible before God—a mighty responsibility indeed which also strikes at the very root of the objection that Islam waited for a declaration of the defensive war till it was strong enough to hit back.
The plural person in حیث ماکنتم (wherever you be) is used so as to include the Muslims of all places. Next to the Holy Prophet, they are also commanded to keep the same object in view, i.e. the conquest of Mecca. This verse and the preceding one should afford no ground for inferring that Islam bids its followers to wage an aggressive war. For, as amply borne out by history, by the time these verses were revealed, war had already commenced with the Meccans and it was they that had forced it upon the unwilling Muslims.
The words, that people may have no argument against you, mean that if the Muslims failed to conquer Mecca, the objection would quite legitimately be raised by the enemies of Islam, that the Holy Prophet had not fulfilled the prayer of Abraham, contained in 2:130, and therefore, could not claim to be the Promised Prophet. Moreover, the House to which the Muslims were commanded to turn their faces during Prayers was, while under the control of the heathen Meccans, full of idols. If the idols had continued to remain in the Ka‘bah, the Muslims might have been accused of worshipping idols. This objection could be effectively answered, if the Holy House, which had been originally dedicated to the worship of One God, had been cleared of idols. Hence the commandment to substitute the Ka‘bah for the Temple at Jerusalem as Qiblah was naturally followed by the injunction about the conquest of Mecca.
It may be added here that the conquest of Mecca by the Muslims had also been predicted in the Quran in 28:86, and 17:81. The prophecy contained in Deut. 33:2 was also fulfilled when the Holy Prophet entered Mecca as a conqueror at the head of ten thousand Muslims.
The clause, that I may perfect My favour upon you, provides yet another argument in favour of the commandment relating to the conquest of Mecca. God means to say that, with the taking of Mecca, God’s favour on the Muslims would begin to be perfected; for it would mean the subjugation of all Arabia and the influx of thousands of men into the fold of Islam. The result amply justified the prophecy; for the conquest of Mecca was rapidly followed by the conversion to Islam of thousands of Arabs. Most of the Arabs, at heart victims of the beauty of Islam, had deferred their acceptance of the new faith till the issue of the struggle between Muslims and Meccans had been finally settled, and now they virtually came forward in "troops" to join it.
Another reason why the conquest of Mecca was followed by a general influx of Arabs into Islam was that although the Arabs followed no revealed Book, yet the prophecy of Abraham that Mecca would not be conquered by the followers of any false Prophet, and any people attempting it would meet with destruction was well known to them. They had only recently seen a remarkable illustration of the fulfilment of this prophecy in the miraculous destruction of the Abyssinian invader Abraha and his powerful army. Thus when Mecca fell into the hands of the Holy Prophet, they were at once convinced of his truth and thousands of them hastened to embrace Islam.
In this and the preceding verses (vv. 145 and 150), the command to turn to the Ka‘bah has been mentioned thrice. This is not a repetition; for the first command, i.e. in v. 145, pertains to the change of the Qiblah, while the second and the third, i.e. in vv. 150 and 151, refer to the conquest of Mecca. But here, too, there is truly speaking no repetition, for the command about the conquest of Mecca contained in each of these two verses serves a different purpose. In v. 150 Muslims are asked to turn their attention to the conquest of Mecca because God wished them to do so. So they were duty bound to carry it out undeterred by any fear of failure; whereas in the verse under comment, i.e. v. 151, the benefits which were to accrue to Muslims on their carrying out the command relating to the conquest of Mecca have been mentioned. Those benefits briefly are: (1) refutation of the objections and criticism of the enemy; (2) conversion to Islam of hundreds of thousands of Arabs, including the kith and kin of the Muslims; and (3) enlargement of the political power of Islam.
b
2:145, 150.
c
5:4.
d
5:4; 12:7.
100
这话的意思是, 夺下麦加, 安拉对穆斯林的恩惠就可完全了, 因为这意味着对全阿拉伯半岛的征服,从而使数千人成为伊斯兰教信者。这一结果充分地证明了上述预言; 因为征服麦加之后很快就有千万阿拉伯人皈依伊斯兰教。为什么征服麦加之后接着就有阿拉伯人普遍参加伊斯兰教, 另一原因是, 尽管阿拉伯人不信奉启示经书, 可是伊布拉欣的预言是他们 (阿拉伯人) 所知道的, 这个预言是:麦加不会被任何假先知的追随者征服, 而任何企图征服它的人会遭到毁灭。就在最近, 他们从阿比西尼亚侵略者阿布拉哈及其强大军队的不可思议地毁灭, 就看到了这预言实现的显著证明。
98
穆斯林还有责任不得忽视征服麦加的这一最高目标。
99
“以免人们再有反对你们的议论。” 这句话的意思是指, 如果穆斯林不能征服麦加, 伊斯兰教的敌人会很合理地提出异议, 说穆圣没有完成伊布拉欣的祈祷 (2:130), 因此他不能自称为主许的先知。而且, 穆斯林受命在祈祷时把脸转向的禁寺在异教的麦加人控制下是充满着偶像的。假如这些偶像依然留在天房内的话, 穆斯林会受到崇拜偶像的指责。如果在原来只拜一个安拉的禁寺内清除了偶像的话, 这种反对意见就会得到有效的答复了。因此在以天房取代耶路撒冷的圣寺作为朝向的指令之后, 接着而来的自然是征服麦加的命令。
2
اس جگہ عام مسلمانوں کا ذکر ہے جو لڑائی کے دائرہ سے باہر تھے اور انہیں کہا گیا ہے کہ جو مسلمان جہاد میں پھنس گئے ہیں ان کا کام یہ ہے کہ جہاں سے بھی لڑائی کے لئے نکلیں فتحِ بیت اللہ کو اپنا مطمحِ نظر بنائیں اور وہ مسلمان جو دائرۂِ جنگ سے باہر ہیں ان کا کام یہ ہے کہ وہ خانہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرکے نماز پڑھا کریں اور ہمیشہ اپنی توجہ اور دعائیں اس بارہ میں جاری رکھیں کہ خداتعالیٰ بیت اللہ کو پھر ہمارے سپرد کر دے۔
3
یعنی اگر تم مکہ فتح نہیں کرو گے تو دشمن کا تم پر الزام رہے گا۔ لیکن اگر محمد رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم اپنی جنگوں کا رخ فتح بیت اللہ کی طرف رکھیں گے اور دوسرے مسلمان بھی نمازوں اور دعاؤں میں اس کا خیال رکھیں گے تو بیت اللہ فتح ہو جائے گا اور کفار اور یہود کا مسلمانوں پر کوئی الزام نہیں رہے گا۔
a
2:145, 150.
b
5:4.
c
5:4; 12:7.
157
Commentary:
The singular person in خرجت (thou comest forth) is used to emphasize the fact that the conquest of Mecca was the personal responsibility of the Holy Prophet. If he could persuade others to help him, well and good; if not, he alone stood responsible before God—a mighty responsibility indeed which also strikes at the very root of the objection that Islam waited for a declaration of the defensive war till it was strong enough to hit back.
The plural person in حیث ماکنتم (wherever you be) is used so as to include the Muslims of all places. Next to the Holy Prophet, they are also commanded to keep the same object in view, i.e. the conquest of Mecca. This verse and the preceding one should afford no ground for inferring that Islam bids its followers to wage an aggressive war. For, as amply borne out by history, by the time these verses were revealed, war had already commenced with the Meccans and it was they that had forced it upon the unwilling Muslims.
The words, that people may have no argument against you, mean that if the Muslims failed to conquer Mecca, the objection would quite legitimately be raised by the enemies of Islam, that the Holy Prophet had not fulfilled the prayer of Abraham, contained in 2:130, and therefore, could not claim to be the Promised Prophet. Moreover, the House to which the Muslims were commanded to turn their faces during Prayers was, while under the control of the heathen Meccans, full of idols. If the idols had continued to remain in the Ka‘bah, the Muslims might have been accused of worshipping idols. This objection could be effectively answered, if the Holy House, which had been originally dedicated to the worship of One God, had been cleared of idols. Hence the commandment to substitute the Ka‘bah for the Temple at Jerusalem as Qiblah was naturally followed by the injunction about the conquest of Mecca.
It may be added here that the conquest of Mecca by the Muslims had also been predicted in the Quran in 28:86, and 17:81. The prophecy contained in Deut. 33:2 was also fulfilled when the Holy Prophet entered Mecca as a conqueror at the head of ten thousand Muslims.
The clause, that I may perfect My favour upon you, provides yet another argument in favour of the commandment relating to the conquest of Mecca. God means to say that, with the taking of Mecca, God’s favour on the Muslims would begin to be perfected; for it would mean the subjugation of all Arabia and the influx of thousands of men into the fold of Islam. The result amply justified the prophecy; for the conquest of Mecca was rapidly followed by the conversion to Islam of thousands of Arabs. Most of the Arabs, at heart victims of the beauty of Islam, had deferred their acceptance of the new faith till the issue of the struggle between Muslims and Meccans had been finally settled, and now they virtually came forward in "troops" to join it.
Another reason why the conquest of Mecca was followed by a general influx of Arabs into Islam was that although the Arabs followed no revealed Book, yet the prophecy of Abraham that Mecca would not be conquered by the followers of any false Prophet, and any people attempting it would meet with destruction was well known to them. They had only recently seen a remarkable illustration of the fulfilment of this prophecy in the miraculous destruction of the Abyssinian invader Abraha and his powerful army. Thus when Mecca fell into the hands of the Holy Prophet, they were at once convinced of his truth and thousands of them hastened to embrace Islam.
In this and the preceding verses (vv. 145 and 150), the command to turn to the Ka‘bah has been mentioned thrice. This is not a repetition; for the first command, i.e. in v. 145, pertains to the change of the Qiblah, while the second and the third, i.e. in vv. 150 and 151, refer to the conquest of Mecca. But here, too, there is truly speaking no repetition, for the command about the conquest of Mecca contained in each of these two verses serves a different purpose. In v. 150 Muslims are asked to turn their attention to the conquest of Mecca because God wished them to do so. So they were duty bound to carry it out undeterred by any fear of failure; whereas in the verse under comment, i.e. v. 151, the benefits which were to accrue to Muslims on their carrying out the command relating to the conquest of Mecca have been mentioned. Those benefits briefly are: (1) refutation of the objections and criticism of the enemy; (2) conversion to Islam of hundreds of thousands of Arabs, including the kith and kin of the Muslims; and (3) enlargement of the political power of Islam.
a
2:145, 150.
b
5:4.
c
5:4; 12:7.
174
The Muslims were also enjoined never to lose sight of the supreme objective of conquering Mecca.
175
The words, that people may have no argument against you, mean that if the Muslims failed to conquer Mecca, the objection would quite legitimately be raised by the enemies of Islam that the Holy Prophet had not fulfilled the prayer of Abraham (2:130), and, therefore, he could not claim to be the Promised Prophet. Moreover, the House to which the Muslims were commanded to turn their faces in Prayers was, while under the control of the heathen Meccans, full of idols. If the idols had remained in the Ka‘bah, the Muslims would have been accused of worshipping them. This objection could only be effectively answered if the Holy House, which had been originally dedicated to the worship of One God, had been cleared of idols. Hence the commandment to substitute the Ka‘bah for the Temple of Jerusalem as the Qiblah was naturally followed by the injunction about the conquest of Mecca.
176
The words mean that with the taking of Mecca God’s favour on the Muslims would become complete, for it would mean the subjugation of all Arabia and the entering of thousands of men into the fold of Islam. The result amply justified the above prophecy; for the conquest of Mecca was rapidly followed by the conversion to Islam of thousands of Arabs. Another reason why the conquest of Mecca was followed by a general influx of Arabs into Islam was that although the Arabs followed no revealed Book, yet the prophecy of Abraham that Mecca would not be conquered by the followers of any false Prophet, and any people attempting it would meet with destruction, was known to them. They had only recently seen a remarkable illustration of the fulfilment of that prophecy in the miraculous destruction of the Abyssinian invader, Abraha, and his powerful army.
كَمَآ أَرْسَلْنَا فِيكُمْ رَسُولًا مِّنكُمْ يَتْلُوا۟ عَلَيْكُمْ ءَايَٰتِنَا وَيُزَكِّيكُمْ وَيُعَلِّمُكُمُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَٱلْحِكْمَةَ وَيُعَلِّمُكُم مَّا لَمْ تَكُونُوا۟ تَعْلَمُونَ
See 2:130.
With a slight change in the arrangement of the words this verse refers to the work of the Holy Prophet in exactly the same words in which Abraham prayed to God about the appearance of a Prophet among the Meccans (2:130), which clearly shows that Abraham’s prayer had found fulfilment in the person of the Holy Prophet.
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
Commentary:
The word کما meaning "even as" has been used to connect this verse with the preceding one by pointing out that God will bestow upon the believers the favours mentioned in the preceding verse even as, or just as, He has favoured them with a Prophet.
With a slight change in the arrangement of the words this verse refers to the work of the Holy Prophet in exactly the same words in which Abraham prayed to God about the appearance of a Prophet among the Meccans (2:130), which clearly shows that Abraham’s prayer had found fulfilment in the person of the Holy Prophet. The change in arrangement is that, while recounting the favours of God, this verse, unlike verse 2:130, mentions the work of purification before that of the teaching of the Book and Wisdom, because though in theory the teaching of the Book may come first, in actual practice purification is more important than the teaching of the Book and Wisdom; for whereas the former is the end, the latter is simply the means to that end.
Another difference between this verse and 2:130 is that whereas the latter ends with the words, Thou art the Mighty, the Wise, the former concludes with the words, And (he) teaches you that which you did not know. The reason for this change is not far to seek. Abraham had used the words, Surely, Thou art the Mighty, the Wise, in his prayer, meaning that God being Mighty, it was not difficult for Him to accept his prayer; and as He was also Wise, He knew best what the requirements of his posterity would be. But when God spoke of the actual fulfilment of this prayer, it was quite unnecessary to repeat these words. So in place of the above-quoted words, the words, (he) teaches you that which you did not know, have been added to signify: firstly, that, while accepting the prayer God had granted even more than Abraham had prayed for; and secondly, that the teachings of the Holy Prophet were far in advance of the teachings of the former Prophets and were such as the world really needed but had not so far known.
a
2:130.
101
这节经文陈述将来穆圣的工作所用的字句和伊布拉欣 (亚伯拉罕) 向安拉祈求在麦加人中间出现一位先知的字句完全相同 (2:130)。只有字句先后次序略有变化, 这清楚地表明伊布拉欣的祈祷已在穆圣身上应验。
a
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
158
Commentary:
The word کما meaning "even as" has been used to connect this verse with the preceding one by pointing out that God will bestow upon the believers the favours mentioned in the preceding verse even as, or just as, He has favoured them with a Prophet.
With a slight change in the arrangement of the words this verse refers to the work of the Holy Prophet in exactly the same words in which Abraham prayed to God about the appearance of a Prophet among the Meccans (2:130), which clearly shows that Abraham’s prayer had found fulfilment in the person of the Holy Prophet. The change in arrangement is that, while recounting the favours of God, this verse, unlike verse 2:130, mentions the work of purification before that of the teaching of the Book and Wisdom, because though in theory the teaching of the Book may come first, in actual practice purification is more important than the teaching of the Book and Wisdom; for whereas the former is the end, the latter is simply the means to that end.
Another difference between this verse and 2:130 is that whereas the latter ends with the words, Thou art the Mighty, the Wise, the former concludes with the words, And (he) teaches you that which you did not know. The reason for this change is not far to seek. Abraham had used the words, Surely, Thou art the Mighty, the Wise, in his prayer, meaning that God being Mighty, it was not difficult for Him to accept his prayer; and as He was also Wise, He knew best what the requirements of his posterity would be. But when God spoke of the actual fulfilment of this prayer, it was quite unnecessary to repeat these words. So in place of the above-quoted words, the words, (he) teaches you that which you did not know, have been added to signify: firstly, that, while accepting the prayer God had granted even more than Abraham had prayed for; and secondly, that the teachings of the Holy Prophet were far in advance of the teachings of the former Prophets and were such as the world really needed but had not so far known.
a
See 2:130.
177
With a slight change in the arrangement of the words this verse refers to the work of the Holy Prophet in exactly the same words in which Abraham prayed to God about the appearance of a Prophet among the Meccans (2:130), which clearly shows that Abraham’s prayer had found fulfilment in the person of the Holy Prophet.
فَٱذْكُرُونِىٓ أَذْكُرْكُمْ وَٱشْكُرُوا۟ لِى وَلَا تَكْفُرُونِ
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
Remembrance of God on the part of man means, to remember Him with love and devotion, to carry out His commands, to bear in mind His attributes, to glorify Him and offer prayers to Him. And remembrance of man on the part of God signifies, God’s drawing man near to Himself, bestowing favours upon him and making provision for his welfare.
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
Important Words:
فاذکرونی اذکرکم (so remember Me, I will remember you). The verb ذکرہ means, he remembered him; he bore it or him in mind; he spoke or talked of him. ذکر الله means, he remembered God; he glorified God and extolled His greatness; he prayed to Him or offered prayers to Him. ذکرہ الله means, God bestowed His favours on him; He called him to His presence to do him honour. The noun ذکر means, remembrance; mentioning or speaking of; eminence; honour; good name (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
اشکروا (render thanks) is from شکر i.e. he thanked; he was grateful. شکر الله means, he acknowledged the beneficence of God, rendering Him obedience and abstaining from disobedience (Lane).
Commentary:
Remembrance of God on the part of man means, to remember Him with love and devotion, to carry out His behests, to bear in mind His attributes, to glorify Him and offer prayers to Him; and remembrance of man on the part of God signifies, God’s drawing him near to Himself, bestowing favours on him and making provision for his welfare. Thus we are here told that if we seek nearness to God, He will certainly draw us near to Himself. According to yet another meaning of the word ذکر i.e. honour and eminence, the verse would mean that if the Muslims will remember God, He will make them honoured and eminent in the world.
The expression, remember Me, I will remember you, can also mean that one who truly loves God will eventually attract the love of God. Remembrance is really born of love and is in a way synonymous with it. Indeed, nobody can remember an object more than a lover does the object of his love.
b
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
102
就人而言, 记住安拉的意义就是, 要怀着热爱和虔诚来记得他, 要执行他的指令, 要牢记他的常德, 要赞美他和向他祈祷。而就安拉来说, 记得世人的意思是安拉使世人向他靠拢, 施恩惠于世人并为世人的幸福作准备。
a
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
159
Important Words:
فاذکرونی اذکرکم (so remember Me, I will remember you). The verb ذکرہ means, he remembered him; he bore it or him in mind; he spoke or talked of him. ذکر الله means, he remembered God; he glorified God and extolled His greatness; he prayed to Him or offered prayers to Him. ذکرہ الله means, God bestowed His favours on him; He called him to His presence to do him honour. The noun ذکر means, remembrance; mentioning or speaking of; eminence; honour; good name (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
اشکروا (render thanks) is from شکر i.e. he thanked; he was grateful. شکر الله means, he acknowledged the beneficence of God, rendering Him obedience and abstaining from disobedience (Lane).
Commentary:
Remembrance of God on the part of man means, to remember Him with love and devotion, to carry out His behests, to bear in mind His attributes, to glorify Him and offer prayers to Him; and remembrance of man on the part of God signifies, God’s drawing him near to Himself, bestowing favours on him and making provision for his welfare. Thus we are here told that if we seek nearness to God, He will certainly draw us near to Himself. According to yet another meaning of the word ذکر i.e. honour and eminence, the verse would mean that if the Muslims will remember God, He will make them honoured and eminent in the world.
The expression, remember Me, I will remember you, can also mean that one who truly loves God will eventually attract the love of God. Remembrance is really born of love and is in a way synonymous with it. Indeed, nobody can remember an object more than a lover does the object of his love.
b
2:204; 8:46; 62:11.
178
Remembrance of God on the part of man means, to remember Him with love and devotion, to carry out His commands, to bear in mind His attributes, to glorify Him and offer prayers to Him. And remembrance of man on the part of God signifies, God’s drawing man near to Himself, bestowing favours upon him and making provision for his welfare.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱسْتَعِينُوا۟ بِٱلصَّبْرِ وَٱلصَّلَوٰةِ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ مَعَ ٱلصَّٰبِرِينَ
2:46.
صَبْر (Sabr) 的含义是 (1) 坚持某种事情; (2) 以刚毅的精神忍受折磨而不抱怨或咕哝; (3) 固守天经和明理的支配; 制止做天经和明理所禁止的一切。(مُفْرَدَات)
本节经文包含着成功的金科玉律。第一, 一个穆斯林应坚定地保持他的努力, 绝不松懈于达到他的目的的奋斗, 绝不丧失信心, 同时避免一切有害的事, 坚持一切有益的事。第二, 他应向安拉祈求成功; 因为只有他 (安拉) 才是一切善事的根源。صَبْر (Sabr, 坚忍不拔) 这词在本节经文中位于 صَلَاة (Salat, 祈祷) 这词之前, 是为了强调遵守安拉的法令的重要性, 因为人有时在无知之中对安拉的法令 «古兰经» 没有重视。通常, 祈祷只有在使用安拉为达到目的所创造的一切必要的方法时才能收效。
See 2:46.
Sabr means, (1) to persevere in something; (2) to endure afflictions with fortitude and without complaint or murmur; (3) to hold fast to the Divine Law and the dictates of reason; (4) to refrain from doing what the Divine Law and reason forbid (Mufradat).
The verse contains a golden principle of success. First, a Muslim should patiently persevere in his endeavours, never relaxing his efforts to achieve his object and never losing heart, at the same time avoiding what is harmful, and sticking fast to all that is good. Secondly, he should pray to God for success; for He alone is the Source of all good. The word Sabr (patient, perseverance) precedes the word Salat (Prayer) in the verse in order to emphasize the importance of observing the laws of God which are sometimes flouted in ignorance. Ordinarily, Prayer can be effective only when it is accompanied by the use of all the necessary means created by God for the attainment of an object.
See 2:46.
Important Words:
صبر (patience) means: (1) to be steadfast and constant in something; (2) to endure afflictions with fortitude and without complaint or murmur; (3) to hold fast to the divine law and the dictates of reason; (4) to refrain from doing what the divine law and reason forbid (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse contains a golden principle of success. Firstly, a man should be constant in his endeavours, never relaxing his efforts and never losing heart, at the same time avoiding what is harmful and sticking fast to all that is good. Secondly, he should pray to God for success; for He alone is the source of all good.
The word صبر (patience) precedes the word صلوة (prayer) in the verse to emphasize the importance of observing the laws of God which are sometimes flouted in ignorance. Ordinarily, a prayer can be effective only when it is accompanied by the use of all the necessary means created by God for the attainment of an object. This fact, however, does not minimize the importance of prayer, nor does it impose any limit on the omnipotence of God. If God so wills it, prayer can work wonders even where all earthly means fail.
Islam does not teach utter and blind dependence on material means. Prayer indeed is the essence of Islam. Man is neither omniscient nor omnipotent, and if he does not seek divine guidance and assistance, he can neither see all good nor can he secure it for himself.
As explained under Important Words, the word صبر also signifies, enduring afflictions with fortitude and without complaint and murmur. In this sense the verse would mean that, the present being the time of war and bloodshed, Muslims should bear these hardships with perfect patience and fortitude and that if they did so, God would succour them in their trails.
The concluding portion of the verse, i.e. Allah is with the steadfast, seems to confine itself to صبر only, excluding the element of صلوة. But it is not so really, for صبر in its wider sense includes prayer also. What is meant is that Allah is with those who are steadfast in their endeavours and are steadfast in their prayers. The principle provides a wonderful key to success.
c
2:46.
103
صَبْر (Sabr) 的含义是 (1) 坚持某种事情; (2) 以刚毅的精神忍受折磨而不抱怨或咕哝; (3) 固守天经和明理的支配; 制止做天经和明理所禁止的一切。(مُفْرَدَات)
104
本节经文包含着成功的金科玉律。第一, 一个穆斯林应坚定地保持他的努力, 绝不松懈于达到他的目的的奋斗, 绝不丧失信心, 同时避免一切有害的事, 坚持一切有益的事。第二, 他应向安拉祈求成功; 因为只有他 (安拉) 才是一切善事的根源。صَبْر (Sabr, 坚忍不拔) 这词在本节经文中位于 صَلَاة (Salat, 祈祷) 这词之前, 是为了强调遵守安拉的法令的重要性, 因为人有时在无知之中对安拉的法令 «古兰经» 没有重视。通常, 祈祷只有在使用安拉为达到目的所创造的一切必要的方法时才能收效。
a
See 2:46.
160
Important Words:
صبر (patience) means: (1) to be steadfast and constant in something; (2) to endure afflictions with fortitude and without complaint or murmur; (3) to hold fast to the divine law and the dictates of reason; (4) to refrain from doing what the divine law and reason forbid (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse contains a golden principle of success. Firstly, a man should be constant in his endeavours, never relaxing his efforts and never losing heart, at the same time avoiding what is harmful and sticking fast to all that is good. Secondly, he should pray to God for success; for He alone is the source of all good.
The word صبر (patience) precedes the word صلوة (prayer) in the verse to emphasize the importance of observing the laws of God which are sometimes flouted in ignorance. Ordinarily, a prayer can be effective only when it is accompanied by the use of all the necessary means created by God for the attainment of an object. This fact, however, does not minimize the importance of prayer, nor does it impose any limit on the omnipotence of God. If God so wills it, prayer can work wonders even where all earthly means fail.
Islam does not teach utter and blind dependence on material means. Prayer indeed is the essence of Islam. Man is neither omniscient nor omnipotent, and if he does not seek divine guidance and assistance, he can neither see all good nor can he secure it for himself.
As explained under Important Words, the word صبر also signifies, enduring afflictions with fortitude and without complaint and murmur. In this sense the verse would mean that, the present being the time of war and bloodshed, Muslims should bear these hardships with perfect patience and fortitude and that if they did so, God would succour them in their trails.
The concluding portion of the verse, i.e. Allah is with the steadfast, seems to confine itself to صبر only, excluding the element of صلوة. But it is not so really, for صبر in its wider sense includes prayer also. What is meant is that Allah is with those who are steadfast in their endeavours and are steadfast in their prayers. The principle provides a wonderful key to success.
c
See 2:46.
179
Sabr means, (1) to persevere in something; (2) to endure afflictions with fortitude and without complaint or murmur; (3) to hold fast to the Divine Law and the dictates of reason; (4) to refrain from doing what the Divine Law and reason forbid (Mufradat).
180
The verse contains a golden principle of success. First, a Muslim should patiently persevere in his endeavours, never relaxing his efforts to achieve his object and never losing heart, at the same time avoiding what is harmful, and sticking fast to all that is good. Secondly, he should pray to God for success; for He alone is the Source of all good. The word Sabr (patient, perseverance) precedes the word Salat (Prayer) in the verse in order to emphasize the importance of observing the laws of God which are sometimes flouted in ignorance. Ordinarily, Prayer can be effective only when it is accompanied by the use of all the necessary means created by God for the attainment of an object.
وَلَا تَقُولُوا۟ لِمَن يُقْتَلُ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ أَمْوَٰتٌۢ ۚ بَلْ أَحْيَآءٌ وَلَٰكِن لَّا تَشْعُرُونَ
3:170.
Ahya’ is the plural of Hayy which, among other things, means: (1) One whose lifework does not go in vain; (2) one whose death is avenged. The verse comprises a great psychological truth which is calculated to exercise tremendous influence on the life and progress of a people. A people, who do not properly honour the memory of their martyrs and do not take steps to remove the fear of death from their hearts, seal their own fate.
3:170.
Important Words:
احیاء (living) is the plural of حی which, among other things, means: (1) one whose life work does not go in vain; (2) one whose death is avenged. A well-known pre-Islamic poet, Harith ibn Hillizah, author of the seventh Mu‘allaqah, says:
إن نبشتم مابین ملحة فالصا قب فیھا الاموات والاحیاء i.e. If you dig the graves between Milhah and Saqib, you will find some who are dead, and others who are living. In this couplet by the "living", the poet means such persons as were slain in battle but whose blood was avenged, and by the "dead" he means those whose blood was not avenged.
Commentary:
The teaching about صبر (steadfastness) naturally brings in the question of sacrifices that Muslims were making in the cause of Islam. Therefore the Quran suitably refers here to the subject of martyrdom. Death is not the end of life, and in this respect believers and unbelievers stand on the same footing and the martyrs too enjoy no distinction. Nor would it be wrong to speak of them as dead in the ordinary sense of the word. But the word احیاء (living) has been used here about martyrs in a special sense.
As explained under Important Words above, the word حی (living) is also applied to him whose work, or, more properly speaking, the cause for which he lays down his life, does not come to an end with his death. The verse, therefore, points out that those who lay down their lives for Islam should not be regarded as dead, because the cause for which they give their lives still stands and is all the more strongly upheld by others who take their places.
Again, according to the Arabic idiom, حی (living) is also one whose blood is avenged. The verse, therefore, implies that as full satisfaction is taken for the blood of Muslims killed in the way of God, not only in the sense that far more non-Muslims join the fold of Islam than those killed in the wars but also in the sense that the number of non-Muslims killed is much larger than those killed among the Muslims, therefore Muslim martyrs are not really dead.
The word حی (living) may possess yet another significance. As a rule, life after death does not fully begin immediately after death. The soul of man continues in a state of torpor for sometime after death. This period varies with different persons according to the degree of their spiritual purity. As martyrs sacrifice their lives for the sake of God, their souls do not remain long in torpor but are quickly revived into a new life. This is one of the reasons why martyrs are called living, not dead.
The verse comprises a great psychological truth which is calculated to exercise immense influence on the life and progress of a people. A community that does not duly honour those of its members who lay down their lives for the cause for which the community stands, sows the seed of its own ruin. Again, a community which does not arrange to remove the fear of death from the hearts of its members, seals its own fate. The verse under comment provides an effective safeguard against both these dangers.
a
3:170.
105
اَحْيَاء (Ahya’) 是 حَيّ (Hayy) 的复数形式, 特指: (1) 一个一生工作都有成果的人; (2) 一个死亡得到雪耻的人。本节经文包含着一大心理学真理, 这一真理被认为对一个民族的生存与发展产生巨大的影响。如果不采取措施消除他们内心对死亡的畏惧, 那就注定他们自己的命运。
a
3:170.
161
Important Words:
احیاء (living) is the plural of حی which, among other things, means: (1) one whose life work does not go in vain; (2) one whose death is avenged. A well-known pre-Islamic poet, Harith ibn Hillizah, author of the seventh Mu‘allaqah, says:
إن نبشتم مابین ملحة فالصا قب فیھا الاموات والاحیاء i.e. If you dig the graves between Milhah and Saqib, you will find some who are dead, and others who are living. In this couplet by the "living", the poet means such persons as were slain in battle but whose blood was avenged, and by the "dead" he means those whose blood was not avenged.
Commentary:
The teaching about صبر (steadfastness) naturally brings in the question of sacrifices that Muslims were making in the cause of Islam. Therefore the Quran suitably refers here to the subject of martyrdom. Death is not the end of life, and in this respect believers and unbelievers stand on the same footing and the martyrs too enjoy no distinction. Nor would it be wrong to speak of them as dead in the ordinary sense of the word. But the word احیاء (living) has been used here about martyrs in a special sense.
As explained under Important Words above, the word حی (living) is also applied to him whose work, or, more properly speaking, the cause for which he lays down his life, does not come to an end with his death. The verse, therefore, points out that those who lay down their lives for Islam should not be regarded as dead, because the cause for which they give their lives still stands and is all the more strongly upheld by others who take their places.
Again, according to the Arabic idiom, حی (living) is also one whose blood is avenged. The verse, therefore, implies that as full satisfaction is taken for the blood of Muslims killed in the way of God, not only in the sense that far more non-Muslims join the fold of Islam than those killed in the wars but also in the sense that the number of non-Muslims killed is much larger than those killed among the Muslims, therefore Muslim martyrs are not really dead.
The word حی (living) may possess yet another significance. As a rule, life after death does not fully begin immediately after death. The soul of man continues in a state of torpor for sometime after death. This period varies with different persons according to the degree of their spiritual purity. As martyrs sacrifice their lives for the sake of God, their souls do not remain long in torpor but are quickly revived into a new life. This is one of the reasons why martyrs are called living, not dead.
The verse comprises a great psychological truth which is calculated to exercise immense influence on the life and progress of a people. A community that does not duly honour those of its members who lay down their lives for the cause for which the community stands, sows the seed of its own ruin. Again, a community which does not arrange to remove the fear of death from the hearts of its members, seals its own fate. The verse under comment provides an effective safeguard against both these dangers.
a
3:170.
181
Ahya’ is the plural of Hayy which, among other things, means: (1) One whose lifework does not go in vain; (2) one whose death is avenged. The verse comprises a great psychological truth which is calculated to exercise tremendous influence on the life and progress of a people. A people, who do not properly honour the memory of their martyrs and do not take steps to remove the fear of death from their hearts, seal their own fate.
وَلَنَبْلُوَنَّكُم بِشَىْءٍ مِّنَ ٱلْخَوْفِ وَٱلْجُوعِ وَنَقْصٍ مِّنَ ٱلْأَمْوَٰلِ وَٱلْأَنفُسِ وَٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ ۗ وَبَشِّرِ ٱلصَّٰبِرِينَ
3:187.
This verse constitutes fitting sequel to the preceding one. Muslims should be prepared not only to lay down their lives in the cause of Islam but should also be prepared to suffer all sorts of afflictions which will be imposed on them as a trial.
3:187.
Important Words:
لنبلونکم (and We will try you). لنبلون is derived from بلاء which has two meanings: (1) learning the state or condition of a person by means of a trial or test whether through favours or afflictions; (2) manifesting the goodness or badness of an object by a similar means. ابتلاء also means, a trial or a test imposed on a person with a view to learning or manifesting his true condition (Aqrab & Lane). See also 2:50.
Commentary:
This verse comes as a fitting sequel to the preceding one. Muslims should be prepared not only to lay down their lives in the cause of Islam but also to suffer diverse forms of affliction which will be imposed on them as a trial. According to the Quran, God has generally two purposes in "proving" men. He "proves" or tries those who have attained to a high stage of spiritual advancement, as was the case with Abraham (2:125); and He also tries those who have not yet attained to thatstage (29:3). His object in "proving" the former is to bring them to the notice of the people and make them shine as models of virtue and purity; while in the case of the latter, the purpose is to make them acquainted with their own weaknesses so that they may try to improve their condition. Though misfortunes and afflictions involve a certain amount of pain, they also afford a good opportunity for spiritual reformation and purification. Thus afflictions and calamities have their use. They serve to strengthen the faith. Those who remain steadfast under trials, despite afflictions, become entitled to a great reward from God. A trial also sometimes becomes a means of exposing the weakness of a person and of his downfall; for after all it is an examination which, though held with the object of promoting a student, sometimes results in his failure. See 7:177.
The tests by means of which God intended to "prove" the faithful are, as stated in this verse: (1) Fear, i.e. a state or condition in which fear will dominate them, the enemy surrounding them with diverse dangers. (2) Hunger, i.e. shortage of food; the enemy will not only cut off their means of communication but will also completely boycott them, leaving them stranded without food or provision. The word "hunger" may also signify a state of famine. (3) Loss of wealth and property. The enemy will raid Muslims repeatedly and inflict heavy losses on them. (4) Loss of lives, i.e. the cruel war inflicted on them by the enemy will also cause loss of life. (5) Loss of fruits. The action of the enemy will not be confined to inflicting loss of lives and property only but will extend to inflicting loss of crops as well. As ثمرة (fruit) also means the fruit of one’s labour or the profit accruing to a man from any source, loss of fruits also signifies disorganization of trade and industry.
All these losses coming together constituted indeed a very heavy burden; but they were borne by the Muslims with such patience and fortitude as is unrivalled in all history. God tried them and found them truly patient.
b
3:187.
106
本节经文构成对前一节的合适延续。穆斯林不但应准备在伊斯兰教的事业中献出他们的生命, 而且还应准备经受强加于他们的各种折磨, 当作一种考验。
a
3:187.
162
Important Words:
لنبلونکم (and We will try you). لنبلون is derived from بلاء which has two meanings: (1) learning the state or condition of a person by means of a trial or test whether through favours or afflictions; (2) manifesting the goodness or badness of an object by a similar means. ابتلاء also means, a trial or a test imposed on a person with a view to learning or manifesting his true condition (Aqrab & Lane). See also 2:50.
Commentary:
This verse comes as a fitting sequel to the preceding one. Muslims should be prepared not only to lay down their lives in the cause of Islam but also to suffer diverse forms of affliction which will be imposed on them as a trial. According to the Quran, God has generally two purposes in "proving" men. He "proves" or tries those who have attained to a high stage of spiritual advancement, as was the case with Abraham (2:125); and He also tries those who have not yet attained to thatstage (29:3). His object in "proving" the former is to bring them to the notice of the people and make them shine as models of virtue and purity; while in the case of the latter, the purpose is to make them acquainted with their own weaknesses so that they may try to improve their condition. Though misfortunes and afflictions involve a certain amount of pain, they also afford a good opportunity for spiritual reformation and purification. Thus afflictions and calamities have their use. They serve to strengthen the faith. Those who remain steadfast under trials, despite afflictions, become entitled to a great reward from God. A trial also sometimes becomes a means of exposing the weakness of a person and of his downfall; for after all it is an examination which, though held with the object of promoting a student, sometimes results in his failure. See 7:177.
The tests by means of which God intended to "prove" the faithful are, as stated in this verse: (1) Fear, i.e. a state or condition in which fear will dominate them, the enemy surrounding them with diverse dangers. (2) Hunger, i.e. shortage of food; the enemy will not only cut off their means of communication but will also completely boycott them, leaving them stranded without food or provision. The word "hunger" may also signify a state of famine. (3) Loss of wealth and property. The enemy will raid Muslims repeatedly and inflict heavy losses on them. (4) Loss of lives, i.e. the cruel war inflicted on them by the enemy will also cause loss of life. (5) Loss of fruits. The action of the enemy will not be confined to inflicting loss of lives and property only but will extend to inflicting loss of crops as well. As ثمرة (fruit) also means the fruit of one’s labour or the profit accruing to a man from any source, loss of fruits also signifies disorganization of trade and industry.
All these losses coming together constituted indeed a very heavy burden; but they were borne by the Muslims with such patience and fortitude as is unrivalled in all history. God tried them and found them truly patient.
b
3:187.
182
This verse constitutes fitting sequel to the preceding one. Muslims should be prepared not only to lay down their lives in the cause of Islam but should also be prepared to suffer all sorts of afflictions which will be imposed on them as a trial.
ٱلَّذِينَ إِذَآ أَصَٰبَتْهُم مُّصِيبَةٌ قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّا لِلَّهِ وَإِنَّآ إِلَيْهِ رَٰجِعُونَ
22:36.
7:126; 26:51.
God is the Master of all we possess, including our ownselves. If the Owner in His infinite wisdom deems fit to take away anything from us, we have no ground for complaint or demur. So every misfortune that befalls us should, instead of depressing us, spur us to make yet greater efforts to achieve still better results in life. Thus the formula contained in this verse is not a mere verbal incantation but a wise counsel and a timely warning.
22:36.
7:126; 26:51.
Commentary:
This verse provides a true definition of the term صابر (a patient person) as mentioned in the concluding portion of the preceding verse. A صابر who is vouchsafed glad tidings in the foregoing verse is one who bears all sorts of calamities and afflictions with complete restraint and fortitude, uttering no word of complaint or murmur but sincerely saying, Surely to Allah we belong and to Him shall we return. These words comprise a formula which every Muslim is directed to utter when he is afflicted with any misfortune relating to life, property, etc.
God is the Master of all we possess, including our own selves. If the Owner in His infinite wisdom deems fit to take away anything from us, we have no ground for complaint or murmur. We should indeed be grateful for what we receive from God, but there is no justification for murmuring at a loss, because we possess no inherent right to any gift.
The clause to Allah we belong also teaches us the great spiritual truth that we have no real connection with the things of this world and, therefore, the loss of such things should cause us no real grief. Similarly, the other part of the formula, viz., and surely to Him shall we return, also contains an equally grand principle. We come from God and will have to go back to Him, when we shall have to render an account of all our deeds. So every misfortune that befalls us should, instead of depressing us, spur us to make yet greater efforts to achieve still better results in life. Thus the formula contained in this verse is not a mere verbal incantation but a great counsel and a great warning. When a Muslim sincerely utters this formula on occasions of loss, grief or bereavement, its true import is bound to be deeply impressed upon his mind and to sustain him in his hours of trials and tribulations. Nay, it is calculated to do something more; it helps to strengthen his connection with his Maker and make Him the centre of all his thoughts and actions.
c
22:36.
d
7:126; 26:51.
107
安拉是我们所拥有的一切的主宰, 包括我们自己在内的主宰。如果主宰以其无限智慧认为取走我们的任何一物是合适的, 我们毫无理由埋怨或反对。因此临到我们头上的每一不幸, 不应使我们消沉而应鞭策我们作出更大的努力, 争取人生更加美好的成果。因此本节经文中所引用的这个信条不是一句口头禅而是一个贤明的忠告和一个及时的警告。
a
22:36.
b
7:126; 26:51.
163
Commentary:
This verse provides a true definition of the term صابر (a patient person) as mentioned in the concluding portion of the preceding verse. A صابر who is vouchsafed glad tidings in the foregoing verse is one who bears all sorts of calamities and afflictions with complete restraint and fortitude, uttering no word of complaint or murmur but sincerely saying, Surely to Allah we belong and to Him shall we return. These words comprise a formula which every Muslim is directed to utter when he is afflicted with any misfortune relating to life, property, etc.
God is the Master of all we possess, including our own selves. If the Owner in His infinite wisdom deems fit to take away anything from us, we have no ground for complaint or murmur. We should indeed be grateful for what we receive from God, but there is no justification for murmuring at a loss, because we possess no inherent right to any gift.
The clause to Allah we belong also teaches us the great spiritual truth that we have no real connection with the things of this world and, therefore, the loss of such things should cause us no real grief. Similarly, the other part of the formula, viz., and surely to Him shall we return, also contains an equally grand principle. We come from God and will have to go back to Him, when we shall have to render an account of all our deeds. So every misfortune that befalls us should, instead of depressing us, spur us to make yet greater efforts to achieve still better results in life. Thus the formula contained in this verse is not a mere verbal incantation but a great counsel and a great warning. When a Muslim sincerely utters this formula on occasions of loss, grief or bereavement, its true import is bound to be deeply impressed upon his mind and to sustain him in his hours of trials and tribulations. Nay, it is calculated to do something more; it helps to strengthen his connection with his Maker and make Him the centre of all his thoughts and actions.
c
22:36.
d
7:126; 26:51.
183
God is the Master of all we possess, including our ownselves. If the Owner in His infinite wisdom deems fit to take away anything from us, we have no ground for complaint or demur. So every misfortune that befalls us should, instead of depressing us, spur us to make yet greater efforts to achieve still better results in life. Thus the formula contained in this verse is not a mere verbal incantation but a wise counsel and a timely warning.
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ عَلَيْهِمْ صَلَوَٰتٌ مِّن رَّبِّهِمْ وَرَحْمَةٌ ۖ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُهْتَدُونَ
Commentary:
This verse speaks of the great reward of those who prove themselves to be truly صابر or patient. It is, in fact, an explanation of the word, glad tidings, occurring in 2:156. Truly patient people who are steadfast in their connection with God and whom each and every affliction finds spiritually rising higher and higher will inherit three things: (1) blessings from their Lord; (2) His mercy; and (3) His guidance. God will bless them in every way, will cover them with His mercy and forgiveness and will look after them, providing guidance for them whenever they may need it. He will, as it were, become their friend and guardian, eager to come to their help on all occasions.
164
Commentary:
This verse speaks of the great reward of those who prove themselves to be truly صابر or patient. It is, in fact, an explanation of the word, glad tidings, occurring in 2:156. Truly patient people who are steadfast in their connection with God and whom each and every affliction finds spiritually rising higher and higher will inherit three things: (1) blessings from their Lord; (2) His mercy; and (3) His guidance. God will bless them in every way, will cover them with His mercy and forgiveness and will look after them, providing guidance for them whenever they may need it. He will, as it were, become their friend and guardian, eager to come to their help on all occasions.
۞ إِنَّ ٱلصَّفَا وَٱلْمَرْوَةَ مِن شَعَآئِرِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَمَنْ حَجَّ ٱلْبَيْتَ أَوِ ٱعْتَمَرَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِ أَن يَطَّوَّفَ بِهِمَا ۚ وَمَن تَطَوَّعَ خَيْرًا فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَاكِرٌ عَلِيمٌ
22:33.
صفا اور مروہ مکہ میں دو پہاڑیاں ہیں۔
بِھِمَاکے معنے یہاں فِیْھِمَاکے ہیں‘ یعنی ان دونوں پہاڑیوں کے درمیان اِدھر سے اُدھر اُن قواعد کے مطابق جو سنت سے ثابت ہیں دوڑے۔
مدینہ کے لوگ صفا اور مروۃ کے درمیان سعی کرنے کو گناہ سمجھتے تھے (تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم ص ۳۰۷)۔
22:33.
As-Safa and Al-Marwah are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. These hills stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special care of her and her son, Ishmael, on the other. A visit to these hills deeply impresses the pilgrim with the love, fidelity to and power, of God.
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to Hajj (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on every Muslim once in a life-time, but to ‘Umrah (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but only supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the obligatory one.
22:33.
Important Words:
الصفا والمروة (As-Safa and Al-Marwah) are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. Both Arabian history and the traditions of Islam connect these hills with the story of Hagar and Ishmael when Abraham left them near these hills under God’s command. Ishmael was yet a child, and when the scanty provisions ran out and he was in a pitiable condition for want of water, Hagar anxiously and repeatedly ran between these two hills in search of water and help, but none was found. When, however, she was in her seventh circuit, an angel of God called to her saying that God had brought forth a spring of water near her son and that she should go and look to it (Bukhari, ch. on Anbiya’). Thus the hills of صفا (Safa) and مروة (Marwah) became شعائر الله i.e. Signs of God worthy of due honour and respect in the sight of every true believer. The Bible also makes mention of مروة in a somewhat changed form (Gen. 22:2; also Enc. Bib. under Moriah) in connection with the sacrifice of Abraham’s son.
شعائر (Signs) is the plural of شعیرة which is derived from شعر meaning, he knew or he perceived. Thus شعیرة means: (1) anything by means of which another thing may be known; (2) a sign; (3) anything which is considered or is performed as a mark of submission to God; (4) the rites of pilgrimage and practices pertaining thereto (Aqrab).
حج (is on pilgrimage) means: (1) he sought a person or thing; (2) he went or repaired to a person or thing; (3) he went to a person again and again; (4) he visited a holy place; (5) he performed حج (Pilgrimage) to the Ka‘bah; (6) he overpowered a person in argument (Aqrab).
اعتمر (performs ‘Umrah) is derived from عمر which means, he occupied or tenanted a house; he worshipped God and prayed to Him. اعتمر means, he went to, or visited, a place. عمرة means, visiting a place; worshipping and praying to God; performing Lesser Pilgrimage in which some of the rites of حج are left out (Aqrab).
تطوع (does beyond what is obligatory) is derived from طاع i.e. he obeyed; he did an act willingly and voluntarily. The infinitive الطوع means: (1) obedience; (2) doing an act willingly without its being obligatory on one. تطوع means, he performed an act with effort and volition. تطوع خیرا means, he performed a good act which was not obligatory on him (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
To a superficial observer the verse under comment dealing with the subject of Pilgrimage appears to have no connection with the preceding ones which deal with the subject of trials and sacrifices. But a deeper study will at once disclose a very close connection between the two. The preceding verses warned Muslims to be prepared for sacrifices and gave them the glad tidings that if they performed the required sacrifices willingly and patiently, God would bless them greatly and would show special mercy to them and would remember them with kindness and would provide guidance for them whenever needed. Now, in order to bring home to them the truth of this promise, He invites the attention of Muslims to the great sacrifice of Abraham near the site of As-Safa and Al-Marwah. Abraham obeyed His Lord and left his wife Hagar and his son Ishmael near these two hills of Mecca, which was then a most desolate tract. The seed was sown in a soil which was apparently the most barren of all soils, but how wonderfully it prospered! God was a most Loving and Faithful God who so fondly remembered His servants, Abraham and Ishmael, even after the lapse of 2,500 years, and Muslims can expect the same love and the same fidelity from Him, if they too love and obey Him. Safa and Marwah, as explained under Important Words above, are two hills which stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special treatment of her and her son on the other. A visit to these hills makes the pilgrim deeply impressed with the love, fidelity and power of God.
The words, it is no sin for him, should not be taken to mean that performing the circuit between Safa and Marwah is only permissible and not obligatory. The expression is used simply to remove the aversion to such performance found among certain persons on the basis of the fact that heathen Arabs had placed two idols on these two hills (Muslim). God removed this erroneous notion by saying that it was no sin to perform the circuit between Safa and Marwah, which on account of the great sacrifice of Abraham, Hagar and Ishmael on the one hand and the resulting blessings of God on the other, had become شعائر الله i.e. great Signs of God. That the performance of these circuits is obligatory in both حج and عمرة(the Greater and the Lesser Pilgrimage) is clear from the practice of the Holy Prophet and his injunctions to his followers (Bukhari, ch. Al-Hajj).
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to حج (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on each Muslim once in a lifetime, but to عمرة (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but simply supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional حج or Pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the one obligatory Pilgrimage.
As this verse mentions the subject of Pilgrimage only secondarily, we are not giving here a note on the rites and philosophy of which will be discussed when we come to the relevant verses.
e
22:33.
1
صفا اور مروہ مکہ میں دو پہاڑیاں ہیں۔
2
بِھِمَاکے معنے یہاں فِیْھِمَاکے ہیں‘ یعنی ان دونوں پہاڑیوں کے درمیان اِدھر سے اُدھر اُن قواعد کے مطابق جو سنت سے ثابت ہیں دوڑے۔
3
مدینہ کے لوگ صفا اور مروۃ کے درمیان سعی کرنے کو گناہ سمجھتے تھے (تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم ص ۳۰۷)۔
a
22:33.
165
Important Words:
الصفا والمروة (As-Safa and Al-Marwah) are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. Both Arabian history and the traditions of Islam connect these hills with the story of Hagar and Ishmael when Abraham left them near these hills under God’s command. Ishmael was yet a child, and when the scanty provisions ran out and he was in a pitiable condition for want of water, Hagar anxiously and repeatedly ran between these two hills in search of water and help, but none was found. When, however, she was in her seventh circuit, an angel of God called to her saying that God had brought forth a spring of water near her son and that she should go and look to it (Bukhari, ch. on Anbiya’). Thus the hills of صفا (Safa) and مروة (Marwah) became شعائر الله i.e. Signs of God worthy of due honour and respect in the sight of every true believer. The Bible also makes mention of مروة in a somewhat changed form (Gen. 22:2; also Enc. Bib. under Moriah) in connection with the sacrifice of Abraham’s son.
شعائر (Signs) is the plural of شعیرة which is derived from شعر meaning, he knew or he perceived. Thus شعیرة means: (1) anything by means of which another thing may be known; (2) a sign; (3) anything which is considered or is performed as a mark of submission to God; (4) the rites of pilgrimage and practices pertaining thereto (Aqrab).
حج (is on pilgrimage) means: (1) he sought a person or thing; (2) he went or repaired to a person or thing; (3) he went to a person again and again; (4) he visited a holy place; (5) he performed حج (Pilgrimage) to the Ka‘bah; (6) he overpowered a person in argument (Aqrab).
اعتمر (performs ‘Umrah) is derived from عمر which means, he occupied or tenanted a house; he worshipped God and prayed to Him. اعتمر means, he went to, or visited, a place. عمرة means, visiting a place; worshipping and praying to God; performing Lesser Pilgrimage in which some of the rites of حج are left out (Aqrab).
تطوع (does beyond what is obligatory) is derived from طاع i.e. he obeyed; he did an act willingly and voluntarily. The infinitive الطوع means: (1) obedience; (2) doing an act willingly without its being obligatory on one. تطوع means, he performed an act with effort and volition. تطوع خیرا means, he performed a good act which was not obligatory on him (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
To a superficial observer the verse under comment dealing with the subject of Pilgrimage appears to have no connection with the preceding ones which deal with the subject of trials and sacrifices. But a deeper study will at once disclose a very close connection between the two. The preceding verses warned Muslims to be prepared for sacrifices and gave them the glad tidings that if they performed the required sacrifices willingly and patiently, God would bless them greatly and would show special mercy to them and would remember them with kindness and would provide guidance for them whenever needed. Now, in order to bring home to them the truth of this promise, He invites the attention of Muslims to the great sacrifice of Abraham near the site of As-Safa and Al-Marwah. Abraham obeyed His Lord and left his wife Hagar and his son Ishmael near these two hills of Mecca, which was then a most desolate tract. The seed was sown in a soil which was apparently the most barren of all soils, but how wonderfully it prospered! God was a most Loving and Faithful God who so fondly remembered His servants, Abraham and Ishmael, even after the lapse of 2,500 years, and Muslims can expect the same love and the same fidelity from Him, if they too love and obey Him. Safa and Marwah, as explained under Important Words above, are two hills which stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special treatment of her and her son on the other. A visit to these hills makes the pilgrim deeply impressed with the love, fidelity and power of God.
The words, it is no sin for him, should not be taken to mean that performing the circuit between Safa and Marwah is only permissible and not obligatory. The expression is used simply to remove the aversion to such performance found among certain persons on the basis of the fact that heathen Arabs had placed two idols on these two hills (Muslim). God removed this erroneous notion by saying that it was no sin to perform the circuit between Safa and Marwah, which on account of the great sacrifice of Abraham, Hagar and Ishmael on the one hand and the resulting blessings of God on the other, had become شعائر الله i.e. great Signs of God. That the performance of these circuits is obligatory in both حج and عمرة(the Greater and the Lesser Pilgrimage) is clear from the practice of the Holy Prophet and his injunctions to his followers (Bukhari, ch. Al-Hajj).
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to حج (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on each Muslim once in a lifetime, but to عمرة (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but simply supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional حج or Pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the one obligatory Pilgrimage.
As this verse mentions the subject of Pilgrimage only secondarily, we are not giving here a note on the rites and philosophy of which will be discussed when we come to the relevant verses.
a
22:33.
184
As-Safa and Al-Marwah are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. These hills stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special care of her and her son, Ishmael, on the other. A visit to these hills deeply impresses the pilgrim with the love, fidelity to and power, of God.
185
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to Hajj (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on every Muslim once in a life-time, but to ‘Umrah (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but only supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the obligatory one.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَكْتُمُونَ مَآ أَنزَلْنَا مِنَ ٱلْبَيِّنَٰتِ وَٱلْهُدَىٰ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا بَيَّنَّٰهُ لِلنَّاسِ فِى ٱلْكِتَٰبِ ۙ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَلْعَنُهُمُ ٱللَّهُ وَيَلْعَنُهُمُ ٱللَّٰعِنُونَ
2:175.
2:175.
The reference is to the Jews who concealed the prophecies contained in their Scriptures about the Holy Prophet.
2:175.
Important Words:
یلعنھم (curses them). For the meaning of لعن see note on 2:89.
Commentary:
The present verse has been taken to apply either to Muslims or Jews. In the former case the verse would be taken as a warning to Muslims that they should ever be careful to preach the truth of Islam and should in no circumstances hide or neglect it but should ever be ready to proclaim it, however bitter the opposition. Failing this, they will not only not attain the nearness of God but will be cast away from Him. If applied to Jews, and that indeed is the right application, the connection with the preceding verse may be easily seen in the reference to As-Safa and Al-Marwah in that verse. It was at these places that Abraham left his wife Hagar, and his son, Ishmael, under God’s command and it was here that, while building the Ka‘bah, Abraham and Ishmael prayed to God for the appearance of a great Prophet among their progeny. The Quran thus refers here to the Jews who were concealing the prophecies contained in their Scriptures about the Holy Prophet. The Jews are warned that if they concealed the clear prophecies given to them about the Arabian Prophet, in spite of the fact that they have now been reminded of them through the Quran, God would cast them away, depriving them of His mercy and condemning them to punishment in Hell. They are further warned that as God is the Lord of the entire universe, His curse will not come alone but everything which is subservient to Him will then begin to curse them—angels, men, the elements, laws of nature and all.
a
2:175.
a
2:175.
166
Important Words:
یلعنھم (curses them). For the meaning of لعن see note on 2:89.
Commentary:
The present verse has been taken to apply either to Muslims or Jews. In the former case the verse would be taken as a warning to Muslims that they should ever be careful to preach the truth of Islam and should in no circumstances hide or neglect it but should ever be ready to proclaim it, however bitter the opposition. Failing this, they will not only not attain the nearness of God but will be cast away from Him. If applied to Jews, and that indeed is the right application, the connection with the preceding verse may be easily seen in the reference to As-Safa and Al-Marwah in that verse. It was at these places that Abraham left his wife Hagar, and his son, Ishmael, under God’s command and it was here that, while building the Ka‘bah, Abraham and Ishmael prayed to God for the appearance of a great Prophet among their progeny. The Quran thus refers here to the Jews who were concealing the prophecies contained in their Scriptures about the Holy Prophet. The Jews are warned that if they concealed the clear prophecies given to them about the Arabian Prophet, in spite of the fact that they have now been reminded of them through the Quran, God would cast them away, depriving them of His mercy and condemning them to punishment in Hell. They are further warned that as God is the Lord of the entire universe, His curse will not come alone but everything which is subservient to Him will then begin to curse them—angels, men, the elements, laws of nature and all.
b
2:175.
186
The reference is to the Jews who concealed the prophecies contained in their Scriptures about the Holy Prophet.
إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ تَابُوا۟ وَأَصْلَحُوا۟ وَبَيَّنُوا۟ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَتُوبُ عَلَيْهِمْ ۚ وَأَنَا ٱلتَّوَّابُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
3:90; 4:147; 5:40; 24:6.
3:90; 4:147; 5:40; 24:6.
3:90; 4:147; 5:40; 24:6.
Important Words:
اصلحوا (amend) is derived from صلح which means, he or it was or became good or virtuous or just or proper. اصلح means, he reformed him or he reformed himself or he amended. When اصلح is followed by the preposition بین (between) as in اصلح بینھمit means, he brought about reconciliation between them (Aqrab).
Commentary:
God, not being vindictive, is ever ready to pardon those who repent and rectify their mistakes. But repentance must be sincere and real. Mere verbal expression of regret is not sufficient. The evildoer must try to make full amends for the wrong committed and should promise to bring about in himself a real change in future. It is only after a real change takes place in the sinner that forgiveness is promised to him. As to the Jews who concealed prophecies regarding the Holy Prophet, the verse lays down three conditions as a proof of real repentance.
Firstly, they should declare their repentance and turn back from their wrong course. Secondly, they should make amends practically, not only by reforming themselves but also by trying to reform those who have been misled through them. Thirdly, they should openly declare the truth which they have been hiding regarding the prophecies in their Scriptures. If they fulfilled these conditions, they would yet find God Forgiving and Merciful.
b
3:90; 4:147; 5:40; 24:6.
b
3:90; 4:147; 5:40; 24:6.
167
Important Words:
اصلحوا (amend) is derived from صلح which means, he or it was or became good or virtuous or just or proper. اصلح means, he reformed him or he reformed himself or he amended. When اصلح is followed by the preposition بین (between) as in اصلح بینھمit means, he brought about reconciliation between them (Aqrab).
Commentary:
God, not being vindictive, is ever ready to pardon those who repent and rectify their mistakes. But repentance must be sincere and real. Mere verbal expression of regret is not sufficient. The evildoer must try to make full amends for the wrong committed and should promise to bring about in himself a real change in future. It is only after a real change takes place in the sinner that forgiveness is promised to him. As to the Jews who concealed prophecies regarding the Holy Prophet, the verse lays down three conditions as a proof of real repentance.
Firstly, they should declare their repentance and turn back from their wrong course. Secondly, they should make amends practically, not only by reforming themselves but also by trying to reform those who have been misled through them. Thirdly, they should openly declare the truth which they have been hiding regarding the prophecies in their Scriptures. If they fulfilled these conditions, they would yet find God Forgiving and Merciful.
a
3:90; 4:147; 5:40; 24:6.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ وَمَاتُوا۟ وَهُمْ كُفَّارٌ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ عَلَيْهِمْ لَعْنَةُ ٱللَّهِ وَٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةِ وَٱلنَّاسِ أَجْمَعِينَ
3:88.
3:88.
3:88.
Commentary:
The word الناس (men) may either mean "all men" or "holy and virtuous men", i.e. those who deserve to be called "men" in the real sense of the word. This distinction is not arbitrary; for there is a class of men whom the Quran describes as "cattle or even worse" (7:180).
The cursing of the angels and the holy men means that as angels and holy men obey their Lord and Master and never go against His wishes, they would naturally sever connections with the disbelievers—the Jews—when they see Him doing the same. The angels, one of whose works is to help good men and punish the wicked, will turn against them and all good men will also strive to bring their evil efforts to naught. They will find the entire forces of God ranged against them.
If the word الناس (men) be taken to refer to all men, then the clause would mean that all men being subordinate to God, He would so arrange that no people would be able to help them against His decree.
c
3:88.
a
3:88.
168
Commentary:
The word الناس (men) may either mean "all men" or "holy and virtuous men", i.e. those who deserve to be called "men" in the real sense of the word. This distinction is not arbitrary; for there is a class of men whom the Quran describes as "cattle or even worse" (7:180).
The cursing of the angels and the holy men means that as angels and holy men obey their Lord and Master and never go against His wishes, they would naturally sever connections with the disbelievers—the Jews—when they see Him doing the same. The angels, one of whose works is to help good men and punish the wicked, will turn against them and all good men will also strive to bring their evil efforts to naught. They will find the entire forces of God ranged against them.
If the word الناس (men) be taken to refer to all men, then the clause would mean that all men being subordinate to God, He would so arrange that no people would be able to help them against His decree.
b
3:88.
خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَا ۖ لَا يُخَفَّفُ عَنْهُمُ ٱلْعَذَابُ وَلَا هُمْ يُنظَرُونَ
3:89.
3:89.
3:89.
Important Words:
ینظرون (be granted respite) is formed from نظر which means, (1) he looked; (2) he granted respite. They say نظر فلانا الدین i.e. he granted him respite in respect of the payment of debt (Aqrab).
Commentary:
God is slow to punish but when the cup of the iniquities of a disbelieving people becomes full to the brim and all warning is lost upon them, then severe punishment overtakes them, and no further respite is granted; and as the punishment is primarily meant as a cure, it is of sufficiently long duration and persists till all vestige of spiritual disease is rooted out.
d
3:89.
a
3:89.
169
Important Words:
ینظرون (be granted respite) is formed from نظر which means, (1) he looked; (2) he granted respite. They say نظر فلانا الدین i.e. he granted him respite in respect of the payment of debt (Aqrab).
Commentary:
God is slow to punish but when the cup of the iniquities of a disbelieving people becomes full to the brim and all warning is lost upon them, then severe punishment overtakes them, and no further respite is granted; and as the punishment is primarily meant as a cure, it is of sufficiently long duration and persists till all vestige of spiritual disease is rooted out.
c
3:89.
وَإِلَٰهُكُمْ إِلَٰهٌ وَٰحِدٌ ۖ لَّآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ ٱلرَّحْمَٰنُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
2:256; 16:23; 22:35; 37:5; 59:23, 24; 112:2.
As all sins spring from feebleness of faith, this verse fittingly refers to the Oneness of God, signifying that if people only believed in Divine Unity and refrained from setting up false gods, they would never deviate from the right path.
2:256; 16:23; 22:35; 37:5; 59:23, 24; 112:2.
Commentary:
As all sin springs from feebleness of faith, this verse fittingly refers to the Unity of God, signifying that if people only believed in God’s Unity and refrained from setting up false gods, they would never digress from the right path. It must not, however, be understood that idol-worship consists in worshipping images only. Every man who loves anyone other than God as he ought to love Him, or fears anyone as he ought to fear Him, or trusts in anyone as he ought to trust in Him, is really guilty of idol-worship and must suffer the consequences thereof. In fact, the principal and primary object of religion, is to establish the Unity of God, and the Quran has dealt with this subject in a manner and to an extent which has no parallel in any other Book. Islam condemns both شرك جلی (manifest or visible idolatry) and شرك خفی (hidden or invisible idolatry) in the strongest of terms.
The verse may also signify that, with the advent of Islam, God, the Maker of heavens and earth, no longer remains the God of this or that people only, but becomes the God of all peoples and all mankind. The word الرحمن (the Gracious or the Provider for all peoples) occurring at the end of the verse also points to the same truth. In this sense the verse would be considered to be particularly connected with 2:159 above which speaks of the Safa and the Marwah as the special Signs of Allah, serving as pointers to the mission of the Holy Prophet of Islam.
e
2:256; 16:23; 22:35; 37:5; 59:23, 24; 112:2.
108
由于一切罪恶来自信仰不强, 本节经文合适地提出了安拉的独一性, 意思是, 如果人们只相信安拉的独一性而制止树立那些假神, 他们就绝不会偏离正道。
b
2:256; 16:23; 22:35; 37:5; 59:23, 24; 112:2.
170
Commentary:
As all sin springs from feebleness of faith, this verse fittingly refers to the Unity of God, signifying that if people only believed in God’s Unity and refrained from setting up false gods, they would never digress from the right path. It must not, however, be understood that idol-worship consists in worshipping images only. Every man who loves anyone other than God as he ought to love Him, or fears anyone as he ought to fear Him, or trusts in anyone as he ought to trust in Him, is really guilty of idol-worship and must suffer the consequences thereof. In fact, the principal and primary object of religion, is to establish the Unity of God, and the Quran has dealt with this subject in a manner and to an extent which has no parallel in any other Book. Islam condemns both شرك جلی (manifest or visible idolatry) and شرك خفی (hidden or invisible idolatry) in the strongest of terms.
The verse may also signify that, with the advent of Islam, God, the Maker of heavens and earth, no longer remains the God of this or that people only, but becomes the God of all peoples and all mankind. The word الرحمن (the Gracious or the Provider for all peoples) occurring at the end of the verse also points to the same truth. In this sense the verse would be considered to be particularly connected with 2:159 above which speaks of the Safa and the Marwah as the special Signs of Allah, serving as pointers to the mission of the Holy Prophet of Islam.
d
2:256; 16:23; 22:35; 37:5; 59:23, 24; 112:2.
187
As all sins spring from feebleness of faith, this verse fittingly refers to the Oneness of God, signifying that if people only believed in Divine Unity and refrained from setting up false gods, they would never deviate from the right path.
إِنَّ فِى خَلْقِ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَٱخْتِلَٰفِ ٱلَّيْلِ وَٱلنَّهَارِ وَٱلْفُلْكِ ٱلَّتِى تَجْرِى فِى ٱلْبَحْرِ بِمَا يَنفَعُ ٱلنَّاسَ وَمَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ مِنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مِن مَّآءٍ فَأَحْيَا بِهِ ٱلْأَرْضَ بَعْدَ مَوْتِهَا وَبَثَّ فِيهَا مِن كُلِّ دَآبَّةٍ وَتَصْرِيفِ ٱلرِّيَٰحِ وَٱلسَّحَابِ ٱلْمُسَخَّرِ بَيْنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ لَءَايَٰتٍ لِّقَوْمٍ يَعْقِلُونَ
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
The Qur’an takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken collectively. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, and a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible for one to escape the conclusion, that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that pervades it forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by One Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing. Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet,
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
Important Words:
اختلاف (alternation) is derived from خلف. They say خلفه i.e. he or it was or became his or its successor. خلف الرجل means, he came after or remained after the man and stood in his place. اختلفه means, he followed him as his successor. اختلفوا means (1) they came one after another by turn; (2) they differed or disagreed (Aqrab).
الفلك (ships) is derived from the verb فلك meaning, it became round or circular. الفلك (al-fulk) means a ship, or a boat, probably because it looks round and shapeless when seen at sea from a distance. The word is both singular and plural. الفلك (al-falak) means, the vault of heaven or the firmament in which the stars move. This is also probably owing to the apparently round shape of the sky (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
دابة (beast) is the active participle from دب which means, he or it crept or crawled or walked slowly like an ant or a reptile or a child or a weak or sickly person. دابة means, all such animals or insects as creep or crawl or walk slowly (Aqrab). The word is used about all moving animals, whether big or small, whether walking on two legs or on four legs or creeping on the belly, etc. (24:46). It is also used about beasts used for riding or for carrying burden, like the horse, the mule, the donkey, etc. (Lane).
المسخر (pressed into service) is the passive participle from سخر sakhkhara. They say سخره (sakhkhara-hu or سخره sakhara-hu, not سخر sakhira which gives a different meaning), i.e. (1) he employed him or imposed on him a task without compensation; (2) he subjugated him and made him subservient to himself. Thus مسخر is that who or which has been made subservient to another, being unable to free himself or itself from constraint (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse gives a twofold meaning, one literal and the other metaphorical. In the former sense, it supplies an argument in support of the existence of God referred to in the preceding verse. A careful study of the universe unfailingly points to a Creator on the one hand and to man being created with a definite object on the other. It also proves that, having created the world, God did not leave it alone but continues to watch over and control its affairs and is the First Cause of all change and every working in the universe. Heaven and earth, night and day (with alternating light and darkness), the supply of provisions, rainfall with its power of quickening and devastating, the means of communications, the blowing of winds, and shade and sunshine, all point to one controlling agency, God, the Maker of heavens and earth. And if God has done so much for the material requirements of man, He cannot be imagined to have neglected his spiritual needs which are much more important. Let all thinking men think and ponder and again think and ponder.
The Quran takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken together. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, or a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible to escape the conclusion that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that prevails throughout the universe, forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by one Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing.
Taken in the metaphorical sense, the ship mentioned in the verse will be taken to stand for Prophets who help men to cross the gulfs of carnal desires and materialistic concepts of things which separate men from God, rain being likened to God’s revelation which comes down like rain and gives life to the world after it has become dead. The clouds send down no new water. Water already exists in the vast oceans of the earth but, as it is impure, men cannot make use of it. God purifies it and changes it into clouds and then sends it back to earth in the form of pure rainwater. Similarly, by sending a new revelation God purifies beliefs, which, with the passage of time, get mixed up with false notions and superstitious ideas. It is inconceivable that God Who supplies man with fresh rainwater for the maintenance of his physical life should have omitted to supply him with heavenly water which is so necessary for the preservation of his spiritual life. Similarly, night and day stand for the alternating periods of light and darkness, it being hinted that the coming of the Holy Prophet heralds the dawn of a new day.
Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature in the verse under comment, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet, because the whole universe is controlled by God and is working in favour of His Prophet and in furthering his cause.
f
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
a
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
171
Important Words:
اختلاف (alternation) is derived from خلف. They say خلفه i.e. he or it was or became his or its successor. خلف الرجل means, he came after or remained after the man and stood in his place. اختلفه means, he followed him as his successor. اختلفوا means (1) they came one after another by turn; (2) they differed or disagreed (Aqrab).
الفلك (ships) is derived from the verb فلك meaning, it became round or circular. الفلك (al-fulk) means a ship, or a boat, probably because it looks round and shapeless when seen at sea from a distance. The word is both singular and plural. الفلك (al-falak) means, the vault of heaven or the firmament in which the stars move. This is also probably owing to the apparently round shape of the sky (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
دابة (beast) is the active participle from دب which means, he or it crept or crawled or walked slowly like an ant or a reptile or a child or a weak or sickly person. دابة means, all such animals or insects as creep or crawl or walk slowly (Aqrab). The word is used about all moving animals, whether big or small, whether walking on two legs or on four legs or creeping on the belly, etc. (24:46). It is also used about beasts used for riding or for carrying burden, like the horse, the mule, the donkey, etc. (Lane).
المسخر (pressed into service) is the passive participle from سخر sakhkhara. They say سخره (sakhkhara-hu or سخره sakhara-hu, not سخر sakhira which gives a different meaning), i.e. (1) he employed him or imposed on him a task without compensation; (2) he subjugated him and made him subservient to himself. Thus مسخر is that who or which has been made subservient to another, being unable to free himself or itself from constraint (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse gives a twofold meaning, one literal and the other metaphorical. In the former sense, it supplies an argument in support of the existence of God referred to in the preceding verse. A careful study of the universe unfailingly points to a Creator on the one hand and to man being created with a definite object on the other. It also proves that, having created the world, God did not leave it alone but continues to watch over and control its affairs and is the First Cause of all change and every working in the universe. Heaven and earth, night and day (with alternating light and darkness), the supply of provisions, rainfall with its power of quickening and devastating, the means of communications, the blowing of winds, and shade and sunshine, all point to one controlling agency, God, the Maker of heavens and earth. And if God has done so much for the material requirements of man, He cannot be imagined to have neglected his spiritual needs which are much more important. Let all thinking men think and ponder and again think and ponder.
The Quran takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken together. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, or a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible to escape the conclusion that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that prevails throughout the universe, forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by one Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing.
Taken in the metaphorical sense, the ship mentioned in the verse will be taken to stand for Prophets who help men to cross the gulfs of carnal desires and materialistic concepts of things which separate men from God, rain being likened to God’s revelation which comes down like rain and gives life to the world after it has become dead. The clouds send down no new water. Water already exists in the vast oceans of the earth but, as it is impure, men cannot make use of it. God purifies it and changes it into clouds and then sends it back to earth in the form of pure rainwater. Similarly, by sending a new revelation God purifies beliefs, which, with the passage of time, get mixed up with false notions and superstitious ideas. It is inconceivable that God Who supplies man with fresh rainwater for the maintenance of his physical life should have omitted to supply him with heavenly water which is so necessary for the preservation of his spiritual life. Similarly, night and day stand for the alternating periods of light and darkness, it being hinted that the coming of the Holy Prophet heralds the dawn of a new day.
Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature in the verse under comment, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet, because the whole universe is controlled by God and is working in favour of His Prophet and in furthering his cause.
e
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
188
The Qur’an takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken collectively. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, and a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible for one to escape the conclusion, that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that pervades it forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by One Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing. Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet,
وَمِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ مَن يَتَّخِذُ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ أَندَادًا يُحِبُّونَهُمْ كَحُبِّ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ أَشَدُّ حُبًّا لِّلَّهِ ۗ وَلَوْ يَرَى ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوٓا۟ إِذْ يَرَوْنَ ٱلْعَذَابَ أَنَّ ٱلْقُوَّةَ لِلَّهِ جَمِيعًا وَأَنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَدِيدُ ٱلْعَذَابِ
热爱安拉是一切宗教教义的根本, 没有一门宗教曾像伊斯兰教那般着重强调对安拉的热爱。穆圣一心归向安拉, 以致阿拉伯异教徒也说他与安拉相爱。在 «古兰经» 中没有其它一个论题向对安拉的优美、慈善和其他常德被论述得如此充分和如此反复, 以致它在人类心灵中产生出对安拉抑制不住的热爱与渴望。
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Qur’an has used four words: Nidd (like or equal); Sharik (co-partner or sharer); Ilah (worthy of worship); and Rabb (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about objects of worship other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word Nidd (like or equal) refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, but are contrary or opposed to Him.
Love of God is the essence of all religious teaching and no religion has laid so much emphasis on Divine love as Islam has done. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Qur’an as God’s beauty and beneficence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for the Supreme Being.
Important Words:
دون (other than) is derived from دان i.e. he or it was or became low, mean or weak. دون used as an adjective means, low, mean, paltry, or contemptible; also high and noble. When used as a preposition, as in the present verse, دون gives the sense of (1) this side of, i.e. behind or lower in tank; (2) that side of, i.e. ahead or higher in rank; (3) other than (Aqrab).
انداد (objects of worship). See 2:23.
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Quran makes use of the following four words: (1) ند (like or equal); (2) شریك (co-partner or sharer); (3) اله (worthy of worship); and (4) رب (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about those objects of worship that are other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word ند (like or equal) which is used in the present verse refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, being contrary or opposed to the true God. Among those who have set up انداد (equals) with God may be mentioned the Zoroastrians who believe in two independent gods, i.e. Ormazd, the God of Light, and Ahriman, the God of Darkness.
Love of God is the essence of all religion. In Islam it forms the central point, the pivot round which the whole Islamic teaching revolves. No religion has emphasised the love of God as much as Islam has. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him, even as a lover falls in love with his beloved. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Quran as God’s beauty and excellence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for his Lord and Master Who is spoken of in the Quran as a "Most Loving God" (11:91; 85:15). Yet Christian writers accuse Islam of being a cold and calculating religion, bereft of all love for God. Can anything be farther from the truth?
109
热爱安拉是一切宗教教义的根本, 没有一门宗教曾像伊斯兰教那般着重强调对安拉的热爱。穆圣一心归向安拉, 以致阿拉伯异教徒也说他与安拉相爱。在 «古兰经» 中没有其它一个论题向对安拉的优美、慈善和其他常德被论述得如此充分和如此反复, 以致它在人类心灵中产生出对安拉抑制不住的热爱与渴望。
172
Important Words:
دون (other than) is derived from دان i.e. he or it was or became low, mean or weak. دون used as an adjective means, low, mean, paltry, or contemptible; also high and noble. When used as a preposition, as in the present verse, دون gives the sense of (1) this side of, i.e. behind or lower in tank; (2) that side of, i.e. ahead or higher in rank; (3) other than (Aqrab).
انداد (objects of worship). See 2:23.
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Quran makes use of the following four words: (1) ند (like or equal); (2) شریك (co-partner or sharer); (3) اله (worthy of worship); and (4) رب (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about those objects of worship that are other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word ند (like or equal) which is used in the present verse refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, being contrary or opposed to the true God. Among those who have set up انداد (equals) with God may be mentioned the Zoroastrians who believe in two independent gods, i.e. Ormazd, the God of Light, and Ahriman, the God of Darkness.
Love of God is the essence of all religion. In Islam it forms the central point, the pivot round which the whole Islamic teaching revolves. No religion has emphasised the love of God as much as Islam has. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him, even as a lover falls in love with his beloved. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Quran as God’s beauty and excellence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for his Lord and Master Who is spoken of in the Quran as a "Most Loving God" (11:91; 85:15). Yet Christian writers accuse Islam of being a cold and calculating religion, bereft of all love for God. Can anything be farther from the truth?
189
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Qur’an has used four words: Nidd (like or equal); Sharik (co-partner or sharer); Ilah (worthy of worship); and Rabb (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about objects of worship other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word Nidd (like or equal) refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, but are contrary or opposed to Him.
190
Love of God is the essence of all religious teaching and no religion has laid so much emphasis on Divine love as Islam has done. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Qur’an as God’s beauty and beneficence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for the Supreme Being.
إِذْ تَبَرَّأَ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتُّبِعُوا۟ مِنَ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّبَعُوا۟ وَرَأَوُا۟ ٱلْعَذَابَ وَتَقَطَّعَتْ بِهِمُ ٱلْأَسْبَابُ
28:64, 65; 34:33, 34.
28:64, 65; 34:33, 34.
The verse constitutes a stern warning to those who blindly follow their leaders and, being led astray by them, reject God’s Messengers.
28:64, 65; 34:33, 34.
Important Words:
تبرأ (disown) is derived from بری. They say بری من العیب او الدین i.e. he became free from defect or got clear of debt. بارأ شریکهmeans, he became separated from his partner. تبرأ من فلان means, he separated from such a one; he got clear of him; he declared to have no connection with him; he renounced or disowned him (Aqrab).
اسباب (ties) is the plural of سبب which signifies: (1) a tie or a rope; (2) a means which helps a person to reach his destination; (3) a way or a path, leading to something; (4) love or relationship (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse vividly describes the scene when those guilty of idolatry will be called to account for their evil beliefs and practices. They will look to their leaders for help and guidance, but the latter will disown them and all ties of love and kinship between them will be cut asunder and all supports and all means of rescue will be lost. The verse is a stern warning to those who blindly follow their leaders and, being misled by them, reject God’s Messengers.
a
28:64, 65; 34:33, 34.
a
28:64, 65; 34:33, 34.
173
Important Words:
تبرأ (disown) is derived from بری. They say بری من العیب او الدین i.e. he became free from defect or got clear of debt. بارأ شریکهmeans, he became separated from his partner. تبرأ من فلان means, he separated from such a one; he got clear of him; he declared to have no connection with him; he renounced or disowned him (Aqrab).
اسباب (ties) is the plural of سبب which signifies: (1) a tie or a rope; (2) a means which helps a person to reach his destination; (3) a way or a path, leading to something; (4) love or relationship (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse vividly describes the scene when those guilty of idolatry will be called to account for their evil beliefs and practices. They will look to their leaders for help and guidance, but the latter will disown them and all ties of love and kinship between them will be cut asunder and all supports and all means of rescue will be lost. The verse is a stern warning to those who blindly follow their leaders and, being misled by them, reject God’s Messengers.
a
28:64, 65; 34:33, 34.
191
The verse constitutes a stern warning to those who blindly follow their leaders and, being led astray by them, reject God’s Messengers.
وَقَالَ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّبَعُوا۟ لَوْ أَنَّ لَنَا كَرَّةً فَنَتَبَرَّأَ مِنْهُمْ كَمَا تَبَرَّءُوا۟ مِنَّا ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ يُرِيهِمُ ٱللَّهُ أَعْمَٰلَهُمْ حَسَرَٰتٍ عَلَيْهِمْ ۖ وَمَا هُم بِخَٰرِجِينَ مِنَ ٱلنَّارِ
23:100; 26:103.
اَرٰی بعض دفعہ اَعْلَمَ کے معنوں میں آتا ہے یعنی بتائے گا۔ خبر دے گا۔ واقف کرے گا اور اس کے تین مفعول ہوتے ہیں۔ ترجمہ میں یہی معنے لئے گئے ہیں کیونکہ یہاں تین مفعول ہیں۔
23:100; 26:103.
23:100; 26:103.
Important Words:
کرة (return) is the infinitive noun from کر. They say کر الفارس i.e. the horseman returned to the attack after he had raced back. فعله کرة بعدکرة means, he did it again and again. کرة therefore means: (1) returning to the attack; (2) returning to the original state (3) a turn or time (Mufradat & Aqrab).
حسرات (anguish) is the plural of حسرة which is derived from حسر. They say حسرالبحر i.e. the sea sank or receded from the shore. حسرالرجل means: (1) the man was tired and wearied (2) he was sorrowful and grieved. حسرة means: (1) feeling intense anguish at a loss sustained or harm suffered; (2) regret or compunction; (3) grief or sorrow for a thing that has escaped one (Aqrab & Taj).
Commentary:
Having despaired of receiving help from their leaders, the disbelievers will, on the Day of Judgement, wish that they may be sent back to the world so that they may denounce these leaders in this world just as they were disowning them in the next. But this will be only a vain desire doomed to perish unfulfilled. Nay, the selfsame desire will become a source of anguish and punishment for them.
The clause, they shall not get out of the Fire, does not mean that the punishment of Hell will be unending. Islam does not believe in the eternity of Hell. While the Quran speaks of the blessings of Paradise as never-ending and everlasting, it does not say so of the punishment of Hell but simply speaks of it as being very long (11:108, 109). The sayings of the Holy Prophet also support this view. "There will come a time over Hell," he is reported to have said, "when there will remain none in it" (‘Ummal). The verse only means that, being unable to bear the torment of Hell, the dwellers of the Fire will wish to come out of it, but will not be able to do so (32:21), until their term of punishment is over. The word Fire as used in this verse may also mean the fire of anguish and agony in which they shall burn on account of their designs and cherished hopes having come to naught.
b
23:100; 26:103.
1
اَرٰی بعض دفعہ اَعْلَمَ کے معنوں میں آتا ہے یعنی بتائے گا۔ خبر دے گا۔ واقف کرے گا اور اس کے تین مفعول ہوتے ہیں۔ ترجمہ میں یہی معنے لئے گئے ہیں کیونکہ یہاں تین مفعول ہیں۔
b
23:100; 26:103.
174
Important Words:
کرة (return) is the infinitive noun from کر. They say کر الفارس i.e. the horseman returned to the attack after he had raced back. فعله کرة بعدکرة means, he did it again and again. کرة therefore means: (1) returning to the attack; (2) returning to the original state (3) a turn or time (Mufradat & Aqrab).
حسرات (anguish) is the plural of حسرة which is derived from حسر. They say حسرالبحر i.e. the sea sank or receded from the shore. حسرالرجل means: (1) the man was tired and wearied (2) he was sorrowful and grieved. حسرة means: (1) feeling intense anguish at a loss sustained or harm suffered; (2) regret or compunction; (3) grief or sorrow for a thing that has escaped one (Aqrab & Taj).
Commentary:
Having despaired of receiving help from their leaders, the disbelievers will, on the Day of Judgement, wish that they may be sent back to the world so that they may denounce these leaders in this world just as they were disowning them in the next. But this will be only a vain desire doomed to perish unfulfilled. Nay, the selfsame desire will become a source of anguish and punishment for them.
The clause, they shall not get out of the Fire, does not mean that the punishment of Hell will be unending. Islam does not believe in the eternity of Hell. While the Quran speaks of the blessings of Paradise as never-ending and everlasting, it does not say so of the punishment of Hell but simply speaks of it as being very long (11:108, 109). The sayings of the Holy Prophet also support this view. "There will come a time over Hell," he is reported to have said, "when there will remain none in it" (‘Ummal). The verse only means that, being unable to bear the torment of Hell, the dwellers of the Fire will wish to come out of it, but will not be able to do so (32:21), until their term of punishment is over. The word Fire as used in this verse may also mean the fire of anguish and agony in which they shall burn on account of their designs and cherished hopes having come to naught.
b
23:100; 26:103.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ كُلُوا۟ مِمَّا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ حَلَٰلًا طَيِّبًا وَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ خُطُوَٰتِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ ۚ إِنَّهُۥ لَكُمْ عَدُوٌّ مُّبِينٌ
لَا تَتَّبِعُوْا خُطُوٰتِ الشَّیْطٰنِ کا لفظی ترجمہ یہ ہے کہ شیطان کے قدموں کی اِتباع نہ کرو۔ لیکن چونکہ یہ عربی کا محاورہ ہے اس لئے اس کا ترجمہ بھی اردو محاورہ میں کیا گیا ہے جو یہ ہے کہ شیطان کے قدم بقدم نہ چلو۔ اقرب الموارد میں لکھا ہے۔ خُطُوٰتِ الشَّیْطٰنِ کے معنے ہیں طُرُقَہٗ وَ سُبُلَہٗ شیطان کے طریقے اور اس کے راستے۔
5:89; 8:70; 16:115.
2:209; 6:143; 24:22.
7:23; 12:6; 28:16; 35:7; 36:61.
Good actions must accompany true faith. With this verse begins a discussion of the second part of Abraham’s prayer regarding the work of the Promised Prophet, i.e. the teaching of the laws of the Shari‘ah and of the wisdom underlying them. Henceforward ordinances about Prayer, Fasting, Pilgrimage and Zakat are given and so are the laws relating to social matters; and as food plays an important part in the formation of a man’s character, regulations concerning it are mentioned first. All food according to Islam should be: (1) Halal, i.e. allowed by the Law; and (2) it should also be Tayyib, i.e. good, pure, wholesome and agreeable. Under the second condition sometimes even lawful things become forbidden.
The prohibition against following Satan, coming immediately after the commandment with respect to food, alludes to the influence which physical actions exercise on the moral and spiritual conditions of man. The use of unlawful and unwholesome food tends to impair man’s moral faculties and impede his spiritual development. See also 23:52.
5:89; 8:70; 16:115.
2:209; 6:143; 24:22.
7:23; 12:6; 28:16; 35:7; 36:61.
Important Words:
حلال (lawful) is the noun-infinitive from حل which has several meanings. حل العقده means, he unloosened the tie. حل بالمکانmeans, he alighted at the house. حل علیه غضب الله means, God’s punishment came down on him or befell him. حل الشیء means, the thing became lawful. حل الیمین means, he absolved himself from the oath. حلال is, therefore, that the use of which has been permitted by God; a lawful thing. The word is the opposite of حرام which means, a forbidden or unlawful thing (Aqrab).
طیباً (good) is derived from طاب meaning, he or it became good. طاب الشیء means, the thing was good or pure or wholesome. Thus طیب would mean, good, pure, wholesome and agreeable (Aqrab).
خطوات (footsteps) is the plural of خطوة which is derived from خطا which means, he stepped or walked, خطوة means, the distance between the two feet of a person while walking. The clause لا تتبعوا خطوات الشیطان would also mean, do not follow the ways of Satan (Aqrab).
مبین (open) is derived from بان meaning: (1) it became clear and manifest; or (2) it became separated or disunited or cut off. ابان الشیء means (1) he or it made the thing clear; or (2) he or it cut the thing into pieces or made it disunited. ابان الشیءmeans, the thing became clear. Thus مبین would mean: (1) a being or thing which is clear and manifest; (2) a being or thing which makes other things clear; and (3) a being or thing which cuts another thing into pieces and makes it disunited (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Good actions must accompany true faith. So with this verse begins a discussion of the second part of Abraham’s prayer regarding the work of the Promised Prophet, i.e., the teaching of the laws of Shari‘ah and of the wisdom underlying them.
Henceforward ordinances about Prayer, Fasting, Pilgrimage and Zakah are given and so are the laws relating to social matters and as food plays an important part in the formation of a man’s character, regulations concerning it are mentioned first. According to Islam, all food should be: (1) حلال i.e. allowed by the Law; and (2) it should also be طیبi.e. good, pure, wholesome and agreeable. Under the second condition, sometimes even lawful things become forbidden. Thus, for instance, the eating of goat’s flesh is حلال or lawful; but if some flesh becomes rotten and putrefied, it will not be طیب and will consequently not be permissible. This distinction between حلال (lawful) and طیب (good and pure) food is not to be found in any teaching except that of Islam. So comprehensive is the Islamic teaching on this subject that not only are conditions laid down as to when lawful things become prohibited, as in this verse, but also as to when even unlawful food becomes permissible (2:174; 5:4; 6:120, 146; 16:116).
The prohibition against following Satan, coming immediately after the commandment with respect to food, alludes to the influence which physical actions exercise on the moral and spiritual conditions of man. The use of unlawful and unwholesome food tends to impair our moral and spiritual faculties, while lawful and wholesome food improves our morals and helps the development of our spiritual powers. This subject is also dealt with in 23:52.
As explained under Important Words above, the word مبین gives three different meanings. Thus عدو مبین would mean (1) that Satan is a manifest and open enemy of man; (2) that Satan is not only manifest himself but also makes his connections manifest—leaving a visible trace of wickedness wherever he treads; and (3) that he is always striving to create disunion among the Faithful and to cut asunder all such ties as God has ordered to be made firm. In this connection see also 2:28.
a
5:89; 8:70; 16:115.
b
2:209; 6:143; 24:22.
c
7:23; 12:6; 28:16; 35:7; 36:61.
2
لَا تَتَّبِعُوْا خُطُوٰتِ الشَّیْطٰنِ کا لفظی ترجمہ یہ ہے کہ شیطان کے قدموں کی اِتباع نہ کرو۔ لیکن چونکہ یہ عربی کا محاورہ ہے اس لئے اس کا ترجمہ بھی اردو محاورہ میں کیا گیا ہے جو یہ ہے کہ شیطان کے قدم بقدم نہ چلو۔ اقرب الموارد میں لکھا ہے۔ خُطُوٰتِ الشَّیْطٰنِ کے معنے ہیں طُرُقَہٗ وَ سُبُلَہٗ شیطان کے طریقے اور اس کے راستے۔
a
5:89; 8:70; 16:115.
b
2:209; 6:143; 24:22.
c
7:23; 12:6; 28:16; 35:7; 36:61.
175
Important Words:
حلال (lawful) is the noun-infinitive from حل which has several meanings. حل العقده means, he unloosened the tie. حل بالمکانmeans, he alighted at the house. حل علیه غضب الله means, God’s punishment came down on him or befell him. حل الشیء means, the thing became lawful. حل الیمین means, he absolved himself from the oath. حلال is, therefore, that the use of which has been permitted by God; a lawful thing. The word is the opposite of حرام which means, a forbidden or unlawful thing (Aqrab).
طیباً (good) is derived from طاب meaning, he or it became good. طاب الشیء means, the thing was good or pure or wholesome. Thus طیب would mean, good, pure, wholesome and agreeable (Aqrab).
خطوات (footsteps) is the plural of خطوة which is derived from خطا which means, he stepped or walked, خطوة means, the distance between the two feet of a person while walking. The clause لا تتبعوا خطوات الشیطان would also mean, do not follow the ways of Satan (Aqrab).
مبین (open) is derived from بان meaning: (1) it became clear and manifest; or (2) it became separated or disunited or cut off. ابان الشیء means (1) he or it made the thing clear; or (2) he or it cut the thing into pieces or made it disunited. ابان الشیءmeans, the thing became clear. Thus مبین would mean: (1) a being or thing which is clear and manifest; (2) a being or thing which makes other things clear; and (3) a being or thing which cuts another thing into pieces and makes it disunited (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Good actions must accompany true faith. So with this verse begins a discussion of the second part of Abraham’s prayer regarding the work of the Promised Prophet, i.e., the teaching of the laws of Shari‘ah and of the wisdom underlying them.
Henceforward ordinances about Prayer, Fasting, Pilgrimage and Zakah are given and so are the laws relating to social matters and as food plays an important part in the formation of a man’s character, regulations concerning it are mentioned first. According to Islam, all food should be: (1) حلال i.e. allowed by the Law; and (2) it should also be طیبi.e. good, pure, wholesome and agreeable. Under the second condition, sometimes even lawful things become forbidden. Thus, for instance, the eating of goat’s flesh is حلال or lawful; but if some flesh becomes rotten and putrefied, it will not be طیب and will consequently not be permissible. This distinction between حلال (lawful) and طیب (good and pure) food is not to be found in any teaching except that of Islam. So comprehensive is the Islamic teaching on this subject that not only are conditions laid down as to when lawful things become prohibited, as in this verse, but also as to when even unlawful food becomes permissible (2:174; 5:4; 6:120, 146; 16:116).
The prohibition against following Satan, coming immediately after the commandment with respect to food, alludes to the influence which physical actions exercise on the moral and spiritual conditions of man. The use of unlawful and unwholesome food tends to impair our moral and spiritual faculties, while lawful and wholesome food improves our morals and helps the development of our spiritual powers. This subject is also dealt with in 23:52.
As explained under Important Words above, the word مبین gives three different meanings. Thus عدو مبین would mean (1) that Satan is a manifest and open enemy of man; (2) that Satan is not only manifest himself but also makes his connections manifest—leaving a visible trace of wickedness wherever he treads; and (3) that he is always striving to create disunion among the Faithful and to cut asunder all such ties as God has ordered to be made firm. In this connection see also 2:28.
c
5:89; 8:70; 16:115.
d
2:209; 6:143; 24:22.
e
7:23; 12:6; 28:16; 35:7; 36:61.
192
Good actions must accompany true faith. With this verse begins a discussion of the second part of Abraham’s prayer regarding the work of the Promised Prophet, i.e. the teaching of the laws of the Shari‘ah and of the wisdom underlying them. Henceforward ordinances about Prayer, Fasting, Pilgrimage and Zakat are given and so are the laws relating to social matters; and as food plays an important part in the formation of a man’s character, regulations concerning it are mentioned first. All food according to Islam should be: (1) Halal, i.e. allowed by the Law; and (2) it should also be Tayyib, i.e. good, pure, wholesome and agreeable. Under the second condition sometimes even lawful things become forbidden.
193
The prohibition against following Satan, coming immediately after the commandment with respect to food, alludes to the influence which physical actions exercise on the moral and spiritual conditions of man. The use of unlawful and unwholesome food tends to impair man’s moral faculties and impede his spiritual development. See also 23:52.
إِنَّمَا يَأْمُرُكُم بِٱلسُّوٓءِ وَٱلْفَحْشَآءِ وَأَن تَقُولُوا۟ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا تَعْلَمُونَ
2:269; 24:22.
قَالَ عَلَیْہِ کے معنے ہیں اِفْتَرٰی جان بوجھ کر کسی کے متعلق جھوٹ بولا۔ (اقرب الموارد)
2:269; 24:22.
Satan first prompts man to do such deeds as do not appear to be manifestly bad and the influence of which is confined to the doer alone. Then step by step he makes him a hardened sinner, making him lose all sense of modesty.
2:269; 24:22.
Important Words:
سوء (evil) is the noun-infinitive from ساء meaning, he or it became bad or evil. ساء الامر فلانا means, the thing was disagreeable to such a one and made him sorrowful. سوء means: (1) evil, bad or wicked; (2) mischief and corruption; (3) anything that makes a person sad and sorrowful (Aqrab & Mufradat).
فحشاء (foul) is derived from فحش i.e. it became excessive or immoderate; or it became manifestly or excessively bad, evil or unseemly. Thus فحشاء means: (1) anything manifestly or excessively bad, evil, etc.; (2) anything forbidden by God; (3) foul talk or saying; and (4) illegal intercourse or fornication (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse speaks of the subtle ways by which Satan misleads man. He first prompts him to do deeds which do not appear to be manifestly wicked and the influence of which is confined to the person of the doer alone. Then, step by step, he makes the deluded person a hardened sinner, causing him to lose all sense of modesty, till finally the man goes so far as to make innovations in religion for which he possesses neither knowledge nor authority. As Satan’s promptings are never based on knowledge, so the natural consequence is that those who follow him begin to attribute to God things without having the least authority for so doing. Their theories are based on ignorance and not on knowledge. In fact, all knowledge is based on close observation, and close observation cannot be had, unless one enjoys nearness of a thing. So it is futile to expect true knowledge of God from those who are away from Him.
d
2:269; 24:22.
1
قَالَ عَلَیْہِ کے معنے ہیں اِفْتَرٰی جان بوجھ کر کسی کے متعلق جھوٹ بولا۔ (اقرب الموارد)
a
2:269; 24:22.
176
Important Words:
سوء (evil) is the noun-infinitive from ساء meaning, he or it became bad or evil. ساء الامر فلانا means, the thing was disagreeable to such a one and made him sorrowful. سوء means: (1) evil, bad or wicked; (2) mischief and corruption; (3) anything that makes a person sad and sorrowful (Aqrab & Mufradat).
فحشاء (foul) is derived from فحش i.e. it became excessive or immoderate; or it became manifestly or excessively bad, evil or unseemly. Thus فحشاء means: (1) anything manifestly or excessively bad, evil, etc.; (2) anything forbidden by God; (3) foul talk or saying; and (4) illegal intercourse or fornication (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse speaks of the subtle ways by which Satan misleads man. He first prompts him to do deeds which do not appear to be manifestly wicked and the influence of which is confined to the person of the doer alone. Then, step by step, he makes the deluded person a hardened sinner, causing him to lose all sense of modesty, till finally the man goes so far as to make innovations in religion for which he possesses neither knowledge nor authority. As Satan’s promptings are never based on knowledge, so the natural consequence is that those who follow him begin to attribute to God things without having the least authority for so doing. Their theories are based on ignorance and not on knowledge. In fact, all knowledge is based on close observation, and close observation cannot be had, unless one enjoys nearness of a thing. So it is futile to expect true knowledge of God from those who are away from Him.
a
2:269; 24:22.
194
Satan first prompts man to do such deeds as do not appear to be manifestly bad and the influence of which is confined to the doer alone. Then step by step he makes him a hardened sinner, making him lose all sense of modesty.
وَإِذَا قِيلَ لَهُمُ ٱتَّبِعُوا۟ مَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ قَالُوا۟ بَلْ نَتَّبِعُ مَآ أَلْفَيْنَا عَلَيْهِ ءَابَآءَنَآ ۗ أَوَلَوْ كَانَ ءَابَآؤُهُمْ لَا يَعْقِلُونَ شَيْـًٔا وَلَا يَهْتَدُونَ
5:105; 10:79; 21:53, 54; 31:22.
قرآنی الفاظ اَوَلَوْ ہیں۔ چونکہ عربی میں سوال کا لفظ بہرحال پہلے آتا ہے اور اردو میں عطف کے بعد۔ اس کا ترجمہ یہ ہوگا ’’اور کیا اگر‘‘ مگر اردو میں ’’اور کیا اگر‘‘ یہ تینوں لفظ جمع نہیں ہوتے بلکہ ایسے موقع پر ’’اورکیا‘‘ کی جگہ ایک لفظ ’’بھلا‘‘ کا بولا جاتا ہے۔ پس وہی لفظ اس جگہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔
5:105; 10:79; 21:53, 54; 31:22.
It is indeed strange, but nevertheless regrettable, that in matters of religion which so deeply concern his eternal life man is often content to follow blindly in the footsteps of his elders. But in worldly matters where only the interests of this life are at stake, and that too partially, he takes meticulous care to see that he adopts the right course, and does not blindly follow others.
5:105; 10:79; 21:53, 54; 31:22.
Commentary:
It is indeed strange, but nevertheless a hard fact, that in matters of religion which so deeply concern man, he is often content to follow blindly the footsteps of his forefathers and does not even care to satisfy himself that his forefathers were wise and well-guided people. On the other hand, in worldly matters where only the interests of this life are at stake, and that too partially, he often takes meticulous care to see that he adopts the right course and does not blindly follow others.
e
5:105; 10:79; 21:53, 54; 31:22.
2
قرآنی الفاظ اَوَلَوْ ہیں۔ چونکہ عربی میں سوال کا لفظ بہرحال پہلے آتا ہے اور اردو میں عطف کے بعد۔ اس کا ترجمہ یہ ہوگا ’’اور کیا اگر‘‘ مگر اردو میں ’’اور کیا اگر‘‘ یہ تینوں لفظ جمع نہیں ہوتے بلکہ ایسے موقع پر ’’اورکیا‘‘ کی جگہ ایک لفظ ’’بھلا‘‘ کا بولا جاتا ہے۔ پس وہی لفظ اس جگہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔
a
5:105; 10:79; 21:53, 54; 31:22.
177
Commentary:
It is indeed strange, but nevertheless a hard fact, that in matters of religion which so deeply concern man, he is often content to follow blindly the footsteps of his forefathers and does not even care to satisfy himself that his forefathers were wise and well-guided people. On the other hand, in worldly matters where only the interests of this life are at stake, and that too partially, he often takes meticulous care to see that he adopts the right course and does not blindly follow others.
b
5:105; 10:79; 21:53, 54; 31:22.
195
It is indeed strange, but nevertheless regrettable, that in matters of religion which so deeply concern his eternal life man is often content to follow blindly in the footsteps of his elders. But in worldly matters where only the interests of this life are at stake, and that too partially, he takes meticulous care to see that he adopts the right course, and does not blindly follow others.
وَمَثَلُ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ كَمَثَلِ ٱلَّذِى يَنْعِقُ بِمَا لَا يَسْمَعُ إِلَّا دُعَآءً وَنِدَآءً ۚ صُمٌّۢ بُكْمٌ عُمْىٌ فَهُمْ لَا يَعْقِلُونَ
2:19.
یَنْعِقُ کے معنے اصل میں جانور کو آواز دینے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ جانور آواز سن کر مالک کی اتباع کرتا ہے مگر اس کے الفاظ کا مطلب نہیں سمجھتا۔ فرمایا یہی حال کفار کا ہے۔ یہ لوگ ایک دوسرے کی اتباع بھیڑ چال کے طور پر کرتے ہیں اور یہ غور نہیں کرتے کہ کہنے والا کیا کہتا ہے‘ اور سننے والا کیا سنتا ہے۔ اس کے برخلاف اسلام کا داعی معقول بات کہتا ہے اور سمجھا کر کہتا ہے اور اس کے مُتّبع اس پر سمجھ کر عمل کرتے ہیں۔ نہ یہ کہ جانوروں کی طرح صرف آواز سنتے اور مطلب‘ غرض اور حکمت سے بے خبر ہوتے ہیں۔
یعنی تعصب نے سب حواس معطل کر دئیے ہیں۔ اس لئے اپنے طریق کی شناعت کو محسوس نہیں کر سکتے۔
See 2:19.
The Holy Prophet delivered the Divine Message to disbelievers. He is the crier. They heard his voice but made no effort to grasp its meaning. His words fell, as it were, on deaf ears, with the result that their spiritual faculties became wholly vitiated and they stooped low to the level of animals and beasts (7:180; 25:45), which only hear the cry of the crier but do not understand what he says.
See 2:19.
Important Words:
ینعق (shouts) is derived from نعق which means, he cried aloud. They say نعق الراعی بغنمه i.e. the shepherd shouted to his flock.نعق المؤذن means, the (Mu’adhdhin) raised his voice to call people to Prayer (Aqrab).
دعاء (call). دعاه means, he called a person by addressing him (Aqrab).
نداء (cry) means: (1) a loud voice or cry; (2) a general call without any specific person being addressed (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In this verse the Holy Prophet has been likened to a herdsman who shouts to his flock but they hear nothing except the sound, being unable to understand the meaning of the words uttered by him. Similarly, the people whom the Prophet addresses are like a herd of animals unable to follow and understand his call. The words of the verse fully expressed would read somewhat like this: مثل الذین کفروا کمثل اصحاب الذی ینعق i.e. "The case of those who disbelieve is like that of a people surrounding one who shouts, etc." The Holy Prophet conveyed the Divine Message to disbelievers. They heard his voice but made no effort to grasp the meaning of his message. His words fell, as it were, on deaf ears, with the result that the spiritual faculties of the disbelievers became wholly vitiated and they stooped low to the level of animals and beasts (7:180; 25:45).
f
2:19.
3
یَنْعِقُ کے معنے اصل میں جانور کو آواز دینے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ جانور آواز سن کر مالک کی اتباع کرتا ہے مگر اس کے الفاظ کا مطلب نہیں سمجھتا۔ فرمایا یہی حال کفار کا ہے۔ یہ لوگ ایک دوسرے کی اتباع بھیڑ چال کے طور پر کرتے ہیں اور یہ غور نہیں کرتے کہ کہنے والا کیا کہتا ہے‘ اور سننے والا کیا سنتا ہے۔ اس کے برخلاف اسلام کا داعی معقول بات کہتا ہے اور سمجھا کر کہتا ہے اور اس کے مُتّبع اس پر سمجھ کر عمل کرتے ہیں۔ نہ یہ کہ جانوروں کی طرح صرف آواز سنتے اور مطلب‘ غرض اور حکمت سے بے خبر ہوتے ہیں۔
4
یعنی تعصب نے سب حواس معطل کر دئیے ہیں۔ اس لئے اپنے طریق کی شناعت کو محسوس نہیں کر سکتے۔
b
See 2:19.
178
Important Words:
ینعق (shouts) is derived from نعق which means, he cried aloud. They say نعق الراعی بغنمه i.e. the shepherd shouted to his flock.نعق المؤذن means, the (Mu’adhdhin) raised his voice to call people to Prayer (Aqrab).
دعاء (call). دعاه means, he called a person by addressing him (Aqrab).
نداء (cry) means: (1) a loud voice or cry; (2) a general call without any specific person being addressed (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In this verse the Holy Prophet has been likened to a herdsman who shouts to his flock but they hear nothing except the sound, being unable to understand the meaning of the words uttered by him. Similarly, the people whom the Prophet addresses are like a herd of animals unable to follow and understand his call. The words of the verse fully expressed would read somewhat like this: مثل الذین کفروا کمثل اصحاب الذی ینعق i.e. "The case of those who disbelieve is like that of a people surrounding one who shouts, etc." The Holy Prophet conveyed the Divine Message to disbelievers. They heard his voice but made no effort to grasp the meaning of his message. His words fell, as it were, on deaf ears, with the result that the spiritual faculties of the disbelievers became wholly vitiated and they stooped low to the level of animals and beasts (7:180; 25:45).
c
See 2:19.
196
The Holy Prophet delivered the Divine Message to disbelievers. He is the crier. They heard his voice but made no effort to grasp its meaning. His words fell, as it were, on deaf ears, with the result that their spiritual faculties became wholly vitiated and they stooped low to the level of animals and beasts (7:180; 25:45), which only hear the cry of the crier but do not understand what he says.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُلُوا۟ مِن طَيِّبَٰتِ مَا رَزَقْنَٰكُمْ وَٱشْكُرُوا۟ لِلَّهِ إِن كُنتُمْ إِيَّاهُ تَعْبُدُونَ
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
اصل عبارت میں عِبَادَۃ کے ساتھ ضمیر اور شُکْر کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے لیکن ترجمہ میں عبادت کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ اور شکر کے ساتھ ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے کیونکہ اردو ترتیب میں اس کے سوا چارہ نہ تھا۔
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of good, pure and wholesome things (Tayyibat) indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be allowed by the Shari‘ah.
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
Commentary:
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of طیبات i.e. good, pure and wholesome things", indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be حلال i.e. allowed by Law. The injunction is thus very important and far-reaching in its effect. The words, We have provided for you, further imply that Muslims are also not allowed to make use of things acquired by unfair and unlawful means. Only the things bestowed by God, i.e. those lawfully earned, are to be used.
g
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
5
اصل عبارت میں عِبَادَۃ کے ساتھ ضمیر اور شُکْر کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے لیکن ترجمہ میں عبادت کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ اور شکر کے ساتھ ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے کیونکہ اردو ترتیب میں اس کے سوا چارہ نہ تھا۔
a
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
179
Commentary:
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of طیبات i.e. good, pure and wholesome things", indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be حلال i.e. allowed by Law. The injunction is thus very important and far-reaching in its effect. The words, We have provided for you, further imply that Muslims are also not allowed to make use of things acquired by unfair and unlawful means. Only the things bestowed by God, i.e. those lawfully earned, are to be used.
a
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
197
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of good, pure and wholesome things (Tayyibat) indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be allowed by the Shari‘ah.
إِنَّمَا حَرَّمَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْمَيْتَةَ وَٱلدَّمَ وَلَحْمَ ٱلْخِنزِيرِ وَمَآ أُهِلَّ بِهِۦ لِغَيْرِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَمَنِ ٱضْطُرَّ غَيْرَ بَاغٍ وَلَا عَادٍ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
5:4; 6:146; 16:116.
这个肮脏动物的这个名称含有禁止吃它肉的暗示。此词为 خِنْز (Khinz) 和 اَرٰی (Ara) 的结合; 第一部分含意为很脏, 第二部分为 “我看到”, 意即, “我看到它很脏” ……。在印度语中, 这动物的名称叫做 سُؤر (Su’ar) 这与阿拉伯语خِنْزِيْر (Khinzir) 具有完全相同的意义, 即 “我看到它很脏” ……在印度语中这动物也叫做 بَدْ Bad意思是 “坏” 或 “脏” 这也许是原来阿拉伯字的翻译。
اِثْم (Ithm) 的意思是任何不合法的事情, 即一种罪恶; 使人应受惩罚的事情 (اَقْرَبْ, Aqrab); 凡是使良心受谴责的事, 如恶行 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。在本节经文中所提到的这四种东西并不是伊斯兰教所仅仅禁止的。伊斯兰教也禁止使用许多其它东西, 分成不同种类, 其中有些属 “非法的”, 有些属 مَمْنُوْع (Mamnu‘, 禁止的)。加注的这节经文只提到 “非法的东西” 。禁止的东西已由穆圣阐明, 并在圣训中提到。使用 حَرَام (Haram--------一种非法的东西--------对人类的道德发展有着直接关系, 但对于较次要的禁止的东西, 则不是这样, 虽然两者都是被禁止的。在本节经文中被宣称为非法的这些东西中, 作为食物的血和死动物的肉显然是有害的, 而大多数的医学权威也是这样认为的。已被证实猪肉除了对人类的身体健康有害, 也对他们的道德和精神健康有害。猪吃污物并以生活在肮脏的地方为乐。它有下流习惯并有性反常的邪恶癖性。人们知道绦虫、淋巴结核、癌症以及囊色旋毛虫在食猪肉的人们中间较普遍。吃猪肉还会引起旋毛虫病。
اُھِلَّ کے معنے بلند آواز سے کچھ کہنے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ محاورہ میں کسی جانور یا کسی اور نعمت کے متعلق خداتعالیٰ یا کسی دیوتا کے نام کے پکارنے کے لئے بھی بولا جاتا ہے۔ مثلاً کسی چیز کے متعلق کہہ دیا کہ یہ فلاں دیوتا کی ہے یا خداتعالیٰ کی ہے یا ذبح کرتے وقت خداتعالیٰ کا یا اور کسی دیوتا کا نام لے دیا۔ فرمایا ایسی اشیا کا استعمال حرام ہے خواہ خدا کے سوا کسی اور کی نیاز ہو‘ یا ذبح کے وقت کسی اور کا نام لیا گیا ہو دونوں میں کوئی فرق نہیں کیا گیا۔
فَاء کا ترجمہ یہاں ’’مگر‘‘ کیا گیا ہے کیونکہ وہ بھی نتیجہ پر دلالت کرتا ہے جو فَاء کا مفہوم ہے۔
5:4; 6:146; 16:116.
The very name of this foul animal contains an allusion to the prohibition of its flesh. The word is a combination of Khinz and Ara; the first part meaning, 'very foul' and the second, 'I see', meaning, 'I see it very foul'……In Hindi, this animal is known by the name Su’ar which exactly means the same as the Arabic Khinzir, i.e. 'I see it very foul'......In Hindi this animal is also known as bad meaning 'bad' or 'foul' which is probably a translation of the original Arabic word.
Ithm means, anything unlawful, i.e. a sin; anything which renders a person deserving of punishment (Aqrab); anything that pricks the mind as something evil (Mufradat). The four things mentioned in this verse are not the only things prohibited in Islam. Islam prohibits the use of many other things also which are divided into grades or categories, some of them being "unlawful" and others Mamnu‘ (forbidden). The verse under comment mentions only the "unlawful things." The forbidden things have been stated by the Holy Prophet and are mentioned in the Hadith. The use of Haram or an unlawful thing has direct bearing on the moral development of man but it is not so with a forbidden thing which stands on a lower level of importance, though both are prohibited. Among the things declared unlawful in this verse, the blood and the flesh of a dead animal as food are evidently injurious and have been recognized as such by most authorities on medicine. The flesh of swine has been proved to be injur
5:4; 6:146; 16:116.
Important Words:
المیتة (that which dies of itself) is derived from مات i.e. he died. میتة means: (1) an animal that has died a natural death (Aqrab); (2) an animal that has not been slaughtered in a manner prescribed by Law (Lane & Mufradat).
الخنزیر (swine). Authorities differ as to the derivation of this word, some deriving it from خنزر and others from خزر. The word الخنزرة means, hard and rugged land; or a clumsy, badly-finished axe. خزر الرجل means, the man looked with the hinder parts or outer angles of his eyes (Lisan). خزرت العین means, the eye was or became narrow and small. خزر الرجل means, the man looked from the outer angle of the eye; or he had a distortion of one of his eyes. The Arabs say: کل خنزیراخزر i.e. all swine look from the outer angles of their eyes. خزر المرء means the man affected or pretended to be cunning. الخنزیر means, the swine, the hog, the pig; a certain well-known foul animal the eating of whose flesh is said to be forbidden by every Prophet (Lane). The Holy Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement says of the word خنزیر: "The very name of this foul animal contains an allusion to the prohibition of its flesh. It is a combination of خنز and ار, the first part meaning, 'very foul' and the second, 'I see'. The word thus literally means, 'I see it very foul'…What is yet more remarkable is that in Hindi this animal is known by the name سؤر which is similarly composed of two words, i.e. سوء and ار, the latter part being identical with the latter part of the Arabic word and the former being the exact equivalent of the first part of the Arabic form. The Hindi word, therefore, exactly means the same as the Arabic, viz. 'I see it very foul'…In Hindi this animal is also known as بد meaning bad or foul which is probably a translation of the original Arabic word" (Teachings of Islam).
أھل (invoked) is derived from ھل meaning, it (the moon) made its appearance; he (the man) cried aloud. اھل also means, it made its appearance; he called or cried aloud. اھل بالتسمیة علی الذبیحة means, he invoked or pronounced the name of God while slaughtering an animal. اھل السیف بفلان means, the sword cut into him ( Aqrab). اھلال which is the infinitive-noun from اھل means, to raise one’s voice aloud by way of exclamation, on seeing the ھلال or the moon of the first night (Mufradat). Thus اھل به لغیر الله would mean, on which the name of anything besides God has been invoked at the time of slaughter; or which has been cut or slaughtered for a being other than God.
اضطر (driven by necessity) is derived from ضر which means, it did harm. ضرہ الی کذا means, it forced him to resort to that. اضطره means, he compelled him against his will. اضطره الی کذا means, he compelled him against his will to have recourse to that (Aqrab).
باغ (disobedient) is derived from بغی meaning, he rebelled; he disobeyed; he committed a wrong. باغ is really باغی being the active participle from بغی meaning, one who disobeys; one who is rebellious (Aqrab).
عاد (exceeding the limit) is the active participle from عدا i.e. he exceeded the proper or the prescribed limit. عدی علیهmeans, he transgressed against him. عاد is really عادی meaning, one who exceeds the limit (Aqrab).
اثم (sin). The verb اثم means, he did a thing which was unlawful for him; he did a thing which made him deserving of punishment. Thus the noun اثم means: (1) anything unlawful, i.e. a sin; (2) anything which makes a person deserving of punishment (Aqrab); (3) anything that pricks the mind as something evil (Mufradat).
Commentary:
This verse speaks only of food that is حرام or unlawful. It makes no mention of طیبات or pure and wholesome things to which reference has already been made in the preceding verse. It should not be supposed that the four things mentioned in this verse are the only things prohibited in Islam. As a matter of fact, Islam prohibits the use of many things; but they are divided into grades or classes, some of them being حرام or unlawful and others being ممنوع or simply forbidden. The verse under comment mentions only the former class. The forbidden things have been stated by the Holy Prophet and are mentioned in Hadith. They must not be used by the Faithful but they cannot be called حرام or unlawful. In fact, there is a great difference between unlawful (حرام) and forbidden (ممنوع) things. Islam recognizes due difference in the importance of different things, and so all prohibitions cannot be classed together and treated as of equal importance. The use of حرام or an unlawful thing has a great and direct bearing on the moral and spiritual development of man but it is not so with a ممنوع or forbidden thing which stands on a lower level of importance, though both are prohibited.
Among the things declared حرام or unlawful in this verse, the injuriousness of consuming blood and the flesh of a dead animal as food has been recognized by most authorities on medicine. The use of the flesh of swine has also proved to be injurious not only to the physical health of man, but also to his moral and spiritual health. The swine eats filth and takes delight in living in dirty places. It has indecent habits and possesses the evil trait of sex-perversion. Tape-worms, scrofula, cancer and encysted trichina are known to be more prevalent among pork-eating peoples. The use of pork also causes trichinosis.
The clause, and that on which the name of any other than Allah has been invoked, refers to that animal at the time of whose slaughter the name of any deity other than Allah is invoked or that animal which is slaughtered with a view to winning the pleasure of an idol or a saint etc., even though the name of Allah may have been mentioned while slaughtering it. Hence, all such animals as are sacrificed in order to propitiate a false deity or a saint, or any food that is cooked as an offering to a deceased person have been condemned as unlawful. Such foods are spiritually harmful. The incentive to these offerings is شرك (i.e. idolatry) and شرك is tantamount to rebellion against God.
In spite of the fact that the above mentioned things have been declared to be unlawful, the verse goes on to say that if for want of food the very life of a person should be in danger, considerations of the preservation of human life must temporarily prevail over other considerations. This is a case of choosing the lesser of two evils. Hence the verse very wisely makes an exception in case of a real and urgent necessity when no other food is available and one is in real danger of losing one’s life if one does not use the unlawful food. In fact, of the four unlawful things, the first three have been declared unlawful mostly on the basis of the fact that they are injurious to physical and moral health, and it is certainly wise to permit their use in case of urgent necessity when there is real danger to life. As for the fourth thing, i.e. a food consecrated to any other being beside Allah, it is evident that it is not injurious intrinsically. It is injurious only from the point of view of faith. Therefore when such a thing is used merely to save one’s life, which may be so usefully employed in the service of religion, there can be no real objection in eating it, because this extremely rare act cannot be considered as involving شرك or idolatry, particularly when it is performed with the sanction of God.
Permission for the exceptional use of such things is, however, qualified by two important conditions: (1) that one who resorts to this use must not be باغی (i.e. disobedient). There should be no lurking spirit of revolt or disobedience behind the act. The circumstances must be real and the condition genuine, and nothing should be done out of design and wilfulness; (2) that the user of unlawful food under exceptional circumstances should not become عاد i.e. he should not exceed the limit. He should confine himself to such quantity only as is absolutely essential to save life. Thus the exceptional use is permissible only at a time when one is under bona fide constraint and is in real danger, and then only to the extent which is absolutely necessary for saving life.
Though it has been declared in this verse that there is no sin in partaking of a prohibited food when no revolt or transgression is intended, yet as one might err in judging what is revolt or transgression and what is not, and thus be unconsciously guilty of breaking a divine commandment, the Quran adds the words: surely, Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful, meaning that an unintentional deviation will be forgiven by the Merciful God. The clause also reminds a Muslim that though it has been made permissible for him to take unlawful food in exceptional circumstances, yet such circumstances may be due to certain hidden shortcomings of his own for which he should seek God’s forgiveness, and that if he does so he will find God Forgiving and Merciful. In this connection see also 5:4; 6:146 & 16:116.
h
5:4; 6:146; 16:116.
110
这个肮脏动物的这个名称含有禁止吃它肉的暗示。此词为 خِنْز (Khinz) 和 اَرٰی (Ara) 的结合; 第一部分含意为很脏, 第二部分为 “我看到”, 意即, “我看到它很脏” ……。在印度语中, 这动物的名称叫做 سُؤر (Su’ar) 这与阿拉伯语خِنْزِيْر (Khinzir) 具有完全相同的意义, 即 “我看到它很脏” ……在印度语中这动物也叫做 بَدْ Bad意思是 “坏” 或 “脏” 这也许是原来阿拉伯字的翻译。
111
اِثْم (Ithm) 的意思是任何不合法的事情, 即一种罪恶; 使人应受惩罚的事情 (اَقْرَبْ, Aqrab); 凡是使良心受谴责的事, 如恶行 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。在本节经文中所提到的这四种东西并不是伊斯兰教所仅仅禁止的。伊斯兰教也禁止使用许多其它东西, 分成不同种类, 其中有些属 “非法的”, 有些属 مَمْنُوْع (Mamnu‘, 禁止的)。加注的这节经文只提到 “非法的东西” 。禁止的东西已由穆圣阐明, 并在圣训中提到。使用 حَرَام (Haram--------一种非法的东西--------对人类的道德发展有着直接关系, 但对于较次要的禁止的东西, 则不是这样, 虽然两者都是被禁止的。在本节经文中被宣称为非法的这些东西中, 作为食物的血和死动物的肉显然是有害的, 而大多数的医学权威也是这样认为的。已被证实猪肉除了对人类的身体健康有害, 也对他们的道德和精神健康有害。猪吃污物并以生活在肮脏的地方为乐。它有下流习惯并有性反常的邪恶癖性。人们知道绦虫、淋巴结核、癌症以及囊色旋毛虫在食猪肉的人们中间较普遍。吃猪肉还会引起旋毛虫病。
1
اُھِلَّ کے معنے بلند آواز سے کچھ کہنے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ محاورہ میں کسی جانور یا کسی اور نعمت کے متعلق خداتعالیٰ یا کسی دیوتا کے نام کے پکارنے کے لئے بھی بولا جاتا ہے۔ مثلاً کسی چیز کے متعلق کہہ دیا کہ یہ فلاں دیوتا کی ہے یا خداتعالیٰ کی ہے یا ذبح کرتے وقت خداتعالیٰ کا یا اور کسی دیوتا کا نام لے دیا۔ فرمایا ایسی اشیا کا استعمال حرام ہے خواہ خدا کے سوا کسی اور کی نیاز ہو‘ یا ذبح کے وقت کسی اور کا نام لیا گیا ہو دونوں میں کوئی فرق نہیں کیا گیا۔
2
فَاء کا ترجمہ یہاں ’’مگر‘‘ کیا گیا ہے کیونکہ وہ بھی نتیجہ پر دلالت کرتا ہے جو فَاء کا مفہوم ہے۔
b
5:4; 6:146; 16:116.
180
Important Words:
المیتة (that which dies of itself) is derived from مات i.e. he died. میتة means: (1) an animal that has died a natural death (Aqrab); (2) an animal that has not been slaughtered in a manner prescribed by Law (Lane & Mufradat).
الخنزیر (swine). Authorities differ as to the derivation of this word, some deriving it from خنزر and others from خزر. The word الخنزرة means, hard and rugged land; or a clumsy, badly-finished axe. خزر الرجل means, the man looked with the hinder parts or outer angles of his eyes (Lisan). خزرت العین means, the eye was or became narrow and small. خزر الرجل means, the man looked from the outer angle of the eye; or he had a distortion of one of his eyes. The Arabs say: کل خنزیراخزر i.e. all swine look from the outer angles of their eyes. خزر المرء means the man affected or pretended to be cunning. الخنزیر means, the swine, the hog, the pig; a certain well-known foul animal the eating of whose flesh is said to be forbidden by every Prophet (Lane). The Holy Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement says of the word خنزیر: "The very name of this foul animal contains an allusion to the prohibition of its flesh. It is a combination of خنز and ار, the first part meaning, 'very foul' and the second, 'I see'. The word thus literally means, 'I see it very foul'…What is yet more remarkable is that in Hindi this animal is known by the name سؤر which is similarly composed of two words, i.e. سوء and ار, the latter part being identical with the latter part of the Arabic word and the former being the exact equivalent of the first part of the Arabic form. The Hindi word, therefore, exactly means the same as the Arabic, viz. 'I see it very foul'…In Hindi this animal is also known as بد meaning bad or foul which is probably a translation of the original Arabic word" (Teachings of Islam).
أھل (invoked) is derived from ھل meaning, it (the moon) made its appearance; he (the man) cried aloud. اھل also means, it made its appearance; he called or cried aloud. اھل بالتسمیة علی الذبیحة means, he invoked or pronounced the name of God while slaughtering an animal. اھل السیف بفلان means, the sword cut into him ( Aqrab). اھلال which is the infinitive-noun from اھل means, to raise one’s voice aloud by way of exclamation, on seeing the ھلال or the moon of the first night (Mufradat). Thus اھل به لغیر الله would mean, on which the name of anything besides God has been invoked at the time of slaughter; or which has been cut or slaughtered for a being other than God.
اضطر (driven by necessity) is derived from ضر which means, it did harm. ضرہ الی کذا means, it forced him to resort to that. اضطره means, he compelled him against his will. اضطره الی کذا means, he compelled him against his will to have recourse to that (Aqrab).
باغ (disobedient) is derived from بغی meaning, he rebelled; he disobeyed; he committed a wrong. باغ is really باغی being the active participle from بغی meaning, one who disobeys; one who is rebellious (Aqrab).
عاد (exceeding the limit) is the active participle from عدا i.e. he exceeded the proper or the prescribed limit. عدی علیهmeans, he transgressed against him. عاد is really عادی meaning, one who exceeds the limit (Aqrab).
اثم (sin). The verb اثم means, he did a thing which was unlawful for him; he did a thing which made him deserving of punishment. Thus the noun اثم means: (1) anything unlawful, i.e. a sin; (2) anything which makes a person deserving of punishment (Aqrab); (3) anything that pricks the mind as something evil (Mufradat).
Commentary:
This verse speaks only of food that is حرام or unlawful. It makes no mention of طیبات or pure and wholesome things to which reference has already been made in the preceding verse. It should not be supposed that the four things mentioned in this verse are the only things prohibited in Islam. As a matter of fact, Islam prohibits the use of many things; but they are divided into grades or classes, some of them being حرام or unlawful and others being ممنوع or simply forbidden. The verse under comment mentions only the former class. The forbidden things have been stated by the Holy Prophet and are mentioned in Hadith. They must not be used by the Faithful but they cannot be called حرام or unlawful. In fact, there is a great difference between unlawful (حرام) and forbidden (ممنوع) things. Islam recognizes due difference in the importance of different things, and so all prohibitions cannot be classed together and treated as of equal importance. The use of حرام or an unlawful thing has a great and direct bearing on the moral and spiritual development of man but it is not so with a ممنوع or forbidden thing which stands on a lower level of importance, though both are prohibited.
Among the things declared حرام or unlawful in this verse, the injuriousness of consuming blood and the flesh of a dead animal as food has been recognized by most authorities on medicine. The use of the flesh of swine has also proved to be injurious not only to the physical health of man, but also to his moral and spiritual health. The swine eats filth and takes delight in living in dirty places. It has indecent habits and possesses the evil trait of sex-perversion. Tape-worms, scrofula, cancer and encysted trichina are known to be more prevalent among pork-eating peoples. The use of pork also causes trichinosis.
The clause, and that on which the name of any other than Allah has been invoked, refers to that animal at the time of whose slaughter the name of any deity other than Allah is invoked or that animal which is slaughtered with a view to winning the pleasure of an idol or a saint etc., even though the name of Allah may have been mentioned while slaughtering it. Hence, all such animals as are sacrificed in order to propitiate a false deity or a saint, or any food that is cooked as an offering to a deceased person have been condemned as unlawful. Such foods are spiritually harmful. The incentive to these offerings is شرك (i.e. idolatry) and شرك is tantamount to rebellion against God.
In spite of the fact that the above mentioned things have been declared to be unlawful, the verse goes on to say that if for want of food the very life of a person should be in danger, considerations of the preservation of human life must temporarily prevail over other considerations. This is a case of choosing the lesser of two evils. Hence the verse very wisely makes an exception in case of a real and urgent necessity when no other food is available and one is in real danger of losing one’s life if one does not use the unlawful food. In fact, of the four unlawful things, the first three have been declared unlawful mostly on the basis of the fact that they are injurious to physical and moral health, and it is certainly wise to permit their use in case of urgent necessity when there is real danger to life. As for the fourth thing, i.e. a food consecrated to any other being beside Allah, it is evident that it is not injurious intrinsically. It is injurious only from the point of view of faith. Therefore when such a thing is used merely to save one’s life, which may be so usefully employed in the service of religion, there can be no real objection in eating it, because this extremely rare act cannot be considered as involving شرك or idolatry, particularly when it is performed with the sanction of God.
Permission for the exceptional use of such things is, however, qualified by two important conditions: (1) that one who resorts to this use must not be باغی (i.e. disobedient). There should be no lurking spirit of revolt or disobedience behind the act. The circumstances must be real and the condition genuine, and nothing should be done out of design and wilfulness; (2) that the user of unlawful food under exceptional circumstances should not become عاد i.e. he should not exceed the limit. He should confine himself to such quantity only as is absolutely essential to save life. Thus the exceptional use is permissible only at a time when one is under bona fide constraint and is in real danger, and then only to the extent which is absolutely necessary for saving life.
Though it has been declared in this verse that there is no sin in partaking of a prohibited food when no revolt or transgression is intended, yet as one might err in judging what is revolt or transgression and what is not, and thus be unconsciously guilty of breaking a divine commandment, the Quran adds the words: surely, Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful, meaning that an unintentional deviation will be forgiven by the Merciful God. The clause also reminds a Muslim that though it has been made permissible for him to take unlawful food in exceptional circumstances, yet such circumstances may be due to certain hidden shortcomings of his own for which he should seek God’s forgiveness, and that if he does so he will find God Forgiving and Merciful. In this connection see also 5:4; 6:146 & 16:116.
b
5:4; 6:146; 16:116.
198
The very name of this foul animal contains an allusion to the prohibition of its flesh. The word is a combination of Khinz and Ara; the first part meaning, 'very foul' and the second, 'I see', meaning, 'I see it very foul'……In Hindi, this animal is known by the name Su’ar which exactly means the same as the Arabic Khinzir, i.e. 'I see it very foul'......In Hindi this animal is also known as bad meaning 'bad' or 'foul' which is probably a translation of the original Arabic word.
199
Ithm means, anything unlawful, i.e. a sin; anything which renders a person deserving of punishment (Aqrab); anything that pricks the mind as something evil (Mufradat). The four things mentioned in this verse are not the only things prohibited in Islam. Islam prohibits the use of many other things also which are divided into grades or categories, some of them being "unlawful" and others Mamnu‘ (forbidden). The verse under comment mentions only the "unlawful things." The forbidden things have been stated by the Holy Prophet and are mentioned in the Hadith. The use of Haram or an unlawful thing has direct bearing on the moral development of man but it is not so with a forbidden thing which stands on a lower level of importance, though both are prohibited. Among the things declared unlawful in this verse, the blood and the flesh of a dead animal as food are evidently injurious and have been recognized as such by most authorities on medicine. The flesh of swine has been proved to be injur
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَكْتُمُونَ مَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ مِنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ وَيَشْتَرُونَ بِهِۦ ثَمَنًا قَلِيلًا ۙ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ مَا يَأْكُلُونَ فِى بُطُونِهِمْ إِلَّا ٱلنَّارَ وَلَا يُكَلِّمُهُمُ ٱللَّهُ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ وَلَا يُزَكِّيهِمْ وَلَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ
تھوڑی سی قیمت کا یہ مطلب نہیں کہ زیادہ قیمت لینا جائز ہے بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ دنیوی قیمت کتنی بھی زیادہ ہو وہ اس جرم و نقصان کے بدلہ میں تھوڑی اور حقیر ہے۔
See 2:147.
2:42.
2:160.
The words signify that as fire cannot satisfy thirst, but rather increases it, so the things of this world cannot bring peace of mind and contentment but rather the reverse of them.
See 2:147.
See 2:42.
2:160
Important Words:
یزکیھم (purify them) is from زکی meaning, he purified him; he elevated him (Aqrab). See also 2:130.
Commentary:
Sin generally originates from an undue love of the world but the world is indeed a small thing as compared with the Hereafter (9:38). Those who forsake truth or conceal it for the things of this world eat naught but fire which will eventually consume their own bodies. The verse beautifully hints that the things of this world, as opposed to spiritual blessings, are like the hellfire of the next. As food goes to make up the tissues of the body, so will the body of an enemy of truth eating fire become one whole mass of fire, serving as fuel for the fire of Hell. The words also signify that as fire cannot satisfy hunger and thirst, but rather increases them, so the things of this world cannot bring about peace of mind and contentment but rather the reverse of them. The verse also constitutes a stern warning to those preachers who, in order to gain worldly ends, accommodate their sermons to the views of the listeners and refrain from speaking the truth.
The words Allah will not speak to them do not mean that God will not speak to them at all; for God, being the Lord and Master, will speak even to the guilty on the Day of Judgement, but such speech will be like that of a judge condemning a criminal to punishment. What is meant is that God will not speak to them with love and affection.
The words, nor will He purify them, mean that He will not adjudge them as purified but will declare them unclean and unholy, These words may also mean that on the Day of Judgement, God will not elevate them or exalt them to Himself but will leave them abased and neglected. Again, as these people opposed the truth in the world in order that they might enjoy the good things thereof, they will correspondingly have a painful punishment in the Hereafter and will be deprived of all sweetness of life in the world to come (see important Words under 2:8).
a
2:147.
b
2:42.
c
2:160.
112
此话表明, 火不能解渴, 却相反增加口渴, 因此这个世界的这类事物不能带来心神的安宁和满足而适得相反。
3
تھوڑی سی قیمت کا یہ مطلب نہیں کہ زیادہ قیمت لینا جائز ہے بلکہ مطلب یہ ہے کہ دنیوی قیمت کتنی بھی زیادہ ہو وہ اس جرم و نقصان کے بدلہ میں تھوڑی اور حقیر ہے۔
a
See 2:147.
b
See 2:42.
c
2:160
181
Important Words:
یزکیھم (purify them) is from زکی meaning, he purified him; he elevated him (Aqrab). See also 2:130.
Commentary:
Sin generally originates from an undue love of the world but the world is indeed a small thing as compared with the Hereafter (9:38). Those who forsake truth or conceal it for the things of this world eat naught but fire which will eventually consume their own bodies. The verse beautifully hints that the things of this world, as opposed to spiritual blessings, are like the hellfire of the next. As food goes to make up the tissues of the body, so will the body of an enemy of truth eating fire become one whole mass of fire, serving as fuel for the fire of Hell. The words also signify that as fire cannot satisfy hunger and thirst, but rather increases them, so the things of this world cannot bring about peace of mind and contentment but rather the reverse of them. The verse also constitutes a stern warning to those preachers who, in order to gain worldly ends, accommodate their sermons to the views of the listeners and refrain from speaking the truth.
The words Allah will not speak to them do not mean that God will not speak to them at all; for God, being the Lord and Master, will speak even to the guilty on the Day of Judgement, but such speech will be like that of a judge condemning a criminal to punishment. What is meant is that God will not speak to them with love and affection.
The words, nor will He purify them, mean that He will not adjudge them as purified but will declare them unclean and unholy, These words may also mean that on the Day of Judgement, God will not elevate them or exalt them to Himself but will leave them abased and neglected. Again, as these people opposed the truth in the world in order that they might enjoy the good things thereof, they will correspondingly have a painful punishment in the Hereafter and will be deprived of all sweetness of life in the world to come (see important Words under 2:8).
a
See 2:147.
b
2:42.
c
2:160.
200
The words signify that as fire cannot satisfy thirst, but rather increases it, so the things of this world cannot bring peace of mind and contentment but rather the reverse of them.
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱشْتَرَوُا۟ ٱلضَّلَٰلَةَ بِٱلْهُدَىٰ وَٱلْعَذَابَ بِٱلْمَغْفِرَةِ ۚ فَمَآ أَصْبَرَهُمْ عَلَى ٱلنَّارِ
2:17; 3:178; 4:45.
The words mean that the disbelievers are, as it were, possessed of great endurance to bear the torment of the fire of Hell. These words have been used ironically.
2:17; 3:178; 4:45.
Commentary:
The words ما اصبرھم علی النار i.e. how great is their endurance of the Fire, and similar other expressions are used in the Arabic language to express wonder on the part of the onlooker and tenacity and intensiveness of the relevant quality in the object. The expression, therefore, means that though the deeds of disbelievers are sure to bring down upon them the great punishment of Fire, yet they so tenaciously persist in their wicked course as to indicate that they are, as it were, possessed of great endurance of its torment.
d
2:17; 3:178; 4:45.
113
这话意味着不信奉者似乎具有很大的耐力去忍受火狱的折磨。这些话是用来讽刺挖苦的。
b
2:17; 3:178; 4:45.
182
Commentary:
The words ما اصبرھم علی النار i.e. how great is their endurance of the Fire, and similar other expressions are used in the Arabic language to express wonder on the part of the onlooker and tenacity and intensiveness of the relevant quality in the object. The expression, therefore, means that though the deeds of disbelievers are sure to bring down upon them the great punishment of Fire, yet they so tenaciously persist in their wicked course as to indicate that they are, as it were, possessed of great endurance of its torment.
d
2:17; 3:178; 4:45.
201
The words mean that the disbelievers are, as it were, possessed of great endurance to bear the torment of the fire of Hell. These words have been used ironically.
ذَٰلِكَ بِأَنَّ ٱللَّهَ نَزَّلَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ بِٱلْحَقِّ ۗ وَإِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱخْتَلَفُوا۟ فِى ٱلْكِتَٰبِ لَفِى شِقَاقٍۭ بَعِيدٍ
17:106.
عربی عبارت کے مفہوم میں ’’مبتلا‘‘ شامل ہے لیکن آدابِ قرآنی کی وجہ سے ’’مبتلا‘‘ کو خطوط میں لکھا گیا ہے ورنہ فِیْ کے معنے عربی میں ’’مبتلا‘‘ اور پڑا ہوا ہونے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔
17:106.
17:106.
Commentary:
The estrangement of the disbelievers from the truth and their long association with falsehood have made them callous and incapable of knowing and accepting the Quranic revelation. Just as a sick person sometimes loses his faculty of taste and consequently declines to partake of delicious things, similarly these people, owing to their lack of contact with truth for a long time, have become inclined to reject the word of God. They prefer small worldly gains to the great spiritual and material advantages that would certainly have accrued to them, if they had accepted the truth. The words فی شقاق بعید i.e. "gone far in enmity" signify that there has come to exist a wide gulf between these people on the one hand and the truth on the other.
a
17:106.
4
عربی عبارت کے مفہوم میں ’’مبتلا‘‘ شامل ہے لیکن آدابِ قرآنی کی وجہ سے ’’مبتلا‘‘ کو خطوط میں لکھا گیا ہے ورنہ فِیْ کے معنے عربی میں ’’مبتلا‘‘ اور پڑا ہوا ہونے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔
a
17:106.
183
Commentary:
The estrangement of the disbelievers from the truth and their long association with falsehood have made them callous and incapable of knowing and accepting the Quranic revelation. Just as a sick person sometimes loses his faculty of taste and consequently declines to partake of delicious things, similarly these people, owing to their lack of contact with truth for a long time, have become inclined to reject the word of God. They prefer small worldly gains to the great spiritual and material advantages that would certainly have accrued to them, if they had accepted the truth. The words فی شقاق بعید i.e. "gone far in enmity" signify that there has come to exist a wide gulf between these people on the one hand and the truth on the other.
e
17:106.
۞ لَّيْسَ ٱلْبِرَّ أَن تُوَلُّوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ قِبَلَ ٱلْمَشْرِقِ وَٱلْمَغْرِبِ وَلَٰكِنَّ ٱلْبِرَّ مَنْ ءَامَنَ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ وَٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةِ وَٱلْكِتَٰبِ وَٱلنَّبِيِّۦنَ وَءَاتَى ٱلْمَالَ عَلَىٰ حُبِّهِۦ ذَوِى ٱلْقُرْبَىٰ وَٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰ وَٱلْمَسَٰكِينَ وَٱبْنَ ٱلسَّبِيلِ وَٱلسَّآئِلِينَ وَفِى ٱلرِّقَابِ وَأَقَامَ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَءَاتَى ٱلزَّكَوٰةَ وَٱلْمُوفُونَ بِعَهْدِهِمْ إِذَا عَٰهَدُوا۟ ۖ وَٱلصَّٰبِرِينَ فِى ٱلْبَأْسَآءِ وَٱلضَّرَّآءِ وَحِينَ ٱلْبَأْسِ ۗ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ صَدَقُوا۟ ۖ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُتَّقُونَ
2:190.
76:9.
9:4; 13:21.
2:215; 6:43; 7:95.
49:16.
本节经文提出了伊斯兰教教义的要旨。它开始说到伊斯兰教的基本信念和教义。这些信念和教义是一切行动的来源和基础, 而人的行动的正直取决于这种正直性--------信仰安拉、信仰末日、信仰天使、信仰经典和众先知。接着还提到了一些关于人类行动更为重要的法令。
وَلٰکِنَّ الْبِرَّ میں بِرٌّ مصدر ہے اور عربی قاعدہ کے مطابق اس کے معنے بَآرٌّ یعنی نیک ہونے کے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں اس لئے ہم نے وہی ترجمہ کیا ہے۔
2:190.
76:9.
9:4; 13:21.
2:215; 6:43; 7:95.
49:16.
‘Ala Hubbi-hi means, for love of God; notwithstanding love of money.
Al-Ba’sa’ and al-Ba’s are both derived from Ba’usa and Ba’isa. i.e.; he was or became strong and valiant in war or fight; he was or became in a state of great want or poverty or distress. Al-Ba’sa’ means, might or strength in war or fight; war or fight; fear; harm, etc., ad-Darra’ is especially that evil or affliction which relates to one’s person as disease, etc., and al-Ba’sa’ is that which relates to property, as poverty, etc. (Lane).
The verse gives a gist of Islamic teaching. It begins with the basic Islamic beliefs and doctrines which are the source and basis of all actions and on the rightness of which depends the rightness of human actions—belief in God, in the Last Day, in angels, Revealed Books and Divine Prophets. After this some of the more important ordinances relating to man’s actions are mentioned.
2:190.
76:9.
9:4; 13:21.
2:215; 6:43; 7:95.
49:16.
Important Words:
البر (righteousness) is derived from بر. They say بر والدہ i.e. he obeyed his father or he behaved kindly and lovingly towards him. بر الله means, he obeyed God. بر فی قوله means, he spoke truthfully. برت الصلوة means, the Prayer was accepted. بر(birr) therefore, means: (1) a gift or favour; (2) obedience; (3) righteousness; (4) truthfulness (Aqrab); also (5) extensive goodness or goodness of a high order (Mufradat). And بر (barr) is one who does good to others. It is also one of the attributive names of God (Aqrab).
ابن السبیل (wayfarer) literally means, son of the road. The word signifies: (1) one who travels much (Lane); (2) a traveller or wayfarer who is far away from home, i.e. one who is on a long journey (Mufradat); (3) simply one on journey; (4) one whose way has been cut short to him, i.e. one who is stranded on the way (Aqrab).
الرقاب (captives) is the plural of رقبة (a captive or a slave) which is derived from رقب. They say رقبه i.e. he waited for or looked for him; he watched or guarded him; he was on his guard against him; he put a rope round his neck. رقبة means: (1) neck; (2) the hinder part thereof; (3) a person or being possessing a neck; (4) a slave or bondman or captive or prisoner, particularly a slave or captive who has contracted with his owner or custodian for his freedom. Thus the expression فی الرقاب would mean, in the ransoming of slaves or captives, etc. (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
الباساء (poverty) and الباس (war) are both derived from بؤس orبئس i.e. (1) he was or became strong and valiant in war or fight; (2) he was or became in a state of great want or poverty or distress. الباساء means: (1), distress; (2) poverty; (3) hardship; (4) misfortune; (5) calamity; and (6) war. And البأس means (1) might or strength in war or fight; (2) courage, valour and prowess; (3) war or fight; (4) fear; (5) punishment or torment; and (6) harm or injury, as in لاباس به i.e. there is no harm in it (Lane & Aqrab). See also below.
الضراء (afflictions) is derived from ضر meaning, he caused him a loss or an injury. الضراء means: (1) vicissitudes of time; (2) hardship; (3) loss of life or property; (4) afflictions; and (5) famine (Aqrab). الضراء is especially that evil or affliction which relates to one’s person, as disease, etc. whereas البأساء is that which relates to property, as poverty, etc. (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse points to an important principle relating to form and spirit. Every commandment must have an outward form as well as an underlying spirit. What, however, is really meant is the underlying spirit and not the outward form which mostly serves as an outer shell for preserving the inner kernel. To illustrate this principle, the verse refers to the commandment relating to the turning of faces to a particular direction while offering Prayers. The verse points out that Islam has not directed the Faithful to face in a particular direction during Prayers, because it considers such an act to be of any intrinsic virtue. The fixing of a special direction is merely meant to bring about uniformity, whereas what really counts is the purpose underlying it, which is perfection of faith and deeds. The Quran, accordingly, proceeds to give in a nutshell the Islamic teachings about these two subjects.
The literal translation of the clauses ولکن البر من آمن is, "but righteousness is one who believes" which is obviously incomplete. So some words must be understood here. According to Sibawaih, a great authority on Arabic syntax, the rules of the Arabic language sometimes permit the omitting of a word for the sake of brevity or for laying special stress or for affording greater elasticity in speech. In accordance with this rule, the clause would read: ولکن البر من آمن i.e. "but righteousness is the righteousness of one who believes." Instances of such omissions of words are not lacking in the Arabic language (Sibawaih, i. 109).
According to yet another rule of the Arabic language, a مصدر (infinitive noun) is sometimes used in place of an اسم فاعل(active participle) in order to convey an intensified sense. Thus the word بر (righteousness) in the verse would mean بر الکامل i.e. "perfectly righteous or very righteous," and the clause would be translated as "perfectly righteous or very righteous is he who believes in Allah…"
The pronoun in the expression حبه (love of Him) may refer either to the word "Allah" in the previous clause, and in that case, the clause آتی المال علی حبه would mean, "spends his money for love of God". Or it may refer to the word مال(money). In this case, the clause would mean, "spends his money notwithstanding his love for money". Lastly, it may also refer to the noun implied in the verb آتی i.e. the act of spending. In this case the clause would mean "spends his money for the love of spending it". All these meanings are correct and may be applied. Indeed, it is one of the inimitable beauties of the Quranic diction that it chooses words and constructions that go to convey a variety of meanings in the shortest of expressions.
The verse affords another example of this kind in the expression ابن السبیل (son of the road). As explained under Important Words, this expression gives no less than four meanings and all are equally applicable here. So spending on ابن السبیل would signify (1) spending money in order to encourage travelling, which is a means of increasing knowledge and extending social relations; (2) helping such travellers as are on long journeys and are far away from home; (3) helping all wayfarers; and (4) helping such wayfarers and travellers as become stranded on the way. This is indeed a wonderful example of the combination of brevity and comprehensiveness. The verse also throws some light on the Islamic teaching about slavery. Islam prescribes it as a sign of true faith and perfect righteousness that money be spent on emancipating slaves. Nay, even such as are made captives from among those who attack Muslims with a view to annihilating them, are to be shown mercy and granted freedom out of money supplied by Muslims. For the discussion of Islamic teachings about slavery see 24:34.
The word الصابرین (the patient) in this verse is in the accusative case, while, according to the common rules of Arabic grammar, it should be in the nominative case like the preceding word الموفون (those who fulfil). The change is not without purpose and has been made to put emphasis on the word. According to Abu ‘Ali, a well-known authority on Arabic syntax, when a sentence contains a number of nouns of praise or dispraise, it is considered idiomatic to vary their grammatical inflection (Muhit, part ii). This is done to intensify the meaning.
As pointed out in the beginning, this verse gives a gist of the teachings of Islam. It begins with the fundamental Islamic beliefs and doctrines which are the source and basis of all actions and on the rectitude of which depends the rectitude of' one’s actions. The most fundamental of these is belief in God Who is the central point of all faith. Second in importance is belief in the Last Day or the Day of Judgement, upon a real understanding of which depends the direction of man’s actions in this life. Then follows belief in angels who serve as a sort of intermediaries between God and His creation. Then there are Divine Scriptures embodying God’s revelation which point out the way to the attainment of His pleasure and the purification of man’s soul. Lastly are Prophets who are the recipients of God’s revelations, communicating to man the will of God and serving as models to be followed and imitated by him. These five objects of faith have been mentioned here in their natural order and not necessarily in order of importance.
After stating the fundamental objects of faith, the verse proceeds to mention some of the more important ordinances relating to man’s actions. Pride of place is given to charity which a man gives not as a duty imposed on him, but as prompted by love, solicitude and sympathy for his kinsmen and fellow beings or out of love for common humanity. Next come the commandments regarding Prayer and Zakah which help to establish a true connection between God and man on the one hand and regulate relations between man and man on the other. Finally are laid down the two bulwarks of character and morality, i.e. (1) the redemption of promises and pledges; and (2) the displaying of fortitude, patience and steadfastness in time of distress, the first-mentioned forming one of the bases of international morality and the latter the means of its perfection.
b
2:190.
c
76:9.
d
9:4; 13:21.
e
2:215; 6:43; 7:95.
f
49:16.
114
本节经文提出了伊斯兰教教义的要旨。它开始说到伊斯兰教的基本信念和教义。这些信念和教义是一切行动的来源和基础, 而人的行动的正直取决于这种正直性--------信仰安拉、信仰末日、信仰天使、信仰经典和众先知。接着还提到了一些关于人类行动更为重要的法令。
1
وَلٰکِنَّ الْبِرَّ میں بِرٌّ مصدر ہے اور عربی قاعدہ کے مطابق اس کے معنے بَآرٌّ یعنی نیک ہونے کے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں اس لئے ہم نے وہی ترجمہ کیا ہے۔
b
2:190.
c
76:9.
d
9:4; 13:21.
e
2:215; 6:43; 7:95.
f
49:16.
184
Important Words:
البر (righteousness) is derived from بر. They say بر والدہ i.e. he obeyed his father or he behaved kindly and lovingly towards him. بر الله means, he obeyed God. بر فی قوله means, he spoke truthfully. برت الصلوة means, the Prayer was accepted. بر(birr) therefore, means: (1) a gift or favour; (2) obedience; (3) righteousness; (4) truthfulness (Aqrab); also (5) extensive goodness or goodness of a high order (Mufradat). And بر (barr) is one who does good to others. It is also one of the attributive names of God (Aqrab).
ابن السبیل (wayfarer) literally means, son of the road. The word signifies: (1) one who travels much (Lane); (2) a traveller or wayfarer who is far away from home, i.e. one who is on a long journey (Mufradat); (3) simply one on journey; (4) one whose way has been cut short to him, i.e. one who is stranded on the way (Aqrab).
الرقاب (captives) is the plural of رقبة (a captive or a slave) which is derived from رقب. They say رقبه i.e. he waited for or looked for him; he watched or guarded him; he was on his guard against him; he put a rope round his neck. رقبة means: (1) neck; (2) the hinder part thereof; (3) a person or being possessing a neck; (4) a slave or bondman or captive or prisoner, particularly a slave or captive who has contracted with his owner or custodian for his freedom. Thus the expression فی الرقاب would mean, in the ransoming of slaves or captives, etc. (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
الباساء (poverty) and الباس (war) are both derived from بؤس orبئس i.e. (1) he was or became strong and valiant in war or fight; (2) he was or became in a state of great want or poverty or distress. الباساء means: (1), distress; (2) poverty; (3) hardship; (4) misfortune; (5) calamity; and (6) war. And البأس means (1) might or strength in war or fight; (2) courage, valour and prowess; (3) war or fight; (4) fear; (5) punishment or torment; and (6) harm or injury, as in لاباس به i.e. there is no harm in it (Lane & Aqrab). See also below.
الضراء (afflictions) is derived from ضر meaning, he caused him a loss or an injury. الضراء means: (1) vicissitudes of time; (2) hardship; (3) loss of life or property; (4) afflictions; and (5) famine (Aqrab). الضراء is especially that evil or affliction which relates to one’s person, as disease, etc. whereas البأساء is that which relates to property, as poverty, etc. (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse points to an important principle relating to form and spirit. Every commandment must have an outward form as well as an underlying spirit. What, however, is really meant is the underlying spirit and not the outward form which mostly serves as an outer shell for preserving the inner kernel. To illustrate this principle, the verse refers to the commandment relating to the turning of faces to a particular direction while offering Prayers. The verse points out that Islam has not directed the Faithful to face in a particular direction during Prayers, because it considers such an act to be of any intrinsic virtue. The fixing of a special direction is merely meant to bring about uniformity, whereas what really counts is the purpose underlying it, which is perfection of faith and deeds. The Quran, accordingly, proceeds to give in a nutshell the Islamic teachings about these two subjects.
The literal translation of the clauses ولکن البر من آمن is, "but righteousness is one who believes" which is obviously incomplete. So some words must be understood here. According to Sibawaih, a great authority on Arabic syntax, the rules of the Arabic language sometimes permit the omitting of a word for the sake of brevity or for laying special stress or for affording greater elasticity in speech. In accordance with this rule, the clause would read: ولکن البر من آمن i.e. "but righteousness is the righteousness of one who believes." Instances of such omissions of words are not lacking in the Arabic language (Sibawaih, i. 109).
According to yet another rule of the Arabic language, a مصدر (infinitive noun) is sometimes used in place of an اسم فاعل(active participle) in order to convey an intensified sense. Thus the word بر (righteousness) in the verse would mean بر الکامل i.e. "perfectly righteous or very righteous," and the clause would be translated as "perfectly righteous or very righteous is he who believes in Allah…"
The pronoun in the expression حبه (love of Him) may refer either to the word "Allah" in the previous clause, and in that case, the clause آتی المال علی حبه would mean, "spends his money for love of God". Or it may refer to the word مال(money). In this case, the clause would mean, "spends his money notwithstanding his love for money". Lastly, it may also refer to the noun implied in the verb آتی i.e. the act of spending. In this case the clause would mean "spends his money for the love of spending it". All these meanings are correct and may be applied. Indeed, it is one of the inimitable beauties of the Quranic diction that it chooses words and constructions that go to convey a variety of meanings in the shortest of expressions.
The verse affords another example of this kind in the expression ابن السبیل (son of the road). As explained under Important Words, this expression gives no less than four meanings and all are equally applicable here. So spending on ابن السبیل would signify (1) spending money in order to encourage travelling, which is a means of increasing knowledge and extending social relations; (2) helping such travellers as are on long journeys and are far away from home; (3) helping all wayfarers; and (4) helping such wayfarers and travellers as become stranded on the way. This is indeed a wonderful example of the combination of brevity and comprehensiveness. The verse also throws some light on the Islamic teaching about slavery. Islam prescribes it as a sign of true faith and perfect righteousness that money be spent on emancipating slaves. Nay, even such as are made captives from among those who attack Muslims with a view to annihilating them, are to be shown mercy and granted freedom out of money supplied by Muslims. For the discussion of Islamic teachings about slavery see 24:34.
The word الصابرین (the patient) in this verse is in the accusative case, while, according to the common rules of Arabic grammar, it should be in the nominative case like the preceding word الموفون (those who fulfil). The change is not without purpose and has been made to put emphasis on the word. According to Abu ‘Ali, a well-known authority on Arabic syntax, when a sentence contains a number of nouns of praise or dispraise, it is considered idiomatic to vary their grammatical inflection (Muhit, part ii). This is done to intensify the meaning.
As pointed out in the beginning, this verse gives a gist of the teachings of Islam. It begins with the fundamental Islamic beliefs and doctrines which are the source and basis of all actions and on the rectitude of which depends the rectitude of' one’s actions. The most fundamental of these is belief in God Who is the central point of all faith. Second in importance is belief in the Last Day or the Day of Judgement, upon a real understanding of which depends the direction of man’s actions in this life. Then follows belief in angels who serve as a sort of intermediaries between God and His creation. Then there are Divine Scriptures embodying God’s revelation which point out the way to the attainment of His pleasure and the purification of man’s soul. Lastly are Prophets who are the recipients of God’s revelations, communicating to man the will of God and serving as models to be followed and imitated by him. These five objects of faith have been mentioned here in their natural order and not necessarily in order of importance.
After stating the fundamental objects of faith, the verse proceeds to mention some of the more important ordinances relating to man’s actions. Pride of place is given to charity which a man gives not as a duty imposed on him, but as prompted by love, solicitude and sympathy for his kinsmen and fellow beings or out of love for common humanity. Next come the commandments regarding Prayer and Zakah which help to establish a true connection between God and man on the one hand and regulate relations between man and man on the other. Finally are laid down the two bulwarks of character and morality, i.e. (1) the redemption of promises and pledges; and (2) the displaying of fortitude, patience and steadfastness in time of distress, the first-mentioned forming one of the bases of international morality and the latter the means of its perfection.
a
2:190.
b
76:9.
c
9:4; 13:21.
d
2:215; 6:43; 7:95.
e
49:16.
202
‘Ala Hubbi-hi means, for love of God; notwithstanding love of money.
202A
Al-Ba’sa’ and al-Ba’s are both derived from Ba’usa and Ba’isa. i.e.; he was or became strong and valiant in war or fight; he was or became in a state of great want or poverty or distress. Al-Ba’sa’ means, might or strength in war or fight; war or fight; fear; harm, etc., ad-Darra’ is especially that evil or affliction which relates to one’s person as disease, etc., and al-Ba’sa’ is that which relates to property, as poverty, etc. (Lane).
203
The verse gives a gist of Islamic teaching. It begins with the basic Islamic beliefs and doctrines which are the source and basis of all actions and on the rightness of which depends the rightness of human actions—belief in God, in the Last Day, in angels, Revealed Books and Divine Prophets. After this some of the more important ordinances relating to man’s actions are mentioned.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْقِصَاصُ فِى ٱلْقَتْلَى ۖ ٱلْحُرُّ بِٱلْحُرِّ وَٱلْعَبْدُ بِٱلْعَبْدِ وَٱلْأُنثَىٰ بِٱلْأُنثَىٰ ۚ فَمَنْ عُفِىَ لَهُۥ مِنْ أَخِيهِ شَىْءٌ فَٱتِّبَاعٌۢ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ وَأَدَآءٌ إِلَيْهِ بِإِحْسَٰنٍ ۗ ذَٰلِكَ تَخْفِيفٌ مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ وَرَحْمَةٌ ۗ فَمَنِ ٱعْتَدَىٰ بَعْدَ ذَٰلِكَ فَلَهُۥ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ
2:195; 5:46.
اس کے معنے یہ ہیں کہ اگر کوئی آزاد آدمی کسی کو قتل کر دے تو خواہ مقتول غلام مرد ہو یا غلام عورت۔ یا آزاد مرد ہو یا آزاد عورت‘ اسی آزاد قاتل کو قتل کرکے بدلہ لیا جائے گا۔ اسی طرح اگر کوئی قاتل غلام ہو تو اسی قاتل غلام سے بدلہ لیا جائے گا اور اگر قاتل عورت ہو تو اسی قاتل عورت سے (خواہ وہ حُرّ ہو یا غلام) بدلہ لیا جائے گا۔
2:195; 5:46.
The verse comprises a very important principle of civil law, i.e. equality of man and necessity of awarding proportionate punishment to all offenders without distinction, unless an offender is forgiven by the relatives of his victim under circumstances that are calculated to lead to improvement and betterment of conditions.
The words "is prescribed for you" show that retaliation for the slain is obligatory. Failure to inflict the punishment prescribed by Law on the offender is tantamount to violation of the Divine commandment. The duty, however, of punishing the culprit devolves not on the heirs of the murdered person but, as the plural ‘Alaikum (for you) shows, on the authorities responsible for the maintenance of law and order. The former, however, have been given the option to forgive. So whereas on the one hand the concerned authorities are bound to punish the offender according to the requirements of law, having no right to pardon him of their own accord, on the other the heirs of the m
2:195; 5:46.
Important Words:
قصاص (retaliation) is derived from قص. They say قصه i.e. (1) he cut it (hair, etc.), or be clipped it; (2) he followed him closely or followed in his footsteps; and (3) he described or narrated it. قاص الرجل means, he did with the man the like of that which he did to him; he retaliated on him for the wrong done to him. اقص الامیر زیدا من بکر means, the Amir retaliated upon Bakr for the wrong he had done to Zaid. قصاص therefore, means, retaliation, by slaying for slaying, and wounding for wounding, etc. (Aqrab) or the following up of a murder or an injury with a view to retaliating or punishing (Mufradat).
القتلی (the slain) is the plural of قتیل in the sense of مقتول i.e. a murdered person (Aqrab).
الحر (freeman) is derived from حر meaning: (1) he was free-born; (2) he was of good and noble origin. حرالارض means, the best portion of land. Thus الحر means; (1) a freeman, opposite of slave or captive; (2) a noble person; (3) the good and pure portion of a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse comprises a very important principle of civil law, i.e. equality of man and necessity of awarding proportionate punishment to all offenders without distinction, unless an offender is forgiven by the relatives of his victim under circumstances that are expected to lead to improvement and betterment of conditions.
The words کتب علیکم i.e. "is prescribed for you" show that retaliation for the slain is not simply permissible but is obligatory. Failure to inflict the punishment prescribed by Law on the offender would be tantamount to a violation of the commandment. The duty, however, of punishing the culprit does not devolve on the heirs of the murdered person but, as the plural number of the expression علیکم (for you) shows, on the authorities responsible for the maintenance of law and order. But, as the singular number of the expression اخیه (one’s brother) shows, the former have been given the option to forgive. The clause, therefore, means that on the one hand the concerned authorities are bound to punish the offender according to the requirements of law, having no right to pardon him of their own accord, and on the other hand the heirs of the murdered person are not entitled to take the law into their own hands and inflict the punishment on the guilty person themselves.
The verse under comment makes no distinction between different classes of persons in connection with the law of retaliation. The words used are of a general nature and apply to all offenders who might be guilty of murder, no matter of what rank or station in life or of what religion. Any person, irrespective of his caste or creed and irrespective of his station, must be put to death for the murder of any other person, unless pardoned by the relatives of the victim and unless the pardon has the sanction of the authorities. The sayings of the Holy Prophet are explicit on this point (Majah, ch. on Diyat).
There is indeed a saying of the Holy Prophet to the effect that a Muslim should not be put to death for killing a disbeliever. But this saying, read in conjunction with several others bearing on the same subject and interpreted in the light of the relevant Quranic verses, forces us to the conclusion that the word "disbeliever" in the tradition referred to above is not general but means only a حربی کافر i.e. such disbeliever as belongs to a people who are at war with the Muslims or, in other words, one who is a member of a belligerent community. In fact, the Companions of the Holy Prophet are all agreed that a Muslim may be put to death for murdering a non-belligerent unbeliever (Tabari, v. 44). The Holy Prophet himself ordered a Muslim murderer to be put to death for the murder of a non-belligerent non-Muslim (Qutni).
The expression, the freeman for the freeman and the slave for the slave and the female for the female, does not mean that a freeman should not be punished with death for the murder of a slave or that a woman should not be put to death for killing a member of the opposite sex, etc. The other verses of the Quran as well as the sayings and the practice of the Holy Prophet clearly establish the fact that the social position of a person or the sex of a party was never considered a bar to the application of this law. The peculiar construction, i.e. "the freeman for the freeman," etc. has been adopted here to refer to, and abolish, a custom of the Arabs whereby they used to take into consideration the sex and the social status of the murderer and the murdered person when determining punishment. If a man of high social position happened to kill a man of humble position, or if the slave of a great man killed that of a humble man, or if a lady of noble birth murdered a woman of humble origin, etc. the murderer was not punished with death, leniency being shown to him or her in sundry other ways as well. The commandment contained in this verse seeks to abolish that obnoxious custom of the Arabs and lays down in clear and unmistakable terms that no regard should be paid to the status of the murderer in the matter of retaliation.
In fact, the law of retaliation, as stated in this verse, is confined to the clause, equitable retaliation in the matter of the slain is prescribed for you, which forms a complete sentence in itself, giving a full and complete meaning. The ensuing expression, the freeman for the freeman and the slave for the slave and the female for the female, is something extra, not forming part of the law. It only contains a repudiation of the Arab custom referred to above and illustrates, by giving three instances, how the law is to be administered. Such an expression is known as جملة استینا فیه or جملة مستانفه in Arabic grammar, and is technically introduced with a view to answering a question which is suggested by the preceding clause to which it is added without any intervening conjunction. The question answered in such an expression is often understood and not expressed (Mukhtasar).
The sayings of the Holy Prophet and his practice also support the above interpretation, for it is on record that he once ordered a woman to be put to death for murdering a man (Muslim), and on another occasion he commanded that a freeman be put to death for the murder of a slave. Says the Holy Prophet: "Whoever kills his slave shall be put to death" (Majah). At another place he says: "The blood of all Muslims is alike in respect of the law of retaliation" (Nasa’i).
The words, if one is granted any remission by one’s brother, show that the infliction of capital punishment is not obligatory in all cases; for in special circumstances the murderer can be exempted from the extreme punishment by the heirs of the murdered person. Such exemption, which may be termed partial as the word شیء (any) indicates, means that the heirs of the deceased may renounce their right to have the murderer put to death and may in place of that receive from him blood money. Or as the Holy Prophet has made it clear, the heirs may, in exceptional cases and with the sanction of the authorities, even grant full pardon, remitting blood-money as well (Musnad & Baihaqi).
It is worthy of note that where the Quran speaks of remission, it uses the word "brother" instead of "heir of the murdered person". This is to hint to the heir of the slain person that he should, as far as possible, take a lenient view of the offence. On the other band, the murderer is also enjoined to pay blood money with good grace and without undue delay.
The concluding clause, i.e. whoso transgresses thereafter, for him there shall be a grievous punishment, is meant to point to the fact that if, after the matter has been amicably settled and the murderer granted a remission by the heirs of the murdered person, the heirs should take it into their heads to wreak vengeance on the murderer by killing him, they will be shown no mercy and will get capital punishment. Says the Prophet: "I will allow no remission in case of one whokills the murderer after he has accepted blood money from him" (Jarir).
The Islamic law of قصاص (retaliation), as briefly stated above, provides a very effective and practical means to put a stop to murder and safeguard human life. A man who shows a callous disregard for the life of a fellow person, loses his title to live as a member of human society. The option to pardon allowed to the heirs of the slain person should not be regarded as likely to encourage murder, for such option is not synonymous with exemption from punishment, as in ordinary circumstances the murderer will have to pay the blood money. Moreover, the would-be murderer possesses no means to know that the heirs of the person whose murder he contemplates will actually be persuaded to pardon him; so the fear of capital punishment will always be there to deter him from the commission of the crime. Again, pardon or remission is permissible only where the circumstances are such that pardon or remission is likely to improve matters and bring about good results for all parties concerned (42:41). Thus, while on the one hand, Islam has made due provision for the suppression of crime, it has, on the other, kept open the door for the display of the noble qualities of benevolence and mercy.
The way in which the Quran has upheld the ultimate necessity of the death penalty is indeed most significant. At the time when the Quran was revealed, people exacted retaliation for an injury done to them with a vengeance. They were not satisfied even with inflicting capital punishment on the murderer, to say nothing of pardoning him. They needed no incentive to retaliation. They were already overdoing it. In fact, the Islamic law of retaliation, viewed in the light of the circumstances prevailing at the time of its revelation, implied a prophecy that a time would come when people would go to the other extreme and a movement for the total abolition of capital punishment would be set on foot. So the Omniscient God laid down the law of retaliation in a form that is indispensable for the preservation and protection of human life, as well as the promotion of harmony and goodwill.
To prevent crime, Islam really aims at eliminating the conditions that produce it. It seeks to remove the very root-cause of all crime by working a complete moral reformation in man. But it does not remain content with that. It also prescribes deterrent laws in conformity with the dictates of reason, justice and humanity. The fact that, despite efforts to the contrary, the death penalty is still found on the Statute Books of most countries in one form or another, constitutes a sufficient proof of the wisdom of the Islamic teaching. As a matter of fact, even the most enthusiastic protagonists of the abolition of capital punishment have not yet been able to suggest a suitable alternative to it. They have had to admit that a long term of imprisonment as an alternative is "horrible" and is "not an ideal substitute" (Capital Punishment in the Twentieth Century by E. Roy Calvert, G. P. Putnam, London, 1930). The law of retaliation still remains the most effective deterrent to crime and an essential method to satisfy the demands of justice; and the Islamic Law takes a further step to bring about reconciliation between the offender and the aggrieved party.
a
2:195; 5:46.
2
اس کے معنے یہ ہیں کہ اگر کوئی آزاد آدمی کسی کو قتل کر دے تو خواہ مقتول غلام مرد ہو یا غلام عورت۔ یا آزاد مرد ہو یا آزاد عورت‘ اسی آزاد قاتل کو قتل کرکے بدلہ لیا جائے گا۔ اسی طرح اگر کوئی قاتل غلام ہو تو اسی قاتل غلام سے بدلہ لیا جائے گا اور اگر قاتل عورت ہو تو اسی قاتل عورت سے (خواہ وہ حُرّ ہو یا غلام) بدلہ لیا جائے گا۔
a
2:195; 5:46.
185
Important Words:
قصاص (retaliation) is derived from قص. They say قصه i.e. (1) he cut it (hair, etc.), or be clipped it; (2) he followed him closely or followed in his footsteps; and (3) he described or narrated it. قاص الرجل means, he did with the man the like of that which he did to him; he retaliated on him for the wrong done to him. اقص الامیر زیدا من بکر means, the Amir retaliated upon Bakr for the wrong he had done to Zaid. قصاص therefore, means, retaliation, by slaying for slaying, and wounding for wounding, etc. (Aqrab) or the following up of a murder or an injury with a view to retaliating or punishing (Mufradat).
القتلی (the slain) is the plural of قتیل in the sense of مقتول i.e. a murdered person (Aqrab).
الحر (freeman) is derived from حر meaning: (1) he was free-born; (2) he was of good and noble origin. حرالارض means, the best portion of land. Thus الحر means; (1) a freeman, opposite of slave or captive; (2) a noble person; (3) the good and pure portion of a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse comprises a very important principle of civil law, i.e. equality of man and necessity of awarding proportionate punishment to all offenders without distinction, unless an offender is forgiven by the relatives of his victim under circumstances that are expected to lead to improvement and betterment of conditions.
The words کتب علیکم i.e. "is prescribed for you" show that retaliation for the slain is not simply permissible but is obligatory. Failure to inflict the punishment prescribed by Law on the offender would be tantamount to a violation of the commandment. The duty, however, of punishing the culprit does not devolve on the heirs of the murdered person but, as the plural number of the expression علیکم (for you) shows, on the authorities responsible for the maintenance of law and order. But, as the singular number of the expression اخیه (one’s brother) shows, the former have been given the option to forgive. The clause, therefore, means that on the one hand the concerned authorities are bound to punish the offender according to the requirements of law, having no right to pardon him of their own accord, and on the other hand the heirs of the murdered person are not entitled to take the law into their own hands and inflict the punishment on the guilty person themselves.
The verse under comment makes no distinction between different classes of persons in connection with the law of retaliation. The words used are of a general nature and apply to all offenders who might be guilty of murder, no matter of what rank or station in life or of what religion. Any person, irrespective of his caste or creed and irrespective of his station, must be put to death for the murder of any other person, unless pardoned by the relatives of the victim and unless the pardon has the sanction of the authorities. The sayings of the Holy Prophet are explicit on this point (Majah, ch. on Diyat).
There is indeed a saying of the Holy Prophet to the effect that a Muslim should not be put to death for killing a disbeliever. But this saying, read in conjunction with several others bearing on the same subject and interpreted in the light of the relevant Quranic verses, forces us to the conclusion that the word "disbeliever" in the tradition referred to above is not general but means only a حربی کافر i.e. such disbeliever as belongs to a people who are at war with the Muslims or, in other words, one who is a member of a belligerent community. In fact, the Companions of the Holy Prophet are all agreed that a Muslim may be put to death for murdering a non-belligerent unbeliever (Tabari, v. 44). The Holy Prophet himself ordered a Muslim murderer to be put to death for the murder of a non-belligerent non-Muslim (Qutni).
The expression, the freeman for the freeman and the slave for the slave and the female for the female, does not mean that a freeman should not be punished with death for the murder of a slave or that a woman should not be put to death for killing a member of the opposite sex, etc. The other verses of the Quran as well as the sayings and the practice of the Holy Prophet clearly establish the fact that the social position of a person or the sex of a party was never considered a bar to the application of this law. The peculiar construction, i.e. "the freeman for the freeman," etc. has been adopted here to refer to, and abolish, a custom of the Arabs whereby they used to take into consideration the sex and the social status of the murderer and the murdered person when determining punishment. If a man of high social position happened to kill a man of humble position, or if the slave of a great man killed that of a humble man, or if a lady of noble birth murdered a woman of humble origin, etc. the murderer was not punished with death, leniency being shown to him or her in sundry other ways as well. The commandment contained in this verse seeks to abolish that obnoxious custom of the Arabs and lays down in clear and unmistakable terms that no regard should be paid to the status of the murderer in the matter of retaliation.
In fact, the law of retaliation, as stated in this verse, is confined to the clause, equitable retaliation in the matter of the slain is prescribed for you, which forms a complete sentence in itself, giving a full and complete meaning. The ensuing expression, the freeman for the freeman and the slave for the slave and the female for the female, is something extra, not forming part of the law. It only contains a repudiation of the Arab custom referred to above and illustrates, by giving three instances, how the law is to be administered. Such an expression is known as جملة استینا فیه or جملة مستانفه in Arabic grammar, and is technically introduced with a view to answering a question which is suggested by the preceding clause to which it is added without any intervening conjunction. The question answered in such an expression is often understood and not expressed (Mukhtasar).
The sayings of the Holy Prophet and his practice also support the above interpretation, for it is on record that he once ordered a woman to be put to death for murdering a man (Muslim), and on another occasion he commanded that a freeman be put to death for the murder of a slave. Says the Holy Prophet: "Whoever kills his slave shall be put to death" (Majah). At another place he says: "The blood of all Muslims is alike in respect of the law of retaliation" (Nasa’i).
The words, if one is granted any remission by one’s brother, show that the infliction of capital punishment is not obligatory in all cases; for in special circumstances the murderer can be exempted from the extreme punishment by the heirs of the murdered person. Such exemption, which may be termed partial as the word شیء (any) indicates, means that the heirs of the deceased may renounce their right to have the murderer put to death and may in place of that receive from him blood money. Or as the Holy Prophet has made it clear, the heirs may, in exceptional cases and with the sanction of the authorities, even grant full pardon, remitting blood-money as well (Musnad & Baihaqi).
It is worthy of note that where the Quran speaks of remission, it uses the word "brother" instead of "heir of the murdered person". This is to hint to the heir of the slain person that he should, as far as possible, take a lenient view of the offence. On the other band, the murderer is also enjoined to pay blood money with good grace and without undue delay.
The concluding clause, i.e. whoso transgresses thereafter, for him there shall be a grievous punishment, is meant to point to the fact that if, after the matter has been amicably settled and the murderer granted a remission by the heirs of the murdered person, the heirs should take it into their heads to wreak vengeance on the murderer by killing him, they will be shown no mercy and will get capital punishment. Says the Prophet: "I will allow no remission in case of one whokills the murderer after he has accepted blood money from him" (Jarir).
The Islamic law of قصاص (retaliation), as briefly stated above, provides a very effective and practical means to put a stop to murder and safeguard human life. A man who shows a callous disregard for the life of a fellow person, loses his title to live as a member of human society. The option to pardon allowed to the heirs of the slain person should not be regarded as likely to encourage murder, for such option is not synonymous with exemption from punishment, as in ordinary circumstances the murderer will have to pay the blood money. Moreover, the would-be murderer possesses no means to know that the heirs of the person whose murder he contemplates will actually be persuaded to pardon him; so the fear of capital punishment will always be there to deter him from the commission of the crime. Again, pardon or remission is permissible only where the circumstances are such that pardon or remission is likely to improve matters and bring about good results for all parties concerned (42:41). Thus, while on the one hand, Islam has made due provision for the suppression of crime, it has, on the other, kept open the door for the display of the noble qualities of benevolence and mercy.
The way in which the Quran has upheld the ultimate necessity of the death penalty is indeed most significant. At the time when the Quran was revealed, people exacted retaliation for an injury done to them with a vengeance. They were not satisfied even with inflicting capital punishment on the murderer, to say nothing of pardoning him. They needed no incentive to retaliation. They were already overdoing it. In fact, the Islamic law of retaliation, viewed in the light of the circumstances prevailing at the time of its revelation, implied a prophecy that a time would come when people would go to the other extreme and a movement for the total abolition of capital punishment would be set on foot. So the Omniscient God laid down the law of retaliation in a form that is indispensable for the preservation and protection of human life, as well as the promotion of harmony and goodwill.
To prevent crime, Islam really aims at eliminating the conditions that produce it. It seeks to remove the very root-cause of all crime by working a complete moral reformation in man. But it does not remain content with that. It also prescribes deterrent laws in conformity with the dictates of reason, justice and humanity. The fact that, despite efforts to the contrary, the death penalty is still found on the Statute Books of most countries in one form or another, constitutes a sufficient proof of the wisdom of the Islamic teaching. As a matter of fact, even the most enthusiastic protagonists of the abolition of capital punishment have not yet been able to suggest a suitable alternative to it. They have had to admit that a long term of imprisonment as an alternative is "horrible" and is "not an ideal substitute" (Capital Punishment in the Twentieth Century by E. Roy Calvert, G. P. Putnam, London, 1930). The law of retaliation still remains the most effective deterrent to crime and an essential method to satisfy the demands of justice; and the Islamic Law takes a further step to bring about reconciliation between the offender and the aggrieved party.
a
2:195; 5:46.
204
The verse comprises a very important principle of civil law, i.e. equality of man and necessity of awarding proportionate punishment to all offenders without distinction, unless an offender is forgiven by the relatives of his victim under circumstances that are calculated to lead to improvement and betterment of conditions.
The words "is prescribed for you" show that retaliation for the slain is obligatory. Failure to inflict the punishment prescribed by Law on the offender is tantamount to violation of the Divine commandment. The duty, however, of punishing the culprit devolves not on the heirs of the murdered person but, as the plural ‘Alaikum (for you) shows, on the authorities responsible for the maintenance of law and order. The former, however, have been given the option to forgive. So whereas on the one hand the concerned authorities are bound to punish the offender according to the requirements of law, having no right to pardon him of their own accord, on the other the heirs of the m
وَلَكُمْ فِى ٱلْقِصَاصِ حَيَوٰةٌ يَٰٓأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَلْبَٰبِ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَّقُونَ
یعنی قصاص کے حکم سے ناواجب قتل و خون کم ہو جائے گا اور لوگوں کی اصلاح ہو جائے گی۔
The Islamic law of retaliation provides a very effective means to put a stop to murder and safeguard human life. A man, who shows a callous disregard for human life loses all title to live as a member of human society. Pardon or remission is permissible only where the circumstances are such that it is likely to improve matters and bring about good results for all parties concerned (42:41). Thus, while, on the one hand, Islam has made due provision for the suppression of crime, it has, on the other, kept open the door for the display of the noble qualities of benevolence and mercy. The fact that, despite efforts to the contrary, the death penalty is still found on the Statute books of most countries in one form or another constitutes a sufficient proof of the wisdom of the Islamic ordinance. Even the most enthusiastic protagonists of the abolition of Capital Punishment have not yet been able to suggest a suitable alternative to it. They have had to admit that a long term of imprisonment as an alternative is
Important Words:
اولوا الالباب (men of understanding). الباب is the plural of لب (lubb) which is derived from (labba) meaning, he was or became possessed of لب i.e. understanding, intellect or intelligence. لب بالمکان means, he remained or dwelt in the place and kept to it. لب اللوز means, he broke the almond and took out its kernel. لب therefore, means: (1) the best and choicest part of anything; (2) kernel; (3) pith; (4) heart; (5) mind; (6) understanding, intellect and intelligence, because it is the choicest and best part of man; (7) the substance or essence of a thing (Lane). لب is something higher and purer than عقل (understanding), being the brightest and best part of it (Mufradat). It appears that لب is the name given to that quality in man which distinguishes him from other animals and makes him a rational being.
Commentary:
This verse, small in size but great in weight, points to the wisdom underlying the law of retaliation. The words used are full of beauty of diction of the highest order. As قصاص means the killing of the murderer in retaliation of his act, the expression is like saying, "There is life for you in death, O men of understanding." How fearful the saying but how eternally true! In fact, no peaceful social life is possible without the awarding of swift capital punishment to those who consider human life to be of so little consequence.
The clause, there is life for you in the law of retaliation, has a wider significance also. For a long time Muslims suffered at the hands of disbelievers indignities, persecution and even death in patient silence. But, when the cup of the iniquities of the enemies of truth became full to overflowing, further continuation of the policy of non-resistance became tantamount to the demoralization of the victims and their national death. They were, therefore, enjoined to take up arms against the aggressors and pay the wicked people in their own coin. Indeed in the law of retaliation lies hidden the secret of individual and national life. You retaliate and you live; you refrain from retaliating and you die an ignoble death. Such is the eternal and inexorable law of nature which has been so beautifully expressed in the verse under comment.
The words, O men of understanding, have been used to make a direct appeal to that quality in man which makes him a rational being and distinguishes him from other creatures. The Quran uses this expression whenever a strong appeal is to be made to man in his capacity as a rational being. God, as it were, says to men: "We have made you the noblest among Our creation and have bestowed on you the power of understanding and intelligence as We have bestowed it on none other. Will you not, therefore, be wise and try to understand things?"
1
یعنی قصاص کے حکم سے ناواجب قتل و خون کم ہو جائے گا اور لوگوں کی اصلاح ہو جائے گی۔
186
Important Words:
اولوا الالباب (men of understanding). الباب is the plural of لب (lubb) which is derived from (labba) meaning, he was or became possessed of لب i.e. understanding, intellect or intelligence. لب بالمکان means, he remained or dwelt in the place and kept to it. لب اللوز means, he broke the almond and took out its kernel. لب therefore, means: (1) the best and choicest part of anything; (2) kernel; (3) pith; (4) heart; (5) mind; (6) understanding, intellect and intelligence, because it is the choicest and best part of man; (7) the substance or essence of a thing (Lane). لب is something higher and purer than عقل (understanding), being the brightest and best part of it (Mufradat). It appears that لب is the name given to that quality in man which distinguishes him from other animals and makes him a rational being.
Commentary:
This verse, small in size but great in weight, points to the wisdom underlying the law of retaliation. The words used are full of beauty of diction of the highest order. As قصاص means the killing of the murderer in retaliation of his act, the expression is like saying, "There is life for you in death, O men of understanding." How fearful the saying but how eternally true! In fact, no peaceful social life is possible without the awarding of swift capital punishment to those who consider human life to be of so little consequence.
The clause, there is life for you in the law of retaliation, has a wider significance also. For a long time Muslims suffered at the hands of disbelievers indignities, persecution and even death in patient silence. But, when the cup of the iniquities of the enemies of truth became full to overflowing, further continuation of the policy of non-resistance became tantamount to the demoralization of the victims and their national death. They were, therefore, enjoined to take up arms against the aggressors and pay the wicked people in their own coin. Indeed in the law of retaliation lies hidden the secret of individual and national life. You retaliate and you live; you refrain from retaliating and you die an ignoble death. Such is the eternal and inexorable law of nature which has been so beautifully expressed in the verse under comment.
The words, O men of understanding, have been used to make a direct appeal to that quality in man which makes him a rational being and distinguishes him from other creatures. The Quran uses this expression whenever a strong appeal is to be made to man in his capacity as a rational being. God, as it were, says to men: "We have made you the noblest among Our creation and have bestowed on you the power of understanding and intelligence as We have bestowed it on none other. Will you not, therefore, be wise and try to understand things?"
204A
The Islamic law of retaliation provides a very effective means to put a stop to murder and safeguard human life. A man, who shows a callous disregard for human life loses all title to live as a member of human society. Pardon or remission is permissible only where the circumstances are such that it is likely to improve matters and bring about good results for all parties concerned (42:41). Thus, while, on the one hand, Islam has made due provision for the suppression of crime, it has, on the other, kept open the door for the display of the noble qualities of benevolence and mercy. The fact that, despite efforts to the contrary, the death penalty is still found on the Statute books of most countries in one form or another constitutes a sufficient proof of the wisdom of the Islamic ordinance. Even the most enthusiastic protagonists of the abolition of Capital Punishment have not yet been able to suggest a suitable alternative to it. They have had to admit that a long term of imprisonment as an alternative is
كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِذَا حَضَرَ أَحَدَكُمُ ٱلْمَوْتُ إِن تَرَكَ خَيْرًا ٱلْوَصِيَّةُ لِلْوَٰلِدَيْنِ وَٱلْأَقْرَبِينَ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۖ حَقًّا عَلَى ٱلْمُتَّقِينَ
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
4:12,13经文注定了对所有应该继承死者产业的那些人的分配份额。这些经文被有些注经家误解为废止本节经文的, 实际上本节经文对遗产继承权制订了一条附加而且十分必要的规定, 这种遗产仅指有利于在法律上不该分得遗嘱的遗产的人, 或是出于慈善目的, 或由于战争状况的遗产。它不指有利于合法继承者的遗产, 关于那种遗产在4:12,13中业已述及。因此本节经文为制定遗赠规章的几节经文所废止的问题是不应发生的, 而且那几节经文也承认任何遗产的合法性。是以每一节经文都在自己的范围内起其一定的作用而且相辅相成。所以这样所规定的遗产, 根据萨德•彬•阿比•瓦卡斯 (سَعْد بِنْ اَبِیْ وَقَاص, Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas) 的见解, 像穆圣在讲话中所提到的那样, 不应超过所留产业的三分之一 (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); 这是立遗嘱者可以行使自由支配的处理权的最高限制, 不过这种遗产继承权只有那留下像خَيْر (Khair, 许多财富) 这词所表示的大笔财产者
才能使用。根据经文5:107, 一个将死的穆斯林可以规定遗产。一般的看法, 这节经文是在4:12, 13之后下降的; 这进一步支持了这个看法, 事实上, 本节没有被4:12, 13所代替。一切经文废止的说法是没有根据的。
خَیْر کے معنے مطلق مال کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور بہت سے مال کے بھی۔ اس جگہ آیت کے سیاق و سباق سے ظاہر ہوتا ہے کہ مالِ کثیر مراد ہے۔
یہاں والدین اور اقربین کو وصیت کرنا کہا ہے حالانکہ اولاد قلبی تعلقات کے لحاظ سے نہایت اہم ہے اس سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ یہ مال کی تقسیم کی وصیت نہیں ورنہ اولاد کا ذکر ضرور ہوتا۔ بلکہ وصیت سے مراد عام تاکید ہے کہ احکامِ الٰہیہ کے مطابق جائیداد تقسیم کی جائے۔ اور اگر مال کا کوئی حصہ صدقہ کرنا ہو تو اس کا اظہار کردے۔ اس آیت پر بہت بحث ہوئی ہے۔ اکثر مفسرین اسے منسوخ قرار دیتے ہیں کیونکہ اس میں وصیت واجب لکھی ہے اور احکام وراثت کے نزول کے بعد رشتہ داروں کے نام وصیت جائز نہیں۔ اور جنہوں نے جائز قرار دی ہے ان کے نزدیک بھی واجب نہیں‘ مگر یہ غلطی اس وجہ سے لگی ہے کہ وصیت کے معنے
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
Verses 4:12, 13 fix the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property. These verses have been mistakenly understood by some Commentators to abrogate the verse under comment, which, in fact, lays down an additional and very necessary provision, and refers only to bequests made in favour of individuals not legally entitled to a share in the testator’s property, or for charitable purposes, or for war conditions. It does not refer to bequests made in favour of legal heirs which subject has been dealt with in 4:12, 13. There is no question, therefore, of the abrogation of this verse by those verses which lay down the rules of inheritance and also recognise the validity of any bequests that may have been made. Each operates in its own sphere and draws strength from the other. The bequests thus made, however, should not exceed one third of the property left as is mentioned in a saying of the Holy Prophet related by Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); thi
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
Important Words:
خیر (much wealth) means: (1) good as opposed to evil; (2) wealth acquired or collected by fair and praiseworthy means; (3) much wealth or abundance of wealth; (4) a thing that all desire; (5) welfare and good fortune (Mufradat); (6) the existence of a thing in abundance and perfection; (7) horses, etc. (Aqrab).
حقا (obligation) is derived from حق and has been used in the verse in the accusative case, having something understood before it, the complete expression being حق ذالك حقا (Kashshaf). الحق means: (1) equity or justice; (2) right mode of acting; (3) an obligation or a duty; (4) a debt or anything that is owed; (5) a thing suitable to the requirements of justice, truth, duty, etc. (Lane). See also 2:148.
Commentary:
As disputes about inheritance are a fruitful source of quarrels, murders, etc., the Quran here suitably turns from the subject of retaliation to that of inheritance.
The word used here for "wealth" is خیر and not مال which is the ordinary word used in this sense. خیر means, "wealth acquired by fair and praiseworthy means". Thus by substituting the word خیر for مال, the Quran has also emphasized the necessity of being very circumspect in the acquisition of wealth which should be acquired only by fair and lawful means. Incidentally, therefore, it has been hinted that it is not lawful for a Muslim to make a will with regard to property that has been acquired by unlawful means; for such wealth does not really belong to him.
In 4:12, 13 the Quran fixes the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property, according to the Islamic law of inheritance, and these in the first instance include parents, children, and wife or husband. In the presence of this law, the injunction given in the verse under comment would, at first sight, appear to be uncalled-for and unnecessary. As a matter of fact, those who believe in the abrogation theory, have actually declared this verse to be abrogated by the ones referred to above. But they are clearly mistaken; for the verse under comment makes an additional and necessary provision in regard to inheritance. Not seldom there come forward claimants who allege that a deceased person had bequeathed such and such portion of his property to them, and even witnesses are not wanting to support their claims. The rightful heirs, not knowing anything about it, naturally suspect the claim. The result is quarrel and litigation. Every Muslim is, therefore, enjoined to make a proper bequest at the time of his death that his property be divided among his heirs, i.e. parents, children, wives, etc., according to the Law of Islam, stating therein also the portion of any other individual who is not legally entitled to inherit from him but to whom he may wish to bequeath some of his wealth. Such a declaration made with the knowledge of his heirs and relatives is calculated to put a stop to much litigation. Such a provision is all the more essential in cases when the property or wealth is considerable.
The verse also throws out a hint that a Muslim should, before his death, bequeath a part of his property, not exceeding one-third, to such of his relations as have been debarred by Law from inheriting from him, for instance, distant but deserving relations, non-Muslim parents, non-Muslim children and so on. In such a case the remaining two-thirds will go to his lawful heirs. As to the restriction relating to one-third, it may be noted that the Holy Prophet has made it clear that no testator can bequeath more than one-third of his wealth to others than the lawful heirs. At least two-thirds of the property must go to the heirs (Bukhari).
Islam excludes non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs to avoid complications. For instance, the near relatives of a deceased person might belong to a people who are at war with the Muslims or in open hostility toward them. In that case, to put money into their hands would be to damage the cause of Islam and injure one’s own interests. Non-Muslim relatives have, therefore, been excluded from lawful heirs so that they may not claim their part of the inheritance as of right. The Quran, however, instructs Muslims to leave to them a part of their property by a special will, so that, in case such property is not likely to be used against the interests of Islam, the former may in this way discharge the obligations they owe to the latter as kinsmen. Another reason for excluding non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs is that generally non-Muslims do not in practice allow their Muslim relatives to succeed them as heirs. There is no sense, therefore, in allowing Muslim wealth to flow to non-Muslims where no such flow takes place the other way.
The verse serves yet another purpose. According to the Law of Islam, as generally accepted, the grandchild of a deceased Muslim is debarred from inheritance in case the former’s father has predeceased the latter. The Quran, therefore, directs that a portion of the property may be left by a special will by a dying Muslim for such of his relatives as are otherwise rightful heirs but cannot inherit owing to some of their near kinsmen having predeceased them.
The verse must not be understood to lend itself to the interpretation that the heirs whose portions have been definitely fixed by the Law, can be given more than their prescribed share. This is expressly forbidden by the Holy Prophet (Tirmidhi, ch. on Wasaya).
b
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
115
4:12,13经文注定了对所有应该继承死者产业的那些人的分配份额。这些经文被有些注经家误解为废止本节经文的, 实际上本节经文对遗产继承权制订了一条附加而且十分必要的规定, 这种遗产仅指有利于在法律上不该分得遗嘱的遗产的人, 或是出于慈善目的, 或由于战争状况的遗产。它不指有利于合法继承者的遗产, 关于那种遗产在4:12,13中业已述及。因此本节经文为制定遗赠规章的几节经文所废止的问题是不应发生的, 而且那几节经文也承认任何遗产的合法性。是以每一节经文都在自己的范围内起其一定的作用而且相辅相成。所以这样所规定的遗产, 根据萨德•彬•阿比•瓦卡斯 (سَعْد بِنْ اَبِیْ وَقَاص, Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas) 的见解, 像穆圣在讲话中所提到的那样, 不应超过所留产业的三分之一 (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); 这是立遗嘱者可以行使自由支配的处理权的最高限制, 不过这种遗产继承权只有那留下像خَيْر (Khair, 许多财富) 这词所表示的大笔财产者
才能使用。根据经文5:107, 一个将死的穆斯林可以规定遗产。一般的看法, 这节经文是在4:12, 13之后下降的; 这进一步支持了这个看法, 事实上, 本节没有被4:12, 13所代替。一切经文废止的说法是没有根据的。
2
خَیْر کے معنے مطلق مال کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور بہت سے مال کے بھی۔ اس جگہ آیت کے سیاق و سباق سے ظاہر ہوتا ہے کہ مالِ کثیر مراد ہے۔
3
یہاں والدین اور اقربین کو وصیت کرنا کہا ہے حالانکہ اولاد قلبی تعلقات کے لحاظ سے نہایت اہم ہے اس سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ یہ مال کی تقسیم کی وصیت نہیں ورنہ اولاد کا ذکر ضرور ہوتا۔ بلکہ وصیت سے مراد عام تاکید ہے کہ احکامِ الٰہیہ کے مطابق جائیداد تقسیم کی جائے۔ اور اگر مال کا کوئی حصہ صدقہ کرنا ہو تو اس کا اظہار کردے۔ اس آیت پر بہت بحث ہوئی ہے۔ اکثر مفسرین اسے منسوخ قرار دیتے ہیں کیونکہ اس میں وصیت واجب لکھی ہے اور احکام وراثت کے نزول کے بعد رشتہ داروں کے نام وصیت جائز نہیں۔ اور جنہوں نے جائز قرار دی ہے ان کے نزدیک بھی واجب نہیں‘ مگر یہ غلطی اس وجہ سے لگی ہے کہ وصیت کے معنے
a
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
187
Important Words:
خیر (much wealth) means: (1) good as opposed to evil; (2) wealth acquired or collected by fair and praiseworthy means; (3) much wealth or abundance of wealth; (4) a thing that all desire; (5) welfare and good fortune (Mufradat); (6) the existence of a thing in abundance and perfection; (7) horses, etc. (Aqrab).
حقا (obligation) is derived from حق and has been used in the verse in the accusative case, having something understood before it, the complete expression being حق ذالك حقا (Kashshaf). الحق means: (1) equity or justice; (2) right mode of acting; (3) an obligation or a duty; (4) a debt or anything that is owed; (5) a thing suitable to the requirements of justice, truth, duty, etc. (Lane). See also 2:148.
Commentary:
As disputes about inheritance are a fruitful source of quarrels, murders, etc., the Quran here suitably turns from the subject of retaliation to that of inheritance.
The word used here for "wealth" is خیر and not مال which is the ordinary word used in this sense. خیر means, "wealth acquired by fair and praiseworthy means". Thus by substituting the word خیر for مال, the Quran has also emphasized the necessity of being very circumspect in the acquisition of wealth which should be acquired only by fair and lawful means. Incidentally, therefore, it has been hinted that it is not lawful for a Muslim to make a will with regard to property that has been acquired by unlawful means; for such wealth does not really belong to him.
In 4:12, 13 the Quran fixes the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property, according to the Islamic law of inheritance, and these in the first instance include parents, children, and wife or husband. In the presence of this law, the injunction given in the verse under comment would, at first sight, appear to be uncalled-for and unnecessary. As a matter of fact, those who believe in the abrogation theory, have actually declared this verse to be abrogated by the ones referred to above. But they are clearly mistaken; for the verse under comment makes an additional and necessary provision in regard to inheritance. Not seldom there come forward claimants who allege that a deceased person had bequeathed such and such portion of his property to them, and even witnesses are not wanting to support their claims. The rightful heirs, not knowing anything about it, naturally suspect the claim. The result is quarrel and litigation. Every Muslim is, therefore, enjoined to make a proper bequest at the time of his death that his property be divided among his heirs, i.e. parents, children, wives, etc., according to the Law of Islam, stating therein also the portion of any other individual who is not legally entitled to inherit from him but to whom he may wish to bequeath some of his wealth. Such a declaration made with the knowledge of his heirs and relatives is calculated to put a stop to much litigation. Such a provision is all the more essential in cases when the property or wealth is considerable.
The verse also throws out a hint that a Muslim should, before his death, bequeath a part of his property, not exceeding one-third, to such of his relations as have been debarred by Law from inheriting from him, for instance, distant but deserving relations, non-Muslim parents, non-Muslim children and so on. In such a case the remaining two-thirds will go to his lawful heirs. As to the restriction relating to one-third, it may be noted that the Holy Prophet has made it clear that no testator can bequeath more than one-third of his wealth to others than the lawful heirs. At least two-thirds of the property must go to the heirs (Bukhari).
Islam excludes non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs to avoid complications. For instance, the near relatives of a deceased person might belong to a people who are at war with the Muslims or in open hostility toward them. In that case, to put money into their hands would be to damage the cause of Islam and injure one’s own interests. Non-Muslim relatives have, therefore, been excluded from lawful heirs so that they may not claim their part of the inheritance as of right. The Quran, however, instructs Muslims to leave to them a part of their property by a special will, so that, in case such property is not likely to be used against the interests of Islam, the former may in this way discharge the obligations they owe to the latter as kinsmen. Another reason for excluding non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs is that generally non-Muslims do not in practice allow their Muslim relatives to succeed them as heirs. There is no sense, therefore, in allowing Muslim wealth to flow to non-Muslims where no such flow takes place the other way.
The verse serves yet another purpose. According to the Law of Islam, as generally accepted, the grandchild of a deceased Muslim is debarred from inheritance in case the former’s father has predeceased the latter. The Quran, therefore, directs that a portion of the property may be left by a special will by a dying Muslim for such of his relatives as are otherwise rightful heirs but cannot inherit owing to some of their near kinsmen having predeceased them.
The verse must not be understood to lend itself to the interpretation that the heirs whose portions have been definitely fixed by the Law, can be given more than their prescribed share. This is expressly forbidden by the Holy Prophet (Tirmidhi, ch. on Wasaya).
a
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
205
Verses 4:12, 13 fix the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property. These verses have been mistakenly understood by some Commentators to abrogate the verse under comment, which, in fact, lays down an additional and very necessary provision, and refers only to bequests made in favour of individuals not legally entitled to a share in the testator’s property, or for charitable purposes, or for war conditions. It does not refer to bequests made in favour of legal heirs which subject has been dealt with in 4:12, 13. There is no question, therefore, of the abrogation of this verse by those verses which lay down the rules of inheritance and also recognise the validity of any bequests that may have been made. Each operates in its own sphere and draws strength from the other. The bequests thus made, however, should not exceed one third of the property left as is mentioned in a saying of the Holy Prophet related by Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); thi
فَمَنۢ بَدَّلَهُۥ بَعْدَمَا سَمِعَهُۥ فَإِنَّمَآ إِثْمُهُۥ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ يُبَدِّلُونَهُۥٓ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ
فَمَنْ بَدَّلَہٗ کے الفاظ سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ کسی قرآنی حکم کی طرف اشارہ ہے اور وہ حکم وراثت کا ہی ہے ورنہ اس کا کیا مطلب کہ بدلنے کا گناہ بدلنے والوں پر ہوگا۔ وصیت کرنے والے پر نہ ہوگا۔ کیونکہ اگر اس وصیت کی تفصیلات شرعی نہیں بلکہ وصیت کرنے والے کی مرضی پر ہیں تو ان کے بیان نہ کرنے سے مرنے والے کو گناہ کیوں ہو۔ اس کے گنہگار ہونے کا سوال تبھی ہو سکتا ہے جبکہ کسی شرعی حکم کی خلاف ورزی ہو رہی ہو اور وہ اسی طرح ہو سکتی ہے کہ اس آیت میں احکام وراثت بھی شامل ہوں اور مطلب یہ ہو کہ مرنے والا یہ وصیت کر جائے کہ احکام اسلام کے مطابق عمل کیا جائے اس صورت میں وہ گناہ سے بچ جائے
This indicates that the previous verse contemplates some directions which are obligatory and a contravention of which would be sinful. Obviously, what is meant is a direction that the estate shall be administered in accordance with the law of inheritance. If the testator gives such a direction, then the sin of any contravention would lie on those who are guilty of the contravention.
Commentary:
If a person makes a will in compliance with the above commandment, but his heirs, finding it to be prejudicial to their interests, alter it or hinder its execution, the blame and the responsibility for consequences will lie on those who tamper with the will and not on the maker of the will. Apparently, the verse seems to be superfluous; for what it says is obvious, i.e. the responsibility of any subsequent alteration cannot lie on the testator. But deeper consideration would show the futility of such an idea. In fact, the verse serves three important purposes. Firstly, it warns the testator that fear of any subsequent alteration should not deter him from making the will. Secondly, that he should act intelligently and cautiously and should try to foresee and forestall all possible mischief by his heirs. Thirdly, the verse warns the heirs and their friends that any alteration made by them in the will will bring them under the wrath of God Who is All-Knowing.
1
فَمَنْ بَدَّلَہٗ کے الفاظ سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ کسی قرآنی حکم کی طرف اشارہ ہے اور وہ حکم وراثت کا ہی ہے ورنہ اس کا کیا مطلب کہ بدلنے کا گناہ بدلنے والوں پر ہوگا۔ وصیت کرنے والے پر نہ ہوگا۔ کیونکہ اگر اس وصیت کی تفصیلات شرعی نہیں بلکہ وصیت کرنے والے کی مرضی پر ہیں تو ان کے بیان نہ کرنے سے مرنے والے کو گناہ کیوں ہو۔ اس کے گنہگار ہونے کا سوال تبھی ہو سکتا ہے جبکہ کسی شرعی حکم کی خلاف ورزی ہو رہی ہو اور وہ اسی طرح ہو سکتی ہے کہ اس آیت میں احکام وراثت بھی شامل ہوں اور مطلب یہ ہو کہ مرنے والا یہ وصیت کر جائے کہ احکام اسلام کے مطابق عمل کیا جائے اس صورت میں وہ گناہ سے بچ جائے
188
Commentary:
If a person makes a will in compliance with the above commandment, but his heirs, finding it to be prejudicial to their interests, alter it or hinder its execution, the blame and the responsibility for consequences will lie on those who tamper with the will and not on the maker of the will. Apparently, the verse seems to be superfluous; for what it says is obvious, i.e. the responsibility of any subsequent alteration cannot lie on the testator. But deeper consideration would show the futility of such an idea. In fact, the verse serves three important purposes. Firstly, it warns the testator that fear of any subsequent alteration should not deter him from making the will. Secondly, that he should act intelligently and cautiously and should try to foresee and forestall all possible mischief by his heirs. Thirdly, the verse warns the heirs and their friends that any alteration made by them in the will will bring them under the wrath of God Who is All-Knowing.
205A
This indicates that the previous verse contemplates some directions which are obligatory and a contravention of which would be sinful. Obviously, what is meant is a direction that the estate shall be administered in accordance with the law of inheritance. If the testator gives such a direction, then the sin of any contravention would lie on those who are guilty of the contravention.
فَمَنْ خَافَ مِن مُّوصٍ جَنَفًا أَوْ إِثْمًا فَأَصْلَحَ بَيْنَهُمْ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
一个遗嘱可能遵照法定要求, 而也可能在它的某条款中是不公正的。例如, 假如某人留下很多继承者, 如果他出于施舍或其它合法的目的立下遗嘱, 花掉的数字高达足足有三分之一, 那么, 他就会给他们 (继承者) 带来困苦。或者, 立遗嘱者可能不公平地处理了可容许的三分之一之外的遗产, 不顾或忽略合法的要求。在这种情况下容许, 也的确值得在所有继承人与被偏袒的遗产承受人之间进行公平的调整。
یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور ان رشتہ داروں کے درمیان جن کو نقصان پہنچانے یا نظر انداز کر دینے کا اس کا ارادہ ہو یا ان اشخاص میں جن کے حق میں وصیت ہے‘ باہمی سمجھوتے سے ان کو راضی کر دے کہ باوجود وصیت کے وہ ایک دوسرے کو اس کا حق ادا کر دیں۔ بعض دفعہ شریعت پر عمل کرنے کے باوجود وصیت کرنے کی صورت میں بعض نقصانات کا احتمال موجود ہوتا ہے۔ مثلاً اگر کوئی شخص ۳ /۱ کی وصیت کر دے مگر باقی وارث اتنے ہوں کہ بقیہ مال میں سے ان کو حصہ بہت کم ملتا ہو تو ایسی صورت میں اگر اصلاح کروادی جائے تو گناہ نہیں یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور اس کے خاص محبوب یا خاص مبغوض میں صلح کرا دے۔
A will may comply with legal requirements and may yet be unfair in some of its provisions. For instance, if a person leaves a large number of heirs, it may entail a hardship on them if he wills away as much as the full one-third for charitable or other lawful purposes. Or, out of the permissible 1/3 the testator may have made unfair dispositions, neglecting or overlooking just claims. It would in such a case be permissible, indeed meritorious, to bring about a fair adjustment between the heirs and the legatees affected.
Important Words:
جنفا (partiality) is the infinitive noun from جنف. They say جنف عن الطریق meaning, he deviated from the right path. جنف فی وصیتهmeans, he acted wrongfully in his will. جانف اھله means, he kept away from his family out of anger and not for a just cause. تجانف لاثم means, he inclined towards sin. So جنف means: (1) inclining to sin, etc. (2) deviating from the right course; (3) acting unjustly or wrongfully; (4) keeping away from rightful things (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If someone should have reason to fear that the testator is showing undue favour to any particular person or party, or that he is acting contrary to Islamic Law, it would be no sin for him to bring about reconciliation between the parties concerned by removing the cause of displeasure or disagreement between the testator and his heirs and thereby having the will altered in accordance with the requirements of justice and Islamic Law. The words, it shall be no sin for him, do not mean that such pious intervention is simply an act of negative virtue. The expression has been used lest, in view of what has been said in the preceding verse regarding the sinfulness of the act of alteration in a will, some overcautious people should hold aloof even when they see an unjust inclination on the part of the testator. The verse thus really means that such an interference, far from being an act of sin, is an act of virtue which is sure to draw God’s mercy.
The concluding clause reminds the testator that God is Forgiving, so that if he mends his error, He will be pleased to forgive him. The declaration that God is Merciful, also serves as an inducement to other Muslims to intervene, if it is felt that the testator is unduly partial to one party, to the detriment of the other. In that case they should readily step in and set things right, for which God would give them an ample portion out of His mercy. Thus the word غفور (Most Forgiving) relates to such testators as return to the right course when reminded to do so, and the word رحیم (Merciful) relates to those persons who succeed in persuading the testator to revert to the path of rectitude and justice.
116
一个遗嘱可能遵照法定要求, 而也可能在它的某条款中是不公正的。例如, 假如某人留下很多继承者, 如果他出于施舍或其它合法的目的立下遗嘱, 花掉的数字高达足足有三分之一, 那么, 他就会给他们 (继承者) 带来困苦。或者, 立遗嘱者可能不公平地处理了可容许的三分之一之外的遗产, 不顾或忽略合法的要求。在这种情况下容许, 也的确值得在所有继承人与被偏袒的遗产承受人之间进行公平的调整。
2
یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور ان رشتہ داروں کے درمیان جن کو نقصان پہنچانے یا نظر انداز کر دینے کا اس کا ارادہ ہو یا ان اشخاص میں جن کے حق میں وصیت ہے‘ باہمی سمجھوتے سے ان کو راضی کر دے کہ باوجود وصیت کے وہ ایک دوسرے کو اس کا حق ادا کر دیں۔ بعض دفعہ شریعت پر عمل کرنے کے باوجود وصیت کرنے کی صورت میں بعض نقصانات کا احتمال موجود ہوتا ہے۔ مثلاً اگر کوئی شخص ۳ /۱ کی وصیت کر دے مگر باقی وارث اتنے ہوں کہ بقیہ مال میں سے ان کو حصہ بہت کم ملتا ہو تو ایسی صورت میں اگر اصلاح کروادی جائے تو گناہ نہیں یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور اس کے خاص محبوب یا خاص مبغوض میں صلح کرا دے۔
189
Important Words:
جنفا (partiality) is the infinitive noun from جنف. They say جنف عن الطریق meaning, he deviated from the right path. جنف فی وصیتهmeans, he acted wrongfully in his will. جانف اھله means, he kept away from his family out of anger and not for a just cause. تجانف لاثم means, he inclined towards sin. So جنف means: (1) inclining to sin, etc. (2) deviating from the right course; (3) acting unjustly or wrongfully; (4) keeping away from rightful things (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If someone should have reason to fear that the testator is showing undue favour to any particular person or party, or that he is acting contrary to Islamic Law, it would be no sin for him to bring about reconciliation between the parties concerned by removing the cause of displeasure or disagreement between the testator and his heirs and thereby having the will altered in accordance with the requirements of justice and Islamic Law. The words, it shall be no sin for him, do not mean that such pious intervention is simply an act of negative virtue. The expression has been used lest, in view of what has been said in the preceding verse regarding the sinfulness of the act of alteration in a will, some overcautious people should hold aloof even when they see an unjust inclination on the part of the testator. The verse thus really means that such an interference, far from being an act of sin, is an act of virtue which is sure to draw God’s mercy.
The concluding clause reminds the testator that God is Forgiving, so that if he mends his error, He will be pleased to forgive him. The declaration that God is Merciful, also serves as an inducement to other Muslims to intervene, if it is felt that the testator is unduly partial to one party, to the detriment of the other. In that case they should readily step in and set things right, for which God would give them an ample portion out of His mercy. Thus the word غفور (Most Forgiving) relates to such testators as return to the right course when reminded to do so, and the word رحیم (Merciful) relates to those persons who succeed in persuading the testator to revert to the path of rectitude and justice.
205B
A will may comply with legal requirements and may yet be unfair in some of its provisions. For instance, if a person leaves a large number of heirs, it may entail a hardship on them if he wills away as much as the full one-third for charitable or other lawful purposes. Or, out of the permissible 1/3 the testator may have made unfair dispositions, neglecting or overlooking just claims. It would in such a case be permissible, indeed meritorious, to bring about a fair adjustment between the heirs and the legatees affected.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلصِّيَامُ كَمَا كُتِبَ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَّقُونَ
斋戒作为一种宗教制度, 不论有什么形式或什么细目, 但在各门宗教中都有。大多数宗教 (文化低的, 中等的, 高的都一样) 都规定斋戒。在不要求斋戒的时候, 仍然有人个别封斋多少日子的以回应天性之激励 (Enc. Brit)。圣人们和先知们的共同感受是, 一定程度的肉体关系即尘世关系的割断对精神上的提高是必不可少的, 并且在心灵上有强大的净化作用。可是, 伊斯兰教在这种制度方面介绍了一种新的方向和新的宗教意义。据此, 斋戒构成了一种完全奉献的象征。斋戒者不仅忌讳作为维持生命的主要手段的吃喝, 因为没有它, 人不能生存, 而且忌讳与妻交媾这个繁衍后代的手段。因此, 必要的话, 一个真心的斋戒者就显示出愿意为他的养主和造物主献出自己的一切。
Fasting, as a religious institution, in whatever form or detail, is to be found in all Faiths. "By the greater number of religions, in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed; and when it is not required it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature" (Enc. Brit.). It is the common experience of saints and seers that a certain degree of severance from physical relations or worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. Islam, however, has introduced a new orientation and a new spiritual significance in this institution. According to it fasting constitutes a symbol of complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s progeny. Thus he who fasts really evinces his readiness, if need be, to
Important Words:
الصیام (Fasting) is derived from صام meaning, he kept back or refrained from doing something; or he refrained from eating or drinking or talking or walking, etc. The Arabs say صامت الریح i.e. the wind became calm or motionless. فرس صائمmeans, a horse from which food has been withheld, or a horse which is confined to its manger and not made to walk or race. Thus صیام means: (1) keeping back or refraining from something; (2) refraining from eating and drinking, etc; and (3) formally refraining from eating, drinking, going in unto wives, etc. i.e. fasting from dawn till sunset as ordained by Islam. صائم is one who so refrains from food, etc. i.e. one who keeps a fast (Aqrab & Mufradat). An interesting feature of the Arabic language is revealed when we notice that the word صمات though derived from a different root, yet, owing to its having two root letters common with صیام gives a somewhat similar meaning, for, whereas صیام means, refraining from food, drink or speech, صمات means: (1) refraining from speech; and (2) intensity of thirst, the latter state being the direct result of refraining from drink (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contain a reference to patience in trials and sacrifices as well as refraining from disputes and temptations, the Quran here fittingly turns to the subject of fasting, which is a most effective means of self-discipline.
The command to fast, whatever its details, is to be found in most religions in one form or another. The early devotions and fasting of Buddha (see Lalitavistara & Buddhacharita), the fasting of Moses, prior to his receiving the Ten Commandments (Exod. 34:28; Deut. 9:9), the fasts of Jesus before his receiving the heavenly call (Matt. 4:2), all testify to the importance of this institution. In fact, fasting is a form of devotion and self-discipline which has a natural appeal to man. "By the greater number of religions," says the Encyclopaedia Britannica, "in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed: and when it is not required, it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature." The verse under comment, however, does not mean that fasting has been prescribed for the Muslims in the same form in which it was prescribed for the people of earlier faiths. Islam has greatly spiritualised this institution by attaching to it a number of highly useful regulations and restrictions.
The clause, so that you may become righteous, explains the deep philosophy underlying the commandment relating to fasting. It is a special characteristic of the Quran that, whenever it gives an important commandment, it does not give it arbitrarily but also explains its usefulness so that the addressee may be convinced of, and satisfied about, the wisdom underlying it. The object of صیام or fasting has been stated in this verse as the attainment of تقوی i.e. righteousness.
As explained in 2:3 the word تقوی or اتقا from which the word تتقون used in the present verse is derived means, to guard oneself against (1) harm and suffering, and (2) evil and sin. Thus the verse points out that the real object of fasting is, first, to be saved from harm and suffering, and secondly, to be saved from sin and evil.
The first object is attained through fasting in two ways: (1) When a man commits evil deeds and becomes deserving of God’s punishment on account of those deeds, but later feels ashamed of them and turns to God in repentance, then fasting serves as an atonement for his sins. (2) Fasting not only makes a man fit and able to bear hardships but also makes him realize the sufferings of his brethren in distress and feel sympathy for them. Thus fasting goes a long way to remove and minimize the pains and sufferings of humanity.
The second object, viz., that of being saved from sin and evil, is attained through fasting because, while fasting, a person has not only to abandon eating and drinking but also, to a certain extent, to keep himself aloof from worldly connections and to abstain from indulging in his desires, with the result that his thoughts naturally tend towards spiritual things. Spiritual men of all religions unanimously testify, on the basis of personal experience, that a certain degree of severance from physical relations and worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. On the other hand, it cannot be denied that to carry such severance too far is sure to weaken the body to such an undesirable extent as to render a person unfit not only to fulfil his social and religious obligations but also to withstand temptations which requires a certain amount of strength. Islam, therefore, follows the path of the golden mean. While it does prescribe a certain degree of abstention from material pleasures, it does not permit such a weakening of the body as should incapacitate it for performing its normal functions. This is why the Holy Prophet has forbidden continuous fasting, saying, "Your self has a claim upon you and your family has a claim upon you and your guests have a claim upon you" (Tirmidhi). On another occasion, he is reported to have said, "Verily, I am the most righteous of you all, yet sometimes I fast and sometimes I abstain from fasting, and so must you do" (Bukhari).
Fasting also stands as a symbol for complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink, which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s future race. Thus he who fasts really expresses his readiness, if need be, to sacrifice his all for the sake of truth. Fasting indeed affords a wonderful training ground for man.
It must also be noted here that this verse does not actually contain a command to fast, which follows in the verse coming after the succeeding verse. It only prepares Muslims for the coming commandment by saying that (1) the fasting which is going to be prescribed for them is not a new thing but was also prescribed for the people that had gone before, and that (2) it is a most useful thing which is sure to benefit them greatly. It will be seen that very often the Quran does not give a commandment all of a sudden but first prepares the ground for it by making some general remarks. In this connection see also 2:143-145 where a similar process has been adopted.
117
斋戒作为一种宗教制度, 不论有什么形式或什么细目, 但在各门宗教中都有。大多数宗教 (文化低的, 中等的, 高的都一样) 都规定斋戒。在不要求斋戒的时候, 仍然有人个别封斋多少日子的以回应天性之激励 (Enc. Brit)。圣人们和先知们的共同感受是, 一定程度的肉体关系即尘世关系的割断对精神上的提高是必不可少的, 并且在心灵上有强大的净化作用。可是, 伊斯兰教在这种制度方面介绍了一种新的方向和新的宗教意义。据此, 斋戒构成了一种完全奉献的象征。斋戒者不仅忌讳作为维持生命的主要手段的吃喝, 因为没有它, 人不能生存, 而且忌讳与妻交媾这个繁衍后代的手段。因此, 必要的话, 一个真心的斋戒者就显示出愿意为他的养主和造物主献出自己的一切。
190
Important Words:
الصیام (Fasting) is derived from صام meaning, he kept back or refrained from doing something; or he refrained from eating or drinking or talking or walking, etc. The Arabs say صامت الریح i.e. the wind became calm or motionless. فرس صائمmeans, a horse from which food has been withheld, or a horse which is confined to its manger and not made to walk or race. Thus صیام means: (1) keeping back or refraining from something; (2) refraining from eating and drinking, etc; and (3) formally refraining from eating, drinking, going in unto wives, etc. i.e. fasting from dawn till sunset as ordained by Islam. صائم is one who so refrains from food, etc. i.e. one who keeps a fast (Aqrab & Mufradat). An interesting feature of the Arabic language is revealed when we notice that the word صمات though derived from a different root, yet, owing to its having two root letters common with صیام gives a somewhat similar meaning, for, whereas صیام means, refraining from food, drink or speech, صمات means: (1) refraining from speech; and (2) intensity of thirst, the latter state being the direct result of refraining from drink (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contain a reference to patience in trials and sacrifices as well as refraining from disputes and temptations, the Quran here fittingly turns to the subject of fasting, which is a most effective means of self-discipline.
The command to fast, whatever its details, is to be found in most religions in one form or another. The early devotions and fasting of Buddha (see Lalitavistara & Buddhacharita), the fasting of Moses, prior to his receiving the Ten Commandments (Exod. 34:28; Deut. 9:9), the fasts of Jesus before his receiving the heavenly call (Matt. 4:2), all testify to the importance of this institution. In fact, fasting is a form of devotion and self-discipline which has a natural appeal to man. "By the greater number of religions," says the Encyclopaedia Britannica, "in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed: and when it is not required, it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature." The verse under comment, however, does not mean that fasting has been prescribed for the Muslims in the same form in which it was prescribed for the people of earlier faiths. Islam has greatly spiritualised this institution by attaching to it a number of highly useful regulations and restrictions.
The clause, so that you may become righteous, explains the deep philosophy underlying the commandment relating to fasting. It is a special characteristic of the Quran that, whenever it gives an important commandment, it does not give it arbitrarily but also explains its usefulness so that the addressee may be convinced of, and satisfied about, the wisdom underlying it. The object of صیام or fasting has been stated in this verse as the attainment of تقوی i.e. righteousness.
As explained in 2:3 the word تقوی or اتقا from which the word تتقون used in the present verse is derived means, to guard oneself against (1) harm and suffering, and (2) evil and sin. Thus the verse points out that the real object of fasting is, first, to be saved from harm and suffering, and secondly, to be saved from sin and evil.
The first object is attained through fasting in two ways: (1) When a man commits evil deeds and becomes deserving of God’s punishment on account of those deeds, but later feels ashamed of them and turns to God in repentance, then fasting serves as an atonement for his sins. (2) Fasting not only makes a man fit and able to bear hardships but also makes him realize the sufferings of his brethren in distress and feel sympathy for them. Thus fasting goes a long way to remove and minimize the pains and sufferings of humanity.
The second object, viz., that of being saved from sin and evil, is attained through fasting because, while fasting, a person has not only to abandon eating and drinking but also, to a certain extent, to keep himself aloof from worldly connections and to abstain from indulging in his desires, with the result that his thoughts naturally tend towards spiritual things. Spiritual men of all religions unanimously testify, on the basis of personal experience, that a certain degree of severance from physical relations and worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. On the other hand, it cannot be denied that to carry such severance too far is sure to weaken the body to such an undesirable extent as to render a person unfit not only to fulfil his social and religious obligations but also to withstand temptations which requires a certain amount of strength. Islam, therefore, follows the path of the golden mean. While it does prescribe a certain degree of abstention from material pleasures, it does not permit such a weakening of the body as should incapacitate it for performing its normal functions. This is why the Holy Prophet has forbidden continuous fasting, saying, "Your self has a claim upon you and your family has a claim upon you and your guests have a claim upon you" (Tirmidhi). On another occasion, he is reported to have said, "Verily, I am the most righteous of you all, yet sometimes I fast and sometimes I abstain from fasting, and so must you do" (Bukhari).
Fasting also stands as a symbol for complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink, which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s future race. Thus he who fasts really expresses his readiness, if need be, to sacrifice his all for the sake of truth. Fasting indeed affords a wonderful training ground for man.
It must also be noted here that this verse does not actually contain a command to fast, which follows in the verse coming after the succeeding verse. It only prepares Muslims for the coming commandment by saying that (1) the fasting which is going to be prescribed for them is not a new thing but was also prescribed for the people that had gone before, and that (2) it is a most useful thing which is sure to benefit them greatly. It will be seen that very often the Quran does not give a commandment all of a sudden but first prepares the ground for it by making some general remarks. In this connection see also 2:143-145 where a similar process has been adopted.
206
Fasting, as a religious institution, in whatever form or detail, is to be found in all Faiths. "By the greater number of religions, in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed; and when it is not required it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature" (Enc. Brit.). It is the common experience of saints and seers that a certain degree of severance from physical relations or worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. Islam, however, has introduced a new orientation and a new spiritual significance in this institution. According to it fasting constitutes a symbol of complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s progeny. Thus he who fasts really evinces his readiness, if need be, to
أَيَّامًا مَّعْدُودَٰتٍ ۚ فَمَن كَانَ مِنكُم مَّرِيضًا أَوْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ فَعِدَّةٌ مِّنْ أَيَّامٍ أُخَرَ ۚ وَعَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ يُطِيقُونَهُۥ فِدْيَةٌ طَعَامُ مِسْكِينٍ ۖ فَمَن تَطَوَّعَ خَيْرًا فَهُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّهُۥ ۚ وَأَن تَصُومُوا۟ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۖ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ
2:204.
经文中这一阿拉伯语 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ (Yutiquna-hu) 这个意义可由该语的另一读法 يُطَيِّقُوْنَهٗ (Yutayyiquna-hu) 得到支持。يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 的意义是, 他们只有面临大困难才能这样做 (جَرِيْر, Jarir)。本节经文提到三类信者可以得到暂不封斋的许可: 病人; 旅行; 身体虚弱而斋戒对其健康有危险者。这句也可解释为; “不能斋戒的那些人” {لِسَان (Lisan) 和مُفْرَدَات}。全句的意思也可以看作: “有能力负担的人, 除了斋戒之外, 作为一种虔敬的行为, 还应供养一个穷人;” 在 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 中的代词 ه hu意味着 “供养一个穷人。”
وَعَلَی الَّذِیْنَ یُطِیْـقُوْنَہٗ مفسرین اس جگہ یہ معنے کرتے ہیں کہ ’’جو طاقت نہ رکھتے ہوں۔‘‘حضرت مسیح موعود علیہ السلام نے بھی ان معنوں کو ہی اختیار فرمایا ہے۔
اصل بات یہ ہے کہ یُطَیْـقُوْنَہٗ میں جو ہٗ کی ضمیر استعمال ہوئی ہے‘ اس کے َمرجع کے متعیّن نہ ہونے کی وجہ سے مشکل پیش آئی ہے۔شاہ ولی اللہ صاحب نے اس مشکل کو الفوزالکبیر میں اس طرح حل کیا ہے کہ یُطِیْقُوْنَہٗ میں ہٗ کی ضمیر فِدْیَۃٌ طَعَامُ مِسْکِیْن کی طرف گئی ہے اس پر یہ اعتراض پڑتا تھا کہ یہ اضمار قبل الذکر ہے یعنی ضمیر پہلے آگئی ہے اور مرجع بعد میں ہے‘ حالانکہ مرجع پہلے
2:204.
This meaning of the Arabic expression in the text is supported by another reading of Yutiquna-hu which is Yutayyiquna-hu meaning, they can do so only with great difficulty (Jarir). The verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed: the sick; those on a journey and those too weak to fast except with danger to their health. The expression may also mean: "Those who are unable to fast" (Lisan and Mufradat). The whole sentence has also been taken to signify: "Those, who can afford, should, besides fasting, feed a poor man as an act of piety;" the pronoun hu in Yutiquna-hu standing for "the feeding of a poor man."
2:204.
Important Words:
یطیقونه (are able to fast only with great difficulty) is derived from طاق. They say طاق الشیء or اطاق الشیء meaning, he was able or fit to do it; or he had the strength and power to do it (Aqrab). But the word طاقة is not used of strength generally but of such strength only as, so to speak, lies on the border, i.e. just the strength with which a thing may be done and no more—a strength required to do a thing only with difficulty and trouble (Mufradat & Lane). This is why the word طاقة is never used to express the power of God for which words like قدرة and قوة are used; for whereas the latter two words express the sense of vastness of power, the former expresses only that of its narrowness. The Quran uses the word طاقةonly twice and at both these places it uses it in a negative sentence, i.e. لاطاقة لنا viz. "we do not even possess the requisite strength to do that" (2:250 & 287). Thus the correct rendering of the clause علی الذین یطیقونه would be, "for those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty." طوقه (Tawwaqahu) which is from the same root means, he put a collar or a neck-ring round his neck, i.e. he imposed on him a thing that was difficult, troublesome or inconvenient. طاقه also means, a single strand which after combining with others goes to make a rope (Lane), i.e. the weak part of a rope which cannot stand tension alone.
فدیة (an expiation) is derived from فدی. They say فدی الرجل meaning, the man secured his release from captivity, etc. by paying his ransom. Thus فدیة means, such payment as is made for obtaining release of a person; or such expenditure as is made in expiation of some sin or shortcoming, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse again refrains from giving the actual commandment regarding fasting but prepares further ground by pointing out that the fasting about to be prescribed is not meant for all days but only for a limited number of days. Again, the commandment to come is not meant to be observed in all circumstances; for those suffering from disease or those on a journey will be exempt from it. In fact, Islam is a practical religion. It does not give any commandment which is impossible of compliance. Hence, while referring to its injunctions about fasting, the Quran makes it clear that whosoever is ill or is on a journey should not fast but should redeem the omission by fasting an equal number of days at some other time when the sickness is gone or the journey is over.
The pronoun الذین (those) in the clause, those who are able, refers to believers in general, the words الذین یطیقونه meaning, those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty. This interpretation is supported by another reading of the verse in which the word یطوقونه (yutawwaqunahu) has been substituted for یطیقونه (yutiqunahu) (Jarir), the former word meaning, those to whom fasting is like a tight collar, i.e. those who are not actually sick but whose physical condition or general health is such that they are unable to fast without running the risk of injuring their health. Such people, who include old men and raw youths and weakly persons and pregnant women and mothers giving suck to their children, may not fast but should make amends for their non-observance of each day’s fast by feeding a poor man according to their standard of food. Another reading of the word یطیقونه is یطیقون (yutayyaqunahu) (Jarir) meaning, they can do it only with great difficulty, which also bears out the above meaning. Thus the verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed with respect to fasting: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; and (3) those neither on a journey nor actually sick but otherwise too weak to fast except with real risk to their health.
Some commentators do not recognize the last-mentioned class as being separate from, and independent of, the first two, but take it as being an exception from them. In this case the verse would mean that such of the sick and of those on a journey as can afford to feed poor men should also do so, besides fasting the same number of days after the sickness or the state of journey is over.
a
2:204.
118
经文中这一阿拉伯语 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ (Yutiquna-hu) 这个意义可由该语的另一读法 يُطَيِّقُوْنَهٗ (Yutayyiquna-hu) 得到支持。يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 的意义是, 他们只有面临大困难才能这样做 (جَرِيْر, Jarir)。本节经文提到三类信者可以得到暂不封斋的许可: 病人; 旅行; 身体虚弱而斋戒对其健康有危险者。这句也可解释为; “不能斋戒的那些人” {لِسَان (Lisan) 和مُفْرَدَات}。全句的意思也可以看作: “有能力负担的人, 除了斋戒之外, 作为一种虔敬的行为, 还应供养一个穷人;” 在 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 中的代词 ه hu意味着 “供养一个穷人。”
3
وَعَلَی الَّذِیْنَ یُطِیْـقُوْنَہٗ مفسرین اس جگہ یہ معنے کرتے ہیں کہ ’’جو طاقت نہ رکھتے ہوں۔‘‘حضرت مسیح موعود علیہ السلام نے بھی ان معنوں کو ہی اختیار فرمایا ہے۔
اصل بات یہ ہے کہ یُطَیْـقُوْنَہٗ میں جو ہٗ کی ضمیر استعمال ہوئی ہے‘ اس کے َمرجع کے متعیّن نہ ہونے کی وجہ سے مشکل پیش آئی ہے۔شاہ ولی اللہ صاحب نے اس مشکل کو الفوزالکبیر میں اس طرح حل کیا ہے کہ یُطِیْقُوْنَہٗ میں ہٗ کی ضمیر فِدْیَۃٌ طَعَامُ مِسْکِیْن کی طرف گئی ہے اس پر یہ اعتراض پڑتا تھا کہ یہ اضمار قبل الذکر ہے یعنی ضمیر پہلے آگئی ہے اور مرجع بعد میں ہے‘ حالانکہ مرجع پہلے
a
2:204.
191
Important Words:
یطیقونه (are able to fast only with great difficulty) is derived from طاق. They say طاق الشیء or اطاق الشیء meaning, he was able or fit to do it; or he had the strength and power to do it (Aqrab). But the word طاقة is not used of strength generally but of such strength only as, so to speak, lies on the border, i.e. just the strength with which a thing may be done and no more—a strength required to do a thing only with difficulty and trouble (Mufradat & Lane). This is why the word طاقة is never used to express the power of God for which words like قدرة and قوة are used; for whereas the latter two words express the sense of vastness of power, the former expresses only that of its narrowness. The Quran uses the word طاقةonly twice and at both these places it uses it in a negative sentence, i.e. لاطاقة لنا viz. "we do not even possess the requisite strength to do that" (2:250 & 287). Thus the correct rendering of the clause علی الذین یطیقونه would be, "for those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty." طوقه (Tawwaqahu) which is from the same root means, he put a collar or a neck-ring round his neck, i.e. he imposed on him a thing that was difficult, troublesome or inconvenient. طاقه also means, a single strand which after combining with others goes to make a rope (Lane), i.e. the weak part of a rope which cannot stand tension alone.
فدیة (an expiation) is derived from فدی. They say فدی الرجل meaning, the man secured his release from captivity, etc. by paying his ransom. Thus فدیة means, such payment as is made for obtaining release of a person; or such expenditure as is made in expiation of some sin or shortcoming, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse again refrains from giving the actual commandment regarding fasting but prepares further ground by pointing out that the fasting about to be prescribed is not meant for all days but only for a limited number of days. Again, the commandment to come is not meant to be observed in all circumstances; for those suffering from disease or those on a journey will be exempt from it. In fact, Islam is a practical religion. It does not give any commandment which is impossible of compliance. Hence, while referring to its injunctions about fasting, the Quran makes it clear that whosoever is ill or is on a journey should not fast but should redeem the omission by fasting an equal number of days at some other time when the sickness is gone or the journey is over.
The pronoun الذین (those) in the clause, those who are able, refers to believers in general, the words الذین یطیقونه meaning, those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty. This interpretation is supported by another reading of the verse in which the word یطوقونه (yutawwaqunahu) has been substituted for یطیقونه (yutiqunahu) (Jarir), the former word meaning, those to whom fasting is like a tight collar, i.e. those who are not actually sick but whose physical condition or general health is such that they are unable to fast without running the risk of injuring their health. Such people, who include old men and raw youths and weakly persons and pregnant women and mothers giving suck to their children, may not fast but should make amends for their non-observance of each day’s fast by feeding a poor man according to their standard of food. Another reading of the word یطیقونه is یطیقون (yutayyaqunahu) (Jarir) meaning, they can do it only with great difficulty, which also bears out the above meaning. Thus the verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed with respect to fasting: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; and (3) those neither on a journey nor actually sick but otherwise too weak to fast except with real risk to their health.
Some commentators do not recognize the last-mentioned class as being separate from, and independent of, the first two, but take it as being an exception from them. In this case the verse would mean that such of the sick and of those on a journey as can afford to feed poor men should also do so, besides fasting the same number of days after the sickness or the state of journey is over.
a
2:204.
207
This meaning of the Arabic expression in the text is supported by another reading of Yutiquna-hu which is Yutayyiquna-hu meaning, they can do so only with great difficulty (Jarir). The verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed: the sick; those on a journey and those too weak to fast except with danger to their health. The expression may also mean: "Those who are unable to fast" (Lisan and Mufradat). The whole sentence has also been taken to signify: "Those, who can afford, should, besides fasting, feed a poor man as an act of piety;" the pronoun hu in Yutiquna-hu standing for "the feeding of a poor man."
شَهْرُ رَمَضَانَ ٱلَّذِىٓ أُنزِلَ فِيهِ ٱلْقُرْءَانُ هُدًى لِّلنَّاسِ وَبَيِّنَٰتٍ مِّنَ ٱلْهُدَىٰ وَٱلْفُرْقَانِ ۚ فَمَن شَهِدَ مِنكُمُ ٱلشَّهْرَ فَلْيَصُمْهُ ۖ وَمَن كَانَ مَرِيضًا أَوْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ فَعِدَّةٌ مِّنْ أَيَّامٍ أُخَرَ ۗ يُرِيدُ ٱللَّهُ بِكُمُ ٱلْيُسْرَ وَلَا يُرِيدُ بِكُمُ ٱلْعُسْرَ وَلِتُكْمِلُوا۟ ٱلْعِدَّةَ وَلِتُكَبِّرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ عَلَىٰ مَا هَدَىٰكُمْ وَلَعَلَّكُمْ تَشْكُرُونَ
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
22:38.
رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月) 是太阴年的第九个月。此词源出 رَمَضَ (Ramada)。他们说 رَمَضَ الصَّائِمُ (Ramadas-Sai’mu) 就是说, 斋戒人内部由于斋戒变得热而口渴得很 (Lane)。这一月份之所以这祥命名是因为 (一) 在这个月中的斋戒由于口渴而产生热和如火的情况; (二) 在这个月中的礼拜使藏在人的内心的罪恶的痕迹焚毁 {عَسَاكِرْ (‘Asakir) 和 مَرْدَوَيْه (Mardawaih)}; 以及 (三) 因为他在这个月中的祈祷在人的心中产生对他的造物主和他的同类爱的必要的温暖。رَمَضَان 这名称起源于伊斯兰教, 这个月从前的名称是 نَاطِقْ (Natiq) (قَدِيْر, Qadir)。
اَلْقُرْاٰن (Al-Qur’an, «古兰») 源出 قَرَأ (Qara’a) 意指, 他诵读; 他传达或送递一项消息; 他搜集东西。因此 اَلْقُرْاٰن 指的是: (一) 要读的一本书。«古兰经» 是世界上最广泛阅读的书 (Enc. Brit); (2) 要向全世界传达和传送的一本书或一项消息。«古兰经» 是其教义绝对无限制的唯一经典; 因为所有其他的经典是针对特定的时代和特定的民族的, 而 «古兰经» 是针对一切时代和一切民族的 (34:29); (3) 一本包含一切真理的书; «古兰经» 的确是一个知识宝库, 它不仅包含了先前经典中所含有的一切永恒真理 (98:4), 而且也包含了人类在任何时候及任何情况下都可能需要的一切真理 (18:50)。
正是在 رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月, 太阴年的第九月) 的二十四日, 穆圣接到他的第一次启示 (جَرِيْر, Jarir); 而这全部启示在每年这月都由吉布里尔天使背诵给穆圣听。这一惯例延续到这位先知一生的最后一年, 这年全部 «古兰经» 由天使长吉布里尔在这一月中向他背诵了两遍 (布哈理), 因此从一方面来讲, 甚至可以说全部 «古兰经» 是在斋月 (太阳年的第九月) 中下降的。
这句并非不必要的重复, 因为在前节经文中它构成了要为斋戒下令准备场地的经节的一部分, 而在本节经文中它成了实际命令的一部分。可是, «古兰经» 明智地没有详细说明 “生病” 和 “旅行” 这两个术语, 而让它们由人们的通常习惯和当时情况来规定。
بَیِّنٰتٍ مِّنَ الْھُدٰی سے مراد یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں فلاسفر اور ہئیت دان بھی دلیلیں دیتے ہیں مگر ان کے نتیجہ میں یا تو وہ گمراہیوں کو سچا ثابت کرتے ہیں اور یا پھر دنیوی باتیں پیش کرتے ہیں‘ مگر قرآن کریم ایسی دلیلوں پر مشتمل ہے جو ہدایت کا رنگ رکھتی ہیں۔ بے مطلب اور بے غرض باتیں نہیں ہوتیں۔
یعنی دائمی مریض نہ ہو۔ یا مثل دائمی مریض کے نہ ہو۔
یعنی جب وہ تندرست ہو۔ یہ حکم بیمار کے لئے نہیں۔ سفر میں ہو اور دائمی مریض بھی نہ ہو تو اس پر اور دنوں میں تعداد پوری کرنی واجب ہے۔
وَ لِتُکْمِلُوا الْعِدَّۃَ کا عطف پہلے کسی جملہ سے نہیں ملتا اس لئے محققین نے اس جگہ عربی قواعد کے مطابق واؤ کے بعد ایک جملہ محذوف قرار دیا ہے اس جملہ کا ترجمہ خطوط کے اندر کیا گیا ہے (دیکھئیے’’اِمْـلَاءُ مَا مَنَّ بِہِ الرَّحْمٰن)‘‘
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
22:38.
Ramadan is the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from Ramada. They say Ramadas-Sa’imu, i.e. the inside of the man fasting became very hot with thirst owing to fasting (Lane). The month is so named because (1) fasting in this month produces heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship in this month burns away the traces of sin in man (‘Asakir & Mardawaih); and (3) because his devotions in this month produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow-beings. The name Ramadan is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being Natiq (Qadir).
Al-Qur’an is derived from Qara’a which means, he read; he conveyed or delivered a message; he collected the thing. Thus Qur’an means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Qur’an is the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit.); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to the world. The Qur’an is the only revealed Book whose Message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other revealed Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Qur’an is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29); (3) a book which comprises all truths; the Qur’an is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which comprises not only all eternal truths contained in the previous revealed Books (98:4), but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50).
It was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Jarir); and the whole revelation was rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet by the angel Gabriel in this month. This practice continued till the very last year of the Prophet’s life when the whole of the Qur’an was rehearsed to him twice by the Archangel Jibril in this month (Bukhari). Thus in a way even the whole of the Qur’an may be said to have been revealed in the month of Ramadan.
The sentence is not an unnecessary repetition; for whereas in the previous verse it formed part of the verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The Qur’an, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people and the attending circumstances.
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
22:38.
Important Words:
رمضان (Ramadan) is the name given to the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from the verb رمض. They say رمض النھار i.e. the day became intensely hot. رمض الرجل means, the man had his feet burnt by the earth which had become intensely heated by the sun. رمض الصائم means, his inside became very hot with thirst owing to fasting. ارتمض من الحزن means, he began to burn, i.e. he was greatly distressed, with grief and sorrow. الرمض means, the first rain of autumn which finds the earth hot and burning (Aqrab & Lane). The month of رمضان is so named because (1) fasting in this month causes heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship and devotion in this month burns away the traces of sin in man, this signification being corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet (‘Asakir and Merdawaih as quoted by Fathul-Qadir); and (3) its devotions produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow beings. The name رمضان is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being ناتق (Muhit & Mawardi, as quoted by Fathul-Qadir).
القرآن (the Quran) is the name given by God Himself to the Book revealed to the Holy Prophet of Islam, containing the final Law for mankind. The word is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الکتاب meaning: (1) he read the book, i.e. he read it to himself; or (2) he recited the book, i.e. he read it aloud so that others might hear it; قرأ also means, he conveyed or delivered a message, etc., as they say اقرأعلیه السلام meaning, convey or deliver my salam to him; (3) قرأ الشیء means, he collected or drew together the thing; (4) قرأت المراة means, the woman became pregnant and brought forth a child (Aqrab & Lane). Thus قرآن (Quran) means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Quran is indeed the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit. 11th edition, article on Koran by Nöldeke); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to other peoples. The Quran is indeed the only revealed Book whose delivery or message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Quran is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29; also Bukhari); (3) a Book which comprises and has collected in itself all truth; the Quran is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which not only comprises all eternal truths revealed in previous Books (98:4) but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50); (4) a Book which contains not only visible truth which may be seen and felt by all but, like a pregnant woman big with child, it contains truths that lie hidden from the eyes of most men and, like a newborn child, come to light only as and when time ripens (15:22). All these meanings are not only expressive of an existing state of affairs but also serve as mighty prophecies, the truth of which has been established in all ages.
Commentary:
The ground having been suitably prepared in the preceding two verses, this verse gives the awaited commandment about fasting. But even here the actual commandment is preceded by a suitable description of the month of Ramadan in which fasts were to be observed. The month was not chosen arbitrarily but was selected for the purpose of fasting because it was a sacred month in which the Quran was revealed. And the Quran is not an ordinary book. It is a Book full of right guidance and of bright Signs and of things that help to differentiate between truth and falsehood. This sublime foreword placed before the commandment about fasting contains an implied question to the effect: Will you not now fast when fasting is a tried thing, when it is so useful, when it is to be observed only for a few days, when even in these few days suitable facilities have been provided, and lastly when these few days correspond with a month which is full of blessings?
As hinted above, this verse mentions the reason for which the month of Ramadan was selected for the purpose of fasting. It was in this month that the Quran was revealed. The revelation of the Quran in the month of Ramadan may mean two things: (1) that the revelation of the Holy Book commenced in the month of Ramadan, for it is on record that it was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Musnad & Jarir); (2) that the revelation of the Quran was repeated to the Holy Prophet every year in the month of Ramadan, for it is also on record that the angel Gabriel rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet the whole of the revealed portion of the Quran during this month and this he continued to do till the very year of the Prophet’s death (Bukhari, ch. on Manaqib). Thus in a way even the whole of the Quran may be said to have been sent down in Ramadan.
The words, clear proofs of guidance and discrimination, point out that the Quran is a Book which is not content with making mere assertions. It supports every assertion it makes with necessary reasons and arguments which are both clear and convincing, and it also adduces heavenly Signs which go to discriminate right from wrong with such clearness that they leave no room for doubt. This excellence belongs exclusively to the Quran. Indeed, other scriptures, too have been spoken of as "a light and guidance," but about none of them has it been said that they supply reasons, arguments and Signs in support of their assertions.
Although former Prophets also were given Signs that people might accept them as Divine Messengers, yet the Scriptures they brought contained nothing that might bear testimony to their truth. It is only the Quran that contains all kinds of evidence—rational, scriptural and heavenly—to demonstrate the truth of its teachings so that it might itself furnish necessary evidence of its truth, and that, unlike other scriptures, tales and stories of the past might not form its sole support.
The clause, let him fast therein, signifies that it is necessary to fast all the days of the month of Ramadan; it will not do to fast only for a few days. Thus, out of every twelve months in the year, at least one—that of Ramadan—must be so devoted to the worship of God.
The clause, whoso is sick or is on a journey, he shall fast the same number of other days, at first appears to be an unnecessary repetition of what has already been said in the preceding verse in identical words, but really it is not so; for whereas in the previous verse this clause formed part of a verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The clause signifies that if in the month of Ramadan one happens to be sick or is on a journey, one should not fast, owing to the extra hardship entailed, but should fast the same number of other days when one has recovered from sickness or when the journey is over. The Quran, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people.
The clause, He desires not hardship for you, points to the very important principle that divine commands are not meant to cause trouble or inconvenience but to afford ease and facility. In this connection it may well be noted that St. Paul looks upon the Law as an entanglement with "the yoke of bondage" if not as an actual curse (Gal. chs. 3 & 5). But he forgets that true freedom, and for that matter, true happiness lie only in willing obedience to a good and righteous legislation. The Islamic law, even "in meats and drinks and divers washings, and carnal ordinances," is a real help and guidance rather than a hindrance and a bondage.
The clause, so that you may complete the number, indicates that God’s purpose in prescribing a fixed number of days is that believers may be able to complete the number which, in His sight, is essential for their spiritual welfare. A fixed number was essential; for, otherwise, some people might have failed to fast even the minimum number, while others would have unduly suffered for doubt as to their having completed the necessary number even after they had long exceeded it.
The clause, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you, points to yet another object underlying the commandment. All such expressions in which the offering of a particular praise to God is enjoined signify two things: (1) that man being God’s creation should continuously offer praise to Him, invoking the particular divine attribute that may suit the occasion; (2) that he should also try to reflect in his person the selfsame attribute of God. "Exalting God" would therefore mean not only God’s glorification but the uplift and exaltation of the devotee himself. In fact God stands in need of no praise. He is what He is whether we praise Him or not. So truly speaking, everything is for the benefit of man himself, and the benefit underlying fasting is the exaltation of man, morally and spiritually and, in a sense, physically as well.
The final clause, that you may be grateful, is also full of deep meaning. God is not cruel or unkind; He has due regard for our weaknesses and He does not put us to unnecessary trouble; and whatever seeming trouble He puts us to is for our own good. This kind and loving attitude of God towards us ought to give rise to a corresponding feeling of love for Him in our hearts and we ought to feel grateful to Him for His love and kindness.
To a superficial observer the language of the Quran as used in this verse might appear to be rather unconnected, forming independent clauses. But a closer study reveals a beautiful arrangement between them. In fact the four clauses in the concluding portion of this verse furnish reasons for the four commandments contained in the first portion of the verse, the succeeding reasons following the reversed order of the preceding commandments in a most natural manner. The first reason given by the verse is contained in the clause, Allah desires to give you facility and He desires not hardship for you. Though the apparent wording of this clause is different from the wordings of the succeeding clauses, actually it is also one of those that supply a reason, for in reality the clause stands like this, "that you be afforded facility, etc." Corresponding to this clause we have the last commandment of the verse, i.e. whoso is sick or is on a journey, etc. The second clause supplying a reason is, that you may complete the number, corresponding to which we have the commandment, whosoever of you is present at home in this month, let him fast therein, hinting that God means the Muslims to fast the whole month. The third clause supplying a reason is, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you. Corresponding to this we have the words, a guidance for mankind, etc. Finally comes the clause, that you may be grateful, corresponding to which we have the clause, the month of Ramadan is that in which the Quran was sent down, hinting that the wise God has chosen the most sacred and the most blessed part of the year for fasting so that you may be doubly benefited by it. Such figure of speech in which parts of a sentence correspond with others occurring in the same sentence in a reverse order, the first clause of the former group corresponding with the last clause of the latter, is known in Arabic rhetoric as لف و نشر معکوس (Mutawwal).
a
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
c
22:38.
119
رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月) 是太阴年的第九个月。此词源出 رَمَضَ (Ramada)。他们说 رَمَضَ الصَّائِمُ (Ramadas-Sai’mu) 就是说, 斋戒人内部由于斋戒变得热而口渴得很 (Lane)。这一月份之所以这祥命名是因为 (一) 在这个月中的斋戒由于口渴而产生热和如火的情况; (二) 在这个月中的礼拜使藏在人的内心的罪恶的痕迹焚毁 {عَسَاكِرْ (‘Asakir) 和 مَرْدَوَيْه (Mardawaih)}; 以及 (三) 因为他在这个月中的祈祷在人的心中产生对他的造物主和他的同类爱的必要的温暖。رَمَضَان 这名称起源于伊斯兰教, 这个月从前的名称是 نَاطِقْ (Natiq) (قَدِيْر, Qadir)。
120
اَلْقُرْاٰن (Al-Qur’an, «古兰») 源出 قَرَأ (Qara’a) 意指, 他诵读; 他传达或送递一项消息; 他搜集东西。因此 اَلْقُرْاٰن 指的是: (一) 要读的一本书。«古兰经» 是世界上最广泛阅读的书 (Enc. Brit); (2) 要向全世界传达和传送的一本书或一项消息。«古兰经» 是其教义绝对无限制的唯一经典; 因为所有其他的经典是针对特定的时代和特定的民族的, 而 «古兰经» 是针对一切时代和一切民族的 (34:29); (3) 一本包含一切真理的书; «古兰经» 的确是一个知识宝库, 它不仅包含了先前经典中所含有的一切永恒真理 (98:4), 而且也包含了人类在任何时候及任何情况下都可能需要的一切真理 (18:50)。
121
正是在 رَمَضَان (Ramadan, 斋月, 太阴年的第九月) 的二十四日, 穆圣接到他的第一次启示 (جَرِيْر, Jarir); 而这全部启示在每年这月都由吉布里尔天使背诵给穆圣听。这一惯例延续到这位先知一生的最后一年, 这年全部 «古兰经» 由天使长吉布里尔在这一月中向他背诵了两遍 (布哈理), 因此从一方面来讲, 甚至可以说全部 «古兰经» 是在斋月 (太阳年的第九月) 中下降的。
122
这句并非不必要的重复, 因为在前节经文中它构成了要为斋戒下令准备场地的经节的一部分, 而在本节经文中它成了实际命令的一部分。可是, «古兰经» 明智地没有详细说明 “生病” 和 “旅行” 这两个术语, 而让它们由人们的通常习惯和当时情况来规定。
1
بَیِّنٰتٍ مِّنَ الْھُدٰی سے مراد یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں فلاسفر اور ہئیت دان بھی دلیلیں دیتے ہیں مگر ان کے نتیجہ میں یا تو وہ گمراہیوں کو سچا ثابت کرتے ہیں اور یا پھر دنیوی باتیں پیش کرتے ہیں‘ مگر قرآن کریم ایسی دلیلوں پر مشتمل ہے جو ہدایت کا رنگ رکھتی ہیں۔ بے مطلب اور بے غرض باتیں نہیں ہوتیں۔
2
یعنی دائمی مریض نہ ہو۔ یا مثل دائمی مریض کے نہ ہو۔
3
یعنی جب وہ تندرست ہو۔ یہ حکم بیمار کے لئے نہیں۔ سفر میں ہو اور دائمی مریض بھی نہ ہو تو اس پر اور دنوں میں تعداد پوری کرنی واجب ہے۔
4
وَ لِتُکْمِلُوا الْعِدَّۃَ کا عطف پہلے کسی جملہ سے نہیں ملتا اس لئے محققین نے اس جگہ عربی قواعد کے مطابق واؤ کے بعد ایک جملہ محذوف قرار دیا ہے اس جملہ کا ترجمہ خطوط کے اندر کیا گیا ہے (دیکھئیے’’اِمْـلَاءُ مَا مَنَّ بِہِ الرَّحْمٰن)‘‘
a
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
c
22:38.
192
Important Words:
رمضان (Ramadan) is the name given to the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from the verb رمض. They say رمض النھار i.e. the day became intensely hot. رمض الرجل means, the man had his feet burnt by the earth which had become intensely heated by the sun. رمض الصائم means, his inside became very hot with thirst owing to fasting. ارتمض من الحزن means, he began to burn, i.e. he was greatly distressed, with grief and sorrow. الرمض means, the first rain of autumn which finds the earth hot and burning (Aqrab & Lane). The month of رمضان is so named because (1) fasting in this month causes heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship and devotion in this month burns away the traces of sin in man, this signification being corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet (‘Asakir and Merdawaih as quoted by Fathul-Qadir); and (3) its devotions produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow beings. The name رمضان is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being ناتق (Muhit & Mawardi, as quoted by Fathul-Qadir).
القرآن (the Quran) is the name given by God Himself to the Book revealed to the Holy Prophet of Islam, containing the final Law for mankind. The word is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الکتاب meaning: (1) he read the book, i.e. he read it to himself; or (2) he recited the book, i.e. he read it aloud so that others might hear it; قرأ also means, he conveyed or delivered a message, etc., as they say اقرأعلیه السلام meaning, convey or deliver my salam to him; (3) قرأ الشیء means, he collected or drew together the thing; (4) قرأت المراة means, the woman became pregnant and brought forth a child (Aqrab & Lane). Thus قرآن (Quran) means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Quran is indeed the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit. 11th edition, article on Koran by Nöldeke); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to other peoples. The Quran is indeed the only revealed Book whose delivery or message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Quran is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29; also Bukhari); (3) a Book which comprises and has collected in itself all truth; the Quran is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which not only comprises all eternal truths revealed in previous Books (98:4) but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50); (4) a Book which contains not only visible truth which may be seen and felt by all but, like a pregnant woman big with child, it contains truths that lie hidden from the eyes of most men and, like a newborn child, come to light only as and when time ripens (15:22). All these meanings are not only expressive of an existing state of affairs but also serve as mighty prophecies, the truth of which has been established in all ages.
Commentary:
The ground having been suitably prepared in the preceding two verses, this verse gives the awaited commandment about fasting. But even here the actual commandment is preceded by a suitable description of the month of Ramadan in which fasts were to be observed. The month was not chosen arbitrarily but was selected for the purpose of fasting because it was a sacred month in which the Quran was revealed. And the Quran is not an ordinary book. It is a Book full of right guidance and of bright Signs and of things that help to differentiate between truth and falsehood. This sublime foreword placed before the commandment about fasting contains an implied question to the effect: Will you not now fast when fasting is a tried thing, when it is so useful, when it is to be observed only for a few days, when even in these few days suitable facilities have been provided, and lastly when these few days correspond with a month which is full of blessings?
As hinted above, this verse mentions the reason for which the month of Ramadan was selected for the purpose of fasting. It was in this month that the Quran was revealed. The revelation of the Quran in the month of Ramadan may mean two things: (1) that the revelation of the Holy Book commenced in the month of Ramadan, for it is on record that it was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Musnad & Jarir); (2) that the revelation of the Quran was repeated to the Holy Prophet every year in the month of Ramadan, for it is also on record that the angel Gabriel rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet the whole of the revealed portion of the Quran during this month and this he continued to do till the very year of the Prophet’s death (Bukhari, ch. on Manaqib). Thus in a way even the whole of the Quran may be said to have been sent down in Ramadan.
The words, clear proofs of guidance and discrimination, point out that the Quran is a Book which is not content with making mere assertions. It supports every assertion it makes with necessary reasons and arguments which are both clear and convincing, and it also adduces heavenly Signs which go to discriminate right from wrong with such clearness that they leave no room for doubt. This excellence belongs exclusively to the Quran. Indeed, other scriptures, too have been spoken of as "a light and guidance," but about none of them has it been said that they supply reasons, arguments and Signs in support of their assertions.
Although former Prophets also were given Signs that people might accept them as Divine Messengers, yet the Scriptures they brought contained nothing that might bear testimony to their truth. It is only the Quran that contains all kinds of evidence—rational, scriptural and heavenly—to demonstrate the truth of its teachings so that it might itself furnish necessary evidence of its truth, and that, unlike other scriptures, tales and stories of the past might not form its sole support.
The clause, let him fast therein, signifies that it is necessary to fast all the days of the month of Ramadan; it will not do to fast only for a few days. Thus, out of every twelve months in the year, at least one—that of Ramadan—must be so devoted to the worship of God.
The clause, whoso is sick or is on a journey, he shall fast the same number of other days, at first appears to be an unnecessary repetition of what has already been said in the preceding verse in identical words, but really it is not so; for whereas in the previous verse this clause formed part of a verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The clause signifies that if in the month of Ramadan one happens to be sick or is on a journey, one should not fast, owing to the extra hardship entailed, but should fast the same number of other days when one has recovered from sickness or when the journey is over. The Quran, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people.
The clause, He desires not hardship for you, points to the very important principle that divine commands are not meant to cause trouble or inconvenience but to afford ease and facility. In this connection it may well be noted that St. Paul looks upon the Law as an entanglement with "the yoke of bondage" if not as an actual curse (Gal. chs. 3 & 5). But he forgets that true freedom, and for that matter, true happiness lie only in willing obedience to a good and righteous legislation. The Islamic law, even "in meats and drinks and divers washings, and carnal ordinances," is a real help and guidance rather than a hindrance and a bondage.
The clause, so that you may complete the number, indicates that God’s purpose in prescribing a fixed number of days is that believers may be able to complete the number which, in His sight, is essential for their spiritual welfare. A fixed number was essential; for, otherwise, some people might have failed to fast even the minimum number, while others would have unduly suffered for doubt as to their having completed the necessary number even after they had long exceeded it.
The clause, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you, points to yet another object underlying the commandment. All such expressions in which the offering of a particular praise to God is enjoined signify two things: (1) that man being God’s creation should continuously offer praise to Him, invoking the particular divine attribute that may suit the occasion; (2) that he should also try to reflect in his person the selfsame attribute of God. "Exalting God" would therefore mean not only God’s glorification but the uplift and exaltation of the devotee himself. In fact God stands in need of no praise. He is what He is whether we praise Him or not. So truly speaking, everything is for the benefit of man himself, and the benefit underlying fasting is the exaltation of man, morally and spiritually and, in a sense, physically as well.
The final clause, that you may be grateful, is also full of deep meaning. God is not cruel or unkind; He has due regard for our weaknesses and He does not put us to unnecessary trouble; and whatever seeming trouble He puts us to is for our own good. This kind and loving attitude of God towards us ought to give rise to a corresponding feeling of love for Him in our hearts and we ought to feel grateful to Him for His love and kindness.
To a superficial observer the language of the Quran as used in this verse might appear to be rather unconnected, forming independent clauses. But a closer study reveals a beautiful arrangement between them. In fact the four clauses in the concluding portion of this verse furnish reasons for the four commandments contained in the first portion of the verse, the succeeding reasons following the reversed order of the preceding commandments in a most natural manner. The first reason given by the verse is contained in the clause, Allah desires to give you facility and He desires not hardship for you. Though the apparent wording of this clause is different from the wordings of the succeeding clauses, actually it is also one of those that supply a reason, for in reality the clause stands like this, "that you be afforded facility, etc." Corresponding to this clause we have the last commandment of the verse, i.e. whoso is sick or is on a journey, etc. The second clause supplying a reason is, that you may complete the number, corresponding to which we have the commandment, whosoever of you is present at home in this month, let him fast therein, hinting that God means the Muslims to fast the whole month. The third clause supplying a reason is, that you may exalt Allah for His having guided you. Corresponding to this we have the words, a guidance for mankind, etc. Finally comes the clause, that you may be grateful, corresponding to which we have the clause, the month of Ramadan is that in which the Quran was sent down, hinting that the wise God has chosen the most sacred and the most blessed part of the year for fasting so that you may be doubly benefited by it. Such figure of speech in which parts of a sentence correspond with others occurring in the same sentence in a reverse order, the first clause of the former group corresponding with the last clause of the latter, is known in Arabic rhetoric as لف و نشر معکوس (Mutawwal).
a
2:186; 3:4; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
2:287; 5:7; 22:79.
c
22:38.
207A
Ramadan is the ninth month of the lunar year. The word is derived from Ramada. They say Ramadas-Sa’imu, i.e. the inside of the man fasting became very hot with thirst owing to fasting (Lane). The month is so named because (1) fasting in this month produces heat and burning due to thirst; (2) worship in this month burns away the traces of sin in man (‘Asakir & Mardawaih); and (3) because his devotions in this month produce in the heart of man the necessary warmth of love for his Creator and his fellow-beings. The name Ramadan is of Islamic origin, the former name of the month being Natiq (Qadir).
207B
Al-Qur’an is derived from Qara’a which means, he read; he conveyed or delivered a message; he collected the thing. Thus Qur’an means: (1) a book which is meant to be read. The Qur’an is the most widely read book in the world (Enc. Brit.); (2) a book or message which is meant to be conveyed and delivered to the world. The Qur’an is the only revealed Book whose Message is absolutely unrestricted; for whereas all other revealed Books are meant for specific times and specific peoples, the Qur’an is meant for all times and all peoples (34:29); (3) a book which comprises all truths; the Qur’an is indeed a storehouse of knowledge which comprises not only all eternal truths contained in the previous revealed Books (98:4), but also all such truths as mankind may stand in need of at any time and in any circumstances (18:50).
208
It was on the 24th of Ramadan that the Holy Prophet received his first revelation (Jarir); and the whole revelation was rehearsed every year to the Holy Prophet by the angel Gabriel in this month. This practice continued till the very last year of the Prophet’s life when the whole of the Qur’an was rehearsed to him twice by the Archangel Jibril in this month (Bukhari). Thus in a way even the whole of the Qur’an may be said to have been revealed in the month of Ramadan.
209
The sentence is not an unnecessary repetition; for whereas in the previous verse it formed part of the verse that was meant to prepare the ground for the commandment to fast, in this verse it forms part of the actual commandment. The Qur’an, however, wisely refrains from defining the terms "sickness" and "journey," leaving them to be defined by the common usage of the people and the attending circumstances.
وَإِذَا سَأَلَكَ عِبَادِى عَنِّى فَإِنِّى قَرِيبٌ ۖ أُجِيبُ دَعْوَةَ ٱلدَّاعِ إِذَا دَعَانِ ۖ فَلْيَسْتَجِيبُوا۟ لِى وَلْيُؤْمِنُوا۟ بِى لَعَلَّهُمْ يَرْشُدُونَ
11:62; 34:51; 50:17.
27:63.
当伊斯兰教信者们知道 رَمَضَان (Ramadan) 这一月斋戒的幸福时, 他们自然变得渴望从这获得尽可能多的精神福利。正是针对信者心灵上的这种渴望, 本节经文作了答复。
“信仰我” 这句话并不是指信仰安拉的存在, 因为这一概念包括在先前一句中 “他们也应接受我的命令,” 一个人竟然听从安拉并服从他的命令, 却不相信他的存在, 这是不可能的。因此, “信仰我” 这句话是指信仰安拉听到并接受他的忠实信仰者的祈祷。
11:62; 34:51; 50:17.
27:63.
When the Faithful come to know of the blessings of the month of Ramadan and of fasting therein they naturally become eager to derive as much spiritual benefit from it as possible. It is to this hankering of the soul of a believer to which the verse supplies an answer.
The words, believe in Me, do not refer to belief in the existence of God; for, this idea is included in the preceding clause, they should hearken to Me, it being impossible that one should hearken to God and obey His commandments without believing in His existence. The words, believe in Me, therefore, refer to the belief that God hears and accepts the prayers of His servants.
11:62; 34:51; 50:17.
27:63.
Important Words:
اجیب (I answer) and فلیستجیبوا (they should hearken) are both derived from the same root جاب meaning, he cut a cloth, etc. اجابه means, he answered him or answered his question. اجابت الارض means, the earth brought forth its vegetation, i.e. responded to sowing. استجابه means, he answered him or responded to him. استجاب له means, he obeyed him or complied with his wish and did what he was asked to do (Aqrab & Lane).
یرشدون (may follow the right way) is derived from رشد meaning, he was rightly guided and became steadfast in his guidance; he took or followed the right way. رشد (rushd) and رشد (rashad) and رشاد mean, true guidance; following the right way with firmness and steadfastness; rectitude; maturity of intellect. رشید and راشد mean, one who is rightly guided, one who takes or follows the right way. رشید is more intensive of the two and is also applied to God when it means, "Director to the right way; One Who follows a perfect course in His decrees" (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
When the Faithful came to know of the blessings of the month of Ramadan and of fasting therein, they naturally became eager to derive as much benefit from it as possible and asked the Holy Prophet as to the particular attitude of God in this month, i.e. whether He came nearer to His servants in respect of grace and mercy, and whether He accepted more prayers in Ramadan and so on. The verse provides an answer to this question.
The words, My servants, do not obviously refer to all people but to only such men as believe in God and are willing to obey Him, particularly Muslims who follow His commandments regarding Prayers, Fasting, etc. In fact atheists or, for that matter, rebellious people are never spoken of as "My servants" in the Quran.
The clause, I am near, does not, and indeed cannot, refer to bodily nearness. The preceding verses told us that the command to fast was given with a view to purifying us, and that in giving it God desired our own welfare and meant no torture. The conception of such a loving God naturally creates the desire in the minds of all men to attain spiritual nearness to Him. Hence the present verse contains the glad tidings that access to God is not beyond human power nor is His nearness the monopoly of any particular people. The attainment of union with Him is within the reach of every man and woman, and the door of His mercy and grace is also open to all.
The words, I answer the prayers of the supplicant, point to the fact that it is not only the true believers and the righteous who have their prayers accepted by God but that God hears and accepts the prayers of all. As a matter of fact, the acceptance of prayer is an expression of God’s grace and mercy which encompass Muslims as well as non-Muslims. It would be unjust to think that God, Who is "the Lord of the worlds," accepts the prayers of Muslims alone. It is natural, however, that He should show greater favour to those who obey Him and hold fast to truth and act righteously. He therefore listens more to their prayers than to those of others, and He certainly rejects such prayers as are offered against His beloved ones. Nor does He accept such prayers as may lead to results that are detrimental to the cause of truth. But He is the Lord of all and listens to all.
The clause, so they should hearken to Me, means that they should believe in God (for without believing there can be no hearkening, and no response to His calls) and obey Him. God promises acceptance of prayers to "His servants" but He also expects that His creatures should believe in Him and obey His commandments. This will make their prayers all the more entitled to acceptance.
The words, and believe in Me, do not here refer to a belief in the existence of God; for this idea is included in the preceding clause, they should hearken to Me, it being impossible that one should hearken to God and obey His commandments without believing in His existence. The words, believe in Me, therefore refer here to belief in the power of God to accept prayers and belief in the fact that if appealed to, He will certainly come to our help.
The final clause, that they may follow the right way, means that if men would act upon the guidance contained in this commandment they would (1) attain God’s nearness, and (2) find God inclined to accept their prayers more and more.
But as with all other things, there are limitations and conditions attached to the acceptance of prayers also, to some of which the verse under comment refers. They may be briefly stated as follows:
(1) One should be a servant of God, accepting His dominion over him and worshipping Him, alone, as the words, My servants, indicate.
(2) One should call on God alone for help and turn to no other being or thing opposed to Him, as the words, when he prays to Me, show. There are indeed many who, while seemingly praying to God, put their real trust in other things or sometimes even turn to false deities for help. Such men cannot expect their prayers to be accepted.
(3) One should hearken to God’s call, i.e. not only believe in Him but also obey His commandments, accepting His Messengers and acting righteously in accordance with His Law, as the words, hearken to Me, point out.
(4) One should have firm belief in the fact that God not only has the power to accept one’s prayers but would actually accept them if one could only persist in asking, as the words, believe in Me, signify. There are indeed many who pray for a time and then get tired of it. These really do not believe; for if they had believed, they would willingly have waited. Says the Holy Prophet: "God would accept one’s prayer if only one did not show impatience, by saying, 'I have prayed and I have not been answered' " (Muslim).
(5) The prayers of those who are rebellious against God, rejecting His commandments and opposing His will, are not accepted, particularly such prayers in which something against His will or something likely to injure the cause of His beloved ones is solicited. Says God: "The prayer of the rebellious ones is nothing but wasted" (40:51).
A saying of the Holy Prophet very beautifully explains the philosophy of prayer. He is reported to have said: "Every Muslim who prays to God and whose prayer does not consist in anything which is a sin, i.e. anything against God’s will or against His commandments or against His way, or anything which involves an injustice or unkindness to a relative, will have his prayer accepted. But the acceptance of prayer may take three forms: (a) either God will grant to the supplicant his request in this very life; or (b) He will store the thing for him in the next; or (c) He will ward off a like evil from him" (Bukhari).
The Holy Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement says: "God treats His servants like friends. A friend would sometimes accept the request of his friend and would sometimes expect him to accept his will. So does God. But even when God seemingly rejects the prayer of a believer, He is very often acting in his interests" (Haqiqat, p. 19).
c
11:62; 34:51; 50:17.
d
27:63.
123
当伊斯兰教信者们知道 رَمَضَان (Ramadan) 这一月斋戒的幸福时, 他们自然变得渴望从这获得尽可能多的精神福利。正是针对信者心灵上的这种渴望, 本节经文作了答复。
124
“信仰我” 这句话并不是指信仰安拉的存在, 因为这一概念包括在先前一句中 “他们也应接受我的命令,” 一个人竟然听从安拉并服从他的命令, 却不相信他的存在, 这是不可能的。因此, “信仰我” 这句话是指信仰安拉听到并接受他的忠实信仰者的祈祷。
a
11:62; 34:51; 50:17.
b
27:63.
193
Important Words:
اجیب (I answer) and فلیستجیبوا (they should hearken) are both derived from the same root جاب meaning, he cut a cloth, etc. اجابه means, he answered him or answered his question. اجابت الارض means, the earth brought forth its vegetation, i.e. responded to sowing. استجابه means, he answered him or responded to him. استجاب له means, he obeyed him or complied with his wish and did what he was asked to do (Aqrab & Lane).
یرشدون (may follow the right way) is derived from رشد meaning, he was rightly guided and became steadfast in his guidance; he took or followed the right way. رشد (rushd) and رشد (rashad) and رشاد mean, true guidance; following the right way with firmness and steadfastness; rectitude; maturity of intellect. رشید and راشد mean, one who is rightly guided, one who takes or follows the right way. رشید is more intensive of the two and is also applied to God when it means, "Director to the right way; One Who follows a perfect course in His decrees" (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
When the Faithful came to know of the blessings of the month of Ramadan and of fasting therein, they naturally became eager to derive as much benefit from it as possible and asked the Holy Prophet as to the particular attitude of God in this month, i.e. whether He came nearer to His servants in respect of grace and mercy, and whether He accepted more prayers in Ramadan and so on. The verse provides an answer to this question.
The words, My servants, do not obviously refer to all people but to only such men as believe in God and are willing to obey Him, particularly Muslims who follow His commandments regarding Prayers, Fasting, etc. In fact atheists or, for that matter, rebellious people are never spoken of as "My servants" in the Quran.
The clause, I am near, does not, and indeed cannot, refer to bodily nearness. The preceding verses told us that the command to fast was given with a view to purifying us, and that in giving it God desired our own welfare and meant no torture. The conception of such a loving God naturally creates the desire in the minds of all men to attain spiritual nearness to Him. Hence the present verse contains the glad tidings that access to God is not beyond human power nor is His nearness the monopoly of any particular people. The attainment of union with Him is within the reach of every man and woman, and the door of His mercy and grace is also open to all.
The words, I answer the prayers of the supplicant, point to the fact that it is not only the true believers and the righteous who have their prayers accepted by God but that God hears and accepts the prayers of all. As a matter of fact, the acceptance of prayer is an expression of God’s grace and mercy which encompass Muslims as well as non-Muslims. It would be unjust to think that God, Who is "the Lord of the worlds," accepts the prayers of Muslims alone. It is natural, however, that He should show greater favour to those who obey Him and hold fast to truth and act righteously. He therefore listens more to their prayers than to those of others, and He certainly rejects such prayers as are offered against His beloved ones. Nor does He accept such prayers as may lead to results that are detrimental to the cause of truth. But He is the Lord of all and listens to all.
The clause, so they should hearken to Me, means that they should believe in God (for without believing there can be no hearkening, and no response to His calls) and obey Him. God promises acceptance of prayers to "His servants" but He also expects that His creatures should believe in Him and obey His commandments. This will make their prayers all the more entitled to acceptance.
The words, and believe in Me, do not here refer to a belief in the existence of God; for this idea is included in the preceding clause, they should hearken to Me, it being impossible that one should hearken to God and obey His commandments without believing in His existence. The words, believe in Me, therefore refer here to belief in the power of God to accept prayers and belief in the fact that if appealed to, He will certainly come to our help.
The final clause, that they may follow the right way, means that if men would act upon the guidance contained in this commandment they would (1) attain God’s nearness, and (2) find God inclined to accept their prayers more and more.
But as with all other things, there are limitations and conditions attached to the acceptance of prayers also, to some of which the verse under comment refers. They may be briefly stated as follows:
(1) One should be a servant of God, accepting His dominion over him and worshipping Him, alone, as the words, My servants, indicate.
(2) One should call on God alone for help and turn to no other being or thing opposed to Him, as the words, when he prays to Me, show. There are indeed many who, while seemingly praying to God, put their real trust in other things or sometimes even turn to false deities for help. Such men cannot expect their prayers to be accepted.
(3) One should hearken to God’s call, i.e. not only believe in Him but also obey His commandments, accepting His Messengers and acting righteously in accordance with His Law, as the words, hearken to Me, point out.
(4) One should have firm belief in the fact that God not only has the power to accept one’s prayers but would actually accept them if one could only persist in asking, as the words, believe in Me, signify. There are indeed many who pray for a time and then get tired of it. These really do not believe; for if they had believed, they would willingly have waited. Says the Holy Prophet: "God would accept one’s prayer if only one did not show impatience, by saying, 'I have prayed and I have not been answered' " (Muslim).
(5) The prayers of those who are rebellious against God, rejecting His commandments and opposing His will, are not accepted, particularly such prayers in which something against His will or something likely to injure the cause of His beloved ones is solicited. Says God: "The prayer of the rebellious ones is nothing but wasted" (40:51).
A saying of the Holy Prophet very beautifully explains the philosophy of prayer. He is reported to have said: "Every Muslim who prays to God and whose prayer does not consist in anything which is a sin, i.e. anything against God’s will or against His commandments or against His way, or anything which involves an injustice or unkindness to a relative, will have his prayer accepted. But the acceptance of prayer may take three forms: (a) either God will grant to the supplicant his request in this very life; or (b) He will store the thing for him in the next; or (c) He will ward off a like evil from him" (Bukhari).
The Holy Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement says: "God treats His servants like friends. A friend would sometimes accept the request of his friend and would sometimes expect him to accept his will. So does God. But even when God seemingly rejects the prayer of a believer, He is very often acting in his interests" (Haqiqat, p. 19).
a
11:62; 34:51; 50:17.
b
27:63.
210
When the Faithful come to know of the blessings of the month of Ramadan and of fasting therein they naturally become eager to derive as much spiritual benefit from it as possible. It is to this hankering of the soul of a believer to which the verse supplies an answer.
211
The words, believe in Me, do not refer to belief in the existence of God; for, this idea is included in the preceding clause, they should hearken to Me, it being impossible that one should hearken to God and obey His commandments without believing in His existence. The words, believe in Me, therefore, refer to the belief that God hears and accepts the prayers of His servants.
أُحِلَّ لَكُمْ لَيْلَةَ ٱلصِّيَامِ ٱلرَّفَثُ إِلَىٰ نِسَآئِكُمْ ۚ هُنَّ لِبَاسٌ لَّكُمْ وَأَنتُمْ لِبَاسٌ لَّهُنَّ ۗ عَلِمَ ٱللَّهُ أَنَّكُمْ كُنتُمْ تَخْتَانُونَ أَنفُسَكُمْ فَتَابَ عَلَيْكُمْ وَعَفَا عَنكُمْ ۖ فَٱلْـَٰٔنَ بَٰشِرُوهُنَّ وَٱبْتَغُوا۟ مَا كَتَبَ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ ۚ وَكُلُوا۟ وَٱشْرَبُوا۟ حَتَّىٰ يَتَبَيَّنَ لَكُمُ ٱلْخَيْطُ ٱلْأَبْيَضُ مِنَ ٱلْخَيْطِ ٱلْأَسْوَدِ مِنَ ٱلْفَجْرِ ۖ ثُمَّ أَتِمُّوا۟ ٱلصِّيَامَ إِلَى ٱلَّيْلِ ۚ وَلَا تُبَٰشِرُوهُنَّ وَأَنتُمْ عَٰكِفُونَ فِى ٱلْمَسَٰجِدِ ۗ تِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا تَقْرَبُوهَا ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ ءَايَٰتِهِۦ لِلنَّاسِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَتَّقُونَ
在这简短的话中 «古兰经» 把妇女的权利和地位、婚姻的目的和意义, 以及夫妇之间的关系描述得多么美好。本节经文大意是说婚姻的真正目的是双方得到舒适、保护和修饰, 因为这就是服装的多种用途 (7:27及16:82)。这肯定不只是性生活的满足。丈夫和妻子还得相互防护邪恶与丑事。
رَفَثَ کے معنے اصل میں جماع کے ذکر کے ہوتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ استعارۃً یہ لفظ جماع کے معنوں میں استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مکہ والے سمجھتے تھے کہ روزہ دار کو رات کے وقت بھی اپنی بیوی کے ساتھ تعلق پیدا کرنا جائز نہیں‘ اس کی تردید کی۔
لباس سے یہ مراد ہے کہ خاوند کی وجہ سے لوگ عورت پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں اور عورت کی وجہ سے خاوند پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں پس وہ ایک دوسرے کا لباس ہیں یعنی ایک دوسرے کی حفاظت کرتے ہیں۔
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ اس کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ بعض مسلمان باوجود یہ جاننے کے کہ روزہ کی رات میں عورت کے پاس جانا جائز نہیں ایسا کر لیتے تھے۔ پس فرماتا ہے کہ ہم نے یہ حکم اس لئے کھول کر بیان کر دیا ہے کہ تم گناہ میں نہ پڑو۔ لیکن تَخْتَأْ نُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ کے معنے اپنے نفسوں کی حق تلفی کرنے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے اس جگہ کیے ہیں کیونکہ وہ صحابہ ؓ کی شان کے مطابق ہیں اور مطلب یہ ہے کہ گو یہ حکم شرعی نہیں تھا مگر پھر بھی تم اپنی جانوں کو تکلیف میں ڈالنے کی کوشش کرتے تھے۔ اب ہم نے شرعی حکم بتا دیا ہے تاکہ تم خواہ مخواہ اپنے آپ کو تکلیف میں نہ ڈالو۔
عَفَا اللّٰہُ عَنْکَ کے معنے ہیں اَصْلَحَکَ اللّٰہُ وَ اَعَزَّکَ یعنی اللہ تیرے کاموں کو درست کرے اور تجھے عزت دے (اقرب) ہم نے اسی محاورہ کے مطابق عَفَا عَنْـکُمْ کے معنے یہ کیے ہیں۔ کہ اللہ نے تمہاری اس حالت کی اصلاح کردی۔
How beautifully in these brief words the Qur’an has described the rights and status of woman and the object and significance of marriage and conjugal relations. The real object of marriage, the verse purports to say, is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment (7:27 & 16:82). It definitely is not merely the satisfaction of sexual urge. Husband and wife also safeguard each other against evil and scandal.
The expression ‘Afallahu ‘An-hu means, God corrected his mistake and set right his affairs; bestowed honour upon him. It also means, God afforded him relief (Muhit).
At places where days and nights are unusually long (e.g. near the Poles) day and night should be calculated to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. Ashratus-Sa‘ah).
In I‘tikaf which constitutes, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time.
Important Words:
رفث (going in unto) has a number of meanings: amatory talk, kissing, caressing, embracing, compressing, coition, etc.; in fact, everything that a man desires of his wife. When رفث is followed by the preposition الی it means, coition or going in unto one’s wife, and it is in this sense that the word has been used here. رفث also means, immodest, foul and lewd talk or speech (Lane).
تختانون (you have been acting unjustly) is derived from خان. They say خانه i.e. he acted unfaithfully or perfidiously towards him; he was not faithful to the trust reposed in him. اختانه is like خانه, giving the same meaning. It also means, he acted wrongfully or unjustly towards him. The Arabs say خانته رجلاه i.e. his feet or legs acted unfaithfully towards him, meaning he was unable to walk. تختانون انفسکم would, therefore, mean, you failed to give your souls (i.e. yourselves) their due either (1) by preventing them from their duty to God, or (2) by refusing them the satisfaction of their natural and lawful cravings. The former act is a sin, while the latter, though not a sin, may endanger one’s health or deprive one of just happiness. The word has been used in both these senses in the Quran. In 4:108, it has been used in the sense of "sin", while in the present verse it has been used in the sense of "depriving the soul of the gratification of its natural and just desires".
عفاعنکم (afforded you relief). The word عفا gives a number of meanings (see 2:53). The expression عفاالله عن فلان is sometimes used where there is no question of pardoning any sin or obliterating traces thereof but simply in the sense of removing one’s mistake or misunderstanding or improving one’s condition or bestowing honour on one (Aqrab). It also means, making things easy, i.e. affording relief (Muhit).
باشروھن (go in unto them) is derived from بشر from which is also derived the word بشارة or بشری meaning, glad tidings. The expression بشربه means, he became glad and happy because of that. The words بشرالجلد mean, he removed or peeled off its skin. البشرة means, outer part of skin, or what is visible of the face or body. باشرالمرأة means, he came in contact with his wife skin to skin; he went in unto her. البشری (glad tidings) is so called because it changes the colour of the listener’s face. البشر (man) is also so called because, unlike other animals, man’s skin is visible and not concealed under hair (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
Commentary:
It was a custom among the Israelites to abstain from all kinds of food from one evening to the other on the occasion of the fast of the Atonement Day, the only fast prescribed by Moses for his people. When fasts were first prescribed for Muslims, and details had not yet been revealed, they thought that, like the Jews, they too would have to fast for 24 hours with a slight intervening breakfast. Hence, following their own judgement, they concluded that it was lawful for them to eat and drink and to go in unto their wives only as long as they did not go to bed, and that after they had gone to sleep, they were not allowed to partake of any food or drink or to go in unto their wives until the next evening. Bukhari gives the following tradition on the authority of Bara’: "When the command to fast was revealed, if anybody kept a fast and then went to sleep in the evening, he abstained from eating, drinking and sexual intercourse until the time for breaking the fast the following day" (Bukhari ch. on Saum). This tradition and others of the same import show that it was not in obedience to any command from God or the Holy Prophet that his Companions abstained from sexual intercourse after going to bed at night, but it was owing to their own imitation of similar customs among the People of the Book that they had imposed these restrictions on themselves. As, however, these restrictions were against the will of God, a revelation was soon sent down allowing the Faithful to eat and drink and approach their wives as they liked during the night; only they were forbidden to do so while fasting during the day.
Some commentators have inferred from the words, you have been acting unjustly to yourselves, that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were unable to act upon the commandment to abstain from intercourse with their wives during the nights of fasts and frequently broke it. But this is evidently wrong, for the good reason that there was no such commandment to be broken. Moreover, the words of the Quran, i.e. you may now go in, also belie this interpretation, for the use of the word "now" clearly indicates that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were erring not on the side of indulgence but on that of abstinence. The Quran could not obviously say, you may now go in, to a people who were already going in unto their wives.
The clause, they are a garment for you and you are a garment for them, very beautifully describes the object of marriage. The verse points out that the object of marriage is not the gratification of carnal passions. The real object is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment as explained in 7:27 & 16:82. Thus in a very few words, the Quran has described the true relationship that should exist between husband and wife, a description which has hardly a parallel in any other scripture.
The clause, the white thread becomes distinct from the black thread of the dawn, does not refer to the thread made of yarn but to the streak of light that appears along the eastern horizon at the time of dawn. The verse enjoins that from dawn till sunset Muslims should abstain from food and drink and intercourse while fasting. But they are free to have recourse to these things between sunset and dawn. At places where days and nights are unusually long, i.e. nearer the poles, calculation should be made for the purpose of fasting on the basis of average conditions, i.e. in such a case day and night would each be supposed to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. on Ashratus-Sa‘at). The clause, while you remain in the mosques for devotion, refers to the practice of اعتکاف which is observed by remaining in the mosque, night and day, during the last ten days of Ramadan. During these days, the devotee who decides to observe اعتکاف is not to leave the mosque except from human necessity, i.e. to answer a call of nature, etc. He enters the mosque on the morning of the 20th of Ramadan
and abides therein till the end of the month, fasting from daybreak to sunset and occupying himself in prayer or recitation of the Quran or other religious study or meditation. During اعتکاف (I‘tikaf), which is, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time. The clause, these are the limits fixed by Allah, so approach them not, points to the very important principle that a man can attain true piety only if he refrains from even "approaching" the things that have been forbidden by God. "Some acts," says the Holy Prophet "are of doubtful character, one not knowing whether they are right or wrong. It is always better to avoid these. The forbidden things are like a pasture-land which the Wise God prohibits to the people. If you make your beasts graze on the borders of such land, i.e. allow your beasts to approach near them, there is danger of their trespassing upon the prohibited area" (Bukhari, ch, on Iman). This is an extremely wise injunction which cuts at the root of all trespass. Only those can protect themselves against sin who give all unlawful things a wide berth. The final clause, that they may become secure against evil, repeats the idea contained in 2:184 in which the subject of fasting was first introduced. In both verses the underlying object of fasting has been stated to be the attainment of تقوی i.e. piety, righteousness and protection against evil, which are all different forms of divineblessings. The reader may, with advantage, compare this idea with the belief of the Christians that the Law is a curse (Gal. 3:10, 13).
125
在这简短的话中 «古兰经» 把妇女的权利和地位、婚姻的目的和意义, 以及夫妇之间的关系描述得多么美好。本节经文大意是说婚姻的真正目的是双方得到舒适、保护和修饰, 因为这就是服装的多种用途 (7:27及16:82)。这肯定不只是性生活的满足。丈夫和妻子还得相互防护邪恶与丑事。
1
رَفَثَ کے معنے اصل میں جماع کے ذکر کے ہوتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ استعارۃً یہ لفظ جماع کے معنوں میں استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مکہ والے سمجھتے تھے کہ روزہ دار کو رات کے وقت بھی اپنی بیوی کے ساتھ تعلق پیدا کرنا جائز نہیں‘ اس کی تردید کی۔
2
لباس سے یہ مراد ہے کہ خاوند کی وجہ سے لوگ عورت پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں اور عورت کی وجہ سے خاوند پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں پس وہ ایک دوسرے کا لباس ہیں یعنی ایک دوسرے کی حفاظت کرتے ہیں۔
3
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ اس کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ بعض مسلمان باوجود یہ جاننے کے کہ روزہ کی رات میں عورت کے پاس جانا جائز نہیں ایسا کر لیتے تھے۔ پس فرماتا ہے کہ ہم نے یہ حکم اس لئے کھول کر بیان کر دیا ہے کہ تم گناہ میں نہ پڑو۔ لیکن تَخْتَأْ نُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ کے معنے اپنے نفسوں کی حق تلفی کرنے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے اس جگہ کیے ہیں کیونکہ وہ صحابہ ؓ کی شان کے مطابق ہیں اور مطلب یہ ہے کہ گو یہ حکم شرعی نہیں تھا مگر پھر بھی تم اپنی جانوں کو تکلیف میں ڈالنے کی کوشش کرتے تھے۔ اب ہم نے شرعی حکم بتا دیا ہے تاکہ تم خواہ مخواہ اپنے آپ کو تکلیف میں نہ ڈالو۔
4
عَفَا اللّٰہُ عَنْکَ کے معنے ہیں اَصْلَحَکَ اللّٰہُ وَ اَعَزَّکَ یعنی اللہ تیرے کاموں کو درست کرے اور تجھے عزت دے (اقرب) ہم نے اسی محاورہ کے مطابق عَفَا عَنْـکُمْ کے معنے یہ کیے ہیں۔ کہ اللہ نے تمہاری اس حالت کی اصلاح کردی۔
194
Important Words:
رفث (going in unto) has a number of meanings: amatory talk, kissing, caressing, embracing, compressing, coition, etc.; in fact, everything that a man desires of his wife. When رفث is followed by the preposition الی it means, coition or going in unto one’s wife, and it is in this sense that the word has been used here. رفث also means, immodest, foul and lewd talk or speech (Lane).
تختانون (you have been acting unjustly) is derived from خان. They say خانه i.e. he acted unfaithfully or perfidiously towards him; he was not faithful to the trust reposed in him. اختانه is like خانه, giving the same meaning. It also means, he acted wrongfully or unjustly towards him. The Arabs say خانته رجلاه i.e. his feet or legs acted unfaithfully towards him, meaning he was unable to walk. تختانون انفسکم would, therefore, mean, you failed to give your souls (i.e. yourselves) their due either (1) by preventing them from their duty to God, or (2) by refusing them the satisfaction of their natural and lawful cravings. The former act is a sin, while the latter, though not a sin, may endanger one’s health or deprive one of just happiness. The word has been used in both these senses in the Quran. In 4:108, it has been used in the sense of "sin", while in the present verse it has been used in the sense of "depriving the soul of the gratification of its natural and just desires".
عفاعنکم (afforded you relief). The word عفا gives a number of meanings (see 2:53). The expression عفاالله عن فلان is sometimes used where there is no question of pardoning any sin or obliterating traces thereof but simply in the sense of removing one’s mistake or misunderstanding or improving one’s condition or bestowing honour on one (Aqrab). It also means, making things easy, i.e. affording relief (Muhit).
باشروھن (go in unto them) is derived from بشر from which is also derived the word بشارة or بشری meaning, glad tidings. The expression بشربه means, he became glad and happy because of that. The words بشرالجلد mean, he removed or peeled off its skin. البشرة means, outer part of skin, or what is visible of the face or body. باشرالمرأة means, he came in contact with his wife skin to skin; he went in unto her. البشری (glad tidings) is so called because it changes the colour of the listener’s face. البشر (man) is also so called because, unlike other animals, man’s skin is visible and not concealed under hair (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
Commentary:
It was a custom among the Israelites to abstain from all kinds of food from one evening to the other on the occasion of the fast of the Atonement Day, the only fast prescribed by Moses for his people. When fasts were first prescribed for Muslims, and details had not yet been revealed, they thought that, like the Jews, they too would have to fast for 24 hours with a slight intervening breakfast. Hence, following their own judgement, they concluded that it was lawful for them to eat and drink and to go in unto their wives only as long as they did not go to bed, and that after they had gone to sleep, they were not allowed to partake of any food or drink or to go in unto their wives until the next evening. Bukhari gives the following tradition on the authority of Bara’: "When the command to fast was revealed, if anybody kept a fast and then went to sleep in the evening, he abstained from eating, drinking and sexual intercourse until the time for breaking the fast the following day" (Bukhari ch. on Saum). This tradition and others of the same import show that it was not in obedience to any command from God or the Holy Prophet that his Companions abstained from sexual intercourse after going to bed at night, but it was owing to their own imitation of similar customs among the People of the Book that they had imposed these restrictions on themselves. As, however, these restrictions were against the will of God, a revelation was soon sent down allowing the Faithful to eat and drink and approach their wives as they liked during the night; only they were forbidden to do so while fasting during the day.
Some commentators have inferred from the words, you have been acting unjustly to yourselves, that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were unable to act upon the commandment to abstain from intercourse with their wives during the nights of fasts and frequently broke it. But this is evidently wrong, for the good reason that there was no such commandment to be broken. Moreover, the words of the Quran, i.e. you may now go in, also belie this interpretation, for the use of the word "now" clearly indicates that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were erring not on the side of indulgence but on that of abstinence. The Quran could not obviously say, you may now go in, to a people who were already going in unto their wives.
The clause, they are a garment for you and you are a garment for them, very beautifully describes the object of marriage. The verse points out that the object of marriage is not the gratification of carnal passions. The real object is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment as explained in 7:27 & 16:82. Thus in a very few words, the Quran has described the true relationship that should exist between husband and wife, a description which has hardly a parallel in any other scripture.
The clause, the white thread becomes distinct from the black thread of the dawn, does not refer to the thread made of yarn but to the streak of light that appears along the eastern horizon at the time of dawn. The verse enjoins that from dawn till sunset Muslims should abstain from food and drink and intercourse while fasting. But they are free to have recourse to these things between sunset and dawn. At places where days and nights are unusually long, i.e. nearer the poles, calculation should be made for the purpose of fasting on the basis of average conditions, i.e. in such a case day and night would each be supposed to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. on Ashratus-Sa‘at). The clause, while you remain in the mosques for devotion, refers to the practice of اعتکاف which is observed by remaining in the mosque, night and day, during the last ten days of Ramadan. During these days, the devotee who decides to observe اعتکاف is not to leave the mosque except from human necessity, i.e. to answer a call of nature, etc. He enters the mosque on the morning of the 20th of Ramadan
and abides therein till the end of the month, fasting from daybreak to sunset and occupying himself in prayer or recitation of the Quran or other religious study or meditation. During اعتکاف (I‘tikaf), which is, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time. The clause, these are the limits fixed by Allah, so approach them not, points to the very important principle that a man can attain true piety only if he refrains from even "approaching" the things that have been forbidden by God. "Some acts," says the Holy Prophet "are of doubtful character, one not knowing whether they are right or wrong. It is always better to avoid these. The forbidden things are like a pasture-land which the Wise God prohibits to the people. If you make your beasts graze on the borders of such land, i.e. allow your beasts to approach near them, there is danger of their trespassing upon the prohibited area" (Bukhari, ch, on Iman). This is an extremely wise injunction which cuts at the root of all trespass. Only those can protect themselves against sin who give all unlawful things a wide berth. The final clause, that they may become secure against evil, repeats the idea contained in 2:184 in which the subject of fasting was first introduced. In both verses the underlying object of fasting has been stated to be the attainment of تقوی i.e. piety, righteousness and protection against evil, which are all different forms of divineblessings. The reader may, with advantage, compare this idea with the belief of the Christians that the Law is a curse (Gal. 3:10, 13).
212
How beautifully in these brief words the Qur’an has described the rights and status of woman and the object and significance of marriage and conjugal relations. The real object of marriage, the verse purports to say, is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment (7:27 & 16:82). It definitely is not merely the satisfaction of sexual urge. Husband and wife also safeguard each other against evil and scandal.
213
The expression ‘Afallahu ‘An-hu means, God corrected his mistake and set right his affairs; bestowed honour upon him. It also means, God afforded him relief (Muhit).
214
At places where days and nights are unusually long (e.g. near the Poles) day and night should be calculated to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. Ashratus-Sa‘ah).
215
In I‘tikaf which constitutes, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time.
وَلَا تَأْكُلُوٓا۟ أَمْوَٰلَكُم بَيْنَكُم بِٱلْبَٰطِلِ وَتُدْلُوا۟ بِهَآ إِلَى ٱلْحُكَّامِ لِتَأْكُلُوا۟ فَرِيقًا مِّنْ أَمْوَٰلِ ٱلنَّاسِ بِٱلْإِثْمِ وَأَنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ
4:30, 162; 9:34.
قرآن کریم اکثر قومی زندگی پر زور دینے کے لئے عام انسانوں یا اپنے اہل ملک یا اہل قوم کی اشیاء کو اپنی اشیاء کہہ کر پکارتا ہے تا اس طرف اشارہ کرے کہ جو اپنی قوم کے افراد کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے وہ اپنے آپ کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے۔ یہاں بھی اپنے مال سے مراد دوسرے بنی نوع انسان کے اموال ہیں لیکن مذکورہ بالا اصول کی طرف توجہ دلانے کے لئے اپنے مال کہہ کر انہیں پکارا ہے۔ اس سورت کے رکوع ۱۰ میں فرمایا اِذْ اَخَذْنَا مِیْثَاقَکُمْ لَاتُسْفِکُوْنَ دِمَآءَ کُمْ وَلَاتُخْرِجُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ مِّنْ دِیَارِکُمْ (البقرۃ: ۸۵) پھر آگے چل کر فرمایا ثُمَّ اَنْتُمْ ھٰٓؤُلَآءِ تَقْت
4:30, 162; 9:34.
In order to emphasize communal or national unity the Qur’an often refers to other Muslims’ property as "your property." So here also other Muslims’ property is spoken of as "your property."
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was the most opportune time to remind them that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must all the more be scrupulously avoided. Incidentally, the verse forcefully condemns the practice of giving and taking bribe.
4:30, 162; 9:34.
Important Words:
تدلوا (offer it) is derived from ادلی which again is derived from دلا. They say دلاالدلو, he let down the bucket (into the well), or he pulled it up. ادلی means, he let down the bucket (into the well.) ادلی الیه بمال means, he offered or gave him money (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from lawful eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was thus the most opportune time to remind the people that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must be all the more scrupulously avoided. Indeed, one of the greatest evils prevailing in the world is the practice of devouring other men’s property by means of falsehood, fraud and litigation. Many a sin is nothing but an offshoot of this evil. Islam condemns the practice of taking another man’s property without his knowledge or consent. Similarly, it is unlawful to appropriate another person’s possessions by means of false litigation. If a man takes possession of a property that does not belong to him by right, it will prove the ruin of him, even if a court of justice should decree the property as his. Says the Holy Prophet: "Beware! I am but a man like you and it sometimes happens that a litigant comes to me and he is more eloquent than his opponent, and I, after listening to his arguments, may give my decision in his favour. But if the property is really not his, my decision will not make it his in the sight of God; in that case it is nothing but a piece of burning fire; so let him put this fire into his belly if he likes, or let him leave it" (Bukhari).
The verse cuts at the root of the evil that has made its appearance in the present age even among those who lay claim to culture and enlightenment. People generally do not deem it worthwhile to consider what right is. All that is seen is how the judge decides. When a judge awards a property to a man, he eagerly takes possession of it without the slightest compunction, even if it happens not to belong to him by right. It never occurs to him that in the sight of God he is no less a usurper than he who forcibly seizes another man’s property.
Incidentally the verse also forcefully condemns the practice of the giving and taking of bribe which unfortunately is so rampant nowadays. In many countries justice has actually to be bought. What is still worse is that through this evil practice, the door of justice is often closed to a rightful owner. The practice is to be found even in some advanced Western countries and is said to be prevalent in certain parts of the New World. The Holy Prophet has condemned it in the strongest of terms saying: "The taker and giver of a bribe are alike, and both stand accursed" (Tirmidhi).
a
4:30, 162; 9:34.
2
قرآن کریم اکثر قومی زندگی پر زور دینے کے لئے عام انسانوں یا اپنے اہل ملک یا اہل قوم کی اشیاء کو اپنی اشیاء کہہ کر پکارتا ہے تا اس طرف اشارہ کرے کہ جو اپنی قوم کے افراد کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے وہ اپنے آپ کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے۔ یہاں بھی اپنے مال سے مراد دوسرے بنی نوع انسان کے اموال ہیں لیکن مذکورہ بالا اصول کی طرف توجہ دلانے کے لئے اپنے مال کہہ کر انہیں پکارا ہے۔ اس سورت کے رکوع ۱۰ میں فرمایا اِذْ اَخَذْنَا مِیْثَاقَکُمْ لَاتُسْفِکُوْنَ دِمَآءَ کُمْ وَلَاتُخْرِجُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ مِّنْ دِیَارِکُمْ (البقرۃ: ۸۵) پھر آگے چل کر فرمایا ثُمَّ اَنْتُمْ ھٰٓؤُلَآءِ تَقْت
a
4:30, 162; 9:34.
195
Important Words:
تدلوا (offer it) is derived from ادلی which again is derived from دلا. They say دلاالدلو, he let down the bucket (into the well), or he pulled it up. ادلی means, he let down the bucket (into the well.) ادلی الیه بمال means, he offered or gave him money (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from lawful eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was thus the most opportune time to remind the people that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must be all the more scrupulously avoided. Indeed, one of the greatest evils prevailing in the world is the practice of devouring other men’s property by means of falsehood, fraud and litigation. Many a sin is nothing but an offshoot of this evil. Islam condemns the practice of taking another man’s property without his knowledge or consent. Similarly, it is unlawful to appropriate another person’s possessions by means of false litigation. If a man takes possession of a property that does not belong to him by right, it will prove the ruin of him, even if a court of justice should decree the property as his. Says the Holy Prophet: "Beware! I am but a man like you and it sometimes happens that a litigant comes to me and he is more eloquent than his opponent, and I, after listening to his arguments, may give my decision in his favour. But if the property is really not his, my decision will not make it his in the sight of God; in that case it is nothing but a piece of burning fire; so let him put this fire into his belly if he likes, or let him leave it" (Bukhari).
The verse cuts at the root of the evil that has made its appearance in the present age even among those who lay claim to culture and enlightenment. People generally do not deem it worthwhile to consider what right is. All that is seen is how the judge decides. When a judge awards a property to a man, he eagerly takes possession of it without the slightest compunction, even if it happens not to belong to him by right. It never occurs to him that in the sight of God he is no less a usurper than he who forcibly seizes another man’s property.
Incidentally the verse also forcefully condemns the practice of the giving and taking of bribe which unfortunately is so rampant nowadays. In many countries justice has actually to be bought. What is still worse is that through this evil practice, the door of justice is often closed to a rightful owner. The practice is to be found even in some advanced Western countries and is said to be prevalent in certain parts of the New World. The Holy Prophet has condemned it in the strongest of terms saying: "The taker and giver of a bribe are alike, and both stand accursed" (Tirmidhi).
a
4:30, 162; 9:34.
215A
In order to emphasize communal or national unity the Qur’an often refers to other Muslims’ property as "your property." So here also other Muslims’ property is spoken of as "your property."
216
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was the most opportune time to remind them that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must all the more be scrupulously avoided. Incidentally, the verse forcefully condemns the practice of giving and taking bribe.
۞ يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلْأَهِلَّةِ ۖ قُلْ هِىَ مَوَٰقِيتُ لِلنَّاسِ وَٱلْحَجِّ ۗ وَلَيْسَ ٱلْبِرُّ بِأَن تَأْتُوا۟ ٱلْبُيُوتَ مِن ظُهُورِهَا وَلَٰكِنَّ ٱلْبِرَّ مَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ ۗ وَأْتُوا۟ ٱلْبُيُوتَ مِنْ أَبْوَٰبِهَا ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُفْلِحُونَ
عرب حاجی جب حج کو جاتے تو ضرورت پڑنے پر اگر واپس گھروں کو آتے تو دیوار پھاند کر گھر میں گھستے۔ اس آیت میں اس کا ردّ کیا کہ گھر میں دیواریں پھاند کر جانا نیکی نہیں۔ نیکی تو ایک روحانی امر ہے۔ پس ہر چیز کے حصول کے لئے صحیح طریق اختیار کیا کرو۔
2:198; 9:36.
2:178.
Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the beginning and the breaking of the daily fast; and where worship is to be completed within a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. Thus Islam has made use of both the systems; so the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
The clause points to a very important principle that the real purpose in prescribing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that every change of time should have attached to it an act of worship. Therefore the question, arising from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship in other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof." The primary thing is worship and time is only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time a primary, and worship merely a secondary thing. This was like putting the cart before the horse. The reference also seems to be to a practice of the pagan Arabs that when they had once started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, if for any reason they had to come back, they would enter their houses from their backs by scaling over the walls. The verse condemns such practices, pointing out that they do not constitute virtue which is a spiritual concept, an
2:198; 9:36.
2:178.
Important Words:
الاھلة (new moons) is the plural of الھلال i.e. the new moon. The word is generally used about the moon of the first two or three nights. About the moon of other nights the word used is قمر (Aqrab).
مواقیت (means for measuring time) is the plural of میقات which is derived from وقت i.e. time. میقات means: (1) time; (2) time fixed or appointed for a certain thing; (3) a promise for which a time is fixed; (4) a place in which a meeting is appointed to take place at a particular time (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
When the Companions of the Holy Prophet heard of the great blessings of the month of Ramadan, they naturally desired to know the blessings attending other months. This question on their part shows how solicitous they were to win God’s blessings and attain His nearness.
The clause, they are means for measuring time, should not give rise to the misunderstanding that Islam looks upon the moon only as a means of measuring time; for elsewhere the Quran speaks of the sun also as such (6:97 and 17:13). In fact, Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day, the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the opening and the closing of a daily fast; and where worship is to be connected with a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. As a matter of fact, as religious commandments are meant for the general public, the system used is always such as may be easily understandable by the common people. All commandments relating to a fixed time are therefore based on the visible part of the solar or the lunar system of reckoning time, as the case may be. Changes in the position of the sun during the day are visible but the beginning of a solar month is not visible. On the other hand, the appearance of a new moon in the beginning of a lunar month is visible. Therefore Islam has made use of both; and the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
The clause, and it is not righteousness that you come into houses by the backs thereof, points to a very important principle that the real purpose in appointing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that to each change of time there should be attached an act of worship. Therefore the question, resulting from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship relating to other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof". The primary thing was worship and time was only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time primary and worship merely secondary. This was like putting the cart before the horse.
The clause also means that one should adopt the right course to attain an object. Every end can be attained by having recourse to certain means. Similarly, certain ways have been prescribed by God for winning His pleasure and attaining His nearness. People should faithfully stick to these and not devise ways of their own. By doing so, they will only suffer trouble, and gain nothing.
It is also on record that it was the practice among the idolaters of Arabia that when they left their homes and started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, then if for some purpose or object they had to come back to their houses, they did not enter them by their doors, but climbed into them by their back walls (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). Islam does not approve of such meaningless practices.
b
2:198; 9:36.
c
2:178.
126
伊斯兰教利用太阴系和太阳系两者计时。礼拜在白天的不同时候举行, 则使用太阳系计时, 如每日五次礼拜, 或每日的斋戒开始和中止; 凡崇拜仪式要在某一特定的月份或该月的某一时间完成者, 则使用太阴系, 如选择斋戒月份或规定朝觐的时间等。这样, 伊斯兰教利用两种体系; 因此就计时来说, 太阳系和太阴系都是伊斯兰教的。
1
عرب حاجی جب حج کو جاتے تو ضرورت پڑنے پر اگر واپس گھروں کو آتے تو دیوار پھاند کر گھر میں گھستے۔ اس آیت میں اس کا ردّ کیا کہ گھر میں دیواریں پھاند کر جانا نیکی نہیں۔ نیکی تو ایک روحانی امر ہے۔ پس ہر چیز کے حصول کے لئے صحیح طریق اختیار کیا کرو۔
a
2:198; 9:36.
b
2:178.
196
Important Words:
الاھلة (new moons) is the plural of الھلال i.e. the new moon. The word is generally used about the moon of the first two or three nights. About the moon of other nights the word used is قمر (Aqrab).
مواقیت (means for measuring time) is the plural of میقات which is derived from وقت i.e. time. میقات means: (1) time; (2) time fixed or appointed for a certain thing; (3) a promise for which a time is fixed; (4) a place in which a meeting is appointed to take place at a particular time (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
When the Companions of the Holy Prophet heard of the great blessings of the month of Ramadan, they naturally desired to know the blessings attending other months. This question on their part shows how solicitous they were to win God’s blessings and attain His nearness.
The clause, they are means for measuring time, should not give rise to the misunderstanding that Islam looks upon the moon only as a means of measuring time; for elsewhere the Quran speaks of the sun also as such (6:97 and 17:13). In fact, Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day, the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the opening and the closing of a daily fast; and where worship is to be connected with a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. As a matter of fact, as religious commandments are meant for the general public, the system used is always such as may be easily understandable by the common people. All commandments relating to a fixed time are therefore based on the visible part of the solar or the lunar system of reckoning time, as the case may be. Changes in the position of the sun during the day are visible but the beginning of a solar month is not visible. On the other hand, the appearance of a new moon in the beginning of a lunar month is visible. Therefore Islam has made use of both; and the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
The clause, and it is not righteousness that you come into houses by the backs thereof, points to a very important principle that the real purpose in appointing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that to each change of time there should be attached an act of worship. Therefore the question, resulting from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship relating to other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof". The primary thing was worship and time was only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time primary and worship merely secondary. This was like putting the cart before the horse.
The clause also means that one should adopt the right course to attain an object. Every end can be attained by having recourse to certain means. Similarly, certain ways have been prescribed by God for winning His pleasure and attaining His nearness. People should faithfully stick to these and not devise ways of their own. By doing so, they will only suffer trouble, and gain nothing.
It is also on record that it was the practice among the idolaters of Arabia that when they left their homes and started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, then if for some purpose or object they had to come back to their houses, they did not enter them by their doors, but climbed into them by their back walls (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). Islam does not approve of such meaningless practices.
a
2:198; 9:36.
b
2:178.
217
Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the beginning and the breaking of the daily fast; and where worship is to be completed within a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. Thus Islam has made use of both the systems; so the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
218
The clause points to a very important principle that the real purpose in prescribing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that every change of time should have attached to it an act of worship. Therefore the question, arising from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship in other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof." The primary thing is worship and time is only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time a primary, and worship merely a secondary thing. This was like putting the cart before the horse. The reference also seems to be to a practice of the pagan Arabs that when they had once started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, if for any reason they had to come back, they would enter their houses from their backs by scaling over the walls. The verse condemns such practices, pointing out that they do not constitute virtue which is a spiritual concept, an
وَقَٰتِلُوا۟ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ٱلَّذِينَ يُقَٰتِلُونَكُمْ وَلَا تَعْتَدُوٓا۟ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُعْتَدِينَ
4:76; 8:40; 9:13; 22:40; 60:9, 10.
This is one of the earliest verses in which permission to fight was given to Muslims, the very first verse revealed in this connection being 22:40. The verse under comment contains the gist of the conditions which should govern a religious war: (a) Such a war should be undertaken with the object of removing obstacles placed in the way of Allah, i.e. for the establishment of the freedom of religious belief and practice. (b) It is to be waged only against those who first take up arms against Muslims. (c) The Muslims should lay down arms as soon as the enemy desists from fighting.
4:76; 8:40; 9:13; 22:40; 60:9, 10.
Important Words:
سبیل الله (the cause of Allah) literally means, "the way of Allah". Anything done to remove the obstacles hindering people from approaching God or accepting His religion is termed فی سبیل الله i.e. in the cause of Allah; also anything done to further the cause of Allah or any act performed in compliance with God’s commandment. Thus holy wars, missionary campaigns, Pilgrimage, search of knowledge, etc. in fact anything done to further the cause of goodness and virtue as commanded by God is فی سبیل الله.
Commentary:
The subject relating to the attainment of virtue and piety and the incidental mention of Pilgrimage naturally diverts one’s attention to the obstacles that were being placed in the way of Muslims by disbelievers who were making them victims of all sorts of wrongs and even prevented them from approaching their Qiblah in Mecca. The Quran, therefore, fittingly turns here to the subject of religious wars.
The verse contains the gist of the conditions which should regulate a religious war and which were made binding on Muslims. The conditions mentioned in this verse are four in number:
(1) Such a war should truly be فی سبیل الله i.e. undertaken with the object of removing obstacles placed in the way of God and His religion. Any war that is not فی سبیل الله is not a lawful, religious war.
(2) Such war is allowed only against those who first take up arms against Muslims as the words. الذین یقاتلونکم (those who fight against you), indicate.
(3) Great care should be taken that women, children and old men of the belligerent nation who do not take actual part in the war against Islam are spared, for religious war is allowed only against those who fight against you. If, however, an old man or a woman takes actual part in the fighting, the responsibility lies on him or her and in such a case he or she loses the concession. Says the Holy Prophet: "Do not kill an old man or a child or a woman, and always try to improve things and reform matters and act kindly towards others, for Allah loves those who act kindly" (Dawud).
(4) Muslims should bring the war to an end as soon as the enemy desists from fighting, for in this case further fighting is not permissible, as the words لاتعتدوا i.e. do not transgress; surely Allah loves not the transgressors, clearly prove. What a just and noble teaching and how tersely and beautifully expressed!
a
4:76; 8:40; 9:13; 22:40; 60:9, 10.
127
这是许可穆斯林去战斗的最初经文之一, 在这一方面所降示的第一节经文是22:40。注释的本节经文包括了决定一场宗教战争的条件: (a) 这样一场战争的目的是扫除设置在安拉道上的障碍, 即为了确立宗教信仰和传教的自由。 (b) 它只是对抗那些拿起武器针对穆斯林的一伙而进行斗争者。(c) 敌人一停止战斗, 穆斯林也应放下武器。
a
4:76; 8:40; 9:13; 22:40; 60:9, 10.
197
Important Words:
سبیل الله (the cause of Allah) literally means, "the way of Allah". Anything done to remove the obstacles hindering people from approaching God or accepting His religion is termed فی سبیل الله i.e. in the cause of Allah; also anything done to further the cause of Allah or any act performed in compliance with God’s commandment. Thus holy wars, missionary campaigns, Pilgrimage, search of knowledge, etc. in fact anything done to further the cause of goodness and virtue as commanded by God is فی سبیل الله.
Commentary:
The subject relating to the attainment of virtue and piety and the incidental mention of Pilgrimage naturally diverts one’s attention to the obstacles that were being placed in the way of Muslims by disbelievers who were making them victims of all sorts of wrongs and even prevented them from approaching their Qiblah in Mecca. The Quran, therefore, fittingly turns here to the subject of religious wars.
The verse contains the gist of the conditions which should regulate a religious war and which were made binding on Muslims. The conditions mentioned in this verse are four in number:
(1) Such a war should truly be فی سبیل الله i.e. undertaken with the object of removing obstacles placed in the way of God and His religion. Any war that is not فی سبیل الله is not a lawful, religious war.
(2) Such war is allowed only against those who first take up arms against Muslims as the words. الذین یقاتلونکم (those who fight against you), indicate.
(3) Great care should be taken that women, children and old men of the belligerent nation who do not take actual part in the war against Islam are spared, for religious war is allowed only against those who fight against you. If, however, an old man or a woman takes actual part in the fighting, the responsibility lies on him or her and in such a case he or she loses the concession. Says the Holy Prophet: "Do not kill an old man or a child or a woman, and always try to improve things and reform matters and act kindly towards others, for Allah loves those who act kindly" (Dawud).
(4) Muslims should bring the war to an end as soon as the enemy desists from fighting, for in this case further fighting is not permissible, as the words لاتعتدوا i.e. do not transgress; surely Allah loves not the transgressors, clearly prove. What a just and noble teaching and how tersely and beautifully expressed!
a
4:76; 8:40; 9:13; 22:40; 60:9, 10.
219
This is one of the earliest verses in which permission to fight was given to Muslims, the very first verse revealed in this connection being 22:40. The verse under comment contains the gist of the conditions which should govern a religious war: (a) Such a war should be undertaken with the object of removing obstacles placed in the way of Allah, i.e. for the establishment of the freedom of religious belief and practice. (b) It is to be waged only against those who first take up arms against Muslims. (c) The Muslims should lay down arms as soon as the enemy desists from fighting.
وَٱقْتُلُوهُمْ حَيْثُ ثَقِفْتُمُوهُمْ وَأَخْرِجُوهُم مِّنْ حَيْثُ أَخْرَجُوكُمْ ۚ وَٱلْفِتْنَةُ أَشَدُّ مِنَ ٱلْقَتْلِ ۚ وَلَا تُقَٰتِلُوهُمْ عِندَ ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ حَتَّىٰ يُقَٰتِلُوكُمْ فِيهِ ۖ فَإِن قَٰتَلُوكُمْ فَٱقْتُلُوهُمْ ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ جَزَآءُ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ
عربی میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں لیکن یہ لفظ حتّٰی کے اندر مخفی ہے۔ اگر اسے خطوط میں رکھا جائے تو معنے بالکل الٹ بن جاتے ہیں اس وجہ سے خطوط میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں رکھا گیا‘ بلکہ ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
کَذٰلِکَ کا لفظی ترجمہ ’’اسی طرح‘‘ ہے لیکن اردو میں ’’یہی‘‘ کے لفظ سے ہی مضمون ٹھیک ادا ہوتا ہے۔
2:218.
This verse relates to conditions when war has actually broken out. Obviously, it enjoins Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as are the first to take up arms against them.
The words signify that Mecca being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim should be allowed to remain in it.
2:218.
Important Words:
ثقفتموھم (you met them) is derived from ثقف. They say ثقفه i.e. (1) he faced him or he met him; (2) he caught hold of him; (3) he got the better of him (Aqrab).
فتنة (persecution) is derived from فتن. They say فتن فلانا i.e. he led him astray; he tried or tested him. The expression فتن فلاناعن رأیه means, he prevented him from holding his views. The words فتن الصائغ الذھب mean, the goldsmith melted the gold in the crucible to ascertain its genuineness. فتنه means, he put him in a state of trial or persecution. Thus فتنة means: (1) trial; (2) torture and persecution; (3) divergence of views among men and the disputes and fighting that take place as a result thereof (Aqrab). See also 2:103.
Commentary:
The verse relates to conditions when a war has actually broken out. Obviously it does not apply to all disbelievers, for it only says, "kill them" and not "kill the disbelievers". The pronoun "them" clearly refers to, those who fight against you, as mentioned in the previous verse. The verse calls upon Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as take up arms against them. It does not call upon them to slay each and every disbeliever that may happen to come in their way. Indeed this verse affords a remarkable instance of the way in which the plain words of the Quran are generally distorted by the opponents of Islam.
The clause, and drive them out from where they have driven you out, refers to the time when the enemies of Islam compelled the Holy Prophet and his Companions to flee from Mecca. It enjoins Muslims to bear in mind that they have eventually to conquer Mecca which being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim would be allowed to remain in it.
The clause, persecution is worse than killing, provides an argument in support of defensive war. The disbelievers were persecuting Muslims in diverse ways with a view to turning them away from their faith and they were also creating disorder in the land. It was certainly better to put a stop to this state of affairs by fighting against the aggressors than to allow it to continue. There are circumstances when, to every right-thinking man, war becomes necessary.
The words فتنة (persecution) and قتل (killing) may be interpreted in another way also. فتنة means, "persecution or war waged against a people with a view to turning them from their faith", and قتل means, "an ordinary secular war". Now the verse points out that a war of religious persecution is worse than an ordinary war; for, firstly, worldly interests are nothing as compared with matters of faith; and secondly, wars caused by religious differences are more bitter and cruel, and seldom come to an end.
The clause, and fight them not in and near the Sacred Mosque until they fight you therein, contains a very important principle. Even after the declaration of war, there are restrictions to be observed, and Muslims should never be the first to break them. The sanctity of the holy precincts of the Ka‘bah must be safeguarded even in time of war. If, however, the other party violates its sanctity, Muslims may retaliate so that the attacking party may thereby be brought to its senses.
b
2:218.
128
128本节经文讲的是战争已经实际爆发时的一些情况。很明显, 穆斯林奉命只同首先动武反对他们的不信教的人进行战斗。
2
عربی میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں لیکن یہ لفظ حتّٰی کے اندر مخفی ہے۔ اگر اسے خطوط میں رکھا جائے تو معنے بالکل الٹ بن جاتے ہیں اس وجہ سے خطوط میں ’’نہ‘‘ کا لفظ نہیں رکھا گیا‘ بلکہ ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
3
کَذٰلِکَ کا لفظی ترجمہ ’’اسی طرح‘‘ ہے لیکن اردو میں ’’یہی‘‘ کے لفظ سے ہی مضمون ٹھیک ادا ہوتا ہے۔
a
2:218.
198
Important Words:
ثقفتموھم (you met them) is derived from ثقف. They say ثقفه i.e. (1) he faced him or he met him; (2) he caught hold of him; (3) he got the better of him (Aqrab).
فتنة (persecution) is derived from فتن. They say فتن فلانا i.e. he led him astray; he tried or tested him. The expression فتن فلاناعن رأیه means, he prevented him from holding his views. The words فتن الصائغ الذھب mean, the goldsmith melted the gold in the crucible to ascertain its genuineness. فتنه means, he put him in a state of trial or persecution. Thus فتنة means: (1) trial; (2) torture and persecution; (3) divergence of views among men and the disputes and fighting that take place as a result thereof (Aqrab). See also 2:103.
Commentary:
The verse relates to conditions when a war has actually broken out. Obviously it does not apply to all disbelievers, for it only says, "kill them" and not "kill the disbelievers". The pronoun "them" clearly refers to, those who fight against you, as mentioned in the previous verse. The verse calls upon Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as take up arms against them. It does not call upon them to slay each and every disbeliever that may happen to come in their way. Indeed this verse affords a remarkable instance of the way in which the plain words of the Quran are generally distorted by the opponents of Islam.
The clause, and drive them out from where they have driven you out, refers to the time when the enemies of Islam compelled the Holy Prophet and his Companions to flee from Mecca. It enjoins Muslims to bear in mind that they have eventually to conquer Mecca which being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim would be allowed to remain in it.
The clause, persecution is worse than killing, provides an argument in support of defensive war. The disbelievers were persecuting Muslims in diverse ways with a view to turning them away from their faith and they were also creating disorder in the land. It was certainly better to put a stop to this state of affairs by fighting against the aggressors than to allow it to continue. There are circumstances when, to every right-thinking man, war becomes necessary.
The words فتنة (persecution) and قتل (killing) may be interpreted in another way also. فتنة means, "persecution or war waged against a people with a view to turning them from their faith", and قتل means, "an ordinary secular war". Now the verse points out that a war of religious persecution is worse than an ordinary war; for, firstly, worldly interests are nothing as compared with matters of faith; and secondly, wars caused by religious differences are more bitter and cruel, and seldom come to an end.
The clause, and fight them not in and near the Sacred Mosque until they fight you therein, contains a very important principle. Even after the declaration of war, there are restrictions to be observed, and Muslims should never be the first to break them. The sanctity of the holy precincts of the Ka‘bah must be safeguarded even in time of war. If, however, the other party violates its sanctity, Muslims may retaliate so that the attacking party may thereby be brought to its senses.
b
2:218.
220
This verse relates to conditions when war has actually broken out. Obviously, it enjoins Muslims to fight against only such disbelievers as are the first to take up arms against them.
221
The words signify that Mecca being the centre and the most sacred place of Islam, no non-Muslim should be allowed to remain in it.
فَإِنِ ٱنتَهَوْا۟ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
8:40.
8:40.
8:40.
Commentary:
The verse speaks of the great clemency of Islamic teaching. Even after the disbelievers have inflicted diverse torments on Muslims, turning them out of their homes and making their lives miserable and creating chaos and disorder in the land, they are to be forgiven and treated mercifully if they desist from fighting. Nay, God even promises them His forgiveness and mercy if they so desist.
c
8:40.
a
8:40.
199
Commentary:
The verse speaks of the great clemency of Islamic teaching. Even after the disbelievers have inflicted diverse torments on Muslims, turning them out of their homes and making their lives miserable and creating chaos and disorder in the land, they are to be forgiven and treated mercifully if they desist from fighting. Nay, God even promises them His forgiveness and mercy if they so desist.
c
8:40.
وَقَٰتِلُوهُمْ حَتَّىٰ لَا تَكُونَ فِتْنَةٌ وَيَكُونَ ٱلدِّينُ لِلَّهِ ۖ فَإِنِ ٱنتَهَوْا۟ فَلَا عُدْوَٰنَ إِلَّا عَلَى ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
8:40.
本节经文还指出, 只有当对方使战争强加在他们身上时, 穆斯林才可以进行自卫战斗, 并一直打到确立宗教完全自由为止。假如安拉的指令是继续战斗到所有不信教的人接受伊斯兰教为止, 穆圣不可能同不信教的人订立了许多和平条约。对 جِهَادْ (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 的详细注释参阅867-871。
عُدْوَان (‘Udwan) 意指, (1) 敌对行动; (2) 非法行为; (3) 对非法行为的惩罚; 及 (4) 以借口或托词对付一个人 (مُفْرَدَات , Mufradat和Lane)。
这四节经文 (191-194) 体现了关于战争的下列准则: (a) 采取战争只能是为了安拉而不是为了任何自私的动机, 也不是为了民族或其他利益的扩张或增迸。 (b) 穆斯林只能为了对抗那些首先进攻他们的人而去作战。 (c) 即使敌人已经发动进攻, 他们仍应该把交战保持在限定范围之内, 而不得把它超过直接的目标。 (d) 他们只应针对正规军作战, 而不应袭击或骚扰非战斗人员。 (e) 在作战期间各种宗教的仪式和典礼都应享有安全的环境。 (f) 绝对禁止侵袭宗教场所或予以任何性质的损害, 因此甚至在它们的附近也不允许作战。 (g) 如果敌人利用礼拜场所作为进攻据点, 那么, 在这种情况下, 穆斯林可就地或在近旁进行回击。 (h) 只要对宗教自由的干扰持续下去, 战斗也就得继续下去。也可参阅8:40; 9:4-6; 22:40, 41等节。
عُدْوَان کے لفظی معنے ظلم کے ہیں۔ لیکن لَاعُدْوَانَ کے معنے محاورہ میں الزام اور گرفت کے بھی ہیں۔ کہتے ہیں۔ لَاعُدْوَانَ عَلَیَّ اَیْ لَاسَبِیْلَ عَلَیَّ مجھ پر کوئی الزام و گرفت نہیں۔ (اقرب الموارد)
8:40.
This verse also shows that Muslims are allowed to fight in self-defence only when war is inflicted upon them by the other party and to continue it till complete freedom of religion is established. The Holy Prophet could not have entered into a number of treaties of peace with disbelievers if the Divine commandment had been to continue fighting until all disbelievers had embraced Islam. For a detailed note on Jihad see {1956} - {1960}.
‘Udwan means, (1) hostility; (2) wrongful conduct; (3) punishment for wrongful conduct; and (4) approach to a person by way of justification or excuse against him (Mufradat & Lane).
These four verses (191-194) embody the following rules about war: (a) War is to be resorted to only for the sake of God and not for any selfish motive, nor for aggrandisement or the advancement of national or other interests. (b) Muslims can go to war only against those who attack them first. (c) Even after the enemy has initiated the attack, they are enjoined to keep warfare within limits and not to extend it beyond the immediate objective. (d) They are to fight against only the regular army and not to attack or molest non-combatants. (e) During the course of fighting immunity is to be afforded to all religious rites and ceremonies. (f) To attack religious places or to do any kind of harm to them is absolutely forbidden, so that no fighting is allowed even in their neighbourhood. (g) If the enemy uses a plac
8:40; See 2:191.
Important Words:
الدین (religion) has a number of meanings including (1) religion; (2) rule and government (Aqrab). See also 1:4.
عدوان (hostility) is derived from عدا. They say عداه meaning, he passed beyond it. The expression عدا علیه means, he acted wrongfully towards him or he exceeded the proper limit against him. The words عاداه mean, he treated him with enmity and hostility. Thus عدوان means: (1) hostility; (2) wrongful conduct; (3) punishment for wrongful conduct and; (4) approach or way to a person by way of justification or excuse against him (Munjid, Mufradat & Lane).
Commentary:
This verse is often quoted by the opponents of Islam in support of their allegation that the Quran inculcates the carrying-on of war against unbelievers until all traces of false religions are wiped out and the whole world embraces Islam. But such a view is clearly wrong. The word which throws light on the true significance of this verse is فتنة (persecution) which, as has been explained in the preceding verse, means religious persecution. This verse therefore enjoins Muslims to fight only till persecution for religion is over. It is on record that during the war between Hadrat ‘Ali and Mu‘awiyah, ‘Abdullah, son of ‘Umar, was once asked why he did not take part in the war when the Quran enjoined the Muslims to fight to put an end to فتنة. He replied: "We did indeed act upon this injunction of the Quran when in the time of the Holy Prophet the number of Muslims was small and a man was subjected to فتنة i.e. persecution for his religious beliefs, being either put to death outright or tortured, until at last Islam spread and the "فتنه was over" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). These words of ‘Abdullah, son of ‘Umar, leave no doubt that the word فتنة in this verse means persecution for religious beliefs and nothing else. Muslims are enjoined to fight until there is no فتنة i.e. no persecution for religious beliefs.
The words that follow, i.e. and religion is professed for Allah, would, therefore, mean that Muslims should fight till profession of a faith is not influenced by the fear of men, but that whatever religion a man follows, he should follow it only for the sake of God, and not out of the fear of men. The above interpretation is also borne out by the fact that the Holy Prophet entered into a number of treaties of peace with disbelievers, which could have no justification if the divine commandment had been to continue fighting until all embraced Islam. The object of the jihad or holy war which the Holy Prophet was bidden to undertake is clearly stated in 22:40-42, which were the first verses that gave Muslims the permission to take up arms against disbelievers and the idea has been further clarified in 2:191, 193 above. Among the numerous other verses which throw light on this subject the reader is referred to 2:195, 218, 257; 3:135; 4:91, 92; 5:3, 9, 33; 8:39, 62, 63; 9:6, 8, 10, 13; 22:39,41; 41:35; 42:49; 50:46; 60:9, 10.
The concluding clause i.e. but if they desist, then remember that no hostility is allowed except against the aggressors, further confirms the interpretation of the verse as given above. If the Quran enjoined the waging of war till Islam obtained universal acceptance, then there would be no sense whatever in the injunction that if disbelievers desisted from fighting and no longer remained aggressors, Muslims should also stop hostilities; for, as the verse puts it, fighting is not permissible "except against the aggressors".
d
8:40.
129
本节经文还指出, 只有当对方使战争强加在他们身上时, 穆斯林才可以进行自卫战斗, 并一直打到确立宗教完全自由为止。假如安拉的指令是继续战斗到所有不信教的人接受伊斯兰教为止, 穆圣不可能同不信教的人订立了许多和平条约。对 جِهَادْ (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 的详细注释参阅867-871。
130
عُدْوَان (‘Udwan) 意指, (1) 敌对行动; (2) 非法行为; (3) 对非法行为的惩罚; 及 (4) 以借口或托词对付一个人 (مُفْرَدَات , Mufradat和Lane)。
131
这四节经文 (191-194) 体现了关于战争的下列准则: (a) 采取战争只能是为了安拉而不是为了任何自私的动机, 也不是为了民族或其他利益的扩张或增迸。 (b) 穆斯林只能为了对抗那些首先进攻他们的人而去作战。 (c) 即使敌人已经发动进攻, 他们仍应该把交战保持在限定范围之内, 而不得把它超过直接的目标。 (d) 他们只应针对正规军作战, 而不应袭击或骚扰非战斗人员。 (e) 在作战期间各种宗教的仪式和典礼都应享有安全的环境。 (f) 绝对禁止侵袭宗教场所或予以任何性质的损害, 因此甚至在它们的附近也不允许作战。 (g) 如果敌人利用礼拜场所作为进攻据点, 那么, 在这种情况下, 穆斯林可就地或在近旁进行回击。 (h) 只要对宗教自由的干扰持续下去, 战斗也就得继续下去。也可参阅8:40; 9:4-6; 22:40, 41等节。
4
عُدْوَان کے لفظی معنے ظلم کے ہیں۔ لیکن لَاعُدْوَانَ کے معنے محاورہ میں الزام اور گرفت کے بھی ہیں۔ کہتے ہیں۔ لَاعُدْوَانَ عَلَیَّ اَیْ لَاسَبِیْلَ عَلَیَّ مجھ پر کوئی الزام و گرفت نہیں۔ (اقرب الموارد)
a
8:40; See 2:191.
200
Important Words:
الدین (religion) has a number of meanings including (1) religion; (2) rule and government (Aqrab). See also 1:4.
عدوان (hostility) is derived from عدا. They say عداه meaning, he passed beyond it. The expression عدا علیه means, he acted wrongfully towards him or he exceeded the proper limit against him. The words عاداه mean, he treated him with enmity and hostility. Thus عدوان means: (1) hostility; (2) wrongful conduct; (3) punishment for wrongful conduct and; (4) approach or way to a person by way of justification or excuse against him (Munjid, Mufradat & Lane).
Commentary:
This verse is often quoted by the opponents of Islam in support of their allegation that the Quran inculcates the carrying-on of war against unbelievers until all traces of false religions are wiped out and the whole world embraces Islam. But such a view is clearly wrong. The word which throws light on the true significance of this verse is فتنة (persecution) which, as has been explained in the preceding verse, means religious persecution. This verse therefore enjoins Muslims to fight only till persecution for religion is over. It is on record that during the war between Hadrat ‘Ali and Mu‘awiyah, ‘Abdullah, son of ‘Umar, was once asked why he did not take part in the war when the Quran enjoined the Muslims to fight to put an end to فتنة. He replied: "We did indeed act upon this injunction of the Quran when in the time of the Holy Prophet the number of Muslims was small and a man was subjected to فتنة i.e. persecution for his religious beliefs, being either put to death outright or tortured, until at last Islam spread and the "فتنه was over" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). These words of ‘Abdullah, son of ‘Umar, leave no doubt that the word فتنة in this verse means persecution for religious beliefs and nothing else. Muslims are enjoined to fight until there is no فتنة i.e. no persecution for religious beliefs.
The words that follow, i.e. and religion is professed for Allah, would, therefore, mean that Muslims should fight till profession of a faith is not influenced by the fear of men, but that whatever religion a man follows, he should follow it only for the sake of God, and not out of the fear of men. The above interpretation is also borne out by the fact that the Holy Prophet entered into a number of treaties of peace with disbelievers, which could have no justification if the divine commandment had been to continue fighting until all embraced Islam. The object of the jihad or holy war which the Holy Prophet was bidden to undertake is clearly stated in 22:40-42, which were the first verses that gave Muslims the permission to take up arms against disbelievers and the idea has been further clarified in 2:191, 193 above. Among the numerous other verses which throw light on this subject the reader is referred to 2:195, 218, 257; 3:135; 4:91, 92; 5:3, 9, 33; 8:39, 62, 63; 9:6, 8, 10, 13; 22:39,41; 41:35; 42:49; 50:46; 60:9, 10.
The concluding clause i.e. but if they desist, then remember that no hostility is allowed except against the aggressors, further confirms the interpretation of the verse as given above. If the Quran enjoined the waging of war till Islam obtained universal acceptance, then there would be no sense whatever in the injunction that if disbelievers desisted from fighting and no longer remained aggressors, Muslims should also stop hostilities; for, as the verse puts it, fighting is not permissible "except against the aggressors".
d
8:40.
222
This verse also shows that Muslims are allowed to fight in self-defence only when war is inflicted upon them by the other party and to continue it till complete freedom of religion is established. The Holy Prophet could not have entered into a number of treaties of peace with disbelievers if the Divine commandment had been to continue fighting until all disbelievers had embraced Islam. For a detailed note on Jihad see {1956} - {1960}.
223
‘Udwan means, (1) hostility; (2) wrongful conduct; (3) punishment for wrongful conduct; and (4) approach to a person by way of justification or excuse against him (Mufradat & Lane).
These four verses (191-194) embody the following rules about war: (a) War is to be resorted to only for the sake of God and not for any selfish motive, nor for aggrandisement or the advancement of national or other interests. (b) Muslims can go to war only against those who attack them first. (c) Even after the enemy has initiated the attack, they are enjoined to keep warfare within limits and not to extend it beyond the immediate objective. (d) They are to fight against only the regular army and not to attack or molest non-combatants. (e) During the course of fighting immunity is to be afforded to all religious rites and ceremonies. (f) To attack religious places or to do any kind of harm to them is absolutely forbidden, so that no fighting is allowed even in their neighbourhood. (g) If the enemy uses a plac
ٱلشَّهْرُ ٱلْحَرَامُ بِٱلشَّهْرِ ٱلْحَرَامِ وَٱلْحُرُمَٰتُ قِصَاصٌ ۚ فَمَنِ ٱعْتَدَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ فَٱعْتَدُوا۟ عَلَيْهِ بِمِثْلِ مَا ٱعْتَدَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ مَعَ ٱلْمُتَّقِينَ
See 2:179.
The Sacred Months are Dhul-Qa‘dah; Dhul-Hijjah; Al-Muharram and Rajab. In these months all fighting is disallowed. The commandment is intended to safeguard the sanctity of the Ka‘bah and the Sacred Months.
See {33}.
See 2:179.
Important Words:
الشھرالحرام (Sacred Month). From the earliest pre-Islamic times, four out of the twelve lunar months have been regarded as sacred (9:36) in which fighting, etc., was held to be unlawful and people travelled in perfect peace and security. They were (1) Dhul-Qa‘dah, (2) Dhul-Hijjah, (3) Al-Muharram, and (4) Rajab, the first named three months occurring consecutively and the last separately. As حج (Pilgrimage) was performed in Dhul-Hijjah, the three consecutive months served as a safe period for travelling for the purposes of Pilgrimage, both for the inward and the outward journey. The month of Rajab was generally meant for عمرة (the Lesser Pilgrimage). The system was pre-Islamic not in the sense that it had its origin in pagan Arabia but in the sense that it came in vogue along with the institution of Pilgrimage established by Abraham under the commandment of God (22:27, 28). As Islam retained the institution of حج it naturally upheld the sanctity of the Sacred Months as well. Even warring tribes desisted from fighting at the approach of a Sacred Month when all bloodshed vanished from the land (Bukhari, Qastalani, Zurqani & Taj).
The words فاعتدوا علیه (punish him for his transgression) literally mean, "transgress against him", but as one who retaliates against the transgression of a party does not really transgress but simply punishes the transgression of the aggressor, the words have been rightly translated as punish him for his transgression. This is quite in accordance with the Arabic idiom; for, as shown under 2:16, the Arabs generally repeat the very word used for expressing the wrongdoing of a party to signify the punishment thereof.
Commentary:
The verse embodies an important principle. If, in fighting, the sanctity of a Sacred Month is violated by some tribe hostile to Islam, Muslims are not to sit hand-bound and allow the aggressors to victimize them. They should retaliate; for in such retaliation lies the very safeguarding of the sanctity of a sacred thing; otherwise, the enemy would be unduly encouraged and would be all the more emboldened to commit such sacrileges.
But as fighting in a Sacred Month is a dangerous thing (2:218) and as the punishment of an act of transgression is also likely to exceed proper limits and a slight error of judgement on the part of Muslims might make them sinful in the sight of God, the latter part of the verse suitably warns them to fear God and always remain within proper bounds; for, Allah is with those who fear Him.
a
2:179.
132
禁月是 ذُوالْقَعْدَة (Dhul-Qa‘dah, 伊历十一月); ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月); مُحَرَّمْ (Muharram,一月) 和 رَجَبْ (Rajab, 七月)。在这几个月中一切战斗均不允许。这指令就在于要保卫天房和停战月份的神圣性。
133
见29D。
a
See 2:179.
201
Important Words:
الشھرالحرام (Sacred Month). From the earliest pre-Islamic times, four out of the twelve lunar months have been regarded as sacred (9:36) in which fighting, etc., was held to be unlawful and people travelled in perfect peace and security. They were (1) Dhul-Qa‘dah, (2) Dhul-Hijjah, (3) Al-Muharram, and (4) Rajab, the first named three months occurring consecutively and the last separately. As حج (Pilgrimage) was performed in Dhul-Hijjah, the three consecutive months served as a safe period for travelling for the purposes of Pilgrimage, both for the inward and the outward journey. The month of Rajab was generally meant for عمرة (the Lesser Pilgrimage). The system was pre-Islamic not in the sense that it had its origin in pagan Arabia but in the sense that it came in vogue along with the institution of Pilgrimage established by Abraham under the commandment of God (22:27, 28). As Islam retained the institution of حج it naturally upheld the sanctity of the Sacred Months as well. Even warring tribes desisted from fighting at the approach of a Sacred Month when all bloodshed vanished from the land (Bukhari, Qastalani, Zurqani & Taj).
The words فاعتدوا علیه (punish him for his transgression) literally mean, "transgress against him", but as one who retaliates against the transgression of a party does not really transgress but simply punishes the transgression of the aggressor, the words have been rightly translated as punish him for his transgression. This is quite in accordance with the Arabic idiom; for, as shown under 2:16, the Arabs generally repeat the very word used for expressing the wrongdoing of a party to signify the punishment thereof.
Commentary:
The verse embodies an important principle. If, in fighting, the sanctity of a Sacred Month is violated by some tribe hostile to Islam, Muslims are not to sit hand-bound and allow the aggressors to victimize them. They should retaliate; for in such retaliation lies the very safeguarding of the sanctity of a sacred thing; otherwise, the enemy would be unduly encouraged and would be all the more emboldened to commit such sacrileges.
But as fighting in a Sacred Month is a dangerous thing (2:218) and as the punishment of an act of transgression is also likely to exceed proper limits and a slight error of judgement on the part of Muslims might make them sinful in the sight of God, the latter part of the verse suitably warns them to fear God and always remain within proper bounds; for, Allah is with those who fear Him.
a
See 2:179.
224
The Sacred Months are Dhul-Qa‘dah; Dhul-Hijjah; Al-Muharram and Rajab. In these months all fighting is disallowed. The commandment is intended to safeguard the sanctity of the Ka‘bah and the Sacred Months.
225
See {33}.
وَأَنفِقُوا۟ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَلَا تُلْقُوا۟ بِأَيْدِيكُمْ إِلَى ٱلتَّهْلُكَةِ ۛ وَأَحْسِنُوٓا۟ ۛ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُحِبُّ ٱلْمُحْسِنِينَ
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
As for the successful prosecution of war money is required, the believers are exhorted to spend freely in the cause of Allah as any hesitancy to do so would result in national ruin.
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
Commentary:
As the successful prosecution of war required money, the Faithful are here exhorted to spend in the cause of Allah so that the war which they have been bidden to wage in the defence of their faith may be conducted with efficiency.
The clause, and cast not yourselves into ruin with your own hands, does not mean, as supposed by some ignorant people, that Muslims should spare themselves and do nothing that may endanger their lives. On the contrary, it means that if Muslims will not spend money freely to carry on the war properly, they will be casting themselves into ruins with their own hands; for in that case the enemy will continue to persecute them and will one day wipe them out of existence. This interpretation is borne out by the sayings of some of the Companions themselves (Dawud, Tirmidhi & Jarir).
The clause, and do good, surely Allah loves those who do good, may have four meanings: (1) Either it means, do not spend money yourselves only but give it to your proper brethren also so that they too may be able to take part in the war. (2) Or it means, do not be unjust or cruel to your enemies in your eagerness to bring the war to a speedy end, for Allah loves those who are good to others. Elsewhere the Quran says: Let not the enmity of a people incite you to be unjust. Be just (to all) for that is nearer righteousness, (3) Or it means, think well of your Lord, i.e. do not think that if you spend your money under God’s commandment, He will suffer you to come to ruin thereby. Or (4) it means, perform your duties well and fulfill your obligations faithfully and efficiently. The latter two meanings are supported by the saying of the Companions of the Holy Prophet also (Jarir).
b
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
a
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
202
Commentary:
As the successful prosecution of war required money, the Faithful are here exhorted to spend in the cause of Allah so that the war which they have been bidden to wage in the defence of their faith may be conducted with efficiency.
The clause, and cast not yourselves into ruin with your own hands, does not mean, as supposed by some ignorant people, that Muslims should spare themselves and do nothing that may endanger their lives. On the contrary, it means that if Muslims will not spend money freely to carry on the war properly, they will be casting themselves into ruins with their own hands; for in that case the enemy will continue to persecute them and will one day wipe them out of existence. This interpretation is borne out by the sayings of some of the Companions themselves (Dawud, Tirmidhi & Jarir).
The clause, and do good, surely Allah loves those who do good, may have four meanings: (1) Either it means, do not spend money yourselves only but give it to your proper brethren also so that they too may be able to take part in the war. (2) Or it means, do not be unjust or cruel to your enemies in your eagerness to bring the war to a speedy end, for Allah loves those who are good to others. Elsewhere the Quran says: Let not the enmity of a people incite you to be unjust. Be just (to all) for that is nearer righteousness, (3) Or it means, think well of your Lord, i.e. do not think that if you spend your money under God’s commandment, He will suffer you to come to ruin thereby. Or (4) it means, perform your duties well and fulfill your obligations faithfully and efficiently. The latter two meanings are supported by the saying of the Companions of the Holy Prophet also (Jarir).
a
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
226
As for the successful prosecution of war money is required, the believers are exhorted to spend freely in the cause of Allah as any hesitancy to do so would result in national ruin.
وَأَتِمُّوا۟ ٱلْحَجَّ وَٱلْعُمْرَةَ لِلَّهِ ۚ فَإِنْ أُحْصِرْتُمْ فَمَا ٱسْتَيْسَرَ مِنَ ٱلْهَدْىِ ۖ وَلَا تَحْلِقُوا۟ رُءُوسَكُمْ حَتَّىٰ يَبْلُغَ ٱلْهَدْىُ مَحِلَّهُۥ ۚ فَمَن كَانَ مِنكُم مَّرِيضًا أَوْ بِهِۦٓ أَذًى مِّن رَّأْسِهِۦ فَفِدْيَةٌ مِّن صِيَامٍ أَوْ صَدَقَةٍ أَوْ نُسُكٍ ۚ فَإِذَآ أَمِنتُمْ فَمَن تَمَتَّعَ بِٱلْعُمْرَةِ إِلَى ٱلْحَجِّ فَمَا ٱسْتَيْسَرَ مِنَ ٱلْهَدْىِ ۚ فَمَن لَّمْ يَجِدْ فَصِيَامُ ثَلَٰثَةِ أَيَّامٍ فِى ٱلْحَجِّ وَسَبْعَةٍ إِذَا رَجَعْتُمْ ۗ تِلْكَ عَشَرَةٌ كَامِلَةٌ ۗ ذَٰلِكَ لِمَن لَّمْ يَكُنْ أَهْلُهُۥ حَاضِرِى ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَدِيدُ ٱلْعِقَابِ
48:26.
本节经文以 حَجْ (Hajj, 朝觐) 这一论题开首, جِهَاد (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 和朝觐似乎相互有关, 两者构成了忠实和真诚的信者在安拉道上所必须经受的牺牲举动, 这是从2:178开始的一个论题。朝觐是人类精神发展的最后阶段, 其他各阶段如祈祷、斋戒和为真主的道路抗战已经得到了讨论。
عُمْرَة (‘Umrah, 小朝) 在于按上述方式穿朝圣服,环绕天房七次, 在萨法 (صَفَا, Safa) 和玛尔瓦 (مَرْوَة, Marwah) 之间奔跑, 并供奉牺牲, 可是这牺牲并不是必须做的。小朝可以在一年中的任何时候履行, حَجْ (Hajj, 大朝) 只在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 中履行。
小朝和大朝可以按两种方式结合: (a) 打算只履行小朝的朝觐者应进入 Ihram (穿朝圣服者必须遵守的约法规定),并履行它的礼仪至其终结。然后在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah) 十二月的第八天,他应再进入Ihram,履行大朝的规定礼仪。这种小朝 (副朝) 同大朝 (正朝) 相结合的方式宗教学术上称为 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘, 连朝), تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 的字面意义是 “利用一种事物”。(b) 朝觐者可以同时履行副朝和正朝。在此情况下, 他应以那样的意向进入 Ihram 并应在那仪式中继续到朝觐结束。这种正朝同副朝的相结合叫做 قِرَان (Qiran, 双朝), قِرَان (Qiran)的字面上的意义是 “把两件事物合并为一。” 在连朝和双朝中都必须供奉牺牲。在注释的本节经文中 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 这词不是按术语意义的用法, 而 قِرَان (Qiran) 也同样。
在 “应当在朝觐期间斋戒三天” 这一句中所说的斋戒与以上所说的斋戒是截然不同的。起先提到的斋戒是对那些不能理发的人们来说的, 而这斋戒是对在连朝时无力宰牲者而说的。所说的三天最好是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 11, 12和13日。其余的七天斋戒可以在他回家后完成。
此话意指允许正朝和副朝的相结合不是针对麦加的居住者而是针对外来者的。可是, 某些人已把 “圣寺” 一词扩大到包括整个圣地, 即包括麦加内及麦加周围的圣地。
حَتّٰی یَبْلُغَ الْھَدْیُ مَحِلَّہٗ اس پر بحث کی گئی ہے کہ مَحِلَّہٗ سے کیا مراد ہے۔ امام شافعیؒ اور امام مالکؒ کے نزدیک تو وہ جگہ ہے جہاں پر حاجی کو روک دیا گیا ہو۔ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ کے نزدیک حرم ہے۔ میرے نزدیک اگر بیماری کے سبب سے حاجی روکا گیا ہو تو قربانی کے حرم پہنچنے تک سر نہ منڈوائے۔ اور اگر کوئی دشمن حج میں مانع ہو جائے تو جہاں روکا جائے وہیں قربانی کرکے حلق کر دے۔
مِنْ تعلیل کے لئے ہوتا ہے جیسے مِمَّا خَطِیْئٰتِھِمْ اُغْرِقُوْا (نوح : ۲۶) یہاں بھی یہی معنے ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مناسب ہیں۔
قرآن کریم نے تینوں اقسام فدیہ کو غیر معین رکھا ہے مگر رسول کریمؐ کے ارشاد سے اس کی تعیین ہو جاتی ہے۔ چنانچہ آپؐ نے کعب بن عُجرہ کوحکم فرمایا کہ سر منڈوادیں اور چھ مسکینوں کو کھانا کھلا دیں یا ایک بکرا قربانی کر دیں یا تین دن کے روزے رکھیں۔
اِلَی الْحَجِّ : اِلٰی کے معنے کبھی مَعَ یعنی ساتھ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اس جگہ یہی معنے ہیں۔ اکثر کوفی اور بصریوں کی ایک جماعت آیت مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ میں بھی اِلٰی کے معنے مَعَ کے ہی کرتی ہے۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
48:26.
With this verse begins the subject of Hajj (Pilgrimage). Jihad and Hajj seem to be correlated and both constitute a form of sacrifice which a true and sincere believer has to undergo in the way of Allah, a subject which began with 2:178. The Pilgrimage is the last stage in the spiritual development of man, the other stages such as Prayer, Fasting and Jihad having already been discussed.
The ‘Umrah or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a stage of Ihram in the way mentioned above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between Safa and Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. The ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah.
The words, if you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or by some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah.
The ‘Umrah and the Hajj may be combined in two ways: (a) The pilgrim who intends to perform the ‘Umrah alone should enter into the state of Ihram and perform its rites and finish it. Then on the eighth day of Dhul- Hijjah he should again enter into the state of Ihram and perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing." (b) The pilgrim may perform the ‘Umrah and the Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called Qiran which literally means, "the putting together of two things." In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice. In the verse under comment the word Tamattu‘ is not used in the technical sen
Fasting is mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting is meant for those who cannot shave their heads while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The words mean that the permission to combine Hajj and ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of Haram, i.e. the sacred territory in and around Mecca.
48:26.
Commentary:
From this verse begin commandments relating to حج or the Pilgrimage. The Pilgrimage is performed in the following manner: The would-be pilgrim enters into a state of احرام (Ihram) on reaching the میقات i.e. certain prescribed places slightly varying in distance in different directions, but in all cases outside حرم (the Sacred Territory). In the state of احرامthe pilgrim is forbidden sexual intercourse, the use of scent or perfumed oil, the wearing of sewn garments, hunting and the like. The male pilgrim discards ordinary clothes, putting on white unsewn sheets and keeping the head uncovered. The female pilgrim may put on ordinary but simple clothes and should ordinarily keep her face uncovered. The pilgrim (male or female) is required to repeat the following words as often as possible: Labbaik, Allahumma labbaik, Labbaik. La sharika laka labbaik. Innal-hamda wanni‘mata laka wal mulka la sharika laka…” i.e. "My Lord! I am at Thy service. There is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone. All praise belongs to Thee and all blessings are from Thee and all authority rests in Thee. I say again, there is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone."
At Mecca the first thing the pilgrim does, preferably after having a bath, is to perform seven circuits round the Ka’bah then he briskly walks or runs between the Safa and the Marwah (see 2:159) seven times. On the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah (the month of Pilgrimage) he goes in the morning from Mecca to Mina, which is about three miles from Mecca, where he halts to perform, at their appointed time, the five daily Prayers, beginning from the midday Prayer. Next morning (i.e. the 9th) he starts from Mina and passing through, or by, Mash‘arul-Haram, which is about six miles from Mecca, he goes on to the great plain at ‘Arafat, three miles further ahead, where, before he actually enters ‘Arafat, he says the midday and the afternoon Prayers together; and when all the pilgrims have entered ‘Arafat, the Imam delivers a sermon, while the pilgrims do nothing but silently pray and stand still. Thereafter the pilgrim returns after sunset to Muzdalifah or Mash‘ar where he says the evening and the night Prayers together and spends most of his time in prayer and meditation. Next day (i.e. the 10th) after offering his morning Prayer at Mash‘arul-Haram he starts back early for Mina, where he casts pebbles (seven in number) at the three appointed pillars beginning with the Jamratul-‘Aqabah, repeating this each day that he stays at Mina. The same day, i.e. the 10th, the pilgrim offers his sacrifice (goat, sheep, ram, cow, camel, etc.), gets his head shaved, takes a bath and puts on his ordinary clothes. Thereafter he proceeds to Mecca and again performs the circuit of the Ka‘bah seven times and then returns to Mina if he should so desire. The stay at Mina may last from part of a day to three or four days known as ایام معدودات (i.e. the numbered days) with which the Hajj is completed. All this time the pilgrim should repeat, as many times as possible, the above mentioned prayer.
عمرة or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a state of احرام (Ihram) in the way described above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between the Safa and the Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah. For the literal meanings of the words Hajj and ‘Umrah see note on 2:159.
The words, If you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah. In this case the pilgrim may refrain from proceeding further and should sacrifice whatever offering is easily available, i.e. a goat, a sheep, a cow, or a camel, etc. But he should not shave his head until the offering reaches its destination, the idea being to remain in the state of Ihram until the offering reaches Mina which is the place meant for it. If, however, the offering cannot be sent to Mecca, it may be sacrificed by the pilgrim at the place where he is detained and the meat either consumed by the pilgrim himself or distributed among friends, relatives, neighbours, etc. It will be noted that the offering of a sacrifice is obligatory only when a would-be pilgrim is prevented from completing his Hajj or ‘Umrah. In ordinary circumstances when a person performs a Hajj or an ‘Umrah separately, it is only supererogatory, becoming obligatory only when the Hajj and the ‘Umrah are combined.
The clause, should make an expiation either by fasting or almsgiving or a sacrifice, relates to such people as cannot shave their heads owing to some ailment. The alternatives mentioned are meant to suit different grades of people. Fasting is meant for the poor; feeding the needy for the pilgrims of the middle class; and the offering of a sacrifice for the rich. The Quran does not fix the number of days for which one is to fast, or the number of the poor whom one is to feed or the kind of animal which one is to sacrifice. The Holy Prophet is reported to have once prescribed fasting for three days (i.e. three one-day fasts), and the feeding of six poor men and the offering of a goat as a sacrifice (Bukhari).
The words, when you are safe, mean, when the war is over, or when other obstacles are removed. In such case it is open to a person to proceed to Mecca with the intention of performing ‘Umrah and then stay on to perform Hajj in the ensuing month of Dhul-Hijjah. This is what is referred to in the words: who would avail himself of ‘Umrah together with the Hajj.
‘Umrah and Hajj may be combined in two ways: One way is for the would-be pilgrim to make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah only and enter into the state of Ihram with that intention, and then perform its rites and finish it. After that on the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah one should again enter into the state of Ihram and then perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing".
The second way is that a man should make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah and Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called قران (Qiran) which literally means, "the putting together of two things". In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice, while in the case of Hajj alone or in the case of ‘Umrah alone, the offering of the sacrifice is not obligatory. In the verse under comment the word تمتع is not used in the technical sense and covers قران also.
The fasting mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting was meant for those who cannot shave their heads, while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer a sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The clause, this is for him whose family does not reside near the Sacred Mosque, means that the permission to combine Hajj with ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of حرم i.e. the Sacred Territory in and around Mecca.
The final clause, fear Allah and know that Allah is severe in punishing, has a twofold meaning: (1) That Muslims should not think that these are mere minor details of certain outward rites and may therefore not be strictly observed; for all these things which the All-Knowing God has prescribed for the Faithful are necessary in His sight and are meant for their own good. So, whoever neglects these details not only incurs the displeasure of God, but also hinders his own spiritual progress. (2) That the performance of Hajj should not fill the heart with pride (which unfortunately is very often the case nowadays), for this would defeat the very object of Pilgrimage which is the attainment of تقوی or fear of God. In such case, the so-called pilgrim will not find himself nearer God but rather would see His punishment descending on him.
In connection with this verse, it should also be noted that besides giving a general meaning as stated above, it also refers to a specific incident in Islamic history, i.e. the Truce of Hudaibiyyah. The verse was revealed before that truce and hinted that a time was coming when Muslims would start towards Mecca with the intention of performing Pilgrimage, but they would be "kept back" from doing so by disbelievers. Later, however, God would grant them victory over the disbelievers and they would be "safe" to perform the Pilgrimage in peace. What a true picture of the apparent set-back at Hudaibiyyah and the subsequent Fall of Mecca at the hands of the Holy Prophet!
c
48:26.
134
本节经文以 حَجْ (Hajj, 朝觐) 这一论题开首, جِهَاد (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 和朝觐似乎相互有关, 两者构成了忠实和真诚的信者在安拉道上所必须经受的牺牲举动, 这是从2:178开始的一个论题。朝觐是人类精神发展的最后阶段, 其他各阶段如祈祷、斋戒和为真主的道路抗战已经得到了讨论。
135
عُمْرَة (‘Umrah, 小朝) 在于按上述方式穿朝圣服,环绕天房七次, 在萨法 (صَفَا, Safa) 和玛尔瓦 (مَرْوَة, Marwah) 之间奔跑, 并供奉牺牲, 可是这牺牲并不是必须做的。小朝可以在一年中的任何时候履行, حَجْ (Hajj, 大朝) 只在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 中履行。
136
小朝和大朝可以按两种方式结合: (a) 打算只履行小朝的朝觐者应进入 Ihram (穿朝圣服者必须遵守的约法规定),并履行它的礼仪至其终结。然后在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah) 十二月的第八天,他应再进入Ihram,履行大朝的规定礼仪。这种小朝 (副朝) 同大朝 (正朝) 相结合的方式宗教学术上称为 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘, 连朝), تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 的字面意义是 “利用一种事物”。(b) 朝觐者可以同时履行副朝和正朝。在此情况下, 他应以那样的意向进入 Ihram 并应在那仪式中继续到朝觐结束。这种正朝同副朝的相结合叫做 قِرَان (Qiran, 双朝), قِرَان (Qiran)的字面上的意义是 “把两件事物合并为一。” 在连朝和双朝中都必须供奉牺牲。在注释的本节经文中 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 这词不是按术语意义的用法, 而 قِرَان (Qiran) 也同样。
137
在 “应当在朝觐期间斋戒三天” 这一句中所说的斋戒与以上所说的斋戒是截然不同的。起先提到的斋戒是对那些不能理发的人们来说的, 而这斋戒是对在连朝时无力宰牲者而说的。所说的三天最好是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 11, 12和13日。其余的七天斋戒可以在他回家后完成。
138
此话意指允许正朝和副朝的相结合不是针对麦加的居住者而是针对外来者的。可是, 某些人已把 “圣寺” 一词扩大到包括整个圣地, 即包括麦加内及麦加周围的圣地。
1
حَتّٰی یَبْلُغَ الْھَدْیُ مَحِلَّہٗ اس پر بحث کی گئی ہے کہ مَحِلَّہٗ سے کیا مراد ہے۔ امام شافعیؒ اور امام مالکؒ کے نزدیک تو وہ جگہ ہے جہاں پر حاجی کو روک دیا گیا ہو۔ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ کے نزدیک حرم ہے۔ میرے نزدیک اگر بیماری کے سبب سے حاجی روکا گیا ہو تو قربانی کے حرم پہنچنے تک سر نہ منڈوائے۔ اور اگر کوئی دشمن حج میں مانع ہو جائے تو جہاں روکا جائے وہیں قربانی کرکے حلق کر دے۔
2
مِنْ تعلیل کے لئے ہوتا ہے جیسے مِمَّا خَطِیْئٰتِھِمْ اُغْرِقُوْا (نوح : ۲۶) یہاں بھی یہی معنے ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مناسب ہیں۔
3
قرآن کریم نے تینوں اقسام فدیہ کو غیر معین رکھا ہے مگر رسول کریمؐ کے ارشاد سے اس کی تعیین ہو جاتی ہے۔ چنانچہ آپؐ نے کعب بن عُجرہ کوحکم فرمایا کہ سر منڈوادیں اور چھ مسکینوں کو کھانا کھلا دیں یا ایک بکرا قربانی کر دیں یا تین دن کے روزے رکھیں۔
4
اِلَی الْحَجِّ : اِلٰی کے معنے کبھی مَعَ یعنی ساتھ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اس جگہ یہی معنے ہیں۔ اکثر کوفی اور بصریوں کی ایک جماعت آیت مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ میں بھی اِلٰی کے معنے مَعَ کے ہی کرتی ہے۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
a
48:26.
203
Commentary:
From this verse begin commandments relating to حج or the Pilgrimage. The Pilgrimage is performed in the following manner: The would-be pilgrim enters into a state of احرام (Ihram) on reaching the میقات i.e. certain prescribed places slightly varying in distance in different directions, but in all cases outside حرم (the Sacred Territory). In the state of احرامthe pilgrim is forbidden sexual intercourse, the use of scent or perfumed oil, the wearing of sewn garments, hunting and the like. The male pilgrim discards ordinary clothes, putting on white unsewn sheets and keeping the head uncovered. The female pilgrim may put on ordinary but simple clothes and should ordinarily keep her face uncovered. The pilgrim (male or female) is required to repeat the following words as often as possible: Labbaik, Allahumma labbaik, Labbaik. La sharika laka labbaik. Innal-hamda wanni‘mata laka wal mulka la sharika laka…” i.e. "My Lord! I am at Thy service. There is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone. All praise belongs to Thee and all blessings are from Thee and all authority rests in Thee. I say again, there is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone."
At Mecca the first thing the pilgrim does, preferably after having a bath, is to perform seven circuits round the Ka’bah then he briskly walks or runs between the Safa and the Marwah (see 2:159) seven times. On the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah (the month of Pilgrimage) he goes in the morning from Mecca to Mina, which is about three miles from Mecca, where he halts to perform, at their appointed time, the five daily Prayers, beginning from the midday Prayer. Next morning (i.e. the 9th) he starts from Mina and passing through, or by, Mash‘arul-Haram, which is about six miles from Mecca, he goes on to the great plain at ‘Arafat, three miles further ahead, where, before he actually enters ‘Arafat, he says the midday and the afternoon Prayers together; and when all the pilgrims have entered ‘Arafat, the Imam delivers a sermon, while the pilgrims do nothing but silently pray and stand still. Thereafter the pilgrim returns after sunset to Muzdalifah or Mash‘ar where he says the evening and the night Prayers together and spends most of his time in prayer and meditation. Next day (i.e. the 10th) after offering his morning Prayer at Mash‘arul-Haram he starts back early for Mina, where he casts pebbles (seven in number) at the three appointed pillars beginning with the Jamratul-‘Aqabah, repeating this each day that he stays at Mina. The same day, i.e. the 10th, the pilgrim offers his sacrifice (goat, sheep, ram, cow, camel, etc.), gets his head shaved, takes a bath and puts on his ordinary clothes. Thereafter he proceeds to Mecca and again performs the circuit of the Ka‘bah seven times and then returns to Mina if he should so desire. The stay at Mina may last from part of a day to three or four days known as ایام معدودات (i.e. the numbered days) with which the Hajj is completed. All this time the pilgrim should repeat, as many times as possible, the above mentioned prayer.
عمرة or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a state of احرام (Ihram) in the way described above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between the Safa and the Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah. For the literal meanings of the words Hajj and ‘Umrah see note on 2:159.
The words, If you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah. In this case the pilgrim may refrain from proceeding further and should sacrifice whatever offering is easily available, i.e. a goat, a sheep, a cow, or a camel, etc. But he should not shave his head until the offering reaches its destination, the idea being to remain in the state of Ihram until the offering reaches Mina which is the place meant for it. If, however, the offering cannot be sent to Mecca, it may be sacrificed by the pilgrim at the place where he is detained and the meat either consumed by the pilgrim himself or distributed among friends, relatives, neighbours, etc. It will be noted that the offering of a sacrifice is obligatory only when a would-be pilgrim is prevented from completing his Hajj or ‘Umrah. In ordinary circumstances when a person performs a Hajj or an ‘Umrah separately, it is only supererogatory, becoming obligatory only when the Hajj and the ‘Umrah are combined.
The clause, should make an expiation either by fasting or almsgiving or a sacrifice, relates to such people as cannot shave their heads owing to some ailment. The alternatives mentioned are meant to suit different grades of people. Fasting is meant for the poor; feeding the needy for the pilgrims of the middle class; and the offering of a sacrifice for the rich. The Quran does not fix the number of days for which one is to fast, or the number of the poor whom one is to feed or the kind of animal which one is to sacrifice. The Holy Prophet is reported to have once prescribed fasting for three days (i.e. three one-day fasts), and the feeding of six poor men and the offering of a goat as a sacrifice (Bukhari).
The words, when you are safe, mean, when the war is over, or when other obstacles are removed. In such case it is open to a person to proceed to Mecca with the intention of performing ‘Umrah and then stay on to perform Hajj in the ensuing month of Dhul-Hijjah. This is what is referred to in the words: who would avail himself of ‘Umrah together with the Hajj.
‘Umrah and Hajj may be combined in two ways: One way is for the would-be pilgrim to make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah only and enter into the state of Ihram with that intention, and then perform its rites and finish it. After that on the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah one should again enter into the state of Ihram and then perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing".
The second way is that a man should make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah and Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called قران (Qiran) which literally means, "the putting together of two things". In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice, while in the case of Hajj alone or in the case of ‘Umrah alone, the offering of the sacrifice is not obligatory. In the verse under comment the word تمتع is not used in the technical sense and covers قران also.
The fasting mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting was meant for those who cannot shave their heads, while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer a sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The clause, this is for him whose family does not reside near the Sacred Mosque, means that the permission to combine Hajj with ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of حرم i.e. the Sacred Territory in and around Mecca.
The final clause, fear Allah and know that Allah is severe in punishing, has a twofold meaning: (1) That Muslims should not think that these are mere minor details of certain outward rites and may therefore not be strictly observed; for all these things which the All-Knowing God has prescribed for the Faithful are necessary in His sight and are meant for their own good. So, whoever neglects these details not only incurs the displeasure of God, but also hinders his own spiritual progress. (2) That the performance of Hajj should not fill the heart with pride (which unfortunately is very often the case nowadays), for this would defeat the very object of Pilgrimage which is the attainment of تقوی or fear of God. In such case, the so-called pilgrim will not find himself nearer God but rather would see His punishment descending on him.
In connection with this verse, it should also be noted that besides giving a general meaning as stated above, it also refers to a specific incident in Islamic history, i.e. the Truce of Hudaibiyyah. The verse was revealed before that truce and hinted that a time was coming when Muslims would start towards Mecca with the intention of performing Pilgrimage, but they would be "kept back" from doing so by disbelievers. Later, however, God would grant them victory over the disbelievers and they would be "safe" to perform the Pilgrimage in peace. What a true picture of the apparent set-back at Hudaibiyyah and the subsequent Fall of Mecca at the hands of the Holy Prophet!
b
48:26.
227
With this verse begins the subject of Hajj (Pilgrimage). Jihad and Hajj seem to be correlated and both constitute a form of sacrifice which a true and sincere believer has to undergo in the way of Allah, a subject which began with 2:178. The Pilgrimage is the last stage in the spiritual development of man, the other stages such as Prayer, Fasting and Jihad having already been discussed.
228
The ‘Umrah or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a stage of Ihram in the way mentioned above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between Safa and Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. The ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah.
229
The words, if you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or by some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah.
230
The ‘Umrah and the Hajj may be combined in two ways: (a) The pilgrim who intends to perform the ‘Umrah alone should enter into the state of Ihram and perform its rites and finish it. Then on the eighth day of Dhul- Hijjah he should again enter into the state of Ihram and perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing." (b) The pilgrim may perform the ‘Umrah and the Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called Qiran which literally means, "the putting together of two things." In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice. In the verse under comment the word Tamattu‘ is not used in the technical sen
231
Fasting is mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting is meant for those who cannot shave their heads while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
232
The words mean that the permission to combine Hajj and ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of Haram, i.e. the sacred territory in and around Mecca.
ٱلْحَجُّ أَشْهُرٌ مَّعْلُومَٰتٌ ۚ فَمَن فَرَضَ فِيهِنَّ ٱلْحَجَّ فَلَا رَفَثَ وَلَا فُسُوقَ وَلَا جِدَالَ فِى ٱلْحَجِّ ۗ وَمَا تَفْعَلُوا۟ مِنْ خَيْرٍ يَعْلَمْهُ ٱللَّهُ ۗ وَتَزَوَّدُوا۟ فَإِنَّ خَيْرَ ٱلزَّادِ ٱلتَّقْوَىٰ ۚ وَٱتَّقُونِ يَٰٓأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَلْبَٰبِ
2:190; 9:36.
3:98; 22:28.
Rafath includes all foul, immodest and lewd talk as well as acts relating to sex. Fusuq signifies transgression against the laws of God and disobedience of lawful authority, whether spiritual or temporal. And Jidal means, disputes and quarrels with co-travellers, companions and neighbours.
2:190; 9:36.
3:98; 22:28.
Important Words:
رفث (foul talk) means, foul, immodest or lewd talk or speech in relation to women. It also signifies acts leading to and including coition (Mufradat & Lane). See also 2:188.
فسوق (transgression) is the same as فسق for which see note on 2:27.
جدال (quarrelling) is derived from جدل. They say جدل الحبل i.e. he twisted the rope. جدل الرجل means, his dispute or quarrel became intensified. جادله means, he disputed or quarrelled with him. Thus جدال means, dispute or quarrel, or the use of strong and hot words (Aqrab).
تزودوا (furnish yourselves) and الزاد (provision) are both derived from زاد with واو as the central root letter. They say زادالرجلi.e. the man prepared a provision for himself for a journey, etc. تزود means, he took for himself a provision. تزودمن الامیرکتابا الی عامله means, he took from the caliph a letter of introduction to his governor so that the latter might afford him his assistance as and when required. الزاد means, any provision, etc. taken when proceeding on a journey (Aqrab). The word is used of extra store meant for future use (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The clause the months of the Hajj are well known is intended to hint that, in the matter of the time of Pilgrimage, the Quran gives no new commandment. The established custom is the right one, being rightly retained by the Arabs from the days of Abraham and Ishmael. The three lunar months during which one may formally undertake the Pilgrimage and enter into the state of Ihram are Shawwal, Dhul-Qa‘dah and the first ten days of Dhul-Hijjah (Bukhari).
The clause, there is to be no foul talk, nor any transgression nor any quarrelling during the Pilgrimage, does not mean that such acts are permissible at other times but that these are necessary conditions for the completion of Pilgrimage, which would be like a soulless body if one indulged in such things while undertaking it. Another purpose underlying these injunctions is that a person should abstain from them particularly during the period of Pilgrimage so that it might become easy for him to shun these things at other times as well. The three vices selected are typical of what should be scrupulously avoided in a religious gathering like that at the Pilgrimage. رفث (rafath) stands for all foul, immodest and lewd talk as well as acts relating to sex. فسوق (fusuq) stands for transgression against the laws of God and disobedience of lawful authority, whether spiritual or temporal. And جدال (jidal) stands for disputes and quarrels with co-travellers, companions and neighbours.
The clause, And furnish yourselves with necessary provisions, does not only refer to the preparation which one makes for an ordinary journey which is necessary in its own way, but also to the preparation which one has to make for a spiritual journey. In this sense the clause would signify "provide yourselves with piety and righteousness;" and in order to emphasize the latter kind of provision, the Quran fittingly adds, and surely the best provision is righteousness. But ordinary provision is also necessary; for, if a man does not take necessary provisions with him, he will be certainly put to great inconvenience and hardship on the way and will have to beg of others for help and both these things are detrimental to the noble object underlying Pilgrimage.
a
2:190; 9:36.
b
3:98; 22:28.
139
رَفَثْ (Rafath) 包括各种下流、不正派和淫猥的谈吐以及关于一些性行为。فُسُوْق (Fusuq) 意味着违反安拉的法规和对法权当局的不服从, 不论属于精神的或世俗的。而 جِدَال (Jidal) 是指同路人、伙伴和邻居的纷争与吵架。
a
2:190; 9:36.
b
3:98; 22:28.
204
Important Words:
رفث (foul talk) means, foul, immodest or lewd talk or speech in relation to women. It also signifies acts leading to and including coition (Mufradat & Lane). See also 2:188.
فسوق (transgression) is the same as فسق for which see note on 2:27.
جدال (quarrelling) is derived from جدل. They say جدل الحبل i.e. he twisted the rope. جدل الرجل means, his dispute or quarrel became intensified. جادله means, he disputed or quarrelled with him. Thus جدال means, dispute or quarrel, or the use of strong and hot words (Aqrab).
تزودوا (furnish yourselves) and الزاد (provision) are both derived from زاد with واو as the central root letter. They say زادالرجلi.e. the man prepared a provision for himself for a journey, etc. تزود means, he took for himself a provision. تزودمن الامیرکتابا الی عامله means, he took from the caliph a letter of introduction to his governor so that the latter might afford him his assistance as and when required. الزاد means, any provision, etc. taken when proceeding on a journey (Aqrab). The word is used of extra store meant for future use (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The clause the months of the Hajj are well known is intended to hint that, in the matter of the time of Pilgrimage, the Quran gives no new commandment. The established custom is the right one, being rightly retained by the Arabs from the days of Abraham and Ishmael. The three lunar months during which one may formally undertake the Pilgrimage and enter into the state of Ihram are Shawwal, Dhul-Qa‘dah and the first ten days of Dhul-Hijjah (Bukhari).
The clause, there is to be no foul talk, nor any transgression nor any quarrelling during the Pilgrimage, does not mean that such acts are permissible at other times but that these are necessary conditions for the completion of Pilgrimage, which would be like a soulless body if one indulged in such things while undertaking it. Another purpose underlying these injunctions is that a person should abstain from them particularly during the period of Pilgrimage so that it might become easy for him to shun these things at other times as well. The three vices selected are typical of what should be scrupulously avoided in a religious gathering like that at the Pilgrimage. رفث (rafath) stands for all foul, immodest and lewd talk as well as acts relating to sex. فسوق (fusuq) stands for transgression against the laws of God and disobedience of lawful authority, whether spiritual or temporal. And جدال (jidal) stands for disputes and quarrels with co-travellers, companions and neighbours.
The clause, And furnish yourselves with necessary provisions, does not only refer to the preparation which one makes for an ordinary journey which is necessary in its own way, but also to the preparation which one has to make for a spiritual journey. In this sense the clause would signify "provide yourselves with piety and righteousness;" and in order to emphasize the latter kind of provision, the Quran fittingly adds, and surely the best provision is righteousness. But ordinary provision is also necessary; for, if a man does not take necessary provisions with him, he will be certainly put to great inconvenience and hardship on the way and will have to beg of others for help and both these things are detrimental to the noble object underlying Pilgrimage.
a
2:190; 9:36.
b
3:98; 22:28.
233
Rafath includes all foul, immodest and lewd talk as well as acts relating to sex. Fusuq signifies transgression against the laws of God and disobedience of lawful authority, whether spiritual or temporal. And Jidal means, disputes and quarrels with co-travellers, companions and neighbours.
لَيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ جُنَاحٌ أَن تَبْتَغُوا۟ فَضْلًا مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ ۚ فَإِذَآ أَفَضْتُم مِّنْ عَرَفَٰتٍ فَٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ عِندَ ٱلْمَشْعَرِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۖ وَٱذْكُرُوهُ كَمَا هَدَىٰكُمْ وَإِن كُنتُم مِّن قَبْلِهِۦ لَمِنَ ٱلضَّآلِّينَ
62:11.
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
因为使尽可能多的穆斯林可以参加朝觐, 所以 «古兰经» 准许朝觐者从事经商和贸易。那些不能随带现金的朝觐者, 可以随带商品而由此挣得钱来支付旅途中的各项费用。
阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是在麦加附近供朝觐者在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 九日的后半段时间驻留的平原或山谷。它距离麦加九英里, 而这学术上称为沃库夫 (وُقُوْف, Wuquf) 的驻留形成了朝觐的一种重要仪式。阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是一个复合词, 意指圣地或知识或认识的方法。
马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆 (مَشْعَرُالْحَرَام, Mash‘arul-Haram,) 是穆兹达利法 (مُزْدَلِفَة, Muzdalifah) 的一座小山, 位处麦加和阿腊法特之间。穆圣在这里做晚礼和夜礼而且在日出之前通宵忙于礼拜。这里专供在朝觐时默想和祈祷之用。
بعض لوگ کہتے ہیں کہ فَضْل سے مراد اس جگہ تجارت ہے اور میرے نزدیک بھی یہ درست ہے مگر فَضْل سے صرف تجارت مراد لینا ایک وسیع مضمون کو محدود کر دینا ہے۔ درحقیقت آج اسلام کو جس بہت بڑی مصیبت کا سامنا ہے وہ یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں چاروں طرف کفر غالب ہے اور مسلمان جمود اور بے ِحسی کا شکار ہیں ان کے دلوں میں یہ احساس پیدا نہیں ہوتا کہ وہ اسلام کی اشاعت کے لئے اس جنون سے کام لیں جس جنون سے قرون اولیٰ کے مسلمانوں نے کام لیا تھا اور اسلام کو تھوڑے عرصہ میں ہی تمام معلومہ دنیا میں غالب کر دیا تھا۔ پس حج کے ذکر کے ساتھ وَابْتَغُوْا مِنْ فَضْلِ اللّٰہِ فرما کر میرے نزدیک اس ام
المشعر الحرام : یہ حج کا ایک مقام ہے جو عرفات اور منیٰ کے درمیان واقع ہے۔ عرفات سے واپسی پر حاجی رات وہاں گذارتے ہیں۔
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
62:11.
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Qur’an permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those, who cannot take hard cash with them, may carry merchandise and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey.
‘Arafat is a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter part of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as Wuquf forms an important rite of the Pilgrimage. ‘Arafat is a compound word meaning, the sacred place or means of perception or knowledge.
Mash‘arul-Haram is a small hill in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and remained engaged in prayer all night before the rising of the sun. The place is specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca.
62:11.
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
Important Words:
فضل (bounty). See 2:65.
افضتم (you pour forth) is derived from افاض which is again derived from فاض. They say فاض السیل i.e. the flood-water was great in quantity and overflowed the banks. فاضت عینه means, his eye was full of tears, which began to flow down fast. افاض is both transitive and intransitive. They say افاض الماء i.e. he poured out water. افاض القوم من المکان means, the people, who were great in number, poured forth from the house and dispersed. فیاض is one whose charity flows like water (Aqrab).
عرفات (‘Arafat) is the name given to a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter portion of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is about a mile and a half in circuit with sloping sides rising nearly two hundred feet above the level of the adjacent plain. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as وقوف at this place forms the principal factor of Hajj or Pilgrimage. The word is derived from عرف meaning, he knew or recognized.
مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) is the name given to a small hillock in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and offered special prayers to God before the rising of the sun. It is thus a place specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca. The name is a compound of مشعر (from شعر) meaning, the place or means of perception or knowledge, and الحرام (from حرم) meaning, sacred.
Commentary:
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Quran permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those who cannot take hard cash with them may carry merchandise, and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey. This is what is hinted in the clause, it is no sin for you that you seek the bounty of your Lord. Similar permission is granted to those who gather for the Friday Prayers (62:11).
But trade should not interfere with the acts of worship and devotion prescribed in Pilgrimage. Says God, but when you pour forth from ‘Arafat, remember Him as He has guided you. The Holy Prophet used to pass his time in prayer and meditation at Mash‘arul-Haram and the Faithful are warned that trade or any other worldly occupation should not make them forget the real object of Pilgrimage. The word افضتم (pour forth, lit. overflow) also has a metaphorical meaning, i.e. when you return from ‘Arafat, you should not return empty-handed but should return like a vessel full to overflowing with spiritual knowledge and blessings.
The reader will note that عرفات (‘Arafat) and مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) are both attributive names which have now come to be used as proper ones. They are used to draw the attention of the pilgrim to the fact that Hajj should be a source of knowledge and spiritual realization to him and not a mere outward rite, a mere shell, with no inner soul. The word ‘Arafat also hints that it should be a means of mutual introduction and recognition for Muslims coming from different parts of the world.
c
62:11.
d
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
140
因为使尽可能多的穆斯林可以参加朝觐, 所以 «古兰经» 准许朝觐者从事经商和贸易。那些不能随带现金的朝觐者, 可以随带商品而由此挣得钱来支付旅途中的各项费用。
141
阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是在麦加附近供朝觐者在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 九日的后半段时间驻留的平原或山谷。它距离麦加九英里, 而这学术上称为沃库夫 (وُقُوْف, Wuquf) 的驻留形成了朝觐的一种重要仪式。阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是一个复合词, 意指圣地或知识或认识的方法。
142
马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆 (مَشْعَرُالْحَرَام, Mash‘arul-Haram,) 是穆兹达利法 (مُزْدَلِفَة, Muzdalifah) 的一座小山, 位处麦加和阿腊法特之间。穆圣在这里做晚礼和夜礼而且在日出之前通宵忙于礼拜。这里专供在朝觐时默想和祈祷之用。
1
بعض لوگ کہتے ہیں کہ فَضْل سے مراد اس جگہ تجارت ہے اور میرے نزدیک بھی یہ درست ہے مگر فَضْل سے صرف تجارت مراد لینا ایک وسیع مضمون کو محدود کر دینا ہے۔ درحقیقت آج اسلام کو جس بہت بڑی مصیبت کا سامنا ہے وہ یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں چاروں طرف کفر غالب ہے اور مسلمان جمود اور بے ِحسی کا شکار ہیں ان کے دلوں میں یہ احساس پیدا نہیں ہوتا کہ وہ اسلام کی اشاعت کے لئے اس جنون سے کام لیں جس جنون سے قرون اولیٰ کے مسلمانوں نے کام لیا تھا اور اسلام کو تھوڑے عرصہ میں ہی تمام معلومہ دنیا میں غالب کر دیا تھا۔ پس حج کے ذکر کے ساتھ وَابْتَغُوْا مِنْ فَضْلِ اللّٰہِ فرما کر میرے نزدیک اس ام
2
المشعر الحرام : یہ حج کا ایک مقام ہے جو عرفات اور منیٰ کے درمیان واقع ہے۔ عرفات سے واپسی پر حاجی رات وہاں گذارتے ہیں۔
a
62:11.
b
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
205
Important Words:
فضل (bounty). See 2:65.
افضتم (you pour forth) is derived from افاض which is again derived from فاض. They say فاض السیل i.e. the flood-water was great in quantity and overflowed the banks. فاضت عینه means, his eye was full of tears, which began to flow down fast. افاض is both transitive and intransitive. They say افاض الماء i.e. he poured out water. افاض القوم من المکان means, the people, who were great in number, poured forth from the house and dispersed. فیاض is one whose charity flows like water (Aqrab).
عرفات (‘Arafat) is the name given to a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter portion of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is about a mile and a half in circuit with sloping sides rising nearly two hundred feet above the level of the adjacent plain. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as وقوف at this place forms the principal factor of Hajj or Pilgrimage. The word is derived from عرف meaning, he knew or recognized.
مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) is the name given to a small hillock in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and offered special prayers to God before the rising of the sun. It is thus a place specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca. The name is a compound of مشعر (from شعر) meaning, the place or means of perception or knowledge, and الحرام (from حرم) meaning, sacred.
Commentary:
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Quran permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those who cannot take hard cash with them may carry merchandise, and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey. This is what is hinted in the clause, it is no sin for you that you seek the bounty of your Lord. Similar permission is granted to those who gather for the Friday Prayers (62:11).
But trade should not interfere with the acts of worship and devotion prescribed in Pilgrimage. Says God, but when you pour forth from ‘Arafat, remember Him as He has guided you. The Holy Prophet used to pass his time in prayer and meditation at Mash‘arul-Haram and the Faithful are warned that trade or any other worldly occupation should not make them forget the real object of Pilgrimage. The word افضتم (pour forth, lit. overflow) also has a metaphorical meaning, i.e. when you return from ‘Arafat, you should not return empty-handed but should return like a vessel full to overflowing with spiritual knowledge and blessings.
The reader will note that عرفات (‘Arafat) and مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) are both attributive names which have now come to be used as proper ones. They are used to draw the attention of the pilgrim to the fact that Hajj should be a source of knowledge and spiritual realization to him and not a mere outward rite, a mere shell, with no inner soul. The word ‘Arafat also hints that it should be a means of mutual introduction and recognition for Muslims coming from different parts of the world.
a
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
c
62:11.
234
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Qur’an permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those, who cannot take hard cash with them, may carry merchandise and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey.
235
‘Arafat is a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter part of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as Wuquf forms an important rite of the Pilgrimage. ‘Arafat is a compound word meaning, the sacred place or means of perception or knowledge.
236
Mash‘arul-Haram is a small hill in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and remained engaged in prayer all night before the rising of the sun. The place is specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca.
ثُمَّ أَفِيضُوا۟ مِنْ حَيْثُ أَفَاضَ ٱلنَّاسُ وَٱسْتَغْفِرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
如果把 ثُمَّ (thumma, 然后) 理解为 “和” 的意思, 把本节经文中所谈及的 “回来” 理解为是指从阿腊法特归来, 那么, اَلنَّاسْ (an-Nas) 就意味着 “另一些人”; 但是, 如果把它理解为 “然后” 而这里所说的 “回来” 指从马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆 (مَشْعَرُالْحَرَام, Mash‘arul-Haram) 归来, 那么, اَلنَّاسْ (an-Nas) 则表示 “所有的人”, 而这两种含意都可以阿拉伯语的语法加以证实。
伊斯兰教降临之前,古莱西人和巴努•基纳哪 (بَنُوْ كِنَانَة Banu Kinanah) 称为胡姆斯 (حُمْس, Hums) 他们不陪伴其他的朝觐者到阿腊法特,而短暂地停留在马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆等待去加入另一些从阿腊法特归来的人的行列。在本节和前一节经文中,他们被命令不要短暂地停留在马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆而跟其他人一样,继续前进到阿腊法特。在从阿腊法特回到马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆之后,朝觐者应继续前进到供奉牺牲的米纳 (مِنٰی, Mina), 在那儿Ihram仪式结束了。
لفظ ’’اور‘‘ یہاں پر ثُمَّ کا ترجمہ ہے جس کے معنے عموماً ’’پھر‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن کبھی خالی عطف کے معنے بھی دیتا ہے۔ اس جگہ یہی معنے چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
یعنی اس حکم میں اسلام نے کفار کے طریق سے الگ حکم نہیں دیا۔ بلکہ کفار کے طریق کو ابراہیمی سنت قرار دیا ہے اور اس کو قائم رکھا ہے۔ چنانچہ فرماتا ہے تم بھی وہیں سے لوٹا کرو جہاں سے کفار زمانۂ قدیم سے لوٹتے چلے آئے ہیں۔ اس سے معلوم ہوا کہ قرآن سے باہر بھی بعض باتیں پوچھنی مسلمانوں کے لئے ضروری ہیں۔ تعجب ہے کہ اس آیت میں خدا تو مسلمانوں کو حکم دیتا ہے کہ کافروں سے بھی بعض مسئلے پوچھو مگر اہل قرآن کہتے ہیں کہ محمد رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے بھی نہ پوچھو۔
If thumma is taken to mean "and," and "the return" spoken of in this verse is taken to refer to the return from ‘Arafat, then an-Nas would mean "other people;" but if it is taken to mean "then" and "the return" spoken of here is taken to refer to the return from Mash‘arul-Haram, then an-Nas would signify "all people" and both these meanings are supported by rules of the Arabic language.
Before the advent of Islam the Quraish and the Banu Kinanah known as Hums did not accompany other pilgrims to ‘Arafat, but stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram, waiting to join other people returning from ‘Arafat. In this and the preceding verse, they are bidden not to stop short at Mash‘arul-Haram but to go up to ‘Arafat and do as other people do. After returning from ‘Arafat to Mash‘arul-Haram, pilgrims should proceed to Mina where sacrifices are offered and the state of Ihram comes to an end.
Important Words:
استغفروا (ask forgiveness) is derived from غفر for which see 2:59. استغفر would thus mean, he asked God for مغفرة in all its senses, i.e. covering up of sins, forgiveness, protection against stumbling, protection against punishment of sins, etc. استغفار is not confined to verbal asking for forgiveness only, but extends to, and includes, practical change for the better on the part of him who asks for forgiveness. He should ask for pardon both by word and deed (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The word ثم (then) in the clause, then pour forth from where the people pour forth, has given rise to a divergence of opinion among commentators. If it means "then", it must needs be taken to indicate sequence or order and the clause would thus signify: "after you have returned to مشعرالحرام from عرفات (as mentioned in the preceding verse), you should return (from مشعرالحرام to منی) from where the people return". But this is obviously superfluous, as nobody has ever differed about proceeding to and returning from مشعرالحرام with the people. A difference existed only with regard to proceeding to and returning from عرفات; for, whereas the Quraish and the Kinanah, known as Hums, stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram, a place within حرم (the Sacred Territory) and did not go up to ‘Arafat which is outside حرم, other pilgrims went right up to ‘Arafat. Consequently if the commandment with regard to "pouring forth with the people" was at all needed, it was needed with regard to ‘Arafat and not with regard to Mash‘arul-Haram but in the verse under comment the Quran appears to mention it in connection with the latter. This difficulty has led some to interpret the word ثم not as "then" but simply as "and" which the idiom of the Arabic language justifies (Lane). These commentators have translated the words ثم افیضوا not as "then pour forth" but simply as "and pour forth". In this case the "pouring forth" spoken of may relate to ‘Arafat and not to Mash‘arul-Haram as the clause under comment appears to indicate. This is certainly not an incorrect interpretation so far as the rules of the Arabic language go; but another interpretation is also possible in which the primary meaning of ثم (then) is retained. This may be explained as follows. The preceding verse speaks of "pouring forth" or returning from ‘Arafat, thereby making it plain that going up to ‘Arafat is necessary. This completes the commandment with regard to the stay at and return from ‘Arafat. The verse under comment takes us further, speaking of the return from Mash‘arul-Haram and not from ‘Arafat, and thus the primary significance of ثم i.e. "then" is retained, for the obvious reason that the return from Mash‘arul-Haram comes after the return from ‘Arafat. As to the words, pour forth from where the people pour forth, it may be noted that in this case they would be taken to have been used merely to indicate that whereas the return from ‘Arafat is confined to those who adhere to the right custom and go right up to ‘Arafat, the return from Mash‘arul-Haram is general, including also the proud Hums who stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram and did not go further. This is further corroborated by the fact that whereas the Quran uses the word افضتم (you pour forth) with regard to the return from ‘Arafat, it uses the words افیضوامن حیث افاض الناس i.e. "pour forth from where the people (i.e. all people) pour forth" with regard to the return from Mash‘arul-Haram which was at that time more general and extended to all. Thus the meaning of the word الناس would also change with the change in the meaning of the word ثم. If ثم is taken to mean "and", and "the return" spoken of in this verse is taken to refer to the return from ‘Arafat, then الناس would mean "other people"; but if ثم is taken to mean "then" and "the return" spoken of here is taken to refer to the return from Mash‘arul-Haram, then الناس would signify "all people" and both these meanings are justified by the rules of the Arabic language.
In short, before the advent of Islam the Quraish and the Banu Kinanah known as Hums did not accompany other pilgrims to ‘Arafat, but stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram, waiting to join other people returning from ‘Arafat. In this and the preceding verse, they are bidden not to stop short at Mash‘arul-Haram but to go up to ‘Arafat and do as other people do. After returning from ‘Arafat to Mash‘arul-Haram, pilgrims should proceed to Mina where sacrifices are offered and the state of Ihram comes to an end. The clause, and seek forgiveness from Allah, hints that as Hajj consists of certain rites, there is the possibility of some persons not understanding the meaning and spirit of these rites. Moreover, where a number of religious acts are crowded into a short space of time, there is always the possibility of some persons missing and omitting certain things or of forgetting the prescribed order thereof. The pilgrims are, therefore, exhorted to have recourse to Istighfar, i.e. seeking God’s forgiveness as well as His protection against error and its consequences.
The word استغفار literally means "to pray for the covering up of sins and protection," which signifies forgiveness for past sins and protection against future ones. Thus, when a pilgrim offers Istighfar, he seeks not only forgiveness for what is past or protection against stumbling with regard to the observance of the rites of Pilgrimage but also protection against future stumblings.
It should also be remembered that Istighfar is not needed by ordinary people only, but holy servants of God also resort to it. The former offer Istighfar to seek protection against future sins as well as from the consequences of past errors; while the latter seek protection against human shortcomings and limitations that may hinder their progress and work. Holy men too, are human, and though they may be free from sins, they are always eager to seek divine help and assistance against human weaknesses and frailties. Nay, as they have to set an example to others and their responsibilities are also far heavier than those of other people, they resort to Istighfar more often than ordinary men.
143
如果把 ثُمَّ (thumma, 然后) 理解为 “和” 的意思, 把本节经文中所谈及的 “回来” 理解为是指从阿腊法特归来, 那么, اَلنَّاسْ (an-Nas) 就意味着 “另一些人”; 但是, 如果把它理解为 “然后” 而这里所说的 “回来” 指从马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆 (مَشْعَرُالْحَرَام, Mash‘arul-Haram) 归来, 那么, اَلنَّاسْ (an-Nas) 则表示 “所有的人”, 而这两种含意都可以阿拉伯语的语法加以证实。
144
伊斯兰教降临之前,古莱西人和巴努•基纳哪 (بَنُوْ كِنَانَة Banu Kinanah) 称为胡姆斯 (حُمْس, Hums) 他们不陪伴其他的朝觐者到阿腊法特,而短暂地停留在马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆等待去加入另一些从阿腊法特归来的人的行列。在本节和前一节经文中,他们被命令不要短暂地停留在马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆而跟其他人一样,继续前进到阿腊法特。在从阿腊法特回到马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆之后,朝觐者应继续前进到供奉牺牲的米纳 (مِنٰی, Mina), 在那儿Ihram仪式结束了。
1
لفظ ’’اور‘‘ یہاں پر ثُمَّ کا ترجمہ ہے جس کے معنے عموماً ’’پھر‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن کبھی خالی عطف کے معنے بھی دیتا ہے۔ اس جگہ یہی معنے چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
2
یعنی اس حکم میں اسلام نے کفار کے طریق سے الگ حکم نہیں دیا۔ بلکہ کفار کے طریق کو ابراہیمی سنت قرار دیا ہے اور اس کو قائم رکھا ہے۔ چنانچہ فرماتا ہے تم بھی وہیں سے لوٹا کرو جہاں سے کفار زمانۂ قدیم سے لوٹتے چلے آئے ہیں۔ اس سے معلوم ہوا کہ قرآن سے باہر بھی بعض باتیں پوچھنی مسلمانوں کے لئے ضروری ہیں۔ تعجب ہے کہ اس آیت میں خدا تو مسلمانوں کو حکم دیتا ہے کہ کافروں سے بھی بعض مسئلے پوچھو مگر اہل قرآن کہتے ہیں کہ محمد رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے بھی نہ پوچھو۔
206
Important Words:
استغفروا (ask forgiveness) is derived from غفر for which see 2:59. استغفر would thus mean, he asked God for مغفرة in all its senses, i.e. covering up of sins, forgiveness, protection against stumbling, protection against punishment of sins, etc. استغفار is not confined to verbal asking for forgiveness only, but extends to, and includes, practical change for the better on the part of him who asks for forgiveness. He should ask for pardon both by word and deed (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The word ثم (then) in the clause, then pour forth from where the people pour forth, has given rise to a divergence of opinion among commentators. If it means "then", it must needs be taken to indicate sequence or order and the clause would thus signify: "after you have returned to مشعرالحرام from عرفات (as mentioned in the preceding verse), you should return (from مشعرالحرام to منی) from where the people return". But this is obviously superfluous, as nobody has ever differed about proceeding to and returning from مشعرالحرام with the people. A difference existed only with regard to proceeding to and returning from عرفات; for, whereas the Quraish and the Kinanah, known as Hums, stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram, a place within حرم (the Sacred Territory) and did not go up to ‘Arafat which is outside حرم, other pilgrims went right up to ‘Arafat. Consequently if the commandment with regard to "pouring forth with the people" was at all needed, it was needed with regard to ‘Arafat and not with regard to Mash‘arul-Haram but in the verse under comment the Quran appears to mention it in connection with the latter. This difficulty has led some to interpret the word ثم not as "then" but simply as "and" which the idiom of the Arabic language justifies (Lane). These commentators have translated the words ثم افیضوا not as "then pour forth" but simply as "and pour forth". In this case the "pouring forth" spoken of may relate to ‘Arafat and not to Mash‘arul-Haram as the clause under comment appears to indicate. This is certainly not an incorrect interpretation so far as the rules of the Arabic language go; but another interpretation is also possible in which the primary meaning of ثم (then) is retained. This may be explained as follows. The preceding verse speaks of "pouring forth" or returning from ‘Arafat, thereby making it plain that going up to ‘Arafat is necessary. This completes the commandment with regard to the stay at and return from ‘Arafat. The verse under comment takes us further, speaking of the return from Mash‘arul-Haram and not from ‘Arafat, and thus the primary significance of ثم i.e. "then" is retained, for the obvious reason that the return from Mash‘arul-Haram comes after the return from ‘Arafat. As to the words, pour forth from where the people pour forth, it may be noted that in this case they would be taken to have been used merely to indicate that whereas the return from ‘Arafat is confined to those who adhere to the right custom and go right up to ‘Arafat, the return from Mash‘arul-Haram is general, including also the proud Hums who stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram and did not go further. This is further corroborated by the fact that whereas the Quran uses the word افضتم (you pour forth) with regard to the return from ‘Arafat, it uses the words افیضوامن حیث افاض الناس i.e. "pour forth from where the people (i.e. all people) pour forth" with regard to the return from Mash‘arul-Haram which was at that time more general and extended to all. Thus the meaning of the word الناس would also change with the change in the meaning of the word ثم. If ثم is taken to mean "and", and "the return" spoken of in this verse is taken to refer to the return from ‘Arafat, then الناس would mean "other people"; but if ثم is taken to mean "then" and "the return" spoken of here is taken to refer to the return from Mash‘arul-Haram, then الناس would signify "all people" and both these meanings are justified by the rules of the Arabic language.
In short, before the advent of Islam the Quraish and the Banu Kinanah known as Hums did not accompany other pilgrims to ‘Arafat, but stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram, waiting to join other people returning from ‘Arafat. In this and the preceding verse, they are bidden not to stop short at Mash‘arul-Haram but to go up to ‘Arafat and do as other people do. After returning from ‘Arafat to Mash‘arul-Haram, pilgrims should proceed to Mina where sacrifices are offered and the state of Ihram comes to an end. The clause, and seek forgiveness from Allah, hints that as Hajj consists of certain rites, there is the possibility of some persons not understanding the meaning and spirit of these rites. Moreover, where a number of religious acts are crowded into a short space of time, there is always the possibility of some persons missing and omitting certain things or of forgetting the prescribed order thereof. The pilgrims are, therefore, exhorted to have recourse to Istighfar, i.e. seeking God’s forgiveness as well as His protection against error and its consequences.
The word استغفار literally means "to pray for the covering up of sins and protection," which signifies forgiveness for past sins and protection against future ones. Thus, when a pilgrim offers Istighfar, he seeks not only forgiveness for what is past or protection against stumbling with regard to the observance of the rites of Pilgrimage but also protection against future stumblings.
It should also be remembered that Istighfar is not needed by ordinary people only, but holy servants of God also resort to it. The former offer Istighfar to seek protection against future sins as well as from the consequences of past errors; while the latter seek protection against human shortcomings and limitations that may hinder their progress and work. Holy men too, are human, and though they may be free from sins, they are always eager to seek divine help and assistance against human weaknesses and frailties. Nay, as they have to set an example to others and their responsibilities are also far heavier than those of other people, they resort to Istighfar more often than ordinary men.
237
If thumma is taken to mean "and," and "the return" spoken of in this verse is taken to refer to the return from ‘Arafat, then an-Nas would mean "other people;" but if it is taken to mean "then" and "the return" spoken of here is taken to refer to the return from Mash‘arul-Haram, then an-Nas would signify "all people" and both these meanings are supported by rules of the Arabic language.
238
Before the advent of Islam the Quraish and the Banu Kinanah known as Hums did not accompany other pilgrims to ‘Arafat, but stopped short at Mash‘arul-Haram, waiting to join other people returning from ‘Arafat. In this and the preceding verse, they are bidden not to stop short at Mash‘arul-Haram but to go up to ‘Arafat and do as other people do. After returning from ‘Arafat to Mash‘arul-Haram, pilgrims should proceed to Mina where sacrifices are offered and the state of Ihram comes to an end.
فَإِذَا قَضَيْتُم مَّنَٰسِكَكُمْ فَٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ كَذِكْرِكُمْ ءَابَآءَكُمْ أَوْ أَشَدَّ ذِكْرًا ۗ فَمِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ مَن يَقُولُ رَبَّنَآ ءَاتِنَا فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَمَا لَهُۥ فِى ٱلْءَاخِرَةِ مِنْ خَلَٰقٍ
2:129.
See 2:153.
4:135; 42:21.
2:129.
See 2:153.
4:135; 42:21.
Important Words:
فاذکروا (celebrate praises of) is derived from ذکر which means, (1) he talked of him by way of praising him; (2) he remembered him in his heart (Aqrab & Mufradat). See also 2:41, 153.
او (or) is a preposition, used to convey a number of meanings, the more important being: (1) or; (2) and; (3) nay; (4) unless; (5) until (Aqrab & Lane).
خلاق (share) means, an abundant share in what is good (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The clause, celebrate the praises of Allah as you celebrated the praises of your fathers, points to a practice of pagan Arabs who used to gather together at a certain place in Mina after the performance of the rites of Pilgrimage and glorify their forefathers by reciting poems in their praise. Muslims are here bidden to glorify God instead, and praise Him as they used to praise their forefathers, and, the words "even more than that" have been added to emphasize that God’s praises should transcend all, for the word او (or) also means, "nay". It is also possible that the word ك (as) in the expression کذکرکم (as you celebrated praises) has been used only to denote general similarity without reference to degree, and the word او (or) has been used in the sense of "and". In this case the verse would mean that though in the general manner of praise your celebration of God’s praises may resemble the praises with which you glorified your fathers, in degree it should excel it, being اشد (stronger, loftier and firmer).
Here is a good example of how the Quran, while retaining some old customs, improved upon and, spiritualised them to serve the ends of Islam.
The clause, when you have performed the acts of worship prescribed for you, celebrate the praises of Allah as you celebrated the praises of your fathers or even more than that, has yet another meaning. As the word ذکر also means 'remembering' and the word اب (father) includes mother as well (12:101), the clause may also signify that the rites of Pilgrimage, if performed in the right spirit, should fill the heart of man with such love for God as to make him always remember Him just as a child remembers his parents. This is why the Quran begins the word اذکروا with the conjunction ف meaning "so" or "then", hinting that the result of the performance of the rites of Pilgrimage should be that a pilgrim should ever after remember his Creator with the fondness displayed by a child for his parents. But this is only the first stage. With holier men God’s love should be even greater, as the verse hints in the words, or even more than that. Says the Holy Prophet, "The sign of true faith is that a believer’s love for God and His Apostle should be greater than his love for any other being or thing" (Bukhari).
The concluding clause, i.e. of men there are some who say, 'Our Lord, grant us (good things) in this world, and such a one shall have no share in the Hereafter, points to the fact that if the pilgrim confines himself to the celebration of the praises of his fathers and forgets his Creator, he would be like a person who spends all his efforts in the pursuit of this world, even his prayers being confined to search after worldly things. Such a person shall evidently have no claim to the good things of the Hereafter. It is also significant that in this clause the Quran does not use the word حسنة (good things) with the words فی الدنیا (in this world) thereby hinting that such men generally make no distinction between the good things of this world and the bad things thereof, their sole object being the things of this world, irrespective of whether they are good or bad.
As explained under Important Words, the word خلاق (share) occurring in the clause, such a one shall have no share in the Hereafter, really means, "an abundant share in what is good". So the verse would really mean not that such a person will get only a small share in the Hereafter but that, by remaining engrossed in the things of this world, he will deprive himself of a big share and will get no share at all. As the Quran has to condense vast subjects in a small space, it purposely uses words and constructions that take the smallest space but convey the vastest meaning.
a
2:129.
b
2:153.
c
4:135; 42:21.
a
2:129.
b
See 2:153.
c
4:135; 42:21.
207
Important Words:
فاذکروا (celebrate praises of) is derived from ذکر which means, (1) he talked of him by way of praising him; (2) he remembered him in his heart (Aqrab & Mufradat). See also 2:41, 153.
او (or) is a preposition, used to convey a number of meanings, the more important being: (1) or; (2) and; (3) nay; (4) unless; (5) until (Aqrab & Lane).
خلاق (share) means, an abundant share in what is good (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The clause, celebrate the praises of Allah as you celebrated the praises of your fathers, points to a practice of pagan Arabs who used to gather together at a certain place in Mina after the performance of the rites of Pilgrimage and glorify their forefathers by reciting poems in their praise. Muslims are here bidden to glorify God instead, and praise Him as they used to praise their forefathers, and, the words "even more than that" have been added to emphasize that God’s praises should transcend all, for the word او (or) also means, "nay". It is also possible that the word ك (as) in the expression کذکرکم (as you celebrated praises) has been used only to denote general similarity without reference to degree, and the word او (or) has been used in the sense of "and". In this case the verse would mean that though in the general manner of praise your celebration of God’s praises may resemble the praises with which you glorified your fathers, in degree it should excel it, being اشد (stronger, loftier and firmer).
Here is a good example of how the Quran, while retaining some old customs, improved upon and, spiritualised them to serve the ends of Islam.
The clause, when you have performed the acts of worship prescribed for you, celebrate the praises of Allah as you celebrated the praises of your fathers or even more than that, has yet another meaning. As the word ذکر also means 'remembering' and the word اب (father) includes mother as well (12:101), the clause may also signify that the rites of Pilgrimage, if performed in the right spirit, should fill the heart of man with such love for God as to make him always remember Him just as a child remembers his parents. This is why the Quran begins the word اذکروا with the conjunction ف meaning "so" or "then", hinting that the result of the performance of the rites of Pilgrimage should be that a pilgrim should ever after remember his Creator with the fondness displayed by a child for his parents. But this is only the first stage. With holier men God’s love should be even greater, as the verse hints in the words, or even more than that. Says the Holy Prophet, "The sign of true faith is that a believer’s love for God and His Apostle should be greater than his love for any other being or thing" (Bukhari).
The concluding clause, i.e. of men there are some who say, 'Our Lord, grant us (good things) in this world, and such a one shall have no share in the Hereafter, points to the fact that if the pilgrim confines himself to the celebration of the praises of his fathers and forgets his Creator, he would be like a person who spends all his efforts in the pursuit of this world, even his prayers being confined to search after worldly things. Such a person shall evidently have no claim to the good things of the Hereafter. It is also significant that in this clause the Quran does not use the word حسنة (good things) with the words فی الدنیا (in this world) thereby hinting that such men generally make no distinction between the good things of this world and the bad things thereof, their sole object being the things of this world, irrespective of whether they are good or bad.
As explained under Important Words, the word خلاق (share) occurring in the clause, such a one shall have no share in the Hereafter, really means, "an abundant share in what is good". So the verse would really mean not that such a person will get only a small share in the Hereafter but that, by remaining engrossed in the things of this world, he will deprive himself of a big share and will get no share at all. As the Quran has to condense vast subjects in a small space, it purposely uses words and constructions that take the smallest space but convey the vastest meaning.
b
2:129.
c
See 2:153.
d
4:135; 42:21.
وَمِنْهُم مَّن يَقُولُ رَبَّنَآ ءَاتِنَا فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا حَسَنَةً وَفِى ٱلْءَاخِرَةِ حَسَنَةً وَقِنَا عَذَابَ ٱلنَّارِ
42:21.
اَلْحَسَنَۃُ کے معنے ظفر یعنی کامیابی کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (تاج العروس) اسی طرح دل کو خوش کرنے والی نعمت کے بھی۔ (مفرداتِ راغب)
42:21.
The verse mentions that class of men whose efforts and aspirations are not confined to this world only. They seek the good things of this world and also the good things of the next. Hasanah also means, success (Taj). The prayer is very comprehensive and the Holy Prophet very often made use of it (Muslim).
42:21.
Commentary:
In this verse God mentions that class of men whose efforts and wishes are not confined to this world only. They (1) seek the good things of this world and (2) seek the good things of the next world, and (3) try to be saved from the Fire which not only signifies the fire of Hell but also everything that is painful and is a source of heart-burning. It may be noted that here, unlike the preceding verse, God uses the word حسنة (good) with the words فی الدنیا (in this world), meaning that even virtuous men may seek the things of this world but they should always be good and not bad.
The prayer mentioned in this verse is indeed very comprehensive and may be used by men of all grades in all their spiritual and temporal requirements, and the Holy Prophet is reported to have used this prayer very often (Muslim, ch. on Dhikr) with a view to teaching his Companions that if and when they choose to seek both the good things of this world and of the next, they should pray like this.
The prayer has another significance also. The good things of this world and the good things of the Hereafter spoken of in this verse may both stand for spiritual blessings, the good things of this world standing for such spiritual blessings as a righteous man gets in this world and the good things of the next world standing for those which he will get in the Hereafter. In fact, the very words used in the verse point to that signification, for the Quranic words فی الدنیاحسنة do not mean "good things of this world" but simply "good in this world". In this case النارor "the Fire" would stand not for Hell, protection against which is, in fact, included in the good things of the next world, but for such trials and hardships as one may come across in this world in the struggle for spiritual advancement or in the effort to benefit others. It was in this sense that the Holy Prophet used this prayer with regard to himself; for personally he never sought even the good things of this world, though he always sought "good in this world".
d
42:21.
3
اَلْحَسَنَۃُ کے معنے ظفر یعنی کامیابی کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (تاج العروس) اسی طرح دل کو خوش کرنے والی نعمت کے بھی۔ (مفرداتِ راغب)
a
42:21.
208
Commentary:
In this verse God mentions that class of men whose efforts and wishes are not confined to this world only. They (1) seek the good things of this world and (2) seek the good things of the next world, and (3) try to be saved from the Fire which not only signifies the fire of Hell but also everything that is painful and is a source of heart-burning. It may be noted that here, unlike the preceding verse, God uses the word حسنة (good) with the words فی الدنیا (in this world), meaning that even virtuous men may seek the things of this world but they should always be good and not bad.
The prayer mentioned in this verse is indeed very comprehensive and may be used by men of all grades in all their spiritual and temporal requirements, and the Holy Prophet is reported to have used this prayer very often (Muslim, ch. on Dhikr) with a view to teaching his Companions that if and when they choose to seek both the good things of this world and of the next, they should pray like this.
The prayer has another significance also. The good things of this world and the good things of the Hereafter spoken of in this verse may both stand for spiritual blessings, the good things of this world standing for such spiritual blessings as a righteous man gets in this world and the good things of the next world standing for those which he will get in the Hereafter. In fact, the very words used in the verse point to that signification, for the Quranic words فی الدنیاحسنة do not mean "good things of this world" but simply "good in this world". In this case النارor "the Fire" would stand not for Hell, protection against which is, in fact, included in the good things of the next world, but for such trials and hardships as one may come across in this world in the struggle for spiritual advancement or in the effort to benefit others. It was in this sense that the Holy Prophet used this prayer with regard to himself; for personally he never sought even the good things of this world, though he always sought "good in this world".
a
42:21.
239
The verse mentions that class of men whose efforts and aspirations are not confined to this world only. They seek the good things of this world and also the good things of the next. Hasanah also means, success (Taj). The prayer is very comprehensive and the Holy Prophet very often made use of it (Muslim).
أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ لَهُمْ نَصِيبٌ مِّمَّا كَسَبُوا۟ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ سَرِيعُ ٱلْحِسَابِ
حساب مصدر ہے اس کے معنے حساب لینے کے بھی ہیں اور حساب دینے کے بھی۔ اس جگہ اسی طرف اشارہ ہے کہ نیک لوگوں کو ان کے انعام ساتھ کے ساتھ بھی ملتے رہتے ہیں کیونکہ خداتعالیٰ نہیں چاہتا کہ قیامت تک ان کی جزا روکی جائے۔ جنت میں بھی انہیں انعام ملے گا مگر اس دنیا میں بھی اللہ تعالیٰ انہیں انعام دے گا گویا اٰ تِنَا فِی الدُّنْیَا حَسَنَۃً کی دعا بھی قبول ہوگی اور فِی الْاٰخِرَۃِ حَسَنَۃً کی دعا بھی قبول ہوگی۔
Important Words:
نصیب (share) is derived from نصب. They say نصبه i.e. he set it up. Therefore نصیب means, a set share or portion (Lane).
Commentary:
Such men as seek the good things of this world as well as the good things of the Hereafter (2:202) will have their reward from God according to their deserts. The clause, Allah is swift at reckoning, however, contains a warning to such men, hinting that as some of their efforts are being spent in pursuit of the things of this world, they should be careful lest any stumbling or weakness on their part should bring on them God’s displeasure. The clause also points to the important fact that God has so ordained that in nature every action is immediately followed by its consequences, inasmuch as it leaves an impression on man, and thus all actions are preserved. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that when a man commits an evil deed, a black spot is formed in his heart and if he repeats the sin, the spot grows bigger and so on (Musnad). This, indeed, is the result which quickly follows the actions of man. In fact it is a reckoning which accompanies all actions of man.
4
حساب مصدر ہے اس کے معنے حساب لینے کے بھی ہیں اور حساب دینے کے بھی۔ اس جگہ اسی طرف اشارہ ہے کہ نیک لوگوں کو ان کے انعام ساتھ کے ساتھ بھی ملتے رہتے ہیں کیونکہ خداتعالیٰ نہیں چاہتا کہ قیامت تک ان کی جزا روکی جائے۔ جنت میں بھی انہیں انعام ملے گا مگر اس دنیا میں بھی اللہ تعالیٰ انہیں انعام دے گا گویا اٰ تِنَا فِی الدُّنْیَا حَسَنَۃً کی دعا بھی قبول ہوگی اور فِی الْاٰخِرَۃِ حَسَنَۃً کی دعا بھی قبول ہوگی۔
209
Important Words:
نصیب (share) is derived from نصب. They say نصبه i.e. he set it up. Therefore نصیب means, a set share or portion (Lane).
Commentary:
Such men as seek the good things of this world as well as the good things of the Hereafter (2:202) will have their reward from God according to their deserts. The clause, Allah is swift at reckoning, however, contains a warning to such men, hinting that as some of their efforts are being spent in pursuit of the things of this world, they should be careful lest any stumbling or weakness on their part should bring on them God’s displeasure. The clause also points to the important fact that God has so ordained that in nature every action is immediately followed by its consequences, inasmuch as it leaves an impression on man, and thus all actions are preserved. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that when a man commits an evil deed, a black spot is formed in his heart and if he repeats the sin, the spot grows bigger and so on (Musnad). This, indeed, is the result which quickly follows the actions of man. In fact it is a reckoning which accompanies all actions of man.
۞ وَٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ فِىٓ أَيَّامٍ مَّعْدُودَٰتٍ ۚ فَمَن تَعَجَّلَ فِى يَوْمَيْنِ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ وَمَن تَأَخَّرَ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ ۚ لِمَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ ۗ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّكُمْ إِلَيْهِ تُحْشَرُونَ
2:153.
这固定的日子是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 11, 12和13号, 在此期间朝觐者被要求尽可能逗留在米纳, 并在赞扬安拉的情况中度过他们的时光。那些日子被称为 اَيَّامُ التَّشْرِيْق (Ayyamut-Tashriq) 即光辉和美丽的日子。
朝觐的根本目的是达到 (敬畏), 这就是 «古兰经» 在2:198节中关于朝觐的训谕开头所用的词句。由此强调, 仅仅是某些仪式的表面奉行是无意义的, 除非它们伴之以应作为人类一切行为基础的敬畏精神。
在朝觐中起着重要作用的各种不同的事物与地方在 «古兰经» 中被认为是 شَعَائِرُالله (Sha‘a’i-rullah) (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) 即安拉的迹象, 这意味着安拉计划只把它们作为象征致使它们内在的意义铭刻在朝觐者心灵上。无数的朝觐者环绕着天房巡回, 所有穆斯林在就地礼拜时, 所朝向的天房, 使他们心中想起安拉的独一和庄严。它还提醒他们关于人类的统一。在萨法和马尔瓦之间奔跑的这一举动促使朝觐者在心中想起了这充满怜悯的哈贾尔 (夏甲) 和伊司马仪 (以实玛利) 的经历, 提醒他们, 安拉是如何为忠实的信者提供支持的, 即使他们在辽阔荒原的孤苦中无所依靠。مِنٰی (Mina) 源出 اُمْنِيَّة (Umniyyah--------一个目的或欲望)--------提醒朝觐者, 他应带着会遇安拉的 “目的” 或 “欲望” 去那里。含意为神圣的象征的马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆暗示最后的阶段即在眼前。阿腊法特使他想起他已经到了实现的阶段, 而受戒使他想起复活日。朝觐者只穿两块未缝合的布, 犹如死尸的裹尸布, 一块遮蔽上身, 一块遮蔽下身; 他还依然光着头呢。这种情况使他想起, 似乎他已经死而复活。朝觐者集合在呈现着复活日景象的阿腊法特--------人们突然从他们的白色裹尸布中复活了, 并集合在他们的养主面前。奉献的牲畜令人想起伊布拉欣以他儿子伊司马仪为牺牲, 而这牺牲以象征性的语言体现了一条教训, 人类为了安拉的道路应随时准备不仅牺牲他自身, 而且牺牲他的财富、产业、甚至他的子孙。
مُزدَلفہ سے واپس لوٹنے کے بعد منٰی میں تین دن رہنے کا حکم ہے مگر اجازت ہے کہ کوئی شخص دو دن کے بعد بھی لَوٹ آئے۔ اس جگہ اسی کا ذکر ہے۔ یہ ضروری نہیں کہ اگر تین دن رہے تو پھر چوتھا دن بھی اس کو رہنا پڑے گا‘ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ صرف دو دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے اور تیسرے دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے۔
See 2:153.
These are the 11th, 12th and 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in glorifying God. They are called Ayyamut-Tashriq, i.e. the days of brightness and beauty.
The underlying object of the Pilgrimage is the attainment of Taqwa (righteousness), the very word with which the Qur’an began its commandments about Hajj in 2:198, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is meaningless unless they are accompanied by the spirit of righteousness which should underlie all actions of man.
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Qur’an as Sha‘a’irullah (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which signifies that they are intended to serve only as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance. The Ka‘bah, round which thousands of pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which all Muslims turn while offering their Prayers wherever they may happen to be, recalls to their minds Divine Unity and the Majesty of God. It also reminds them of the unity of mankind. The act of running between Safa and Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the story, full of pathos, of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for His helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness. Mina, derived from Umniyyah (an object or a desire), reminds the pilgrim that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. Mash‘arul-Haram meaning, the sacred symbol, hints that the final stage
See 2:153.
Commentary:
The glorification of God, or the celebration of His praises enjoined in the preceding verses is to be particularly observed in the appointed number of days to be spent in Mina after the Hajj is over. These are the 11th, the 12th and the 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in God’s glorification. In these days they are also required, as a symbol of the driving out of Satan, to cast pebbles daily at the three pillars so long as they stay there. These are called ایام التشریق i.e. the days of beauty and brightness.
The clause, whoso hastens to leave in two days, refers to the stay in Mina. If a pilgrim leaves Mina two days earlier or stays behind for two days more, no sin shall attach to him, provided everything he does is done with good intention, acting righteously and God-fearingly.
The verse ends with the clause, and fear Allah and know that you shall be brought together before Him, to bring home to the reader or the pilgrim that the underlying object of the Pilgrimage is تقوی, the very word with which the Quran began its commandments about Hajj in 2:197, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is nothing unless they are accompanied by تقوی or the spirit of righteousness which must underlie all actions of man.
The clause, واعلموا انکم الیه تحشرون translated above as, know that you shall all be brought together before Him, is also intended to hint that the gathering in Hajj is not meant for the performance of certain rites and ceremonies but, as it were, for meeting God. In this case, the clause would be rendered as, "know that (in Hajj) you are brought together (i.e. the purpose of your gathering is) to meet God" and you must, therefore, behave accordingly. The gathering in Hajj is truly like the حشر (gathering) on the great Day of Judgement.
Now that the description of Hajj as given in these verses has come to an end, it would be appropriate to give here a brief but collective note on the wisdom and the significance of this act of worship and devotion. The Pilgrimage is indeed a great spiritual ordinance. According to the Quran, the Ka‘bah is the first house of worship that was built for mankind (3:97). It dates not from Abraham, who simply rebuilt it, but from Adam. The Quran speaks of it as "the Ancient House" (22:30, 34). A Jewish tradition also says that Abraham built "the altar which Adam had built, which had been destroyed by the waters of the Deluge, which Noah had again builded, and which had, been destroyed in the age of divisions" (The Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan ben Uzziel translated by J. W. Ethebridge, London, 1862, p. 226). The Ka‘bah is the only altar that answers this description; there is no other place so ancient. It was the purpose of God that men from all quarters should assemble at this central house and thus be reminded of their common humanity and common relation with the Lord of the worlds. Differences which divided one nation from another were to be forgotten and all drawn closer to one another in one common bond. The Hajj provides pilgrims of different lands and diverse nationalities with an excellent opportunity to cultivate acquaintance with one another and discuss matters of common interest. This purpose has been made all the more accessible by ordering pilgrims to pass the days of Hajj, and the days following, not within the four walls of Mecca but out in the open desert at Mina, Muzdalifah and ‘Arafat and back again in Mina.
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Quran as شعائرالله(2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which shows that they are meant by God to serve as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance.
The Ka‘bah or the Baitullah (the House of God), the very first house of worship round which thousands of devout pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which they all turn while offering their Prayers wherever they be, recalls to their mind the Unity and Majesty of God upon Whom depends all creation. It also reminds one of the unity of mankind.
The act of running between the Safa and the Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the pathetic story of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for his helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness.
Mina is a name derived from the word ’umniyyah which means "an object" or "a desire". This reminds the pilgrim of the fact that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. From Mina the pilgrim proceeds to Muzdalifah which means "nearness" and reminds him that the object with which he had set out has drawn "near". The other name of Muzdalifah is Mash‘arul-Haram, meaning the sacred symbol. This also hints that the final stage is near. From Muzdalifah, the pilgrim proceeds to ‘Arafat, the root-meaning of which is "to recognize". This reminds him that he has now reached the stage of "recognition" where he has "recognized" or known the One Lord and has met Him.
Again, the place chosen for this great concourse of the Faithful is a barren waste, devoid of all vegetation, as the Quran itself states (14:38). The only things that are met with there are sand, pebbles, rocks and rugged hillocks. Such a place has been chosen to bring home to us the fact that it possesses absolutely no attraction for which one might visit it. If there is anything for which one should go there, it is God and God alone. This is why in the present verse the Quran says, "know that you are being gathered here (not for any worldly object but) to meet Him".
Ihram reminds one of the Day of Resurrection. Like the shroud of a dead body, the pilgrim is covered only with two unsewn sheets, one for the upper part of the body and the other for the lower; and he also has to remain bareheaded. This condition is to remind him that he has here, as it were, risen from the dead. The pilgrims gathered together at ‘Arafat truly present the spectacle of the Day of Resurrection—men suddenly risen from the dead in their white shrouds and assembled in the presence of their Lord.
The casting of pebbles at the three pillars at Mina—known as Dunya, Wusta and ‘Aqabah, is also an interesting representation. It reminds the pilgrim of the three stages through which man has to pass and which have been referred to in the Quran as the three stages of human life, viz. (1) the present world, or Dunya as it is called, which is symbolized by the first pillar, significantly called Jamratud-Dunya, i.e. the pillar situated near; (2) the grave or the middle stage lying between this world and the next, the pillar corresponding to which is called Jamratul-Wusta, i.e. the middle pillar; and (3) the next world (known also as عقبی ‘Uqba) which is symbolized by the third pillar, which is accordingly called Jamratul-‘Aqabah, i.e. the pillar of the distant hillock that comes after the others. The casting of pebbles at these pillars is also symbolic of Satan being pelted. Evil thoughts should be driven out of one’s mind just as God has driven away Satan from His presence.
The animals sacrificed are reminders of the great sacrifice of his son Ishmael offered by Abraham, and teach, in symbolic language, that man should ever be willing not only to sacrifice himself but also his wealth and property and even children in the way of God out of love for Him.
Pilgrims perform seven circuits round the Ka‘bah, run seven times between the Safa and the Marwah and cast seven pebbles at the pillars at Mina. The number seven being regarded by the Arabs as a symbol of perfection (Aqrab), the pilgrim is thereby reminded that in Pilgrimage, as in all other things, he should not be satisfied with half measures. He should always aim at perfection and get it. It is significant that the stages of spiritual progress which lead man to perfection and which have been detailed in 23:2-12 are also seven.
In short, the various rites of the Hajj and the objects that play a part therein are all emblematic and are replete with great and momentous lessons, but only for those who care to meditate.
a
2:153.
145
这固定的日子是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 11, 12和13号, 在此期间朝觐者被要求尽可能逗留在米纳, 并在赞扬安拉的情况中度过他们的时光。那些日子被称为 اَيَّامُ التَّشْرِيْق (Ayyamut-Tashriq) 即光辉和美丽的日子。
146
朝觐的根本目的是达到 (敬畏), 这就是 «古兰经» 在2:198节中关于朝觐的训谕开头所用的词句。由此强调, 仅仅是某些仪式的表面奉行是无意义的, 除非它们伴之以应作为人类一切行为基础的敬畏精神。
147
在朝觐中起着重要作用的各种不同的事物与地方在 «古兰经» 中被认为是 شَعَائِرُالله (Sha‘a’i-rullah) (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) 即安拉的迹象, 这意味着安拉计划只把它们作为象征致使它们内在的意义铭刻在朝觐者心灵上。无数的朝觐者环绕着天房巡回, 所有穆斯林在就地礼拜时, 所朝向的天房, 使他们心中想起安拉的独一和庄严。它还提醒他们关于人类的统一。在萨法和马尔瓦之间奔跑的这一举动促使朝觐者在心中想起了这充满怜悯的哈贾尔 (夏甲) 和伊司马仪 (以实玛利) 的经历, 提醒他们, 安拉是如何为忠实的信者提供支持的, 即使他们在辽阔荒原的孤苦中无所依靠。مِنٰی (Mina) 源出 اُمْنِيَّة (Umniyyah--------一个目的或欲望)--------提醒朝觐者, 他应带着会遇安拉的 “目的” 或 “欲望” 去那里。含意为神圣的象征的马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆暗示最后的阶段即在眼前。阿腊法特使他想起他已经到了实现的阶段, 而受戒使他想起复活日。朝觐者只穿两块未缝合的布, 犹如死尸的裹尸布, 一块遮蔽上身, 一块遮蔽下身; 他还依然光着头呢。这种情况使他想起, 似乎他已经死而复活。朝觐者集合在呈现着复活日景象的阿腊法特--------人们突然从他们的白色裹尸布中复活了, 并集合在他们的养主面前。奉献的牲畜令人想起伊布拉欣以他儿子伊司马仪为牺牲, 而这牺牲以象征性的语言体现了一条教训, 人类为了安拉的道路应随时准备不仅牺牲他自身, 而且牺牲他的财富、产业、甚至他的子孙。
1
مُزدَلفہ سے واپس لوٹنے کے بعد منٰی میں تین دن رہنے کا حکم ہے مگر اجازت ہے کہ کوئی شخص دو دن کے بعد بھی لَوٹ آئے۔ اس جگہ اسی کا ذکر ہے۔ یہ ضروری نہیں کہ اگر تین دن رہے تو پھر چوتھا دن بھی اس کو رہنا پڑے گا‘ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ صرف دو دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے اور تیسرے دن میں بھی واپس لَوٹ سکتا ہے۔
a
See 2:153.
210
Commentary:
The glorification of God, or the celebration of His praises enjoined in the preceding verses is to be particularly observed in the appointed number of days to be spent in Mina after the Hajj is over. These are the 11th, the 12th and the 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in God’s glorification. In these days they are also required, as a symbol of the driving out of Satan, to cast pebbles daily at the three pillars so long as they stay there. These are called ایام التشریق i.e. the days of beauty and brightness.
The clause, whoso hastens to leave in two days, refers to the stay in Mina. If a pilgrim leaves Mina two days earlier or stays behind for two days more, no sin shall attach to him, provided everything he does is done with good intention, acting righteously and God-fearingly.
The verse ends with the clause, and fear Allah and know that you shall be brought together before Him, to bring home to the reader or the pilgrim that the underlying object of the Pilgrimage is تقوی, the very word with which the Quran began its commandments about Hajj in 2:197, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is nothing unless they are accompanied by تقوی or the spirit of righteousness which must underlie all actions of man.
The clause, واعلموا انکم الیه تحشرون translated above as, know that you shall all be brought together before Him, is also intended to hint that the gathering in Hajj is not meant for the performance of certain rites and ceremonies but, as it were, for meeting God. In this case, the clause would be rendered as, "know that (in Hajj) you are brought together (i.e. the purpose of your gathering is) to meet God" and you must, therefore, behave accordingly. The gathering in Hajj is truly like the حشر (gathering) on the great Day of Judgement.
Now that the description of Hajj as given in these verses has come to an end, it would be appropriate to give here a brief but collective note on the wisdom and the significance of this act of worship and devotion. The Pilgrimage is indeed a great spiritual ordinance. According to the Quran, the Ka‘bah is the first house of worship that was built for mankind (3:97). It dates not from Abraham, who simply rebuilt it, but from Adam. The Quran speaks of it as "the Ancient House" (22:30, 34). A Jewish tradition also says that Abraham built "the altar which Adam had built, which had been destroyed by the waters of the Deluge, which Noah had again builded, and which had, been destroyed in the age of divisions" (The Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan ben Uzziel translated by J. W. Ethebridge, London, 1862, p. 226). The Ka‘bah is the only altar that answers this description; there is no other place so ancient. It was the purpose of God that men from all quarters should assemble at this central house and thus be reminded of their common humanity and common relation with the Lord of the worlds. Differences which divided one nation from another were to be forgotten and all drawn closer to one another in one common bond. The Hajj provides pilgrims of different lands and diverse nationalities with an excellent opportunity to cultivate acquaintance with one another and discuss matters of common interest. This purpose has been made all the more accessible by ordering pilgrims to pass the days of Hajj, and the days following, not within the four walls of Mecca but out in the open desert at Mina, Muzdalifah and ‘Arafat and back again in Mina.
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Quran as شعائرالله(2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which shows that they are meant by God to serve as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance.
The Ka‘bah or the Baitullah (the House of God), the very first house of worship round which thousands of devout pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which they all turn while offering their Prayers wherever they be, recalls to their mind the Unity and Majesty of God upon Whom depends all creation. It also reminds one of the unity of mankind.
The act of running between the Safa and the Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the pathetic story of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for his helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness.
Mina is a name derived from the word ’umniyyah which means "an object" or "a desire". This reminds the pilgrim of the fact that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. From Mina the pilgrim proceeds to Muzdalifah which means "nearness" and reminds him that the object with which he had set out has drawn "near". The other name of Muzdalifah is Mash‘arul-Haram, meaning the sacred symbol. This also hints that the final stage is near. From Muzdalifah, the pilgrim proceeds to ‘Arafat, the root-meaning of which is "to recognize". This reminds him that he has now reached the stage of "recognition" where he has "recognized" or known the One Lord and has met Him.
Again, the place chosen for this great concourse of the Faithful is a barren waste, devoid of all vegetation, as the Quran itself states (14:38). The only things that are met with there are sand, pebbles, rocks and rugged hillocks. Such a place has been chosen to bring home to us the fact that it possesses absolutely no attraction for which one might visit it. If there is anything for which one should go there, it is God and God alone. This is why in the present verse the Quran says, "know that you are being gathered here (not for any worldly object but) to meet Him".
Ihram reminds one of the Day of Resurrection. Like the shroud of a dead body, the pilgrim is covered only with two unsewn sheets, one for the upper part of the body and the other for the lower; and he also has to remain bareheaded. This condition is to remind him that he has here, as it were, risen from the dead. The pilgrims gathered together at ‘Arafat truly present the spectacle of the Day of Resurrection—men suddenly risen from the dead in their white shrouds and assembled in the presence of their Lord.
The casting of pebbles at the three pillars at Mina—known as Dunya, Wusta and ‘Aqabah, is also an interesting representation. It reminds the pilgrim of the three stages through which man has to pass and which have been referred to in the Quran as the three stages of human life, viz. (1) the present world, or Dunya as it is called, which is symbolized by the first pillar, significantly called Jamratud-Dunya, i.e. the pillar situated near; (2) the grave or the middle stage lying between this world and the next, the pillar corresponding to which is called Jamratul-Wusta, i.e. the middle pillar; and (3) the next world (known also as عقبی ‘Uqba) which is symbolized by the third pillar, which is accordingly called Jamratul-‘Aqabah, i.e. the pillar of the distant hillock that comes after the others. The casting of pebbles at these pillars is also symbolic of Satan being pelted. Evil thoughts should be driven out of one’s mind just as God has driven away Satan from His presence.
The animals sacrificed are reminders of the great sacrifice of his son Ishmael offered by Abraham, and teach, in symbolic language, that man should ever be willing not only to sacrifice himself but also his wealth and property and even children in the way of God out of love for Him.
Pilgrims perform seven circuits round the Ka‘bah, run seven times between the Safa and the Marwah and cast seven pebbles at the pillars at Mina. The number seven being regarded by the Arabs as a symbol of perfection (Aqrab), the pilgrim is thereby reminded that in Pilgrimage, as in all other things, he should not be satisfied with half measures. He should always aim at perfection and get it. It is significant that the stages of spiritual progress which lead man to perfection and which have been detailed in 23:2-12 are also seven.
In short, the various rites of the Hajj and the objects that play a part therein are all emblematic and are replete with great and momentous lessons, but only for those who care to meditate.
b
See 2:153.
240
These are the 11th, 12th and 13th day of Dhul-Hijjah during which the pilgrims are required, so far as possible, to stay at Mina and pass their time in glorifying God. They are called Ayyamut-Tashriq, i.e. the days of brightness and beauty.
241
The underlying object of the Pilgrimage is the attainment of Taqwa (righteousness), the very word with which the Qur’an began its commandments about Hajj in 2:198, thus emphasizing that mere outward observance of certain rites is meaningless unless they are accompanied by the spirit of righteousness which should underlie all actions of man.
242
The different objects and places which play an important part in Pilgrimage are spoken of in the Qur’an as Sha‘a’irullah (2:159; 5:3; 22:33) or the Signs of God, which signifies that they are intended to serve only as symbols to impress upon the minds of pilgrims their inward significance. The Ka‘bah, round which thousands of pilgrims perform the circuit and towards which all Muslims turn while offering their Prayers wherever they may happen to be, recalls to their minds Divine Unity and the Majesty of God. It also reminds them of the unity of mankind. The act of running between Safa and Marwah calls to the minds of pilgrims the story, full of pathos, of Hagar and Ishmael, reminding them how God provides for His helpless servants even in the solitude of a great wilderness. Mina, derived from Umniyyah (an object or a desire), reminds the pilgrim that he goes there with the "object" or the "desire" of meeting God. Mash‘arul-Haram meaning, the sacred symbol, hints that the final stage
وَمِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ مَن يُعْجِبُكَ قَوْلُهُۥ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَيُشْهِدُ ٱللَّهَ عَلَىٰ مَا فِى قَلْبِهِۦ وَهُوَ أَلَدُّ ٱلْخِصَامِ
63:5.
63:5.
There are persons whose eloquence and feigned love for fellow-beings would deceive the listener, but at heart they love and seek only their own interests and vehemently dispute with others for their smallest rights, supposed or real; not giving any proof of that spirit of sacrifice which is essential for real human progress.
63:5.
Important Words:
یعجبك (would please thee) is derived from عجب meaning, he wondered; he became pleased. عجبه means, it pleased him and caused him to wonder (Aqrab).
الد (most contentious) is derived from لد (ladda). They say لده meaning, he contended or quarrelled with him vehemently. So الد, which is the noun of pre-eminence from it, means, one who is a great quarreller. The plural of الد is لد––ludd (Aqrab).
الخصام (quarrellers) is the plural of خصم (quarreller). They say خاصمه i.e. he quarrelled or disputed with him. خصم and خصیمand مخاصم all give the same meaning, i.e. quarreller. The word الخصام is also used, in the infinitive sense, meaning the act of quarrelling (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
Two kinds of men have already been mentioned: (1) those who seek only the things of this world (2:201); and (2) those who seek both the good things of this world and those of the next (2:202). The present verse and those that follow mention two extreme types of these two classes. Of the former class, states the verse under comment, there are those who wax eloquent in their talk about this world, pleading for the necessity of improving the conditions of life for mankind and calling God to witness their sincerity. Their eloquence and apparent love for fellow beings would deceive the listener, but at heart they love only their own selfish interests and, would vehemently dispute with others for their smallest rights, supposed or real, displaying none of that spirit of sacrifice which is essential for real human progress. They would look to their own interests or the interests of their family or those of their community or their nation only and would not make any sacrifice for, or even do justice to, others.
The clause, he would call Allah to witness, shows that such people outwardly profess faith in God but at heart are lacking in the quality of universal brotherhood which must result from a true belief in a Universal God—"Lord of all the worlds", as the Quran puts it.
b
63:5.
a
63:5.
211
Important Words:
یعجبك (would please thee) is derived from عجب meaning, he wondered; he became pleased. عجبه means, it pleased him and caused him to wonder (Aqrab).
الد (most contentious) is derived from لد (ladda). They say لده meaning, he contended or quarrelled with him vehemently. So الد, which is the noun of pre-eminence from it, means, one who is a great quarreller. The plural of الد is لد––ludd (Aqrab).
الخصام (quarrellers) is the plural of خصم (quarreller). They say خاصمه i.e. he quarrelled or disputed with him. خصم and خصیمand مخاصم all give the same meaning, i.e. quarreller. The word الخصام is also used, in the infinitive sense, meaning the act of quarrelling (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
Two kinds of men have already been mentioned: (1) those who seek only the things of this world (2:201); and (2) those who seek both the good things of this world and those of the next (2:202). The present verse and those that follow mention two extreme types of these two classes. Of the former class, states the verse under comment, there are those who wax eloquent in their talk about this world, pleading for the necessity of improving the conditions of life for mankind and calling God to witness their sincerity. Their eloquence and apparent love for fellow beings would deceive the listener, but at heart they love only their own selfish interests and, would vehemently dispute with others for their smallest rights, supposed or real, displaying none of that spirit of sacrifice which is essential for real human progress. They would look to their own interests or the interests of their family or those of their community or their nation only and would not make any sacrifice for, or even do justice to, others.
The clause, he would call Allah to witness, shows that such people outwardly profess faith in God but at heart are lacking in the quality of universal brotherhood which must result from a true belief in a Universal God—"Lord of all the worlds", as the Quran puts it.
a
63:5.
243
There are persons whose eloquence and feigned love for fellow-beings would deceive the listener, but at heart they love and seek only their own interests and vehemently dispute with others for their smallest rights, supposed or real; not giving any proof of that spirit of sacrifice which is essential for real human progress.
وَإِذَا تَوَلَّىٰ سَعَىٰ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ لِيُفْسِدَ فِيهَا وَيُهْلِكَ ٱلْحَرْثَ وَٱلنَّسْلَ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلْفَسَادَ
حَرْث (Harth) 含意为, (1) 一片要播种的耕地或实际已种上某种作物的地; (2) 土地的收成或产品, 不管是农田作物或菜、果园地作物 (3) 收益、获得物或挣得的钱; (4) 报酬或酬金; (5) 财产; (6) 一妻或多妻, 因为妻子象耕地, 播下种子以孩子的形式出产庄稼。(Lane)
Harth means, (1) a piece of land ploughed for sowing, or actually sown with some crop; (2) crop or produce of land whether field-crop or garden-crop; (3) gain, acquisition or earning; (4) reward or recompense; (5) worldly goods; (6) wife or wives, because a wife is like tilth in which seed is sown to produce crop in the form of children (Lane).
Important Words:
تولی (he is in authority) is derived, from ولی. تولی means: (1) he turned his back, he went away from one’s presence; (2) he held command, or he was in authority; he became a والی or ruler (Aqrab & Taj).
سعی (runs about) means: (1) he walked briskly or he ran; (2) he made an effort; or he strove to obtain an object (Aqrab).
الحرث (the crops) is the noun-infinitive from حرث i.e. he ploughed or tilled the soil; he sowed seeds or planted plants in it; he acquired or earned or laboured for wealth or sustenance; he worked or laboured for the goods of the world. حرث means: (1) a tilth or a piece of land ploughed for sowing, or land actually sown with some crop; (2) land under crop; (3) crop or produce of land whether field crop or garden crop; (4) gain, acquisition or earning; (5) reward or recompense; (6) worldly goods; (7) wife or wives, because a wife is like a tilth in which seed is sown to bear crop in the form of children; (8) a much used road or a beaten track (Lane).
النسل (progeny). نسل الولد means, he begot a child. نسل الرجل means, the man had many children; the progeny of the man increased. نسل means: (1) creatures; (2) children; (3) progeny, whether of man or beast (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
This verse further develops the idea contained in the preceding one. The type of man described in the previous verse (i.e. one whose talk about the affairs of this world is very pleasing but who is selfish at heart) becomes unmasked when he happens to be in authority, or when he goes away from the presence of the people and meets his associates in private. Thus both the meanings of the word تولی as mentioned under Important Words are appropriate here: (1) While he is in the presence of those who are sincere lovers of mankind, he says pleasing things; but when he goes away from them and meets his comrades in private, he strives to create disorder on the earth. (2) Similarly, when he happens to come to power, he becomes exposed and all his talk about improving the affairs of the world vanishes like smoke, and instead of acting like a reformer, he actually becomes a source of disorder.
The clause, destroy the crops and the progeny, means that all his efforts are directed towards harming people and their property. The words حرث and نسل have a number of meanings and all are applicable here. They refer to all kinds of damage relating to person and property.
The words, Allah loves not disorder, come as a fitting reply to the clause in the preceding verse, i.e. he calls Allah to witness as to that which is in his heart. Allah’s evidence goes against him, for the man is after disorder, and Allah loves not disorder.
148
حَرْث (Harth) 含意为, (1) 一片要播种的耕地或实际已种上某种作物的地; (2) 土地的收成或产品, 不管是农田作物或菜、果园地作物 (3) 收益、获得物或挣得的钱; (4) 报酬或酬金; (5) 财产; (6) 一妻或多妻, 因为妻子象耕地, 播下种子以孩子的形式出产庄稼。(Lane)
212
Important Words:
تولی (he is in authority) is derived, from ولی. تولی means: (1) he turned his back, he went away from one’s presence; (2) he held command, or he was in authority; he became a والی or ruler (Aqrab & Taj).
سعی (runs about) means: (1) he walked briskly or he ran; (2) he made an effort; or he strove to obtain an object (Aqrab).
الحرث (the crops) is the noun-infinitive from حرث i.e. he ploughed or tilled the soil; he sowed seeds or planted plants in it; he acquired or earned or laboured for wealth or sustenance; he worked or laboured for the goods of the world. حرث means: (1) a tilth or a piece of land ploughed for sowing, or land actually sown with some crop; (2) land under crop; (3) crop or produce of land whether field crop or garden crop; (4) gain, acquisition or earning; (5) reward or recompense; (6) worldly goods; (7) wife or wives, because a wife is like a tilth in which seed is sown to bear crop in the form of children; (8) a much used road or a beaten track (Lane).
النسل (progeny). نسل الولد means, he begot a child. نسل الرجل means, the man had many children; the progeny of the man increased. نسل means: (1) creatures; (2) children; (3) progeny, whether of man or beast (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
This verse further develops the idea contained in the preceding one. The type of man described in the previous verse (i.e. one whose talk about the affairs of this world is very pleasing but who is selfish at heart) becomes unmasked when he happens to be in authority, or when he goes away from the presence of the people and meets his associates in private. Thus both the meanings of the word تولی as mentioned under Important Words are appropriate here: (1) While he is in the presence of those who are sincere lovers of mankind, he says pleasing things; but when he goes away from them and meets his comrades in private, he strives to create disorder on the earth. (2) Similarly, when he happens to come to power, he becomes exposed and all his talk about improving the affairs of the world vanishes like smoke, and instead of acting like a reformer, he actually becomes a source of disorder.
The clause, destroy the crops and the progeny, means that all his efforts are directed towards harming people and their property. The words حرث and نسل have a number of meanings and all are applicable here. They refer to all kinds of damage relating to person and property.
The words, Allah loves not disorder, come as a fitting reply to the clause in the preceding verse, i.e. he calls Allah to witness as to that which is in his heart. Allah’s evidence goes against him, for the man is after disorder, and Allah loves not disorder.
244
Harth means, (1) a piece of land ploughed for sowing, or actually sown with some crop; (2) crop or produce of land whether field-crop or garden-crop; (3) gain, acquisition or earning; (4) reward or recompense; (5) worldly goods; (6) wife or wives, because a wife is like tilth in which seed is sown to produce crop in the form of children (Lane).
وَإِذَا قِيلَ لَهُ ٱتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ أَخَذَتْهُ ٱلْعِزَّةُ بِٱلْإِثْمِ ۚ فَحَسْبُهُۥ جَهَنَّمُ ۚ وَلَبِئْسَ ٱلْمِهَادُ
اَلْمِھَادُ: اَلْمَکَانُ الْمُمَھَّدُ الْمُوَطَّـأُ (مفردات راغب) یعنی وہ مکان جسے اچھی طرح تیار کیا گیا ہو۔
All his efforts are directed towards injuring the interests of other people and furthering his own.
Lexicographers agree that Jahannam has no root in Arabic. The word may have been derived from Jahuma which means, he became frowning or contracted or ugly in the face. If that be so the letter nun in Jahannam would be something additional (Muhit). Thus Jahannam means, a place of punishment which is dark and waterless and which makes the face of its inmates ugly and contracted.
A false sense of dignity and prestige is his chief stumbling block, his vanity inciting him to further acts of sin, till it virtually encompasses him on all sides. Such a one paves his own way to Hell.
Important Words:
اخذته (incites him) is from اخذ meaning, he took, or he took hold; or he seized; or he punished etc. (Aqrab). اخذته بکذاmeans, you incited him to do that and made him stick to it (Kashshaf). اخذته العزة بالاثم may also mean, pride encompasses him with sin (Muhit); or pride seizes him owing to his sin (Fath).
العزة (pride) is derived from عز which means, he became mighty and honoured and noble. عزالشیء means, the thing became rare. العزة means, (1) might and power; (2) high position; (3) honour; (4) self-exaltation (Lane); (5) consciousness of one’s position and rank; (6) pride in bad sense; (7) vanity (Aqrab).
جھنم (Hell). Lexicographers differ as to the origin of the word جھنم but they generally agree that in Arabic it has no root except itself and is used as a proper name for the place of punishment reserved for the evildoers in the next world. It is, however, possible that the word has been derived from جھم meaning, he became frowning or contracted, or ugly in face. جھمة means, the middle or the darkest part of the night. جھام means, clouds that have no water (Lane). In this case the ن in جھنم would be something additional as in the word الندد derived from الد meaning, a quarreller (Muhit). Thus جھنم would mean, a place of punishment which is dark and waterless and makes the faces of its inmates ugly and contracted.
Commentary:
The description of the kind of man mentioned in 2:205 is continued in this verse also. When such a person comes to power and enters upon a career of disorder and destruction, he becomes deaf to advice and good counsel. Nay, if anyone makes bold to offer him a word of advice, he flares up and becomes all the more stiffened in his tendency towards mischief-making. A false sense of dignity and prestige is his chief stumbling block, his vanity inciting him to further acts of sin, till his pride virtually encompasses him on all sides. Such a one paves his own way to Hell, which is indeed a bad resting place.
The word حسب (sufficient) in the clause, Hell shall be his sufficient reward, points to the fact that as such a man is never contented in this life, and is always hungering for more wealth and more power and more dominion, so nothing in this world would suffice him. He will find satisfaction and sufficiency only in the fire of Hell. Similarly, the word مھاد (place of rest) points to the fact that the man who tramples on the rights of others in order to secure comfort for himself will find no rest in this life; his only rest will be in Hell.
2
اَلْمِھَادُ: اَلْمَکَانُ الْمُمَھَّدُ الْمُوَطَّـأُ (مفردات راغب) یعنی وہ مکان جسے اچھی طرح تیار کیا گیا ہو۔
213
Important Words:
اخذته (incites him) is from اخذ meaning, he took, or he took hold; or he seized; or he punished etc. (Aqrab). اخذته بکذاmeans, you incited him to do that and made him stick to it (Kashshaf). اخذته العزة بالاثم may also mean, pride encompasses him with sin (Muhit); or pride seizes him owing to his sin (Fath).
العزة (pride) is derived from عز which means, he became mighty and honoured and noble. عزالشیء means, the thing became rare. العزة means, (1) might and power; (2) high position; (3) honour; (4) self-exaltation (Lane); (5) consciousness of one’s position and rank; (6) pride in bad sense; (7) vanity (Aqrab).
جھنم (Hell). Lexicographers differ as to the origin of the word جھنم but they generally agree that in Arabic it has no root except itself and is used as a proper name for the place of punishment reserved for the evildoers in the next world. It is, however, possible that the word has been derived from جھم meaning, he became frowning or contracted, or ugly in face. جھمة means, the middle or the darkest part of the night. جھام means, clouds that have no water (Lane). In this case the ن in جھنم would be something additional as in the word الندد derived from الد meaning, a quarreller (Muhit). Thus جھنم would mean, a place of punishment which is dark and waterless and makes the faces of its inmates ugly and contracted.
Commentary:
The description of the kind of man mentioned in 2:205 is continued in this verse also. When such a person comes to power and enters upon a career of disorder and destruction, he becomes deaf to advice and good counsel. Nay, if anyone makes bold to offer him a word of advice, he flares up and becomes all the more stiffened in his tendency towards mischief-making. A false sense of dignity and prestige is his chief stumbling block, his vanity inciting him to further acts of sin, till his pride virtually encompasses him on all sides. Such a one paves his own way to Hell, which is indeed a bad resting place.
The word حسب (sufficient) in the clause, Hell shall be his sufficient reward, points to the fact that as such a man is never contented in this life, and is always hungering for more wealth and more power and more dominion, so nothing in this world would suffice him. He will find satisfaction and sufficiency only in the fire of Hell. Similarly, the word مھاد (place of rest) points to the fact that the man who tramples on the rights of others in order to secure comfort for himself will find no rest in this life; his only rest will be in Hell.
245
All his efforts are directed towards injuring the interests of other people and furthering his own.
246
Lexicographers agree that Jahannam has no root in Arabic. The word may have been derived from Jahuma which means, he became frowning or contracted or ugly in the face. If that be so the letter nun in Jahannam would be something additional (Muhit). Thus Jahannam means, a place of punishment which is dark and waterless and which makes the face of its inmates ugly and contracted.
247
A false sense of dignity and prestige is his chief stumbling block, his vanity inciting him to further acts of sin, till it virtually encompasses him on all sides. Such a one paves his own way to Hell.
وَمِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ مَن يَشْرِى نَفْسَهُ ٱبْتِغَآءَ مَرْضَاتِ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ رَءُوفٌۢ بِٱلْعِبَادِ
3:31; 9:117; 57:10.
قرآن کریم میں چونکہ مَنْ کا لفظ ہے جو مفرد اور جمع دونوں کے لئے استعمال ہوتا ہے اس لئے ہم نے ترجمہ میں جمع کو مدِّنظر رکھا ہے۔ خواہ ضمیر واحد کی ہو کیونکہ لفظ مَنْ کی طرف واحد کی ضمیر بھی پھر سکتی ہے۔
3:31; 9:117; 57:10.
In contrast to the people mentioned in the previous verses there is a class of men whose sole concern is to seek the pleasure of Allah as if they had given away their souls for that very purpose.
3:31; 9:117; 57:10.
Important Words:
رؤوف (Compassionate) is derived from رأف. They say رأف به meaning, he pitied him, he was compassionate to him. رأفة(compassion) is like رحمة (mercy) but signifies greater tenderness, though the latter is certainly more extensive in meaning. رؤوف means, compassionate or pitiful, and is one of the attributes of God, though like رحیم it may also be applied to human beings as in 9:128 (Lane).
Commentary:
Having completed the description of an extreme type of man belonging to the first-mentioned class of people, i.e. those who seek only the things of this world, the Quran now describes a type of man belonging to the second-mentioned class, i.e. those who seek the good things of this world as well as of the next. And of these, it singles out here the noblest type whose aim is to seek the pleasure of God alone. To such men the good things of this world mean only such spiritual blessings as are vouchsafed to righteous men in this very world or such things as lead to the attainment thereof (2:202). Their sole concern is to seek the pleasure of their Lord, as if they had given away their souls for that very purpose. They use the things of this world, not because these things please them, but because God’s law has made them the support of a life which they find pleasure in devoting to the service of God. Thus they approach the things of this world not directly but through God. To such servants of His, God is indeed most Compassionate and His compassion for them has a good leaven of tenderness in it.
a
3:31; 9:117; 57:10.
3
قرآن کریم میں چونکہ مَنْ کا لفظ ہے جو مفرد اور جمع دونوں کے لئے استعمال ہوتا ہے اس لئے ہم نے ترجمہ میں جمع کو مدِّنظر رکھا ہے۔ خواہ ضمیر واحد کی ہو کیونکہ لفظ مَنْ کی طرف واحد کی ضمیر بھی پھر سکتی ہے۔
a
3:31; 9:117; 57:10.
214
Important Words:
رؤوف (Compassionate) is derived from رأف. They say رأف به meaning, he pitied him, he was compassionate to him. رأفة(compassion) is like رحمة (mercy) but signifies greater tenderness, though the latter is certainly more extensive in meaning. رؤوف means, compassionate or pitiful, and is one of the attributes of God, though like رحیم it may also be applied to human beings as in 9:128 (Lane).
Commentary:
Having completed the description of an extreme type of man belonging to the first-mentioned class of people, i.e. those who seek only the things of this world, the Quran now describes a type of man belonging to the second-mentioned class, i.e. those who seek the good things of this world as well as of the next. And of these, it singles out here the noblest type whose aim is to seek the pleasure of God alone. To such men the good things of this world mean only such spiritual blessings as are vouchsafed to righteous men in this very world or such things as lead to the attainment thereof (2:202). Their sole concern is to seek the pleasure of their Lord, as if they had given away their souls for that very purpose. They use the things of this world, not because these things please them, but because God’s law has made them the support of a life which they find pleasure in devoting to the service of God. Thus they approach the things of this world not directly but through God. To such servants of His, God is indeed most Compassionate and His compassion for them has a good leaven of tenderness in it.
a
3:31; 9:117; 57:10.
248
In contrast to the people mentioned in the previous verses there is a class of men whose sole concern is to seek the pleasure of Allah as if they had given away their souls for that very purpose.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱدْخُلُوا۟ فِى ٱلسِّلْمِ كَآفَّةً وَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ خُطُوَٰتِ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ ۚ إِنَّهُۥ لَكُمْ عَدُوٌّ مُّبِينٌ
2:169.
See 2:169.
Important Words:
السلم (submission) is derived from سلم meaning, he was or became safe from danger or disease or defect, etc. سالمه means, he made peace with him.
اسلم means, he submitted; he embraced Islam. السلم therefore, means (1) submission; (2) peace; (3) the religion of Islam (Aqrab).
کافة (wholly) is derived from کف. They say کف الاناء meaning, he filled the vessel to the full. کف الشیء means, he collected the thing all in one place. کفه عن الامر فکف means, he turned him away from it and consequently he (the latter) kept back; he prevented or restrained him from the affair, so that, as a result thereof, he (the latter) desisted from it. Thus کف is both transitive and intransitive. کافة is the feminine from کاف and means: (1) all together with none standing aside (Aqrab); (2) wholly or completely, not partially or half-heartedly (Lane); (3) preventing the enemy and turning him back; and (4) restraining oneself, or restraining the people from sin and digression (Mufradat).
Commentary:
Having completed the description of the two classes of men along with their sub-divisions in the previous verses, the Quran now fittingly addresses believers generally and those weak in faith particularly, calling upon them to try to be reckoned among the best and noblest type of men. To attain this end they should do two things, one positive and the other negative: (1) Individually they should come into submission or, in other words, they should enter Islam, wholly. Partial submission and half-hearted obedience will not do; and collectively they should try to offer submission all together, allowing no member to stand aside and remain outside the circle. (2) They should eschew the ways of Satan, who is an open enemy of Islam and is out to cut all holy ties asunder (2:169).
Besides the above two meanings, the clause ادخلوا فی السلم کافة (come into submission wholly) is capable of yet another meaning. As کافة also means, restraining or turning one back, the clause may be translated as, "come into submission wholly, shutting all such doors through which sin may enter". This is indeed a most comprehensive advice and can save many a soul, if people only care to act up to it.
The word خطوات (footsteps) in the clause, follow not the footsteps of Satan, apparently seems to be superfluous, for, "following Satan" seems to give the same meaning as "following in his footsteps", but it is not so really. The word خطوات (footsteps) has been very wisely added to hint that those who follow Satan do so slavishly and blindly. Just as a blind man who cannot see his way, finds it convenient to place his hand on the shoulder of any passer-by and then blindly tread on in his footsteps, so do they.
b
2:169.
b
See 2:169.
215
Important Words:
السلم (submission) is derived from سلم meaning, he was or became safe from danger or disease or defect, etc. سالمه means, he made peace with him.
اسلم means, he submitted; he embraced Islam. السلم therefore, means (1) submission; (2) peace; (3) the religion of Islam (Aqrab).
کافة (wholly) is derived from کف. They say کف الاناء meaning, he filled the vessel to the full. کف الشیء means, he collected the thing all in one place. کفه عن الامر فکف means, he turned him away from it and consequently he (the latter) kept back; he prevented or restrained him from the affair, so that, as a result thereof, he (the latter) desisted from it. Thus کف is both transitive and intransitive. کافة is the feminine from کاف and means: (1) all together with none standing aside (Aqrab); (2) wholly or completely, not partially or half-heartedly (Lane); (3) preventing the enemy and turning him back; and (4) restraining oneself, or restraining the people from sin and digression (Mufradat).
Commentary:
Having completed the description of the two classes of men along with their sub-divisions in the previous verses, the Quran now fittingly addresses believers generally and those weak in faith particularly, calling upon them to try to be reckoned among the best and noblest type of men. To attain this end they should do two things, one positive and the other negative: (1) Individually they should come into submission or, in other words, they should enter Islam, wholly. Partial submission and half-hearted obedience will not do; and collectively they should try to offer submission all together, allowing no member to stand aside and remain outside the circle. (2) They should eschew the ways of Satan, who is an open enemy of Islam and is out to cut all holy ties asunder (2:169).
Besides the above two meanings, the clause ادخلوا فی السلم کافة (come into submission wholly) is capable of yet another meaning. As کافة also means, restraining or turning one back, the clause may be translated as, "come into submission wholly, shutting all such doors through which sin may enter". This is indeed a most comprehensive advice and can save many a soul, if people only care to act up to it.
The word خطوات (footsteps) in the clause, follow not the footsteps of Satan, apparently seems to be superfluous, for, "following Satan" seems to give the same meaning as "following in his footsteps", but it is not so really. The word خطوات (footsteps) has been very wisely added to hint that those who follow Satan do so slavishly and blindly. Just as a blind man who cannot see his way, finds it convenient to place his hand on the shoulder of any passer-by and then blindly tread on in his footsteps, so do they.
b
See 2:169.
249
Kaffah means, (1) all together; (2) wholly or completely; (3) repulsing the enemy and (4) restraining oneself or others from sin and digression (Mufradat).
فَإِن زَلَلْتُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَتْكُمُ ٱلْبَيِّنَٰتُ فَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَزِيزٌ حَكِيمٌ
Commentary:
The preceding verse called upon believers, particularly those weak in faith, to try to become perfect Muslims, and pointed out to them the means by which they could become so. The present verse makes it clear that if, even after this warning and after God’s clear Signs had come to them, they should slip and digress from the true path, they would find God "Mighty and Wise", hinting that in that case they would rightly deserve punishment by the Wise God Who possesses the power to punish.
The word "Wise" also hints that erring ones should not despair; for, God being Wise, He has kept the way open for their return to the right faith. In fact, the liability of man to err is not without purpose. In His eternal wisdom, God has made man a free agent who is liable to err, so that his error might serve as an incentive for him to rise again and make a redoubled effort towards the ideal.
216
Commentary:
The preceding verse called upon believers, particularly those weak in faith, to try to become perfect Muslims, and pointed out to them the means by which they could become so. The present verse makes it clear that if, even after this warning and after God’s clear Signs had come to them, they should slip and digress from the true path, they would find God "Mighty and Wise", hinting that in that case they would rightly deserve punishment by the Wise God Who possesses the power to punish.
The word "Wise" also hints that erring ones should not despair; for, God being Wise, He has kept the way open for their return to the right faith. In fact, the liability of man to err is not without purpose. In His eternal wisdom, God has made man a free agent who is liable to err, so that his error might serve as an incentive for him to rise again and make a redoubled effort towards the ideal.
هَلْ يَنظُرُونَ إِلَّآ أَن يَأْتِيَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ فِى ظُلَلٍ مِّنَ ٱلْغَمَامِ وَٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ وَقُضِىَ ٱلْأَمْرُ ۚ وَإِلَى ٱللَّهِ تُرْجَعُ ٱلْأُمُورُ
6:159; 16:34; 89:23.
اَلْغَمَامْ (al-Ghamam) 这词在 «古兰经» 上一直用来既表示仁慈 (7:161) 也表示惩罚 (25:26)。
这里指的是白德尔 (بَدْر, Badr) 战役, 那时安拉降下恩准给这些信者的云和雨 (布哈理) 中来帮助他们 (25:26), 并且还降下激起信徒们勇气而却使不信者的心中充满恐惧 (8:13) 的天使 (8:10)。据记载, 有些不信者在那天确实见到了这些天使 (زُرْقَانِی, Zurqani)。
短语 “安拉的降临” 还用在 «古兰经» 其它地方, 表示安拉的惩罚 (16:27; 59:3)。
6:159; 16:34; 89:23.
The phrase, "coming of God," is used by the Qur’an elsewhere also (16:27; 59:3) and signifies God’s punishment.
The word al-Ghamam has been used by the Qur’an to express both mercy (7:161) and punishment (25:26).
The reference is to the Battle of Badr, when God helped the believers by sending down clouds and rain (Bukhari), as was promised to them (25:26), and also sent down angels (8:10) who inspired the believers with courage and filled the hearts of the disbelievers with fear (8:13). Some of the disbelievers are reported to have actually seen the angels on that day (Zurqani).
6:159; 16:34; 89:23.
Important Words:
یاتیھم الله (Allah should come to them) is a metaphorical expression, meaning, Allah should come to them with His punishment, i.e. Allah should punish them. The metaphor ایتان الله i.e. coming of God, is used by the Quran elsewhere also (16:27; 59:3). In contrast to this, the Quran uses the metaphor توب الله i.e. turning of God, to express His turning with mercy (2:38; 9:117.) Similarly, ایتان الملئکة i.e. the coming of the angels, indicates their coming with punishment.
ظلل (coverings) is the plural of ظلة (zullah) which is derived from ظل and اظل the latter word meaning, he or it afforded or cast a shadow. But whereas ظل (zill) the plural of which is ظلال or اظلال means, shadow, ظلة whose plural is ظلل, means, a covering or a shade, i.e. a thing that casts or gives a shade or a shadow (Aqrab). The word ظلة or ظلل is generally used in connection with punishment (Mufradat).
الغمام (clouds) for which see 2:58. The word has been used by the Quran both in connection with mercy (7:161) and punishment (25:26).
Commentary:
The form of speech has been changed here from the second to the third person. The verse has apparently been addressed to either disbelievers or to hypocrites and the weak in faith. If it be taken to refer to disbelievers, as the change of form in the address indicates, it would mean that by desisting from belief they are, as it were, waiting for the punishment of God, and the verse incidentally hints that appointed punishment would come to them through raining clouds. The reference is to the Battle of Badr, when God helped believers by sending down clouds and rain (Bukhari), as was promised (25:26), and also sent down angels (8:10) who inspired the believers with courage and filled the hearts of the disbelievers with fear (8:13). Some of the disbelievers are reported to have actually seen the angels on that day (Zurqani). The matter was then "decided"; for, on that memorable day, all the chief leaders of the Quraish were killed, the Muslims obtaining a decisive victory which broke the power of the enemy. The coming of clouds refers to the rainfall which on the battlefield of Badr proved a blessing for the Muslims. It made the sand firm for them, while the land on the side of the enemy, being clayey, became slippery.
If, however, the verse be taken to refer to the hypocrites or the weak in faith, as the preceding two verses would suggest, then the clause, that Allah should come to them in the coverings of the clouds, would mean that if they did not mend their ways, God would have to chastise them even though they were apparently resting in the shade of faith, which is likened to a غمام or cloud. As shown under Important Words above, the word غمام (clouds) is sometimes used in connection with God’s mercy (7:161).
c
6:159; 16:34; 89:23.
149
اَلْغَمَامْ (al-Ghamam) 这词在 «古兰经» 上一直用来既表示仁慈 (7:161) 也表示惩罚 (25:26)。
150
这里指的是白德尔 (بَدْر, Badr) 战役, 那时安拉降下恩准给这些信者的云和雨 (布哈理) 中来帮助他们 (25:26), 并且还降下激起信徒们勇气而却使不信者的心中充满恐惧 (8:13) 的天使 (8:10)。据记载, 有些不信者在那天确实见到了这些天使 (زُرْقَانِی, Zurqani)。
151
短语 “安拉的降临” 还用在 «古兰经» 其它地方, 表示安拉的惩罚 (16:27; 59:3)。
a
6:159; 16:34; 89:23.
217
Important Words:
یاتیھم الله (Allah should come to them) is a metaphorical expression, meaning, Allah should come to them with His punishment, i.e. Allah should punish them. The metaphor ایتان الله i.e. coming of God, is used by the Quran elsewhere also (16:27; 59:3). In contrast to this, the Quran uses the metaphor توب الله i.e. turning of God, to express His turning with mercy (2:38; 9:117.) Similarly, ایتان الملئکة i.e. the coming of the angels, indicates their coming with punishment.
ظلل (coverings) is the plural of ظلة (zullah) which is derived from ظل and اظل the latter word meaning, he or it afforded or cast a shadow. But whereas ظل (zill) the plural of which is ظلال or اظلال means, shadow, ظلة whose plural is ظلل, means, a covering or a shade, i.e. a thing that casts or gives a shade or a shadow (Aqrab). The word ظلة or ظلل is generally used in connection with punishment (Mufradat).
الغمام (clouds) for which see 2:58. The word has been used by the Quran both in connection with mercy (7:161) and punishment (25:26).
Commentary:
The form of speech has been changed here from the second to the third person. The verse has apparently been addressed to either disbelievers or to hypocrites and the weak in faith. If it be taken to refer to disbelievers, as the change of form in the address indicates, it would mean that by desisting from belief they are, as it were, waiting for the punishment of God, and the verse incidentally hints that appointed punishment would come to them through raining clouds. The reference is to the Battle of Badr, when God helped believers by sending down clouds and rain (Bukhari), as was promised (25:26), and also sent down angels (8:10) who inspired the believers with courage and filled the hearts of the disbelievers with fear (8:13). Some of the disbelievers are reported to have actually seen the angels on that day (Zurqani). The matter was then "decided"; for, on that memorable day, all the chief leaders of the Quraish were killed, the Muslims obtaining a decisive victory which broke the power of the enemy. The coming of clouds refers to the rainfall which on the battlefield of Badr proved a blessing for the Muslims. It made the sand firm for them, while the land on the side of the enemy, being clayey, became slippery.
If, however, the verse be taken to refer to the hypocrites or the weak in faith, as the preceding two verses would suggest, then the clause, that Allah should come to them in the coverings of the clouds, would mean that if they did not mend their ways, God would have to chastise them even though they were apparently resting in the shade of faith, which is likened to a غمام or cloud. As shown under Important Words above, the word غمام (clouds) is sometimes used in connection with God’s mercy (7:161).
a
6:159; 16:34; 89:23.
250
The phrase, "coming of God," is used by the Qur’an elsewhere also (16:27; 59:3) and signifies God’s punishment.
251
The word al-Ghamam has been used by the Qur’an to express both mercy (7:161) and punishment (25:26).
252
The reference is to the Battle of Badr, when God helped the believers by sending down clouds and rain (Bukhari), as was promised to them (25:26), and also sent down angels (8:10) who inspired the believers with courage and filled the hearts of the disbelievers with fear (8:13). Some of the disbelievers are reported to have actually seen the angels on that day (Zurqani).
سَلْ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ كَمْ ءَاتَيْنَٰهُم مِّنْ ءَايَةٍۭ بَيِّنَةٍ ۗ وَمَن يُبَدِّلْ نِعْمَةَ ٱللَّهِ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَتْهُ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَدِيدُ ٱلْعِقَابِ
کَمْ سے مراد تعداد کی کثرت ہے اور مراد یہ ہے کہ ان سے پوچھو تو انہیں خود اقرار کرنا ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بہت سے کھلے کھلے نشانات ہمیں دئیے تھے۔
یہ مرادنہیں کہ وہ سزا دینے میں سخت ہے بلکہ یہ مراد ہے کہ اس کی سزا انسان پر سخت ہی گزرتی ہے۔
17:102; 28:37.
This does not mean that God is unnecessarily severe in punishment, but that Divine punishment is bound to be felt severely.
17:102; 28:37.
Commentary:
The preceding verses referred to those weak in faith who had not yet "come into submission wholly" (2:209). The position of these people was that they had received a favour of God but practically they sought to "change" it. They wished to be known as Muslims and yet to be free to live as they liked. This was exactly what the Israelites had done before. So the Quran fittingly turns here to the story of the children of Israel who afforded an object-lesson for Muslims. The Holy Prophet and, for that matter, every reader of the Quran is asked to enquire of the descendants of Israel how many and how varied were the Signs which God had bestowed upon them as a favour and how persistent and impudent was their rejection of His Messengers and their disregard of His teachings.
The expression, whoso changes the gift of God, appears to be rather peculiar; but really the word یبدل (changes) gives a very interesting meaning. For believers it means, accepting the teaching of a Prophet in theory but rejecting it in practice, as unfortunately is very often the case with the weak in faith. They receive a thing as a gift or blessing, but by abstaining from acting upon it, they incur the displeasure of God, thus practically "changing" a favour into a disfavour.
For disbelievers the expression means converting a مبشر Prophet into a منذر Prophet. The Quran speaks of the Prophets of God as a نعمة i.e. a favour or gift (5:21) and it further holds that the mission of every Prophet is twofold—he is a مبشر or bearer of glad tidings for those who accept him, and he is a منذر or warner of coming punishment for those who reject him (18:57). Now when God sends a Prophet, He wishes the people to accept him as a bearer of glad tidings only, and it is the people themselves who reverse the position by rejecting him. In this way the people, as it were, "change" the مبشر Prophet into the منذر Prophet.
Again, for Israelites or Jews the expression, whoso changes the gift of Allah, may mean that though they knew that their Scriptures embodied the word of God which was a favour and a blessing, yet they had the audacity to interfere with it in order to meet their own ends (5:14), thus "changing" the very substance of God’s favour.
The expression may have yet another meaning. The شریعة or Law being meant as a guidance, is a mercy or a blessing of God (5:4 & 6:155, 156). But Christians, who are an offshoot of the Jews have "changed" it into a curse (Gal. 3:13).
The expression "gift of God" may refer to the manifold and multifarious favours which God had bestowed upon the Israelites in the form of Prophets and their noble teachings. But they "changed" the gift of God by rejecting the Prophets and disobeying their teachings. The expression may also refer to the Holy Prophet and the religion brought by him; they are certainly the greatest gifts of God for mankind, and whoever rejects Islam either by disbelieving or disobeying its teachings, deserves God’s severest punishment. In either case, the verse also warns hypocrites and those weak of faith among Muslims that if they accepted the Holy Prophet outwardly but rejected him in their heart or if they accepted his teachings as being from God but did not act upon them, they would be "changing" the gift of God and would make themselves liable to severe punishment.
a
17:102; 28:37.
152
这并不意味着安拉的惩罚是不必要的严厉, 而是说安拉的惩罚必定令人感到严厉。
1
کَمْ سے مراد تعداد کی کثرت ہے اور مراد یہ ہے کہ ان سے پوچھو تو انہیں خود اقرار کرنا ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بہت سے کھلے کھلے نشانات ہمیں دئیے تھے۔
2
یہ مرادنہیں کہ وہ سزا دینے میں سخت ہے بلکہ یہ مراد ہے کہ اس کی سزا انسان پر سخت ہی گزرتی ہے۔
a
17:102; 28:37.
218
Commentary:
The preceding verses referred to those weak in faith who had not yet "come into submission wholly" (2:209). The position of these people was that they had received a favour of God but practically they sought to "change" it. They wished to be known as Muslims and yet to be free to live as they liked. This was exactly what the Israelites had done before. So the Quran fittingly turns here to the story of the children of Israel who afforded an object-lesson for Muslims. The Holy Prophet and, for that matter, every reader of the Quran is asked to enquire of the descendants of Israel how many and how varied were the Signs which God had bestowed upon them as a favour and how persistent and impudent was their rejection of His Messengers and their disregard of His teachings.
The expression, whoso changes the gift of God, appears to be rather peculiar; but really the word یبدل (changes) gives a very interesting meaning. For believers it means, accepting the teaching of a Prophet in theory but rejecting it in practice, as unfortunately is very often the case with the weak in faith. They receive a thing as a gift or blessing, but by abstaining from acting upon it, they incur the displeasure of God, thus practically "changing" a favour into a disfavour.
For disbelievers the expression means converting a مبشر Prophet into a منذر Prophet. The Quran speaks of the Prophets of God as a نعمة i.e. a favour or gift (5:21) and it further holds that the mission of every Prophet is twofold—he is a مبشر or bearer of glad tidings for those who accept him, and he is a منذر or warner of coming punishment for those who reject him (18:57). Now when God sends a Prophet, He wishes the people to accept him as a bearer of glad tidings only, and it is the people themselves who reverse the position by rejecting him. In this way the people, as it were, "change" the مبشر Prophet into the منذر Prophet.
Again, for Israelites or Jews the expression, whoso changes the gift of Allah, may mean that though they knew that their Scriptures embodied the word of God which was a favour and a blessing, yet they had the audacity to interfere with it in order to meet their own ends (5:14), thus "changing" the very substance of God’s favour.
The expression may have yet another meaning. The شریعة or Law being meant as a guidance, is a mercy or a blessing of God (5:4 & 6:155, 156). But Christians, who are an offshoot of the Jews have "changed" it into a curse (Gal. 3:13).
The expression "gift of God" may refer to the manifold and multifarious favours which God had bestowed upon the Israelites in the form of Prophets and their noble teachings. But they "changed" the gift of God by rejecting the Prophets and disobeying their teachings. The expression may also refer to the Holy Prophet and the religion brought by him; they are certainly the greatest gifts of God for mankind, and whoever rejects Islam either by disbelieving or disobeying its teachings, deserves God’s severest punishment. In either case, the verse also warns hypocrites and those weak of faith among Muslims that if they accepted the Holy Prophet outwardly but rejected him in their heart or if they accepted his teachings as being from God but did not act upon them, they would be "changing" the gift of God and would make themselves liable to severe punishment.
b
17:102; 28:37.
253
This does not mean that God is unnecessarily severe in punishment, but that Divine punishment is bound to be felt severely.
زُيِّنَ لِلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ ٱلْحَيَوٰةُ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَيَسْخَرُونَ مِنَ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ۘ وَٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّقَوْا۟ فَوْقَهُمْ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ يَرْزُقُ مَن يَشَآءُ بِغَيْرِ حِسَابٍ
3:38; 24:39; 35:4; 40:41.
3:15; 18:47; 57:21.
3:15; 18:47; 57:21.
3:38; 24:39; 35:4; 40:41.
Important Words:
زین (is made to appear attractive) is passive voice from زین which is derived from زان. They say زان الشیء or زین الشیءmeaning, he decorated or embellished or beautified the thing so as to make it look attractive (Aqrab).
یسخرون (they scoff) is formed from سخر. They say سخر منه or سخربه i.e. (1) he mocked at or scoffed at or laughed at him; he derided or ridiculed him; (2) he cut a joke with him or made a jest of him; (3) he deemed him ignorant (Aqrab & Lane).
فوقھم (above them). The word فوق is the infinitive noun from فاق. They say فاقه i.e. he was above him or was superior to him (in any sense); he excelled him in rank, eminence, nobility, knowledge or any other good quality; he overcame him in argument (Aqrab & Lane).
یوم القیامة (the Day of Resurrection) is a compound expression being made up of یوم (day) and القیامة (resurrection). The word یوم (day) is also used to denote time generally as already explained in 1:4; and القیامة (resurrection) is derived from قام meaning, (1) he stood up, or (2) he stood still. The expression قامت الساعة means, the appointed hour of resurrection came to pass. القیامة therefore, means the rising of the dead or the Resurrection (Aqrab). The word is also used for such occasions on which people leave their homes and gather in a place in response to a call, as in the Friday Prayers (Taj). Thus figuratively the word القیامة (resurrection) may denote a state of unusual life and activity following a state of inertia and lifelessness. The word القیامة is really القیام (the act of standing) which is the noun-infinitive from قام, the final ة being added to denote the act of resurrection being sudden and all together (Mufradat).
Commentary:
As the preceding verse spoke of those who change the gift of God by rejecting it or refusing to act upon it, the present verse fittingly provides the underlying reason of such rejection or refusal. The attention of these people is devoted to the affairs of this world, which appear so attractive to them as to leave no room in their hearts for God and His Messenger. The فاعل or author of the act denoted by the verb زین which is in the passive voice, has not been named here; but elsewhere the Quran clearly states that it is Satan who has taken upon himself to make the things of this world look beautiful and attractive in the eyes of unbelieving people (15:40), who thus become engrossed in the affairs of the world.
Intoxicated with their material gains and worldly possessions, disbelievers, and for that matter, hypocrites also, look down upon believers and scoff at them when they see their apparently low worldly position and hear promises of victory and future greatness being made to them. In view of the utter helplessness of the believers, they cannot possibly bring themselves to conceive that believers will ever become heirs to that eminence and glory which is promised to them by God and, therefore, they treat such promises with contempt. But truth has always triumphed over falsehood in the end. The history of all religions and particularly that of Islam bears undeniable testimony to this fact.
The clause, but those who fear God shall be above them on the Day of Resurrection, does not mean that the triumph of the Faithful over disbelievers will be confined to the next world only. The words "the Day of Resurrection" have been added to point out that whereas believers will also triumph in this world, as borne out by the facts of history, their triumph in the next world will be complete and perpetual. These words may also refer, according to Arab usage, to the time of the downfall of disbelievers and the rise of the Faithful in this very world. In this sense the clause would signify, "wait a while, for the appointed time is not far distant when Muslims will triumph over their enemies and will be above them in all respects", i.e. in knowledge, wealth, power, etc.—a fact to which the early history of Islam in Medina, Damascus, Baghdad, Egypt, Spain, etc., bears ample testimony. To quote only one instance, i.e. that of the Arabs being in their time above the rest of the world in science, Robert Briffault says: "The debt of our science to that of the Arabs does not consist in startling discoveries or revolutionary theories; science owes a great deal to Arab culture; it owes its existence" (The Making of Humanity).
It will be noted that while making the promise of future greatness, the verse substitutes the expression "those who fear God" for the expression "those who believe". This change has been made to point to the fact that to obtain triumph mere ایمان (belief) is not enough; the Muslims should effect a real change in themselves, by attaining تقوی or fear of God. The phrase "without reckoning" may mean three things: (1) that the favours and gifts of God know no ending; for a thing that does not end cannot be reckoned; (2) that God bestows upon believers more favours and more gifts than they appear to deserve, the more so because believers spend in the cause of God to the utmost of their power without keeping an account of what they spend, so God also showers His blessings upon them without reckoning; (3) that God treats the believers as friends; and as people do not keep an account of what they give to their friends, therefore God also keeps no account of what He gives to the Faithful.
As to the relevancy of this clause to the previous one, it may be noted that as God promised to grant special victory and unusual greatness to believers—so much so that they were to be "above" the disbelievers in all respects when the time of "resurrection" (i.e. the fall of the disbelievers and the rise of the believers) came—the question naturally arose, how out of all proportion to their efforts and resources were the handful of believers going to attain this glorious triumph? In reply to this implied question, the Quran says that the people need not doubt this prophecy for the matter is not to be settled by ordinary rules of cause and effect but by the fact, so amply borne out by history, that "Allah bestows His favours on whomsoever He pleases without reckoning." In this connection we may well quote from Carlyle who, while speaking of the spectacular rise of Islam to power, says: "These Arabs, the man Mohammad, one spark on a world of what seemed black unnoticeable sand; but lo, the sand proves explosive powder, blazes heaven-high from Delhi to Granada!" (On Heroes and Hero Worship).
b
3:15; 18:47; 57:21.
c
3:38; 24:39; 35:4; 40:41.
a
3:15; 18:47; 57:21.
b
3:38; 24:39; 35:4; 40:41.
219
Important Words:
زین (is made to appear attractive) is passive voice from زین which is derived from زان. They say زان الشیء or زین الشیءmeaning, he decorated or embellished or beautified the thing so as to make it look attractive (Aqrab).
یسخرون (they scoff) is formed from سخر. They say سخر منه or سخربه i.e. (1) he mocked at or scoffed at or laughed at him; he derided or ridiculed him; (2) he cut a joke with him or made a jest of him; (3) he deemed him ignorant (Aqrab & Lane).
فوقھم (above them). The word فوق is the infinitive noun from فاق. They say فاقه i.e. he was above him or was superior to him (in any sense); he excelled him in rank, eminence, nobility, knowledge or any other good quality; he overcame him in argument (Aqrab & Lane).
یوم القیامة (the Day of Resurrection) is a compound expression being made up of یوم (day) and القیامة (resurrection). The word یوم (day) is also used to denote time generally as already explained in 1:4; and القیامة (resurrection) is derived from قام meaning, (1) he stood up, or (2) he stood still. The expression قامت الساعة means, the appointed hour of resurrection came to pass. القیامة therefore, means the rising of the dead or the Resurrection (Aqrab). The word is also used for such occasions on which people leave their homes and gather in a place in response to a call, as in the Friday Prayers (Taj). Thus figuratively the word القیامة (resurrection) may denote a state of unusual life and activity following a state of inertia and lifelessness. The word القیامة is really القیام (the act of standing) which is the noun-infinitive from قام, the final ة being added to denote the act of resurrection being sudden and all together (Mufradat).
Commentary:
As the preceding verse spoke of those who change the gift of God by rejecting it or refusing to act upon it, the present verse fittingly provides the underlying reason of such rejection or refusal. The attention of these people is devoted to the affairs of this world, which appear so attractive to them as to leave no room in their hearts for God and His Messenger. The فاعل or author of the act denoted by the verb زین which is in the passive voice, has not been named here; but elsewhere the Quran clearly states that it is Satan who has taken upon himself to make the things of this world look beautiful and attractive in the eyes of unbelieving people (15:40), who thus become engrossed in the affairs of the world.
Intoxicated with their material gains and worldly possessions, disbelievers, and for that matter, hypocrites also, look down upon believers and scoff at them when they see their apparently low worldly position and hear promises of victory and future greatness being made to them. In view of the utter helplessness of the believers, they cannot possibly bring themselves to conceive that believers will ever become heirs to that eminence and glory which is promised to them by God and, therefore, they treat such promises with contempt. But truth has always triumphed over falsehood in the end. The history of all religions and particularly that of Islam bears undeniable testimony to this fact.
The clause, but those who fear God shall be above them on the Day of Resurrection, does not mean that the triumph of the Faithful over disbelievers will be confined to the next world only. The words "the Day of Resurrection" have been added to point out that whereas believers will also triumph in this world, as borne out by the facts of history, their triumph in the next world will be complete and perpetual. These words may also refer, according to Arab usage, to the time of the downfall of disbelievers and the rise of the Faithful in this very world. In this sense the clause would signify, "wait a while, for the appointed time is not far distant when Muslims will triumph over their enemies and will be above them in all respects", i.e. in knowledge, wealth, power, etc.—a fact to which the early history of Islam in Medina, Damascus, Baghdad, Egypt, Spain, etc., bears ample testimony. To quote only one instance, i.e. that of the Arabs being in their time above the rest of the world in science, Robert Briffault says: "The debt of our science to that of the Arabs does not consist in startling discoveries or revolutionary theories; science owes a great deal to Arab culture; it owes its existence" (The Making of Humanity).
It will be noted that while making the promise of future greatness, the verse substitutes the expression "those who fear God" for the expression "those who believe". This change has been made to point to the fact that to obtain triumph mere ایمان (belief) is not enough; the Muslims should effect a real change in themselves, by attaining تقوی or fear of God. The phrase "without reckoning" may mean three things: (1) that the favours and gifts of God know no ending; for a thing that does not end cannot be reckoned; (2) that God bestows upon believers more favours and more gifts than they appear to deserve, the more so because believers spend in the cause of God to the utmost of their power without keeping an account of what they spend, so God also showers His blessings upon them without reckoning; (3) that God treats the believers as friends; and as people do not keep an account of what they give to their friends, therefore God also keeps no account of what He gives to the Faithful.
As to the relevancy of this clause to the previous one, it may be noted that as God promised to grant special victory and unusual greatness to believers—so much so that they were to be "above" the disbelievers in all respects when the time of "resurrection" (i.e. the fall of the disbelievers and the rise of the believers) came—the question naturally arose, how out of all proportion to their efforts and resources were the handful of believers going to attain this glorious triumph? In reply to this implied question, the Quran says that the people need not doubt this prophecy for the matter is not to be settled by ordinary rules of cause and effect but by the fact, so amply borne out by history, that "Allah bestows His favours on whomsoever He pleases without reckoning." In this connection we may well quote from Carlyle who, while speaking of the spectacular rise of Islam to power, says: "These Arabs, the man Mohammad, one spark on a world of what seemed black unnoticeable sand; but lo, the sand proves explosive powder, blazes heaven-high from Delhi to Granada!" (On Heroes and Hero Worship).
a
3:38; 24:39; 35:4; 40:41.
c
3:15; 18:47; 57:21.
كَانَ ٱلنَّاسُ أُمَّةً وَٰحِدَةً فَبَعَثَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلنَّبِيِّۦنَ مُبَشِّرِينَ وَمُنذِرِينَ وَأَنزَلَ مَعَهُمُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ بِٱلْحَقِّ لِيَحْكُمَ بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ فِيمَا ٱخْتَلَفُوا۟ فِيهِ ۚ وَمَا ٱخْتَلَفَ فِيهِ إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوهُ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَتْهُمُ ٱلْبَيِّنَٰتُ بَغْيًۢا بَيْنَهُمْ ۖ فَهَدَى ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لِمَا ٱخْتَلَفُوا۟ فِيهِ مِنَ ٱلْحَقِّ بِإِذْنِهِۦ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ يَهْدِى مَن يَشَآءُ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ
4:166; 6:49; 18:57.
在先知降临之前, 所有的人都如同一辙, 意思是, 他们都是无信仰的人。但当先知降临时, 尽管他们相互间存在分歧, 却形成一个一致反对他 (先知) 的联合阵线。词组 “人类原是个集体” 或一些等同语除了用在本节中还曾用在 «古兰经» 中的七个地方。在10:20, 21:93和23:53中它们意味着 “民族团结”, 而在5:49; 16:94; 42:9; 43:34和在注释的本节经文中则表示 “思想的一致”。
在本节经文中两处不同的地方所指的 “不同” 表示两种不同的分歧。在先知降临之前, 人们对偶像崇拜, 彼此也有不同的看法。但是在他出现以后, 他们开始对他的主张表现出不同的看法。先知并没有制造分歧。这些 “分歧” 早已存在, 它们只是在他出现之后呈现出新的形式。在先知出现之前, 人们尽管有分歧, 但看上去象是一个民族; 在他出现以后, 他们分裂成为两个截然不同的阵营--------信仰者和不信仰者。综合起来看, 本节经文叙述了人类已经走过的五个不同阶段。开始时, 人们中间存在着统一团结, 所有的人形成一个集体。由于人口的增长, 他们的爱好的扩大和他们的问题的复杂性, 他们中间开始产生分歧。于是安拉提拔出先知并启示了他的旨意。每一新的启示都引起了倾轧和分歧, 特别是听到真主的启示的人。安拉最后确定穆圣带来最后的经典负起全世界的使命, 号召全人类聚集在他的旗帜周围。这样就完成了一个循环, 以统一为开端的这个世界, 最后还是有计划的归于团结统一。
اُمَّۃً وَّاحِدَۃً کا لفظ قرآن کریم میں نو جگہ پر استعمال ہوا ہے‘ جن میں سے تین جگہ یعنی یونس آیت ۲۰ اور انبیاء آیت ۹۳اور مومنون آیت ۵۲ میں تو اتحادِ جنس اور اتحادِ قومی مراد لیا گیا ہے اور چھ جگہ یعنی مائدہ آیت ۴۹۔ نحل آیت ۹۴۔ شوریٰ آیت۹۔ زخرف آیت ۳۴۔ ھود آیت ۱۱۹ اور بقرۃ آیت ۲۱۴ میں اتحاد خیال مراد لیا گیا ہے۔ اس آیت کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ آدمؑ کے وقت سے بنی نوع انسان ایک مذہب پر تھے۔ مگر جوں جوں نبی آئے ان کی مخالفت کی وجہ سے لوگ مختلف الخیال ہو گئے حالانکہ نبی اِ تّحادِ خیال پیدا کرنے آئے تھے۔
اس میں عجیب مضمون بیان کیا ہے۔ نبی آتا ہے اختلاف مٹانے کے لئے‘ مگر لوگ اپنے اختلاف چھوڑ کر اس کے پیچھے پڑ جاتے ہیں اور وہی قوم سب سے زیادہ مخالفت کرتی ہے جو الہام کی اول مخاطب ہوتی ہے اور جن کی طرف نبی آتا ہے۔ دوسری قومیں تو اس کی تعلیم کو ایک علمی مضمون سمجھ کر اس سے دلچسپی بھی ظاہر کرتی ہیں‘ اس پر غور بھی کرتی ہیں۔ بعض حصوں میں اس کی تعریف بھی کرتی ہیں لیکن جن کی طرف وہ کتاب نازل ہوتی ہے یا جو اول مخاطب ہوتے ہیں وہ مخالفت میں اس قدر بڑھ جاتے ہیں کہ انہیں اس میں کوئی خوبی نظر ہی نہیں آتی۔ اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ کیسے افسوس کی بات ہے کہ جن کے فائدہ کے لئے وہ کتاب آئی ہ
4:166; 6:49; 18:57.
Before the advent of a Prophet all men are like one people in the sense that they are all unbelievers. But when a Prophet appears, they, in spite of their mutual differences, form one united front against him. The expression, "mankind were one community" or identical words have been used, besides the present verse, at seven places in the Qur’an. In 10:20; 21:93 and 23:53 they signify "national unity" and in 5:49; 16:94; 42:9; 43:34 and in the verse under comment "identity of ideas."
The "difference" referred to in the verse at two separate places signifies two different kinds of disagreement. Before the advent of a Prophet people differ among themselves about their idolatrous practices. But after his appearance, they begin to differ with regard to his claims. The Prophet does not create differences. The differences are already there; they merely assume a new form after his appearance. Before a Prophet appears, the people, in spite of their mutual differences, look like one people; they become divided into two distinct camps—believers and disbelievers,—after he appears. Viewed collectively, the verse describes five different stages through which mankind has passed. In the beginning there was unity among the people, all forming one community. With the increase in population and the extension of their interests and the complexity of their problems, they began to differ among themselves. Then God raised Prophets and revealed His Will. Every new revelation was made a cause of discord a
4:166; 6:49; 18:57.
Commentary:
In the preceding verses different classes of people––believers and disbelievers together with their sub-divisions––have been mentioned. The verse under comment not only traces the genesis of these classes but also hints to Muslims that, just as the world began with all people as one community, God now wishes them again to become one community through the Holy Prophet who, unlike previous Prophets, came with a universal mission.
The clause, Mankind were one community, may mean: (1) mankind, i.e. all men were originally one people; (2) all disbelievers are one people. In the first-mentioned case, the verse would mean that, in the beginning of the world, all mankind were one people. They had no social rules, no polity, no civic laws. Then in the course of time, differences arose among them with regard to these things. So God sent to them Prophets to guide them how to live good and useful lives.
In the second case, the meaning of the clause would be that before the advent of a Prophet all men are like one people in the sense that they are all disbelievers, and disbelief and wrongdoing reign supreme in the world. But when a Prophet appears, all people, in spite of their mutual differences, form one united front against him. This meaning is in harmony with the well-known saying of the Holy Prophet, الکفر ملة واحدة i.e. all disbelievers (to whatever creed or religion they may belong) are one people.
The clause, and sent down with them the Book, does not mean that God revealed a separate Book to every Prophet. In that case, "Books", instead of "the Book", would have been the appropriate word. In fact, the "sending down of a Book" to a Prophet does not always mean the actual revelation of it to him in person. The Quran uses similar words with regard to those Prophets who were not the direct recipients of any revealed Book (6:115, 157, 158; 3:73, 200; 29:47; 21:11). The clause, therefore, only means that every Prophet has received a Book from God, whether it was revealed to him direct or whether it was revealed to a previous Prophet whose mission he was called upon to serve.
The "difference" referred to in the verse at two separate places signifies two different kinds of disagreement. Before the advent of a Prophet people differ among themselves about false beliefs and idolatrous practices. But after the appearance of the truth, they begin to differ with regard to the truth itself. The advent of a Prophet, however, does not, as may be wrongly imagined, create differences. The differences are already there; they merely assume a new form. But whereas before a Prophet has made his appearance the people, in spite of their differences, look like one people, they become divided into two distinct camps, believers and disbelievers, after he has appeared.
The clause, out of envy towards one another, points to the important fact that invariably the root-cause of the rejection of a Prophet is jealousy. Disbelievers cannot reconcile themselves to the idea that an ordinary person from among them, generally inferior to many of them in wealth, power or social status, should be made their teacher and leader. Disbelievers also consider it below their dignity to ally themselves with a community a large majority of whose members are of humble origin, as is often the case with the early followers of Divine Messengers.
The clause, Now has Allah, by His command, guided believers to the truth in regard to which they (the unbelievers)differed, refers to the advent of the Holy Prophet who was raised by God with a universal mission to remove the differences of all the peoples of the earth. The expression باذنه translated as "by His command" may also mean "according to His eternal decree". In the beginning of the world God willed that the final Law-giving Prophet should come with a universal mission and should constitute, as it were, the zenith of the system of النبوة or prophecy. Says the Holy Prophet "I was a Prophet of God while Adam was yet in the making between the body and the soul" (Tirmidhi).
Viewed collectively, the verse describes five different stages through which mankind has passed: (1) When there was unity among the people, all forming one community. This was in the beginning of the human race. (2) When, with the increase in population and the extension of interests and the complexity of problems confronting man, people began to differ among themselves. (3) When God raised Prophets among different peoples and different countries to show them the right path and revealed His will to the various contending sections. (4) When the very revelation of God sent to remove differences was made a cause of difference by the mischievous people. (5) When God finally raised the Holy Prophet with His last Book and a universal mission, calling upon entire humanity to rally round his banner. Thus a beautiful circle was completed and the world which began with unity was designed to end with it.
d
4:166; 6:49; 18:57.
153
在先知降临之前, 所有的人都如同一辙, 意思是, 他们都是无信仰的人。但当先知降临时, 尽管他们相互间存在分歧, 却形成一个一致反对他 (先知) 的联合阵线。词组 “人类原是个集体” 或一些等同语除了用在本节中还曾用在 «古兰经» 中的七个地方。在10:20, 21:93和23:53中它们意味着 “民族团结”, 而在5:49; 16:94; 42:9; 43:34和在注释的本节经文中则表示 “思想的一致”。
154
在本节经文中两处不同的地方所指的 “不同” 表示两种不同的分歧。在先知降临之前, 人们对偶像崇拜, 彼此也有不同的看法。但是在他出现以后, 他们开始对他的主张表现出不同的看法。先知并没有制造分歧。这些 “分歧” 早已存在, 它们只是在他出现之后呈现出新的形式。在先知出现之前, 人们尽管有分歧, 但看上去象是一个民族; 在他出现以后, 他们分裂成为两个截然不同的阵营--------信仰者和不信仰者。综合起来看, 本节经文叙述了人类已经走过的五个不同阶段。开始时, 人们中间存在着统一团结, 所有的人形成一个集体。由于人口的增长, 他们的爱好的扩大和他们的问题的复杂性, 他们中间开始产生分歧。于是安拉提拔出先知并启示了他的旨意。每一新的启示都引起了倾轧和分歧, 特别是听到真主的启示的人。安拉最后确定穆圣带来最后的经典负起全世界的使命, 号召全人类聚集在他的旗帜周围。这样就完成了一个循环, 以统一为开端的这个世界, 最后还是有计划的归于团结统一。
1
اُمَّۃً وَّاحِدَۃً کا لفظ قرآن کریم میں نو جگہ پر استعمال ہوا ہے‘ جن میں سے تین جگہ یعنی یونس آیت ۲۰ اور انبیاء آیت ۹۳اور مومنون آیت ۵۲ میں تو اتحادِ جنس اور اتحادِ قومی مراد لیا گیا ہے اور چھ جگہ یعنی مائدہ آیت ۴۹۔ نحل آیت ۹۴۔ شوریٰ آیت۹۔ زخرف آیت ۳۴۔ ھود آیت ۱۱۹ اور بقرۃ آیت ۲۱۴ میں اتحاد خیال مراد لیا گیا ہے۔ اس آیت کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ آدمؑ کے وقت سے بنی نوع انسان ایک مذہب پر تھے۔ مگر جوں جوں نبی آئے ان کی مخالفت کی وجہ سے لوگ مختلف الخیال ہو گئے حالانکہ نبی اِ تّحادِ خیال پیدا کرنے آئے تھے۔
2
اس میں عجیب مضمون بیان کیا ہے۔ نبی آتا ہے اختلاف مٹانے کے لئے‘ مگر لوگ اپنے اختلاف چھوڑ کر اس کے پیچھے پڑ جاتے ہیں اور وہی قوم سب سے زیادہ مخالفت کرتی ہے جو الہام کی اول مخاطب ہوتی ہے اور جن کی طرف نبی آتا ہے۔ دوسری قومیں تو اس کی تعلیم کو ایک علمی مضمون سمجھ کر اس سے دلچسپی بھی ظاہر کرتی ہیں‘ اس پر غور بھی کرتی ہیں۔ بعض حصوں میں اس کی تعریف بھی کرتی ہیں لیکن جن کی طرف وہ کتاب نازل ہوتی ہے یا جو اول مخاطب ہوتے ہیں وہ مخالفت میں اس قدر بڑھ جاتے ہیں کہ انہیں اس میں کوئی خوبی نظر ہی نہیں آتی۔ اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ کیسے افسوس کی بات ہے کہ جن کے فائدہ کے لئے وہ کتاب آئی ہ
a
4:166; 6:49; 18:57.
220
Commentary:
In the preceding verses different classes of people––believers and disbelievers together with their sub-divisions––have been mentioned. The verse under comment not only traces the genesis of these classes but also hints to Muslims that, just as the world began with all people as one community, God now wishes them again to become one community through the Holy Prophet who, unlike previous Prophets, came with a universal mission.
The clause, Mankind were one community, may mean: (1) mankind, i.e. all men were originally one people; (2) all disbelievers are one people. In the first-mentioned case, the verse would mean that, in the beginning of the world, all mankind were one people. They had no social rules, no polity, no civic laws. Then in the course of time, differences arose among them with regard to these things. So God sent to them Prophets to guide them how to live good and useful lives.
In the second case, the meaning of the clause would be that before the advent of a Prophet all men are like one people in the sense that they are all disbelievers, and disbelief and wrongdoing reign supreme in the world. But when a Prophet appears, all people, in spite of their mutual differences, form one united front against him. This meaning is in harmony with the well-known saying of the Holy Prophet, الکفر ملة واحدة i.e. all disbelievers (to whatever creed or religion they may belong) are one people.
The clause, and sent down with them the Book, does not mean that God revealed a separate Book to every Prophet. In that case, "Books", instead of "the Book", would have been the appropriate word. In fact, the "sending down of a Book" to a Prophet does not always mean the actual revelation of it to him in person. The Quran uses similar words with regard to those Prophets who were not the direct recipients of any revealed Book (6:115, 157, 158; 3:73, 200; 29:47; 21:11). The clause, therefore, only means that every Prophet has received a Book from God, whether it was revealed to him direct or whether it was revealed to a previous Prophet whose mission he was called upon to serve.
The "difference" referred to in the verse at two separate places signifies two different kinds of disagreement. Before the advent of a Prophet people differ among themselves about false beliefs and idolatrous practices. But after the appearance of the truth, they begin to differ with regard to the truth itself. The advent of a Prophet, however, does not, as may be wrongly imagined, create differences. The differences are already there; they merely assume a new form. But whereas before a Prophet has made his appearance the people, in spite of their differences, look like one people, they become divided into two distinct camps, believers and disbelievers, after he has appeared.
The clause, out of envy towards one another, points to the important fact that invariably the root-cause of the rejection of a Prophet is jealousy. Disbelievers cannot reconcile themselves to the idea that an ordinary person from among them, generally inferior to many of them in wealth, power or social status, should be made their teacher and leader. Disbelievers also consider it below their dignity to ally themselves with a community a large majority of whose members are of humble origin, as is often the case with the early followers of Divine Messengers.
The clause, Now has Allah, by His command, guided believers to the truth in regard to which they (the unbelievers)differed, refers to the advent of the Holy Prophet who was raised by God with a universal mission to remove the differences of all the peoples of the earth. The expression باذنه translated as "by His command" may also mean "according to His eternal decree". In the beginning of the world God willed that the final Law-giving Prophet should come with a universal mission and should constitute, as it were, the zenith of the system of النبوة or prophecy. Says the Holy Prophet "I was a Prophet of God while Adam was yet in the making between the body and the soul" (Tirmidhi).
Viewed collectively, the verse describes five different stages through which mankind has passed: (1) When there was unity among the people, all forming one community. This was in the beginning of the human race. (2) When, with the increase in population and the extension of interests and the complexity of problems confronting man, people began to differ among themselves. (3) When God raised Prophets among different peoples and different countries to show them the right path and revealed His will to the various contending sections. (4) When the very revelation of God sent to remove differences was made a cause of difference by the mischievous people. (5) When God finally raised the Holy Prophet with His last Book and a universal mission, calling upon entire humanity to rally round his banner. Thus a beautiful circle was completed and the world which began with unity was designed to end with it.
b
4:166; 6:49; 18:57.
254
Before the advent of a Prophet all men are like one people in the sense that they are all unbelievers. But when a Prophet appears, they, in spite of their mutual differences, form one united front against him. The expression, "mankind were one community" or identical words have been used, besides the present verse, at seven places in the Qur’an. In 10:20; 21:93 and 23:53 they signify "national unity" and in 5:49; 16:94; 42:9; 43:34 and in the verse under comment "identity of ideas."
255
The "difference" referred to in the verse at two separate places signifies two different kinds of disagreement. Before the advent of a Prophet people differ among themselves about their idolatrous practices. But after his appearance, they begin to differ with regard to his claims. The Prophet does not create differences. The differences are already there; they merely assume a new form after his appearance. Before a Prophet appears, the people, in spite of their mutual differences, look like one people; they become divided into two distinct camps—believers and disbelievers,—after he appears. Viewed collectively, the verse describes five different stages through which mankind has passed. In the beginning there was unity among the people, all forming one community. With the increase in population and the extension of their interests and the complexity of their problems, they began to differ among themselves. Then God raised Prophets and revealed His Will. Every new revelation was made a cause of discord a
أَمْ حَسِبْتُمْ أَن تَدْخُلُوا۟ ٱلْجَنَّةَ وَلَمَّا يَأْتِكُم مَّثَلُ ٱلَّذِينَ خَلَوْا۟ مِن قَبْلِكُم ۖ مَّسَّتْهُمُ ٱلْبَأْسَآءُ وَٱلضَّرَّآءُ وَزُلْزِلُوا۟ حَتَّىٰ يَقُولَ ٱلرَّسُولُ وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ مَعَهُۥ مَتَىٰ نَصْرُ ٱللَّهِ ۗ أَلَآ إِنَّ نَصْرَ ٱللَّهِ قَرِيبٌ
3:143; 9:16.
2:178.
12:111.
对伊斯兰教义的接受不是一帆风顺的, 因而穆斯林被提醒, 在他们能够希望达到他们崇高的理想之前, 他们将必须通过严峻的考验、磨炼和苦难。
体现在 “什么时候安拉的帮助才会降临?” 这种可怜的呼救声并不意味着绝望与沮丧, 因为就安拉的先知和他的信者来说, 失望的态度是不可思议的, 与真实的信仰不协调的 (12:88)。实际上, 这句话构成了一个祈求--------诚挚地恳求安拉神速地赐予帮助的一种方式。
وَ لَمَّایَاْ تِکُمْ جملہ حالیہ ہے اور حال کا ترجمہ اردو میں قریب ترین ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ یا ’’ہوکر‘‘ یا ’’بن کر‘‘ کے لفظ بڑھا کر ہی ہو سکتا ہے۔ اس جگہ ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ کے الفاظ ہی زیادہ سجتے ہیں اور مطلب بالکل درست رہتا ہے۔
اس جگہ خدا نے نبیوں اور مومنوں پر جو مصائب آتے ہیں ان کی حکمت بتائی ہے۔ فرماتا ہے کہ ہم چاہتے تو انہیں کوئی بھی تکلیف نہ پہنچنے دیتے۔ مگر ہم نے ایسا نہیں کیا بلکہ مخالفوں کے عذاب اور تکلیفیں خدا کے نبیوں اور ان پر ایمان لانے والوں کو برابر پہنچتی رہیں اور اس میں ہماری غرض یہ تھی کہ ان کے دلوں میں دعاؤں کی تحریک زیادہ سے زیادہ پیدا ہوتی رہے اور وہ باربار ہماری طرف جھکیں تا ایک طرف ان کے دلوں میں اللہ تعالیٰ کی محبت بڑھے اور دوسری طرف جب اللہ تعالیٰ کی نصرت معجزانہ طور پر آئے تو ان کے ایمان بڑھیں اور کفار میں سے جو غور کرنے والے ہوں انہیں ہدایت حاصل ہو۔ چنانچہ فرماتا ہ
3:143; 9:16.
See 2:178.
12:111.
Acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through fiery ordeals, trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal.
Hatta also means, "so that" (Mughni). The word has also been used in this sense in 63:8.
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, When will the help of Allah come, does not denote despair or despondency because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words in reality constitute a prayer—a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help.
3:143; 9:16.
See 2:178.
12:111.
Important Words:
زلزلوا (violently shaken) is from زلزل or زل. They say زلزل الله الارض i.e. God made the earth quake violently or put the earth in a state of convulsion or violent motion. زلزله means, he put him or it in a state of commotion or agitation or violent motion; he put him in a state of great fear or terror. الزلزلة which is the noun-infinitive from زلزل means: (1) violent shaking or commotion; (2) earthquake. The word is also used, especially in its plural form, to denote afflictions, miseries and trials (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses God promised believers a reward "without reckoning" and called upon them to strive to bring all the peoples of the world under the banner of Islam so that they might become one people. The fulfilment of this great promise and the attainment of this noble object necessitated unusual sacrifices on the part of the Faithful, to which the verse under comment fittingly draws the attention of Muslims.
Indeed, acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through a fiery ordeal of trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal. Incidentally, they were also told that the sufferings and hardships they had already undergone were nothing as compared with the trials that were yet in store for them. They were being mentally prepared to meet the storm which was brewing in Mecca and which reached its culmination in the Battle of the Ditch.
The word الجنة literally meaning garden and translated here as "Heaven" need not necessarily refer to the Heaven vouchsafed to the Faithful in the Hereafter. The word is also used to express a state of success and prosperity in this very world. Nay, God has definitely promised in the Quran that the righteous would have جنة or Heaven even in this life (55:47). In this sense the word "Heaven" in this verse would refer to the great success and prosperity promised to Muslims in the preceding verse.
The word حتی translated as 'until' also means, so that or in order that. According to the latter signification, the verse would mean that God proves or tries the Prophet and the believers with difficulties and hardships and withholds His help from them so that they may invoke it by earnest prayers and supplication. This is a beautiful way by which God manifests His love for the Prophet and his followers. He delights in treating them like children, wishing them to beg of Him so that He may give them.
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, when will come the help of Allah? Does not denote despair, because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words are simply a form of prayer, a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help, and not an expression denoting despair and disappointment. The reply given by God in the words, Yea, surely the help of Allah is nigh, also corroborates this interpretation; for, if the words of the Faithful had been expressive of despair, God would certainly not have answered in that loving manner but would have taken notice of it.
a
3:143; 9:16.
b
2:178.
c
12:111.
155
对伊斯兰教义的接受不是一帆风顺的, 因而穆斯林被提醒, 在他们能够希望达到他们崇高的理想之前, 他们将必须通过严峻的考验、磨炼和苦难。
156
体现在 “什么时候安拉的帮助才会降临?” 这种可怜的呼救声并不意味着绝望与沮丧, 因为就安拉的先知和他的信者来说, 失望的态度是不可思议的, 与真实的信仰不协调的 (12:88)。实际上, 这句话构成了一个祈求--------诚挚地恳求安拉神速地赐予帮助的一种方式。
1
وَ لَمَّایَاْ تِکُمْ جملہ حالیہ ہے اور حال کا ترجمہ اردو میں قریب ترین ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ یا ’’ہوکر‘‘ یا ’’بن کر‘‘ کے لفظ بڑھا کر ہی ہو سکتا ہے۔ اس جگہ ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ کے الفاظ ہی زیادہ سجتے ہیں اور مطلب بالکل درست رہتا ہے۔
2
اس جگہ خدا نے نبیوں اور مومنوں پر جو مصائب آتے ہیں ان کی حکمت بتائی ہے۔ فرماتا ہے کہ ہم چاہتے تو انہیں کوئی بھی تکلیف نہ پہنچنے دیتے۔ مگر ہم نے ایسا نہیں کیا بلکہ مخالفوں کے عذاب اور تکلیفیں خدا کے نبیوں اور ان پر ایمان لانے والوں کو برابر پہنچتی رہیں اور اس میں ہماری غرض یہ تھی کہ ان کے دلوں میں دعاؤں کی تحریک زیادہ سے زیادہ پیدا ہوتی رہے اور وہ باربار ہماری طرف جھکیں تا ایک طرف ان کے دلوں میں اللہ تعالیٰ کی محبت بڑھے اور دوسری طرف جب اللہ تعالیٰ کی نصرت معجزانہ طور پر آئے تو ان کے ایمان بڑھیں اور کفار میں سے جو غور کرنے والے ہوں انہیں ہدایت حاصل ہو۔ چنانچہ فرماتا ہ
a
3:143; 9:16.
b
See 2:178.
c
12:111.
221
Important Words:
زلزلوا (violently shaken) is from زلزل or زل. They say زلزل الله الارض i.e. God made the earth quake violently or put the earth in a state of convulsion or violent motion. زلزله means, he put him or it in a state of commotion or agitation or violent motion; he put him in a state of great fear or terror. الزلزلة which is the noun-infinitive from زلزل means: (1) violent shaking or commotion; (2) earthquake. The word is also used, especially in its plural form, to denote afflictions, miseries and trials (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses God promised believers a reward "without reckoning" and called upon them to strive to bring all the peoples of the world under the banner of Islam so that they might become one people. The fulfilment of this great promise and the attainment of this noble object necessitated unusual sacrifices on the part of the Faithful, to which the verse under comment fittingly draws the attention of Muslims.
Indeed, acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through a fiery ordeal of trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal. Incidentally, they were also told that the sufferings and hardships they had already undergone were nothing as compared with the trials that were yet in store for them. They were being mentally prepared to meet the storm which was brewing in Mecca and which reached its culmination in the Battle of the Ditch.
The word الجنة literally meaning garden and translated here as "Heaven" need not necessarily refer to the Heaven vouchsafed to the Faithful in the Hereafter. The word is also used to express a state of success and prosperity in this very world. Nay, God has definitely promised in the Quran that the righteous would have جنة or Heaven even in this life (55:47). In this sense the word "Heaven" in this verse would refer to the great success and prosperity promised to Muslims in the preceding verse.
The word حتی translated as 'until' also means, so that or in order that. According to the latter signification, the verse would mean that God proves or tries the Prophet and the believers with difficulties and hardships and withholds His help from them so that they may invoke it by earnest prayers and supplication. This is a beautiful way by which God manifests His love for the Prophet and his followers. He delights in treating them like children, wishing them to beg of Him so that He may give them.
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, when will come the help of Allah? Does not denote despair, because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words are simply a form of prayer, a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help, and not an expression denoting despair and disappointment. The reply given by God in the words, Yea, surely the help of Allah is nigh, also corroborates this interpretation; for, if the words of the Faithful had been expressive of despair, God would certainly not have answered in that loving manner but would have taken notice of it.
a
3:143; 9:16.
b
See 2:178.
c
12:111.
256
Acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through fiery ordeals, trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal.
256A
Hatta also means, "so that" (Mughni). The word has also been used in this sense in 63:8.
257
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, When will the help of Allah come, does not denote despair or despondency because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words in reality constitute a prayer—a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help.
يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ مَاذَا يُنفِقُونَ ۖ قُلْ مَآ أَنفَقْتُم مِّنْ خَيْرٍ فَلِلْوَٰلِدَيْنِ وَٱلْأَقْرَبِينَ وَٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰ وَٱلْمَسَٰكِينِ وَٱبْنِ ٱلسَّبِيلِ ۗ وَمَا تَفْعَلُوا۟ مِنْ خَيْرٍ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِهِۦ عَلِيمٌ
معترض اعتراض کرتے ہیں کہ سوال کچھ ہے اور جواب کچھ ہے۔ پوچھا تو یہ گیا ہے کہ کیا خرچ کریں اور جواب یہ دیا جاتا ہے کہ جو کچھ بھی مال میں سے خرچ کرو وہ فلاں فلاں کو دو۔ اس کا جواب یہ ہے کہ یہ اعتراض قلتِ تدبر کی وجہ سے ہے۔ سوال کا جواب آیت میں موجود ہے۔ جب فرماتا ہے کہ جو کچھ بھی اچھے مال سے خرچ کرو تو اس میں سائل کا جواب مکمل آگیا ہے۔ اول یہ کہ کوئی حد بندی نہیں‘ جتنے کی توفیق ہو اتنا خرچ کرو۔ دوم یہ کہ اس امر کا لحاظ رکھو کہ جو خرچ کرو وہ طیّب مال ہو۔ جو لوگ حرام کماتے ہیں اور اس میں سے خدا کی راہ میں خرچ کرکے سمجھتے ہیں کہ ہم نے گویا اپنے گناہ کا کفار کر دیا وہ غلطی پر ہیں۔ خ
2:178; 4:37.
The verse signifies that whatever is spent should have been honestly acquired. What is spent must be good also in the sense that it should be acceptable to the receiver and should satisfy his need and that the object on which it is spent is also worthy and laudable.
2:178; 4:37.
Important Words:
خیر (good and abundant wealth). See 2:181.
اقربین (near relatives) is the plural of اقرب (derived from قریب) meaning, one nearer; a near relative (Aqrab).
Commentary:
When the Companions of the Holy Prophet were told that they could not win the pleasure of God and enter Heaven unless they were made to pass through sufferings and afflictions like those that had gone before, they at once signified their readiness to part with their wealth and property in the cause of God and asked the Holy Prophet to let them know what they should spend in order to win the pleasure of God and attain spiritual progress. They did not wait for the threatened trials to actually overtake them, but were prepared to make every kind of sacrifice in advance. They simply wanted to be told what form their sacrifice should take.
In reply to their eager question, God’s reply also indicates a sort of eagerness, as if He meant to impart to the Faithful the relevant commandment in its entirety, without waiting for any further question on their part; for whereas their question related only "what" they should spend, God’s answer goes a step further, describing also "on whom" the money is to be spent. As to the question, what is to be spent should be (1) well-acquired and (2) abundant. In moments of great national need, there can be no hope of success unless people spend freely and generously. But as free and generous expenditure carries with it the danger of weak people resorting to acquiring wealth by unfair means, therefore the condition about the money being "good" has been added.
As to the other part of the anticipated question, i.e. on whom should the money be spent, the Quran says that money should be spent on parents and near relatives (lit. near ones) and orphans and the needy and the wayfarer. The five classes include all such persons as generally stand in need of help. The two first-mentioned classes include relatives, neighbours and friends who go to form the group that immediately surrounds a man and must claim his first attention, owning to personal relationship or personal contact. Then follow two classes that deserve help owing to their particular circumstance, orphans being without anyone to support them and the needy without any means of support. Lastly comes the wayfarer, whose claim consists in his being a stranger with no friend, no relative and no supporter. By pointing out these five classes as deserving of help, the Quran desires to hint that unless the entire community, including those who come to stay with them temporarily, is prepared to fight in the cause of Allah and unless the well-to-do classes help the weaker ones in their preparation for the national struggle, Muslims cannot present a united front nor can their efforts bring about the desired result. Each and every person must gird up his loins to contribute his fullest possible share, and those who cannot do so for want of means must receive help from others who can afford such help.
d
2:178; 4:37.
157
本节经文的意思是, 凡花费掉的, 应被真正得到。所花费掉的, 也必定是有益的。这所谓有益那就是对接受者来说是可接受的、并应满足他的需要, 而所花费的宗旨也要有价值且值得称赞。
3
معترض اعتراض کرتے ہیں کہ سوال کچھ ہے اور جواب کچھ ہے۔ پوچھا تو یہ گیا ہے کہ کیا خرچ کریں اور جواب یہ دیا جاتا ہے کہ جو کچھ بھی مال میں سے خرچ کرو وہ فلاں فلاں کو دو۔ اس کا جواب یہ ہے کہ یہ اعتراض قلتِ تدبر کی وجہ سے ہے۔ سوال کا جواب آیت میں موجود ہے۔ جب فرماتا ہے کہ جو کچھ بھی اچھے مال سے خرچ کرو تو اس میں سائل کا جواب مکمل آگیا ہے۔ اول یہ کہ کوئی حد بندی نہیں‘ جتنے کی توفیق ہو اتنا خرچ کرو۔ دوم یہ کہ اس امر کا لحاظ رکھو کہ جو خرچ کرو وہ طیّب مال ہو۔ جو لوگ حرام کماتے ہیں اور اس میں سے خدا کی راہ میں خرچ کرکے سمجھتے ہیں کہ ہم نے گویا اپنے گناہ کا کفار کر دیا وہ غلطی پر ہیں۔ خ
a
2:178; 4:37.
222
Important Words:
خیر (good and abundant wealth). See 2:181.
اقربین (near relatives) is the plural of اقرب (derived from قریب) meaning, one nearer; a near relative (Aqrab).
Commentary:
When the Companions of the Holy Prophet were told that they could not win the pleasure of God and enter Heaven unless they were made to pass through sufferings and afflictions like those that had gone before, they at once signified their readiness to part with their wealth and property in the cause of God and asked the Holy Prophet to let them know what they should spend in order to win the pleasure of God and attain spiritual progress. They did not wait for the threatened trials to actually overtake them, but were prepared to make every kind of sacrifice in advance. They simply wanted to be told what form their sacrifice should take.
In reply to their eager question, God’s reply also indicates a sort of eagerness, as if He meant to impart to the Faithful the relevant commandment in its entirety, without waiting for any further question on their part; for whereas their question related only "what" they should spend, God’s answer goes a step further, describing also "on whom" the money is to be spent. As to the question, what is to be spent should be (1) well-acquired and (2) abundant. In moments of great national need, there can be no hope of success unless people spend freely and generously. But as free and generous expenditure carries with it the danger of weak people resorting to acquiring wealth by unfair means, therefore the condition about the money being "good" has been added.
As to the other part of the anticipated question, i.e. on whom should the money be spent, the Quran says that money should be spent on parents and near relatives (lit. near ones) and orphans and the needy and the wayfarer. The five classes include all such persons as generally stand in need of help. The two first-mentioned classes include relatives, neighbours and friends who go to form the group that immediately surrounds a man and must claim his first attention, owning to personal relationship or personal contact. Then follow two classes that deserve help owing to their particular circumstance, orphans being without anyone to support them and the needy without any means of support. Lastly comes the wayfarer, whose claim consists in his being a stranger with no friend, no relative and no supporter. By pointing out these five classes as deserving of help, the Quran desires to hint that unless the entire community, including those who come to stay with them temporarily, is prepared to fight in the cause of Allah and unless the well-to-do classes help the weaker ones in their preparation for the national struggle, Muslims cannot present a united front nor can their efforts bring about the desired result. Each and every person must gird up his loins to contribute his fullest possible share, and those who cannot do so for want of means must receive help from others who can afford such help.
d
2:178; 4:37.
258
The verse signifies that whatever is spent should have been honestly acquired. What is spent must be good also in the sense that it should be acceptable to the receiver and should satisfy his need and that the object on which it is spent is also worthy and laudable.
كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ وَهُوَ كُرْهٌ لَّكُمْ ۖ وَعَسَىٰٓ أَن تَكْرَهُوا۟ شَيْـًٔا وَهُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۖ وَعَسَىٰٓ أَن تُحِبُّوا۟ شَيْـًٔا وَهُوَ شَرٌّ لَّكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ وَأَنتُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ
شَرٌّ کا لفظ مقابلہ میں برا ہونے پر دلالت کرتا ہے۔ لیکن اردو میں اس سے مفہوم ادا نہیں ہوتا۔ اس لئے اس کے لئے ’’دوسری چیز‘‘ کے الفاظ بڑھائے گئے ہیں تاکہ مقابلہ پر دلالت کرے۔
8:6.
Muslims hated war not because they were afraid of it, but because they did not like to shed human blood; also because they thought that a peaceful atmosphere was much more conducive to the spread and propagation of Islam than a state of war.
8:6.
Important Words:
کرہ (repugnant) is the noun-infinitive from کرہ i.e. he disliked. کرہ means, a thing which is disliked; a thing which one is required to do against his wish or liking (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In 2:215, God warned Muslims that in order to reach the promised goal they must pass through an ordeal of poverty, affliction and violent shaking. In conformity with the ordeal of poverty, verse 2:216 called upon them to be prepared to make great monetary sacrifices. Now in the verse under comment, God refers to the ordeal of affliction and violent shakings by drawing the attention of the Faithful to the menace of war surrounding them. As, however, Muslims were averse to war, the verse also enjoins them to put implicit trust in the guidance of Allah: for, it may be that you dislike a thing while it is good for you.
But the aversion of the Holy Prophet’s Companions from war was not due to cowardice. They did not dislike war because they thought that they were few in number or because they were not properly equipped. History gives the direct lie to all such insinuations. Muslims hated war, because they did not like to shed human blood; also because they thought that a peaceful atmosphere was more conducive to the propagation of Islam than a state of war, for the obvious reason that atmosphere of peace gave disbelievers more opportunities for dispassionate consideration of the noble teachings of Islam.
But it was too late. The leaders of the disbelievers had gone too far in their evil designs against Islam and were bent upon extirpating the New Faith. It was evidently a war of self-defence, and he who shirks a war of self-defence, commits an act of suicide (22:40, 41). Thus the verse constitutes an eloquent testimony to the love of peace of the Holy Prophet’sCompanions and a convincing repudiation of the mischievous accusation that it was for the sake of booty or for spreading their faith by force that the early Muslims resorted to arms.
The clause, it may be that you dislike a thing while it is good for you and it may be that you like a thing while it is bad for you, points to a very important principle, i.e. that errors of judgement mostly result from two causes: (1) abuse of the sentiment of love; and (2) abuse of the sentiment of dislike or hatred. One should, therefore, be particularly careful about one’s judgement when one is swayed by either of these two sentiments. They undermine dispassionate thinking as nothing else does. Elsewhere the Quran gives a still clearer warning to Muslims to beware of the abuse of the sentiment of love and hatred (64:15, 16 & 5:9).
a
8:6.
158
穆斯林憎恨战争并不是因为他们害怕战争, 而是因为他们不喜欢人类流血; 还因为他们认为一个和平的环境要比战争状态更有利于伊斯兰教的扩展与传播。
1
شَرٌّ کا لفظ مقابلہ میں برا ہونے پر دلالت کرتا ہے۔ لیکن اردو میں اس سے مفہوم ادا نہیں ہوتا۔ اس لئے اس کے لئے ’’دوسری چیز‘‘ کے الفاظ بڑھائے گئے ہیں تاکہ مقابلہ پر دلالت کرے۔
a
8:6.
223
Important Words:
کرہ (repugnant) is the noun-infinitive from کرہ i.e. he disliked. کرہ means, a thing which is disliked; a thing which one is required to do against his wish or liking (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In 2:215, God warned Muslims that in order to reach the promised goal they must pass through an ordeal of poverty, affliction and violent shaking. In conformity with the ordeal of poverty, verse 2:216 called upon them to be prepared to make great monetary sacrifices. Now in the verse under comment, God refers to the ordeal of affliction and violent shakings by drawing the attention of the Faithful to the menace of war surrounding them. As, however, Muslims were averse to war, the verse also enjoins them to put implicit trust in the guidance of Allah: for, it may be that you dislike a thing while it is good for you.
But the aversion of the Holy Prophet’s Companions from war was not due to cowardice. They did not dislike war because they thought that they were few in number or because they were not properly equipped. History gives the direct lie to all such insinuations. Muslims hated war, because they did not like to shed human blood; also because they thought that a peaceful atmosphere was more conducive to the propagation of Islam than a state of war, for the obvious reason that atmosphere of peace gave disbelievers more opportunities for dispassionate consideration of the noble teachings of Islam.
But it was too late. The leaders of the disbelievers had gone too far in their evil designs against Islam and were bent upon extirpating the New Faith. It was evidently a war of self-defence, and he who shirks a war of self-defence, commits an act of suicide (22:40, 41). Thus the verse constitutes an eloquent testimony to the love of peace of the Holy Prophet’sCompanions and a convincing repudiation of the mischievous accusation that it was for the sake of booty or for spreading their faith by force that the early Muslims resorted to arms.
The clause, it may be that you dislike a thing while it is good for you and it may be that you like a thing while it is bad for you, points to a very important principle, i.e. that errors of judgement mostly result from two causes: (1) abuse of the sentiment of love; and (2) abuse of the sentiment of dislike or hatred. One should, therefore, be particularly careful about one’s judgement when one is swayed by either of these two sentiments. They undermine dispassionate thinking as nothing else does. Elsewhere the Quran gives a still clearer warning to Muslims to beware of the abuse of the sentiment of love and hatred (64:15, 16 & 5:9).
a
8:6.
259
Muslims hated war not because they were afraid of it, but because they did not like to shed human blood; also because they thought that a peaceful atmosphere was much more conducive to the spread and propagation of Islam than a state of war.
يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلشَّهْرِ ٱلْحَرَامِ قِتَالٍ فِيهِ ۖ قُلْ قِتَالٌ فِيهِ كَبِيرٌ ۖ وَصَدٌّ عَن سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَكُفْرٌۢ بِهِۦ وَٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ وَإِخْرَاجُ أَهْلِهِۦ مِنْهُ أَكْبَرُ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَٱلْفِتْنَةُ أَكْبَرُ مِنَ ٱلْقَتْلِ ۗ وَلَا يَزَالُونَ يُقَٰتِلُونَكُمْ حَتَّىٰ يَرُدُّوكُمْ عَن دِينِكُمْ إِنِ ٱسْتَطَٰعُوا۟ ۚ وَمَن يَرْتَدِدْ مِنكُمْ عَن دِينِهِۦ فَيَمُتْ وَهُوَ كَافِرٌ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ حَبِطَتْ أَعْمَٰلُهُمْ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ ۖ وَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ أَصْحَٰبُ ٱلنَّارِ ۖ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ
2:192.
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
信者们被告知, 假如不信仰者亵渎了圣月的圣洁, 他们应毫不犹豫地在圣月中惩罚他们, 只有这样, 神圣事物的圣洁性才能得到保障 (2:195)。注释者通常阐述, 而事实上也有这样的传说, 大意是说, 有一次穆圣派遣阿布杜拉•彬•贾希 (عَبْدُالله بِنْ جَحْش, ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh) 去传递有关一伙古来西人出发去麦加的消息。当阿布杜拉 (عَبْدُالله, ‘Abdullah) 和他的同伴到达一个名叫纳赫拉 (نَخْلَة, Nakhla) 的地方时, 他们遇上了一小伙人。阿布杜拉袭击了这伙人, 杀死了其中的一个并俘获了两个。发生这件事的日期是有疑问的, 有的认为它是在圣月中, 而另一些不以为然。消息传到麦加, 古来西人利用关于日期的怀疑而提出抗议, 说是穆斯林亵渎了圣月。加注的本节经文就在当时被启示了。
یعنی ان دونوں کی حرمت کو ضائع کرنے کی کوشش کرنا ہے۔
2:192.
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
The believers were told that if disbelievers violated the sanctity of the Sacred Months, they should not hesitate to punish them in the Sacred Months, for thus alone could the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195). Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to this effect, that on one occasion the Holy Prophet sent ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his companions reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party. ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date on which this happened was doubtful, some considering it to be one within the Sacred Month and others not. The news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt and protested that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion.
2:192.
3:84, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
Important Words:
کبیر (great transgression) really stands for ذنب کبیر i.e. a great sin or great transgression or great offence. اکبر is in the comparative degree and means, a greater sin, etc.
صد (to hinder) is the infinitive from صد. They say صدہ i.e. he prevented him; he turned him back. صد عنه اومنه means, he kept back from it. Thus the word is both transitive and intransitive. صد, therefore, means: (1) to hinder or to prevent; (2) a hindrance or a barrier; (3) a mountain or a wall, etc., because it serves as a barrier (Aqrab).
یردوکم (turn you back) and یرتدد (turns back) are both derived from رد. They say ردہ i.e. he turned him back; and ارتد i.e.he himself turned back. ارتد عن الاسلام means, he turned back from Islam and reverted to a state of disbelief. مرتد means, one who turns back from his religion, particularly from Islam; one who apostatizes (Taj).
حبطت (shall be in vain). حبط البعیر means, the stomach of the camel became inflated and his belly became bound by eating unwholesome food. حبط عمله means: (1) his work or deed became null and void and went for nothing; (2) his work or deed became evil and corrupt. حبط دمه means, his blood went unavenged. حبط ماء البئر means, the water of the well receded and went down never to return to its original level (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words translated as "to be ungrateful to Him and the Sacred Mosque" may also be rendered as "to be ungrateful to Him and to hinder men from the Sacred Mosque".
The Quran has already explained that if disbelievers violate the sanctity of a sacred month, Muslims may also retaliate in a sacred month; for thus only can the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195).
The present verse provides a further reason for defending Islam, if need be, in a sacred month. Disbelievers, particularly those of Mecca, had violated the sanctity of things far more sacred than a "sacred month"––they were trying forcibly to turn men form the way of God; they were preventing people from approaching the Sacred Mosque and they had forced the Muslim dwellers of Mecca to flee from it. This was a form of persecution which was certainly much more heinous than fighting in a Sacred Month.
Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to the effect, that once the Holy Prophet sent one of his Companions, named ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh, to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his comrades reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party proceeding to Mecca. Guided by his own judgement and without any instruction to that effect from the Prophet, ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date was doubtful, some considering it to be as one of the Sacred Month and others as not. When the news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt as regards date and clamoured that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion (Tabari, Hisham & Zurqani).
The verse acknowledges the sanctity of the Sacred Months and considers it an act of sin and transgression knowingly to fight in a sacred month, but forcefully points out that the sanctities which disbelievers were violating were far more worthy of safeguarding. Disbelievers were forcibly preventing people from accepting Islam. They did not allow Muslims to approach the Sacred Mosque and they had mercilessly turned the Prophet and his followers out of their homes.
The verse should not be understood to imply that Muslims did start a fight in a sacred month, it only purports to bring home to disbelievers the fact that in view of their persistent violation of highly sacred thing, it does not lie in their mouth to accuse Muslim of violating the sanctity of a sacred month.
The clause it is they whose works shall be vain in this world and the next does not mean that everything that a renegade from Islam, or, for that matter, everything that a disbeliever, does will go for nothing and produce no result. The clause only means that such actions of the renegades as they might do to weaken the cause of Islam in this world as well as those of their actions which they might perform in opposition to the teaching of Islam in order to win the pleasure of God in the world to come, will all be in vain. Thus the clause does not refer to such good actions as a person may perform in the state o unbelief; for, as the Quran expressly states, these must have their reward (99:8) which may either take the form of the acceptance of Islam or that of the lightening of punishment. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said about his uncle Abu Talib that on account of the good treatment the latter extended to him, he is likely to be only lightly punished for his non-acceptance of Islam (Bukhari). On another occasion when Hakim bin Hizam, a nephew of his wife Khadijah, asked the Prophet whether he would get any reward for the good deeds he did before he accepted Islam, the Holy Prophet said, "your very acceptance of Islam is a reward thereof" (Bukhari).
The clause, their works shall be vain in this world and the next, also signifies that if such men as apostatize from Islam had not done so, their deeds would have brought them the great reward promised to Muslims both in this world and the next, but by apostatizing from Islam they had totally deprived themselves of this twofold reward.
Finally, the clause, and they will not cease fighting you until they turn you back from your faith, if they can, throws a flood of light on the attitude of disbelievers towards Muslim. They were not only the first to begin hostilities, but had also vowed not to cease fighting until Islam had been totally wiped out from Arabia and not a soul remained to call himself a Muslim. This clear testimony of the Quran should be an eye-opener for those who accuse Muslims of being aggressors in their early struggle against disbelievers. The words, if they can, are highly eulogistic of the Companions of the Holy Prophet. Do what they could, disbelievers would never be able to turn back Muslims from their faith. Their love for Islam was too deep to be extirpated by persecution however severe and bitter it might be.
b
2:192.
c
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
d
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
159
信者们被告知, 假如不信仰者亵渎了圣月的圣洁, 他们应毫不犹豫地在圣月中惩罚他们, 只有这样, 神圣事物的圣洁性才能得到保障 (2:195)。注释者通常阐述, 而事实上也有这样的传说, 大意是说, 有一次穆圣派遣阿布杜拉•彬•贾希 (عَبْدُالله بِنْ جَحْش, ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh) 去传递有关一伙古来西人出发去麦加的消息。当阿布杜拉 (عَبْدُالله, ‘Abdullah) 和他的同伴到达一个名叫纳赫拉 (نَخْلَة, Nakhla) 的地方时, 他们遇上了一小伙人。阿布杜拉袭击了这伙人, 杀死了其中的一个并俘获了两个。发生这件事的日期是有疑问的, 有的认为它是在圣月中, 而另一些不以为然。消息传到麦加, 古来西人利用关于日期的怀疑而提出抗议, 说是穆斯林亵渎了圣月。加注的本节经文就在当时被启示了。
2
یعنی ان دونوں کی حرمت کو ضائع کرنے کی کوشش کرنا ہے۔
a
2:192.
b
3:84, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
c
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
224
Important Words:
کبیر (great transgression) really stands for ذنب کبیر i.e. a great sin or great transgression or great offence. اکبر is in the comparative degree and means, a greater sin, etc.
صد (to hinder) is the infinitive from صد. They say صدہ i.e. he prevented him; he turned him back. صد عنه اومنه means, he kept back from it. Thus the word is both transitive and intransitive. صد, therefore, means: (1) to hinder or to prevent; (2) a hindrance or a barrier; (3) a mountain or a wall, etc., because it serves as a barrier (Aqrab).
یردوکم (turn you back) and یرتدد (turns back) are both derived from رد. They say ردہ i.e. he turned him back; and ارتد i.e.he himself turned back. ارتد عن الاسلام means, he turned back from Islam and reverted to a state of disbelief. مرتد means, one who turns back from his religion, particularly from Islam; one who apostatizes (Taj).
حبطت (shall be in vain). حبط البعیر means, the stomach of the camel became inflated and his belly became bound by eating unwholesome food. حبط عمله means: (1) his work or deed became null and void and went for nothing; (2) his work or deed became evil and corrupt. حبط دمه means, his blood went unavenged. حبط ماء البئر means, the water of the well receded and went down never to return to its original level (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words translated as "to be ungrateful to Him and the Sacred Mosque" may also be rendered as "to be ungrateful to Him and to hinder men from the Sacred Mosque".
The Quran has already explained that if disbelievers violate the sanctity of a sacred month, Muslims may also retaliate in a sacred month; for thus only can the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195).
The present verse provides a further reason for defending Islam, if need be, in a sacred month. Disbelievers, particularly those of Mecca, had violated the sanctity of things far more sacred than a "sacred month"––they were trying forcibly to turn men form the way of God; they were preventing people from approaching the Sacred Mosque and they had forced the Muslim dwellers of Mecca to flee from it. This was a form of persecution which was certainly much more heinous than fighting in a Sacred Month.
Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to the effect, that once the Holy Prophet sent one of his Companions, named ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh, to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his comrades reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party proceeding to Mecca. Guided by his own judgement and without any instruction to that effect from the Prophet, ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date was doubtful, some considering it to be as one of the Sacred Month and others as not. When the news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt as regards date and clamoured that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion (Tabari, Hisham & Zurqani).
The verse acknowledges the sanctity of the Sacred Months and considers it an act of sin and transgression knowingly to fight in a sacred month, but forcefully points out that the sanctities which disbelievers were violating were far more worthy of safeguarding. Disbelievers were forcibly preventing people from accepting Islam. They did not allow Muslims to approach the Sacred Mosque and they had mercilessly turned the Prophet and his followers out of their homes.
The verse should not be understood to imply that Muslims did start a fight in a sacred month, it only purports to bring home to disbelievers the fact that in view of their persistent violation of highly sacred thing, it does not lie in their mouth to accuse Muslim of violating the sanctity of a sacred month.
The clause it is they whose works shall be vain in this world and the next does not mean that everything that a renegade from Islam, or, for that matter, everything that a disbeliever, does will go for nothing and produce no result. The clause only means that such actions of the renegades as they might do to weaken the cause of Islam in this world as well as those of their actions which they might perform in opposition to the teaching of Islam in order to win the pleasure of God in the world to come, will all be in vain. Thus the clause does not refer to such good actions as a person may perform in the state o unbelief; for, as the Quran expressly states, these must have their reward (99:8) which may either take the form of the acceptance of Islam or that of the lightening of punishment. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said about his uncle Abu Talib that on account of the good treatment the latter extended to him, he is likely to be only lightly punished for his non-acceptance of Islam (Bukhari). On another occasion when Hakim bin Hizam, a nephew of his wife Khadijah, asked the Prophet whether he would get any reward for the good deeds he did before he accepted Islam, the Holy Prophet said, "your very acceptance of Islam is a reward thereof" (Bukhari).
The clause, their works shall be vain in this world and the next, also signifies that if such men as apostatize from Islam had not done so, their deeds would have brought them the great reward promised to Muslims both in this world and the next, but by apostatizing from Islam they had totally deprived themselves of this twofold reward.
Finally, the clause, and they will not cease fighting you until they turn you back from your faith, if they can, throws a flood of light on the attitude of disbelievers towards Muslim. They were not only the first to begin hostilities, but had also vowed not to cease fighting until Islam had been totally wiped out from Arabia and not a soul remained to call himself a Muslim. This clear testimony of the Quran should be an eye-opener for those who accuse Muslims of being aggressors in their early struggle against disbelievers. The words, if they can, are highly eulogistic of the Companions of the Holy Prophet. Do what they could, disbelievers would never be able to turn back Muslims from their faith. Their love for Islam was too deep to be extirpated by persecution however severe and bitter it might be.
a
2:192.
b
3:87, 91; 4:138; 5:55; 47:26.
c
3:23; 7:148; 18:106.
260
The believers were told that if disbelievers violated the sanctity of the Sacred Months, they should not hesitate to punish them in the Sacred Months, for thus alone could the sanctity of a sacred thing be safeguarded (2:195). Commentators generally state, and in fact there are also traditions to this effect, that on one occasion the Holy Prophet sent ‘Abdullah bin Jahsh to bring news about a party of the Quraish proceeding to Mecca. When ‘Abdullah and his companions reached a place called Nakhlah, they met a small party. ‘Abdullah attacked the party, killing one of them and capturing two. The date on which this happened was doubtful, some considering it to be one within the Sacred Month and others not. The news reached Mecca, the Quraish took advantage of the doubt and protested that the Muslims had violated the Sacred Month. The verse under comment was revealed on that occasion.
إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَٱلَّذِينَ هَاجَرُوا۟ وَجَٰهَدُوا۟ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَرْجُونَ رَحْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
8:75; 9:20.
8:75; 9:20.
8:75; 9:20.
Important Words:
ھاجروا (migrated) is derived from ھجر. They say ھجر الشیء i.e. (1) he cut it or he severed it; (2) he avoided it or kept away from it, or he gave it up. ھاجر means, he left one place to settle in another (Aqrab). The word is particularly used about one who leaves a place where religion is persecuted and goes to a place where there is no such persecution, especially to a place where there exists means of serving and supporting the faith. The early Muslims who migrated from Mecca to Medina were known as مھاجرین i.e. those who left Mecca and settled in Medina with the intention of helping the cause of Islam.
جاھدوا (strive hard) is derived from جھد which means, he strove or laboured hard, taking extraordinary pains. جھد فی الامرmeans, he used his utmost power in prosecuting the affair. جاھدالعدو means, he fought with the enemy exerting his utmost effort to repel him, his enemy doing the like. جھاد means, exerting one’s utmost power in contending with an object of disapprobation; and this is of three kinds, namely, (1) with a visible enemy (2) with Satan, and (3) with one’s self (Lane).
یرجون (who hope) is derived from رجا which gives twofold meaning. They say رجا الشیء meaning: (1) he hoped to get the thing; (2) he was afraid of the thing (Aqrab). When used in the sense of hoping, it is used on occasions when the thing hoped for is likely to afford pleasure (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse holds out the promise to Muslims, and they are indeed buoyed up with the hope, that though now they are beset with great difficulties and unusual hardships, the time is fast approaching when all difficulties would disappear and they would become heirs to God’s mercy both in this world and the next.
As the context shows, the words, those who believe, occurring in the verse refer to such of the believers as resided in Medina and had not been called upon to migrate. Thus the verse mentions two classes of believers who can hope to get Allah’s mercy; (1) believers resident in Medina, i.e. the Helpers, who engaged themselves in جھاد or holy war against the forces of Satan; and (2) Migrants from Mecca who were also engaged in such war. The words, Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful, have been added to point out that Allah will forgive the above-mentioned two classes of believers their sins and shortcomings which will not stand in the way of their winning God’s mercy, provided they remain sincere in their faith and continue striving hard in the cause of Allah, for, as the Quran elsewhere explains, the good works of a man drive away his evil ones (11:115).
a
8:75; 9:20.
a
8:75; 9:20.
225
Important Words:
ھاجروا (migrated) is derived from ھجر. They say ھجر الشیء i.e. (1) he cut it or he severed it; (2) he avoided it or kept away from it, or he gave it up. ھاجر means, he left one place to settle in another (Aqrab). The word is particularly used about one who leaves a place where religion is persecuted and goes to a place where there is no such persecution, especially to a place where there exists means of serving and supporting the faith. The early Muslims who migrated from Mecca to Medina were known as مھاجرین i.e. those who left Mecca and settled in Medina with the intention of helping the cause of Islam.
جاھدوا (strive hard) is derived from جھد which means, he strove or laboured hard, taking extraordinary pains. جھد فی الامرmeans, he used his utmost power in prosecuting the affair. جاھدالعدو means, he fought with the enemy exerting his utmost effort to repel him, his enemy doing the like. جھاد means, exerting one’s utmost power in contending with an object of disapprobation; and this is of three kinds, namely, (1) with a visible enemy (2) with Satan, and (3) with one’s self (Lane).
یرجون (who hope) is derived from رجا which gives twofold meaning. They say رجا الشیء meaning: (1) he hoped to get the thing; (2) he was afraid of the thing (Aqrab). When used in the sense of hoping, it is used on occasions when the thing hoped for is likely to afford pleasure (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse holds out the promise to Muslims, and they are indeed buoyed up with the hope, that though now they are beset with great difficulties and unusual hardships, the time is fast approaching when all difficulties would disappear and they would become heirs to God’s mercy both in this world and the next.
As the context shows, the words, those who believe, occurring in the verse refer to such of the believers as resided in Medina and had not been called upon to migrate. Thus the verse mentions two classes of believers who can hope to get Allah’s mercy; (1) believers resident in Medina, i.e. the Helpers, who engaged themselves in جھاد or holy war against the forces of Satan; and (2) Migrants from Mecca who were also engaged in such war. The words, Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful, have been added to point out that Allah will forgive the above-mentioned two classes of believers their sins and shortcomings which will not stand in the way of their winning God’s mercy, provided they remain sincere in their faith and continue striving hard in the cause of Allah, for, as the Quran elsewhere explains, the good works of a man drive away his evil ones (11:115).
d
8:75; 9:20.
۞ يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلْخَمْرِ وَٱلْمَيْسِرِ ۖ قُلْ فِيهِمَآ إِثْمٌ كَبِيرٌ وَمَنَٰفِعُ لِلنَّاسِ وَإِثْمُهُمَآ أَكْبَرُ مِن نَّفْعِهِمَا ۗ وَيَسْـَٔلُونَكَ مَاذَا يُنفِقُونَ قُلِ ٱلْعَفْوَ ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَفَكَّرُونَ
5:91, 92.
خَمَرَالشَّیْءَ (Khamarash-Shai’a) 意指, 他掩藏或遮盖或隐瞒了这事情。酒被称为 خَمْر (Khamr) 因为它遮盖、隐藏或影响才智或理性, 或因为它搅昏和刺激头脑, 以致使它失去了控制能力。这词特别用来指由葡萄配制的酒, 也指一切麻醉品 (Lane)。 “酒精中毒是导致疾病的一个重要因素; 而在所有的疾病中, 饮酒过度的人是糟糕的病人。在流行病中, 饮酒人中间的死亡率特别高, 而对疾病、损伤和疲劳的一般的抵抗能力也被减少……。酒精中毒还减少长寿的可能性; 英国人寿保险公司发现, 据调查, 不饮酒者的寿命大约比饮酒的人长一倍。酒精中毒和犯罪的密切联系是众所周知的; 而贝尔 (Baer)、库雷拉 (Kurella) 和加拉符尔丁 (Gallavardin) 及锡卡尔特 (Sichart) 的统计资料表明, 所有犯罪分子中有25%到85%是酒鬼。……酒精中毒的不良后果在酒鬼的后代中是明显的……羊痫疯、精神病、白痴以及各种形式的肉体的、精神的和道德的衰退, 很不均衡地流行于过量饮酒者的后代中。” (Jew. Enc.) “饮酒所造成的影响几乎完全来自它对神经系统的干扰作用, 当进入酗酒的严重状况时, 将出现理性与判断力中止的现象。” (Enc. Brit.)。“至于过量饮酒者与违反道德规范及国家法律之间的密切联系则受到普遍的证明。这是理智的和道德的高级官能机构瘫痪的直接后果, 从而使各种低级的爱好得到放任。” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)
اَيْسَرَالرَّجُلُ (Aisarar-Rajulu) 的意思是, 人变得富裕。مَيْسَرْ (Maisar) 之所以如此称谓是因为赌徒力求迅速而容易地致富而不想操一操心, 以艰苦的劳动来获得财富; “赌博的这种邪恶的倾向从来没有受到怀疑。实质上, 这是对社会有害的: 它使同情心凋谢, 助长自私自利因而产生在品格上的全面坠落。这是一种内在的野蛮的习性……。其动机是仔细掩盖起来的贪婪。这是一种妄想得到财富而付出代价的企图。这是违背对称规律的。这是一种双方合同的掠夺, 正像双方的决斗, 是互相协定的彼此凶杀。它由贪婪而引起, 导致懒散。此外它还向运气求援。为了碰运气, 行为的主宰准备破坏道德秩序和生活的稳定。它全神贯注于钱财上, 而由此失去对人生目的更有价值的注意力” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)。
伊斯兰教的特点是决不全面谴责一件事, 但大方而直率地承认哪怕在这件事内可能发现的最小的善举。伊斯兰教禁止某些事情并不是认为它们一无是处, 而是它们的损害要超过它们的益处, 因为世界上不存在完全无益的东西。由于麻醉物和投机这种玩艺儿有极大的危害而加以禁止, 另一方面并没有不承认它们具有少量益处。
عَفْو (‘Afw) 的意思是, (a) 超出或高于所需要的; 而所花费的不致使给予的人发生困苦; (b) 一件东西中的最好部分; (c) 不被要求的给予 (اَقْرَبْ)。一般信者必须花费他们自己的合理需要满足之后的剩余部分, 而期望那些高级的信者花费他们的财产的最好部份。可是, 假如这款项是为了全体信者集体使用的, 那就意味着在战争时期他们只应当给自己保留一分还可勉强满足生活之需的财产。
اِثْمٌ کے معنے گناہ کے ہیں اور کبھی گناہ کی سزا کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ قرآن کریم میں ہے۔ وَمَنْ یَّفْعَلْ ذٰلِکَ یَلْقَ اَثَامًا (فرقان: ۶۹) یعنی اپنے گناہ کی سزا بھگتے گا۔ ان معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے گناہ اور نقصان کے معنے کیے گئے ہیں۔ لیکن ’’اور نقصان‘‘ کے لفظوں کو خطوط وحدانی میں لکھ دیا گیا ہے۔
اسی طرح اِثْمٌ کے معنے نیکیوں سے روکنے کے ہیں (مفردات) پس اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ ان افعال کے نتیجہ میں نیکیوں سے محرومی ان کے منافع سے زیادہ ہے۔ یہ معنے گو ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مشکل ہیں لیکن تفسیر کے لحاظ سے بہت اعلیٰ ہیں کیونکہ حقیقت
عَفْو کے تین معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) خِیَارُ الشَّیْئِ وَاَطْیَبُہٗ یعنی سب سے اچھی اور پاکیزہ شے (۲) مَایَفْضُلُ عَنِ النَّفَقَۃِ وَلَاعُسْرَ عَلٰی صَاحِبِہٖ فِیْ اِعْطَآئِہٖ جو اپنے ضروری خرچ سے بچ جائے اور دینے والے کو اس کے دینے سے تکلیف نہ پہنچے (۳) یُقَالُ اَعْطَیْتُہٗ عَفْوَ الْمَالِ اَیْ بِغَیْرِ مَسْأَلَۃٍ یعنی عفو کے معنے بغیر مانگے دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) پہلے بھی ایسا ہی سوال گزر چکا ہے اور وہاں جواب دیا تھا کہ جو بھی حلال و طیب مال خرچ کرو مناسب ہے۔ وہاں اقسام صدقہ کے متعلق سوال تھا۔ یہاں کَمیّت کے متعلق سوال ہے یعنی کتنا دے؟ سو اس
5:91, 92.
Khamarush-Shai’a means, he veiled or covered up or concealed the thing. Wine is called Khamr because it covers or obscures or affects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it lose its power of control. The word is specifically used for wine prepared from grapes but signifies all intoxicants (Lane). "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished.....Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers. The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well- known; and the statistics of Baer, Kurella and Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards... "The evil effects of alcoholism are
Aisarar-Rajulu means, man became well off. Maisar is so called because the gambler seeks to become rich quickly and easily without undergoing the trouble of earning wealth by hard work. "The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. It is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates hard egoism and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage....Its motive is carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement just as duelling which is murder by mutual agreement. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness. It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life. It concentrates attention upon lucre and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth.).
Ithm means, sin; punishment of sin; the harm that might result from sin (Lane).
It is characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but freely and frankly admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world, which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. While prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
‘Afw means, (a) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements, and the spending of what does not cause hardship to the giver; (b) the best portion of a thing; (c) giving without being asked (Aqrab). Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their own legitimate needs have been met, and the higher class of believers are expected to spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean that in times of war they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life.
5:91, 92.
Important Words:
الخمر (wine) is the noun-infinitive from خمر. They say خمر الشیء meaning, he veiled or covered up the thing. خمرالشھادة means, he concealed the evidence. خمرالعجین means, he leavened the dough and left it till it became well fermented. خامره means, it became mixed or blended with it; it infected or pervaded it. A veil worn by a woman is called خمار because it screens or covers her face and head. Wine is called خمر because it covers or obscures or infects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it uncontrolled. The word is specific for wine prepared from grapes but is also used generally (Aqrab & Lane).
المیسر (game of hazard) is derived from یسر i.e. he became docile and submissive. یسرت المرأة means, the woman was easily delivered of the child. ایسرالرجل means, the man became well off. یسرفلان means, such a one played a game of hazard or a game of chance, i.e. he gambled. Thus the primary meaning of the word is to get a thing easily and thereby become well off. A game of chance or a game of hazard is called میسر because by means of such games people seek to become rich easily and quickly without undergoing the trouble of earning with work and labour. The word المیسر is used to indicate (1) any game of hazard or game of chance; (2) a game of hazard played by the Arabs with headless arrows; (3) play for stakes and wages (Lisan & Mufradat).
اثم (sin) is the noun-infinitive from اثم meaning, he did what was unlawful. اثم means: (1) that which is unlawful (Aqrab); (2) that which keeps back a person from what is good (Mufradat); (3) punishment of sins and evil actions (Lane).
عفو (spare) is derived from عفا. They say عفا الشیء i.e. the thing became long and abundant. عفو means: (1) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements. (2) the best portion of a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of war, the Quran fittingly turns to the subject of wine and gambling which are directly related to war.
It was customary among Arabs in times of war to cast lots in the name of a few wealthy persons, and those in whose name the lots were drawn were bound to feed the army and supply it with wine. This is how the Arabs defrayed the expenses of war. So when Muslims were called upon to take arms, they naturally enquired of the Holy Prophet about the legality of this peculiar way of meeting the expenses of war and about the use of wine also, which was considered essential to produce a state of reckless courage in the fighters so as to make them blind to all consequences. Islam declared both these practices unlawful because their harm was greater than their advantage. The conviction of faith hadinfused into the hearts of believers far greater and nobler courage than the blind daring engendered by drinking. Similarly, the expenses of war were to be met in a fairer and more respectable manner than the casting of lots. The burden must fall on all according to their means and must come through willing and eager contributions by the faithful.
The clause, their sin is greater than their advantage, embodies a very important principle. A thing should not be adopted simply because it contains some advantage nor should a thing be condemned simply because it is harmful in certain respects. On the contrary, both sides should be carefully weighed and a thing should be condemned only if its harm outweighs its advantage. It is in fact a great characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but frankly and freely admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. This is why, while prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
It is worthy of note that of all religions, Islam alone has forbidden the use of wine. In Hinduism, drinking forms an essential part of certain religious ceremonies. Judaism does not seem to prohibit drinking, because nowhere has the Bible declared it to be unlawful; while according to the New Testament, the very first miracle which Jesus showed was that he turned water into wine for the use of a marriage party (John 2:7-9).
Attempts have been made during the ages by social reformers, and even the help of legislation has been enlisted in some countries, to put an end to wine-drinking. But all such attempts have so far failed. The only experiment on record which met with complete success in this direction was that made in Arabia more than thirteen hundred years ago. A whole people steeped in drinking became absolute teetotallers by the mere declaration by the Prophet that God had forbidden drinking. This constitutes no small testimony to the great hold that Islam had come to possess on the minds of the unlettered and unruly Arabs, and to the wonderful transformation it had brought about in their lives.
From the meaning of the word خمر (wine) as given above under Important Words it should not be understood that Islam prohibits the use of only such quantity of wine as may make one drunk. The Holy Prophet has made it definitely clear that even small doses of such things as may intoxicate one when used in larger doses are unlawful (Tirmidhi).
When the principal means hitherto employed in Arabia for meeting the expenses of war, i.e. by casting lots, was prohibited, the question naturally arose as to how the expenses of war were to be met. Believers, realizing that they would themselves have to meet these expenses, hastened to inquire of the Holy Prophet as to how much they would have to contribute towards the expenses of war. In reply to their query they were told that they should spend عفو i.e. what may be spared after meeting the necessities of life. The word عفو by virtue of its twofold connotation, given under Important Words above, applies to two different classes of persons. Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their needs have been met, i.e. what they can spare; and the higher class of believers are expected to go ahead and spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean, that in times of war, they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life. The balance should be spent in the cause of God. This is what God wanted them to do. Actually, however, some of the Companions spent even more than that. For instance, when the Holy Prophet appealed for funds for the campaign of Tabuk, Abu Bakr brought his entire possessions and laid them at the feet of his Master. When asked how much he had retained for himself and his family and how much he had brought to be spent in Allah’s cause, Abu Bakr replied that he had brought all that he possessed and that nothing remained in his house except the name of Allah (Tirmidhi, ch. on Manaqib & Zurqani).
Finally, a word about the sin or harm of wine and gambling, as mentioned in the verse under comment, appears to be called for. Though Islam was the first to prohibit the use of intoxicants and games of chance, the world now appears to be agreed on condemning these two evils which so deeply affect not only the physical but also the moral and spiritual condition of man. Here are some quotations in which non-Muslim writers have forcefully pointed out the harmful effects of wine:
(1) "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished…Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers…The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well known and the statistics of Baer, Kurella, Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards. The rate of suicide varies with the general rate of consumption of alcohol in different countries…
"The evil effects of alcoholism are evident in the drunkard’s posterity…Epilepsy, insanity, idiocy and various forms of physical, mental, and moral degeneracy are very disproportionately prevalent among the offsprings of alcoholics" (Jew. Enc. i. 333-334).
(2) "The effects of consumption of alcohol are almost all due to its action upon the nervous system. Thus the immediate sensation of well-being is due to the flushing of the skin, suppressing temporarily the sense of chill, and to the fact that the sensibility to minor pains and inconveniences becomes blunted; whilst with larger doses the diminution of the power of self-control and sense of personal responsibility gives rise to excitability. In the secondary stage the fineness of the senses (hearing, touch, taste and vision) is affected, and this gives rise to an inability to control bodily movements such as facial expression. In the advanced stage of drunkenness, the intellectual processes of judgement and control are suspended." (Enc. Brit. 14th Edition, i. 540).
(3) "Alcohol is a poison for protoplasm, that is, for the soft plastic material which is the essential constituent of every one of the minute cells that make up living organisms, whether animal or vegetable. Its poisonous effect in very dilute solution is easily shown on lowly organisms…
"The nerve cells of the brain, the most highly organised and delicate of the tissues, very early show the effect of alcohol. Many of the test observers of their own mental processes, such as Helmholtz and Huxley, have expressed themselves strongly as to the harmful effect of minute doses of alcohol on brain work. It would seem that the 'stimulating' effect is really due to the paralysis of the very highest nerve-centres, so that cheerfulness, wit, and recklessness have free play. Large numbers of psychometric experiments under conditions of the greatest accuracy prove that alcohol, in small dietetic doses, exercises a distinctly paralysing effect on the working of the brain. Some mental processes are quickened for a short time, and then a retarding effect shows itself, which is prolonged and much more than cancels the apparent beneficial result…
"There is universal testimony as to the close relationship between excessive drinking and breaches of the moral law and the law of the State. This is a direct consequence of the paralysis of the higher faculties, intellectual and moral, and the resulting free play given to the lower inclinations" (Enc. Rel. Eth, i. 299-301).
As to the harm caused by gambling the following quotation would suffice:
"The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. Lord Beaconsfield spoke of it as 'a vast engine of national demoralization'…In 12 years (1895-6 to 1906-7) there were 156 suicides or attempted suicides in England assigned to this cause, as well as 719 cases of theft or embezzlement and 442 bankruptcies. In view of these facts, it is not surprising that, in all civilized countries, gambling is subjected to definite legislative restraints…It is, as Herbert Spencer says, a kind of action by which pleasure is obtained at the cost of pain to another. The happiness of the winner implies the misery of the loser. This kind of action, therefore, is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates a hard egoism, and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage…In an atmosphere of brotherhood no form of gambling could exist…But the immorality of gambling may be argued on higher grounds than a calculation of pleasure.
"(a) Every gambling transaction involves a transfer of property in one shape or another. When the gambler is asked why he stakes his money on a game or a race, his reply is, 'To add an interest to the game'. The interest thus added is, simply stated, the interest of acquisition. If the real object were, as is claimed, merely the sport and the excitement, then men might just as well wager counters, or, for the matter of that, agree to hand over all winnings to public charities. But this is not done. The transfer of property, in one shape or another, is essential to the act. There are only three ways in which property can be legitimately acquired—by gift, by labour, and by exchange. Gambling stands outside all of these.
"(b) Its motive is, however, carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement; but it is still robbery, just as duelling, which is murder by mutual agreement, is still treated as murder. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness.
"(c) It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. If in any contest skill comes in, odds are given or handicaps arranged so as to equalize the chances as far as possible. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life.
"(d) It concentrates attention upon lucre, and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth. vi. pp. 165-166).
b
5:91, 92.
160
خَمَرَالشَّیْءَ (Khamarash-Shai’a) 意指, 他掩藏或遮盖或隐瞒了这事情。酒被称为 خَمْر (Khamr) 因为它遮盖、隐藏或影响才智或理性, 或因为它搅昏和刺激头脑, 以致使它失去了控制能力。这词特别用来指由葡萄配制的酒, 也指一切麻醉品 (Lane)。 “酒精中毒是导致疾病的一个重要因素; 而在所有的疾病中, 饮酒过度的人是糟糕的病人。在流行病中, 饮酒人中间的死亡率特别高, 而对疾病、损伤和疲劳的一般的抵抗能力也被减少……。酒精中毒还减少长寿的可能性; 英国人寿保险公司发现, 据调查, 不饮酒者的寿命大约比饮酒的人长一倍。酒精中毒和犯罪的密切联系是众所周知的; 而贝尔 (Baer)、库雷拉 (Kurella) 和加拉符尔丁 (Gallavardin) 及锡卡尔特 (Sichart) 的统计资料表明, 所有犯罪分子中有25%到85%是酒鬼。……酒精中毒的不良后果在酒鬼的后代中是明显的……羊痫疯、精神病、白痴以及各种形式的肉体的、精神的和道德的衰退, 很不均衡地流行于过量饮酒者的后代中。” (Jew. Enc.) “饮酒所造成的影响几乎完全来自它对神经系统的干扰作用, 当进入酗酒的严重状况时, 将出现理性与判断力中止的现象。” (Enc. Brit.)。“至于过量饮酒者与违反道德规范及国家法律之间的密切联系则受到普遍的证明。这是理智的和道德的高级官能机构瘫痪的直接后果, 从而使各种低级的爱好得到放任。” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)
161
اَيْسَرَالرَّجُلُ (Aisarar-Rajulu) 的意思是, 人变得富裕。مَيْسَرْ (Maisar) 之所以如此称谓是因为赌徒力求迅速而容易地致富而不想操一操心, 以艰苦的劳动来获得财富; “赌博的这种邪恶的倾向从来没有受到怀疑。实质上, 这是对社会有害的: 它使同情心凋谢, 助长自私自利因而产生在品格上的全面坠落。这是一种内在的野蛮的习性……。其动机是仔细掩盖起来的贪婪。这是一种妄想得到财富而付出代价的企图。这是违背对称规律的。这是一种双方合同的掠夺, 正像双方的决斗, 是互相协定的彼此凶杀。它由贪婪而引起, 导致懒散。此外它还向运气求援。为了碰运气, 行为的主宰准备破坏道德秩序和生活的稳定。它全神贯注于钱财上, 而由此失去对人生目的更有价值的注意力” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)。
162
伊斯兰教的特点是决不全面谴责一件事, 但大方而直率地承认哪怕在这件事内可能发现的最小的善举。伊斯兰教禁止某些事情并不是认为它们一无是处, 而是它们的损害要超过它们的益处, 因为世界上不存在完全无益的东西。由于麻醉物和投机这种玩艺儿有极大的危害而加以禁止, 另一方面并没有不承认它们具有少量益处。
163
عَفْو (‘Afw) 的意思是, (a) 超出或高于所需要的; 而所花费的不致使给予的人发生困苦; (b) 一件东西中的最好部分; (c) 不被要求的给予 (اَقْرَبْ)。一般信者必须花费他们自己的合理需要满足之后的剩余部分, 而期望那些高级的信者花费他们的财产的最好部份。可是, 假如这款项是为了全体信者集体使用的, 那就意味着在战争时期他们只应当给自己保留一分还可勉强满足生活之需的财产。
3
اِثْمٌ کے معنے گناہ کے ہیں اور کبھی گناہ کی سزا کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ قرآن کریم میں ہے۔ وَمَنْ یَّفْعَلْ ذٰلِکَ یَلْقَ اَثَامًا (فرقان: ۶۹) یعنی اپنے گناہ کی سزا بھگتے گا۔ ان معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے گناہ اور نقصان کے معنے کیے گئے ہیں۔ لیکن ’’اور نقصان‘‘ کے لفظوں کو خطوط وحدانی میں لکھ دیا گیا ہے۔
اسی طرح اِثْمٌ کے معنے نیکیوں سے روکنے کے ہیں (مفردات) پس اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ ان افعال کے نتیجہ میں نیکیوں سے محرومی ان کے منافع سے زیادہ ہے۔ یہ معنے گو ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مشکل ہیں لیکن تفسیر کے لحاظ سے بہت اعلیٰ ہیں کیونکہ حقیقت
4
عَفْو کے تین معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) خِیَارُ الشَّیْئِ وَاَطْیَبُہٗ یعنی سب سے اچھی اور پاکیزہ شے (۲) مَایَفْضُلُ عَنِ النَّفَقَۃِ وَلَاعُسْرَ عَلٰی صَاحِبِہٖ فِیْ اِعْطَآئِہٖ جو اپنے ضروری خرچ سے بچ جائے اور دینے والے کو اس کے دینے سے تکلیف نہ پہنچے (۳) یُقَالُ اَعْطَیْتُہٗ عَفْوَ الْمَالِ اَیْ بِغَیْرِ مَسْأَلَۃٍ یعنی عفو کے معنے بغیر مانگے دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) پہلے بھی ایسا ہی سوال گزر چکا ہے اور وہاں جواب دیا تھا کہ جو بھی حلال و طیب مال خرچ کرو مناسب ہے۔ وہاں اقسام صدقہ کے متعلق سوال تھا۔ یہاں کَمیّت کے متعلق سوال ہے یعنی کتنا دے؟ سو اس
a
5:91, 92.
226
Important Words:
الخمر (wine) is the noun-infinitive from خمر. They say خمر الشیء meaning, he veiled or covered up the thing. خمرالشھادة means, he concealed the evidence. خمرالعجین means, he leavened the dough and left it till it became well fermented. خامره means, it became mixed or blended with it; it infected or pervaded it. A veil worn by a woman is called خمار because it screens or covers her face and head. Wine is called خمر because it covers or obscures or infects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it uncontrolled. The word is specific for wine prepared from grapes but is also used generally (Aqrab & Lane).
المیسر (game of hazard) is derived from یسر i.e. he became docile and submissive. یسرت المرأة means, the woman was easily delivered of the child. ایسرالرجل means, the man became well off. یسرفلان means, such a one played a game of hazard or a game of chance, i.e. he gambled. Thus the primary meaning of the word is to get a thing easily and thereby become well off. A game of chance or a game of hazard is called میسر because by means of such games people seek to become rich easily and quickly without undergoing the trouble of earning with work and labour. The word المیسر is used to indicate (1) any game of hazard or game of chance; (2) a game of hazard played by the Arabs with headless arrows; (3) play for stakes and wages (Lisan & Mufradat).
اثم (sin) is the noun-infinitive from اثم meaning, he did what was unlawful. اثم means: (1) that which is unlawful (Aqrab); (2) that which keeps back a person from what is good (Mufradat); (3) punishment of sins and evil actions (Lane).
عفو (spare) is derived from عفا. They say عفا الشیء i.e. the thing became long and abundant. عفو means: (1) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements. (2) the best portion of a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of war, the Quran fittingly turns to the subject of wine and gambling which are directly related to war.
It was customary among Arabs in times of war to cast lots in the name of a few wealthy persons, and those in whose name the lots were drawn were bound to feed the army and supply it with wine. This is how the Arabs defrayed the expenses of war. So when Muslims were called upon to take arms, they naturally enquired of the Holy Prophet about the legality of this peculiar way of meeting the expenses of war and about the use of wine also, which was considered essential to produce a state of reckless courage in the fighters so as to make them blind to all consequences. Islam declared both these practices unlawful because their harm was greater than their advantage. The conviction of faith hadinfused into the hearts of believers far greater and nobler courage than the blind daring engendered by drinking. Similarly, the expenses of war were to be met in a fairer and more respectable manner than the casting of lots. The burden must fall on all according to their means and must come through willing and eager contributions by the faithful.
The clause, their sin is greater than their advantage, embodies a very important principle. A thing should not be adopted simply because it contains some advantage nor should a thing be condemned simply because it is harmful in certain respects. On the contrary, both sides should be carefully weighed and a thing should be condemned only if its harm outweighs its advantage. It is in fact a great characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but frankly and freely admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. This is why, while prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
It is worthy of note that of all religions, Islam alone has forbidden the use of wine. In Hinduism, drinking forms an essential part of certain religious ceremonies. Judaism does not seem to prohibit drinking, because nowhere has the Bible declared it to be unlawful; while according to the New Testament, the very first miracle which Jesus showed was that he turned water into wine for the use of a marriage party (John 2:7-9).
Attempts have been made during the ages by social reformers, and even the help of legislation has been enlisted in some countries, to put an end to wine-drinking. But all such attempts have so far failed. The only experiment on record which met with complete success in this direction was that made in Arabia more than thirteen hundred years ago. A whole people steeped in drinking became absolute teetotallers by the mere declaration by the Prophet that God had forbidden drinking. This constitutes no small testimony to the great hold that Islam had come to possess on the minds of the unlettered and unruly Arabs, and to the wonderful transformation it had brought about in their lives.
From the meaning of the word خمر (wine) as given above under Important Words it should not be understood that Islam prohibits the use of only such quantity of wine as may make one drunk. The Holy Prophet has made it definitely clear that even small doses of such things as may intoxicate one when used in larger doses are unlawful (Tirmidhi).
When the principal means hitherto employed in Arabia for meeting the expenses of war, i.e. by casting lots, was prohibited, the question naturally arose as to how the expenses of war were to be met. Believers, realizing that they would themselves have to meet these expenses, hastened to inquire of the Holy Prophet as to how much they would have to contribute towards the expenses of war. In reply to their query they were told that they should spend عفو i.e. what may be spared after meeting the necessities of life. The word عفو by virtue of its twofold connotation, given under Important Words above, applies to two different classes of persons. Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their needs have been met, i.e. what they can spare; and the higher class of believers are expected to go ahead and spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean, that in times of war, they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life. The balance should be spent in the cause of God. This is what God wanted them to do. Actually, however, some of the Companions spent even more than that. For instance, when the Holy Prophet appealed for funds for the campaign of Tabuk, Abu Bakr brought his entire possessions and laid them at the feet of his Master. When asked how much he had retained for himself and his family and how much he had brought to be spent in Allah’s cause, Abu Bakr replied that he had brought all that he possessed and that nothing remained in his house except the name of Allah (Tirmidhi, ch. on Manaqib & Zurqani).
Finally, a word about the sin or harm of wine and gambling, as mentioned in the verse under comment, appears to be called for. Though Islam was the first to prohibit the use of intoxicants and games of chance, the world now appears to be agreed on condemning these two evils which so deeply affect not only the physical but also the moral and spiritual condition of man. Here are some quotations in which non-Muslim writers have forcefully pointed out the harmful effects of wine:
(1) "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished…Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers…The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well known and the statistics of Baer, Kurella, Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards. The rate of suicide varies with the general rate of consumption of alcohol in different countries…
"The evil effects of alcoholism are evident in the drunkard’s posterity…Epilepsy, insanity, idiocy and various forms of physical, mental, and moral degeneracy are very disproportionately prevalent among the offsprings of alcoholics" (Jew. Enc. i. 333-334).
(2) "The effects of consumption of alcohol are almost all due to its action upon the nervous system. Thus the immediate sensation of well-being is due to the flushing of the skin, suppressing temporarily the sense of chill, and to the fact that the sensibility to minor pains and inconveniences becomes blunted; whilst with larger doses the diminution of the power of self-control and sense of personal responsibility gives rise to excitability. In the secondary stage the fineness of the senses (hearing, touch, taste and vision) is affected, and this gives rise to an inability to control bodily movements such as facial expression. In the advanced stage of drunkenness, the intellectual processes of judgement and control are suspended." (Enc. Brit. 14th Edition, i. 540).
(3) "Alcohol is a poison for protoplasm, that is, for the soft plastic material which is the essential constituent of every one of the minute cells that make up living organisms, whether animal or vegetable. Its poisonous effect in very dilute solution is easily shown on lowly organisms…
"The nerve cells of the brain, the most highly organised and delicate of the tissues, very early show the effect of alcohol. Many of the test observers of their own mental processes, such as Helmholtz and Huxley, have expressed themselves strongly as to the harmful effect of minute doses of alcohol on brain work. It would seem that the 'stimulating' effect is really due to the paralysis of the very highest nerve-centres, so that cheerfulness, wit, and recklessness have free play. Large numbers of psychometric experiments under conditions of the greatest accuracy prove that alcohol, in small dietetic doses, exercises a distinctly paralysing effect on the working of the brain. Some mental processes are quickened for a short time, and then a retarding effect shows itself, which is prolonged and much more than cancels the apparent beneficial result…
"There is universal testimony as to the close relationship between excessive drinking and breaches of the moral law and the law of the State. This is a direct consequence of the paralysis of the higher faculties, intellectual and moral, and the resulting free play given to the lower inclinations" (Enc. Rel. Eth, i. 299-301).
As to the harm caused by gambling the following quotation would suffice:
"The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. Lord Beaconsfield spoke of it as 'a vast engine of national demoralization'…In 12 years (1895-6 to 1906-7) there were 156 suicides or attempted suicides in England assigned to this cause, as well as 719 cases of theft or embezzlement and 442 bankruptcies. In view of these facts, it is not surprising that, in all civilized countries, gambling is subjected to definite legislative restraints…It is, as Herbert Spencer says, a kind of action by which pleasure is obtained at the cost of pain to another. The happiness of the winner implies the misery of the loser. This kind of action, therefore, is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates a hard egoism, and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage…In an atmosphere of brotherhood no form of gambling could exist…But the immorality of gambling may be argued on higher grounds than a calculation of pleasure.
"(a) Every gambling transaction involves a transfer of property in one shape or another. When the gambler is asked why he stakes his money on a game or a race, his reply is, 'To add an interest to the game'. The interest thus added is, simply stated, the interest of acquisition. If the real object were, as is claimed, merely the sport and the excitement, then men might just as well wager counters, or, for the matter of that, agree to hand over all winnings to public charities. But this is not done. The transfer of property, in one shape or another, is essential to the act. There are only three ways in which property can be legitimately acquired—by gift, by labour, and by exchange. Gambling stands outside all of these.
"(b) Its motive is, however, carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement; but it is still robbery, just as duelling, which is murder by mutual agreement, is still treated as murder. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness.
"(c) It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. If in any contest skill comes in, odds are given or handicaps arranged so as to equalize the chances as far as possible. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life.
"(d) It concentrates attention upon lucre, and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth. vi. pp. 165-166).
e
5:91, 92.
261
Khamarush-Shai’a means, he veiled or covered up or concealed the thing. Wine is called Khamr because it covers or obscures or affects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it lose its power of control. The word is specifically used for wine prepared from grapes but signifies all intoxicants (Lane). "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished.....Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers. The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well- known; and the statistics of Baer, Kurella and Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards... "The evil effects of alcoholism are
262
Aisarar-Rajulu means, man became well off. Maisar is so called because the gambler seeks to become rich quickly and easily without undergoing the trouble of earning wealth by hard work. "The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. It is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates hard egoism and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage....Its motive is carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement just as duelling which is murder by mutual agreement. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness. It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life. It concentrates attention upon lucre and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth.).
263
Ithm means, sin; punishment of sin; the harm that might result from sin (Lane).
264
It is characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but freely and frankly admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world, which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. While prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
265
‘Afw means, (a) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements, and the spending of what does not cause hardship to the giver; (b) the best portion of a thing; (c) giving without being asked (Aqrab). Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their own legitimate needs have been met, and the higher class of believers are expected to spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean that in times of war they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life.
فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ ۗ وَيَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلْيَتَٰمَىٰ ۖ قُلْ إِصْلَاحٌ لَّهُمْ خَيْرٌ ۖ وَإِن تُخَالِطُوهُمْ فَإِخْوَٰنُكُمْ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ ٱلْمُفْسِدَ مِنَ ٱلْمُصْلِحِ ۚ وَلَوْ شَآءَ ٱللَّهُ لَأَعْنَتَكُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَزِيزٌ حَكِيمٌ
یَعْلَمُ الْمُفْسِدَ مِنَ الْمُصْلِحِ کے الفاظ ایسے ہیں کہ میرے نزدیک ان کا ایسا ترجمہ کرنا جو لفظی بھی ہو اور اس کے اردو میں کوئی معنے بھی ہو جاتے ہوں ناممکن ہے۔ بہرحال میں اس میں کامیاب نہیں ہو سکا کیونکہ دونوں زبانوں کے محاورات کا فرق اس مشکل کو حل نہیں ہونے دیتا۔ مولوی نذیر احمد صاحب دہلوی نے اس کا ترجمہ ’’بگاڑنے والے کو سنوارنے والے سے (الگ) پہچانتا ہے‘‘ کیا ہے۔ شاہ رفیع الدین صاحب نے اس کا ترجمہ ’’اور اللہ جانتا ہے بگاڑنے والے کو سنوارنے والے سے‘‘ کیا ہے۔ لفظی لحاظ سے یہ ترجمے کتنی ہی محنت سے کیے گئے ہوں اس میں شک نہیں کہ اردو میں اصل مفہوم ادا نہیں
4:128; 89:18; 93:10; 107:3.
The bringing up of orphans is a very delicate affair and also an important social duty. Orphans should be brought up in a manner most conducive to their physical, moral and spiritual welfare. They should be treated as members of the family—the exhortation being contained in the words, "they are your brethren."
4:128; 89:18; 93:10; 107:3.
Important Words:
الیتامی (orphans) is the plural of یتیم which is derived from یتم meaning he fell short of a thing, feeling weak and tired; he lost his father in childhood. Thus یتیم is one whose father has died and who has not yet attained the age of puberty, which, according to Islamic jurisprudence, is 18 years. The word یتیم is also used about a thing which is without equal (Aqrab & Mufradat).
تخالطوھم (intermix with them) is derived from خلط. They say خلط الشیء بالشیء i.e. he mixed up one thing with the other. خالطهmeans, he mixed or mingled or associated with him; he mixed or joined with him in his affairs; he became co-partner with him. خالط قلبه ھم means, anxiety pervaded his heart (Aqrab & Lane).
اعنتکم (put you to hardship) is derived from عنت which means, he fell into difficulty or hardship. اعنته means, he put him to hardship; he burdened him with a task that was beyond his power (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The opening words of this verse apparently seem to be misplaced, for they are connected not with the following words of the verse in which they are placed, but with the concluding words of the previous one. The complete sentence, therefore, should read like this, "thus Allah makes His commandments clear to you that you may reflect upon this world and the next". If read like this, the clause would mean that God has refrained from issuing a definite commandment with regard to war expenditure and has simply ordered you to retain such portion of your possessions as you may require for your worldly needs and spend the balance in the cause of religion so that you may be trained to think over and judge the comparative value of this world and the next and act accordingly. The words, "upon this world and the next" have been separated from the preceding words to provide a pause with the object of impressing the importance of the matter on the mind of the listener or reader.
As Quranic verses follow a natural order––an order prompted and followed by the innermost nature of the addressee––this verse follows in the wake of the verses dealing with war. As the war leaves behind orphans, this verse lays down basic instructions as to how they should be treated and looked after. Muslims are told that the bringing up of orphans is a very delicate affair and an important social duty. Orphans should be brought up in the manner most conducive to their greatest good, i.e. their physical, moral and spiritual welfare. They should be treated as members of the family; and their property properly looked after and steps taken to augment it. The words, and if you intermix with them, they are your brethren, signify not only permission but exhortation. The exhortation lies in the word "brethren" which is meant to point to Muslims to allow orphans to live as members of their family, this being not only wise and humane but also based on considerations of convenience. If orphans had been directed to be kept aloof and their property managed on a strictly legal basis, it would have, in most cases, entailed a good deal of unnecessary inconvenience and trouble for both parties concerned.
The words, Allah knows the mischief-maker from the reformer, serve as a stern warning to the guardians of orphans. Anything they do is sure to come to the knowledge of God. Nay, God knows even the hidden things of the human heart. So they should beware of playing the part of mischief-makers in the garb of reformers.
God’s attributes of "Powerful" and "Wise" placed at the end of the verse contain a general admonition to guardians of orphans to be very careful about their dealings with them. They should not delude themselves with the idea that, being weak and not yet possessed of proper understanding, the orphans are entirely at their mercy and that they can treat them as they like. For, if orphans are not strong and wise, God certainly is, and He would call them to account if they behaved unkindly or dishonestly towards these helpless and friendless creatures of His. By mentioning God’s attributes of "Powerful" and "Wise" the Quran also means to exhort Muslims to look after orphans in such a way and give them such good education and training as should help them to grow strong and wise and become useful members of the community.
a
4:128; 89:18; 93:10; 107:3.
164
抚育孤儿是一件非常难以处理的事情, 而也是一项重要的社会责任。孤儿们应以最有益于他们的身体、道德和精神健康的方式加以抚育。他们应当得到家庭成员般的待遇--------这一规劝包含在 “他们是你们的兄弟” 这句话中。
1
یَعْلَمُ الْمُفْسِدَ مِنَ الْمُصْلِحِ کے الفاظ ایسے ہیں کہ میرے نزدیک ان کا ایسا ترجمہ کرنا جو لفظی بھی ہو اور اس کے اردو میں کوئی معنے بھی ہو جاتے ہوں ناممکن ہے۔ بہرحال میں اس میں کامیاب نہیں ہو سکا کیونکہ دونوں زبانوں کے محاورات کا فرق اس مشکل کو حل نہیں ہونے دیتا۔ مولوی نذیر احمد صاحب دہلوی نے اس کا ترجمہ ’’بگاڑنے والے کو سنوارنے والے سے (الگ) پہچانتا ہے‘‘ کیا ہے۔ شاہ رفیع الدین صاحب نے اس کا ترجمہ ’’اور اللہ جانتا ہے بگاڑنے والے کو سنوارنے والے سے‘‘ کیا ہے۔ لفظی لحاظ سے یہ ترجمے کتنی ہی محنت سے کیے گئے ہوں اس میں شک نہیں کہ اردو میں اصل مفہوم ادا نہیں
a
4:128; 89:18; 93:10; 107:3.
227
Important Words:
الیتامی (orphans) is the plural of یتیم which is derived from یتم meaning he fell short of a thing, feeling weak and tired; he lost his father in childhood. Thus یتیم is one whose father has died and who has not yet attained the age of puberty, which, according to Islamic jurisprudence, is 18 years. The word یتیم is also used about a thing which is without equal (Aqrab & Mufradat).
تخالطوھم (intermix with them) is derived from خلط. They say خلط الشیء بالشیء i.e. he mixed up one thing with the other. خالطهmeans, he mixed or mingled or associated with him; he mixed or joined with him in his affairs; he became co-partner with him. خالط قلبه ھم means, anxiety pervaded his heart (Aqrab & Lane).
اعنتکم (put you to hardship) is derived from عنت which means, he fell into difficulty or hardship. اعنته means, he put him to hardship; he burdened him with a task that was beyond his power (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The opening words of this verse apparently seem to be misplaced, for they are connected not with the following words of the verse in which they are placed, but with the concluding words of the previous one. The complete sentence, therefore, should read like this, "thus Allah makes His commandments clear to you that you may reflect upon this world and the next". If read like this, the clause would mean that God has refrained from issuing a definite commandment with regard to war expenditure and has simply ordered you to retain such portion of your possessions as you may require for your worldly needs and spend the balance in the cause of religion so that you may be trained to think over and judge the comparative value of this world and the next and act accordingly. The words, "upon this world and the next" have been separated from the preceding words to provide a pause with the object of impressing the importance of the matter on the mind of the listener or reader.
As Quranic verses follow a natural order––an order prompted and followed by the innermost nature of the addressee––this verse follows in the wake of the verses dealing with war. As the war leaves behind orphans, this verse lays down basic instructions as to how they should be treated and looked after. Muslims are told that the bringing up of orphans is a very delicate affair and an important social duty. Orphans should be brought up in the manner most conducive to their greatest good, i.e. their physical, moral and spiritual welfare. They should be treated as members of the family; and their property properly looked after and steps taken to augment it. The words, and if you intermix with them, they are your brethren, signify not only permission but exhortation. The exhortation lies in the word "brethren" which is meant to point to Muslims to allow orphans to live as members of their family, this being not only wise and humane but also based on considerations of convenience. If orphans had been directed to be kept aloof and their property managed on a strictly legal basis, it would have, in most cases, entailed a good deal of unnecessary inconvenience and trouble for both parties concerned.
The words, Allah knows the mischief-maker from the reformer, serve as a stern warning to the guardians of orphans. Anything they do is sure to come to the knowledge of God. Nay, God knows even the hidden things of the human heart. So they should beware of playing the part of mischief-makers in the garb of reformers.
God’s attributes of "Powerful" and "Wise" placed at the end of the verse contain a general admonition to guardians of orphans to be very careful about their dealings with them. They should not delude themselves with the idea that, being weak and not yet possessed of proper understanding, the orphans are entirely at their mercy and that they can treat them as they like. For, if orphans are not strong and wise, God certainly is, and He would call them to account if they behaved unkindly or dishonestly towards these helpless and friendless creatures of His. By mentioning God’s attributes of "Powerful" and "Wise" the Quran also means to exhort Muslims to look after orphans in such a way and give them such good education and training as should help them to grow strong and wise and become useful members of the community.
a
4:128; 89:18; 93:10; 107:3.
266
The bringing up of orphans is a very delicate affair and also an important social duty. Orphans should be brought up in a manner most conducive to their physical, moral and spiritual welfare. They should be treated as members of the family—the exhortation being contained in the words, "they are your brethren."
وَلَا تَنكِحُوا۟ ٱلْمُشْرِكَٰتِ حَتَّىٰ يُؤْمِنَّ ۚ وَلَأَمَةٌ مُّؤْمِنَةٌ خَيْرٌ مِّن مُّشْرِكَةٍ وَلَوْ أَعْجَبَتْكُمْ ۗ وَلَا تُنكِحُوا۟ ٱلْمُشْرِكِينَ حَتَّىٰ يُؤْمِنُوا۟ ۚ وَلَعَبْدٌ مُّؤْمِنٌ خَيْرٌ مِّن مُّشْرِكٍ وَلَوْ أَعْجَبَكُمْ ۗ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يَدْعُونَ إِلَى ٱلنَّارِ ۖ وَٱللَّهُ يَدْعُوٓا۟ إِلَى ٱلْجَنَّةِ وَٱلْمَغْفِرَةِ بِإِذْنِهِۦ ۖ وَيُبَيِّنُ ءَايَٰتِهِۦ لِلنَّاسِ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَتَذَكَّرُونَ
60:11.
کیونکہ وہ جسم اور روح دونوں کے آرام کا خیال رکھ سکتی ہے۔
کیونکہ غلام کی اسلام میں تحقیر جائز نہیں اور جب وہ مسلم بھی ہو تو مسلم عورت کے لئے جسمانی اور روحانی طور پر زیادہ مفید ہوگا۔
60:11.
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that, being away from their homes for a considerable time, believers are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This, the Qur’an positively prohibits, as also the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religious as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence, not only on his wife but also on the children born of this union; and an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the up-bringing of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs and outlook on life being widely different, there can possibly exist no harmony or concord between the two and consequently no peace in the family. In Islam slavery carries no stigma of inferiority; and a Muslim bondwoman would in every respect be a better spouse for a Muslim
60:11.
Important Words:
تنکحوا––tankihu (marry) and تنکحوا––tunkihu (give in marriage) are both derived from نکح. They say نکح المطرالارض i.e. the rain fell on the earth and became mixed with the soil. نکح امرأة means, he married a woman. نکح زوجته means, he went in unto his wife. نکح المرأة امرء means, the woman married a man. انکح المرأة زیدا means, he gave the woman in marriage to Zaid. Thus نکاح means, both (1) marriage and (2) coition with one’s wife. The Quran itself uses the word in the latter sense in 2:231 (Aqrab & Mufradat).
مشرك (an idolater) is derived from شرك. They say شرکه فیه meaning, he shared the thing with him; he became his co-partner in it. اشرکه فی الامر means, he made him his co-partner in the affair. اشرك الیه means, he attributed to, or set up with, him a co-partner. شریك means, a sharer, or a co-partner, or an associate, or a colleague, Thus مشرك means, one who attributes to, or sets up with, God a co-partner or co-partners, allotting to the latter all or some of the attributes of the former. شرك means, attributing to, or setting up with, God co-partners idolatry (Lane). شرك is of two kinds: شرك عظیم (the greater idolatry) signifying belief in a person or thing as being co-partner with God, and شرك صغیر (the lesser idolatry), i.e. ascribing to some person or thing any of the attributes of God without looking upon him or it as His co-partner (Mufradat). Other relevant terms are شرك جلی i.e. manifest idolatry, and شرك خفی i.e. hidden idolatry; and شرك فی الذات i.e. believing one to be a co-partner with God in His person, and شرك فی الصفات i.e. ascribing any of the attributes of God to someone. The term مشرکین (idolaters) is generally confined to such peoples as set up co-partners with God and do not believe in any revealed Book.
Commentary:
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that Muslims, being away from their homes for a considerable time, are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This the Quran strictly disallows in the verse under comment, which also forbids the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religions as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence not only on his wife but on his children as well, whereas an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the early training of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs, culture and outlook on life being widely different, there cannot possibly be harmony or concord between the two and their life is sure to become miserable, if they possess any attachment whatever for their religion. Again Islam, (submission to One God) and shirk (setting up partners with God) being poles apart, there can be no real contact or permanent intermixing between the two. In this connection, it may be noted that Islam allows, though it certainly does not encourage, the marriage of a Muslim with a woman belonging to the People of the Book who are decidedly nearer to Islam (5:6). But of this we will speak when we come to the relevant verses.
The words, until they believe, appear to be redundant at first sight; for, if marriage with an idolatrous person is prohibited, it is evident that this prohibition will automatically cease to operate when an idolatrous person converted to Islam. On deeper thought, however, the words, until they believe, prove to be most rightly placed. They have indeed been used to remind Muslims of their duty pertaining to the conversion of idolatrous people to Islam. The words also contain a veiled prophecy that the time was fast coming when idolatry would become extinct in Arabia.
The expression باذنه (by His command) when used with regard to a certain action of God signifies, according to the Quranic idiom, that God has provided or intends to provide extraordinary means for the accomplishment of the thing aimed at. So is the case here, the clause signifying that Allah’s call to Heaven and to forgiveness is not an empty announcement but that He has made special arrangements to bring about the desired end. It is further interesting to note that the word جنة and مغفرة both convey the sense of covering up a thing, the idea being that God’s favours and His forgiveness will be so liberal and so generous as to cover or overwhelm believers.
b
60:11.
1
کیونکہ وہ جسم اور روح دونوں کے آرام کا خیال رکھ سکتی ہے۔
2
کیونکہ غلام کی اسلام میں تحقیر جائز نہیں اور جب وہ مسلم بھی ہو تو مسلم عورت کے لئے جسمانی اور روحانی طور پر زیادہ مفید ہوگا۔
a
60:11.
228
Important Words:
تنکحوا––tankihu (marry) and تنکحوا––tunkihu (give in marriage) are both derived from نکح. They say نکح المطرالارض i.e. the rain fell on the earth and became mixed with the soil. نکح امرأة means, he married a woman. نکح زوجته means, he went in unto his wife. نکح المرأة امرء means, the woman married a man. انکح المرأة زیدا means, he gave the woman in marriage to Zaid. Thus نکاح means, both (1) marriage and (2) coition with one’s wife. The Quran itself uses the word in the latter sense in 2:231 (Aqrab & Mufradat).
مشرك (an idolater) is derived from شرك. They say شرکه فیه meaning, he shared the thing with him; he became his co-partner in it. اشرکه فی الامر means, he made him his co-partner in the affair. اشرك الیه means, he attributed to, or set up with, him a co-partner. شریك means, a sharer, or a co-partner, or an associate, or a colleague, Thus مشرك means, one who attributes to, or sets up with, God a co-partner or co-partners, allotting to the latter all or some of the attributes of the former. شرك means, attributing to, or setting up with, God co-partners idolatry (Lane). شرك is of two kinds: شرك عظیم (the greater idolatry) signifying belief in a person or thing as being co-partner with God, and شرك صغیر (the lesser idolatry), i.e. ascribing to some person or thing any of the attributes of God without looking upon him or it as His co-partner (Mufradat). Other relevant terms are شرك جلی i.e. manifest idolatry, and شرك خفی i.e. hidden idolatry; and شرك فی الذات i.e. believing one to be a co-partner with God in His person, and شرك فی الصفات i.e. ascribing any of the attributes of God to someone. The term مشرکین (idolaters) is generally confined to such peoples as set up co-partners with God and do not believe in any revealed Book.
Commentary:
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that Muslims, being away from their homes for a considerable time, are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This the Quran strictly disallows in the verse under comment, which also forbids the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religions as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence not only on his wife but on his children as well, whereas an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the early training of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs, culture and outlook on life being widely different, there cannot possibly be harmony or concord between the two and their life is sure to become miserable, if they possess any attachment whatever for their religion. Again Islam, (submission to One God) and shirk (setting up partners with God) being poles apart, there can be no real contact or permanent intermixing between the two. In this connection, it may be noted that Islam allows, though it certainly does not encourage, the marriage of a Muslim with a woman belonging to the People of the Book who are decidedly nearer to Islam (5:6). But of this we will speak when we come to the relevant verses.
The words, until they believe, appear to be redundant at first sight; for, if marriage with an idolatrous person is prohibited, it is evident that this prohibition will automatically cease to operate when an idolatrous person converted to Islam. On deeper thought, however, the words, until they believe, prove to be most rightly placed. They have indeed been used to remind Muslims of their duty pertaining to the conversion of idolatrous people to Islam. The words also contain a veiled prophecy that the time was fast coming when idolatry would become extinct in Arabia.
The expression باذنه (by His command) when used with regard to a certain action of God signifies, according to the Quranic idiom, that God has provided or intends to provide extraordinary means for the accomplishment of the thing aimed at. So is the case here, the clause signifying that Allah’s call to Heaven and to forgiveness is not an empty announcement but that He has made special arrangements to bring about the desired end. It is further interesting to note that the word جنة and مغفرة both convey the sense of covering up a thing, the idea being that God’s favours and His forgiveness will be so liberal and so generous as to cover or overwhelm believers.
b
60:11.
267
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that, being away from their homes for a considerable time, believers are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This, the Qur’an positively prohibits, as also the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religious as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence, not only on his wife but also on the children born of this union; and an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the up-bringing of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs and outlook on life being widely different, there can possibly exist no harmony or concord between the two and consequently no peace in the family. In Islam slavery carries no stigma of inferiority; and a Muslim bondwoman would in every respect be a better spouse for a Muslim
وَيَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلْمَحِيضِ ۖ قُلْ هُوَ أَذًى فَٱعْتَزِلُوا۟ ٱلنِّسَآءَ فِى ٱلْمَحِيضِ ۖ وَلَا تَقْرَبُوهُنَّ حَتَّىٰ يَطْهُرْنَ ۖ فَإِذَا تَطَهَّرْنَ فَأْتُوهُنَّ مِنْ حَيْثُ أَمَرَكُمُ ٱللَّهُ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُحِبُّ ٱلتَّوَّٰبِينَ وَيُحِبُّ ٱلْمُتَطَهِّرِينَ
یَطْھُرْنَ کے بعد تَطَھَّرْنَ کا لفظ لانے سے یہ مراد ہے کہ وہ نہا دھو کر صاف ہو جائیں (مفردات)
After laying down, in brief, the law about intermarriages, reference to marital relations and conjugal obligations became necessary.
The command implied in the words, and seek what Allah has ordained for you (2:188), is that coitus with one’s wife should be in a manner conducive to procreation.
Important Words:
المحیض (menstruation) is derived from حاض. They say حاضت المرأة i.e. the woman menstruated; blood came forth from her womb or uterus at the known time and in the known manner. Thus محیض means, (1) menstruation, i.e. the monthly course: (2) time of menstruation; (3) place of menstruation (Lane & Mufradat). According to some, the word which means a tank or a place where water collects, is also derived from the same root though the central letter of the root is different (Lane).
اذی (harmful thing) is the infinitive-noun from اذی meaning, he came to harm, or he was annoyed. آذی means, he or it caused a harm. اذی means, a harmful thing; a disagreeable thing; an annoyance; a hurt; a thing held to be unclean or filthy; a slight evil less than what is termed ضرر (Taj).
اعتزلوا (keep away from) is derived from عزل. عزله عنه means, he removed him or it from that (Aqrab). اعتزل الشیء or اعتزل عنهmeans, he kept away from the thing (Aqrab).
یطھرن (they are clean) and تطھرن (they have cleansed themselves) and المتطھرین (who keep themselves clean) are all derived from طھر which means, he or it became clean or free from dirt or filth, etc.; or he or it became pure. طھرت المرأة means, the woman became clean from the menstrual discharge, i.e. her flow of menses stopped. طھرت المرأة means, she became cleansed or purified by washing herself. اطھر (ittahara) is like تطھر giving the same meaning, i.e. he became cleansed or he kept himself clean (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After laying down, in brief, the law about intermarriage, reference to marital relations and conjugal obligations became necessary. The verse under comment indicates that coition or sexual intercourse with one’s wife is not permissible during menses, for such intercourse would be harmful for both parties. Coition becomes permissible when menses cease, but as a further precaution the husband should wait till the wife has washed herself by taking a bath.
The command referred to in the words go in unto them as Allah has commanded you is contained in, and seek what Allah has ordained for You (2:188), hinting that coition with one’s wife should be in a manner productive of issue. A further hint to the above is contained in the following verse.
The words, and go not in unto them (lit. do not go near them) until they are clean, do not mean that the husband should keep away from his wife completely and in no case go near her. The Holy Prophet’s sayings as well as his practice belie that inference. The expression simply refers to coition and does not debar other forms of loving approach.
The concluding word "متطھرین" i.e. those who keep themselves clean has been put in the masculine gender, because firstly the use of the masculine gender generally includes and extends to females as well; and secondly because by using this word the Quran means to hint that if men go in unto their wives while they are unclean, they are sure to make themselves unclean too. Thirdly this word also hints that though it becomes lawful for a man to go in unto his wife after the monthly flow has ceased, yet it is better for him to wait till the woman has properly washed herself, for God loves those who are more careful about cleanliness.
3
یَطْھُرْنَ کے بعد تَطَھَّرْنَ کا لفظ لانے سے یہ مراد ہے کہ وہ نہا دھو کر صاف ہو جائیں (مفردات)
229
Important Words:
المحیض (menstruation) is derived from حاض. They say حاضت المرأة i.e. the woman menstruated; blood came forth from her womb or uterus at the known time and in the known manner. Thus محیض means, (1) menstruation, i.e. the monthly course: (2) time of menstruation; (3) place of menstruation (Lane & Mufradat). According to some, the word which means a tank or a place where water collects, is also derived from the same root though the central letter of the root is different (Lane).
اذی (harmful thing) is the infinitive-noun from اذی meaning, he came to harm, or he was annoyed. آذی means, he or it caused a harm. اذی means, a harmful thing; a disagreeable thing; an annoyance; a hurt; a thing held to be unclean or filthy; a slight evil less than what is termed ضرر (Taj).
اعتزلوا (keep away from) is derived from عزل. عزله عنه means, he removed him or it from that (Aqrab). اعتزل الشیء or اعتزل عنهmeans, he kept away from the thing (Aqrab).
یطھرن (they are clean) and تطھرن (they have cleansed themselves) and المتطھرین (who keep themselves clean) are all derived from طھر which means, he or it became clean or free from dirt or filth, etc.; or he or it became pure. طھرت المرأة means, the woman became clean from the menstrual discharge, i.e. her flow of menses stopped. طھرت المرأة means, she became cleansed or purified by washing herself. اطھر (ittahara) is like تطھر giving the same meaning, i.e. he became cleansed or he kept himself clean (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After laying down, in brief, the law about intermarriage, reference to marital relations and conjugal obligations became necessary. The verse under comment indicates that coition or sexual intercourse with one’s wife is not permissible during menses, for such intercourse would be harmful for both parties. Coition becomes permissible when menses cease, but as a further precaution the husband should wait till the wife has washed herself by taking a bath.
The command referred to in the words go in unto them as Allah has commanded you is contained in, and seek what Allah has ordained for You (2:188), hinting that coition with one’s wife should be in a manner productive of issue. A further hint to the above is contained in the following verse.
The words, and go not in unto them (lit. do not go near them) until they are clean, do not mean that the husband should keep away from his wife completely and in no case go near her. The Holy Prophet’s sayings as well as his practice belie that inference. The expression simply refers to coition and does not debar other forms of loving approach.
The concluding word "متطھرین" i.e. those who keep themselves clean has been put in the masculine gender, because firstly the use of the masculine gender generally includes and extends to females as well; and secondly because by using this word the Quran means to hint that if men go in unto their wives while they are unclean, they are sure to make themselves unclean too. Thirdly this word also hints that though it becomes lawful for a man to go in unto his wife after the monthly flow has ceased, yet it is better for him to wait till the woman has properly washed herself, for God loves those who are more careful about cleanliness.
268
After laying down, in brief, the law about intermarriages, reference to marital relations and conjugal obligations became necessary.
269
The command implied in the words, and seek what Allah has ordained for you (2:188), is that coitus with one’s wife should be in a manner conducive to procreation.
نِسَآؤُكُمْ حَرْثٌ لَّكُمْ فَأْتُوا۟ حَرْثَكُمْ أَنَّىٰ شِئْتُمْ ۖ وَقَدِّمُوا۟ لِأَنفُسِكُمْ ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّكُم مُّلَٰقُوهُ ۗ وَبَشِّرِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ
قرآن کریم میں دو لفظ ہیں لِاَ نْفُسِکُمْ یعنی اَنْفُس اور کُمْ مترجم بالعموم اَ نْفُس کا ترجمہ ’’جان‘‘ کر دیتے ہیں۔ لیکن اردو میں جان کا استعمال اس موقعہ پر نہیں کیا جاتا۔ یہ تو کہتے ہیں کہ اپنے جان پر ظلم نہ کرو‘ اپنی جان کو کچھ آرام دو۔ لیکن یہ نہیں کہتے کہ اپنی جان کو بھی کچھ دو۔ اسی طرح یہ بھی نہیں کہتے کہ اپنی جانوں کے لئے کچھ آگے بھیجو۔ ہاں یہ کہیں گے کہ اپنے مسقبل کا بھی کچھ فکر کرو۔ اپنی آئندہ زندگی کے لئے بھی کچھ انتظام کرو۔ لیکن یہ محاورہ چونکہ مفہوم کو تو ادا کرتا ہے مگر لفظوں سے دور چلا جاتا ہے۔ میں نے درمیانی راہ اختیار کرکے ’’اپنے لئ
See {244}.
Anna means, (1) how; (2) when; and (3) where. (Aqrab).
This verse constitutes an eloquent testimony to the inimitably pure and dignified language of the Qur’an. An extremely delicate subject has been dealt with in a most decent and discreet manner and the whole philosophy of marriage and conjugal relations has been given in one brief sentence, i.e. Your wives are a sort of tilth for you. A woman is indeed like a tilth in which the seed of progeny is sown. A wise husbandman selects the best soil, prepares the best tilth, secures the best seed, and chooses the best time and manner of sowing it. So should a believer do, for on the harvest which he is to reap in the form of children depends not only his own but also his community’s entire future. It is to this supreme fact that the words so pointedly refer. Thus the likening of woman to tilth throws a flood of light on the morality of eugenics and sex.
Important Words:
حرث (tilth). See 2: 206.
انی (how and when) means: (1) how; (2) when; and (3) where (Aqrab).
قدموا (send ahead) is derived from قدم meaning, he came or stepped forward. قدم (qaddama) means, be sent forward or sent ahead; he put forward; he offered. قدم لنفسه means, he did good or evil that will in future bear good or bad fruit for himself. قدمه علی غیره means, he preferred him to others. قدم له الثمن means, he paid him the price in advance (Aqrab). The Quran uses this expression to point out that whatever good or evil deed a man does, serves like a seed to bear a future crop. No action is ever lost.
مؤمنین (those who obey) is derived from آمن meaning: (1) he believed; (2) he obeyed (Aqrab). Here it gives the latter meaning. For a fuller discussion of this word see 2:4.
Commentary:
This verse constitutes an eloquent testimony to the inimitably pure and dignified language of the Quran. An extremely delicate subject has been dealt with in a most decent and discreet manner, and the whole philosophy of marriage and conjugal relations has been given in one brief sentence, i.e. Your wives are a tilth for you. A woman is indeed like a tilth in which the seed of progeny is sown. The expression has a twofold significance depending on the meaning of the words اتوا حرثکم (approach your tilth). If approaching the tilth means coition, then the expression approach your tilth how you like would signify that: (1) you should go in unto your wife in a manner suited to her capacity as a tilth and in no other manner; and (2) that both of you should try to keep your hearts pure at the time of coition so that the issue of the process may also share that purity. Says the Holy Prophet, "When the husband goes in unto his wife, they should both pray to God saying, 'Our Lord, keep both of us away from Satan; and if Thou grant us an issue, keep that also away from him' " (Muslim Kitabun-Nikah).
On the contrary, if "approaching the tilth" means selecting and dealing with the wife, the expression approach your tilth how you like would mean: (1) That you should select a wife who is best suited as a tilth, i.e. (a) she should be ولودviz. capable of producing children and not barren; (b) she should be healthy, capable of producing healthy children; (c) she should be well qualified to give good training to the children; and (d) she should be ودود i.e. of loving nature so that there may reign an atmosphere of love and harmony in the house and the children may benefit by it. (2) That you should look after and treat your wife well so that her life may be happy and contented and she may become best disposed to bring up the children well. (3) That you should keep yourselves also in a state of good physical and moral health so that your seed for your tilth may also be healthy in every respect.
A wise husbandman selects the best soil, prepares the best tilth, secures the best seed, and chooses the best time and manner of sowing it. So should you, for on the harvest which you are to reap in the form of children depends not only your own but also your community’s entire future. It is to this supreme fact that the clause, and send ahead some good for yourselves, so pointedly refers. In short, the likening of woman to tilth throws a flood of light on the morality of eugenics and sex. But the real basis of all happiness and progress is the fear of God and in the words, fear Allah and know that you shall meet Him, the Quran warns the Faithful never to lose sight of the real object of marriage even in the heat of carnal passions for even the seat of these passions is the source of the procreation of children and the continuation of a good race on the earth. Finally, the clause, and bear glad tidings to those who obey, contains a mighty بشارة (good news) for those who may obey this injunction, for it would not only make their own lives supremely happy but would also secure for them the best progeny for all time.
4
قرآن کریم میں دو لفظ ہیں لِاَ نْفُسِکُمْ یعنی اَنْفُس اور کُمْ مترجم بالعموم اَ نْفُس کا ترجمہ ’’جان‘‘ کر دیتے ہیں۔ لیکن اردو میں جان کا استعمال اس موقعہ پر نہیں کیا جاتا۔ یہ تو کہتے ہیں کہ اپنے جان پر ظلم نہ کرو‘ اپنی جان کو کچھ آرام دو۔ لیکن یہ نہیں کہتے کہ اپنی جان کو بھی کچھ دو۔ اسی طرح یہ بھی نہیں کہتے کہ اپنی جانوں کے لئے کچھ آگے بھیجو۔ ہاں یہ کہیں گے کہ اپنے مسقبل کا بھی کچھ فکر کرو۔ اپنی آئندہ زندگی کے لئے بھی کچھ انتظام کرو۔ لیکن یہ محاورہ چونکہ مفہوم کو تو ادا کرتا ہے مگر لفظوں سے دور چلا جاتا ہے۔ میں نے درمیانی راہ اختیار کرکے ’’اپنے لئ
230
Important Words:
حرث (tilth). See 2: 206.
انی (how and when) means: (1) how; (2) when; and (3) where (Aqrab).
قدموا (send ahead) is derived from قدم meaning, he came or stepped forward. قدم (qaddama) means, be sent forward or sent ahead; he put forward; he offered. قدم لنفسه means, he did good or evil that will in future bear good or bad fruit for himself. قدمه علی غیره means, he preferred him to others. قدم له الثمن means, he paid him the price in advance (Aqrab). The Quran uses this expression to point out that whatever good or evil deed a man does, serves like a seed to bear a future crop. No action is ever lost.
مؤمنین (those who obey) is derived from آمن meaning: (1) he believed; (2) he obeyed (Aqrab). Here it gives the latter meaning. For a fuller discussion of this word see 2:4.
Commentary:
This verse constitutes an eloquent testimony to the inimitably pure and dignified language of the Quran. An extremely delicate subject has been dealt with in a most decent and discreet manner, and the whole philosophy of marriage and conjugal relations has been given in one brief sentence, i.e. Your wives are a tilth for you. A woman is indeed like a tilth in which the seed of progeny is sown. The expression has a twofold significance depending on the meaning of the words اتوا حرثکم (approach your tilth). If approaching the tilth means coition, then the expression approach your tilth how you like would signify that: (1) you should go in unto your wife in a manner suited to her capacity as a tilth and in no other manner; and (2) that both of you should try to keep your hearts pure at the time of coition so that the issue of the process may also share that purity. Says the Holy Prophet, "When the husband goes in unto his wife, they should both pray to God saying, 'Our Lord, keep both of us away from Satan; and if Thou grant us an issue, keep that also away from him' " (Muslim Kitabun-Nikah).
On the contrary, if "approaching the tilth" means selecting and dealing with the wife, the expression approach your tilth how you like would mean: (1) That you should select a wife who is best suited as a tilth, i.e. (a) she should be ولودviz. capable of producing children and not barren; (b) she should be healthy, capable of producing healthy children; (c) she should be well qualified to give good training to the children; and (d) she should be ودود i.e. of loving nature so that there may reign an atmosphere of love and harmony in the house and the children may benefit by it. (2) That you should look after and treat your wife well so that her life may be happy and contented and she may become best disposed to bring up the children well. (3) That you should keep yourselves also in a state of good physical and moral health so that your seed for your tilth may also be healthy in every respect.
A wise husbandman selects the best soil, prepares the best tilth, secures the best seed, and chooses the best time and manner of sowing it. So should you, for on the harvest which you are to reap in the form of children depends not only your own but also your community’s entire future. It is to this supreme fact that the clause, and send ahead some good for yourselves, so pointedly refers. In short, the likening of woman to tilth throws a flood of light on the morality of eugenics and sex. But the real basis of all happiness and progress is the fear of God and in the words, fear Allah and know that you shall meet Him, the Quran warns the Faithful never to lose sight of the real object of marriage even in the heat of carnal passions for even the seat of these passions is the source of the procreation of children and the continuation of a good race on the earth. Finally, the clause, and bear glad tidings to those who obey, contains a mighty بشارة (good news) for those who may obey this injunction, for it would not only make their own lives supremely happy but would also secure for them the best progeny for all time.
270
See {244}.
271
Anna means, (1) how; (2) when; and (3) where. (Aqrab).
272
This verse constitutes an eloquent testimony to the inimitably pure and dignified language of the Qur’an. An extremely delicate subject has been dealt with in a most decent and discreet manner and the whole philosophy of marriage and conjugal relations has been given in one brief sentence, i.e. Your wives are a sort of tilth for you. A woman is indeed like a tilth in which the seed of progeny is sown. A wise husbandman selects the best soil, prepares the best tilth, secures the best seed, and chooses the best time and manner of sowing it. So should a believer do, for on the harvest which he is to reap in the form of children depends not only his own but also his community’s entire future. It is to this supreme fact that the words so pointedly refer. Thus the likening of woman to tilth throws a flood of light on the morality of eugenics and sex.
وَلَا تَجْعَلُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ عُرْضَةً لِّأَيْمَٰنِكُمْ أَن تَبَرُّوا۟ وَتَتَّقُوا۟ وَتُصْلِحُوا۟ بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ
عُرْضَۃً کے معنے محل کے ہیں۔ کہتے ہیں اَلْمَرْءَ ۃُ عُرْضَۃٌ لِّلزَّوَاجِ عورت محل نکاح ہے۔ جَعَلَہٗ عُرْضَۃً لِّلْبَـلَاءِ فلاں شخص کو ابتلاؤں کا محل بنا دیا ہے۔ عُرْضَۃٌ کے معنے نشانہ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ یعنی جس چیز کو گاڑ کر اس پر کوئی چیز پھینکی جائے (اقرب) اسی طرح عُرْضَۃ ً وہ شے ہے جسے سامنے کر دیا جائے یعنی اسے ضرورت کے پورا کرنے کا ذریعہ بنایا جائے۔ کہتے ہیں اَلْبَعِیْرُ عُرْضَۃٌ لِّلسَّفَرِ (مفردات) یعنی سفر کی مصیبت پیش آئے تو اونٹ کو آگے کر دیا جاتا ہے۔ یعنی اس کے ذریعہ سے سفر کی تکلیف کو دور کر دیا جاتا ہے۔ پس عُرْضَۃ وہ ہے جو
The word ‘Urdah meaning a butt or an obstacle, it is indeed an act of blasphemy that one should use the name of Allah Who is the Fountainhead of all goodness, to abstain from doing good deeds. Again, it is a gross violation of the sanctity of Allah’s name that it should be used as a butt or target for profane or purposeless oaths. This and the following verse serve as a sort of introduction to 2:227, in which the subject of swearing to keep away from one’s wife has been pointedly stated.
Important Words:
عرضة (target) is derived from عرض. They say عرض الشیء meaning, he exhibited or offered the thing; he placed it before or in sight of the people. عرض لی عارض means, a hindrance came across my way. Thus عرضة means: (1) an obstacle or hindrance in the way of a person; (2) a thing or person exposed to or confronting someone or something; (3) a butt or target like the butt of archers; also figuratively, as one might say, "he became the عرضة or butt of their rebukes"; (4) an object; (5) an excuse or pretext (Aqrab & Taj).
ایمان (oaths) is the plural of یمین which is derived from یمن. They say یمن الرجل meaning, he approached him from the right hand side. یمن الله فلانا means, God made him blessed. یمین means, (1) the right hand side; (2) the right hand; (3) strength, blessing and good fortune; (4) an oath (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As there are men to be found who are likely to forget that a wife being a sacred tilth is to be treated well not only for her own sake but also for the sake of children, and such men flare up at slight causes and then resort to swearing that they would not treat their wives well nor act kindly towards their relations, the Quran here makes a suitable reference to such men and prohibits them from using the name of God for acts of injustice and transgression. The verse under comment and the one that follows serve as a sort of introduction to verse 2:227 in which the subject of swearing to keep away from one’s wife has been more pointedly stated. God’s name, being the holiest of all holy things, should not be used as an obstacle in the way of righteousness and of doing good to others.
The word عرضة meaning a butt or an obstacle, has been very appropriately used in the verse to point out that such men as swear by God to abstain from acts of righteousness hopelessly fail to appreciate the true dignity of the Supreme Being. It is indeed an act of blasphemy that one should use the name of Allah, Who is the fountain-head of all goodness, to keep away from the path of goodness. Again, it is a gross violation of the sanctity of Allah’s name that it should be used as a butt or target for profane or purposeless oaths.
1
عُرْضَۃً کے معنے محل کے ہیں۔ کہتے ہیں اَلْمَرْءَ ۃُ عُرْضَۃٌ لِّلزَّوَاجِ عورت محل نکاح ہے۔ جَعَلَہٗ عُرْضَۃً لِّلْبَـلَاءِ فلاں شخص کو ابتلاؤں کا محل بنا دیا ہے۔ عُرْضَۃٌ کے معنے نشانہ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ یعنی جس چیز کو گاڑ کر اس پر کوئی چیز پھینکی جائے (اقرب) اسی طرح عُرْضَۃ ً وہ شے ہے جسے سامنے کر دیا جائے یعنی اسے ضرورت کے پورا کرنے کا ذریعہ بنایا جائے۔ کہتے ہیں اَلْبَعِیْرُ عُرْضَۃٌ لِّلسَّفَرِ (مفردات) یعنی سفر کی مصیبت پیش آئے تو اونٹ کو آگے کر دیا جاتا ہے۔ یعنی اس کے ذریعہ سے سفر کی تکلیف کو دور کر دیا جاتا ہے۔ پس عُرْضَۃ وہ ہے جو
231
Important Words:
عرضة (target) is derived from عرض. They say عرض الشیء meaning, he exhibited or offered the thing; he placed it before or in sight of the people. عرض لی عارض means, a hindrance came across my way. Thus عرضة means: (1) an obstacle or hindrance in the way of a person; (2) a thing or person exposed to or confronting someone or something; (3) a butt or target like the butt of archers; also figuratively, as one might say, "he became the عرضة or butt of their rebukes"; (4) an object; (5) an excuse or pretext (Aqrab & Taj).
ایمان (oaths) is the plural of یمین which is derived from یمن. They say یمن الرجل meaning, he approached him from the right hand side. یمن الله فلانا means, God made him blessed. یمین means, (1) the right hand side; (2) the right hand; (3) strength, blessing and good fortune; (4) an oath (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As there are men to be found who are likely to forget that a wife being a sacred tilth is to be treated well not only for her own sake but also for the sake of children, and such men flare up at slight causes and then resort to swearing that they would not treat their wives well nor act kindly towards their relations, the Quran here makes a suitable reference to such men and prohibits them from using the name of God for acts of injustice and transgression. The verse under comment and the one that follows serve as a sort of introduction to verse 2:227 in which the subject of swearing to keep away from one’s wife has been more pointedly stated. God’s name, being the holiest of all holy things, should not be used as an obstacle in the way of righteousness and of doing good to others.
The word عرضة meaning a butt or an obstacle, has been very appropriately used in the verse to point out that such men as swear by God to abstain from acts of righteousness hopelessly fail to appreciate the true dignity of the Supreme Being. It is indeed an act of blasphemy that one should use the name of Allah, Who is the fountain-head of all goodness, to keep away from the path of goodness. Again, it is a gross violation of the sanctity of Allah’s name that it should be used as a butt or target for profane or purposeless oaths.
273
The word ‘Urdah meaning a butt or an obstacle, it is indeed an act of blasphemy that one should use the name of Allah Who is the Fountainhead of all goodness, to abstain from doing good deeds. Again, it is a gross violation of the sanctity of Allah’s name that it should be used as a butt or target for profane or purposeless oaths. This and the following verse serve as a sort of introduction to 2:227, in which the subject of swearing to keep away from one’s wife has been pointedly stated.
لَّا يُؤَاخِذُكُمُ ٱللَّهُ بِٱللَّغْوِ فِىٓ أَيْمَٰنِكُمْ وَلَٰكِن يُؤَاخِذُكُم بِمَا كَسَبَتْ قُلُوبُكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ غَفُورٌ حَلِيمٌ
5:90.
لغو قسم سے مراد وہ قسم ہے جو عادت کی وجہ سے کھائی جائے۔ جیسے بعض کو بلا سوچے وَاللّٰہِ! بِاللّٰہِ کہنے کی عادت ہوتی ہے۔ یا وہ قسم جس کے کھانے والا یقین رکھتا ہو کہ وہ درست ہے لیکن اس کا یقین غلط ہو یا شدید غصہ میں قسم کھا لینا کہ جب ہوش و حواس ٹھکانے نہ ہوں یا حرام شے کے استعمال یا فرض و واجب عمل کے ترک کے متعلق کسی وقتی جوش کے ماتحت قسمیں کھا لینا یہ سب قسمیں لغو ہیں۔ اور ان کے توڑنے پر کوئی کفارہ نہیں بلکہ ان کے کھانے پر توبہ اور استغفار کا حکم ہے کیونکہ ھُمْ عَنِ اللَّغْوِ مُعْرِضُوْنَ (مؤمنون: ۴) کے خلاف ایسی قسمیں ہیں پس ان کے کھانے والا مخطی یا گنہگار ہے اس
حَلِیْمٌ حِلْم سے ہے اور اس کے معنے صبر کرنے والے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور اسی طرح اس کے معنے بُردبار کے بھی ہیں۔ یعنی جس میں طیش نہ ہو۔ یونہی جوش میں آکر اندھا دھند کام نہ کرتا ہو۔ حِلْم جہالت اور بیوقوفی کے مخالف معنے بھی دیتا ہے اور علم اور سمجھ کے بھی۔ نیز اس کے معنے عقل کے بھی ہیں (اقرب)
5:90.
Taking an oath is a serious matter, but some men are in the habit of swearing without meaning anything. Such oaths as are taken thoughtlessly or as a matter of habit or those taken in a sudden fit of anger do not call for expiation.
5:90.
Important Words:
یؤاخذکم (will call you to account) is derived from اخذ. اخذه means, he took hold of him; he seized him. آخذه means, he called him to account; he punished or chastised him (Aqrab).
اللغو (vain) is derived from لغا. They say لغابکلمة i.e. he uttered or spoke a word. لغا الشیء means, the thing went in vain. لغا عن الطریق means he deviated from the path. لغافی قوله means, he spoke without proper care and thinking. اللغو therefore means, a speech or writing, etc. which is worthless and of no account and deserves no attention; it also means, the barking of a dog (Aqrab). لاغاه means, he jested or joked with him (Lane). اللغو also means that which one utters without seriously meaning it (Muhit).
حلیم (Forbearing) is derived from حلم meaning, he was forbearing and clement; he forgave and connived at offences; he controlled his temper in moments of anger; he was patient, sedate, or intelligent and calm and was not hasty in punishing or taking revenge. Thus حلیم which is one of the attributive names of God, means, one who is forbearing and to whom the disobedience of the disobedient does not cause agitation or excitement, who is slow in punishing but quick in forgiving; it also means one who is intelligent (Aqrab, Lane & Mufradat).
Commentary:
Oaths are very serious things, as mentioned in the preceding verse, but some men are in the habit of swearing without meaning anything. Such oaths as are referred to in this verse are oaths taken carelessly or as a matter of habit or those taken in a sudden fit of anger. The fact that such oaths are not liable to be punished does not, however, mean that indulgence in them is permitted. It only means that a person who swears vain oaths will not be punished on the basis of such oaths, i.e. these oaths will not be legally treated as oaths. But he will certainly suffer the consequences of indulging in vain and useless talk. A Muslim is expected to avoid all things that are vain or purposeless and the Quran clearly enjoins it (23:4).
The clause, He will call you to account for what your hearts have earned, means that a person will have to answer for oaths he takes consciously and deliberately. The words, what your hearts have earned, also hint that God does not call a man to account for such passing thoughts as may flash across the mind and then disappear. Only such thoughts are punishable as are "earned" by the heart, i.e. cherished and retained by the mind.
The words, Allah is Most Forgiving, Forbearing, signify that as Allah knows your weaknesses, He treats you with forbearance, and does not call you to account for such of your acts as you might do without meaning them.
a
5:90.
1
لغو قسم سے مراد وہ قسم ہے جو عادت کی وجہ سے کھائی جائے۔ جیسے بعض کو بلا سوچے وَاللّٰہِ! بِاللّٰہِ کہنے کی عادت ہوتی ہے۔ یا وہ قسم جس کے کھانے والا یقین رکھتا ہو کہ وہ درست ہے لیکن اس کا یقین غلط ہو یا شدید غصہ میں قسم کھا لینا کہ جب ہوش و حواس ٹھکانے نہ ہوں یا حرام شے کے استعمال یا فرض و واجب عمل کے ترک کے متعلق کسی وقتی جوش کے ماتحت قسمیں کھا لینا یہ سب قسمیں لغو ہیں۔ اور ان کے توڑنے پر کوئی کفارہ نہیں بلکہ ان کے کھانے پر توبہ اور استغفار کا حکم ہے کیونکہ ھُمْ عَنِ اللَّغْوِ مُعْرِضُوْنَ (مؤمنون: ۴) کے خلاف ایسی قسمیں ہیں پس ان کے کھانے والا مخطی یا گنہگار ہے اس
2
حَلِیْمٌ حِلْم سے ہے اور اس کے معنے صبر کرنے والے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور اسی طرح اس کے معنے بُردبار کے بھی ہیں۔ یعنی جس میں طیش نہ ہو۔ یونہی جوش میں آکر اندھا دھند کام نہ کرتا ہو۔ حِلْم جہالت اور بیوقوفی کے مخالف معنے بھی دیتا ہے اور علم اور سمجھ کے بھی۔ نیز اس کے معنے عقل کے بھی ہیں (اقرب)
a
5:90.
232
Important Words:
یؤاخذکم (will call you to account) is derived from اخذ. اخذه means, he took hold of him; he seized him. آخذه means, he called him to account; he punished or chastised him (Aqrab).
اللغو (vain) is derived from لغا. They say لغابکلمة i.e. he uttered or spoke a word. لغا الشیء means, the thing went in vain. لغا عن الطریق means he deviated from the path. لغافی قوله means, he spoke without proper care and thinking. اللغو therefore means, a speech or writing, etc. which is worthless and of no account and deserves no attention; it also means, the barking of a dog (Aqrab). لاغاه means, he jested or joked with him (Lane). اللغو also means that which one utters without seriously meaning it (Muhit).
حلیم (Forbearing) is derived from حلم meaning, he was forbearing and clement; he forgave and connived at offences; he controlled his temper in moments of anger; he was patient, sedate, or intelligent and calm and was not hasty in punishing or taking revenge. Thus حلیم which is one of the attributive names of God, means, one who is forbearing and to whom the disobedience of the disobedient does not cause agitation or excitement, who is slow in punishing but quick in forgiving; it also means one who is intelligent (Aqrab, Lane & Mufradat).
Commentary:
Oaths are very serious things, as mentioned in the preceding verse, but some men are in the habit of swearing without meaning anything. Such oaths as are referred to in this verse are oaths taken carelessly or as a matter of habit or those taken in a sudden fit of anger. The fact that such oaths are not liable to be punished does not, however, mean that indulgence in them is permitted. It only means that a person who swears vain oaths will not be punished on the basis of such oaths, i.e. these oaths will not be legally treated as oaths. But he will certainly suffer the consequences of indulging in vain and useless talk. A Muslim is expected to avoid all things that are vain or purposeless and the Quran clearly enjoins it (23:4).
The clause, He will call you to account for what your hearts have earned, means that a person will have to answer for oaths he takes consciously and deliberately. The words, what your hearts have earned, also hint that God does not call a man to account for such passing thoughts as may flash across the mind and then disappear. Only such thoughts are punishable as are "earned" by the heart, i.e. cherished and retained by the mind.
The words, Allah is Most Forgiving, Forbearing, signify that as Allah knows your weaknesses, He treats you with forbearance, and does not call you to account for such of your acts as you might do without meaning them.
a
5:90.
274
Taking an oath is a serious matter, but some men are in the habit of swearing without meaning anything. Such oaths as are taken thoughtlessly or as a matter of habit or those taken in a sudden fit of anger do not call for expiation.
لِّلَّذِينَ يُؤْلُونَ مِن نِّسَآئِهِمْ تَرَبُّصُ أَرْبَعَةِ أَشْهُرٍ ۖ فَإِن فَآءُو فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
在述及立誓的那两节开头和插入的经文之后, «古兰经» 现在又回到夫妻关系的原题上来。这节经文谈到那些立誓要与自己妻子离异的人, 但实际上还没有同她们离婚 。有趣的是, 在谈到离婚的这一论题时可以看到, «古兰经» 先谈月经 (2:223), 这是一种暂时的和不完全的然而不是真正的分离, 然后 (像在这节经文中) 它谈及真正的然而是尚未完全肯定的分离。然后, 在随后的几节经文中谈及真正的然而是可撤回的离婚。最后, (2:231) 它谈及不可撤回的离婚。伊斯兰教认识并且坚持认为离婚必然是一种不好的事情, 在离婚的道路上确实巧妙地安排了尽可能多的一系列障碍。伊斯兰教给予一个立誓不再接近他妻子的人至多四个月的时间。在这段时间里, 他必须或者同妻子和解, 恢复夫妻关系, 或者双方实行离异。伊斯兰教绝不容许不离婚而无限期分离, 使那个女人好像是 “悬挂在那里。” اِيْلَاء (Ila’) 意指离异的誓言。根据这种誓言, 一个女人在那 “愚昧的时代” 处于一种悬挂的状态。她既不能嫁别人, 又不能和她的丈夫有夫妻关系。
اِیْـلَا ءً: اٰلٰی یُؤْلِیْ اِیْلَا ءً: قسم کھانا۔ یہ اَ لَا سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے کسی کام میں کمی یا تاخیر کرنے کے ہیں اور اِیْـلَا ء قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں اس قسم کو کہتے ہیں جو اس بات پر کھائی جائے کہ مرد اپنی بیوی سے کوئی تعلق نہ رکھے گا (مفردات) چونکہ اس قسم میں عورت کے حق کا اتلاف ہے اس لئے اسے اِیْـلَا ء کہا گیا۔
(۴) فَاءَ یَفِیْءُ فَـیْـئًا: لوٹ آیا۔ فَاءَ الْاَمْرَ رَجَعَ اِلَیْہِ: اس بات کی طرف لوٹ آیا (اقرب) فَاءَ کا لفظ نیک امور کی طرف لوٹنے کے متعلق استعمال ہوتا ہے (مفردات) اصل میں اس کے معنے تعاون اور امداد باہمی کے لئے ایک دوسرے کے ساتھ مل کر کام کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں اور سایہ کو بھی فَیْئٌ کہتے ہیں کیونکہ وہ سورج کے ساتھ اِدھر سے اُدھر ہوتا رہتا ہے۔ ان دونوں معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے فَاءَ بالعموم اچھے معنوں میں استعمال ہونے لگا ہے۔
عرب میں یہ رواج تھا کہ بعض لوگ اپنی بیویوں کو طلاق تو نہ دیتے مگر قسم کھا لیتے تھے کہ ہم ان سے تعلق نہیں رکھیں گے۔ اس
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Qur’an now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, the Qur’an first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse), it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce, which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil. Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relation
Important Words:
یؤلون (vow) is derived from the root لاآ meaning, he fell short; or he fell short of doing what he ought to have done; or he was remiss. آلی means, he swore. آلیت علی الشیء means, I swore to do the thing. آلیت لا افعل کذا means, I swore that I would not do such a thing. آلی من زوجه شھرا means, he swore he would not go near his wife (i.e. not go in unto her) for a month. ائتلی also gives the same meaning as آلی i.e. he swore, as in 24:23. ایلاء means, an oath or the act of swearing; and technically it means, a vow taken by a husband not to go near his wife (Aqrab & Lane).
تربص (waiting) is derived from ربص. They say ربص به i.e. he waited for a good or an evil to befall him. تربص means, he waited or he awaited, or he tarried waiting. تربص عن الامر means, he remained waiting and did not do the thing, i.e. he abstained from doing it (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Quran now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, in this connection, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, dealt with in the succeeding verses, the Quran first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse) it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, as in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil.
As clearly stated in the verse under comment, Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relations, or separation will be effected between the two. Islam would in no case permit indefinite separation without divorce, leaving the woman "suspended" as it were.
The words if they go back from the vow, surely Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful indicate that swearing abstinence from one’s wife is reprehensible in the sight of God Who loves to see reconciliation between husband and wife. The verse thus abolishes the custom of ایلاءwhich was prevalent among the Arabs before the advent of Islam and by which it was sought to deprive women of their conjugal rights for long and indefinite periods.
165
在述及立誓的那两节开头和插入的经文之后, «古兰经» 现在又回到夫妻关系的原题上来。这节经文谈到那些立誓要与自己妻子离异的人, 但实际上还没有同她们离婚 。有趣的是, 在谈到离婚的这一论题时可以看到, «古兰经» 先谈月经 (2:223), 这是一种暂时的和不完全的然而不是真正的分离, 然后 (像在这节经文中) 它谈及真正的然而是尚未完全肯定的分离。然后, 在随后的几节经文中谈及真正的然而是可撤回的离婚。最后, (2:231) 它谈及不可撤回的离婚。伊斯兰教认识并且坚持认为离婚必然是一种不好的事情, 在离婚的道路上确实巧妙地安排了尽可能多的一系列障碍。伊斯兰教给予一个立誓不再接近他妻子的人至多四个月的时间。在这段时间里, 他必须或者同妻子和解, 恢复夫妻关系, 或者双方实行离异。伊斯兰教绝不容许不离婚而无限期分离, 使那个女人好像是 “悬挂在那里。” اِيْلَاء (Ila’) 意指离异的誓言。根据这种誓言, 一个女人在那 “愚昧的时代” 处于一种悬挂的状态。她既不能嫁别人, 又不能和她的丈夫有夫妻关系。
3
اِیْـلَا ءً: اٰلٰی یُؤْلِیْ اِیْلَا ءً: قسم کھانا۔ یہ اَ لَا سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے کسی کام میں کمی یا تاخیر کرنے کے ہیں اور اِیْـلَا ء قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں اس قسم کو کہتے ہیں جو اس بات پر کھائی جائے کہ مرد اپنی بیوی سے کوئی تعلق نہ رکھے گا (مفردات) چونکہ اس قسم میں عورت کے حق کا اتلاف ہے اس لئے اسے اِیْـلَا ء کہا گیا۔
4
(۴) فَاءَ یَفِیْءُ فَـیْـئًا: لوٹ آیا۔ فَاءَ الْاَمْرَ رَجَعَ اِلَیْہِ: اس بات کی طرف لوٹ آیا (اقرب) فَاءَ کا لفظ نیک امور کی طرف لوٹنے کے متعلق استعمال ہوتا ہے (مفردات) اصل میں اس کے معنے تعاون اور امداد باہمی کے لئے ایک دوسرے کے ساتھ مل کر کام کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں اور سایہ کو بھی فَیْئٌ کہتے ہیں کیونکہ وہ سورج کے ساتھ اِدھر سے اُدھر ہوتا رہتا ہے۔ ان دونوں معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے فَاءَ بالعموم اچھے معنوں میں استعمال ہونے لگا ہے۔
عرب میں یہ رواج تھا کہ بعض لوگ اپنی بیویوں کو طلاق تو نہ دیتے مگر قسم کھا لیتے تھے کہ ہم ان سے تعلق نہیں رکھیں گے۔ اس
233
Important Words:
یؤلون (vow) is derived from the root لاآ meaning, he fell short; or he fell short of doing what he ought to have done; or he was remiss. آلی means, he swore. آلیت علی الشیء means, I swore to do the thing. آلیت لا افعل کذا means, I swore that I would not do such a thing. آلی من زوجه شھرا means, he swore he would not go near his wife (i.e. not go in unto her) for a month. ائتلی also gives the same meaning as آلی i.e. he swore, as in 24:23. ایلاء means, an oath or the act of swearing; and technically it means, a vow taken by a husband not to go near his wife (Aqrab & Lane).
تربص (waiting) is derived from ربص. They say ربص به i.e. he waited for a good or an evil to befall him. تربص means, he waited or he awaited, or he tarried waiting. تربص عن الامر means, he remained waiting and did not do the thing, i.e. he abstained from doing it (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Quran now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, in this connection, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, dealt with in the succeeding verses, the Quran first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse) it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, as in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil.
As clearly stated in the verse under comment, Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relations, or separation will be effected between the two. Islam would in no case permit indefinite separation without divorce, leaving the woman "suspended" as it were.
The words if they go back from the vow, surely Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful indicate that swearing abstinence from one’s wife is reprehensible in the sight of God Who loves to see reconciliation between husband and wife. The verse thus abolishes the custom of ایلاءwhich was prevalent among the Arabs before the advent of Islam and by which it was sought to deprive women of their conjugal rights for long and indefinite periods.
275
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Qur’an now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, the Qur’an first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse), it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce, which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil. Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relation
وَإِنْ عَزَمُوا۟ ٱلطَّلَٰقَ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ
2:230; 33:50; 65:2.
With this verse begins the discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But the right is to be exercised only on very rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
2:230; 33:50; 65:2, 3.
Important Words:
الطلاق (divorce) is derived from طلق. They say طلقت الناقة i.e. the she-camel became loosened and free from the rope which tied her. طلقت المرأة من زوجھا means, the woman left her husband and severed her connection with him. طلق المرأة زوجھا means, the husband divorced his wife. الطلاق therefore, means, breaking of the tie of marriage; divorce (Aqrab).
عزموا (they decide). عزم means, he made up his mind; he decided; he was determined to do a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If, after vowing abstinence from his wife, as stated in the preceding verse, the husband decides on divorce, he is free to take that course. But the words, Allah is All-Hearing All-Knowing, warn him that if he is thereby acting unjustly to his wife, he should not think that he can so act with impunity, for Allah is there to hear the supplications of the wife; and even if she does not or cannot pray to God, Allah knows everything.
With this verse begins a discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But this right is to be exercised only on rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
b
2:230; 33:50; 65:2.
166
从这节经文起开始讨论伊斯兰教的离婚法令。根据这一法令, 如果合乎法律需要, 那么, 丈夫有权和妻子离婚。不过这种权利只能在非常少的场合以及特殊情况下才能使用。
a
2:230; 33:50; 65:2, 3.
234
Important Words:
الطلاق (divorce) is derived from طلق. They say طلقت الناقة i.e. the she-camel became loosened and free from the rope which tied her. طلقت المرأة من زوجھا means, the woman left her husband and severed her connection with him. طلق المرأة زوجھا means, the husband divorced his wife. الطلاق therefore, means, breaking of the tie of marriage; divorce (Aqrab).
عزموا (they decide). عزم means, he made up his mind; he decided; he was determined to do a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If, after vowing abstinence from his wife, as stated in the preceding verse, the husband decides on divorce, he is free to take that course. But the words, Allah is All-Hearing All-Knowing, warn him that if he is thereby acting unjustly to his wife, he should not think that he can so act with impunity, for Allah is there to hear the supplications of the wife; and even if she does not or cannot pray to God, Allah knows everything.
With this verse begins a discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But this right is to be exercised only on rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
a
2:230; 33:50; 65:2.
276
With this verse begins the discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But the right is to be exercised only on very rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
وَٱلْمُطَلَّقَٰتُ يَتَرَبَّصْنَ بِأَنفُسِهِنَّ ثَلَٰثَةَ قُرُوٓءٍ ۚ وَلَا يَحِلُّ لَهُنَّ أَن يَكْتُمْنَ مَا خَلَقَ ٱللَّهُ فِىٓ أَرْحَامِهِنَّ إِن كُنَّ يُؤْمِنَّ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۚ وَبُعُولَتُهُنَّ أَحَقُّ بِرَدِّهِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ إِنْ أَرَادُوٓا۟ إِصْلَٰحًا ۚ وَلَهُنَّ مِثْلُ ٱلَّذِى عَلَيْهِنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۚ وَلِلرِّجَالِ عَلَيْهِنَّ دَرَجَةٌ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَزِيزٌ حَكِيمٌ
4:35.
2:235; 65:5.
قُرُؤ (Quru’) 是 قُرْء (Qur’) 或 قَرْء (Qar’) 的复数, 意思是:一次; 月经; 月经前后的那段时间即洁净状态, 也就是说, 两次月经之间的那段时间; 一次月经的终止; 月经与沽净状态算在一起的那段时间, 即整个月份; 一个女人离开她洁净状态进入经期的时间或状态 {مُحِيْط (Muhit) 和 مُفْرَدَات (Mufradat)}。穆圣的同伴阿布•白克尔 (اَبُوْبَكر, Abu Bakr)、欧麦尔 (عُمَرْ, ‘Umar)、法理学教长阿布•哈尼法 (اَبُوْحَنِيْفَة, Abu Hanifa) 和阿哈默德•彬•汉巴尔 (اَحْمَدْ بِنْ حَنْبَلْ, Ahmad bin Hanbal) 认为 قُرْء 意指月经而不指洁净时期。与此相反, 穆圣另两位同伴阿依莎 (عَائِشَة, ‘A’ishah) 和伊本•欧麦尔 (اِبْنِ عُمَرْ, Ibn-e-‘Umar) 以及法理学教长马利克 (مٰلِكْ, Malik) 和沙斐伊 (شَافِعِیْ Shafi‘iy) 却持相反的看法 (مُحِيْط)。既然是见仁见智, 可以让一个穆斯林自己去采取两种看法中的任何一种。但是对有关争论的集体调查 (这里不必细说) 使人得到一个结论: 两种看法中第一种看来更近乎情理。虽然如此, 如果 (一个人) 要想稳当一些的话, 可以 (由他) 采用 قُرْء (Qur’), 的词义为月经洁净状态算在一起的那段时期, 即整个月份。
由於离婚是安拉在所有合法事情中最不愿意见到的事情 (دَاؤد), 它受到许多限制: (a) 丈夫只能在妻子洁净即月经洁净的状态时而且他在她洁净的时期与她无性关系时才能离婚。(b) 宣布离婚以后, 妻子必须等候三次月经即大约三个月的时间, 这段时间称为 عِدَّة (‘Iddat) 即等候时期。这是因为给丈夫充份的时间来考虑与他的这一行动有牵连的所有事情;假如他心中仍有一丝潜藏在那里的火花的话,他还可爱她;可以使他有再次决定的机会。(c) 离了婚的妇女如果已受孕不必对丈夫隐瞒, 因为可以认为将要出生的孩子有助于两口子重归和好。(d) 完全而不可撤回的分离, 可以有三次离婚。在第一和第二次宣布离婚后, 以及在等候时期到期前, 丈夫享有带回妻子的特权, 如果他想这样做的话。即使在等候时期结束后, 在第一和第二次离婚的情况下, 两口子仍能团圆, 只要重新结婚就可以了。
就个人权利而言, 夫妻是平等的。可是, 像4:35节经文指出的那样, 男人在体力方面条件较好, 又负有供养家庭的经济上的责任, 因此有管理权利。
حضرت ابوبکرؓ‘‘ عمرؓ‘‘ عثمانؓ‘‘ علیؓ اور ابن مسعودؓ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ نے قُرْئٌ کے معنے حیض کے لئے ہیں اور زید بن ثابتؓ‘ حضرت عائشہؓ اور ابن عمرؓ اور مالکؒ اور شافعیؒ نے طُہر کے معنے کیے ہیں (محیط)
بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ کا ترجمہ یہاں ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ بعض جگہ انہی الفاظ کا ترجمہ ’’مناسب حال‘‘ یا مناسب طور پر کیا گیا ہے۔ یہ فرق اردو میں مضمون کی وضاحت کی خاطر ہے۔ ہاں یہ یادرکھنا چاہیے کہ ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ میں دستور کا جو لفظ ہے اس کے اصل معنے تو قانون اور رواج کے ہیں۔ لیکن اردو میں کبھی یہ دستور کا لفظ Common Sense یعنی عقل عامہ کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے اور مراد یہ ہوتی ہے کہ شرفا اور عقلا کا یہی طریق ہے۔ جس کے معنے دوسرے لفظوں میں یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ عقل کا تقاضا یہی ہے۔ اس جگہ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ کے چونکہ یہی معنے ہیں اس لئے ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کے ا
اس جگہ واؤ ہے اور واؤ کے معنے عام طور پر ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں‘ لیکن اردو قواعد کے مطابق ’’اور‘‘ کا لفظ اسی وقت استعمال ہو سکتا تھا کہ اس جگہ مردوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہوتا۔ لیکن جیسا کہ ظاہر ہے اس موقعہ پر عورتوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہے اس لئے ’’اور‘‘ سے واؤ کا ترجمہ کرنا بالکل مفہوم کو بدل دیتا ہے اور کلام کا زور عورتوں کے حقوق سے ہٹ کر مردوں کے حقوق کی طرف چلا جاتا ہے حالانکہ انداز کلام سے ظاہر ہے کہ عورتوں کو اس امر کی طرف توجہ دلائی جا رہی ہے کہ تمہارے حقوق کی حفاظت ہم نے کر دی ہے اور جس طرح مردوں کو تم پر بعض حق دئے ہیں تم کو بھی ان پر بعض حق دئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ ضرور ہے کہ بعض
4:35.
2:235; 65:5.
Quru’ is plural of Qur’ or Qar’ which means, a time; menstruation; period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; termination of a menstruation; the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Muhit & Mufradat). Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the view that Qur’ means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah and Ibn-e-‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it is open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that o
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations: (a) A husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean, i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. (b) After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called ‘Iddat or the period of waiting. This is because this period gives the husband sufficient time to consider all the implications of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. (c) A divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. (d) For complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as
As far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but as pointed out in 4:35 men have a supervisory authority on account of the physical advantage they possess and the financial responsibility that they carry for providing for the household.
2:235; 65:5.
4:35.
Important Words:
قروء (courses) is the plural of قرء which is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الشیء i.e. he collected or put together the thing. قرأت الناقة means, the she-camel became pregnant. قرأت الحامل means, the pregnant woman gave birth to a child. قرات المرأة or اقرأت المرأة means, the woman became pure from menstrual discharge. اقرأت المرأة also means, she menstruated, thus giving contrary meanings. قرء (Qur’un or Qar’un), means: (1) a time, and this is the primary significance of the word, as we say ھبت الریح لقرئھا i.e. the wind blew at its fixed time; (2) menstruation; (3) period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; thus the word gives contrary meanings; (4) termination of a menstruation (Aqrab & Lane). The word قرء is also sometimes applied to the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month (Muhit). According to Raghib قرء means the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Mufradat).
ارحام (wombs) is the plural of رحم (rihm or rahim) which is from the verb رحم. They say رحمه i.e. he showed him mercy, he was tender towards him. رحمت المرأة means, the woman had complaint of the womb after childbirth. رحم (rahim) or رحم(rihm) means, (1) womb; (2) relationship, particularly by the female side. The expression اولواالارحام or ذوالارحام means, relatives or kinsmen. In Muslim jurisprudence the expression signifies such relations as are not direct heirs (Lane).
بعولة (husbands), like بعول, is the plural of بعل. They say بعل الرجل i.e. the man became a husband. بعلت المرأة means, the woman married and had a husband. بعل is like زوج meaning, both a husband and a wife, i.e. a partner in life; but the significance of husband is more common. The word also means, lord, master or owner of a thing; or a person in authority. The Arabs sometimes gave the name بعل to their idols also (Lane & Mufradat).
المعروف (equity) is a common Arabic word which has been freely used in the Quran as well as the Hadith. The word is derived from عرف. They say عرفه i.e. he knew it either by means of the five senses or by mental perception, as by reflection, or by consideration of the effect of a thing on the mind; he recognized it. المعروف means, (1) a known or commonly known thing; (2) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by reason, i.e. equity; (3) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by the law of Shari‘ah; (4) goodness, kindness and beneficence; (5) liberality coupled with moderation; (6) good fellowship with one’s family and others; (7) sincere and honest word of advice, etc. (Lane). It may be noted here that while taking the oath of allegiance from would-be Muslims, the Holy Prophet always used the word المعروف asking them to solemnly affirm that they would obey him in all معروف things, i.e. not only in such things as formed part of the divine law of Shari‘ah but also in those which the Prophet held to be good by his own reason.
درجة (rank) means, (1) the various steps forming a set of stairs; (2) rank; (3) eminence (4) degree (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations. One of these checks is that a husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called عدة(‘iddah) or the period of waiting. This is another check, because this period of waiting gives to the husband sufficient time to consider the pros and cons of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. The third check laid down in this verse is that a divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. The fourth check, as mentioned in the succeeding verses, is that for complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as well as the second divorce, and before the expiry of the period of waiting, the husband enjoys the privilege of taking his wife back, if he so desires. Even after the period of waiting is over, the couple can become reunited in the case of the first and second divorce by renewing the marriage tie.
The verse adds that as far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but in matters relating to discipline, the husband has superiority over the wife, i.e. in case of difference, the final authority is vested in him. The reasons for this are given in 4:35.
The divine attribute Mighty added at the end of the verse contains a reminder and a warning to the husband that he must not misuse the authority he has been given in household affairs, for there is the Almighty God over his head to Whom he is responsible for his actions. The attribute also provides a reason for vesting authority in the husband, who is the stronger of the parties. The attribute Wise brings home to the husband the fact that the vesting of the final authority in him is based on just and wise considerations, because wherever two or more persons live together, it is necessary that the wisest among them be appointed the Amir or the chief for the efficient running of their affairs and the uniformity of their actions.
A word here about the significance of قرء seems essential. As explained under Important Words, this word gives two distinct and contrary meanings, i.e. (1) menstruation; and (2) the period of purity between two menstruations. This has given rise to much difference of opinion among scholars of Muslim jurisprudence; Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal the Imams of jurisprudence have held the view that by using the word قرء
the Quran means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah (wife of the Holy Prophet) and Ibn ‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of jurisprudence have held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it would be open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that the first-mentioned view is perhaps the more reasonable of the two. If, however, one should desire to be on the perfectly safe side, it is open to him to take the word قرء to signify the periods of menstruation and purity taken together, i.e. the whole month.
a
4:35.
c
2:235; 65:5.
167
قُرُؤ (Quru’) 是 قُرْء (Qur’) 或 قَرْء (Qar’) 的复数, 意思是:一次; 月经; 月经前后的那段时间即洁净状态, 也就是说, 两次月经之间的那段时间; 一次月经的终止; 月经与沽净状态算在一起的那段时间, 即整个月份; 一个女人离开她洁净状态进入经期的时间或状态 {مُحِيْط (Muhit) 和 مُفْرَدَات (Mufradat)}。穆圣的同伴阿布•白克尔 (اَبُوْبَكر, Abu Bakr)、欧麦尔 (عُمَرْ, ‘Umar)、法理学教长阿布•哈尼法 (اَبُوْحَنِيْفَة, Abu Hanifa) 和阿哈默德•彬•汉巴尔 (اَحْمَدْ بِنْ حَنْبَلْ, Ahmad bin Hanbal) 认为 قُرْء 意指月经而不指洁净时期。与此相反, 穆圣另两位同伴阿依莎 (عَائِشَة, ‘A’ishah) 和伊本•欧麦尔 (اِبْنِ عُمَرْ, Ibn-e-‘Umar) 以及法理学教长马利克 (مٰلِكْ, Malik) 和沙斐伊 (شَافِعِیْ Shafi‘iy) 却持相反的看法 (مُحِيْط)。既然是见仁见智, 可以让一个穆斯林自己去采取两种看法中的任何一种。但是对有关争论的集体调查 (这里不必细说) 使人得到一个结论: 两种看法中第一种看来更近乎情理。虽然如此, 如果 (一个人) 要想稳当一些的话, 可以 (由他) 采用 قُرْء (Qur’), 的词义为月经洁净状态算在一起的那段时期, 即整个月份。
168
由於离婚是安拉在所有合法事情中最不愿意见到的事情 (دَاؤد), 它受到许多限制: (a) 丈夫只能在妻子洁净即月经洁净的状态时而且他在她洁净的时期与她无性关系时才能离婚。(b) 宣布离婚以后, 妻子必须等候三次月经即大约三个月的时间, 这段时间称为 عِدَّة (‘Iddat) 即等候时期。这是因为给丈夫充份的时间来考虑与他的这一行动有牵连的所有事情;假如他心中仍有一丝潜藏在那里的火花的话,他还可爱她;可以使他有再次决定的机会。(c) 离了婚的妇女如果已受孕不必对丈夫隐瞒, 因为可以认为将要出生的孩子有助于两口子重归和好。(d) 完全而不可撤回的分离, 可以有三次离婚。在第一和第二次宣布离婚后, 以及在等候时期到期前, 丈夫享有带回妻子的特权, 如果他想这样做的话。即使在等候时期结束后, 在第一和第二次离婚的情况下, 两口子仍能团圆, 只要重新结婚就可以了。
169
就个人权利而言, 夫妻是平等的。可是, 像4:35节经文指出的那样, 男人在体力方面条件较好, 又负有供养家庭的经济上的责任, 因此有管理权利。
1
حضرت ابوبکرؓ‘‘ عمرؓ‘‘ عثمانؓ‘‘ علیؓ اور ابن مسعودؓ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ نے قُرْئٌ کے معنے حیض کے لئے ہیں اور زید بن ثابتؓ‘ حضرت عائشہؓ اور ابن عمرؓ اور مالکؒ اور شافعیؒ نے طُہر کے معنے کیے ہیں (محیط)
2
بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ کا ترجمہ یہاں ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ بعض جگہ انہی الفاظ کا ترجمہ ’’مناسب حال‘‘ یا مناسب طور پر کیا گیا ہے۔ یہ فرق اردو میں مضمون کی وضاحت کی خاطر ہے۔ ہاں یہ یادرکھنا چاہیے کہ ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ میں دستور کا جو لفظ ہے اس کے اصل معنے تو قانون اور رواج کے ہیں۔ لیکن اردو میں کبھی یہ دستور کا لفظ Common Sense یعنی عقل عامہ کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے اور مراد یہ ہوتی ہے کہ شرفا اور عقلا کا یہی طریق ہے۔ جس کے معنے دوسرے لفظوں میں یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ عقل کا تقاضا یہی ہے۔ اس جگہ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ کے چونکہ یہی معنے ہیں اس لئے ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کے ا
3
اس جگہ واؤ ہے اور واؤ کے معنے عام طور پر ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں‘ لیکن اردو قواعد کے مطابق ’’اور‘‘ کا لفظ اسی وقت استعمال ہو سکتا تھا کہ اس جگہ مردوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہوتا۔ لیکن جیسا کہ ظاہر ہے اس موقعہ پر عورتوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہے اس لئے ’’اور‘‘ سے واؤ کا ترجمہ کرنا بالکل مفہوم کو بدل دیتا ہے اور کلام کا زور عورتوں کے حقوق سے ہٹ کر مردوں کے حقوق کی طرف چلا جاتا ہے حالانکہ انداز کلام سے ظاہر ہے کہ عورتوں کو اس امر کی طرف توجہ دلائی جا رہی ہے کہ تمہارے حقوق کی حفاظت ہم نے کر دی ہے اور جس طرح مردوں کو تم پر بعض حق دئے ہیں تم کو بھی ان پر بعض حق دئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ ضرور ہے کہ بعض
a
2:235; 65:5.
b
4:35.
235
Important Words:
قروء (courses) is the plural of قرء which is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الشیء i.e. he collected or put together the thing. قرأت الناقة means, the she-camel became pregnant. قرأت الحامل means, the pregnant woman gave birth to a child. قرات المرأة or اقرأت المرأة means, the woman became pure from menstrual discharge. اقرأت المرأة also means, she menstruated, thus giving contrary meanings. قرء (Qur’un or Qar’un), means: (1) a time, and this is the primary significance of the word, as we say ھبت الریح لقرئھا i.e. the wind blew at its fixed time; (2) menstruation; (3) period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; thus the word gives contrary meanings; (4) termination of a menstruation (Aqrab & Lane). The word قرء is also sometimes applied to the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month (Muhit). According to Raghib قرء means the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Mufradat).
ارحام (wombs) is the plural of رحم (rihm or rahim) which is from the verb رحم. They say رحمه i.e. he showed him mercy, he was tender towards him. رحمت المرأة means, the woman had complaint of the womb after childbirth. رحم (rahim) or رحم(rihm) means, (1) womb; (2) relationship, particularly by the female side. The expression اولواالارحام or ذوالارحام means, relatives or kinsmen. In Muslim jurisprudence the expression signifies such relations as are not direct heirs (Lane).
بعولة (husbands), like بعول, is the plural of بعل. They say بعل الرجل i.e. the man became a husband. بعلت المرأة means, the woman married and had a husband. بعل is like زوج meaning, both a husband and a wife, i.e. a partner in life; but the significance of husband is more common. The word also means, lord, master or owner of a thing; or a person in authority. The Arabs sometimes gave the name بعل to their idols also (Lane & Mufradat).
المعروف (equity) is a common Arabic word which has been freely used in the Quran as well as the Hadith. The word is derived from عرف. They say عرفه i.e. he knew it either by means of the five senses or by mental perception, as by reflection, or by consideration of the effect of a thing on the mind; he recognized it. المعروف means, (1) a known or commonly known thing; (2) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by reason, i.e. equity; (3) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by the law of Shari‘ah; (4) goodness, kindness and beneficence; (5) liberality coupled with moderation; (6) good fellowship with one’s family and others; (7) sincere and honest word of advice, etc. (Lane). It may be noted here that while taking the oath of allegiance from would-be Muslims, the Holy Prophet always used the word المعروف asking them to solemnly affirm that they would obey him in all معروف things, i.e. not only in such things as formed part of the divine law of Shari‘ah but also in those which the Prophet held to be good by his own reason.
درجة (rank) means, (1) the various steps forming a set of stairs; (2) rank; (3) eminence (4) degree (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations. One of these checks is that a husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called عدة(‘iddah) or the period of waiting. This is another check, because this period of waiting gives to the husband sufficient time to consider the pros and cons of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. The third check laid down in this verse is that a divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. The fourth check, as mentioned in the succeeding verses, is that for complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as well as the second divorce, and before the expiry of the period of waiting, the husband enjoys the privilege of taking his wife back, if he so desires. Even after the period of waiting is over, the couple can become reunited in the case of the first and second divorce by renewing the marriage tie.
The verse adds that as far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but in matters relating to discipline, the husband has superiority over the wife, i.e. in case of difference, the final authority is vested in him. The reasons for this are given in 4:35.
The divine attribute Mighty added at the end of the verse contains a reminder and a warning to the husband that he must not misuse the authority he has been given in household affairs, for there is the Almighty God over his head to Whom he is responsible for his actions. The attribute also provides a reason for vesting authority in the husband, who is the stronger of the parties. The attribute Wise brings home to the husband the fact that the vesting of the final authority in him is based on just and wise considerations, because wherever two or more persons live together, it is necessary that the wisest among them be appointed the Amir or the chief for the efficient running of their affairs and the uniformity of their actions.
A word here about the significance of قرء seems essential. As explained under Important Words, this word gives two distinct and contrary meanings, i.e. (1) menstruation; and (2) the period of purity between two menstruations. This has given rise to much difference of opinion among scholars of Muslim jurisprudence; Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal the Imams of jurisprudence have held the view that by using the word قرء
the Quran means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah (wife of the Holy Prophet) and Ibn ‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of jurisprudence have held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it would be open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that the first-mentioned view is perhaps the more reasonable of the two. If, however, one should desire to be on the perfectly safe side, it is open to him to take the word قرء to signify the periods of menstruation and purity taken together, i.e. the whole month.
a
4:35.
b
2:235; 65:5.
277
Quru’ is plural of Qur’ or Qar’ which means, a time; menstruation; period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; termination of a menstruation; the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Muhit & Mufradat). Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the view that Qur’ means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah and Ibn-e-‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it is open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that o
278
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations: (a) A husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean, i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. (b) After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called ‘Iddat or the period of waiting. This is because this period gives the husband sufficient time to consider all the implications of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. (c) A divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. (d) For complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as
279
As far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but as pointed out in 4:35 men have a supervisory authority on account of the physical advantage they possess and the financial responsibility that they carry for providing for the household.
ٱلطَّلَٰقُ مَرَّتَانِ ۖ فَإِمْسَاكٌۢ بِمَعْرُوفٍ أَوْ تَسْرِيحٌۢ بِإِحْسَٰنٍ ۗ وَلَا يَحِلُّ لَكُمْ أَن تَأْخُذُوا۟ مِمَّآ ءَاتَيْتُمُوهُنَّ شَيْـًٔا إِلَّآ أَن يَخَافَآ أَلَّا يُقِيمَا حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ أَلَّا يُقِيمَا حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَا فِيمَا ٱفْتَدَتْ بِهِۦ ۗ تِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ فَلَا تَعْتَدُوهَا ۚ وَمَن يَتَعَدَّ حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلظَّٰلِمُونَ
2:228.
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
这节经文含有对离婚第五种约制。如果丈夫想和妻子离异, 他必须在三个不同时期声明离婚, 每次在她个别的洁净时期中并没有和她同过房, 在同一时期声明两次或三次离婚, 是不准许的。这在 مَرَّتَان (Marratan, 两次) 这一字中可以看出。这字的意思是, 发生在两个不同时期的一件事情, 而不是发生在同一时间的两件事情。穆圣把这种同一时间的集中声明, 不管几次, 都只作一次离婚声明看待 (تِرْمِذِی与داؤد)。根据纳萨伊 (نَسَائِی) 说, 有一天穆圣听到有人在同一时间内作了三次离婚声明, 非常生气地说, “在我还在你们中间时, 就把安拉的经典当儿戏吗?” 在第一和第二次声明离婚后, 丈夫在 عِدَّة (‘Iddat), 既等候时期内, 不论经过或不经过妻子的同意, 都可以召回离了婚的妻子; 但是等候时期过了以后, 他要经过她的同意而且要重新娶她才能收回。在第三次离婚后, 丈夫就丧失了这种权利, 这对夫妻就最终离异了。穆圣的一个伙伴有一次问他说, “«古兰经» 在这里只谈了两次离婚, 第三次离婚在什么地方?” 穆圣向他提到 “以厚道的做法辞离她们” 这句话, 意思是说, 第一和第二次离婚之后, 丈夫可以保留并且可以再娶她, 如果她也同意结婚的话; 但是如果他要最后离异的话, 他应与她离婚, 即第三次离婚 {جَرِيْر (Jarir) 与 مُسْنَد (Musnad)}。这一点在下一节经文中还要进一步说明。这样, 这里的 تَسْرِيْح (Tasrih) 这个字意为 طَلَاق (Talaq), 即离婚。
一个人和他的妻子离婚后, 他就丧失了他已给她的嫁妆 (办嫁妆的钱); 如果在离婚时他还没有给过她嫁妆, 在正式离婚之前, 他必须给她那笔钱。而且, 他不准许取回作为馈赠或礼物而给她的任何东西。
不过, 如果提出离婚的是女方, 法律上称为 خُلْع (khul‘), 她必须通过 قَاضِیْ (Qadi) 即法官, 正如 “你们 (双方) 害怕” 这几个字所暗示的那样。在这种情况下, 她必须归还男方全部或部分嫁妆以及男方过去送给她的礼品, 这要双方议定或由法官决定。盖斯•彬•撒比特 (قَيْس بِنْ ثَابِتْ, Qais bin Thabit) 的妻子杰米拉 (جَمِيْلَة, Jamilah) 那个案例提供了妇女行使 خُلْع 权的一个很好的实际说明。她要求和丈夫盖斯离婚, 理由是她不喜欢他, 也就是说, 他们性格不合, 不能相处在一起。穆圣给了他 خُلْع 的许可, 但是她必须把他给她的果园还给他 (布哈理)。
عام طور پر اس زمانہ کے علماء یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ جس نے تین دفعہ طلاق کہہ دیا اس کی طلاق بائن ہو جاتی ہے یعنی اس کی بیوی اس سے دوبارہ اس وقت تک شادی نہیں کر سکتی جب تک کسی اور سے نکاح نہ کر لے مگر یہ غلط ہے کیونکہ قرآن کریم میں صاف فرمایا گیا ہے اَلطَّـلَا قُ مَرَّتٰنِ یعنی وہ طلاق جو بائن نہیں وہ دو دفعہ ہو سکتی ہے اس طور پر کہ پہلے مرد طلاق دے پھر یا تو طلاق واپس لے لے اور رجوع کرے یا عدت گزرنے دے اور نکاح کرے۔ پھر اَن بَن کی صورت میں دوبارہ طلاق دے۔ پس ایسی طلاق کا دو دفعہ ہونا تو قطعی طور پر ثابت ہے۔ پس ایک ہی دفعہ تین یا تین سے زیادہ بار طلاق کہہ دینے کو بائن قرار دین
تمہیں یعنی ملتِ اسلامیہ یا اسلام پر ایمان رکھنے والی حکومت کو۔
اِنْ خِفْتُمْ میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر محکمہ قضا اس بات کا فیصلہ کرے کہ عورت خاوند کے پاس رہنے کے لئے راضی نہیں اور اس کی نارضا مندی کی وجہ سے مرد بھی عدل نہ رکھ سکے گا‘ تو عورت اگر کچھ دینا چاہے تو مرد کو اجازت ہے کہ کچھ مال لیکر اسے طلاق دے دے۔ لیکن وہ صرف اتنا ہی مال لے سکتا ہے جتنا اس نے خود دیا ہو اور کچھ نہیں۔
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate period of purity when he has not gone in unto her during that period. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as is hinted in the word Marratan (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time and said, "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?" After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘Iddat, i.e. the period of waiting, with or
When a person divorces his wife, he forfeits the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower- money, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as Khula‘, she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the words "you fear," in the plural number, hint. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed upon by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khula‘ by women. She demanded separation from her husband. Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different she could not get on with him. She was granted Khula‘ by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari).
See 2:228.
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
Important Words:
امساك (retain) is derived from امسك which is again derived from مسك. They say امسك به i.e. he stuck to it. امسك is both transitive and intransitive. امسكه means, he got hold of it and stopped and retained it. امسك عن الکلام means, he abstained from talking. امساك means, (1) to hold or stop or prevent or retain; (2) to refrain or abstain (Aqrab).
تسریح (send away) is the noun-infinitive from سرح (sarraha) which is derived from سرح. They say سرح المواشی i.e. the cattle went forth for grazing. سرح السیل means, the flood moved on leisurely. سرحه means, he sent him away. سرح فلان زوجته means, he sent away or divorced his wife (Aqrab).
حدود (limits) is the plural of حد i.e. a limit. حده means, he put a limit to it. حد الشیء عن الشیء means, he distinguished one thing from the other. الحد means, (1) the limit or the line where two things meet; (2) last limit or extremity of a thing; (3) that by which a thing may be defined; (4) prescribed punishment for an offence. حدود الله means God’s religious commandments (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks permanent and irrevocable separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate طھر i.e. period of purity, when the woman is clean and the man has not gone in unto her during that period of purity. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as the verse hints in the word مرتان (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time, and said: "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?"
After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘iddah, i.e. the period of waiting, with or without her consent; but after the period of waiting is over, he can take her back only with her consent and that after remarrying her. After the pronouncement of the third divorce, however, the husband forfeits this right and the couple are finally separated. A Companion of the Holy Prophet once asked him saying, "The Quran has here spoken of two divorces only, whence comes in the third!" The Prophet referred him to the Quranic words اوتسریح باحسان i.e. or send them away with kindness meaning thereby that after the pronouncement of the first two divorces the husband was free to retain his wife if he so desired but if he wanted irrevocable separation, he should "send her away", i.e. divorce her a third time (Jarir & Musnad). The point is further made clear in the succeeding verse. Thus the word تسریح here signifies طلاق i.e. divorce.
The present verse also makes it clear that when a person divorces his wife, he forfeits مھر i.e. the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower-money agreed on by the parties, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents as the clause it is not lawful for you that you take anything of what you have given them indicates.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as خلع (Khul‘a lit. the putting off of clothes etc., or the shedding of old leaves), she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the word خفتم (you fear), which has been put in the plural number, hints. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed on by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khul‘a by women. She demanded separation from her husband, Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different, she could not get on with him. She was granted Kkul‘a by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari). This right, however, is not to be exercised in a light-hearted manner. The Holy Prophet has condemned the action of a woman who demands separation from her husband without valid reason even as he has condemned the action of a man who divorces his wife without genuine cause. He is reported to have said, "A woman who seeks separation from her husband without a legitimate cause shall be deprived of the fragrance of heaven" (Dawud & Tirmidhi). This is what is hinted in the concluding words, these are the limits prescribed by Allah, so transgress them not, etc. The husband and the wife are both warned to fear God and refrain from transgressing the limits imposed by God for their own good.
b
2:228.
c
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
170
这节经文含有对离婚第五种约制。如果丈夫想和妻子离异, 他必须在三个不同时期声明离婚, 每次在她个别的洁净时期中并没有和她同过房, 在同一时期声明两次或三次离婚, 是不准许的。这在 مَرَّتَان (Marratan, 两次) 这一字中可以看出。这字的意思是, 发生在两个不同时期的一件事情, 而不是发生在同一时间的两件事情。穆圣把这种同一时间的集中声明, 不管几次, 都只作一次离婚声明看待 (تِرْمِذِی与داؤد)。根据纳萨伊 (نَسَائِی) 说, 有一天穆圣听到有人在同一时间内作了三次离婚声明, 非常生气地说, “在我还在你们中间时, 就把安拉的经典当儿戏吗?” 在第一和第二次声明离婚后, 丈夫在 عِدَّة (‘Iddat), 既等候时期内, 不论经过或不经过妻子的同意, 都可以召回离了婚的妻子; 但是等候时期过了以后, 他要经过她的同意而且要重新娶她才能收回。在第三次离婚后, 丈夫就丧失了这种权利, 这对夫妻就最终离异了。穆圣的一个伙伴有一次问他说, “«古兰经» 在这里只谈了两次离婚, 第三次离婚在什么地方?” 穆圣向他提到 “以厚道的做法辞离她们” 这句话, 意思是说, 第一和第二次离婚之后, 丈夫可以保留并且可以再娶她, 如果她也同意结婚的话; 但是如果他要最后离异的话, 他应与她离婚, 即第三次离婚 {جَرِيْر (Jarir) 与 مُسْنَد (Musnad)}。这一点在下一节经文中还要进一步说明。这样, 这里的 تَسْرِيْح (Tasrih) 这个字意为 طَلَاق (Talaq), 即离婚。
171
一个人和他的妻子离婚后, 他就丧失了他已给她的嫁妆 (办嫁妆的钱); 如果在离婚时他还没有给过她嫁妆, 在正式离婚之前, 他必须给她那笔钱。而且, 他不准许取回作为馈赠或礼物而给她的任何东西。
172
不过, 如果提出离婚的是女方, 法律上称为 خُلْع (khul‘), 她必须通过 قَاضِیْ (Qadi) 即法官, 正如 “你们 (双方) 害怕” 这几个字所暗示的那样。在这种情况下, 她必须归还男方全部或部分嫁妆以及男方过去送给她的礼品, 这要双方议定或由法官决定。盖斯•彬•撒比特 (قَيْس بِنْ ثَابِتْ, Qais bin Thabit) 的妻子杰米拉 (جَمِيْلَة, Jamilah) 那个案例提供了妇女行使 خُلْع 权的一个很好的实际说明。她要求和丈夫盖斯离婚, 理由是她不喜欢他, 也就是说, 他们性格不合, 不能相处在一起。穆圣给了他 خُلْع 的许可, 但是她必须把他给她的果园还给他 (布哈理)。
1
عام طور پر اس زمانہ کے علماء یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ جس نے تین دفعہ طلاق کہہ دیا اس کی طلاق بائن ہو جاتی ہے یعنی اس کی بیوی اس سے دوبارہ اس وقت تک شادی نہیں کر سکتی جب تک کسی اور سے نکاح نہ کر لے مگر یہ غلط ہے کیونکہ قرآن کریم میں صاف فرمایا گیا ہے اَلطَّـلَا قُ مَرَّتٰنِ یعنی وہ طلاق جو بائن نہیں وہ دو دفعہ ہو سکتی ہے اس طور پر کہ پہلے مرد طلاق دے پھر یا تو طلاق واپس لے لے اور رجوع کرے یا عدت گزرنے دے اور نکاح کرے۔ پھر اَن بَن کی صورت میں دوبارہ طلاق دے۔ پس ایسی طلاق کا دو دفعہ ہونا تو قطعی طور پر ثابت ہے۔ پس ایک ہی دفعہ تین یا تین سے زیادہ بار طلاق کہہ دینے کو بائن قرار دین
2
تمہیں یعنی ملتِ اسلامیہ یا اسلام پر ایمان رکھنے والی حکومت کو۔
3
اِنْ خِفْتُمْ میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ اگر محکمہ قضا اس بات کا فیصلہ کرے کہ عورت خاوند کے پاس رہنے کے لئے راضی نہیں اور اس کی نارضا مندی کی وجہ سے مرد بھی عدل نہ رکھ سکے گا‘ تو عورت اگر کچھ دینا چاہے تو مرد کو اجازت ہے کہ کچھ مال لیکر اسے طلاق دے دے۔ لیکن وہ صرف اتنا ہی مال لے سکتا ہے جتنا اس نے خود دیا ہو اور کچھ نہیں۔
a
See 2:228.
b
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
236
Important Words:
امساك (retain) is derived from امسك which is again derived from مسك. They say امسك به i.e. he stuck to it. امسك is both transitive and intransitive. امسكه means, he got hold of it and stopped and retained it. امسك عن الکلام means, he abstained from talking. امساك means, (1) to hold or stop or prevent or retain; (2) to refrain or abstain (Aqrab).
تسریح (send away) is the noun-infinitive from سرح (sarraha) which is derived from سرح. They say سرح المواشی i.e. the cattle went forth for grazing. سرح السیل means, the flood moved on leisurely. سرحه means, he sent him away. سرح فلان زوجته means, he sent away or divorced his wife (Aqrab).
حدود (limits) is the plural of حد i.e. a limit. حده means, he put a limit to it. حد الشیء عن الشیء means, he distinguished one thing from the other. الحد means, (1) the limit or the line where two things meet; (2) last limit or extremity of a thing; (3) that by which a thing may be defined; (4) prescribed punishment for an offence. حدود الله means God’s religious commandments (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks permanent and irrevocable separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate طھر i.e. period of purity, when the woman is clean and the man has not gone in unto her during that period of purity. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as the verse hints in the word مرتان (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time, and said: "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?"
After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘iddah, i.e. the period of waiting, with or without her consent; but after the period of waiting is over, he can take her back only with her consent and that after remarrying her. After the pronouncement of the third divorce, however, the husband forfeits this right and the couple are finally separated. A Companion of the Holy Prophet once asked him saying, "The Quran has here spoken of two divorces only, whence comes in the third!" The Prophet referred him to the Quranic words اوتسریح باحسان i.e. or send them away with kindness meaning thereby that after the pronouncement of the first two divorces the husband was free to retain his wife if he so desired but if he wanted irrevocable separation, he should "send her away", i.e. divorce her a third time (Jarir & Musnad). The point is further made clear in the succeeding verse. Thus the word تسریح here signifies طلاق i.e. divorce.
The present verse also makes it clear that when a person divorces his wife, he forfeits مھر i.e. the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower-money agreed on by the parties, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents as the clause it is not lawful for you that you take anything of what you have given them indicates.
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as خلع (Khul‘a lit. the putting off of clothes etc., or the shedding of old leaves), she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the word خفتم (you fear), which has been put in the plural number, hints. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed on by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khul‘a by women. She demanded separation from her husband, Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different, she could not get on with him. She was granted Kkul‘a by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari). This right, however, is not to be exercised in a light-hearted manner. The Holy Prophet has condemned the action of a woman who demands separation from her husband without valid reason even as he has condemned the action of a man who divorces his wife without genuine cause. He is reported to have said, "A woman who seeks separation from her husband without a legitimate cause shall be deprived of the fragrance of heaven" (Dawud & Tirmidhi). This is what is hinted in the concluding words, these are the limits prescribed by Allah, so transgress them not, etc. The husband and the wife are both warned to fear God and refrain from transgressing the limits imposed by God for their own good.
b
2:228.c
2:232; 4:130; 65:3.
280
This verse contains the fifth check on divorce. A man who seeks separation from his wife must pronounce divorce on three separate occasions, each in a separate period of purity when he has not gone in unto her during that period. The pronouncement of divorce twice or thrice at one and the same time is not permissible as is hinted in the word Marratan (twice) which signifies a thing happening on two separate occasions and not two things happening at one and the same time. The Holy Prophet treated such collective pronouncements, whatever their number, as only one divorce (Tirmidhi & Dawud). According to Nasa’i, the Holy Prophet was extremely angry when one day he was told that a person had made all the three pronouncements of divorce at one and the same time and said, "Is the Book of God going to be made a plaything while I am yet among you?" After the pronouncement of the first two divorces, the husband can take back the divorced wife within ‘Iddat, i.e. the period of waiting, with or
281
When a person divorces his wife, he forfeits the dower-money he has given her; and if at the time of divorce he has not yet given her the dower- money, he must make the payment before the divorce becomes effective. Again, he is not allowed to take back anything he might have given her in the form of gifts and presents.
282
If, however, it is the wife who demands separation, technically known as Khula‘, she must get it through a Qadi or judge as the words "you fear," in the plural number, hint. In this case she has to part with, in full or in part, her dowry as well as the gifts she might have received from her husband, as agreed upon by the parties or decided by the judge. The case of Jamilah, wife of Qais bin Thabit, provides a good illustration of the exercise of the right of Khula‘ by women. She demanded separation from her husband. Qais, on the ground that she did not like him, i.e. their temperaments being different she could not get on with him. She was granted Khula‘ by the Holy Prophet, but she had to return to her husband the orchard he had given her (Bukhari).
فَإِن طَلَّقَهَا فَلَا تَحِلُّ لَهُۥ مِنۢ بَعْدُ حَتَّىٰ تَنكِحَ زَوْجًا غَيْرَهُۥ ۗ فَإِن طَلَّقَهَا فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَآ أَن يَتَرَاجَعَآ إِن ظَنَّآ أَن يُقِيمَا حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَتِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ يُبَيِّنُهَا لِقَوْمٍ يَعْلَمُونَ
这节经文述及第三次和最终一次离婚。在该次离婚后, 丈夫再也无权与妻子破镜重圆, 除非那离了婚的女人再嫁另一个男人并建立夫妻关系, 然后又与他正式离婚, 或者他死了, 使她有自由再嫁另一个男人。藉着离婚法律中包括这一条款, 伊斯兰教一方面提高婚姻关系的严肃性, 另一方面, 也给一度过着夫妻生活的两个人提供一个重新结合的机会, 虽然机会是很小的。
This verse refers to the third and final divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with; and, on the other, it has afforded yet another, though extremely remote, opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desire.
Important Words:
یتراجعا (return to each other) is derived from رجع i.e. he returned; the word is used to indicate the coming together of people after their dispersal or separation, as they say تراجع القوم i.e. the people returned to the place from where they separated or left (Aqrab).
یقیما (observe) is derived from اقام which means, he made a thing stand upright; he observed or duly performed a religious commandment or duty, etc. (Lane). See also under 2:4.
تنکح (she marries) is derived from نکح. They say نکح or نکحت meaning (1) he or she married a spouse; (2) he or she had sexual intercourse with his or her spouse. In the present verse the word is used in the latter sense. See also 2:222.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the third and final pronouncement of divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce, Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with and has declared unlawful the evil practice of حلالة (halalah); and, on the other, it has afforded yet another opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desired. The practice of halalah referred to above consists in a divorced woman marrying a man, other than her former husband, with the object of obtaining divorce from him and thereby making herself lawful for the former husband. Islam condemns this practice as a thing accursed (Tirmidhi ch. on Nikah) and enjoins that marriage with and divorce from another husband must both be genuine.
173
这节经文述及第三次和最终一次离婚。在该次离婚后, 丈夫再也无权与妻子破镜重圆, 除非那离了婚的女人再嫁另一个男人并建立夫妻关系, 然后又与他正式离婚, 或者他死了, 使她有自由再嫁另一个男人。藉着离婚法律中包括这一条款, 伊斯兰教一方面提高婚姻关系的严肃性, 另一方面, 也给一度过着夫妻生活的两个人提供一个重新结合的机会, 虽然机会是很小的。
237
Important Words:
یتراجعا (return to each other) is derived from رجع i.e. he returned; the word is used to indicate the coming together of people after their dispersal or separation, as they say تراجع القوم i.e. the people returned to the place from where they separated or left (Aqrab).
یقیما (observe) is derived from اقام which means, he made a thing stand upright; he observed or duly performed a religious commandment or duty, etc. (Lane). See also under 2:4.
تنکح (she marries) is derived from نکح. They say نکح or نکحت meaning (1) he or she married a spouse; (2) he or she had sexual intercourse with his or her spouse. In the present verse the word is used in the latter sense. See also 2:222.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the third and final pronouncement of divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce, Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with and has declared unlawful the evil practice of حلالة (halalah); and, on the other, it has afforded yet another opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desired. The practice of halalah referred to above consists in a divorced woman marrying a man, other than her former husband, with the object of obtaining divorce from him and thereby making herself lawful for the former husband. Islam condemns this practice as a thing accursed (Tirmidhi ch. on Nikah) and enjoins that marriage with and divorce from another husband must both be genuine.
283
This verse refers to the third and final divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with; and, on the other, it has afforded yet another, though extremely remote, opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desire.
وَإِذَا طَلَّقْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ فَبَلَغْنَ أَجَلَهُنَّ فَأَمْسِكُوهُنَّ بِمَعْرُوفٍ أَوْ سَرِّحُوهُنَّ بِمَعْرُوفٍ ۚ وَلَا تُمْسِكُوهُنَّ ضِرَارًا لِّتَعْتَدُوا۟ ۚ وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ فَقَدْ ظَلَمَ نَفْسَهُۥ ۚ وَلَا تَتَّخِذُوٓا۟ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ هُزُوًا ۚ وَٱذْكُرُوا۟ نِعْمَتَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ وَمَآ أَنزَلَ عَلَيْكُم مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ وَٱلْحِكْمَةِ يَعِظُكُم بِهِۦ ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌ
2:229; 65:5.
2:230.
3:104.
从上下文中很清楚地可以看出, 这里谈的是可以撤回的离婚。在这种离婚声明后, 丈夫前面只有两条路可走。要么他挽留妻子并善意地对待她, 要么以厚道的做法与她离婚。他不准虐待她, 使她处于一种悬挂状态。
بَلَغَ الْاَجَلَ کے دو معنے ہیں۔ یہ بھی کہ مدت کے خاتمہ کے قریب پہنچ گیا اور یہ بھی کہ مدت پوری کرلی۔ اس جگہ پہلے معنے مراد ہیں۔ علامہ قرطبی ہسپانوی مفسر لکھتے ہیں کہ اس آیت میں اول الذکر معنوں پر تمام علمائے امت کا اتفاق ہے۔ کسی نے اس کے خلاف نہیں کہا۔ عربی کا محاورہ ہے کہ جب مسافر شہر کے قریب پہنچتا ہے تو کہتا ہے کہ بَلَغْنَا الْبَلَدَ ہم شہر پہنچ گئے۔ اردو میں بھی یہ استعمال کثرت سے پایا جاتا ہے فَامْسِکُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ اَوْ سَرِّحُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ میں اس بات پر زور دیا کہ عورتوں سے دو ہی قسم کا سلوک کرنے کا حکم ہے۔ یا تو انہیں مناسب رنگ م
’’ان کو روک لو‘‘ سے مراد یہ ہے کہ رجوع کرلو اور طلاق واپس لے لو۔ مگر فرماتا ہے یہ رجوع معروف طریق پر ہونا چاہییٔ۔ ایسا نہ ہو کہ عورت کی بدنامی ہو اور یا پھر ان کو طلاق تو دے دو مگر طلاق دیتے وقت بھی یہ خیال رکھو کہ ان کے ساتھ حسن سلوک ہو۔ ان کو ذلیل اور بدنام نہ کرو۔
2:229; 65:5.
See 2:230.
3:104.
The expression Balaghal-Ajala means, he approached the end of the period; or he reached the end of, or completed, the period. According to consensus of scholarly opinion, the first meaning applies here (Qurtubi).
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense.
2:229; 65:5.
See 2:230.
3:104.
Important Words:
بلغن (they approach) is from بلغ which means, he reached or came to or attained; or he was near to reaching or attaining (Lane).
اجل (period) is the noun-infinitive from the verb اجل meaning, he or it delayed or fell short. اجل الشیء means, he appointed a time or period for the thing. اجل therefore means, the term or period appointed or specified for a thing; also the end of such period. Death is called اجل because for every life there is an appointed time when it must come to an end (Aqrab Lane).
یعظکم (exhorts you). یعظ is derived from وعظ meaning, he gave him good advice; he exhorted him; he admonished him; he warned him of the consequences of his actions and called him to a life of righteousness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse contains a general injunction about the treatment of divorced women.
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced, there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or he may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense. The concluding part of the verse warns the husband against making light of the commandments of Allah relating to the rights of women, adding that, God being All-Knowing, even the hidden intentions and secret machinations of man are known to Him.
a
2:229; 65:5.
b
2:230.
c
3:104.
174
从上下文中很清楚地可以看出, 这里谈的是可以撤回的离婚。在这种离婚声明后, 丈夫前面只有两条路可走。要么他挽留妻子并善意地对待她, 要么以厚道的做法与她离婚。他不准虐待她, 使她处于一种悬挂状态。
3
بَلَغَ الْاَجَلَ کے دو معنے ہیں۔ یہ بھی کہ مدت کے خاتمہ کے قریب پہنچ گیا اور یہ بھی کہ مدت پوری کرلی۔ اس جگہ پہلے معنے مراد ہیں۔ علامہ قرطبی ہسپانوی مفسر لکھتے ہیں کہ اس آیت میں اول الذکر معنوں پر تمام علمائے امت کا اتفاق ہے۔ کسی نے اس کے خلاف نہیں کہا۔ عربی کا محاورہ ہے کہ جب مسافر شہر کے قریب پہنچتا ہے تو کہتا ہے کہ بَلَغْنَا الْبَلَدَ ہم شہر پہنچ گئے۔ اردو میں بھی یہ استعمال کثرت سے پایا جاتا ہے فَامْسِکُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ اَوْ سَرِّحُوْھُنَّ بِمَعْرُوْفٍ میں اس بات پر زور دیا کہ عورتوں سے دو ہی قسم کا سلوک کرنے کا حکم ہے۔ یا تو انہیں مناسب رنگ م
4
’’ان کو روک لو‘‘ سے مراد یہ ہے کہ رجوع کرلو اور طلاق واپس لے لو۔ مگر فرماتا ہے یہ رجوع معروف طریق پر ہونا چاہییٔ۔ ایسا نہ ہو کہ عورت کی بدنامی ہو اور یا پھر ان کو طلاق تو دے دو مگر طلاق دیتے وقت بھی یہ خیال رکھو کہ ان کے ساتھ حسن سلوک ہو۔ ان کو ذلیل اور بدنام نہ کرو۔
a
2:229; 65:5.
b
See 2:230.
c
3:104.
238
Important Words:
بلغن (they approach) is from بلغ which means, he reached or came to or attained; or he was near to reaching or attaining (Lane).
اجل (period) is the noun-infinitive from the verb اجل meaning, he or it delayed or fell short. اجل الشیء means, he appointed a time or period for the thing. اجل therefore means, the term or period appointed or specified for a thing; also the end of such period. Death is called اجل because for every life there is an appointed time when it must come to an end (Aqrab Lane).
یعظکم (exhorts you). یعظ is derived from وعظ meaning, he gave him good advice; he exhorted him; he admonished him; he warned him of the consequences of his actions and called him to a life of righteousness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse contains a general injunction about the treatment of divorced women.
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced, there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or he may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense. The concluding part of the verse warns the husband against making light of the commandments of Allah relating to the rights of women, adding that, God being All-Knowing, even the hidden intentions and secret machinations of man are known to Him.
a
2:229; 65:5.
b
See 2:230.
c
3:104.
283A
The expression Balaghal-Ajala means, he approached the end of the period; or he reached the end of, or completed, the period. According to consensus of scholarly opinion, the first meaning applies here (Qurtubi).
284
As is apparent from the context, the divorce spoken of here refers to the revocable divorce. After such divorce has been pronounced there are only two courses open to the husband. He may either retain his wife and treat her with kindness or may part with her in a good and becoming manner. He is not allowed to maltreat her and keep her in a state of suspense.
وَإِذَا طَلَّقْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ فَبَلَغْنَ أَجَلَهُنَّ فَلَا تَعْضُلُوهُنَّ أَن يَنكِحْنَ أَزْوَٰجَهُنَّ إِذَا تَرَٰضَوْا۟ بَيْنَهُم بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۗ ذَٰلِكَ يُوعَظُ بِهِۦ مَن كَانَ مِنكُمْ يُؤْمِنُ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۗ ذَٰلِكُمْ أَزْكَىٰ لَكُمْ وَأَطْهَرُ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ وَأَنتُمْ لَا تَعْلَمُونَ
这节经文中谈到的 “丈夫” 这两个字, 可以指以前或者将来的丈夫。在前一种情况下, “当你们与妻子离了婚” 这一句, 可以理解为第一次或第二次离婚而言。如果 “丈夫” 这两个字代表未来的丈夫, 那么, 上一句指的是第三次或最终一次离婚。离婚妇女的监护人不能阻止她和前夫重新结婚。她的前夫也不能阻止她同新的丈夫结婚。
اس جگہ بَلَغْنَ کے معنے عدت کو پورا کر لینے کے ہیں نہ کہ مدت کے خاتمہ کے قریب پہنچ جانے کے۔ (دیکھئے نوٹ آیت ۲۳۲)
اس جگہ پر صیغہ حاضر کا استعمال ہوا ہے مگر مراد یہ ہے کہ مرد و عورت کے رشتہ دار نہ روکیں۔ صرف زور دینے کے لئے غائب کو حاضر کی طرف منتقل کر دیا گیا ہے اور تم کا لفظ استعمال کیا ہے۔
اَزْکٰی: زَکَا سے نکلا ہے اور زَکَا کے معنے بڑھنے اور برکت والا ہونے کے ہوتے ہیں (مفردات) پس اَزْکٰی کے معنے ہوئے زیادہ بڑھنے والی اور زیادہ برکت والی۔
The word "husbands" mentioned in this verse may refer either to former husbands or to prospective ones. In the former case, the clause, and when you divorce women, would be taken as referring to the first or second divorce. In case the word "husbands" stands for prospective husbands, the above phrase would refer to the third or final divorce. The guardian of a divorced woman cannot prevent her from remarrying her former husband nor the former husband can prevent her from marrying a new husband.
Important Words:
لاتعضلوھن (prevent them not) is derived from عضل. They say عضلھا i.e. he prevented or debarred her from marrying. The primary signification of عضل is the act of straitening or preventing, or withholding or debarring. عضل means, he straitened him in his affairs and intervened as an obstacle between him and that which he desired (Taj).
تراضوا (agree between themselves) is derived from رضی i.e. he was pleased, or he was satisfied, or he agreed. تراضی القومmeans, the people agreed between themselves, or they came to a mutual agreement (Aqrab).
ازکی (more blessed) is derived from زکا which means, it increased or augmented; it received blessing from God; it was or became pure. ازکی means, more blessed, containing greater benefits, conducive to more good (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "husbands" mentioned in this verse may refer either to former husbands or to prospective ones. In the former case, the clause, and when you divorce women, would be taken as referring to the first or second pronouncement of divorce. Sometimes, when a husband desires to take back his wife before pronouncing the third or irrevocable divorce, her offended relatives do not like her to go back to him again and therefore try to prevent her from remarrying him. The verse condemns that practice. In case the word "husbands" stands for prospective husbands, the above phrase would refer to the third or final divorce. Some men, even after the complete dissolution of their marriage, do not like the idea that their divorced wives should marry other persons and try to prevent them from contracting new marriages. This practice is also condemned in the clause, prevent them not from marrying their (prospective) husbands. Should the guardian of a divorced woman prevent her from remarrying her former husband or should the former husband prevent her from marrying a new husband, she can do so with the permission of the Qadi or the judge. The verse under comment also implies a repudiation of the evil practice of pronouncing three divorces at one and the same time, because had it been permissible, the question of divorced women remarrying their former husbands would have been meaningless.
175
这节经文中谈到的 “丈夫” 这两个字, 可以指以前或者将来的丈夫。在前一种情况下, “当你们与妻子离了婚” 这一句, 可以理解为第一次或第二次离婚而言。如果 “丈夫” 这两个字代表未来的丈夫, 那么, 上一句指的是第三次或最终一次离婚。离婚妇女的监护人不能阻止她和前夫重新结婚。她的前夫也不能阻止她同新的丈夫结婚。
1
اس جگہ بَلَغْنَ کے معنے عدت کو پورا کر لینے کے ہیں نہ کہ مدت کے خاتمہ کے قریب پہنچ جانے کے۔ (دیکھئے نوٹ آیت ۲۳۲)
2
اس جگہ پر صیغہ حاضر کا استعمال ہوا ہے مگر مراد یہ ہے کہ مرد و عورت کے رشتہ دار نہ روکیں۔ صرف زور دینے کے لئے غائب کو حاضر کی طرف منتقل کر دیا گیا ہے اور تم کا لفظ استعمال کیا ہے۔
3
اَزْکٰی: زَکَا سے نکلا ہے اور زَکَا کے معنے بڑھنے اور برکت والا ہونے کے ہوتے ہیں (مفردات) پس اَزْکٰی کے معنے ہوئے زیادہ بڑھنے والی اور زیادہ برکت والی۔
239
Important Words:
لاتعضلوھن (prevent them not) is derived from عضل. They say عضلھا i.e. he prevented or debarred her from marrying. The primary signification of عضل is the act of straitening or preventing, or withholding or debarring. عضل means, he straitened him in his affairs and intervened as an obstacle between him and that which he desired (Taj).
تراضوا (agree between themselves) is derived from رضی i.e. he was pleased, or he was satisfied, or he agreed. تراضی القومmeans, the people agreed between themselves, or they came to a mutual agreement (Aqrab).
ازکی (more blessed) is derived from زکا which means, it increased or augmented; it received blessing from God; it was or became pure. ازکی means, more blessed, containing greater benefits, conducive to more good (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "husbands" mentioned in this verse may refer either to former husbands or to prospective ones. In the former case, the clause, and when you divorce women, would be taken as referring to the first or second pronouncement of divorce. Sometimes, when a husband desires to take back his wife before pronouncing the third or irrevocable divorce, her offended relatives do not like her to go back to him again and therefore try to prevent her from remarrying him. The verse condemns that practice. In case the word "husbands" stands for prospective husbands, the above phrase would refer to the third or final divorce. Some men, even after the complete dissolution of their marriage, do not like the idea that their divorced wives should marry other persons and try to prevent them from contracting new marriages. This practice is also condemned in the clause, prevent them not from marrying their (prospective) husbands. Should the guardian of a divorced woman prevent her from remarrying her former husband or should the former husband prevent her from marrying a new husband, she can do so with the permission of the Qadi or the judge. The verse under comment also implies a repudiation of the evil practice of pronouncing three divorces at one and the same time, because had it been permissible, the question of divorced women remarrying their former husbands would have been meaningless.
285
The word "husbands" mentioned in this verse may refer either to former husbands or to prospective ones. In the former case, the clause, and when you divorce women, would be taken as referring to the first or second divorce. In case the word "husbands" stands for prospective husbands, the above phrase would refer to the third or final divorce. The guardian of a divorced woman cannot prevent her from remarrying her former husband nor the former husband can prevent her from marrying a new husband.
۞ وَٱلْوَٰلِدَٰتُ يُرْضِعْنَ أَوْلَٰدَهُنَّ حَوْلَيْنِ كَامِلَيْنِ ۖ لِمَنْ أَرَادَ أَن يُتِمَّ ٱلرَّضَاعَةَ ۚ وَعَلَى ٱلْمَوْلُودِ لَهُۥ رِزْقُهُنَّ وَكِسْوَتُهُنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۚ لَا تُكَلَّفُ نَفْسٌ إِلَّا وُسْعَهَا ۚ لَا تُضَآرَّ وَٰلِدَةٌۢ بِوَلَدِهَا وَلَا مَوْلُودٌ لَّهُۥ بِوَلَدِهِۦ ۚ وَعَلَى ٱلْوَارِثِ مِثْلُ ذَٰلِكَ ۗ فَإِنْ أَرَادَا فِصَالًا عَن تَرَاضٍ مِّنْهُمَا وَتَشَاوُرٍ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَا ۗ وَإِنْ أَرَدتُّمْ أَن تَسْتَرْضِعُوٓا۟ أَوْلَٰدَكُمْ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِذَا سَلَّمْتُم مَّآ ءَاتَيْتُم بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۗ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ بَصِيرٌ
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
لَا تُضَآرَّ (La Tudarra) 这一用语, 既是主动又是被动语态; 因此它的意思可以是: (1) 母亲不应使父亲由于他的孩子而受苦; (2) 不应使母亲由于她的孩子而受苦; 这里这两种意义都可同等适用。
这里用 مَوْلُوْدٌ لَهٗ (Mauludun la-hu, 孩子所归属的人) 这几个字, 而不用较简单的 وَالِد (Walid, 父亲) 这个字, 为的是指出, 具有所生的孩子, 是父亲的固有的权利而且有抚养他孩子的天职。
继承一个死者的财产的人, 对他留下的孩子一定要负起抚养成人的责任。
孩子吃奶期至多两年。在这时期结束以前, 如果父母同意, 准许提前断奶。这节经文指示, 如果没有母亲的同意, 孩子不能在两年时期结束前断奶。
یہاں بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ سے مراد باپ کی مَقدرت ہے کہ امیر اپنی طاقت کے مطابق دے اور غریب اپنی طاقت کے مطابق۔ اس جگہ عام دودھ پلانے والیوں کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ماؤں کا ہے اور یہ ذکر طلاق کے ضمن میں کیا گیا ہے اور کہا گیا ہے کہ اگر دودھ پلانے والی عورت کو طلاق دی جائے تو بچہ کی خاطر عورت کے لئے یہ ضروری ہے کہ بچے کو دودھ مقررہ مدت تک پلائے اور اس کے بدلہ میں خاوند پر فرض ہے کہ عام مزدور عورت کی طرح نہیں بلکہ اپنی توفیق کے مطابق اسے خرچ دے۔ کیونکہ یہ عورت کے جذبات کو ٹھیس پہنچانے والا ہوگا کہ ایک طرف تو اسے مجبور کیا جائے کہ وہ طلاق کے بعد بھی بچہ کو دودھ پلاتی رہے اور دوسری ط
کھانے اور کپڑے سے مراد تمام اخراجات ہیں نہ کہ صرف روٹی اور لباس اور یہ محاورہ ہے تمام ضرورتوں کو پورا کرنے کے متعلق۔
یعنی مرد سے یہ مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ اپنی طاقت سے زیادہ خرچ کرے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے اور عورت سے مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ ایک نوکر کی طرح طلاق کے بعد ایک عرصہ گھر میں گزار دے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے۔
یعنی بچہ کو ایک دوسرے پر دباؤ ڈالنے کا ذریعہ نہ بناؤ۔ یہ حکم نہایت لطیف ہے۔ بہت سے نادان اس حرکت کے مرتکب ہوتے ہیں اور نتیجہ یہ ہوتا ہے کہ یا تو بچے ہلاک ہو جاتے ہیں یا ان کی تربیت خراب ہو جاتی ہے۔ اس قسم کا فعل درحقیقت قتل اولاد کے مشابہ ہے اور قرآن کریم نے اس سے روک کر آئندہ اولادوں پر احسان عظیم کیا ہے۔
اس آیت سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ بچے کے متعلق دودھ پلانے یا چھڑانے کا فیصلہ قرآن کریم نے نہ مرد کے اختیار میں رکھا ہے نہ عورت کے اختیار میں۔ بلکہ دونوں کو مشترکہ اختیار دیا ہے شاید تمام شرائع کی تاریخ میں یہ منفرد مثال ہے کہ اس طرح اہلی معاملات میں میاں بیوی کو ایک مقام پر کھڑا کرکے برابر کے اختیارات دئیے گئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ شرط ضرور ہے کہ دودھ پلانے کی مدت جو قرآن کریم نے مقرر کی ہے اس سے زیادہ دیر تک دودھ پلانے پر نہ خاوند مجبور کر سکتا ہے نہ عورت زور دے سکتی ہے۔ جب طلاق کے بعد بھی عورت کے جذبات کا اس قدر خیال رکھنے پر خاوند کو مجبور کیا گیا ہے تو ظاہر ہے کہ جو عورت نکاح میں ہے
قرآنی الفاظ اٰتَیْتُمْ کے ہیں جن کے لفظی معنے ہیں دے دیا ہے‘ دے چکے ہو۔ لیکن اس طرح ترجمہ کیا جائے تو ترجمہ یہ ہوگا کہ جب تم دے دو۔ جو کچھ تم دے چکے ہو۔ اور ظاہر ہے کہ یہ مراد قرآن مجید کی نہیں ہو سکتی۔ پس ان الفاظ کا ترجمہ کرتے وقت ایک اور قاعدہ کو ملحوظ رکھنا ہوگا جو یہ ہے کہ کبھی ماضی کا صیغہ قطعی فیصلہ پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ چنانچہ قرآن کریم میں دوسرے کئی مقامات پر بھی یہ محاورہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مثلاً آتا ہے اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْھَکُمْ(المآئدۃ: ۷) یعنی جب تم نماز کے لئے کھڑے ہو تو اپنے مونہوں کو اور ہات
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
The expression, la Tudarra, is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause may, therefore, mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally applicable here.
The words Mauludulla-hu (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word Walid (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind.
The suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of this period, if the father and the mother both agree on this course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
Important Words:
یرضعن (give suck) is derived from رضع i.e. he (the babe) sucked. ارضعت means, she (the mother or the wet-nurse) gave suck to the child. استرضع means, he arranged for the suckling of the child; he engaged a wet-nurse for it. The infinitive-noun رضاعة signifies sucking. ھذا اخی من الرضاعة means, he is my foster-brother, both having sucked from the breast of the same woman (Aqrab & Lane).
حولین (two years) is the dual of حول (a year) which is the infinitive-noun from حال meaning, it passed and became complete, or it passed from one state to another, or it turned round. A year is called حول because it is a complete measure of time and turns round and round. حول also means strength and power to do a thing as in the well-known formula لاحول ولاقوة الابالله (Aqrab).
وسعھا (its capacity) is derived from وسع meaning, it was sufficiently capacious. وسعت رحمة الله کل شیء means, God’s mercy extends to, and covers, all things. وسع means capacity or power or strength. The infinitive-noun from it is سعة meaning, breadth; extent, capaciousness; capacity and power. ذوسعة means, a man of means or a man of ample means (Aqrab).
تکلف (is burdened) is derived from کلف. They say کلفه امرا i.e. he imposed on him the task of doing a thing, or he tasked him to do a thing. It also means, he ordered him to do a thing which was difficult or troublesome or inconvenient (Lane).
فصال (weaning the child) is derived from فصل which is both transitive and intransitive, meaning, he separated, he divided, he partitioned; or he got separated, he went forth from. فصلت المرأة رضیعھا means, the woman weaned her child, which is also a sort of separation between the woman and her suckling. ھذایوم الفصل means, this is the day when a decision or a distinction shall be made between the parties, i.e. the doers of good and the doers of evil. فصال means, the weaning of a child from its mother or from the woman who suckles it (Taj).
تشاور (consultation) is derived from شار. They say شارالعسل i.e. he extracted honey from the honey-comb. شارالدابة means, he rode the beast in order to try it and ascertain its worth. اشار besides giving the same meaning as شار, also means, he made a thing known, he pointed to a thing, he gave a word of good counsel to a person. شاوره means, he consulted him, he sought his advice and counsel. تشاور means, mutual consultation. مشورة and شوری give similar meanings, i.e. consultation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a woman is divorced while she is pregnant, the question of the suckling of the child and the expense of bringing it up naturally arises. The verse under comment supplies the answer. It points out that the suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of that period, if the father and the mother both agree on that course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
The expression لاتضار is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause لاتضار والدة بولدھا may therefore mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally good and equitable. The words مولودله (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word والد (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
The clause, and the same is incumbent on the heir, lays down an important social principle. If a father dies leaving behind a child, it is the duty of his heirs to bring up the child and maintain it until it reaches puberty. This shall not be considered an act of favour on their part, but an act of duty. One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind. He who receives a support from another must be prepared to give the same to him, when he may stand in need of it.
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
176
لَا تُضَآرَّ (La Tudarra) 这一用语, 既是主动又是被动语态; 因此它的意思可以是: (1) 母亲不应使父亲由于他的孩子而受苦; (2) 不应使母亲由于她的孩子而受苦; 这里这两种意义都可同等适用。
177
这里用 مَوْلُوْدٌ لَهٗ (Mauludun la-hu, 孩子所归属的人) 这几个字, 而不用较简单的 وَالِد (Walid, 父亲) 这个字, 为的是指出, 具有所生的孩子, 是父亲的固有的权利而且有抚养他孩子的天职。
178
继承一个死者的财产的人, 对他留下的孩子一定要负起抚养成人的责任。
179
孩子吃奶期至多两年。在这时期结束以前, 如果父母同意, 准许提前断奶。这节经文指示, 如果没有母亲的同意, 孩子不能在两年时期结束前断奶。
1
یہاں بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ سے مراد باپ کی مَقدرت ہے کہ امیر اپنی طاقت کے مطابق دے اور غریب اپنی طاقت کے مطابق۔ اس جگہ عام دودھ پلانے والیوں کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ماؤں کا ہے اور یہ ذکر طلاق کے ضمن میں کیا گیا ہے اور کہا گیا ہے کہ اگر دودھ پلانے والی عورت کو طلاق دی جائے تو بچہ کی خاطر عورت کے لئے یہ ضروری ہے کہ بچے کو دودھ مقررہ مدت تک پلائے اور اس کے بدلہ میں خاوند پر فرض ہے کہ عام مزدور عورت کی طرح نہیں بلکہ اپنی توفیق کے مطابق اسے خرچ دے۔ کیونکہ یہ عورت کے جذبات کو ٹھیس پہنچانے والا ہوگا کہ ایک طرف تو اسے مجبور کیا جائے کہ وہ طلاق کے بعد بھی بچہ کو دودھ پلاتی رہے اور دوسری ط
2
کھانے اور کپڑے سے مراد تمام اخراجات ہیں نہ کہ صرف روٹی اور لباس اور یہ محاورہ ہے تمام ضرورتوں کو پورا کرنے کے متعلق۔
3
یعنی مرد سے یہ مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ اپنی طاقت سے زیادہ خرچ کرے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے اور عورت سے مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ ایک نوکر کی طرح طلاق کے بعد ایک عرصہ گھر میں گزار دے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے۔
4
یعنی بچہ کو ایک دوسرے پر دباؤ ڈالنے کا ذریعہ نہ بناؤ۔ یہ حکم نہایت لطیف ہے۔ بہت سے نادان اس حرکت کے مرتکب ہوتے ہیں اور نتیجہ یہ ہوتا ہے کہ یا تو بچے ہلاک ہو جاتے ہیں یا ان کی تربیت خراب ہو جاتی ہے۔ اس قسم کا فعل درحقیقت قتل اولاد کے مشابہ ہے اور قرآن کریم نے اس سے روک کر آئندہ اولادوں پر احسان عظیم کیا ہے۔
5
اس آیت سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ بچے کے متعلق دودھ پلانے یا چھڑانے کا فیصلہ قرآن کریم نے نہ مرد کے اختیار میں رکھا ہے نہ عورت کے اختیار میں۔ بلکہ دونوں کو مشترکہ اختیار دیا ہے شاید تمام شرائع کی تاریخ میں یہ منفرد مثال ہے کہ اس طرح اہلی معاملات میں میاں بیوی کو ایک مقام پر کھڑا کرکے برابر کے اختیارات دئیے گئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ شرط ضرور ہے کہ دودھ پلانے کی مدت جو قرآن کریم نے مقرر کی ہے اس سے زیادہ دیر تک دودھ پلانے پر نہ خاوند مجبور کر سکتا ہے نہ عورت زور دے سکتی ہے۔ جب طلاق کے بعد بھی عورت کے جذبات کا اس قدر خیال رکھنے پر خاوند کو مجبور کیا گیا ہے تو ظاہر ہے کہ جو عورت نکاح میں ہے
6
قرآنی الفاظ اٰتَیْتُمْ کے ہیں جن کے لفظی معنے ہیں دے دیا ہے‘ دے چکے ہو۔ لیکن اس طرح ترجمہ کیا جائے تو ترجمہ یہ ہوگا کہ جب تم دے دو۔ جو کچھ تم دے چکے ہو۔ اور ظاہر ہے کہ یہ مراد قرآن مجید کی نہیں ہو سکتی۔ پس ان الفاظ کا ترجمہ کرتے وقت ایک اور قاعدہ کو ملحوظ رکھنا ہوگا جو یہ ہے کہ کبھی ماضی کا صیغہ قطعی فیصلہ پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ چنانچہ قرآن کریم میں دوسرے کئی مقامات پر بھی یہ محاورہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مثلاً آتا ہے اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْھَکُمْ(المآئدۃ: ۷) یعنی جب تم نماز کے لئے کھڑے ہو تو اپنے مونہوں کو اور ہات
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
240
Important Words:
یرضعن (give suck) is derived from رضع i.e. he (the babe) sucked. ارضعت means, she (the mother or the wet-nurse) gave suck to the child. استرضع means, he arranged for the suckling of the child; he engaged a wet-nurse for it. The infinitive-noun رضاعة signifies sucking. ھذا اخی من الرضاعة means, he is my foster-brother, both having sucked from the breast of the same woman (Aqrab & Lane).
حولین (two years) is the dual of حول (a year) which is the infinitive-noun from حال meaning, it passed and became complete, or it passed from one state to another, or it turned round. A year is called حول because it is a complete measure of time and turns round and round. حول also means strength and power to do a thing as in the well-known formula لاحول ولاقوة الابالله (Aqrab).
وسعھا (its capacity) is derived from وسع meaning, it was sufficiently capacious. وسعت رحمة الله کل شیء means, God’s mercy extends to, and covers, all things. وسع means capacity or power or strength. The infinitive-noun from it is سعة meaning, breadth; extent, capaciousness; capacity and power. ذوسعة means, a man of means or a man of ample means (Aqrab).
تکلف (is burdened) is derived from کلف. They say کلفه امرا i.e. he imposed on him the task of doing a thing, or he tasked him to do a thing. It also means, he ordered him to do a thing which was difficult or troublesome or inconvenient (Lane).
فصال (weaning the child) is derived from فصل which is both transitive and intransitive, meaning, he separated, he divided, he partitioned; or he got separated, he went forth from. فصلت المرأة رضیعھا means, the woman weaned her child, which is also a sort of separation between the woman and her suckling. ھذایوم الفصل means, this is the day when a decision or a distinction shall be made between the parties, i.e. the doers of good and the doers of evil. فصال means, the weaning of a child from its mother or from the woman who suckles it (Taj).
تشاور (consultation) is derived from شار. They say شارالعسل i.e. he extracted honey from the honey-comb. شارالدابة means, he rode the beast in order to try it and ascertain its worth. اشار besides giving the same meaning as شار, also means, he made a thing known, he pointed to a thing, he gave a word of good counsel to a person. شاوره means, he consulted him, he sought his advice and counsel. تشاور means, mutual consultation. مشورة and شوری give similar meanings, i.e. consultation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a woman is divorced while she is pregnant, the question of the suckling of the child and the expense of bringing it up naturally arises. The verse under comment supplies the answer. It points out that the suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of that period, if the father and the mother both agree on that course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
The expression لاتضار is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause لاتضار والدة بولدھا may therefore mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally good and equitable. The words مولودله (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word والد (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
The clause, and the same is incumbent on the heir, lays down an important social principle. If a father dies leaving behind a child, it is the duty of his heirs to bring up the child and maintain it until it reaches puberty. This shall not be considered an act of favour on their part, but an act of duty. One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind. He who receives a support from another must be prepared to give the same to him, when he may stand in need of it.
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
286
The expression, la Tudarra, is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause may, therefore, mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally applicable here.
287
The words Mauludulla-hu (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word Walid (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
288
One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind.
288A
The suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of this period, if the father and the mother both agree on this course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
وَٱلَّذِينَ يُتَوَفَّوْنَ مِنكُمْ وَيَذَرُونَ أَزْوَٰجًا يَتَرَبَّصْنَ بِأَنفُسِهِنَّ أَرْبَعَةَ أَشْهُرٍ وَعَشْرًا ۖ فَإِذَا بَلَغْنَ أَجَلَهُنَّ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِيمَا فَعَلْنَ فِىٓ أَنفُسِهِنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرٌ
2:241.
2:229.
The ‘Iddat or the period of waiting in the case of widows is four months and ten days, which roughly corresponds to four alternate periods of menstruation and purity combined. Islam has prescribed a longer period in the case of a widow as a mark of respect for her feelings at the death of her husband and has thus added to the dignity and sanctity of the marriage tie.
The words, concerning anything that they do with regard to themselves, obviously refer to re-marriage. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, And arrange marriages for your widows (24:33).
2:241.
2:229.
Important Words:
یتوفون (who die) is derived from توفی which is derived from وفی (wafa). They say وفی بالعھد i.e. he fulfilled his promise; he was faithful in his word. وفی فلانا حقه (waffa) means, he gave him his right in full. اوفی gives both the meanings ascribed to وفی and وفی(waffa) above. توفی means, he took something in full, as they say توفی حقه i.e. he got or obtained his right in full. توفی الله زیداmeans, God took away the soul of Zaid, leaving the body behind; God caused Zaid to die. توفی فلان means, his soul was taken away, i.e. he died. In this case God is متوفی (mutawaffi) and the man who dies is متوفی (mutawaffa). الوفاة means, death (Aqrab). The Quran says: الله یتوفی الانفس حین موتھاوالتی لم تمت فی منامھا i.e. God takes away the souls of men at the time of their death; and He also takes away the souls of men that have not died, during their sleep (39:43). The Arabic idiom, which has the support of the Quranic usage, definitely shows that wherever God is فاعل (i.e. subject) and a being having a soul is مفعول به(i.e. object) the word توفی invariably means, the taking away of the soul.
Commentary:
After having dealt with the question of the remarriage of divorced women, the Quran in this verse proceeds to issue commandments regarding widows. The عدة i.e. the period of waiting in the case of widows, is four months and ten days which roughly corresponds to four alternate periods of menstruation and purity combined. Islam has prescribed a longer period in the case of a widow as a mark of respect for her feelings at the death of her husband and has thus added to the dignity and sanctity of the marriage tie.
This verse also implies a rebuke to those who are opposed to widow remarriage, thinking it to be an insult to the family and a disgrace to the widowed woman. The words, what is fair, show that it is not only lawful, but preferable and desirable, for a widow to remarry. The words, in anything that they do with regard to themselves, obviously refer to remarriage. Elsewhere the Quran says, And marry your widows (24:33).
a
2:241.
b
2:229.
180
عِدَّة (‘Iddat) 即寡妇守候四个月零十天的时期, 约略地相等于行经与洁净四次交替时期的总和。伊斯兰教给寡妇规定了较长的时期, 作为对她死了丈夫后感情上表示的一种尊重。这就增强了婚姻关系的庄严和严肃性。
181
“她们为自己所做的任何合宜的打算” 这几个字明显是指再嫁。«古兰经» 在其它地方说, “为你们的寡妇安排婚事” (24:33)。
a
2:241.
b
2:229.
241
Important Words:
یتوفون (who die) is derived from توفی which is derived from وفی (wafa). They say وفی بالعھد i.e. he fulfilled his promise; he was faithful in his word. وفی فلانا حقه (waffa) means, he gave him his right in full. اوفی gives both the meanings ascribed to وفی and وفی(waffa) above. توفی means, he took something in full, as they say توفی حقه i.e. he got or obtained his right in full. توفی الله زیداmeans, God took away the soul of Zaid, leaving the body behind; God caused Zaid to die. توفی فلان means, his soul was taken away, i.e. he died. In this case God is متوفی (mutawaffi) and the man who dies is متوفی (mutawaffa). الوفاة means, death (Aqrab). The Quran says: الله یتوفی الانفس حین موتھاوالتی لم تمت فی منامھا i.e. God takes away the souls of men at the time of their death; and He also takes away the souls of men that have not died, during their sleep (39:43). The Arabic idiom, which has the support of the Quranic usage, definitely shows that wherever God is فاعل (i.e. subject) and a being having a soul is مفعول به(i.e. object) the word توفی invariably means, the taking away of the soul.
Commentary:
After having dealt with the question of the remarriage of divorced women, the Quran in this verse proceeds to issue commandments regarding widows. The عدة i.e. the period of waiting in the case of widows, is four months and ten days which roughly corresponds to four alternate periods of menstruation and purity combined. Islam has prescribed a longer period in the case of a widow as a mark of respect for her feelings at the death of her husband and has thus added to the dignity and sanctity of the marriage tie.
This verse also implies a rebuke to those who are opposed to widow remarriage, thinking it to be an insult to the family and a disgrace to the widowed woman. The words, what is fair, show that it is not only lawful, but preferable and desirable, for a widow to remarry. The words, in anything that they do with regard to themselves, obviously refer to remarriage. Elsewhere the Quran says, And marry your widows (24:33).
a
2:241.
b
2:229.
289
The ‘Iddat or the period of waiting in the case of widows is four months and ten days, which roughly corresponds to four alternate periods of menstruation and purity combined. Islam has prescribed a longer period in the case of a widow as a mark of respect for her feelings at the death of her husband and has thus added to the dignity and sanctity of the marriage tie.
290
The words, concerning anything that they do with regard to themselves, obviously refer to re-marriage. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, And arrange marriages for your widows (24:33).
وَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِيمَا عَرَّضْتُم بِهِۦ مِنْ خِطْبَةِ ٱلنِّسَآءِ أَوْ أَكْنَنتُمْ فِىٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ ۚ عَلِمَ ٱللَّهُ أَنَّكُمْ سَتَذْكُرُونَهُنَّ وَلَٰكِن لَّا تُوَاعِدُوهُنَّ سِرًّا إِلَّآ أَن تَقُولُوا۟ قَوْلًا مَّعْرُوفًا ۚ وَلَا تَعْزِمُوا۟ عُقْدَةَ ٱلنِّكَاحِ حَتَّىٰ يَبْلُغَ ٱلْكِتَٰبُ أَجَلَهُۥ ۚ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ يَعْلَمُ مَا فِىٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ فَٱحْذَرُوهُ ۚ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ حَلِيمٌ
在守寡的规定时期内, 禁止男人向寡妇公开提婚。他可以间接地暗示他的意向。但他绝不能公开建议或正式提出甚或私订婚约。寡妇也禁止在规定时期内同意这种建议。由於尊重她对亡夫的思念以及使可能怀孕的情况变得明显起来, 她必须耐心等待四个月零十天。因为孕妇在孩子出生前是不准结婚的。
یعنی بیوہ عورتوں کے متعلق اگر تمہارے دل میں نکاح کی خواہش ہو تو اُسے عدت گزر جانے تک ظاہر نہ کرو۔ ہاں کسی غیر واضح اشارہ سے اِدھر توجہ دلائی جائے تو حرج نہیں۔
It is forbidden to a man to make an open proposal of marriage to a widow within her prescribed period of waiting. He may drop a hint indirectly suggestive of his intention. But he must on no account make an open suggestion or a formal proposal or even a secret proposal concerning marriage. A widow, too, is prohibited from giving her consent to such a proposal within the prescribed period. She must patiently wait for four months and ten days, out of deference to the memory of her departed spouse and in order also that her possible pregnancy may become apparent, because a pregnant woman is not allowed to marry until she is delivered of the child.
Important Words:
عرضتم (you throw out a hint) is derived from عرض meaning, he offered and presented a thing. عرض (‘arrada) means, he used an expression susceptible of different meanings; or he mentioned a thing not clearly but in a veiled manner; or he used words to convey a sense which the words used did not definitely convey (Lane).
خطبة (proposal of marriage) is derived from خطب meaning, he addressed a meeting; he delivered a sermon. خطب المرأة means, he proposed marriage to her. خطبة (khutbah) means, a sermon. خطبة (khitbah) means, a proposal of marriage (Aqrab).
اکننتم (you keep hidden) is derived fromکن . They say کن الشیء or اکن الشیء meaning, he concealed the thing; he covered it. کنان means, a veil or covering, and مکنون means, covered or hidden (Aqrab).
عقدة (tie) is the infinitive-noun from عقد meaning, he tied; he made a thing firm and fast. عقد الحبل means, he tied the rope; he tied it in knots. عقدة means, a tie; a contract that ties up or binds two parties; a marriage contract (Aqrab).
Commentary:
According to this verse, it is forbidden to a man to make an open proposal of marriage to a widow within her عدة or the prescribed period of waiting. He who intends to marry a widow must keep his intention concealed from her. He may drop a hint indirectly suggestive of his intention. But he must on no account make an open suggestion or a formal proposal or even a secret proposal concerning marriage. A widow, too, is prohibited from giving her consent to such a proposal within the prescribed period. She must patiently wait for four months and ten days out of deference to the memory of her departed spouse and in order that her possible pregnancy may become apparent, because a pregnant woman is not allowed to marry until she is delivered of the child.
The words, beware of it, are meant to caution men to be on their guard against disobeying these commandments which are meant for their own good. If God had not laid them down, all social order would have gone to pieces.
The divine attributes, "Forgiving" and "Forbearing", have been mentioned at the end of this verse not to hint that breach of these injunctions would find God Forgiving and Forbearing but that the exigencies of the circumstances required stricter laws in this matter, but as God knows human weaknesses, He has been lenient in this respect. So whatever commandment has now been given, must be faithfully followed and all lapse be honestly guarded against.
182
在守寡的规定时期内, 禁止男人向寡妇公开提婚。他可以间接地暗示他的意向。但他绝不能公开建议或正式提出甚或私订婚约。寡妇也禁止在规定时期内同意这种建议。由於尊重她对亡夫的思念以及使可能怀孕的情况变得明显起来, 她必须耐心等待四个月零十天。因为孕妇在孩子出生前是不准结婚的。
1
یعنی بیوہ عورتوں کے متعلق اگر تمہارے دل میں نکاح کی خواہش ہو تو اُسے عدت گزر جانے تک ظاہر نہ کرو۔ ہاں کسی غیر واضح اشارہ سے اِدھر توجہ دلائی جائے تو حرج نہیں۔
242
Important Words:
عرضتم (you throw out a hint) is derived from عرض meaning, he offered and presented a thing. عرض (‘arrada) means, he used an expression susceptible of different meanings; or he mentioned a thing not clearly but in a veiled manner; or he used words to convey a sense which the words used did not definitely convey (Lane).
خطبة (proposal of marriage) is derived from خطب meaning, he addressed a meeting; he delivered a sermon. خطب المرأة means, he proposed marriage to her. خطبة (khutbah) means, a sermon. خطبة (khitbah) means, a proposal of marriage (Aqrab).
اکننتم (you keep hidden) is derived fromکن . They say کن الشیء or اکن الشیء meaning, he concealed the thing; he covered it. کنان means, a veil or covering, and مکنون means, covered or hidden (Aqrab).
عقدة (tie) is the infinitive-noun from عقد meaning, he tied; he made a thing firm and fast. عقد الحبل means, he tied the rope; he tied it in knots. عقدة means, a tie; a contract that ties up or binds two parties; a marriage contract (Aqrab).
Commentary:
According to this verse, it is forbidden to a man to make an open proposal of marriage to a widow within her عدة or the prescribed period of waiting. He who intends to marry a widow must keep his intention concealed from her. He may drop a hint indirectly suggestive of his intention. But he must on no account make an open suggestion or a formal proposal or even a secret proposal concerning marriage. A widow, too, is prohibited from giving her consent to such a proposal within the prescribed period. She must patiently wait for four months and ten days out of deference to the memory of her departed spouse and in order that her possible pregnancy may become apparent, because a pregnant woman is not allowed to marry until she is delivered of the child.
The words, beware of it, are meant to caution men to be on their guard against disobeying these commandments which are meant for their own good. If God had not laid them down, all social order would have gone to pieces.
The divine attributes, "Forgiving" and "Forbearing", have been mentioned at the end of this verse not to hint that breach of these injunctions would find God Forgiving and Forbearing but that the exigencies of the circumstances required stricter laws in this matter, but as God knows human weaknesses, He has been lenient in this respect. So whatever commandment has now been given, must be faithfully followed and all lapse be honestly guarded against.
291
It is forbidden to a man to make an open proposal of marriage to a widow within her prescribed period of waiting. He may drop a hint indirectly suggestive of his intention. But he must on no account make an open suggestion or a formal proposal or even a secret proposal concerning marriage. A widow, too, is prohibited from giving her consent to such a proposal within the prescribed period. She must patiently wait for four months and ten days, out of deference to the memory of her departed spouse and in order also that her possible pregnancy may become apparent, because a pregnant woman is not allowed to marry until she is delivered of the child.
لَّا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِن طَلَّقْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ مَا لَمْ تَمَسُّوهُنَّ أَوْ تَفْرِضُوا۟ لَهُنَّ فَرِيضَةً ۚ وَمَتِّعُوهُنَّ عَلَى ٱلْمُوسِعِ قَدَرُهُۥ وَعَلَى ٱلْمُقْتِرِ قَدَرُهُۥ مَتَٰعًۢا بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۖ حَقًّا عَلَى ٱلْمُحْسِنِينَ
这是一种例外的情况, 但有时确实会发生。在缔结婚约后, 情况发生了变化, 或发现婚姻难以圆满继续, 或令人不快。这一节和下一节经文对这样的一些情况作出了规定。
بظاہر یہ ایک بیہودہ بات معلوم ہوتی ہے کہ جو شخص چھونے سے پہلے طلاق دے گا وہ نکاح ہی کیوں کرے گا۔ لیکن ایسی مجبوریاں پیش آجاتی ہیں۔ مثلاً نکاح کے معاً بعد ایسے گواہ مل گئے جنہوں نے ایسی گواہیاں دیں جن سے نکاح کی حرمت ثابت ہوگئی یا کم سے کم نکاح کی کراہت پیدا ہوگئی۔ مثلاً ادھوری گواہی ایسی مل گئی کہ یہ عورت خاوند کی رضائی بہن ہے پس گو وہ گواہی ادھوری ہو مگر خاوند کے دل میں کراہت تو پیدا ہو جائے گی اور اس قسم کی گواہیاں اکثر نکاحوں کے بعد مل جاتی ہیں یا خاندان کے بڑے آدمیوں نے جن کو پہلے حالات کا علم نہ تھا فیصلہ دیا کہ ہمارے آپس کے ایسے تعلقات ہیں کہ تم دونوں آپس میں نبھ
بغیر مہر مقرر کرنے کے اسلام نے نکاح ناجائز رکھا ہے لیکن اس جگہ سے پتہ لگتا ہے کہ شاید یہ بھی جائز ہے۔ فقہاء نے اس کے یہ معنے کیے ہیں کہ تعیین روپیہ کی چاہے نہ ہو لیکن یہ ضرور سمجھا جائے گا کہ مہر مقرر ہے اور اس کی تعیین مہر ِبالمثل سے ہوگی یعنی اسی حیثیت کے خاندان کے دوسرے افراد کو دیکھا جائے گا کہ ان کا کیا مہر ہے۔
مَتَاعًا۔ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ کا مصدر ہے اور یہ تاکید کے لئے آتا ہے جو کبھی تقلیل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور کبھی تکثیر و تکمیل کے۔ کبھی ایسا مصدر صرف غیر معین شے پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے آتا ہے اور کچھ کے معنے دیتا ہے اس جگہ یہی معنے چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
اگر اس معاوضہ کے متعلق اختلاف ہو تو قرآن کریم نے اصولی طور پر فرمایا ہے کہ جھگڑے کی صورت میں اُولِی الْاَمْر کی طرف رجوع کرو۔ پس اختلاف کی صورت میں قاضی کے پاس فیصلہ لے جانا چاہیے۔ وہ فیصلہ دے گا کہ خاوندنے اپنی حیثیت کے مطابق عورت کا نقصان پورا کیا ہے یا نہیں۔
This would be an exceptional case. But cases do sometimes happen where after a marriage contract has been completed, circumstances arise or become known which render the consummation and continuation of the marriage difficult or undesirable. This and the next verse make provision for such cases.
Important Words:
متعوھن (provide for them) is derived from متع (mata‘a). They say متع الشیء i.e. the thing became tall. متع الرجل means, the man became well off. متع الله فلانا (matta‘a) means, God granted him life and the necessaries thereof. متع المرأة المطلقة means, he provided his divorced wife with necessaries of life. تمتع به أو منه or استمتع means, he profited by it for some length of time; he was afforded an opportunity to enjoy it. المتاع means, things that are necessary for life without affording opulence; things useful and necessary such as food, clothing, household utensils, furniture, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
المقتر (the poor man) is derived from قتر. They say قتر علی عیاله i.e. he was niggardly towards his family. اقتر الرجل means, the man became poor and straitened in circumstances. المقتر is, therefore, one who is poor, one who is in straitened circumstances (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Circumstances might arise when a husband may consider it necessary or desirable to divorce his wife before they have had conjugal relations, i.e. before the man has gone in unto his wife and even before any مھر (dowry) has been decided upon by the parties. The verse allows this procedure but makes it obligatory on the husband to see that in such a case his divorced wife receives suitable provision according to his means. Thus Islam seeks not only to provide for the divorced woman but to leave no trace of bitterness, which is very often the result of the dissolution of a marriage. The word المحسنین i.e. the virtuous or those who act benevolently, has been used to exhort the husband that the more generous he is in his treatment of his divorced wife, the more pleasing will his conduct be in the sight of God.
183
这是一种例外的情况, 但有时确实会发生。在缔结婚约后, 情况发生了变化, 或发现婚姻难以圆满继续, 或令人不快。这一节和下一节经文对这样的一些情况作出了规定。
1
بظاہر یہ ایک بیہودہ بات معلوم ہوتی ہے کہ جو شخص چھونے سے پہلے طلاق دے گا وہ نکاح ہی کیوں کرے گا۔ لیکن ایسی مجبوریاں پیش آجاتی ہیں۔ مثلاً نکاح کے معاً بعد ایسے گواہ مل گئے جنہوں نے ایسی گواہیاں دیں جن سے نکاح کی حرمت ثابت ہوگئی یا کم سے کم نکاح کی کراہت پیدا ہوگئی۔ مثلاً ادھوری گواہی ایسی مل گئی کہ یہ عورت خاوند کی رضائی بہن ہے پس گو وہ گواہی ادھوری ہو مگر خاوند کے دل میں کراہت تو پیدا ہو جائے گی اور اس قسم کی گواہیاں اکثر نکاحوں کے بعد مل جاتی ہیں یا خاندان کے بڑے آدمیوں نے جن کو پہلے حالات کا علم نہ تھا فیصلہ دیا کہ ہمارے آپس کے ایسے تعلقات ہیں کہ تم دونوں آپس میں نبھ
2
بغیر مہر مقرر کرنے کے اسلام نے نکاح ناجائز رکھا ہے لیکن اس جگہ سے پتہ لگتا ہے کہ شاید یہ بھی جائز ہے۔ فقہاء نے اس کے یہ معنے کیے ہیں کہ تعیین روپیہ کی چاہے نہ ہو لیکن یہ ضرور سمجھا جائے گا کہ مہر مقرر ہے اور اس کی تعیین مہر ِبالمثل سے ہوگی یعنی اسی حیثیت کے خاندان کے دوسرے افراد کو دیکھا جائے گا کہ ان کا کیا مہر ہے۔
3
مَتَاعًا۔ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ کا مصدر ہے اور یہ تاکید کے لئے آتا ہے جو کبھی تقلیل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور کبھی تکثیر و تکمیل کے۔ کبھی ایسا مصدر صرف غیر معین شے پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے آتا ہے اور کچھ کے معنے دیتا ہے اس جگہ یہی معنے چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
4
اگر اس معاوضہ کے متعلق اختلاف ہو تو قرآن کریم نے اصولی طور پر فرمایا ہے کہ جھگڑے کی صورت میں اُولِی الْاَمْر کی طرف رجوع کرو۔ پس اختلاف کی صورت میں قاضی کے پاس فیصلہ لے جانا چاہیے۔ وہ فیصلہ دے گا کہ خاوندنے اپنی حیثیت کے مطابق عورت کا نقصان پورا کیا ہے یا نہیں۔
243
Important Words:
متعوھن (provide for them) is derived from متع (mata‘a). They say متع الشیء i.e. the thing became tall. متع الرجل means, the man became well off. متع الله فلانا (matta‘a) means, God granted him life and the necessaries thereof. متع المرأة المطلقة means, he provided his divorced wife with necessaries of life. تمتع به أو منه or استمتع means, he profited by it for some length of time; he was afforded an opportunity to enjoy it. المتاع means, things that are necessary for life without affording opulence; things useful and necessary such as food, clothing, household utensils, furniture, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
المقتر (the poor man) is derived from قتر. They say قتر علی عیاله i.e. he was niggardly towards his family. اقتر الرجل means, the man became poor and straitened in circumstances. المقتر is, therefore, one who is poor, one who is in straitened circumstances (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Circumstances might arise when a husband may consider it necessary or desirable to divorce his wife before they have had conjugal relations, i.e. before the man has gone in unto his wife and even before any مھر (dowry) has been decided upon by the parties. The verse allows this procedure but makes it obligatory on the husband to see that in such a case his divorced wife receives suitable provision according to his means. Thus Islam seeks not only to provide for the divorced woman but to leave no trace of bitterness, which is very often the result of the dissolution of a marriage. The word المحسنین i.e. the virtuous or those who act benevolently, has been used to exhort the husband that the more generous he is in his treatment of his divorced wife, the more pleasing will his conduct be in the sight of God.
292
This would be an exceptional case. But cases do sometimes happen where after a marriage contract has been completed, circumstances arise or become known which render the consummation and continuation of the marriage difficult or undesirable. This and the next verse make provision for such cases.
وَإِن طَلَّقْتُمُوهُنَّ مِن قَبْلِ أَن تَمَسُّوهُنَّ وَقَدْ فَرَضْتُمْ لَهُنَّ فَرِيضَةً فَنِصْفُ مَا فَرَضْتُمْ إِلَّآ أَن يَعْفُونَ أَوْ يَعْفُوَا۟ ٱلَّذِى بِيَدِهِۦ عُقْدَةُ ٱلنِّكَاحِ ۚ وَأَن تَعْفُوٓا۟ أَقْرَبُ لِلتَّقْوَىٰ ۚ وَلَا تَنسَوُا۟ ٱلْفَضْلَ بَيْنَكُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ بَصِيرٌ
如果已定了聘礼但夫妻还没有同过房以前要离婚, 丈夫必须付出聘礼的一半。
“掌握婚约的人” 这几个字, 可以意指丈夫或离婚妇女的监护人, 因为婚后的婚约掌握在丈夫手中, 而婚前掌握在监护人手中。
يَعْفُ (Ya‘fu) 可以意指 “宽免或增加”。妻子 (或她的监护人) 可以给她的全部或部分聘礼, 或者丈夫可以多付些比他应该拿出来的聘礼。不过, 丈夫肯定要多付些聘礼以表示他比较慷慨。
یعنی خاوند یا بعض فقہاء کے نزدیک عورت کا وکیل۔ اِلَّا اَنْ یَّعْفُوْنَ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ یا تو عورتیں طلاق کے وقت اپنا نصف مہر اپنے خاوندوں کو معاف کردیں یا ان کے وکلاء معاف کر دیں۔ اور یَعْفُوَ الَّذِیْ بِیَدِہٖ عُقْدَۃُ النِّـکَاحِ سے اگر خاوند مراد لیا جائے تو آیت کے معنے یہ ہوں گے کہ خاوندنصف مہر کی بجائے پورا مہر دے دے۔ گویا اس جگہ پورا مہر دینے کا نام بھی عفو رکھا گیا ہے جیسا کہ قرآن کریم میں اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ یَسْئَلُوْنَکَ مَاذَا یُنْفِقُوْنَ۔ قُلِ الْعَفْوَ (بقرۃ آیت۲۲۰) یعنی لوگ تجھ سے یہ پوچھتے ہیں کہ کیا خرچ کریں‘ تو کہہ دے جو تمہار
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry.
The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman holds it.
Ya‘fu may mean, "remits or increases." The wife (or her guardian) may remit the whole or a part of what is due to her, or the husband may pay more than what is due from him. But the husband is certainly desired to make a greater show of generosity.
Important Words:
یعفو (should remit) is derived from عفا meaning: (1) he gave more than what was due; or (2) he relinquished his right or remitted it in whole or in part (Taj). See also 2:220.
Commentary:
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry. The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman also holds it in his hands. In the former case, the word یعفو would mean that the husband should try to give more than half the dowry, or if he has already paid the whole dowry, he should try not to demand its return. If, however, the clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, be considered to apply to the guardian of the divorced woman, the word یعفو would mean that he should try to remit or relinquish her right, i.e. he should, so far as possible, strive to give up, even that which he is entitled to receive on behalf of the divorced woman. But God certainly prefers that the husband should make a greater show of generosity.
This is how each party is exhorted to vie with the other in acting generously toward the other, the husband by paying more than what is obligatory on him, and the wife or her guardian by relinquishing what is due to her. If people truly inculcated such a spirit of sacrifice, the earth would indeed become a heaven.
The expression, And that you should remit is nearer to righteousness, applies to the husband particularly; but it may, in its broader significance, apply to all__husbands, wives and guardians.
184
如果已定了聘礼但夫妻还没有同过房以前要离婚, 丈夫必须付出聘礼的一半。
185
“掌握婚约的人” 这几个字, 可以意指丈夫或离婚妇女的监护人, 因为婚后的婚约掌握在丈夫手中, 而婚前掌握在监护人手中。
186
يَعْفُ (Ya‘fu) 可以意指 “宽免或增加”。妻子 (或她的监护人) 可以给她的全部或部分聘礼, 或者丈夫可以多付些比他应该拿出来的聘礼。不过, 丈夫肯定要多付些聘礼以表示他比较慷慨。
1
یعنی خاوند یا بعض فقہاء کے نزدیک عورت کا وکیل۔ اِلَّا اَنْ یَّعْفُوْنَ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ یا تو عورتیں طلاق کے وقت اپنا نصف مہر اپنے خاوندوں کو معاف کردیں یا ان کے وکلاء معاف کر دیں۔ اور یَعْفُوَ الَّذِیْ بِیَدِہٖ عُقْدَۃُ النِّـکَاحِ سے اگر خاوند مراد لیا جائے تو آیت کے معنے یہ ہوں گے کہ خاوندنصف مہر کی بجائے پورا مہر دے دے۔ گویا اس جگہ پورا مہر دینے کا نام بھی عفو رکھا گیا ہے جیسا کہ قرآن کریم میں اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ یَسْئَلُوْنَکَ مَاذَا یُنْفِقُوْنَ۔ قُلِ الْعَفْوَ (بقرۃ آیت۲۲۰) یعنی لوگ تجھ سے یہ پوچھتے ہیں کہ کیا خرچ کریں‘ تو کہہ دے جو تمہار
244
Important Words:
یعفو (should remit) is derived from عفا meaning: (1) he gave more than what was due; or (2) he relinquished his right or remitted it in whole or in part (Taj). See also 2:220.
Commentary:
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry. The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman also holds it in his hands. In the former case, the word یعفو would mean that the husband should try to give more than half the dowry, or if he has already paid the whole dowry, he should try not to demand its return. If, however, the clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, be considered to apply to the guardian of the divorced woman, the word یعفو would mean that he should try to remit or relinquish her right, i.e. he should, so far as possible, strive to give up, even that which he is entitled to receive on behalf of the divorced woman. But God certainly prefers that the husband should make a greater show of generosity.
This is how each party is exhorted to vie with the other in acting generously toward the other, the husband by paying more than what is obligatory on him, and the wife or her guardian by relinquishing what is due to her. If people truly inculcated such a spirit of sacrifice, the earth would indeed become a heaven.
The expression, And that you should remit is nearer to righteousness, applies to the husband particularly; but it may, in its broader significance, apply to all__husbands, wives and guardians.
293
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry.
294
The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman holds it.
294A
Ya‘fu may mean, "remits or increases." The wife (or her guardian) may remit the whole or a part of what is due to her, or the husband may pay more than what is due from him. But the husband is certainly desired to make a greater show of generosity.
حَٰفِظُوا۟ عَلَى ٱلصَّلَوَٰتِ وَٱلصَّلَوٰةِ ٱلْوُسْطَىٰ وَقُومُوا۟ لِلَّهِ قَٰنِتِينَ
حَافَظَ عَلَیْہِ کے معنے ہیں وَاظَبَ عَلَیْہِ۔ اس پر دوام اختیار کیا۔ رَاقَبَہٗ اس کی نگرانی کی۔ اس کا خیال رکھا۔ اور یہ لفظ باب مفاعلہ میں سے ہے جس کی خاصیت ہے کہ وہ بالمقابل افعال پر دلالت کرتا ہے۔ پس مطلب یہ ہوا کہ تم نمازوں کا خیال رکھو اور ان کی نگرانی کرو۔ نتیجہ یہ ہوگا کہ نماز تمہاری نگرانی کرے گی‘ یعنی اس کے ذریعہ سے تم گناہوں اور غلطیوں سے پاک ہوگے۔ دوسری جگہ اس مضمون کو ان الفاظ میں ادا کیا ہے۔ اِنَّ الصَّلٰوۃَ تَنْھٰی عَنِ الْفَحْشَآءِ وَالْمُنْکَرِ (عنکبوت: ۴۶) یعنی نماز انسان کو بدیوں اور ناپسندیدہ باتوں سے روکتی ہے۔ یہ گویا وہ حفاظت
23:10; 70:35.
After marriage one is apt to become a little lax in Prayers. Besides, family life multiplies the cares of both men and women. Hence, the necessity of urging married people to be more regular and punctual in their Prayers.
The view that it is ‘Asr Prayer is supported by some of the sayings of the Holy Prophet (Bukhari). It seems to be the Prayer, which happens to fall within busy hours when one is in the middle of engrossing preoccupations. But each Prayer in a sense is "the middle Prayer."
23:10; 70:35.
Important Words:
حافظوا (watch) is derived from حفظ. They say حفظه i.e. he preserved it, or he guarded or protected it, or he prevented it from perishing or becoming lost. حفظ القرآن means, he memorized the Quran, i.e. he learned it by heart. حافظ علی الامر means, he watched over the thing; he attended to it carefully and constantly (Taj).
قانتین (submissively) is derived from قنت for which see 2:117. The word conveys, among others, three important meanings: (1) standing motionless, (2) refraining from speech and (3) standing submissively (Lane). All these meanings are applicable here.
Commentary:
This verse which stresses the importance of, and regularity in, Prayers appears to be rather oddly placed, being wedged in between verses relating to conjugal relations. But the very context of it explains the deep philosophy of its meaning. After marriage one is apt to become a little lax in Prayers, particularly the supererogatory Tahajjud Prayer (said in the latter part of the night). Besides, family life multiplies the cares of both man and woman. Hence, the necessity of urging married people to be regular and punctual in their Prayers.
الصلوة الوسطی (the Middle Prayer) has been differently explained. According to some commentators it is the Tahajjud Prayer, and according to others, it is the morning Prayer, while according to yet others, it is the late afternoon or ‘Asr Prayer. The latter view is supported by some of the sayings of the Holy Prophet. For it is on record that on his missing the right time of the ‘Asr Prayer, when engaged in repelling the repeated attacks of the enemy in the Battle of the Ditch, and having been obliged to combine it with the Maghrib or the sunset Prayer, the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "May God curse the Jews (who were mostly responsible for this battle)! They have prevented us from saying our Middle Prayer in time" (Bukhari). Truly speaking, however, the "Middle Prayer" is the Prayer which happens to fall within busy hours. In the above-quoted tradition, the Holy Prophet called the ‘Asr the "Middle Prayer," because it fell within extraordinarily busy hours. The Quran has placed this verse here to point out firstly, that married life, and for that matter any life however busy, should not make man slack in the observance of Prayers, and secondly, that like this verse, the Middle Prayer is one which is surrounded by apparently incongruous elements. The style is peculiar to the Quran but is quite natural.
The clause, and stand before Allah submissively, teaches that besides aiming at complete concentration in Prayers the worshipper should observe three special injunctions: (1) he should refrain from speech, (2) he should stand motionless and refrain from making any unnecessary movement, and (3) his general attitude should be that of submissiveness, as lack of these is liable to adversely affect concentration and detract from the sanctity of worship.
a
23:10; 70:35.
187
婚后对拜功易於松懈。此外, 丈夫和妻子都为家务而增加操劳。因此, 必须促使婚后的人们更要按时礼拜。
188
穆圣几次说到午后拜功 (عَصْر, ‘Asr) 的重要性 (布哈理)。这个拜功看来恰巧是在最忙碌的时候, 那时人们的注意力都集中在要办的事务上。但从某种意义上讲, 每一拜功都是 “中间的拜功。”
1
حَافَظَ عَلَیْہِ کے معنے ہیں وَاظَبَ عَلَیْہِ۔ اس پر دوام اختیار کیا۔ رَاقَبَہٗ اس کی نگرانی کی۔ اس کا خیال رکھا۔ اور یہ لفظ باب مفاعلہ میں سے ہے جس کی خاصیت ہے کہ وہ بالمقابل افعال پر دلالت کرتا ہے۔ پس مطلب یہ ہوا کہ تم نمازوں کا خیال رکھو اور ان کی نگرانی کرو۔ نتیجہ یہ ہوگا کہ نماز تمہاری نگرانی کرے گی‘ یعنی اس کے ذریعہ سے تم گناہوں اور غلطیوں سے پاک ہوگے۔ دوسری جگہ اس مضمون کو ان الفاظ میں ادا کیا ہے۔ اِنَّ الصَّلٰوۃَ تَنْھٰی عَنِ الْفَحْشَآءِ وَالْمُنْکَرِ (عنکبوت: ۴۶) یعنی نماز انسان کو بدیوں اور ناپسندیدہ باتوں سے روکتی ہے۔ یہ گویا وہ حفاظت
a
23:10; 70:35.
245
Important Words:
حافظوا (watch) is derived from حفظ. They say حفظه i.e. he preserved it, or he guarded or protected it, or he prevented it from perishing or becoming lost. حفظ القرآن means, he memorized the Quran, i.e. he learned it by heart. حافظ علی الامر means, he watched over the thing; he attended to it carefully and constantly (Taj).
قانتین (submissively) is derived from قنت for which see 2:117. The word conveys, among others, three important meanings: (1) standing motionless, (2) refraining from speech and (3) standing submissively (Lane). All these meanings are applicable here.
Commentary:
This verse which stresses the importance of, and regularity in, Prayers appears to be rather oddly placed, being wedged in between verses relating to conjugal relations. But the very context of it explains the deep philosophy of its meaning. After marriage one is apt to become a little lax in Prayers, particularly the supererogatory Tahajjud Prayer (said in the latter part of the night). Besides, family life multiplies the cares of both man and woman. Hence, the necessity of urging married people to be regular and punctual in their Prayers.
الصلوة الوسطی (the Middle Prayer) has been differently explained. According to some commentators it is the Tahajjud Prayer, and according to others, it is the morning Prayer, while according to yet others, it is the late afternoon or ‘Asr Prayer. The latter view is supported by some of the sayings of the Holy Prophet. For it is on record that on his missing the right time of the ‘Asr Prayer, when engaged in repelling the repeated attacks of the enemy in the Battle of the Ditch, and having been obliged to combine it with the Maghrib or the sunset Prayer, the Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "May God curse the Jews (who were mostly responsible for this battle)! They have prevented us from saying our Middle Prayer in time" (Bukhari). Truly speaking, however, the "Middle Prayer" is the Prayer which happens to fall within busy hours. In the above-quoted tradition, the Holy Prophet called the ‘Asr the "Middle Prayer," because it fell within extraordinarily busy hours. The Quran has placed this verse here to point out firstly, that married life, and for that matter any life however busy, should not make man slack in the observance of Prayers, and secondly, that like this verse, the Middle Prayer is one which is surrounded by apparently incongruous elements. The style is peculiar to the Quran but is quite natural.
The clause, and stand before Allah submissively, teaches that besides aiming at complete concentration in Prayers the worshipper should observe three special injunctions: (1) he should refrain from speech, (2) he should stand motionless and refrain from making any unnecessary movement, and (3) his general attitude should be that of submissiveness, as lack of these is liable to adversely affect concentration and detract from the sanctity of worship.
a
23:10; 70:35.
295
After marriage one is apt to become a little lax in Prayers. Besides, family life multiplies the cares of both men and women. Hence, the necessity of urging married people to be more regular and punctual in their Prayers.
296
The view that it is ‘Asr Prayer is supported by some of the sayings of the Holy Prophet (Bukhari). It seems to be the Prayer, which happens to fall within busy hours when one is in the middle of engrossing preoccupations. But each Prayer in a sense is "the middle Prayer."
فَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ فَرِجَالًا أَوْ رُكْبَانًا ۖ فَإِذَآ أَمِنتُمْ فَٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ كَمَا عَلَّمَكُم مَّا لَمْ تَكُونُوا۟ تَعْلَمُونَ
کَمَا عَلَّمَکُمْ۔ کَ کے عام معنے مانند کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن اس کے ایک معنے ل کے بھی ہیں یعنی ’’اس لئے کہ‘‘ یا ’’کیونکہ‘‘ (مغنی) اس جگہ یہی معنے زیادہ چسپاں ہوتے ہیں اور انہی کو ہم نے اختیار کیا ہے۔
4:102.
4:104.
Observance of five daily Prayers is the most important commandment. In no circumstances should a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when he is moving about in a state of extreme fear, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
4:102.
4:104.
Important Words:
رجالا (on foot) is the plural of راجل (one who walks on foot) which is derived from رجل i.e. he walked on foot, رجل (rijl) meaning a foot. رجل (rajul) which means man is so called because man walks on foot and not on both hands and feet like quadrupeds (Lane).
رکبانا (riding) is the plural of راکب (one who rides) which is derived from رکب i.e. he rode an animal or a conveyance. One says, رکبت الفرس i.e. I mounted the horse. رکب الرجل البحر means, the man embarked on a sea voyage. رکب ذنبا means, he made sin his riding beast, i.e. he committed a sin (Lane).
Commentary:
The five daily Prayers constitute the most important worship in Islam. In no circumstances can a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when a person is moving about in a state of extreme fear and consternation, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
In view of this great importance of Prayers, a married couple can ill afford to be careless about them. The form in which Prayers are to be performed in time of ordinary fear or danger is mentioned in 4:102, 103; but the present verse refers to a state of extreme fear when one cannot observe even the form of ordinary صلوة الخوف (Prayer in a state of fear).
The clause, but when you are safe, remember Allah as he has taught you, means that the injunction with regard to offering Prayers on foot or on horseback, etc. pertains to very special circumstances only. As soon as better conditions return, one should pray in the ordinary way as taught in the closing portion of the preceding verse, i.e. one should stand motionless in Prayer and refrain from speech, etc.
b
4:102.
c
4:104.
189
每天谨守五次拜功, 是最重要的律令。只要一个穆斯林神志清醒时, 就绝不能忽略拜功。即使在极端恐惧的情况下在各处走动时, 他也必须祈祷。骑马, 步行, 不论情况如何, 是跑、是坐或躺着, 都要履行拜功。
2
کَمَا عَلَّمَکُمْ۔ کَ کے عام معنے مانند کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن اس کے ایک معنے ل کے بھی ہیں یعنی ’’اس لئے کہ‘‘ یا ’’کیونکہ‘‘ (مغنی) اس جگہ یہی معنے زیادہ چسپاں ہوتے ہیں اور انہی کو ہم نے اختیار کیا ہے۔
a
4:102.
b
4:104.
246
Important Words:
رجالا (on foot) is the plural of راجل (one who walks on foot) which is derived from رجل i.e. he walked on foot, رجل (rijl) meaning a foot. رجل (rajul) which means man is so called because man walks on foot and not on both hands and feet like quadrupeds (Lane).
رکبانا (riding) is the plural of راکب (one who rides) which is derived from رکب i.e. he rode an animal or a conveyance. One says, رکبت الفرس i.e. I mounted the horse. رکب الرجل البحر means, the man embarked on a sea voyage. رکب ذنبا means, he made sin his riding beast, i.e. he committed a sin (Lane).
Commentary:
The five daily Prayers constitute the most important worship in Islam. In no circumstances can a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when a person is moving about in a state of extreme fear and consternation, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
In view of this great importance of Prayers, a married couple can ill afford to be careless about them. The form in which Prayers are to be performed in time of ordinary fear or danger is mentioned in 4:102, 103; but the present verse refers to a state of extreme fear when one cannot observe even the form of ordinary صلوة الخوف (Prayer in a state of fear).
The clause, but when you are safe, remember Allah as he has taught you, means that the injunction with regard to offering Prayers on foot or on horseback, etc. pertains to very special circumstances only. As soon as better conditions return, one should pray in the ordinary way as taught in the closing portion of the preceding verse, i.e. one should stand motionless in Prayer and refrain from speech, etc.
b
4:102.
c
4:104.
297
Observance of five daily Prayers is the most important commandment. In no circumstances should a Muslim neglect his Prayers as long as he is sane and conscious. Even when he is moving about in a state of extreme fear, he must not fail to say his Prayers and should perform them on horseback or on foot, whether running or sitting or lying, as the case may be.
وَٱلَّذِينَ يُتَوَفَّوْنَ مِنكُمْ وَيَذَرُونَ أَزْوَٰجًا وَصِيَّةً لِّأَزْوَٰجِهِم مَّتَٰعًا إِلَى ٱلْحَوْلِ غَيْرَ إِخْرَاجٍ ۚ فَإِنْ خَرَجْنَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِى مَا فَعَلْنَ فِىٓ أَنفُسِهِنَّ مِن مَّعْرُوفٍ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَزِيزٌ حَكِيمٌ
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
2:235.
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
2:235.
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
d
2:235.
190
2:235经文中为寡妇所制定的四个月零十天的待婚期中, 她有权要求她亡夫的那些继承人给她住所和生活费。这里谈的一年, 只是在2:235节经文中所提到她的住所和生活费权利以外为期一年的同样权利是特殊的优惠。
3
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
4
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
a
2:235.
247
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
a
2:235.
298
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
وَلِلْمُطَلَّقَٰتِ مَتَٰعٌۢ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۖ حَقًّا عَلَى ٱلْمُتَّقِينَ
مَعْرُوْف کا لفظ قرآن مجید میں بہت دفعہ آتا ہے اور یہ عرف سے نکلا ہے اور اس کے معنے ہیں ’’پہچانا ہوا۔‘‘ مفرداتِ راغب میں لکھا ہے اَلْمَعْرُوْفُ اِسْمٌ لِّکُلِّ فِعْلٍ یُعْرَفُ بِالْعَقْلِ اَوِ الشَّرْعِ حُسْنُہٗ یعنی معروف ہر اس فعل کو کہتے ہیں کہ جس کی خوبی عقل و شرع سے پہچانی جائے۔ پس جب شرع کے لحاظ سے معروف ہو تو وہ مطابق قانون فعل کہلائے گا اور جب عقل عامہ سے اس کی خوبی پہچانی جائے تو اسے مطابق دستور کہیں گے۔ کیونکہ جس امر کی خوبی ہر انسان پہچانتا ہے اس کا رواج بنی نوع انسان میں پایا جاتا ہے۔ اور جب کسی امر کی خوبی خاص فرد کی عقل سے پہچانی جائے گی تو
مُطَلَّقَات سے حسنِ سلوک کو پھر دہرایا ہے جس کی وجہ یہ ہے کہ مطلقہ سے ناراضگی ہوتی ہے اس لئے اس کے ساتھ حسن سلوک کرنے کی طرف خاص طور پر توجہ دلانے کی ضرورت ہے۔ مسلمانوں پر تعجب ہے کہ اللہ تعالیٰ تو مطلقہ عورتوں سے علاوہ مہر کے سلوک کرنے کا ارشاد فرماتا ہے اور مسلمان عورتوں کے مہر تک بھی کھا جاتے ہیں۔ اگر اس حکم پر عمل کیا جائے تو کس قدر فساد اور جھگڑے دور ہو جائیں اور طلاق جو صرف مجبوری میں حلال ہے اس تلخی کے پیدا کرنے کا موجب نہ ہو۔ جس کا موجب وہ اب ہو رہی ہے۔ بلکہ دونوں فریق محسوس کریں کہ مجبوری سے علیحدگی اختیار کی گئی ہے ورنہ آپس میں تلخی یا بدمزگی نہیں ہے۔ اس
2:242; 65:8.
Just as the preceding verse bestowed an additional favour on widows, the present one bestows an additional favour on divorced women. The injunction is particularly essential in the case of divorced women, because in moments of bitterness, which is the inevitable aftermath of a dissolved marriage, people are liable to be unjust and cruel towards their divorced wives.
2:232; 65:3.
Commentary:
Just as the preceding verse bestowed an additional favour on widows, the present one bestows an additional favour on divorced women. The injunction is particularly essential in the case of divorced women, because in moments of bitterness, which is the inevitable aftermath of a dissolved marriage, people are liable to be unjust and cruel towards their former wives. The verse warns them not to lose sight of the fear of God on such occasions and to act towards their former spouses not only with justice but with positive benevolence and kindness.
e
65:8.
191
正如上一节经文给寡妇以额外的恩惠那样, 这节经文给离婚的妇女以额外的恩惠。这一命令对离婚的妇女特别重要, 因为作为解除婚约后不可避免的恶果来说, 在痛苦的时刻人们总是会不公正和凶恶地对待他们离了婚的妻子的。
1
مَعْرُوْف کا لفظ قرآن مجید میں بہت دفعہ آتا ہے اور یہ عرف سے نکلا ہے اور اس کے معنے ہیں ’’پہچانا ہوا۔‘‘ مفرداتِ راغب میں لکھا ہے اَلْمَعْرُوْفُ اِسْمٌ لِّکُلِّ فِعْلٍ یُعْرَفُ بِالْعَقْلِ اَوِ الشَّرْعِ حُسْنُہٗ یعنی معروف ہر اس فعل کو کہتے ہیں کہ جس کی خوبی عقل و شرع سے پہچانی جائے۔ پس جب شرع کے لحاظ سے معروف ہو تو وہ مطابق قانون فعل کہلائے گا اور جب عقل عامہ سے اس کی خوبی پہچانی جائے تو اسے مطابق دستور کہیں گے۔ کیونکہ جس امر کی خوبی ہر انسان پہچانتا ہے اس کا رواج بنی نوع انسان میں پایا جاتا ہے۔ اور جب کسی امر کی خوبی خاص فرد کی عقل سے پہچانی جائے گی تو
2
مُطَلَّقَات سے حسنِ سلوک کو پھر دہرایا ہے جس کی وجہ یہ ہے کہ مطلقہ سے ناراضگی ہوتی ہے اس لئے اس کے ساتھ حسن سلوک کرنے کی طرف خاص طور پر توجہ دلانے کی ضرورت ہے۔ مسلمانوں پر تعجب ہے کہ اللہ تعالیٰ تو مطلقہ عورتوں سے علاوہ مہر کے سلوک کرنے کا ارشاد فرماتا ہے اور مسلمان عورتوں کے مہر تک بھی کھا جاتے ہیں۔ اگر اس حکم پر عمل کیا جائے تو کس قدر فساد اور جھگڑے دور ہو جائیں اور طلاق جو صرف مجبوری میں حلال ہے اس تلخی کے پیدا کرنے کا موجب نہ ہو۔ جس کا موجب وہ اب ہو رہی ہے۔ بلکہ دونوں فریق محسوس کریں کہ مجبوری سے علیحدگی اختیار کی گئی ہے ورنہ آپس میں تلخی یا بدمزگی نہیں ہے۔ اس
a
2:232; 65:3.
248
Commentary:
Just as the preceding verse bestowed an additional favour on widows, the present one bestows an additional favour on divorced women. The injunction is particularly essential in the case of divorced women, because in moments of bitterness, which is the inevitable aftermath of a dissolved marriage, people are liable to be unjust and cruel towards their former wives. The verse warns them not to lose sight of the fear of God on such occasions and to act towards their former spouses not only with justice but with positive benevolence and kindness.
b
2:242; 65:8.
299
Just as the preceding verse bestowed an additional favour on widows, the present one bestows an additional favour on divorced women. The injunction is particularly essential in the case of divorced women, because in moments of bitterness, which is the inevitable aftermath of a dissolved marriage, people are liable to be unjust and cruel towards their divorced wives.
كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ ءَايَٰتِهِۦ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَعْقِلُونَ
یعنی شریعت کے بیان میں یہ امر ہر جگہ مدّنظر رکھا گیا ہے کہ کل ضروری امور کے متعلق تعلیم آجائے اور ایسے رنگ میں تعلیم بیان کر دی جائے کہ انسان بدیوں اور کمزوریوں سے بچ جائیں۔ تَعْقِلُوْنَ کے یہی معنے ہیں۔
اٰ یَۃ کے معنے علامت کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن قرآن کریم میں کہیں خداتعالیٰ نے اپنی طرف توجہ دلانے والی باتوں کو کہیں ایمان کی طرف راہنمائی کرنے والی باتوں کو کہیں عذاب سے بچانے والی باتوں کو کہیں تمدن کا صحیح راستہ بتانے والی باتوں کو آیات کہا ہے۔ ہر جگہ اس کا ترجمہ علامت کرنا اردو میں ناممکن ہے۔ پس اس جگہ جو اصل مفہوم ہے یعنی وہ احکام جو صحیح تمدن کی طرف راہنمائی کرتے ہیں اسی کو ترجمہ میں رکھ دیا گیا ہے۔
Important Words:
تعقلون (you may understand) is derived from عقل for which see 2:45. The word also signifies the sense of binding and restraining.
Commentary:
The verse points out that the above commandments have been given so that people might learn to act wisely and by exercising restraint on themselves, refrain from breaking God’s behests.
3
یعنی شریعت کے بیان میں یہ امر ہر جگہ مدّنظر رکھا گیا ہے کہ کل ضروری امور کے متعلق تعلیم آجائے اور ایسے رنگ میں تعلیم بیان کر دی جائے کہ انسان بدیوں اور کمزوریوں سے بچ جائیں۔ تَعْقِلُوْنَ کے یہی معنے ہیں۔
4
اٰ یَۃ کے معنے علامت کے ہوتے ہیں۔ لیکن قرآن کریم میں کہیں خداتعالیٰ نے اپنی طرف توجہ دلانے والی باتوں کو کہیں ایمان کی طرف راہنمائی کرنے والی باتوں کو کہیں عذاب سے بچانے والی باتوں کو کہیں تمدن کا صحیح راستہ بتانے والی باتوں کو آیات کہا ہے۔ ہر جگہ اس کا ترجمہ علامت کرنا اردو میں ناممکن ہے۔ پس اس جگہ جو اصل مفہوم ہے یعنی وہ احکام جو صحیح تمدن کی طرف راہنمائی کرتے ہیں اسی کو ترجمہ میں رکھ دیا گیا ہے۔
249
Important Words:
تعقلون (you may understand) is derived from عقل for which see 2:45. The word also signifies the sense of binding and restraining.
Commentary:
The verse points out that the above commandments have been given so that people might learn to act wisely and by exercising restraint on themselves, refrain from breaking God’s behests.
۞ أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ خَرَجُوا۟ مِن دِيَٰرِهِمْ وَهُمْ أُلُوفٌ حَذَرَ ٱلْمَوْتِ فَقَالَ لَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ مُوتُوا۟ ثُمَّ أَحْيَٰهُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَذُو فَضْلٍ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ وَلَٰكِنَّ أَكْثَرَ ٱلنَّاسِ لَا يَشْكُرُونَ
5:27.
اَلَّذِیْنَ خَرَجُوْا مِنْ دِیَارِھِمْ سے مراد بنی اسرائیل ہیں جو فرعون کے ڈر کی وجہ سے مصر سے نکل آئے تھے۔ وَھُمْ اُلُوْفٌ میں بتایا کہ وہ ہزاروں تھے۔ اس سے بائیبل کے اس بیان کی تردید ہو جاتی ہے کہ بنی اسرائیل کی تعداد جو مصر سے نکلے تھے چھ لاکھ تین ہزار پانچ سو پچاس تھی۔ کیونکہ چھ لاکھ کا قافلہ بغیر زیادہ سامان کے بے آب و گیاہ جنگل میں سے سینکڑوں میل تک نہیں گزر سکتا۔
’’مرجاؤ‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ تمہاری نافرمانی کی وجہ سے تم سے فاتحانہ طاقتیں واپس لی جاتی ہیں۔ مگر بعد میں خداتعالیٰ نے معاف کر دیا اور ان کے غالب آنے کی قوتیں انہیں واپس دے دیں۔
5:27.
When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, the Israelites left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead (5:25).
The Bible represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view according to which they were only several thousand (History of the People of Israel, by Ernest Renan. p. 145, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174, by John Kitto). See also 2:61.
The Israelites left Egypt because their further stay in that country would have meant their total annihilation. Pharaoh had recourse to all sorts of means to destroy their manhood. See 2:50.
The reference is to the wandering in the wilderness of Sinai of the Israelites who had refused to march with Moses into Canaan until they perished in the wilderness and a new generation arose who, inspired with a new life, marched into the Promised Land under Joshua. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, "Then we raised you up after your death" (2:57).
5:27.
Commentary:
The commandments relating to conjugal relations were mentioned as an offshoot of the subject of جھاد (holy war) dealt with in 2:217 and the following verses. The Quran now reverts to the original subject and by way of re-introduction cites the example of the Israelites who had left the land of the Pharaohs for fear of death. Trodden under the foot of the tyrant, the children of Israel were then in a most abject condition, and the wise God, in His eternal wisdom, decreed that they should lead a life of ordeals in the wilderness before becoming fit for the great life that awaited them in the Promised Land. The words, Allah said to them: 'Die', point to the great truth that all life must be preceded by death, i.e. great trials and extraordinary sacrifices.
As mentioned above, the clause, those who went forth from their homes, refers to the Israelites who had gone forth from Egypt to escape persecution by Pharaoh. It was the fear of death which had made the Israelites migrate from the land (2:50).
The words, they were thousands, contradict the Bible which represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view (See History of the People of Israel, p. 145, by Ernest Renan, London, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174 by John Kitto, London, 1844). See also. 2:55.
The story of the exodus of the Israelites is briefly this. When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, they left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead, saying Go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit (5:25). The result was that they drew upon themselves the wrath of God, Who said to Moses, Verily, it shall be forbidden them for forty years; in distraction shall they wander through the land (5:27). The promise was thus put off for forty years and the children of Israel were left to wander in the wilderness until those who had refused to fight perished in the desert, whereafter the younger generation led by Joshua conquered the land. Thus it was that the people whom God had caused to perish had new life breathed into them. It is with reference to these events that the Quran uses the word "die" in the verse under comment. This very death, i.e. destruction of the rebellious and training of the youth through trials and ordeals, proved the forerunner of life. Elsewhere, the Quran says about the Israelites: Then We raised you up after your death (2:57).
It may also be noted here that from this verse onward, the Quran begins the description of تزکیة or means of national progress spoken of in 2:130, reference to "Signs" and "the Book" and "Wisdom" having already been made.
a
5:27.
5
اَلَّذِیْنَ خَرَجُوْا مِنْ دِیَارِھِمْ سے مراد بنی اسرائیل ہیں جو فرعون کے ڈر کی وجہ سے مصر سے نکل آئے تھے۔ وَھُمْ اُلُوْفٌ میں بتایا کہ وہ ہزاروں تھے۔ اس سے بائیبل کے اس بیان کی تردید ہو جاتی ہے کہ بنی اسرائیل کی تعداد جو مصر سے نکلے تھے چھ لاکھ تین ہزار پانچ سو پچاس تھی۔ کیونکہ چھ لاکھ کا قافلہ بغیر زیادہ سامان کے بے آب و گیاہ جنگل میں سے سینکڑوں میل تک نہیں گزر سکتا۔
6
’’مرجاؤ‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ تمہاری نافرمانی کی وجہ سے تم سے فاتحانہ طاقتیں واپس لی جاتی ہیں۔ مگر بعد میں خداتعالیٰ نے معاف کر دیا اور ان کے غالب آنے کی قوتیں انہیں واپس دے دیں۔
b
5:27.
250
Commentary:
The commandments relating to conjugal relations were mentioned as an offshoot of the subject of جھاد (holy war) dealt with in 2:217 and the following verses. The Quran now reverts to the original subject and by way of re-introduction cites the example of the Israelites who had left the land of the Pharaohs for fear of death. Trodden under the foot of the tyrant, the children of Israel were then in a most abject condition, and the wise God, in His eternal wisdom, decreed that they should lead a life of ordeals in the wilderness before becoming fit for the great life that awaited them in the Promised Land. The words, Allah said to them: 'Die', point to the great truth that all life must be preceded by death, i.e. great trials and extraordinary sacrifices.
As mentioned above, the clause, those who went forth from their homes, refers to the Israelites who had gone forth from Egypt to escape persecution by Pharaoh. It was the fear of death which had made the Israelites migrate from the land (2:50).
The words, they were thousands, contradict the Bible which represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view (See History of the People of Israel, p. 145, by Ernest Renan, London, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174 by John Kitto, London, 1844). See also. 2:55.
The story of the exodus of the Israelites is briefly this. When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, they left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead, saying Go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit (5:25). The result was that they drew upon themselves the wrath of God, Who said to Moses, Verily, it shall be forbidden them for forty years; in distraction shall they wander through the land (5:27). The promise was thus put off for forty years and the children of Israel were left to wander in the wilderness until those who had refused to fight perished in the desert, whereafter the younger generation led by Joshua conquered the land. Thus it was that the people whom God had caused to perish had new life breathed into them. It is with reference to these events that the Quran uses the word "die" in the verse under comment. This very death, i.e. destruction of the rebellious and training of the youth through trials and ordeals, proved the forerunner of life. Elsewhere, the Quran says about the Israelites: Then We raised you up after your death (2:57).
It may also be noted here that from this verse onward, the Quran begins the description of تزکیة or means of national progress spoken of in 2:130, reference to "Signs" and "the Book" and "Wisdom" having already been made.
a
5:27.
300
When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, the Israelites left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead (5:25).
301
The Bible represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view according to which they were only several thousand (History of the People of Israel, by Ernest Renan. p. 145, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174, by John Kitto). See also 2:61.
302
The Israelites left Egypt because their further stay in that country would have meant their total annihilation. Pharaoh had recourse to all sorts of means to destroy their manhood. See 2:50.
303
The reference is to the wandering in the wilderness of Sinai of the Israelites who had refused to march with Moses into Canaan until they perished in the wilderness and a new generation arose who, inspired with a new life, marched into the Promised Land under Joshua. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, "Then we raised you up after your death" (2:57).
وَقَٰتِلُوا۟ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ
2:191; 4:85.
2:191; 4:85.
The address is to the Muslims. They are told that a people who do not shed fear of death and are not prepared to sacrifice their all for the preservation of their national existence and honour, do not deserve to live. This is the secret of national progress which the Qur’an inculcates.
2:191; 4:85.
Commentary:
The clause, and fight in the cause of Allah, is addressed to Muslims, who are warned of the fate which overtook the Israelites when they refused to fight the enemy when called upon to do so by Moses. God tells Muslims that a people who fear death do not deserve to live. This is the first secret of national progress which the Quran inculcates, viz. that a people can live and prosper only if they shed the fear of death, and that those who are afraid of death die ignobly.
It is hardly necessary to point out here how well Muslims took this lesson to heart. When the well-equipped force of the Quraish came forth from Mecca to destroy the small and ill-equipped Muslim community of Medina, and the Holy Prophet consulted his followers as to whether they were prepared to face and fight the enemy, they told him that they would not behave like the companions of Moses who said to him, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit (5:25) but that they would willingly fight on his right and on his left and in his front and at his back, and the enemy would not reach him except over their corpses, and that they would unhesitatingly plunge their horses even into the raging sea, if he only wished them to do so. The tradition says that when the Holy Prophet heard these words from his Companions, his face beamed with joy and he said to them, "Then go forth and trust in Allah Who will be with you" (Tabari & Hisham).
The words "All-Hearing" and "All-Knowing" point out that though Muslims were weak and without equipment, yet the help of their Lord was with them, Who heard their prayers and knew their condition.
b
2:191; 4:85.
a
2:191; 4:85.
251
Commentary:
The clause, and fight in the cause of Allah, is addressed to Muslims, who are warned of the fate which overtook the Israelites when they refused to fight the enemy when called upon to do so by Moses. God tells Muslims that a people who fear death do not deserve to live. This is the first secret of national progress which the Quran inculcates, viz. that a people can live and prosper only if they shed the fear of death, and that those who are afraid of death die ignobly.
It is hardly necessary to point out here how well Muslims took this lesson to heart. When the well-equipped force of the Quraish came forth from Mecca to destroy the small and ill-equipped Muslim community of Medina, and the Holy Prophet consulted his followers as to whether they were prepared to face and fight the enemy, they told him that they would not behave like the companions of Moses who said to him, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit (5:25) but that they would willingly fight on his right and on his left and in his front and at his back, and the enemy would not reach him except over their corpses, and that they would unhesitatingly plunge their horses even into the raging sea, if he only wished them to do so. The tradition says that when the Holy Prophet heard these words from his Companions, his face beamed with joy and he said to them, "Then go forth and trust in Allah Who will be with you" (Tabari & Hisham).
The words "All-Hearing" and "All-Knowing" point out that though Muslims were weak and without equipment, yet the help of their Lord was with them, Who heard their prayers and knew their condition.
b
2:191; 4:85.
304
The address is to the Muslims. They are told that a people who do not shed fear of death and are not prepared to sacrifice their all for the preservation of their national existence and honour, do not deserve to live. This is the secret of national progress which the Qur’an inculcates.
مَّن ذَا ٱلَّذِى يُقْرِضُ ٱللَّهَ قَرْضًا حَسَنًا فَيُضَٰعِفَهُۥ لَهُۥٓ أَضْعَافًا كَثِيرَةً ۚ وَٱللَّهُ يَقْبِضُ وَيَبْصُۜطُ وَإِلَيْهِ تُرْجَعُونَ
57:12, 19; 64:18.
یُقْرِضُ اَقْرَضَ سے نکلا ہے اور اس کے معنے قرض دینے کے بھی ہیں اور کاٹ کر الگ کر دینے کے بھی۔ اور قَرْضًا کے معنے کاٹنے کے بھی ہیں اور قرض کے بھی‘ نیز یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ مصدر بمعنے اسم مفعول یعنی مُقْرَضٌ کے صیغہ میں استعمال ہوا ہو یعنی جو چیز کاٹ کر علیحدہ کر دی جائے۔ اس جگہ اللہ تعالیٰ کی نسبت چونکہ یہ الفاظ استعمال ہوئے ہیں اس لئے آخری معنے زیادہ مناسب ہیں۔ (ان معنوں کے لئے دیکھئے مفردات راغب)
57:12, 19; 64:18.
The Qur’an speaks of spending money in the cause of Allah as giving a loan to Him, meaning thereby that money spent for the promotion of righteous causes should not be regarded as money wasted.
57:12, 19; 64:18.
Important Words:
یقرض (will lend) is derived from اقرض which again is derived from قرض. They say قرض الشیء i.e. he cut or severed the thing.اقرضه means, he gave him a loan. اقرض فلانا means, he cut off for him a portion so that he may requite or recompense it. قرضmeans, the act of giving a loan; a loan itself; any good or evil act which brings reward or punishment (Lane).
یقبض (receives) is derived from قبض. They say قبض الشیء i.e. he got hold of it; he received it. قبض یدہ عنه means, he kept back or withdrew his hand from it. قبض الله رزقه means, God straitened his means and lessened his provision (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse gives the second means of national advancement, i.e. free expenditure in nation-saving and nation-building affairs. If a nation desires to rise and prosper, it must spend money freely for national purposes, which include helping the poor and the needy. The Quran speaks of spending money in the cause of Allah as giving a loan to God, meaning thereby that money spent in the cause of God should not be regarded as something wasted or even consumed. It should be considered as something given to God as a loan which He would return to the lender manifold. The word loan, however, should not cause any misunderstanding. God needs no loans, for He is not only Self-Sufficient, but is also the Supporter and Sustainer of all other beings and things. He has used the term to indicate that one who spends in the cause of Allah will receive an ample reward from Him; his money, as it were, will be returned to him, being multiplied many times.
The interrogative form in the clause, Who is it that will lend, is used by way of exhortation, and the words, a goodly loan, have been added to indicate that this money is to be spent with a willing and cheerful heart.
It should be noted that apart from specifically national expenditures, the spending of money to help the poor and the needy also is tantamount to giving a loan to God. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "God will say to the sinful man on the Day of Judgement, O son of man, I fell ill, but you paid Me no visit; I asked you for food, but you gave Me no food; I asked you for water but you gave Me no water. The man will say, O my Lord, when didst Thou fall ill that I did not visit Thee? When didst Thou ask for food that I did not give it to Thee? When didst Thou ask for water that I gave it Thee not?' God will say, O son of man, know you not that one of My servants fell ill and you did not pay him a visit, he asked you for food and you did not give it to him; and he asked you for water and you gave him no water" (Muslim, ch. on Birri Was-Silah). This shows that spending money for the poor and the needy is tantamount to giving money to God.
The words, Allah receives and enlarges, signify that God accepts the money spent in His cause and multiplies it exceedingly so that the reward a man gets is out of all proportion to what he spends. The words, and to Him shall you be made to return, have been added to point out that, though virtuous men get their reward even in this life, yet what is in store for them in the next is far greater.
c
57:12, 19; 64:18.
2
یُقْرِضُ اَقْرَضَ سے نکلا ہے اور اس کے معنے قرض دینے کے بھی ہیں اور کاٹ کر الگ کر دینے کے بھی۔ اور قَرْضًا کے معنے کاٹنے کے بھی ہیں اور قرض کے بھی‘ نیز یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ مصدر بمعنے اسم مفعول یعنی مُقْرَضٌ کے صیغہ میں استعمال ہوا ہو یعنی جو چیز کاٹ کر علیحدہ کر دی جائے۔ اس جگہ اللہ تعالیٰ کی نسبت چونکہ یہ الفاظ استعمال ہوئے ہیں اس لئے آخری معنے زیادہ مناسب ہیں۔ (ان معنوں کے لئے دیکھئے مفردات راغب)
a
57:12, 19; 64:18.
252
Important Words:
یقرض (will lend) is derived from اقرض which again is derived from قرض. They say قرض الشیء i.e. he cut or severed the thing.اقرضه means, he gave him a loan. اقرض فلانا means, he cut off for him a portion so that he may requite or recompense it. قرضmeans, the act of giving a loan; a loan itself; any good or evil act which brings reward or punishment (Lane).
یقبض (receives) is derived from قبض. They say قبض الشیء i.e. he got hold of it; he received it. قبض یدہ عنه means, he kept back or withdrew his hand from it. قبض الله رزقه means, God straitened his means and lessened his provision (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse gives the second means of national advancement, i.e. free expenditure in nation-saving and nation-building affairs. If a nation desires to rise and prosper, it must spend money freely for national purposes, which include helping the poor and the needy. The Quran speaks of spending money in the cause of Allah as giving a loan to God, meaning thereby that money spent in the cause of God should not be regarded as something wasted or even consumed. It should be considered as something given to God as a loan which He would return to the lender manifold. The word loan, however, should not cause any misunderstanding. God needs no loans, for He is not only Self-Sufficient, but is also the Supporter and Sustainer of all other beings and things. He has used the term to indicate that one who spends in the cause of Allah will receive an ample reward from Him; his money, as it were, will be returned to him, being multiplied many times.
The interrogative form in the clause, Who is it that will lend, is used by way of exhortation, and the words, a goodly loan, have been added to indicate that this money is to be spent with a willing and cheerful heart.
It should be noted that apart from specifically national expenditures, the spending of money to help the poor and the needy also is tantamount to giving a loan to God. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "God will say to the sinful man on the Day of Judgement, O son of man, I fell ill, but you paid Me no visit; I asked you for food, but you gave Me no food; I asked you for water but you gave Me no water. The man will say, O my Lord, when didst Thou fall ill that I did not visit Thee? When didst Thou ask for food that I did not give it to Thee? When didst Thou ask for water that I gave it Thee not?' God will say, O son of man, know you not that one of My servants fell ill and you did not pay him a visit, he asked you for food and you did not give it to him; and he asked you for water and you gave him no water" (Muslim, ch. on Birri Was-Silah). This shows that spending money for the poor and the needy is tantamount to giving money to God.
The words, Allah receives and enlarges, signify that God accepts the money spent in His cause and multiplies it exceedingly so that the reward a man gets is out of all proportion to what he spends. The words, and to Him shall you be made to return, have been added to point out that, though virtuous men get their reward even in this life, yet what is in store for them in the next is far greater.
c
57:12, 19; 64:18.
305
The Qur’an speaks of spending money in the cause of Allah as giving a loan to Him, meaning thereby that money spent for the promotion of righteous causes should not be regarded as money wasted.
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلْمَلَإِ مِنۢ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مُوسَىٰٓ إِذْ قَالُوا۟ لِنَبِىٍّ لَّهُمُ ٱبْعَثْ لَنَا مَلِكًا نُّقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ قَالَ هَلْ عَسَيْتُمْ إِن كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ أَلَّا تُقَٰتِلُوا۟ ۖ قَالُوا۟ وَمَا لَنَآ أَلَّا نُقَٰتِلَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَقَدْ أُخْرِجْنَا مِن دِيَٰرِنَا وَأَبْنَآئِنَا ۖ فَلَمَّا كُتِبَ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ تَوَلَّوْا۟ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا مِّنْهُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌۢ بِٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
4:78.
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
4:78.
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
4:78.
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
d
4:78.
3
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
4
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
5
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
6
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
a
4:78.
253
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
a
4:78.
306
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
وَقَالَ لَهُمْ نَبِيُّهُمْ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ قَدْ بَعَثَ لَكُمْ طَالُوتَ مَلِكًا ۚ قَالُوٓا۟ أَنَّىٰ يَكُونُ لَهُ ٱلْمُلْكُ عَلَيْنَا وَنَحْنُ أَحَقُّ بِٱلْمُلْكِ مِنْهُ وَلَمْ يُؤْتَ سَعَةً مِّنَ ٱلْمَالِ ۚ قَالَ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ ٱصْطَفَىٰهُ عَلَيْكُمْ وَزَادَهُۥ بَسْطَةً فِى ٱلْعِلْمِ وَٱلْجِسْمِ ۖ وَٱللَّهُ يُؤْتِى مُلْكَهُۥ مَن يَشَآءُ ۚ وَٱللَّهُ وَٰسِعٌ عَلِيمٌ
3:27.
طالوت سے مراد جدعون ہے اور یہ صفاتی نام ہے جو طَالَ سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے ہیں لمبا اور مضبوط ہو گیا اور جدعون کے معنے عبرانی زبان میں اپنے مادہ کے اعتبار سے گرانے یا کاٹنے کے ہیں اور جدعون ایسے شخص کو کہتے ہیں جو اپنے مخالف کو کاٹ ڈالتا اور زمین پر گرا دیتا ہے۔ بائبل میں بھی جدعون کو بہادر پہلوان کے نام سے پکارا گیا ہے (دیکھو قاضیوں باب۶ آیت۱۲) پس طالوت اور جدعون دونوں ہم معنی الفاظ ہیں۔
علاوہ اور معنوں کے مُلْـک کے معنے حکومت اور غلبہ کے بھی ہیں (اقرب) اَ نّٰی کے مندرجہ ذیل معنے ہیں۔ (۱) کَیْفَ کس طرح (۲) مِنْ اَیْنَ کہاں سے (۳) اَ یْنَ جہاں اور کہاں۔ اس صورت میں یہ دو فعلوں کو جزم دیتا ہے۔ (۴) حَتّٰی کب (اقرب) پس اس آیت کے معنے یہ ہوئے کہ اسے ہم پر حکومت کس طرح مل سکتی ہے یا یہ کہ اسے ہم پر حکومت کرنے کا حق کب حاصل ہوا؟ یا اُسے ہم پر حکومت کہاں سے حاصل ہوئی۔
مِنَ الْمَالِ‘ سَعَۃً کی صفت ہے۔ اس لئے ’’سَعَۃً مِّنَ الْمَالِ‘‘ کا صحیح ترجمہ مالی فراخی ہے۔
بَسْطَۃً کے معنے وسعت۔ فراخی اور کمال کے ہیں (اقرب)
اپنا ملک کہہ کر اِس طرف اشارہ فرمایا کہ جب حکومت خداتعالیٰ کی ہے تو حق دار وہ ہے جسے خداتعالیٰ مقرر کرے۔
3:27.
Talut is the attributive name of an Israelite king who lived about two hundred years before David and about the same number of years after Moses. Some Commentators of the Qur’an have wrongly identified Talut with Saul. The description of the Qur’an fits in more with Gideon (Judg. chs. 6-8) than with Saul. Gideon lived in about 1250 B.C. and the Bible calls him a "mighty man of valour" (Judg. 6: 12) which is the same as Talut. According to some Christian writers incidents related in this passage refer to two different periods which are separated from each other by the long interval of 200 years, and refer to this passage as an instance, as they say, of historical anachronisms to be found in the Qur’an. The passage does indeed refer to two different periods, but there is no anachronism in it. The Qur’an has here referred to both these periods. Its object in doing so is to show how the unification of the different tribes of Israel began in the time of Gideon, (i.e. Talut), two hundred years before Dav
3:27.
Important Words:
طالوت (Talut) is the attributive name of an Israelite king who lived about two hundred years before David and about the same number of years after Moses. Most commentators regard Talut to be a name of Hebrew origin and consider him to be synonymous with Saul (1. Sam. ch. 9). As Hebrew is only an offshoot of Arabic, the word Talut appears to be derived from the Arabic root طال i.e. he became tall or high___a description coinciding with the one given in the verse under comment viz. one increased abundantly in knowledge and body. It is, however, not right to identify Talut with Saul. The description of the Quran fits more with Gideon (Judg. chs. 6-8) than with Saul. Gideon lived in about 1250 B.C. and the Bible calls him a "mighty man of valour" (Judg. 6:12) which is the same as Talut.
Commentary:
There has been a difference of opinion as to the identity of the person to whom the name Talut has been applied. According to a number of Muslim commentators, Talut stands for Saul, and the passage refers to the reign of Saul. Christian writers have, however, taken exception to this view. According to them the incidents related in this passage refer to two different periods which are separated from each other by the long interval of 200 years; and these critics refer to this passage as an instance of historical anachronism, found in the Quran. The passage does indeed refer to two different periods, but if Christian critics had carefully thought over their own history, they would have seen that there is no confusion of dates in the passage in question and that the Quran has here referred to both these periods. Its object in doing so is to show how the unification of the different tribes of Israel began in the time of Gideon (i.e. Talut) two hundred years before David, and was finally consummated in the time of David.
In order to determine the identity of Talut, let us glance over the main incidents related in verse 247 to 252. These are as follows: 1. The people of the period to which Talut belongs had been driven forth from their homes and their children (2:247). 2. One who was not originally a king was appointed as such (2:248). 3. God helped the followers of this king, giving them the Talut as a token of His sovereignty (2:249). 4. The people were tried by means of water (2:250). 5. There existed a great disparity in numbers between these people and the enemy, and the trial reduced their number still further (ibid). 6. In spite of the small number of his followers, this king overcame the enemy (2:252).
Now some of these details do indeed apply to Saul, but there are others which do not. The key words which afford a clue to the identity of Talut are, Hast thou not heard of the chiefs of the children of Israel after Moses. The words "after Moses" indicate that the incident belongs to an early period when the Jews as a nation had just begun to take a definite shape in history. For two hundred years after Moses, the Israelites were divided into different tribes and had no king and no fighting force. In 1256 B.C., owing to their iniquity, God delivered them into the hands of the Midianites who plundered and ravaged them for seven long years, and they were compelled to take refuge in caves (Judg. 6:1, 2). This is why they are represented in the Quran as saying, we have been driven forth from our homes. The Midianites attacked them and carried away their sheep and oxen and asses, and destroyed their crops and pillaged them as far as Gaza (Judg. 6:4-6). The Israelites then cried to their Lord, and God raised among them a Prophet; and an angel of the Lord appeared to Gideon, appointed him king and promised him divine help. Then Gideon said to God, "Oh my Lord, wherewith shall I save Israel? Behold, my family is poor in Manasseh, and I am the least in my father’s house" (Judg. 6:15). This tallies with the description given in the Quran which represents the chiefs among the Israelites as saying with regard to the new king, How can he have sovereignty over us while we are better entitled to sovereignty than he and he is not given abundance of wealth (2:248). What makes the identification of Talut with Gideon still more certain is the fact that it was in the time of Gideon and not Saul that the Israelites were tried by means of water and the description of the trial as given in the Bible (Judg. 7:4-7) is the same as that of the Quran.
From Judg. 7:6, 7 we learn that after the aforesaid trial, there remained with Gideon only 300 men. It is interesting to note that a Companion of the Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "We were 313 men in the Battle of Badr, and this number corresponds to the number of men who followed Talut" (Tirmidhi, ch. on Siyar). Thus this tradition also lends support to the conclusion that Talut was no other than Gideon.
What further confirms the identity of Talut with Gideon is that the Hebrew word Gideon is identical in meaning with the Arabic word Talut. The former is derived from a root which in Hebrew means "to fell" (Enc. Bib.) or "to hew" (Jew. Enc.). Thus, Gideon means "one who cuts down his adversary and fells him to the ground" and the Bible itself speaks of Gideon as a "mighty man of valour" (Judg. 6:12), and we have already noted that in Arabic Tala means one who is tall and towers above others (see Important Words above).
The clause, how can he have sovereignty over us while we are better entitled to sovereignty than he, and he is not given abundance of wealth, indicates that the people raised two objections against Talut or Gideon: (1) that he did not belong to a highly placed family and was therefore not entitled to kingship, and (2) that he did not possess the requisite wealth for exercising influence. Both of these are plausible objections that are usually made by ordinary people of the world; but a chosen people guided by the will of the Just and Wise God must think otherwise. With them the real title to sovereignty is neither family status nor wealth but the personal qualities of a man; hence the clause, surely Allah has chosen him above you and has increased him abundantly in knowledge and body. The superiority of a man in physical and mental faculties coupled with knowledge and prowess must remain the basis for all title to rulership. And in the case of Talut the title had the additional strength of coinciding with the choice of God Who is the best and, in fact, the only true Judge of all titles.
c
3:27.
3
طالوت سے مراد جدعون ہے اور یہ صفاتی نام ہے جو طَالَ سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے ہیں لمبا اور مضبوط ہو گیا اور جدعون کے معنے عبرانی زبان میں اپنے مادہ کے اعتبار سے گرانے یا کاٹنے کے ہیں اور جدعون ایسے شخص کو کہتے ہیں جو اپنے مخالف کو کاٹ ڈالتا اور زمین پر گرا دیتا ہے۔ بائبل میں بھی جدعون کو بہادر پہلوان کے نام سے پکارا گیا ہے (دیکھو قاضیوں باب۶ آیت۱۲) پس طالوت اور جدعون دونوں ہم معنی الفاظ ہیں۔
4
علاوہ اور معنوں کے مُلْـک کے معنے حکومت اور غلبہ کے بھی ہیں (اقرب) اَ نّٰی کے مندرجہ ذیل معنے ہیں۔ (۱) کَیْفَ کس طرح (۲) مِنْ اَیْنَ کہاں سے (۳) اَ یْنَ جہاں اور کہاں۔ اس صورت میں یہ دو فعلوں کو جزم دیتا ہے۔ (۴) حَتّٰی کب (اقرب) پس اس آیت کے معنے یہ ہوئے کہ اسے ہم پر حکومت کس طرح مل سکتی ہے یا یہ کہ اسے ہم پر حکومت کرنے کا حق کب حاصل ہوا؟ یا اُسے ہم پر حکومت کہاں سے حاصل ہوئی۔
5
مِنَ الْمَالِ‘ سَعَۃً کی صفت ہے۔ اس لئے ’’سَعَۃً مِّنَ الْمَالِ‘‘ کا صحیح ترجمہ مالی فراخی ہے۔
6
بَسْطَۃً کے معنے وسعت۔ فراخی اور کمال کے ہیں (اقرب)
7
اپنا ملک کہہ کر اِس طرف اشارہ فرمایا کہ جب حکومت خداتعالیٰ کی ہے تو حق دار وہ ہے جسے خداتعالیٰ مقرر کرے۔
a
3:27.
254
Important Words:
طالوت (Talut) is the attributive name of an Israelite king who lived about two hundred years before David and about the same number of years after Moses. Most commentators regard Talut to be a name of Hebrew origin and consider him to be synonymous with Saul (1. Sam. ch. 9). As Hebrew is only an offshoot of Arabic, the word Talut appears to be derived from the Arabic root طال i.e. he became tall or high___a description coinciding with the one given in the verse under comment viz. one increased abundantly in knowledge and body. It is, however, not right to identify Talut with Saul. The description of the Quran fits more with Gideon (Judg. chs. 6-8) than with Saul. Gideon lived in about 1250 B.C. and the Bible calls him a "mighty man of valour" (Judg. 6:12) which is the same as Talut.
Commentary:
There has been a difference of opinion as to the identity of the person to whom the name Talut has been applied. According to a number of Muslim commentators, Talut stands for Saul, and the passage refers to the reign of Saul. Christian writers have, however, taken exception to this view. According to them the incidents related in this passage refer to two different periods which are separated from each other by the long interval of 200 years; and these critics refer to this passage as an instance of historical anachronism, found in the Quran. The passage does indeed refer to two different periods, but if Christian critics had carefully thought over their own history, they would have seen that there is no confusion of dates in the passage in question and that the Quran has here referred to both these periods. Its object in doing so is to show how the unification of the different tribes of Israel began in the time of Gideon (i.e. Talut) two hundred years before David, and was finally consummated in the time of David.
In order to determine the identity of Talut, let us glance over the main incidents related in verse 247 to 252. These are as follows: 1. The people of the period to which Talut belongs had been driven forth from their homes and their children (2:247). 2. One who was not originally a king was appointed as such (2:248). 3. God helped the followers of this king, giving them the Talut as a token of His sovereignty (2:249). 4. The people were tried by means of water (2:250). 5. There existed a great disparity in numbers between these people and the enemy, and the trial reduced their number still further (ibid). 6. In spite of the small number of his followers, this king overcame the enemy (2:252).
Now some of these details do indeed apply to Saul, but there are others which do not. The key words which afford a clue to the identity of Talut are, Hast thou not heard of the chiefs of the children of Israel after Moses. The words "after Moses" indicate that the incident belongs to an early period when the Jews as a nation had just begun to take a definite shape in history. For two hundred years after Moses, the Israelites were divided into different tribes and had no king and no fighting force. In 1256 B.C., owing to their iniquity, God delivered them into the hands of the Midianites who plundered and ravaged them for seven long years, and they were compelled to take refuge in caves (Judg. 6:1, 2). This is why they are represented in the Quran as saying, we have been driven forth from our homes. The Midianites attacked them and carried away their sheep and oxen and asses, and destroyed their crops and pillaged them as far as Gaza (Judg. 6:4-6). The Israelites then cried to their Lord, and God raised among them a Prophet; and an angel of the Lord appeared to Gideon, appointed him king and promised him divine help. Then Gideon said to God, "Oh my Lord, wherewith shall I save Israel? Behold, my family is poor in Manasseh, and I am the least in my father’s house" (Judg. 6:15). This tallies with the description given in the Quran which represents the chiefs among the Israelites as saying with regard to the new king, How can he have sovereignty over us while we are better entitled to sovereignty than he and he is not given abundance of wealth (2:248). What makes the identification of Talut with Gideon still more certain is the fact that it was in the time of Gideon and not Saul that the Israelites were tried by means of water and the description of the trial as given in the Bible (Judg. 7:4-7) is the same as that of the Quran.
From Judg. 7:6, 7 we learn that after the aforesaid trial, there remained with Gideon only 300 men. It is interesting to note that a Companion of the Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "We were 313 men in the Battle of Badr, and this number corresponds to the number of men who followed Talut" (Tirmidhi, ch. on Siyar). Thus this tradition also lends support to the conclusion that Talut was no other than Gideon.
What further confirms the identity of Talut with Gideon is that the Hebrew word Gideon is identical in meaning with the Arabic word Talut. The former is derived from a root which in Hebrew means "to fell" (Enc. Bib.) or "to hew" (Jew. Enc.). Thus, Gideon means "one who cuts down his adversary and fells him to the ground" and the Bible itself speaks of Gideon as a "mighty man of valour" (Judg. 6:12), and we have already noted that in Arabic Tala means one who is tall and towers above others (see Important Words above).
The clause, how can he have sovereignty over us while we are better entitled to sovereignty than he, and he is not given abundance of wealth, indicates that the people raised two objections against Talut or Gideon: (1) that he did not belong to a highly placed family and was therefore not entitled to kingship, and (2) that he did not possess the requisite wealth for exercising influence. Both of these are plausible objections that are usually made by ordinary people of the world; but a chosen people guided by the will of the Just and Wise God must think otherwise. With them the real title to sovereignty is neither family status nor wealth but the personal qualities of a man; hence the clause, surely Allah has chosen him above you and has increased him abundantly in knowledge and body. The superiority of a man in physical and mental faculties coupled with knowledge and prowess must remain the basis for all title to rulership. And in the case of Talut the title had the additional strength of coinciding with the choice of God Who is the best and, in fact, the only true Judge of all titles.
a
3:27.
307
Talut is the attributive name of an Israelite king who lived about two hundred years before David and about the same number of years after Moses. Some Commentators of the Qur’an have wrongly identified Talut with Saul. The description of the Qur’an fits in more with Gideon (Judg. chs. 6-8) than with Saul. Gideon lived in about 1250 B.C. and the Bible calls him a "mighty man of valour" (Judg. 6: 12) which is the same as Talut. According to some Christian writers incidents related in this passage refer to two different periods which are separated from each other by the long interval of 200 years, and refer to this passage as an instance, as they say, of historical anachronisms to be found in the Qur’an. The passage does indeed refer to two different periods, but there is no anachronism in it. The Qur’an has here referred to both these periods. Its object in doing so is to show how the unification of the different tribes of Israel began in the time of Gideon, (i.e. Talut), two hundred years before Dav
وَقَالَ لَهُمْ نَبِيُّهُمْ إِنَّ ءَايَةَ مُلْكِهِۦٓ أَن يَأْتِيَكُمُ ٱلتَّابُوتُ فِيهِ سَكِينَةٌ مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ وَبَقِيَّةٌ مِّمَّا تَرَكَ ءَالُ مُوسَىٰ وَءَالُ هَٰرُونَ تَحْمِلُهُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ ۚ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً لَّكُمْ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
تَابُوْت (Tabut) 意指: (1) 箱子或盒子; (2) 胸腔、胸部、腹部或肋骨以及他们内部包含的。例如, 心脏等等的东西 (Lane); (3) 心即知识、智慧和宁静的储藏室 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。注释者们对 تَابُوْت (Tabut) 这个字的意义有不同看法。«圣经»中把它作 “方舟” 或 “约柜” 解, 但是 «古兰经» 中的描述肯定地表明, 此间这字的意义是 “心” 或 “腹”。这节经文描写 تَابُوْت 这个字说, “从养主那里来的宁静的心境; ”不能用作 “一只方舟” 解; 因为, «圣经» 中谈及的那只方舟, 非但不能给别人以和平和宁静, 而且也不能保护以色列人不遭受失败, 也不能保护它自己, 因为被敌人带走了。即使在各次战役中带着方舟走的扫罗 (Saul), 也屡受惨败, 连敌人也觉得他可怜, 最后遭遇到不光采的结局。这样的一只方舟从未能使古以色列人有什么宁静。安拉赐给他们的是充满了勇气和毅力的心, 因此, 在所述及的宁静的心境降给他们之后, 他们成功地抵御了敌人的攻击, 并使他们遭到沉重的失败。
安拉给以色列人的另一恩赐, 在传下来的 “精神遗物”一词中谈及。安拉使他们心里充满高贵品质, 这是他们的祖先穆撒 (摩西) 和哈融 (哈伦) 子孙的特点。穆撒和哈融的子孙传下来的, 不是物质的东西, 而是他们伟大的祖先作为遗产传给他们的良好道德品质。
تَابُوْت کے عام معنے تو صندوق کے اور کشتی کے ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) لیکن استعارۃ ً اسے دل کے معنٰی میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ مفردات راغب میں ہے قِیْلَ عِبَارَۃٌ عَنِ الْقَلْبِ وَالسَّکِیْنَۃِ وَ عَمَّا فِیْہِ مِنَ الْعِلْمِ یعنی کبھی لفظ تابوت کو استعارۃ ًدل کے معنے میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ الفاظ قرآنیہ صاف دلالت کر رہے ہیں کہ اس جگہ تابوت سے مراد دل ہے۔ کیونکہ فرماتا ہے۔ اس تابوت میں تمہارے رب کی طرف سے سکینت ہے۔ اب یہ ظاہر ہے کہ سکینت دل میں ہوتی ہے نہ کہ صندوقوں میں۔ اسی طرح اس تابوت کے متعلق فرماتا ہے تَحْمِلُہُ الْمَلٰٓئِکَۃُ فرشتے اسے اٹھائے ہ
Tabut means, (1) a chest or box; (2) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (3) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat). Commentators have differed about the significance of the word Tabut and the Bible mentions it as an ark or chest, and the description given in the Qur’an definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom." The description of the Tabut in the verse "wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord" cannot apply to an ark; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, as it was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelite
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites is referred to in the word "legacy." God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities, which characterised their ancestors, the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist in any material things but meant the good moral qualities with which they were endowed as the heritage of their great ancestors.
Important Words:
التابوت (heart) is derived from تاب i.e. he returned; he returned to God; he repented; he left off the way of sin and began to tread the path of rectitude. التابوت means: (1) a chest or box, as things are repeatedly taken out of, and returned to, it; (2) a coffin or a bier; (3) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (4) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat).
سکینة (tranquillity) is derived from سکن i.e. it became calm and tranquil. سکینة means, peace, tranquillity, calmness, freedom from agitation and disturbance (Aqrab & Lane).
بقیة (legacy) is derived from بقی i.e. he or it remained behind; or he or it continued or lasted for long or forever. بقیة means, that which remains behind, i.e. legacy; remainder; remains; remnant; residue; relic; the best portion of a thing, as it is always the best part of a thing that survives. فلان بقیة القوم means, such a one is the best and the most excellent of the party (Lane).
Commentary:
Though commentators have differed about the significance of the word تابوت and the Bible mentions it as an "ark" or chest, the description of the Quran definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom.'' The words of the Quran are: wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord. Now this description cannot apply to an ark or a chest; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, and was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns, suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelites. What God gave them was a heart full of tranquillity which was aided by angels who buoyed up the Israelites and filled their hearts with courage and perseverance so that, after the coming of the said tranquillity, they successfully resisted the attacks of the enemy and inflicted heavy defeats on them.
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites has been referred to in the word بقیة or legacy. God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities which characterized their ancestors, the people or the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist of any material things but referred to the good qualities which they were given as the heritage of their great ancestors. This heritage was similar to the one to which reference has been made in the words, that (he) may be heir to me and to the House of Jacob (19: 7). Evidently, it is not a material heritage but a spiritual and moral heritage that is mentioned in this verse. Similarly, the followers of Gideon were imbued with a spiritual and moral بقیة i.e. such noble attributes of Moses and Aaron and their descendants as God had endowed them with. It was a sign that it was God Who had set up Gideon as king over the tribes of Israel so that he might protect them against the ravages of their enemy and breathe into them a martial spirit, a work which saw its consummation in the days of David.
192
تَابُوْت (Tabut) 意指: (1) 箱子或盒子; (2) 胸腔、胸部、腹部或肋骨以及他们内部包含的。例如, 心脏等等的东西 (Lane); (3) 心即知识、智慧和宁静的储藏室 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。注释者们对 تَابُوْت (Tabut) 这个字的意义有不同看法。«圣经»中把它作 “方舟” 或 “约柜” 解, 但是 «古兰经» 中的描述肯定地表明, 此间这字的意义是 “心” 或 “腹”。这节经文描写 تَابُوْت 这个字说, “从养主那里来的宁静的心境; ”不能用作 “一只方舟” 解; 因为, «圣经» 中谈及的那只方舟, 非但不能给别人以和平和宁静, 而且也不能保护以色列人不遭受失败, 也不能保护它自己, 因为被敌人带走了。即使在各次战役中带着方舟走的扫罗 (Saul), 也屡受惨败, 连敌人也觉得他可怜, 最后遭遇到不光采的结局。这样的一只方舟从未能使古以色列人有什么宁静。安拉赐给他们的是充满了勇气和毅力的心, 因此, 在所述及的宁静的心境降给他们之后, 他们成功地抵御了敌人的攻击, 并使他们遭到沉重的失败。
193
安拉给以色列人的另一恩赐, 在传下来的 “精神遗物”一词中谈及。安拉使他们心里充满高贵品质, 这是他们的祖先穆撒 (摩西) 和哈融 (哈伦) 子孙的特点。穆撒和哈融的子孙传下来的, 不是物质的东西, 而是他们伟大的祖先作为遗产传给他们的良好道德品质。
1
تَابُوْت کے عام معنے تو صندوق کے اور کشتی کے ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) لیکن استعارۃ ً اسے دل کے معنٰی میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ مفردات راغب میں ہے قِیْلَ عِبَارَۃٌ عَنِ الْقَلْبِ وَالسَّکِیْنَۃِ وَ عَمَّا فِیْہِ مِنَ الْعِلْمِ یعنی کبھی لفظ تابوت کو استعارۃ ًدل کے معنے میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ الفاظ قرآنیہ صاف دلالت کر رہے ہیں کہ اس جگہ تابوت سے مراد دل ہے۔ کیونکہ فرماتا ہے۔ اس تابوت میں تمہارے رب کی طرف سے سکینت ہے۔ اب یہ ظاہر ہے کہ سکینت دل میں ہوتی ہے نہ کہ صندوقوں میں۔ اسی طرح اس تابوت کے متعلق فرماتا ہے تَحْمِلُہُ الْمَلٰٓئِکَۃُ فرشتے اسے اٹھائے ہ
255
Important Words:
التابوت (heart) is derived from تاب i.e. he returned; he returned to God; he repented; he left off the way of sin and began to tread the path of rectitude. التابوت means: (1) a chest or box, as things are repeatedly taken out of, and returned to, it; (2) a coffin or a bier; (3) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (4) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat).
سکینة (tranquillity) is derived from سکن i.e. it became calm and tranquil. سکینة means, peace, tranquillity, calmness, freedom from agitation and disturbance (Aqrab & Lane).
بقیة (legacy) is derived from بقی i.e. he or it remained behind; or he or it continued or lasted for long or forever. بقیة means, that which remains behind, i.e. legacy; remainder; remains; remnant; residue; relic; the best portion of a thing, as it is always the best part of a thing that survives. فلان بقیة القوم means, such a one is the best and the most excellent of the party (Lane).
Commentary:
Though commentators have differed about the significance of the word تابوت and the Bible mentions it as an "ark" or chest, the description of the Quran definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom.'' The words of the Quran are: wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord. Now this description cannot apply to an ark or a chest; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, and was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns, suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelites. What God gave them was a heart full of tranquillity which was aided by angels who buoyed up the Israelites and filled their hearts with courage and perseverance so that, after the coming of the said tranquillity, they successfully resisted the attacks of the enemy and inflicted heavy defeats on them.
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites has been referred to in the word بقیة or legacy. God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities which characterized their ancestors, the people or the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist of any material things but referred to the good qualities which they were given as the heritage of their great ancestors. This heritage was similar to the one to which reference has been made in the words, that (he) may be heir to me and to the House of Jacob (19: 7). Evidently, it is not a material heritage but a spiritual and moral heritage that is mentioned in this verse. Similarly, the followers of Gideon were imbued with a spiritual and moral بقیة i.e. such noble attributes of Moses and Aaron and their descendants as God had endowed them with. It was a sign that it was God Who had set up Gideon as king over the tribes of Israel so that he might protect them against the ravages of their enemy and breathe into them a martial spirit, a work which saw its consummation in the days of David.
308
Tabut means, (1) a chest or box; (2) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (3) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat). Commentators have differed about the significance of the word Tabut and the Bible mentions it as an ark or chest, and the description given in the Qur’an definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom." The description of the Tabut in the verse "wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord" cannot apply to an ark; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, as it was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelite
309
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites is referred to in the word "legacy." God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities, which characterised their ancestors, the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist in any material things but meant the good moral qualities with which they were endowed as the heritage of their great ancestors.
فَلَمَّا فَصَلَ طَالُوتُ بِٱلْجُنُودِ قَالَ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ مُبْتَلِيكُم بِنَهَرٍ فَمَن شَرِبَ مِنْهُ فَلَيْسَ مِنِّى وَمَن لَّمْ يَطْعَمْهُ فَإِنَّهُۥ مِنِّىٓ إِلَّا مَنِ ٱغْتَرَفَ غُرْفَةًۢ بِيَدِهِۦ ۚ فَشَرِبُوا۟ مِنْهُ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا مِّنْهُمْ ۚ فَلَمَّا جَاوَزَهُۥ هُوَ وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ مَعَهُۥ قَالُوا۟ لَا طَاقَةَ لَنَا ٱلْيَوْمَ بِجَالُوتَ وَجُنُودِهِۦ ۚ قَالَ ٱلَّذِينَ يَظُنُّونَ أَنَّهُم مُّلَٰقُوا۟ ٱللَّهِ كَم مِّن فِئَةٍ قَلِيلَةٍ غَلَبَتْ فِئَةً كَثِيرَةًۢ بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ مَعَ ٱلصَّٰبِرِينَ
3:124; 8:66.
فَصَلَ الرَّجُلُ عَنِ الْبَلْدَۃِ کے معنے ہیں خَرَجَ مِنْہُ۔ شہر سے نکلا۔ (اقرب)
نَھَر کا ترجمہ ندی کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن ھَاء کی زبر سے جب یہ لفظ ہو تو اس کے دو معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) ندی (۲) فراخی اور وسعت (مفردات) چنانچہ کہتے ہیں۔ نَھَرٌ نَھِرٌ بہت پانی والی ندی (مفردات) اس آیت میں دونوں معنے ہی لگ سکتے ہیں۔ اگر فراخی اور وسعت کے معنے کیے جائیں تو آیت کا یہ مطلب ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بادشاہ کے ذریعہ سے فوجیوں کو اطلاع دی کہ تمہارا امتحان مال و دولت سے لیا جائے گا۔ اگر تم مال و دولت کے پیچھے پڑ گئے تو خداتعالیٰ کا کام نہ کر سکو گے اور اگر تم مال و دولت سے متاثر نہ ہوئے تو تم کو کامیابی ہوگی۔ جیسا کہ پہلے نوٹ میں بتایا جا چکا ہے۔ طالوت سے مراد جدعو
3:124; 8:66.
The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) To afford the marching force some essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; (2) To make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier for a person to withhold himself from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. See Judg. 7: 5, 6. The word Nahar also means "plenty." In this sense of the word the verse signifies that they would be tried by "plenty;" those who succumbed to its temptations would no longer be fit to carry on God’s work, but those who used it with restraint would achieve success.
Jalut is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who are unruly and go about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (I Sam. 17: 4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits," or "a leader" or "a giant" (Enc. Bib.; Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Qur’an appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
3:124; 8:66.
Important Words:
نـھر (river). The verb نـھر means, it flowed with force. They say نـھر الدام i.e. the blood poured forth with force. نـھر الماء means, the water poured forth in the land and cut out a channel for itself. النـھر (an-nahr) means, a body of flowing water, i.e. stream or river; channel through which such water flows. النھر (an-nahr) means, (1) plenty and abundance; (2) a river channel; (3) a river (Aqrab).
الجنود (forces) is the plural of الجـند. They say جند الجنود i.e. he collected or gathered together his forces. الجند means, a force or an army ; helpers (Aqrab).
جالوت (Jalut) is derived from جال i.e. he ran about without stopping. They say جال الفرس فی المیدان i.e. the horse galloped about in the field, sometimes going this way and sometimes that way. جال القوم جولة means, the people drew back and then made a joint onslaught. جال بعضھم علی بعض means, they assailed or assaulted one another in battle, etc. (Aqrab & Taj). Thus جالوت is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who is unruly and moves about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (1 Sam. 17:4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits" or "a leader or a giant" (Enc. Bib. and Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Quran appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
Commentary:
Self-control and discipline are the key to most successes, and possession of these qualities is necessary to successfully meet God’s trials. The present verse speaks of one such trial. The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) to afford the marching force an essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; and (2) to make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier to withhold from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. The Bible mentions the incident in Judg. 7:5-6.
The concluding clause, i.e. how many a small party has triumphed over a large party by Allah’s command, contains a mighty lesson of hope for the righteous. When God wills a thing, numbers do not matter. The truth of this statement has been borne out by history in all ages.
The Jalut spoken of in this verse does not signify a person but a people, while the word جنود (forces) points to the helpers and associates of these people. The Bible refers to Jalut under the name of Midianites who pillaged and harassed the Israelites and destroyed their land for several years (Judg. 6:1-6). The Amalekites and all the eastern tribes assisted the Midianites in their raids (Judg. 6:1) and formed "the forces" referred to in the verse.
a
3:124; 8:66.
1
فَصَلَ الرَّجُلُ عَنِ الْبَلْدَۃِ کے معنے ہیں خَرَجَ مِنْہُ۔ شہر سے نکلا۔ (اقرب)
2
نَھَر کا ترجمہ ندی کیا گیا ہے۔ لیکن ھَاء کی زبر سے جب یہ لفظ ہو تو اس کے دو معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) ندی (۲) فراخی اور وسعت (مفردات) چنانچہ کہتے ہیں۔ نَھَرٌ نَھِرٌ بہت پانی والی ندی (مفردات) اس آیت میں دونوں معنے ہی لگ سکتے ہیں۔ اگر فراخی اور وسعت کے معنے کیے جائیں تو آیت کا یہ مطلب ہوگا کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے بادشاہ کے ذریعہ سے فوجیوں کو اطلاع دی کہ تمہارا امتحان مال و دولت سے لیا جائے گا۔ اگر تم مال و دولت کے پیچھے پڑ گئے تو خداتعالیٰ کا کام نہ کر سکو گے اور اگر تم مال و دولت سے متاثر نہ ہوئے تو تم کو کامیابی ہوگی۔ جیسا کہ پہلے نوٹ میں بتایا جا چکا ہے۔ طالوت سے مراد جدعو
a
3:124; 8:66.
256
Important Words:
نـھر (river). The verb نـھر means, it flowed with force. They say نـھر الدام i.e. the blood poured forth with force. نـھر الماء means, the water poured forth in the land and cut out a channel for itself. النـھر (an-nahr) means, a body of flowing water, i.e. stream or river; channel through which such water flows. النھر (an-nahr) means, (1) plenty and abundance; (2) a river channel; (3) a river (Aqrab).
الجنود (forces) is the plural of الجـند. They say جند الجنود i.e. he collected or gathered together his forces. الجند means, a force or an army ; helpers (Aqrab).
جالوت (Jalut) is derived from جال i.e. he ran about without stopping. They say جال الفرس فی المیدان i.e. the horse galloped about in the field, sometimes going this way and sometimes that way. جال القوم جولة means, the people drew back and then made a joint onslaught. جال بعضھم علی بعض means, they assailed or assaulted one another in battle, etc. (Aqrab & Taj). Thus جالوت is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who is unruly and moves about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (1 Sam. 17:4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits" or "a leader or a giant" (Enc. Bib. and Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Quran appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
Commentary:
Self-control and discipline are the key to most successes, and possession of these qualities is necessary to successfully meet God’s trials. The present verse speaks of one such trial. The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) to afford the marching force an essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; and (2) to make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier to withhold from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. The Bible mentions the incident in Judg. 7:5-6.
The concluding clause, i.e. how many a small party has triumphed over a large party by Allah’s command, contains a mighty lesson of hope for the righteous. When God wills a thing, numbers do not matter. The truth of this statement has been borne out by history in all ages.
The Jalut spoken of in this verse does not signify a person but a people, while the word جنود (forces) points to the helpers and associates of these people. The Bible refers to Jalut under the name of Midianites who pillaged and harassed the Israelites and destroyed their land for several years (Judg. 6:1-6). The Amalekites and all the eastern tribes assisted the Midianites in their raids (Judg. 6:1) and formed "the forces" referred to in the verse.
a
3:124; 8:66.
310
The exception of a handful of water was made with a twofold purpose: (1) To afford the marching force some essential physical relief by permitting them to moisten their parched throats, but at the same time to prevent them from drinking freely, which would have damped their spirits and made them negligent of the enemy; (2) To make the trial all the more tantalizing, for in many cases it is easier for a person to withhold himself from a thing altogether than to use it in a strictly limited measure. See Judg. 7: 5, 6. The word Nahar also means "plenty." In this sense of the word the verse signifies that they would be tried by "plenty;" those who succumbed to its temptations would no longer be fit to carry on God’s work, but those who used it with restraint would achieve success.
310A
Jalut is an attributive name meaning, a person or a people who are unruly and go about attacking and assaulting others. In the Bible the parallel name is Goliath (I Sam. 17: 4) which means, "running, ravaging and destroying spirits," or "a leader" or "a giant" (Enc. Bib.; Jew. Enc.). The Bible uses the name about one individual but really the word signifies a party of ruthless freebooters, though it may also be applied to certain individuals symbolizing the characteristics of the party. The Qur’an appears to have used it in both these senses in the verses under comment.
وَلَمَّا بَرَزُوا۟ لِجَالُوتَ وَجُنُودِهِۦ قَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَآ أَفْرِغْ عَلَيْنَا صَبْرًا وَثَبِّتْ أَقْدَامَنَا وَٱنصُرْنَا عَلَى ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ
3:148, 201; 7:127.
2:287; 3:148.
Jalut spoken of in this verse does not signify a person but a people, while the word "forces" points to the helpers and associates of these people. The Bible refers to Jalut under the name of Midianites who pillaged and harassed the Israelites and destroyed their land for several years (Judg. 6: 1-6). The Amalekites and all the eastern tribes assisted the Midianites in their raids (Judg. 6: 3) and formed "the forces" referred to in the verse.
3:148, 201; 7:127.
2:287; 3:148.
Commentary:
The trial by water referred to in the preceding verse and the subsequent exhortation mentioned in the concluding clause of that verse seem to have filled the Israelites with hope and courage. Consequently their prayer in the verse under comment does not betray a defeatist tendency as heretofore shown by them, but a buoyant spirit of hope and good cheer.
b
3:148, 201; 7:127.
c
2:287; 3:148.
a
3:148, 201; 7:127.
b
2:287; 3:148.
257
Commentary:
The trial by water referred to in the preceding verse and the subsequent exhortation mentioned in the concluding clause of that verse seem to have filled the Israelites with hope and courage. Consequently their prayer in the verse under comment does not betray a defeatist tendency as heretofore shown by them, but a buoyant spirit of hope and good cheer.
a
3:148, 201; 7:127.
b
2:287; 3:148.
311
Jalut spoken of in this verse does not signify a person but a people, while the word "forces" points to the helpers and associates of these people. The Bible refers to Jalut under the name of Midianites who pillaged and harassed the Israelites and destroyed their land for several years (Judg. 6: 1-6). The Amalekites and all the eastern tribes assisted the Midianites in their raids (Judg. 6: 3) and formed "the forces" referred to in the verse.
فَهَزَمُوهُم بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ وَقَتَلَ دَاوُۥدُ جَالُوتَ وَءَاتَىٰهُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُلْكَ وَٱلْحِكْمَةَ وَعَلَّمَهُۥ مِمَّا يَشَآءُ ۗ وَلَوْلَا دَفْعُ ٱللَّهِ ٱلنَّاسَ بَعْضَهُم بِبَعْضٍ لَّفَسَدَتِ ٱلْأَرْضُ وَلَٰكِنَّ ٱللَّهَ ذُو فَضْلٍ عَلَى ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ
جیسا کہ ہم اوپر بیان کر چکے ہیں پہلی آیات میں جدعون کا واقعہ بیان کیا گیا ہے۔ اب ان آیات میں حضرت داؤد علیہ السلام کا ذکر کیا گیا ہے اس کی وجہ یہ ہے کہ حضرت داؤد علیہ السلام کا واقعہ جدعون کے واقعہ سے بہت کچھ ملتا ہے۔ جدعون کے وقت میں فلسطینیوں نے اسرائیل کو فلسطین سے نکالنے کی کوشش کی تھی۔ لیکن وہ ابتدائی کوشش تھی جو حضرت داؤدؑ کے زمانہ میں آکر ختم ہوئی۔ پس اس واقعہ کو مشابہت مضمون کی وجہ سے اس کے ساتھ بیان کیا گیا ہے۔ ورنہ پہلا جدعون کا واقعہ ہے اور یہ داؤدؑ کا واقعہ ہے اور دونوں میں دو سو سال کا فاصلہ ہے۔
اب ایک سوال حل طلب رہ جاتا ہے اور وہ یہ کہ بائبل کے رو سے د
22:41.
Talut or Gideon was able to defeat Jalut or the Midianites but their overwhelming defeat to which the verse refers as the killing of Jalut came in the time of David about two hundred years afterwards. The Bible speaks of the man defeated by David as Goliath (1 Sam. 17: 4), which is similar to Jalut. Probably, the attributive name given by the Qur’an to the people was also borne by their leader in the time of David.
These words give in a nutshell the whole philosophy of all wars of truth and justice. War should be resorted to only as a means of checking disorder and restoring peace and not for creating disorder and breaking peace and depriving weak nations of freedom.
22:41.
Commentary:
Talut or Gideon was able to defeat Jalut or the Midianites and curb their rising spirits, but their crushing defeat to which the verse refers as the killing of Jalut came in the time of David about two hundred years afterwards. This is why, whereas the defeat of Jalut by Talut has been spoken of by the Quran as ھزم i.e. routing, the complete crushing of their power has been referred to by the world قتل i.e. killing. The Bible speaks of the man defeated by David as Goliath (1 Sam. 17:4), which is similar to Jalut. Probably the attributive name given by the Quran to the people was also borne by their leader in the time of David.
The last clause of the verse, i.e. and had it not been for Allah’s repelling men, some of them by the others, the earth would have become filled with disorder, gives, in a nutshell, the whole philosophy of all wars of truth and justice. War should be resorted to only as a means of checking disorder and restoring peace, and not for creating disorder and breaking peace. The clause also serves as a criterion between Muslims and their adversaries and beautifully points to the party destined for final victory in the struggle.
a
22:41.
194
这些字概括地说出了一切真理和正义战争的全部哲理。战争只能作为制止混乱而恢复和平的一种手段, 而不能作为制造混乱而破坏和平以及剥夺弱小国家自由的手段。
1
جیسا کہ ہم اوپر بیان کر چکے ہیں پہلی آیات میں جدعون کا واقعہ بیان کیا گیا ہے۔ اب ان آیات میں حضرت داؤد علیہ السلام کا ذکر کیا گیا ہے اس کی وجہ یہ ہے کہ حضرت داؤد علیہ السلام کا واقعہ جدعون کے واقعہ سے بہت کچھ ملتا ہے۔ جدعون کے وقت میں فلسطینیوں نے اسرائیل کو فلسطین سے نکالنے کی کوشش کی تھی۔ لیکن وہ ابتدائی کوشش تھی جو حضرت داؤدؑ کے زمانہ میں آکر ختم ہوئی۔ پس اس واقعہ کو مشابہت مضمون کی وجہ سے اس کے ساتھ بیان کیا گیا ہے۔ ورنہ پہلا جدعون کا واقعہ ہے اور یہ داؤدؑ کا واقعہ ہے اور دونوں میں دو سو سال کا فاصلہ ہے۔
اب ایک سوال حل طلب رہ جاتا ہے اور وہ یہ کہ بائبل کے رو سے د
b
22:41.
258
Commentary:
Talut or Gideon was able to defeat Jalut or the Midianites and curb their rising spirits, but their crushing defeat to which the verse refers as the killing of Jalut came in the time of David about two hundred years afterwards. This is why, whereas the defeat of Jalut by Talut has been spoken of by the Quran as ھزم i.e. routing, the complete crushing of their power has been referred to by the world قتل i.e. killing. The Bible speaks of the man defeated by David as Goliath (1 Sam. 17:4), which is similar to Jalut. Probably the attributive name given by the Quran to the people was also borne by their leader in the time of David.
The last clause of the verse, i.e. and had it not been for Allah’s repelling men, some of them by the others, the earth would have become filled with disorder, gives, in a nutshell, the whole philosophy of all wars of truth and justice. War should be resorted to only as a means of checking disorder and restoring peace, and not for creating disorder and breaking peace. The clause also serves as a criterion between Muslims and their adversaries and beautifully points to the party destined for final victory in the struggle.
c
22:41.
312
Talut or Gideon was able to defeat Jalut or the Midianites but their overwhelming defeat to which the verse refers as the killing of Jalut came in the time of David about two hundred years afterwards. The Bible speaks of the man defeated by David as Goliath (1 Sam. 17: 4), which is similar to Jalut. Probably, the attributive name given by the Qur’an to the people was also borne by their leader in the time of David.
313
These words give in a nutshell the whole philosophy of all wars of truth and justice. War should be resorted to only as a means of checking disorder and restoring peace and not for creating disorder and breaking peace and depriving weak nations of freedom.
تِلْكَ ءَايَٰتُ ٱللَّهِ نَتْلُوهَا عَلَيْكَ بِٱلْحَقِّ ۚ وَإِنَّكَ لَمِنَ ٱلْمُرْسَلِينَ
Commentary:
The story of Talut, Jalut and David has been fittingly concluded by God with the verse under comment to point out that these incidents have been referred to by the Quran not by way of telling a story but as divine signs in order to hint that the Prophet of Islam, being also a Messenger of God, is sure to receive at least the same help and succour as was received by His Messengers of yore.
259
Commentary:
The story of Talut, Jalut and David has been fittingly concluded by God with the verse under comment to point out that these incidents have been referred to by the Quran not by way of telling a story but as divine signs in order to hint that the Prophet of Islam, being also a Messenger of God, is sure to receive at least the same help and succour as was received by His Messengers of yore.